^ 


Frederick  Slate 
Professor  of  Physics 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/firststepsinlatiOOIeigricli 


FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIX 


COMPLETE    COURSE    IIST    LATIIsT   EOE 
QUE    YEAR, 


BASED   ON 


MATERIAL    DRAWN   FROM    CESAR'S    COMMENTARIES, 

WITH  EXERCISES   FOR  SIGHT-READING,    AND   A 

COURSE  OF  ELEMENTARY  LATIN  READING. 


BY 

R.    F.   LEIGHTON,    Ph.D.  (Lips.), 

AUTHOR  OF   CRITICAL   HISTORY   OF   CICERO'S    EPISTULAE    AD    FAMILIARES,   HISTORY 
OF  ROME,   LATIN   LESSONS,   GREEK  LESSONS,   ETC. 


BOSTON: 
PUBLISHED   BY  GIIS^X   &  COMPANy, 

1886. 


ILOf 


Copyright,  1885, 
By  R.  F.  Leighton. 


J.  S.  CusHiNG  &  Co.,  Printers,  Boston,  Mass. 


PEE  FACE. 


THE  aim  of  this  book  is  to  furnish  pupils  who  have  given  little 
or  no  attention  to  the  study  of  English  grammar  a  complete 
course  in  Latin  for  one  year. 

The  book  opens  with  a  short  and  easy  review  of  English  gram- 
mar. In  the  lessons,  the  changes  in  the  forms,  uses,  and  relations 
of  words  are  explained  and  illustrated,  so  far  as  is  practicable, 
from  English,  before  introducing  the  Latin  forms  and  construc- 
.  tions.  In  order  to  avoid  or  to  lessen  the  bewilderment  usually 
produced  in  the  mind  of  the  young  beginner  by  the  use  of  a 
complete  Latin  grammar,  everything  not  essential  to  the  structure 
of  a  simple  sentence  has,  at  first,  been  carefully  excluded.  In 
short,  no  effort  has  been  spared  to  smooth  the  way  for  the 
beginner,  and  to  prepare  him  for  the  intelligent  reading  of  Caesar 
or  of  any  of  the  less  difficult  Latin  authors. 

Much  care  and  study  have  been  expended  on  the  order  and 
arrangement  of  the  lessons,  especially  in  the  earlier  part,  aiming 
mainly  at  two  things :  First,  to  introduce  very  early  in  the  course 
the  simple  verb-forms,  which  are  easier  than  the  nouns  and  open 
the  way  to  a  wide  range  of  expression ;  and,  secondly,  to  give  not 
bare  words  and  their  inflections,  but  sentences  from  the  start,  with 
both  questions  and  answers,  in  natural  and  easy  succession.  The 
vocabularies  at  the  head  of  each  lesson  and  the  exercises  for  trans- 
lation, both  Latin  and  English,  will  afford  abundant  material  for 
drill  on  the  forms.  The  teacher,  however,  will  find  it  an  excellent 
oral  exercise  to  combine  these  words  into  new  sentences  (both 
Latin  and  English),  requiring  the  pupil  to  give  the  translation. 
»Tlie  first  associations  with  any  language,  especially  when  learned 
by  the  young,  should  be  such  as  to  make  it  as  nearly  as  possible  a 
living  tongue;  the  scientific  study  of  it  should  follow,  not  go 
before,  some  elementary  knowledge  of  what  it  is  in  actual  speech. 
I  do  not  wish  to  be  understood  as  advocating  the  neglect  of  syntax 


984579 


IV  PREFACE. 


or  of  etymology,  but  simply  as  urging  that  the  time  often  given  to 
parsing  and  memorizing  and  repeating  formulas,  ^vhich  my  experi- 
ence has  taught  me  help  but  little  in  the  mastery  of  the  language, 
can  be  much  more  profitably  employed  in  the  oral  work  just  men- 
tioned. The  aim,  of  course,  is  to  teach  the  pupil  to  read  and  write 
Latin ;  but  may  not  this  l)e  accomplished  more  expeditiously  and 
pleasantly  by  making  the  language  alive,  —  by  teaching  pupils  to 
speak,  write,  and  read  Latin  as  they  are  taught  to  speak,  write,  and 
read  a  modern  language?  A  German  university  student,  if  the 
classics  be  his  specialty,  learns  not  only  to  read  and  write  Latin, 
but  even  to  speak  it.  If  Latin  is  to  maintain  its  present  high 
place  in  our  courses  of  study,  it  must  offer  something  better  than 
mere  mental  training  or  grammatical  drill ;  it  must  introduce  the 
student  to  the  priceless  treasures  of  art  and  literature  which 
the  llomans  gathered  from  the  ancient  world,  and  which,  trans- 
fusing with  their  own  genius,  they  transmitted  to  coming  ages. 
This  work  can  be  done  in  no  way  better  than  by  teaching  Latin 
as  a  living  languaye.  Is  it  not  time  that  some  one  of  our  colleges 
or  universities  should  offer  opportunities  for  students  to  acquire 
a  speaking  knoicledge  of  the  Latin  language  ? 

For  those  who  prefer  the  English  method  of  pronunciation,  a 
few  simple  rules  have  been  given.  The  so-called  Roman  method, 
which  is  a  very  near  approach  to  the  ancient  pronunciation,  is  now 
adopted  by  many  of  our  leading  colleges  and  high  schools.  Great 
pains  have  been  taken  in  these  lessons  to  teach  the  euphonic 
changes  that  occur  in  verbs  in  the  formation  of  the  pei-fect  and 
participial  stems.  A  thorough  knowledge  of  the  pJionetic  value  of 
the  letters  of  the  Roman  alphabet  will  help  the  student  through  most 
of  these  difficulties.  This  is  (piite  aside  from  the  question  of  j)ro- 
nunciation,  which  must,  after  all,  be  governed  by  the  prevailing- 
usage.  The  quantity  of  syllables,  except  final  syllables  that  are 
short,  and  the  final  o  of  the  first  person  present  indicative  of  verbs, 
has  been  carefully  marked,  in  order  to  secure  accuracy  of  pronun- 
ciation ;  and,  if  a  serious  attempt  is  made  to  pronounce  according 
to  the  Roman  method,  the  pupil's  ear  should  be  trained  to  it  from 
the  start. 

In  enumerating  the  principal  parts  of  verbs,  I  have  Ventured  to 
deviate  so  far  from  common  usage  as  to  substitute  in  place  of  the 
so-called  supine  tJie  neuter  (f  the  j^erfect  participle.     The  supine  in 


PKEFACE. 


-urn,  called  by  many  grammarians  one  of  the  principal  parts  of  the 
verb,  belongs,  in  fact,  to  only  about  250  Latin  verbs;  then,  again, 
•those  verbs  that  are  invariably  intransitive  have  the  perfect  parti- 
ciple in  the  neuter  gender  only.  This  part,  then,  called  in  the 
dictionaries  the  supine  in  -um,  nmst,  in  most  cases,  be  the  neuter  of 
tlie  perfect  participle ;  and  1  have  ventured,  in  the  enumeration  of 
the  principal  parts  of  the  verb,  to  give  it  this  name,  and  also  to 
substitute,  as  yani9ek  and  other  grannnarians  have  done,  in  place 
of  supine  stem,  the  more  correct  term  jmriiclpial  stem.  The  retention 
of  the  neuter  of  the  perfect  participle,  in  enumerating  the  principal 
parts  of  the  verb,  instead  of  the  masculine,  is  of  importance  fi-om 
the  fact  just  mentioned  in  regard  to  intransitive  verbs,  and  also 
because  it  can  be  made  to  conform  easily  to  the  present  usage  of 
our  dictionaries. 

The  words  in  the  short  vocabularies  at  the  beginning  of  the 
lessons,  as  well  as  the  examples  to  illustrate  the  rules  of  syntax, 
are  mostly  drawn  from  the  first  five  chapters  of  Caesar's  Gallic 
War.  These  vocabularies  should  be  thoroughly  connnitted  to 
memory.  The  practice  of  selecting  examples  from  authors  of 
different  periods  and  modes  of  expression  tends,  as  it  seems  to  me, 
rather  to  perplex  young  pupils  than  to  give  them  definite  ideas  of 
the  structure  and  formation  of  a  Latin  sentence.  Xo  effort  is 
made  in  these  vocabularies  to  teach  the  derivation  of  words;  but,  in 
the  general  vocabulary  at  the  close  of  the  book,  the  prefixes,  stems, 
and  endings  of  the  words  have  been  carefully  indicated.  In  the 
chapter  on  the  formation  of  words,  attention  is  mainly  confined  to 
the  formation  of  those  words  that  tlie  pupil  can  easily  under- 
stand, and  that  can  be  made  of  service  to  him  while  studying  these 
lessons. 

Exercises  for  sight-reading  have  been  introduced  early  in  the 
course.  The  lesson  read  at  sight  can  be  assigned  as  the  regular 
lesson  of  the  next  day,  and  made  to  serve  as  the  basis  for  addi- 
tional drill  in  syntax  and  etymology.  On  the  third  day,  the  pupil 
should  be  required  to  translate  the  same  lesson,  as  a  review  exer- 
cise, into  clear  and  accurate  English,  absolutely  disregarding  the 
literal  construction  of  the  words  and  sentences.  These  exercises 
will  also  afford  ample  means  for  practice  in  pronouncing  Latin, 
which  is  best  acquired  in  reading  connected  sentences,  as  is  the 
case  in  a  modern  language.     But  in  order  to  read  Latin  easily  and 


VI  PREFACE. 


well,  the  oral  practice,  which  I  liave  mentioned,  will  he  found  a 
valuable  and  almost  indispensable  aid. 

My  aim  has  been  to  introduce  the  pupil,  by  the  aid  of  eas\^ 
examples,  to  the  correct  use  of  words  and  to  the  chief  principles  of 
syntax.  When  these  examples  have  been  studied,  and  the  rules  to 
be  derived  from  them  are  thoroughly  understood,  the  exercises 
that  follow,  both  Latin  and  English,  will  be  found  sufficient  to  fix 
these  principles  in  the  memory.  It  is  important,  in  fact  indispen- 
sable to  thoroughness,  for  the  pupil  to  keep  up  the  work  of  com- 
position. If  the  exercises  to  be  turned  into  Latin  are  too  numerous, 
then  a  part  of  them  can  be  omitted  until  the  review;  but  some 
writing  in  Latin  should  be  done  every  day.     , 

The  book  may  seem  to  some  teachers  to  be  too  large  for  begin- 
ners. But  I  have  endeavored  to  keep  in  view  the  needs  of  young- 
pupils,  and  liave  thought  it  better  to  give  too  much  explanation 
rather  than  not  enough.  Then,  again,  the  numerous  examples;  the 
explanatory  notes ;  the  frequent  illustration  of  Latin  idioms  by 
reference  to  English;  the  manner  in  wliich  the  paradigms  are  dis- 
played ;  and  the  adjustment  of  the  type,  by  which  the  pupil  can 
learn  not  only  the  leading  topics  of  the  page,  but  also  the  relative 
importance  of  the  various  rules,  remarks,  and  observations,  have 
all  necessarily  added  to  the  size  of  the  book,  but  they  will  all,  it 
is  hoped,  be  found  helpful  to  the  pupil. 

My  acknowledgments  are  due  to  several  of  our  best  teachers, 
wlio  have  generously  aided  me  by  their  counsel  in  the  plan  and  in 
the  numerous  details  of  the  book.  The  entire  work,  while  going 
through  the  press,  has  received,  in  addition,  the  valuable  revision 
and  oversight  of  George  AV.  Collokd,  Professor  of  Latin  in  the 
Collegiate  axd  Polytechnic  Institute,  Brooklyn ;  of  Caskie 
Harrison,  sometime  Professor  of  Ancient  Languages  in  the 
University  of  the  South,  now  one  of  the  Principals  of  the 
Brooklyn  Latin  School,  to  whom  I  am  especially  indebted  for 
many  valuable  suggestions  in  the  revision  of  the  chapters  on  syntax ; 
D.  A.  Kennedy,  Dearborn-jNIorgan  School,  Orange,  N.  J. ; 
and   of   ^Miss   C.  T.  Davis,  Professor  of   Latin   in  the   Packer 

Collegiate  Institute. 

R.  F.  L. 
Brooklyn,  N.Y., 

September,  1885. 


CONTENTS. 


LESSONS.  PAGES. 

/  Review  of  English  Grammar 1-20 

Intro-    )  gynopsis  for  Review 20 

DUCTORY  )  ,.   ^       .      ^ 

C  Ongm  of  Latm  Language 21 

I.  Alphabet;  Classification  of  Letters 23-27 

II.  Pronunciation;  Syllabication;  Quantity;  Accent 27-36 

VII.-VIII.  Latin  Verb  and  Conjugation 30-41 

IX.-X.  First  Conjugation 41-45 

XL  Latin  Nouns  and  Declension 46-50 

--     XII.  First  Declension 51-53 

XIII.  Subject  and  Predicate ;  Agreement  of  Verbs  and  Subject- 

Nominative  53-55 

XIV.  Subject  and  Object ;  Direct  Object 55-57 

XV.-XVII.  Second  Declension  ;  Appositive  and  Genitive  with  Nouns ; 

Dative  with  Transitive  Verbs 57-64 

XVIII.  Prepositions 64-65 

XIX.-XX.  Adjectives;  First  and  Second  Declension;  Agreement  of 

Adjectives 06-71 

XXL-XXII.  First  Conjugation ;  Active  Voice  ;  Imperative  Mode ; 

Questions  ;  Vocative 71-76 

XXIII.-XXXI.   Third   Declension;    Rules  of   Position;    Rules  of 

Gender 76-97 

XXXI.  Ablative  of  Cause,  Manner,  Means,  and  Instrument 97-99 

XXXII.  Subject  and  Copula;  Predicate  Noun;  Predicate  Adjec- 
tive   99-102 

XXXIII.  Indicative  of  sum ;  Predicate  Genitive 102-104 

XXXIV .-XXXV.   Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension 105-110 

XXXVI.-XXXVIII.  Comparison  of  Adjectives  ;  Ablative  with  Com- 
paratives;    Genitive    and    Dative    with    Adjectives; 

Irregular  and  Defective  Comparison 110-118 

XXXIX.  Uses  of  Adverbs ;  First  Conjugation ;  Voices  of  Verbs .  .  119-122 

XL.  Formation,  Classification,  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs,  122-125 

XLI.  First  Conjugation,  continued 126-129 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 


LESSONS.  PAGES. 

XLII.  Second  Conjugation ;  Ablative  of  Agent 129-132 

XLIII.-XLV.  Second  Conjugation,  continued ;   Stems 132-139 

XLVI.  Fourth  Declension 140-141 

XL VII.  Fifth  Declension 142-143 

XLVIII.-LI.  Third  Conjugation;  Laws  of  Euphony;  Ablative  of 

Accompaniment ;  Two  Accusatives 144-157 

LII.-LV.  Fourth  Conjugation;  Two  Accusatives  of  the  Same 
Person  and  Thing ;  Subjective,  Possessive,  and  Ob- 
jective Genitive ;    Dative  wdth   Intransitive  Verbs ; 

Accusative  and  Ablative  of  Time 157-167 

LVI.  Verbs  in  -io 108 

LVII.  Uses  of  the  Dative :  Dative  of  Advajitage  and  Disad- 
vantage, Dative  of  Possessor,  Dative  of  Apparent 
Agent,  Dative  of  Ileference,  and  Dative  of  Purpose 

or  End 169-171 

LVIII.  Prepositions ;  Dative  with  Compounds 171-174 

LIX.  Classes  of  Conjunctions 175-177 

LX.  Genitives  in  -ius;  Imperative  Mode,  Active  Voice. . .  .177-180 
LXI.  Numerals;  Accusative  of  Time  and  Space;  Ablative 

of  Difference 180-185 

LXII.  Imperative  Passive  of  the  Four  Conjugations;   Place 

Where 186-189 

LXIII.  Classification  of  Sentences ;    Analysis  of  Simple  Sen- 
tences  ■ 189-192 

LXIV.-LXIX.  Pronouns  :  Personal,  Reflexive,  Possessive,  Demon- 
strative ;  Partitive  Genitive;  Determinatives;  Rela- 
tives ;  Agreement  of  Relatives,  Interrogatives,  and 

Indefinites 192-209 

LXX.  Uses  of  the  Ablative:  Ablative  Proper;  Instrumental 
Ablative;  Locative;  Separation,  Cause,  etc.;  Perfect 

Participles  denoting  jiarenfxuje,  etc 209-211 

LXXI.  Reading  Latin  at  Sight 211-212 

LXX  11.  Infinitive  Mode ;  Exercises  for  Sight-Reading 213-216 

LXXIII.  Infinitive  and  Subject-Accusative;  Complementary  In- 
finitive ;  Exercises  for  Sight-Reading 216-219 

LXXIV.  Participles ;  Ablative  Absolute ;  Exercises  for  Sight- 
Reading 219-225 

LXXV.  Gerund  and  Gerundive;  Exercises  for  Sight-Reading.  .225-230 
LXXVI.  Inflection  and  Syntax  of  Supines ;  Exercises  for  Sight- 
Reading 231-233 


CONTENTS.  IX 


LKSSOMS.  PAGES. 

LXXVII.  Locative  :  Names  of  Places;  Place  from  which;  Place 

;'  in  which,  etc 234-239 

LXXVIIl.-LXXXIII.    Subjunctive  Mode  ;  Subjunctive  of  sum  ; 

Dative  of  Possessor;  Subjunctive  of  S.mo 230-250 

LXXXII.  Subjunctive  in  Independent  Sentences  :  Optative,  Hor- 
tatory  Deliberative,  Potential,  Concessive 248-250 

LXXXIIL-LXXXIV.     Deponent   Verbs    of    First   Conjugation; 

Ablative  with  Deponents 250-255 

LXXXIV.  ])eponent  Verbs  of  the  Four  Conjugations ;  Semi- 
Deponents 253-250 

LXXXV.  Periphrastic  Conjugations ;  Dative  of  Agent 256-250 

LXXXVI.  Table  of  the  Four  Conjugations 250-208 

LXXXVII,  Genitive  and  Ablative  of  Quality  ;  Exercises  for  Siglit- 

Eeading 268-270 

LXXXVIII.-XCIII,  Irregular  Verbs:  possum,  prosum ;  v61o, 
nolo,  malo ;  f 6ro ;  Ablative  of  Specification  ;  Abla- 
tive of  Difference;  eo;  6do;  Ablative  and  Genitive 

of  Price;  fio 270-285 

XCIII.  Defective  Verbs ;  Instrumental  Ablative ;  Ablative  of 
Measure ;  Ablative  of  Distance ;  Ablative  of  Ma- 
terial; dpus  and  usus;  praeditus;  Ablative  of 
Manner ;  Ablative  of  Accompaniment ;  Ablative  of 
Characteristic ;    Tabular  View  of  the   Uses   of  the 

Ablative 285-200 

XCIV.  Impersonal  Verbs  ;  Genitive  with  Verbs 291-206 

XCV.  Classification    of   Dependent    Clauses ;    Exercises  for 

Sight-Keading 206-209 

XCVI.  Tenses  in  Dependent  Clauses,  Primary  and  Secondary; 
Sequence  in  Consecutive  Clauses  (322.  Obs.);  after 

Perfect  Infinitive  (350.  2)  299-305 

XCVII.  Subjunctive  in  Dependent  Clauses: 

1.  Final  Clauses;    Object  Clauses;    Verbs  of  Hindering, 

Verbs  of  Fearing,  etc 306-309 

2.  Consecutive  Clauses  and  their  Uses ;  Exception  in  the 

Sequence  of  Tenses  (see  322.  Obs.) ;  Relative  Clauses 

of  Result 309-314 

3.  Conditional  Sentences  and  their  Classification  ;   Rules 

for  Sequence  of  Tenses  not  Applicable  (319.  Obs.); 
Uses  of  dum,  m6do,  and  dummSdo  in  Conditional 
Clauses  ;  Disguised  Conditions 314-320 


CONTENTS. 


LESSONS.  PAGES. 

4.  Comparative  Clauses  with  Indicative  and  Subjunctive,  320-321 

5.  Concessive  Clauses 321-323 

6.  Causal  Clauses 323-325 

7.  Temporal  Clauses :  Contemporaneous  Action  with  dum, 

donee,  quoad ;  Subsequent  Action  with  antSquam 
and  priusquam;  Construction  of  cum:  (1)  cum 
inversum,  (2)  Iterative  use  of  cum,  (3)  cum  His- 
torical, (4)  Causal  and  Concessive  cum 325-332 

8.  Substantive  Clauses  and  their  Classification 333-337 

9.  Interrogative  Clauses:    Rhetorical  Questions,   Direct 

Questions,  Double  Questions,  Indirect  Questions,  De- 
pendent Double  Questions,  Questions  and  Answers,  337-341 
XCVIII.  Indirect  Discourse;  Infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse; 
Tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse ;  Sequence  of  Tenses 
after  other  Modes  ;  Sequence  of  Tenses  after  an 
Infinitive  or  a  Participle ;  Reflexive  Pronouns ;  Pro- 
nouns in  Indirect  Discourse ;  Conditional  Sentences 
in  Indirect  Discourse ;  Interrogative  Sentences  in 
Indirect  Discourse  ;  Imperative  Sentences  in  Indirect 

Discourse 342-355 

XCIX.  Relative  Clauses :  Simple  Relative  Clauses ;  Relative 
Clauses  introducing  purpose,  result,  condition,  cause, 
concession ;  Indefinite  Relative  ;  Relative  Clauses  in 
Indirect  Discourse 355-358 

Intermediate  (or  Parenthetic)  Clauses;   Attraction  of 

Mode 358-359 

Partial  Indirect  Discourse 359-362 


Miscellaneous  Exercises 363-369 

Summary  of  Rules  of  Syntax 370-381 

Fables 382-383 

Life  of  Cesar 383-388 

The  Helvetian  War,  from  "Woodford's  Epitome  of  Cesar,"  388-397 

Notes 398-418 

Sketch  of  Cesar's  Life 402-406 

Index 419-431 

Latin-English  Vocabulary • 1-57 

English-Latin  Vocabulary  58-76 


INTRODUCTION. 

LESSON    I. 
PAETS    OF    SPEECH    IN    ENGLISH. 

NOUNS. -PRONOUNS.-ADJECTIVES. 

Observation.  In  the  study  of  English  grammar,  one  of  the 
first  things  the  pupil  has  to  do  is  to  classify  and  name  the  various 
words  that  he  meets  in  his  exercises.  He  does  this  in  the  same 
manner  that  one  might  pick  out,  sort,  and  group  objects  of  any 
kind :  viz.,  by  noting  the  points  in  which  they  resemble  one  an- 
other. For  example,  we  may,  from  certain  resemblances  in  form 
and  structure,  select  all  trees  of  a  certain  kind,  and  call  them 
maples;  from  other  resemblances,  we  should  get  another  class, 
called  oaks ;  and  still  another  class,  called  beeches.  Then  we  may 
study  each  class,  as  the  oak,  and  learn  all  that  is  perhaps  necessary 
to  know  of  the  numerous  individuals  that  compose  the  class.  In 
the  same  manner,  we  may  study  and  classify  words.  Noticing  the 
various  ways  the  different  w^ords  are  used  in  sentences,  we  sort 
them  out,  or  group  them,  into  eight  classes,  which  are  called  Parts 
OF  Speech.  Those  words  that  name  objects  are  called  Nouns,  from 
the  Latin  word  nomen,  which  means  a  name.  But  we  soon  learn 
that  we  cannot  talk  or  say  anything  about  the  noun  without  using 
another  kind  of  word,  called  Verb,  from  the  Latin  verbum,  a 
word.  When  a  noun  and  a  verb  are  combined  so  as  to  express  a 
thought,  i.e.  so  as  to  make  sense,  then  a  sentence  (Lat.  sententia) 
is  formed ;  as,  — 

Trees  grow.      Boys  run.      Time  Jlies. 

PRONOUNS. 

Charles  went  to  Rome  with  his  mother,  and  he  came  back  ivithout 
her.  In  this  sentence  we  make  use  of  three  little  words,  called 
Pronouns.  They  are  his,  he,  and  her.  Without  these  words,  we 
should  be  compelled  to  repeat  the  nouns,  and  to  say :  Charles  ivent 
to  Rome  with  Charles's  mother,  and  Charles  came  hack  without 
Charles's  mother. 


INI^RODUCTION. 


1.  A  Noun  is  the  name  of  anything,  as,  a  person,  place,  or 
thing;  as,  hoy,  house,  man,  tree,  city. 

2.  A  Pronoun  is  a  word  used  for  a  noun ;  as,  — 

Can  you  tell  me  zvho  wrote  the  line? 

Obs.  We  have  stated  that  the  words  of  our  language  may  ])e 
divided  into  eight  classes,  or  parts,  of  speech.  AVhen  we  examine 
these  parts  of  speech,  we  shall  soon  find  it  necessary  to  divide  some 
of  the  classes  into  other  classes.  For  example,  the  word  ciiy  may 
mean  any  city,  i.e.  it  is  a  name  common  to  the  whole  class ;  while 
the  word  Boston  is  a  proper,  or  particulcu;  name  of  an  individual  of 
this  class.  We  may,  therefore,  subdivide  nouns  into  common  and 
proper.  If  we  notice  the  use  of  nouns  further,  we  sliall  see  that 
they  undergo  certain  changes  in  form,  meaning,  and  use;  for  ex- 
ample, the  tree  grows,  and  the  trees  groiv.  Here  we  notice  the  word 
tree  changes  its  foi'in  by  assuming  s ;  this  change,  or  modification, 
in  the  form  and  meaning  of  the  noun,  tree,  is  called  Number.  'J'he 
word  tree,  denoting  one,  is  in  tlie  singular  number ;  and  the  woi-d 
trees,  denoting  more  than  one,  is  in  the  plural  number.  Let  us  now 
examine  the  following  words  :  — 

1.  The  lion  is  strong.  5.  We  praise  the  author. 

2.  The  lioness  is  strong.  6.  I,  the  author,  have  written. 

3.  The  author  writes.  7.  Author,  hear  thou. 

4.  Tlie  author's  book  is  read.  8.  We  call  the  author. 

Obs.  In  Ex.  1  the  pupil  will  notice  that  the  word  lion  denotes  a 
male ,  in  Ex.  2  this  word  has  been  changed,  or  modified,  in  form, 
and  now  denotes  a  female.  This  modification  of  the  noun  to 
denote  sex  is  called  Gender .  There  are  three  genders,  —  masculine, 
feminine,  and  neuter.^ 

The  clianges  that  we  have  noted  so  far,  affect  the  meaning  of  the 
noun  ;  there  are  two  other  changes  of  nouns  seen  in  Exs.  3-8, 
which  affect  the  uses  and  relations  of  the  words.  In  Ex.  3  the 
author  is  represented  as  doing  an  act,  viz.,  ivriting ;  in  Ex.  4,  as 
possessing  a  book;  and  in  Ex.  5,  as  receiving  an  action.  These  uses 
of  nouns  are  called  Cases.  The  use  of  the  noun  in  Ex.  3,  as  sub- 
ject, is  called  the  Nominative  Case;  its  use  in  Ex.  4,  to  denote 
possession,  is  called  I^ossessive  Case;  its  use  in  Exs.  5  and  8,  as 
object,  is  called  Objective  Case".  The  possessive  is  the  only  case 
ol  the  noun  that  is  indicated  by  a  change  in  form. 

In  Exs.  6-8  the  M^ord  author  lias  three  different  uses.  In  Ex.  G 
it  denotes  the  speaker,  in  Ex.  7  tlie  person  spoken  to,  and  in  Exs. 
5  and  8  the  person  spoken  of.  This  change  in  the  use  of  nouns  is 
called  Person.     There  are  three  persons,  —  the  frst  person,  as  in 


PARTS   OF   SPEECH. 


Ex.  0 ;  the  second  person,  denoting  the  one  spoken  to,  as  in  Ex.  7 ; 
and  the  thii-d  person,  denoting  tlie  one  spoken  of,  as  in  Ex.  8. 

MODIFICATION. 

These  changes  in  the  form,  meaning,  and  use  of  v)ords,  are  called 
Modifications. 

Nouns, 

3.  A  Noun,  or  Substantive,  is  the  name  of  anything,  as,  a  per- 
son, place,  or  thing;  as,  man,  hooh,  Boston. 

1.  A  Proper  Noun  is  the  particuhir  name  of  a  person  or 
place  ;  as,  Brooklyn,  Cicero. 

2.  A  Common  Noun  is  a  name  common  to  all  members  of 
a  class  of  objects  ;  as,  c%,  river. 

Obs.  There  are  two  classes  of  common  nouns,  collective  and 
abstract,  that  it  may  be  well  for  the  pupil  to  note:  — 

1.  A  collective  noun  is  the  name  of  a  multitude  of  objects  taken 
as  a  whole ;  as,  army,  croivd,  mob,  legion,  jury,  multitude. 

2.  An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality  considered  as  taken 
away,  or  abstracted,  from  the  object  to  which  it  belongs  ;  as,  beauty, 
virtue,  prudence,  mildness. 

4.  Nouns  are  modified  to  express  Number,  G-ender,  Person,  and 
Case. 

NUMBER. 

1 .  There  are  two  Numbers  :  the  singular .,  which  denotes 
one  thing  ;  as,  man.,  hoy. 

2.  The  plural^  which  denotes  more  than  one  ;  as,  men, 
boys. 

OENDER. 

3.  There  are  three  Genders  :  the  masculine.,  which  denotes 
the  male  sex ;  as,  Hon.,  man. 

4.  The  feminine.,  which  denotes  the  female  sex ;  as, 
lioness,  ivoman. 

5.  The  neuter,  which  denotes  neither  male  nor  female  ;  as, 
boolc. 

PERSON. 

6.  There  are  three  Persons : 

(1)   The  f7\st  person.,  which  denotes  the  one  speaking  ;  as. 

We  Americans  hurrv  too  much. 


INTRODUCTION. 


(2)  The  second 2^e'i'son,  which  denotes  the  one  spoken  to  ;  as, 

John,  bring  me  the  book. 

(3)  The  third  person^  which  denotes  the  one  spoken  of  ;  as, 

The  hoy  has  gone  to  school. 


CASE. 

7.  Case  is  the  modification  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  to  show 
its  relation  to  other  words.     There  are  four  cases  :  — 

(1)  The  Nominative,  which  usually  denotes  the  subject, 
and  answers  the  question  who?  or  what?  ;  as, 

John  speaks. 

(2)  The  Possessive,  which  denotes  possession,  and  an- 
swers the  question  whose?  ;  as, 

John's  book.     Boys'  slates. 

(3)  The  Objective,  which  denotes  the  relation  of  the  direct 
object,  or  of  a  preposition  ;  as, 

The  man  strikes  the  hoy. 

Ilis  wealth  was  gained  by  industry. 

(4)  The  Independent,  or  Case  Absolute,  which  denotes 
that  the  noun  or  pronoun  has  no  dependence  on  any  other 
word.     Its  most  common  uses  are  — 

a.  As  the  case  of  address  ;  as. 

The  fault,  dear  Brutus,  is  not  in  our  stars,  but  in 
ourselves. 

h.  With  a  participle,  forming  a  contracted  clause  ;  as. 

The  sun  having  risen,  we  departed  on  our  journey ; 
i.e.  =  when  the  sun  had  risen,  etc. 

c.  By  pleonasm,  as  when  a  noun  introduces  the  subject 
of  a  remark,  and  then  is  left  independent  of  the  rest  of  the 
sentence ;  as. 

The  Pilgrim  fathers,  where  are  they  ? 


PAliTS    OF   SPEECH. 


Pronouns, 

5.  A  pronoun  (Lat.  pro,  /o?*,  and  nomen,  name)  is  a  word 
used  for  a  noun ;  as,  he,  they. 

1.  A  Personal  Pronoun  is  one  that  denotes  by  its  form 
the  speaker,  the  one  spoken  to,  or  tlie  one  spol^en  of.  Tlie 
first  person,  as  /,  we,  is  the  speaker ;  the  second  person, 
you^  tliou^  is  the  one  spoken  to ;  the  third  person,  Ae,  sAe,  it^ 
they,  is  that  spoken  of. 

2.  A  Relative  Pronoun  is  one  that  relates  to  some  pre- 
ceding word  or  words,  called  the  antecedent,  and  connects 
clauses  ;  as,  lulio,  ivJncJi,  that. 

3.  An  Interrogative  Pronoun  is  used  to  ask  questions  ;  as, 

Who  is  that?     Which  book  liave  you ?     What  man  is  that? 

4.  An  Adjective  Pronoun  is  one  that  may  be  used  both  as 
an  adjective  or  as  a  noun ;  as,  this,  that,  each,  all. 

Adjectives. 

Obs.  The  noun  does  not  always  stand  alone;  other  words  may 
be  added  to  it  to  explain  or  modify  it ;  as,  sivift  messemjers  come. 
Here  the  word  swift  names  some  quality  possessed  by  messengers, 
and  is  said  to  modify  messengers.  It  is  called  an  adjective  (Lat. 
ad,  to,  and  jac6re,  to  throw). 

6.  An  adjective  is  a  word  used  to  modify  a  noun  or  pronoun ;  as, 
clear  friend,  red  hooh,  they  all  remained. 

1.  The  modification  of  the  adjective  to  show  diflferent 
degrees  of  quality  is  called  comparison.  There  are  three 
degrees  of  comparison  :  — 

a.  The  Positive,  which  expresses  the  simple  quality ;  as, 
dear,  good,  had. 

b.  The  Comparative,  which  expresses  a  greater  or  less 
degree  of  the  quality ;  as,  dearer,  better,  ivorse. 

c.  The  Superlative,  which  expresses  the  greatest  or  least 
degree  of  the  quality  ;  as,  dearest,  best,  worst. 

2.  Adjectives  are  compared  in  three  ways  :  (1)  Regularly, 
i.e.  by  adding  -er  to  the  positive  to  form  the  comparative,  and 
-esf  to  the  positive  to  form  the  superlative  ;  as,  high,  higher, 
highest.  (2)  By  use  of  the  adverbs  more  and  most,  or  less 
and  least,  with  the  positive  of  adjectives  of  more  than  two 


6  INTEODUCTiON. 


syllables  ;  as,  becmtiful,  more  beautiful^  most  beautiful.      (3) 
Irregularly  ;  as,  good,  better,  best. 

Obs.    The  adjectives  a,  cm,  and  fhe  are  usually  called  Articles. 

EXERCISES. 

Mention  the  parts  of  speech  and  the  cases  of  the  nouns 
and  pronouns  in  the  following  sentences :  — 

1.  Birds  fly.  2.  The  lion  was  caged.  3.  The  industrious 
boy  was  praised.  4.  These  industrious  boys  are  praised. 
5.  The  river  flows  rapidly.  6.  The  boy's  slate  is  on  the 
desk.  7.  The  boys  are  in  school.  8.  She  plaj'^s  very  nicely. 
9.  He  writes  more  rapidly  than  I  do.  10.  The  gate  of  the 
palace  opens.  11.  The  house  that  you  saw  is  sold.  12.  Tell 
me  what  you  did.  13.  This  is  the  man  who  called  on  you. 
14.  There  is  no  terror,  Cassius,  in  3'our  threats.  15.  The 
treaty  being  concluded,  the  council  was  dissolved. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

Write  a  common  noun.  Write  the  jilural  of  this  noun.  Write  tlie 
possessive  singular  and  plural.  Write  the  singular  of  six  nouns ;  the 
plural  of  the  same.  Make  a  rule  for  forming  the  plural  of  nouns. 
Write  the  possessive  case  of  each  noun.  Make  a  rule  for  forming  the 
possessive  case.  Write  the  possessive  plural.  Write  a  pronoun.  Wliat 
is  a  pronoun  ?  Show  how  pronouns  are  used.  AVrite  all  the  personal 
pronouns.  Write  a  noun  and  prefix  an  adjective ;  compare  tliis  adjec- 
tive. In  how  many  ways  may  adjectives  he  compared  ?  What  class 
of  adjectives  are  usually  compared  by  more  and  most  ? 


LESSON    II. 

PAETS     OF     SPEECH    IN    ENGLISH. 

VERBS    AND    THEIR    MODIFICATIONS. 

Obs.  If  we  say  the  hoy  strikes,  the  word  strikes  expresses  the 
act  done  by  the  boy,  —  or  is,  as  it  is  called,  a  Verb.  Some  other 
word,  however,  is  necessary  in  order  to  complete  the  meaning ; 
adding  the  word  hook,  we  have  the  hoy  strikes  the  hook,  the  book 
being  the  object  that  receives  the  action,  which  passes  over  from 


PARTS    OF    SPEECH. 


the  doer.  Verbs  that  represent  the  action  as  passing  over  from  the 
subject^  or  doer  oh"  the  action,  to  the  object,  or  receiver  of  the  action, 
are  called  Transitive  Veuhs  (Lat.  trans,  across,  and  eo,  r/o). 
In  the  sentence,  the  boy  sleeps,  the  action  does  not  j)ass  over  to  an 
object ;  but  the  verb  sleeps  expresses  only  being  or  state,  and  is 
called  an  Intransitive  Verb. 

The  hoy  called  his  companion.  Here  called  represents  the  action 
as  having  taken  place  in  past  time ;  and,  as  tense  means  time,  the 
verb  is  said  to  be  in  past  time,  or  past  tense.  Notice  further  that 
the  past  tense  of  called  is  formed  by  adding  -ed  to  call.  All  verbs 
that  form  their  past  tense  (and  perfect  participle)  in  this  way  are 
called  Regi:lar  Verbs  (Lat.  regula,  pule,  these  parts  being  formed 
according  to  a  uniform  rule). 

7.  A  verb  is  a  word  that  asserts  action,  being,  or  state  of  being ; 
as,  sleep,  am,  strike. 

8.  Verbs  are  classified,  according  to  their  meaning,  as  — 

1.  Transitive  Verbs,  which  require  an  object;  as, 

The  man  strlhes  the  tcdde. 

2.  Intransitive  Verbs,  which  do  not  require  an  object ;  as, 

The  horse  7'uns. 

9.  Verbs  are  classified,  according  to  their  form,  as  regular 
and  irregular. 

1.  A  Regular  Verb  is  one  that  forius  its  past  tense  and 
past  participle  by  adding  -d  or  -ed  to  the  present ;  as,  ?ove, 
loved ^  loved. 

2.  An  Irregular  Verb  is  one  that  does  not  form  its  past 
tense  and  past  participle  by  adding  -rZ  or  -ed  to  the  present ; 
as,  teach ^  taught^  tcmglit. 

10.  Some  verbs  are  found  only  in  the  third  person  singu- 
lar. They  have  no  personal  subject,  and  are  therefore  called 
Impersonal  Verbs  ;  as,  it  rains. 

11.  Defective  Verbs  want  certain  parts ;  as,  can^  ought, 
shall. 

12.  An  Auxiliary  Verb  (Lat.  auxilium,  aid)  is  one  used  to 
aid  in  the  conjugation  of  other  verbs  ;  as  shall  in  the  sentence, 


The  man  shall  tell  his  story. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Modifications  of  Verbs. 

MODE. 

Obs.  1.  When  I  say  the  man  strikes,  I  assert  striking  as  a  fact. 
The  mo/n  may  strike ;  in  this  sentence  I  do  not  assert  the  action  as 
a  fact,  but  as  possible.  Again,  if  the  man  strike,  he  will  he  sorry : 
1  now  assert  the  action,  not  as  an  actual  fact,  but  as  a  condition  oi 
the  man's  being  sorry.  I  can  also  say,  7nan,  strike  !  but  I  do  not 
assert  that  the  man  does  actually  strike,  but  simply  command  him 
to  strike.  The  action  expressed  by  the  verb  strike  has  been  asserted 
\wfour  different  ways,  or  modes.  The  first  is  called  the  Indicative 
Mode  ;  the  second,  the  Potential  Mode  ;  the  third,  the  Sub- 
.jiiNCTiVE  Mode  ;  the  fourth,  the  Imperative  Mode.  There  is 
another  form  of  tlie  verb,  which  expresses  action,  but  cannot  assert 
it  of  a  subject ;  as,  he  wishes  to  strike.  To  strike  expresses  the  action 
in  a  general  way,  without  confining  or  limiting  it  to  a  subject ;  it  is, 
therefore,  called  the  Infinitive  Mode,  i.e.  icithout  limit,  unlimited. 

VOICE. 

Obs.  2.  The  man  struck  the  hoy.  In  this  sentence  the  verb  struck 
shows  that  the  subject,  man,  is  the  actor ;  if  we  change  the  sen- 
tence, still  expressing  the  same  idea,  to  the  hoy  was  struck  hy  the  man, 
then  the  verli,  rcas  struck,  shows  that  the  subject  is  no  longer  the 
actor,  but  is  acted  upon,  or  receives  the  action.  This  change  in 
the  form  of  the  verb  is  called  Voice.  The  first  form  is  called 
Active  Voice;  and  tlie  second,  the  Passive  Voice. 

13.  Verl)s  are  modified  to  express  voice,  mode,  tense, 
number,  and  person. 

1.  Voice  is  that  modification  of  a  transitive  verb  which 
shows  whether  the  subject  acts  or  is  acted  upon.  There  are 
two  voices :  — 

a.  The  Active  Voice,  which  shows  that  the  subject  does 
the  action  ;  as. 

The  man  strikes. 

b.  The  Passive  Voice,  which  shows  that  the  subject  suffers 
the  action  ;  as. 

The  man  is  struck. 

2.  Mode  (Lat.  modus,  manner)  denotes  the  manner  of 
asserting  the  action  or  being.     There  are  five  modes  :  — 

a.  The  Indicative,  which  asserts  the  action  (or  being)  as 
a  fact,  or  inquires  after  a  fact ;  as. 

He  came.      Did  he  come  f 


I»AKTS   OF   SPEECH.  9 

h.  The  Potential,  which  asserts  power,  possibiUty,  or 
necessity  of  the  action  or  being ;  as, 

lie  mcuj  come.      lie  must  come. 

c.  The  Subjunctive,  which  asserts  the  action  or  being  as  a 
mere  condition,  supposition,  uncertainty,  or  wish;  as. 

If  you  had  come,  tliis  would  not  have  happened. 

Obs.  The  Subjunctive  mode  has  but  few  forms  now  in  com- 
mon use,  in  which  it  differs  from  the  forms  of  the  Indicative  and 
Potential ;  as, 

If  I  luere  in  your  place.     If  he  be  loved.     If  lie  love. 

d.  The  Imperative,  which  asserts  the  action  or  being  as  a 
command  or  entreaty  ;  as, 

Cojiie  thou. 

e.  The  Infinitive  (infinitivus,  unlimited ) ,  which  expresses 
the  action  or  being  in  a  general  way,  without  asserting  it  of 
any  person  or  thing  ;  as. 

He  wishes  to  go. 

That  is,  it  is  unlimited  (hence  its  name)  as  to  number  and  per- 
son. The  verb  in  the  otlier  modes  is  called  finite,  that  is,  limited 
in  number  and  person.  He  ivkhes  to  go.  To  go  does  duty  here  as 
a  verb,  expressing  action,  and  as  a  verbal  noun,  the  object  of  wishes. 


TENSE. 

Obs.  In  the  sentences  /  strike,  I  struck,  I  shall  strike,  the  mode, 
or  manner,  of  asserting  the  action  is  the  same,  but  the  time  is  dif- 
ferent. I  strike  expresses  the  action  as  present;  I  struck,  as  past; 
and  /  shall  strike,  as  future.  The  first  form  is  called  Present 
Time,  or  Present  Tense,  as  tense  means  time;  the  second,  tlie 
Past  Tense;  the  third,  the  Future  Tense.  There  are  also  three 
other  forms  of  the  verb,  asserting  the  action  as  completed  in  the 
present,  the  past,  or  the  future  :  (1)  /  have  struck;  (2)  /  had  struck; 
(8)  /  shall  have  struck.  The  first,  have  struck,  represents  tlie  action 
as  completed  at  the  present  time,  and  is  called  the  Perfect  Tense, 
or  the  Present  Perfect  ;  the  second,  had  struck,  represents  the 
action  as  completed  in  past  time,  and  is  called  the  Plurerfect 
Tense,  or  Past  Perfect  ;  the  third,  shall  have  struck,  represents 
the  action  as  to  be  completed  before  some  other  futiu'e  action,  and 
is  called  the  Future  Perfect  Tense. 


10  INTRODUCTION. 


3.  Tense  expresses  the  time  of  the  action  or  being ;   the 
time  may  be  present,  past,  oy  future.    There  are  six  tenses  :  — 

a.  The  Present  expresses  action  or  being  as  present ;  as. 

He  runs. 

b.  The  Imperfect  expresses  action  or  being  as  going  on 
in  past  time  ;  as, 

He  ivas  running. 

c.  The  Future  expresses  action  or  being  as  yet  to  come  ;  as. 

He  loill  run. 

d.  The  Perfect  expresses  action  or  being  as  completed  in 
present  time ;  as, 

He  has  run. 

e.  The  Past  Tense  (aorist,  or  historical  perfect)  expresses 
action  or  being  as  ended  in  past  time  ;  as. 

He  ran. 

f.  The  Pluperfect  expresses  action  as  ended  before  some 
other  past  action  or  being  ;  as, 

He  had  run. 

y.  The  Future  Perfect  expresses  action  or  being  to  be  com- 
pleted before  some  other  future  action  ;   as. 

He  shall  have  run. 


PERSON. 

If  we  change  the  subject  in  the  first  sentence  to  thou,  or  to  he, 
we  must  then  change  the  verb  strike  to  strikest,  or  to  strikes.  Thf  se 
changes  are  made  for  the  sake  of  agreement  between  the  subject 
and  the  verb,  —  the  verb  ending  in  -est  agrees  with  thou  in  the 
second  person,  and  the  verb  ending  in  -s  agrees  with  he  in  the  third 
person.  Both  of  these  subjects  are  singular  number ;  if  the  sub- 
ject is  plural,  the  verb  nnist  be  plural ;  as,  the  men  strike.  Hence, 
verbs  agree  with  their  subjects  in  number  and  person. 

4.  Number  and  Person  of  a  verb  are  those  modifications 
which  show  its  agreement  with  the  number  and  person  of 
the  subject ;  as, 

The  hoy  runs.      The  hoys  run. 


PARTS    OE^    SPEECH.  11 


PARTICIPLES. 

Obs.  In  the  sentence  the  sun  rising  causes  the  da//,  the  word 
risinf/,  while  not  directly  asserting  the  action  of  rising  of  the  sun, 
still  assumes  such  an  action;  causes  directly  asserts  the  action. 
AVe  may  also  say,  the  rising  sun  causes  the  day ,  but  here  rising  has 
become  an  adjective,  modifying  sun.  Hence,  the  pai'ticiple  may  be 
defined  as  that  form  of  the  verb  which  partakes  of  the  nature  of  an 
adjective,  and  expresses  the  action  as  assumed. 

14.  The  Participle  is  a  form  of  the  verb  that  partakes  of 
the  nature  of  the  verb  and  adjective.  There  are  three 
participles :  — 

1.  The  Present,  which  represents  the  action  or  being  as 
going  on  at  the  time  denoted  by  the  verb  ;  as, 

The  riveY,  foiving  from  the  mountains,  waters  the  plain. 

2.  The  Past,  which  represents  the  action  or  being  as  com- 
pleted at  the  time  denoted  by  the  verb  ;  as. 

The  soldier,  covered  with  wounds,  fell. 

3.  The  Perfect,  which  represents  the  action  or  being  as 
completed  previous  to  the  time  denoted  by  the  verb ;  as. 

Having  climhed  to  the  top  of  the  hill,  we  saw  the  beautiful 
landscape. 


EXERCISES. 

Name  the  mode,  tense,  and  voice,  of  each  of  the  following 
verbs :  — 

1.  They  sing.  13.  They  are  chosen. 

2.  They  have  sung.  14.  They  were  ruled. 

3.  I  do  fight.  15.  He  has  been  struck. 

4.  I  have  sung.  16.  We  are  blamed. 

5.  They  were  calling.  17.  You  were  being  praised. 

6.  They  will  call.  18.  You  will  be  blamed. 

7.  They  had  called.  19.  The  boy  is  called. 

8.  They  called.  20.  The  girl  has  been  called. 

9.  They  have  called.  21.  The  king  w^as  wounded. 

10.  They  are  calling.  22.  They  will  be  punished. 

11.  They  had  fought.  23.  They  had  been  punished. 

12.  They  will  have  fought.  24.  He  has  been  praised. 


12 


INTRODUCTION. 


NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  verb  ?  Write  a  sentence  containing  a  transitive  verb. 
How  are  verbs  classified  ?  Mention  the  modifications  of  verbs.  Write 
a  verb  in  the  indicative  mode.  What  is  a  participle  ?  Define  the  word. 
How  many  modes  are  there  ?     How  many  tenses  1     Define  tense. 


LESSON   III. 

PAETS    or    SPEECH    IN    ENaLISH. 


ADVERBS.- PREPOSITIONS.- CONJUNCTIONS. 
TIONS. 


INTERJEC- 


Advei'hs, 

Obs.  a  noun  and  a  verb  are  l)oth  necessary  in  order  to  form  a 
sentence.  We  have  learned  that  modifying  words  are  often  added 
to  nouns  to  explain  or  to  express  the  idea  more  clearly.  Words  are 
often  added  to  the  verb  for  the  same  purpose.  If  we  say,  the  hoy 
reads,  we  express  the  fact  in  a  general  way ;  but,  if  we  wish  to 
speak  of  the  manner  of  reading,  then  we  say,  the  hoy  reads  hadly, 
adding  the  word  hadly ;  if,  of  the  time,  we  add  the  word  noic:  the 
hoy  reads  norc :  of  the  place,  we  add  the  word  here:  the  hoy  read 
here.  We  may  join  words  to  these  modifiers,  and  say,  the  hoy  reads 
very  hadly,  tliat  is,  very  modifies  hadly ;  we  may  join  a  word  to  an 
adjective,  as,  that  book  is  very  good.  These  words  that  we  join 
with  verhs,  adjectives,  or  adrerhs,  to  modify  their  meaning,  are  called 
Adverbs  (Lat.  ad,  to,  and  verbum,  a  word,  or  verh). 

15.  An  Adverb  is  a  word  used  to  modify  verbs,  adjectives,  or 
adverbs;  as,  he  speahs  plainly ;  it  is  reinarkahly  cold 
jucatlier;   he  strihes  very  hard. 


COMPARISON. 

1.  Adverbs  are  compared  in  the  same  way  as  adjectives  ;  as, 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

sweetly 

soon 

well 

more  sweetly 

sooner 

better 

most  sweetly 

soonest 

best 

PARTS    OF    SPEECH.  13 


CLASSIFICATION    OF    ADVERBS. 

2.  Adverbs  may  express  time^  place,  manner,  cause,  or 
degree. 

a.  Adverbs  of  Time  answer  the  question,  when?  ;  as,  lately, 
yesterday. 

b.  Adverbs  of  Place  answer  the  question,  where?  ;  as,  there, 
here. 

c.  Adverbs  of  Manner  answer  the  question,  in  what  ivay?  ; 
as,  excellently,  luell. 

d.  Adverbs  of  Cause  answer  the  question,  tvhy?;  as,  why. 

e.  Adverbs  of  Degree  answer  the  question,  in  what  degree  ?  ; 
as,  too,  very. 

Prepositions. 

Obs.  Adverbs  modify  verbs,  as,  the  liorse  stands  there  ;  but  we 
may  wish  to  express  the  idea  with  more  distinctness  than  is  pos- 
sible even  with  the  use  of  an  adverb,  as,  the  horse  stands  in  his  stall. 
These  words,  in  his  stall,  standing  for  the  adverb /^ere,  are  called  a 
phrase,  and  the  word  in,  that  shows  the  relation  between  stands 
and  stall,  is  called  a  Preposition. 

16.  A  Preposition  (Lat.  prae,  before,  and  pono,  place)  shows 
the  relation  between  a  noun  or  pronoun  and  some  other  word ;  as, 
he  came  to  town;   to  die  for  one's  country. 


Conjunctions. 

Obs.  In  the  sentence  John  and  James  read,  the  two  words,  John 
and  James,  are  united  by  the  w^ord  and.  In  the  sentence  a  brave 
and  prudent  man  acts  discretely;  here  the  two  adjectives  are  con- 
nected by  and.  Again,  in  the  sentence  the  man  works  in  summer 
and  in  icinter ;  here  the  two  phrases,  in  summer  and  in  winter,  are 
connected  by  and.  The  earth  is  round,  and  no  one  doubts  it,  is  com- 
posed of  two  sentences,  or  clauses,  connected  by  and.  The  words 
that  connect  other  words  or  sentences  are  called  Conjunctions 
(Lat.  con,  together,  and  jungo,yom). 

17.  A  Conjunction  is  a  word  used  to  connect  words,  phrases,  or 
clauses. 

Conjunctions  are  — 

a.  Co-ordinate,  when  they  connect  words,  phrases,  or 
clauses  of  the  same  rank ;  as,  and,  but,  or,  nor. 


14  INTEODUCTION. 


h.  Subordinate,  when  they  connect  clauses  of  different 
rank ;   as,  z/,  because^  when. 

Interjections. 

18.  An  Interjection  is  a  word  used  to  express  sudden  emotion  or 
feeling;  as,  alas!  Oh! 

EXERCISES. 

Mention  the  parts  of  speech  in  the  following  sentences :  — 
1.  This  book  was  given  to  me.  2.  These  birds  fly  very 
swiftly.  3.  The  child  likes  to  play.  4.  The  brave  soldiers 
fell  in  battle.  5.  We  saw  a  beautiful  landscape.  6.  The 
gallant  soldier  fell,  covered  with  wounds.  7.  I  saw  the  sun 
sinking  behind  the  hills.  8.  The  Delta  of  the  Mississippi 
was  once  at  St.  Louis.  9.  They  made  Victoria  queen. 
10.  Alas  !  how  many  changes  have  occurred.  11.  Mary  and 
Elizabeth  lived  and  reigned  in  England.  12.  Give  me  the 
book.  13.  If  he  give  me  the  book,  I  shall  rejoice.  14.  If 
I  were  in  your  place,  I  would  go. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  preposition  ?  What  is  a  phrase  1  Write  a  sentence  con- 
taining an  adverb ;  expand  this  into  a  phrase.  Write  two  nouns  con- 
nected by  and ;  by  Imt.  In  tlie  sentence,  the  earth  is  round,  and  no  one 
doubts  it,  and  is  a  co-ordinate  conjunction;  but  in  the  sentence,  the 
sea,  ivhen  it  had  spent  its  fury,  became  calm,  when  is  a  subordinate 
conjunction. 


LESSON   IV. 

rOEMS    OP    THE    ENGLISH    VEEB. 

19.  The  conjugation  of  the  English  verb  in  Latin  form, 
i.e.  the  names  of  the  tenses  are  those  used  in  conjugating  a 
Latin  verb,  is  as  follows  :  — 


FORMS  OF  THE  ENGLISH  VERB. 


15 


16 


TNTKODUCTION. 


Iinpet'ative  Mode. 


Sinn.  1. 


Present  Tense. 
Plur.  1. 


2.  Love  (you  or  thou). 

3.  


2.  Love  (ye). 


Infinitive  3Iode. 


Present  Tense,  To  love.         Perfect  Tense,  To  have  loved. 


Participles. 


Present,  Loving.       Past,  Loved.       Past  Perfect,  Having  loved. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 


Indicative  3Iode, 

Present  Tense. 

Future  Tense. 

Sing.  1.  I  am  being  loved. 

Si)i(/.  1. 

I  shall  be  loved. 

2.  Thou  art  being  loved. 

2. 

Thou  wilt  be  loved. 

3.  He,  she,  or  it  is  being 

o. 

He,  she,  or  it  will  be  loved. 

loved. 

Plur.  1. 

We  shall  be  loved. 

Plur.  1.  We  are  being  loved. 

2. 

Ye  or  you  will  be  loved. 

2.  Ye  or  you  are  being  loved. 

3. 

They  will  be  loved. 

3.  They  are  being  loved. 

OK, 

Perfect  Tense. 

Si)iq.  1.  I  am  loved. 

Sing.  1. 

I  have                      1 

2.  Thou  art  loved. 

2. 

Thou  hast 

^ 

3.  He,  she,  or  it  is  loved. 

3. 

He,  she,  or  it  has 

s 

Plur.  1.  We  are  loved. 

Plur.l. 

We  have 

o 
p 

2.  Ye  or  you  are  loved. 

2. 

Ye  or  you  have 

3.  They  are  loved. 

3. 

They  have 

Lm PERFECT  Tense. 

Historical  Perfect. 

Sing.  1.  I  was 

cf 

Sing.  1. 

I  was  loved. 

2.  Thou  wast 

2. 

2. 

Thou  wast  loved. 

3.  He,  she,  or  it  was 

flp; 

3. 

He,  she,  or  it  was  loved. 

Plur.  1.  We  were 

9 

Plur.  1. 

We  were  loved. 

2.  Ye  or  you  were 

2. 

Ye  or  you  were  loved. 

3.  They  were               J 

3. 

They  were  loved. 

THE  sentp:nce. 


17 


Plupkufect  Tkn.sk.                       Futukk   1'kkkkct  Tknsk. 

Sinr/.  1,  I  had  been  loved.,. 

2.  Thou  hadst  been  loved. 

3.  He,  she,  or  it  has  been 

loved. 
Plur.  1.  We  had  been  loved. 

2.  Ye   or  you   had  been 

loved. 

3.  They  had  been  loved. 

SiiKj.  1.  I  shall  have  been  loved. 

2.  Thouwilt  have  been  loved. 

3.  He,  she,  or  it  will  have 

been  loved. 
Plur.  1.  We  shall  have  been  loved. 

2.  Ye  or  you  will  have  been 

loved. 

3.  They  will  have  been  loved. 

Imperative  Mode. 

TllKSENl 

Sbxj.  1.  

2.  Be  (you  or  thou)  loved. 

3.  

Tense. 
Plur.  1. 

2.  Be  (ye  or  you)  loved. 

3. 

Infinitive  3Iode. 

Pkks.  Tknsk,  To  be  loved.     Pres.  Pekf.  Tknse,  To  have  been  loved. 

Pai'ticijiles. 

Pkesent,  Being  loved.             Past,  Been  loved. 
Past  Pekfect,  Having  been  loved. 

1.  Conjugation  is  the  regular  arrangement  of  all  the  forms 
of  a  verb. 

Note.  Conjugate  in  the  same  manner  the  verbs  hear,  teach,  rule, 
choose,  run,  see. 


LESSON   V. 

THE    SENTENCE. 

20.  A  Sentence  is  the  expression  of  a  thought  in  words;   as, 
^ro^^  melts. 

21.  Every  sentence  has  two  parts  :  — 

1.  The  Subject/  or  that  about  which  something  is  said  ;  as, 
Birds  fly. 


18 


INTllODUCTION. 


2.  The  Predicate,  or  that  which  is  said  about  the  subject ; 

'  The  leaves  tremble. 

EXAMPLES. 


Svibject. 

Predicate. 

Birds 
Boys 
Birds 

fly. 

study, 
twitter. 

3.  The  Subject  is  alvva^^s  a  noun,  or  some  word  used  as  a 
noun.  The  subject  is  sometimes  modified  by  a  word,  or 
group  of  words,  and  the  combination  is  then  called  the 
modified.^  or  logical  svhject ;   as, 

The  cold  wind  blows. 

4.  The  Predicate  is  always  a  verb,  or  contains  a  verb. 
Tlie  predicate  may  be  modified  by  other  words,  and  the  com- 
bination is  then  called  the  niodijied,  or  logical  predicate;  as, 

The  leaves  fall  quietly. 

T).  The  verb  ma}'  be  intransitive,  and  then  the  subject 
and  verb  make  complete  sense,  and  the  predicate  contains 
nothing  but  the  verb  ;  as, 

Time  /lies. 

C).  The  verb  may  be  transitive,  and  then  an  object  is 
required  to  complete  the  sentence,  and  the  verb  and  object 
together  make  up  the  predicate  ;  as. 

The  man  sti'ikes  the  table. 

7.  The  verb  may  be  copulative^'  and  then  a  complement  is 
i-equired  to  complete  the  sentence.  The  verb  and  comple- 
ment together  make  up  the  i)redicate  ;  as, 

The  man  is  old. 

8.  The  anal3'sis  of  a  sentence  is  the  separation  of  it  into 
its  parts. 

EXAMPLE Time  flies. 

Obs.  This  is  a  sentence,  because  it  expresses  a  thought.  Time 
is  the  subject,  because  it  is  that  about  which  something  is  said ; 
flies  is  the  predicate,  because  it  says  something  of  the  subject. 


THE   SENTENCE. 


19 


The  following  method  of  analysis  will  be  found  useful  for  young 
pupils.  The  subject  is  marked  s. ;  the  predicate  is  marked 
(1)  V.I.,  i.e.  Verb  Intransitive;  (2)  v.t.  and  o.,  i.e.  A^erb  Transitive 
and  Object;  (3)  v.c.  and  c,  i.e.  Verb  Copulative  and  Comple- 
ment :  — 


s. 
Soldiers 

V.I. 

fight. 

s. 
Caesar 

V.T.                        o. 
conquers  the  Germans. 

s. 
The  river 

v.c.    c. 
is    deep. 

EXERCISES. 

Analyze  the  following  sentences  :  — 

1.  The  enemy  crossed  the  river.  2.  Columbus  discovered 
America.  3.  The  tiowers  bloom.  4.  The  flowers  are  beauti- 
ful. 5.  Gold  is  yellow.  6.  A  shepherd  watches  sheep. 
7.  Study  pays.  8.  The  boy  learns  his  lesson.  9.  The  sun 
shines  bright.  10.  The  lady  is  tall.  11.  Ripe  fruit  is 
healthful. 


NOTES     ANI>     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  subject  of  a  sentence  may  be  found  by  asking  who?  or  what? 
with  the  verb;  as,  birds  fly.  Who  or  what  fly?  Ans.  birds.  The 
predicate  may  be  found  by  asking  what?  about  the  subject;  as,  birds 
fllf.     What  about  birds  1    Ans.  They^^y, — fly  is  the  predicate. 

2.  Copulative  means  the  same  as  copula,  a  U)ik,  coupler.  It  joins,  or 
links,  the  subject  with  the  complement;  as,  s7ioiv  is  ivhite, — snoic  is  the 
subject,  is  is  the  copula,  and  white  the  complement.  There  are  several 
otlier  copulative  verbs  besides  to  be;  as,  became,  seem,  appear.  The 
adjective  standing  in  the  predicate  is  called  the  predicate  adjective,  and 
tlie  noun  is  called  the  predicate  noun. 

Define  simple  sentence.  Of  what  is  a  sentence  composed  ?  Define 
subject.  What  must  the  subject  be  ?  What  is  meant  by  copula  ? 
Classify  verbs  according  to  their  meaning.  Define  object.  What  is  a 
transitive  verb? 


20 


INTKODUCTION. 


SYNOPSIS    FOR    REVIEW. 


f  Uses 

I 

The  Noun  -{  Classes  .  .  .  , 

Modifications 

f  Uses 

I 

I  Classes  .  .  .  , 

I 

[  Modijications 

r  Uses 

Classes  .  .  .  . 


The 
Pronoun 


Verb    .  . 


Adjective 


Adverb 


Con- 
junctions 


-Modijications  - 


Uses   .... 

Modijication 
r  Classes  .  .  . 
[  Modificatiom 

)-  Classes  .  .  . 


Subject. 

Object. 

Complement. 

Principal  Word  in  a  Phrase. 

Connnon. 

Proper. 

Nuntber  ■  Singular ;  Plural. 

Gender  t  jNlasculine;  Feni.;  Neuter. 

Person:    First;  Second;  lliird. 

Case,        Nominative;   Possessive; 
Objective. 

Same  as  those  of  Nouns. 

Pei-sonal. 

Relative. 

Interrogative. 

Adjective. 

Same  as  those  of  Nouns. 

Predicate. 

Form:        Ilegidar;  Irregular. 

Meanhuj :  Transitive ;  Intransitive. 

Voice:       Active;  l\assive. 

Mode  '  Indicative  (Potential)  ;  Sub- 
junctive; Infinitive. 

Tense :  l*resent ;  Imperfect ;  Future ; 
Perfect ;  Aorist ;  I*luper- 
fect;  Future  Perfect. 

Person :     First ;  Second  ;  Third. 
^Number'  Singular;  Plural. 

Modifier ;  Complement. 

{Positive  Degree. 
Comparative  Degree. 
Superlative  Degree. 
T'ime;  Place;  Manner;  Degree;  Cause, 
r  Positive  Degree. 
■{  Comparative  Degree. 
[^Superlative  Degree. 
(  Co-ordinate. 
i  Suljordinate. 


Parts   .  . 


SIMPLE    SENTENCE. 


r  Subject. 
.  <  Predicate. 
[  Complement. 


Meaning 


Declarative. 
Interrogative. 
Imperative. 
Exclamatory. 


LATIN    LANGUAGE. 


Origin  of  Latin,  —  Tlie  Latin  language  was  spoken  at 
Rome  and  in  the  adjoining  district,  the  plain  of  Latium,  from 
which  latter  it  derives  its  name.  It  is  closely  related  to  the 
tongues  spoken  by  the  Samnites,  Sabines,  and  other  kindred 
races,  to  which  the  general  name  of  SahelUan  has  been 
given.  These  Sabellian  tribes,  on  first  entering  Italy,  settled 
along  the  mountain  ridges,  from  which  they  descended  to  the 
plains  like  streams  that  flood  and  fertilize  the  valleys.  The 
Latins,  who  settled  near  the  Tiber,  belonged  to  the  oldest 
of  these  successive  migrations ;  then  came  the  Sabines,  the 
Aequians,  Hernicans,  and  Volscians,  who  at  first  pressed 
hard  on  the  Latins,  and  hemmed  them  into  the  narrow  plain 
between  the  Tiber  and  the  Alban  hills,  but  in  course  of  time 
coalesced  with  them  and  formed  one  nation. 

Hoiv  Helated, — The  Latin,  as  well  as  the  Greek,  San- 
skrit, Teutonic,  Celtic,  and  Zend,  are  all  sister  languages, 
and  together  help  to  form  the  Indo-European  family.  The 
original  language  from  which  these  sprang  was  spoken  by 
the  progenitors  of  all  these  peoples,  who  Qnce  lived  together 
somewhere  in  Central  Asia,  and  by  successive  migrations 
peopled  India  and  P^urope,  whence  the  name  Indo-European. 
The  name  Aryan  (pronounced  dr-yan)  is  often  applied  to 
this  parent  language,  and  to  the  groups  that  have  descended 
from  it. 

TVJiere  Spoken.  —  The  conquests  of  the  Romans  caused 
the  Latin  language  to  spread,  not  only  over  Italy  and  Sicil}', 
but  over  the  greater  part  of  France  and  Spain. 


22  LATIK   LANGUAGE. 

Origin  of  the  Romance  Languages, — With  the  decay 
of  Roman  power,  German  tribes  invaded  and  settled  the 
provinces  where  Latin  had  been  spoken  ;  and  from  the  conse- 
qnent  intermingUng  of  tongnes  the  various  modern  languages 
—  Italian,  French,  Spanish,  Portuguese,  Frovengal,  Walla- 
chian,  and  Rhieto-Romanic  (or  Roumansch)  —  arose.  The 
English  language,  although  in  its  origin  and  its  most  essen- 
tial words  a  Teutonic  tongue,  being  the  successor  of  the 
Anglo-Saxon,  has  borrowed  at  different  times  nearly  half  its 
words  directly  or  indirectly  from  tlie  Latin. 

Golden  Age  of  Latin,  —  The  earliest  Latin  writings  that 
have  been  preserved  were  composed  about  two  hundred 
years  before  Christ.  The  language  ceased  to  be  spoken  in 
the  sixth  century  of  our  era.  The  best  writers,  as  C?esar, 
Cicero,  Sallust,  Vergil,  Horace,  and  Livy,  flourished  in  a 
period  —  called  the  Golden  Age  of  Latin  Literature  ^  of 
about  one  hundred  years  immediately  preceding  and  follow- 
ing the  Christian  era. 

Periods  of  Roman  Literature.  —  Roman  literature  may 
be  divided  into  tlie  following  periods  :  — 

1.  The  Pre-Historic  Period,  to  Livius  Andronicus, 
B.C.  240. 
II.  The  Archaic  Period,  from  Livius  Andronicus  to 
Cicero,  bc.  240-70. 

III.  The  Golden  Age,  b.c.  70  to  a.d.  14. 

1,  The  Ciceronian  Period. 

2.  The  Augustan  Period. 

IV.  The  Silver  Age,  a.d.  14-117. 

V.  The  Period  of  Positive  Decline  (Brass  and  Iron 
Ages),  A.D.  117  to  the  sixth  century. 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

LESSON   I. 

THE    ALPHABET. 

1.  The  Latin  alphabet  is  the  same  as  the  English, 
except  that  it  has  np  iv. 

2.  Letters  are  divided,  according  to  the  position  of 
the  vocal  organs  at  the  time  of  utterance,  into  vowels 
and  consonants. 

3.  The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u^  y.  The  vowels  may  be 
long,  short,  or  common,  i.e,  sometimes  long  and  some- 
times short.     They  are  marked  as  follows  :  — 

1.  Long aeiou 

2.  Short agidii 

3.  Common aeiou 

4.  Diphthongs  (meaning  "double  sonnd")  are  the 
union  of  two  vowels  in  one  syllable.  The  most  common 
diphthongs  are  ae^  oe,  au;  the  less  common  are  eu^  ei,  ui. 

5.  The  consonants  p,  b,  f,  d.,  c  (k^  q)^  g^  are  called 
mutes;  and  m,  n  (nasals),  r,  I  (liquids),  ^,  y,  /,  v 
(spirants),  s  (sibilant),  semi-vowels. 

6.  The  double  consonants  are  a^  (=  c^  or  ^.s)  and  z 
{ti<  or  r7.s')  ;  j  and  v  are  consonant  forms  of  /  and  ?/. 


24  FIRST  STp:rs  in  latin. 

CLASSIFICATION    OF    LETTERS.^ 
I.    Vowels, 

7.  Vowels  are  produced  when  the  vocal  organs  are  open, 
so  as  to  allow  an  uninterrupted  flow  of  vocal  sound  ;  when 
the  vocal  sound  is  interrupted,  consonants  are  produced,  Init 
no  sharp  line  separates  the  least  open  vowels  from  the  most 
open  consonants. 

8.  The  vowels  may  be  divided  according  to  their  quality 
into  — 

1.  Open a 

2.  Medial e       o 

3.  Close i      y       u 

9.  The  open  vowel  is  pronounced  like  a  in  father^  the 
mouth  being  fully  open.  Starting  with  this  sound,  and  by 
gradually  contracting  the  vocal  organs,  the  medial  vowels,  the 
close  vowels,  and  the  more  open  consonants  (like  i  or  j  =  ?/, 
1)  =  w)  are  produced ;  and  at  last  the  closure  of  the  vocal 
organs  beconies  complete  when  the  mutes  are  uttered. 

10.  e  is  a  medinl  vowel  between  open  a  and  close  i ;  o 
is  medial  between  open  a  and  close  ?/ ;  y  occurs  in  Greek 
words  only. 

Orservattox  1 .  Tlio  vowel  i  and  the  consonant  i  (often  written 
;■)  were  not  distinguished  in  form  by  the  Romans.  But  i,  com- 
bined with  a  vowel  in  tlie  same  syllable,  was  a  consonant,  and  was 
sounded  like  ?/;  as,  major  (ma-yor).     It  is  now  usually  written  /. 

Obs.  2.  The  vowel  n  and  the  consonant  u  =  r,  are  often  inter- 
changed;  as:  m6n-ui,  /  have  admmihhed ;  ama-vi,  /  have  loved; 
the  ending  -id  in  mSnui  becomes  -vi  in  amavi. 

II.   Consofiants, 

11.  Consonants  are  divided,  according  to  the  organs  of 
speech  by  which  they  are  chiefly  uttered,  into  — 

1 .  Labials       (or  lip-letters)      .  .  .  p,  b,  m,  f,  v. 

2.  Dentals      (or  teeth-letters)  .  .  .  t,  d,  n,  s. 

3.  Linguals    (or  tongue-letters)  .  .  r,  1. 

4.  Palatals     (or  palate-letters)  .  .  i,  or  j  =  y. 

5.  Gutturals  (or  throat-letters)  .  .  c  k  q,  g,  n,  h. 


thp:  alphabet. 


25 


12.  Coiisoiuints  are  divided,  according  to  the  degree  of 
bretitbiug  required  in  tlieir  utterance,  into  — 

1.  Smooth p,  t,  c  (k,  qu). 

2.  Middle b,  d,  g. 

3.  Rough f  (ph),  th,  ch. 

13.  The  following  table  shows  tlie  consonants  according 
to  the  two  classifications  mentioned  :  — 


Smooth  mutes    .... 
Middle  mutes     .... 
Rough  mutes      .... 

Labials. 

r>entals. 

Gutturals. 

P 

b 

f  (ph),  V 

t 
d 
th 

c(k^qu) 

g 
ch 

14.  Consonants  may  also  be  classified,  according  to  the 
manner  in  which  they  are  uttered  ;  as,  — 

1.  Surds'^ p,  t,  k.  c,  qu. 

2.  Sonants b,  d,  g. 

15.  The  following  table  shows  the  classification  of  con- 
sonants :  — 


Labial      .     .     . 
Dental      .     .     . 
Lingual    .     .     . 
Palatal     .     .     . 
Guttural  .     .     . 

Mutes. 

Seuil-Vowels. 

Surds. 

Sonants. 

Nasals. 

Liquids. 

Spirants. 

Sibilants. 

P 

t 

c  k  q 

b 
d 

s 

m 
n 

n" 

r,  1 

f,  V 

i,orjr=y 
h 

S,  Z 

Obs.  1.   k  is  used  only  before  a  at  the  beginning  of  a  few  words. 
Obs.  2.  q  is  used  only  before  u. 


EUPHONIC    CHANGES." 

16.  In  Latin  words,  Aowels  and  consonants  are  often 
changed  in  order  to  secure  an  easier  utterance.  These 
changes  are  called  eiqyhonw  changes. 


26  FIKST    STE1\S    IN    LATIN. 


I.    Vowel  Changes, 

17.  Vowels  fire  in  general  changed  in  the  direction  from 
the  strongest  to  the  weakest,  i.e.  following  the  vowel  scale 
on  page  24,  from  a  to  I  on  one  side,  or  from  a  to  u  on  the 
other,  but  sometimes  across  from  o  to  e.     Thus  :  — 

1.  a  changed  to  i ;  a.^,  conficio  from  con  and  facio. 

2.  i  changed  to  o;  as,  virginis  and  virgo. 

3.  e  changed  to  i;  as,  obsideo,  from  ob  and  sedeo. 

4.  a  changed  to  e ;  as,  confectum  from  con  and  factum 

5.  o  changed  to  u;  as,  corporis*^  from  corpus. 

II.   Consonant  Changes. 

18.  A  guttural  (c,  </,  q,  or  h)  before  s  unites  with  it,  form- 
ing x;  as, — 

1.  dues  —  dux  (gen,  due-is). 

2.  regs  —  rex  (gen.  reg-is). 

3.  coqusi  =  cocsi  —  coxi. 

4.  vehsi  —  vexi. 

19.  s  between  two  vowels  is  generalh'  change^d:  toyT^ks, — 

1.  corporis  from  corpus. 

2.  eram  and  ero  from  stem  es-. 

20.  d  and  t  before  s  are  dropped  or  changed  to  s  ;  as,  — 

1.  pes  for  peds  (gen.  pedis). 

2.  possum  for  potsum. 

This  change,  by  which  two  consonants  become  alike,  is 
called  assimilation  {from  ad,  fo,  and  similis,  like,  a  change 
tliat  makes  a  consonant  like  the  following  consonant). 
Assimilation  is  partial  when  the  consonant  is  adapted  to  the 
following  letter,  but  does  not  become  identical  with  it ;  as, — 

3.  scribsi  —  scripsi. 

4.  regsi  —  recsi  —  rexi. 

21.  Assimilation  is  very  common  in  the  final  consonant  of 
prepositions  compounded  with  other  words  ;  as,  — 

afffiro,  compounded  of  ad  and  fSro. 


PRONUNCIATION.  27 


NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  pupil  should  miiit  the  study  of  the  classification  of  the 
letters  for  the  present ;  the  explanation  will  be  found  convenient  for 
reference,  and  when  the  verb  is  taken  up  the  attention  of  the  pupil 
will  be  called  to  this  subject  as  explaining  most  of  the  vowel  and 
consonant  changes. 

2.  The  distinction  between  a  surd  and  a  sonant  is  the  same  as  tliat 
between  p  and  h  as  heard  in  pttd  and  had. 

3.  Before  a  guttural,  as  in  ink. 

4.  See  p.  183.  5.  102.  3.  c. 

Write  the  alphabet.  How  many  letters  has  the  Latin  alphabet  ? 
How  many  vowels  are  there  ?  Write  the  long  vowels.  Write  the 
diphthongs.     What  diphthongs  are  seldom  used? 


LESSON   11. 
PEONUNOIATION. 

22.  The  pronunciation  of  Latin  is  different  in  different 
countries.  In  the  United  States  general  usage  favors  one 
of  two  ways,  which  may  be  called  the  R.oinan  (or  Phonetic) 
and  the  English.  Whatever  method  of  pronunciation  may 
be  adopted,  the  pupil  should  be  made  thoroughly  familiar 
with  the  leading  features  of  the  Eoman  method,  wdiicli  is  a 
near  approximation  to  the  ancient  pronunciation. 

ROMAN    METHOD. 

23.  By  the  Roman  method  every  letter  has  always  the 
same  sound.  Each  simple  vowel  is  either  long  or  short ;  a 
short  vowel  has  the  same  sound  as  the  corresponding  long 
vowel,  but  occupies  only  half  as  much  time  in  utterance. 

I.  Sounds  of  the  Vowels* 

a  as  in  ah,  like  a  in  father.  a  as  in  ah,  like  a  in  idea, 

e  as  in  prey.  S  as  in  met. 

1  as  in  machine.  i  as  in  sit. 

6  as  in  holy.  6  as  in  obey, 

ii  as  oo  in  moon.  ii  as  in  full. 

y  has  a  sound  between  that  of  i  and  u,  like  the  French  u, 
or  German  ii. 


28  rnisT  steps  ix  latin. 


II.    Sounds  of  the  Diphthongs^ 

ae  like  ay  (?/e.s),  or  ai  in  aisle.  eu  like  ew  in  fe-w. 

oe  like  oi  in  coin.  ei  like  ei  in  eight, 

au  like  otv  in  how.  ui  like  we  in  we. 


III.    Sounds  of  the  Consonants. 

c  is  always  hard,  like  c  in  come.  ch  lias  the  sonnd  of  k. 

g  is  always  hard,  like  g  in  gun.  th  is  like  th  in  thin. 

j  is  like  y  in  yet.  ph  is  like  f. 

s  is  always  sharp,  like  s  in  sea.  bs  and  bt  are  like  ps,  pt. 

t  is  always  like  t  in  time.  gu  and  su,  when  making  a 

V  is  like  w  in  we.  .syllable  with  the  following 

qu  is  like  qu  in  quart.  vowel,  like  gw,  sw. 

24.  The  double  conwonaiits  are  :  x  =  n^  (7r,s) ,  z  =  (h.    The 
letters  not  mentioned  hiive  the  same  sound  as  in  Eimlish. 


EXERCISES. 

Pronounce  the  following  words  :  — 

1.  ii'-lii,-  v:i)ig  ;  rii' -])(i,  turiiij) ;  fti'-mes, /iww^er;  re'-mex, 
rower;  ^-rH'-nti,  sand  ;  fr^'-uii,  bridle.  2.  ta-heV-\k,  tablet  ; 
i-ter,  journey  ;  rni-ni' star ^  servayit;  do'-lor,  pam;  hii'-me-rus, 
sliovlder ;  a'-nu-lus,  finger  ring ;  sua'-de?o,  /  advise. 
3.  prae-si'-di-um,  guard;  nau'-ta,  sailor;  poe'-na,),  pimish- 
ment  ;  sae'-pe,  o//^e?i.  4.  lae-ti'-ti-a,  Jo?/ ;  pre'-ti-um,  pr/ce; 
pa-ti-en'-ti-a,  patience  ;  coe'-lum,  heaven  ;  ca'-piit,  head  ; 
o'-cu-lus,  eyei;  ju'-dex^  judge  ;  vir'-go,  maid;  ma'-chi-na, 
machine  ;    pul'-cher,  beautiful. 

NOTES    AND    QUE.STIONS. 

1.  Diplithongs  occupy  twice  as  mucli  time  in  utterance  as  the  sliort 
vowels. 

2.  The  words  will  be  accented  and  syllabicated  until  the  subjects  of 
accentuation  and  syllabication  have  been  explained. 


SYLLABICATION.  29 


How  is  Latin  goucriilly  pronounced  in  this  country  ?  How  is  long  a 
pronounced?  Why  is  ;i  knowledge  of  the  IJoman  method  important? 
When'  does  n  have  the  sound  of  ng  1  What  consonants  liave  the  same 
sound  as  in  English  ?     Are  any  letters  silent  ? 


LESSON   III. 

SYLLABICATION. 

25.  A  Latin  word  is  divided  into  as  many  syllables 

as  it  has  vowels  or  diphthongs. 

Obs.  The  Englisli  \vor<ls  mile,  accurate,  separate,  abate,  would, 
as  Latin  words,  be  syllabicated  as  follows :  mi-le,  ac-cu-ra'-te, 
se-pa-ra'-te,  a-ba'-te. 

26.  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels  is  joined 
to  the  second  vowel. 

K  X  AMPLE  S. 

1.  fa'-ber,  artisan.  8.  re-gi'-na,  queen. 

2.  lau'-do,  I  praise.  4.  do'-mi-nus,  lord. 

27.  When  the  consonant  is  donbled,  the  first  belongs 
to  the  first  syllable,  and  the  second  to  the  second 
syllable. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  aii'-iius,  year.  8.  pen' -na.,  feather. 

2.  bel'-lum,  tear.  L  niit'-to,  /  send. 

28.  Two  or  more  consonants  not  doubled  between  two 
vowels  belong  to  the  following  vowel,  but  /,  m,  7i^  r,  in 
connection  with  another  consonant,  are  joined  to  the 
preceding  vowel. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  li'-bri,  books.  5.  am'-bo,  both. 

2.  fau'-stus,  lucky.  6.  lin'-gua,  tongue. 

3.  fra'-tres,  brothers.  7.  an'-guis,  snake. 

4.  h6'-spSs,  guest.  8.  ma'-gnus,  great. 


30  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LAtlN. 

29.  The  parts  of  compounds  are  treated  as  separate 
words. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  ab'-est  (ab,  awa>j,  est,  lie  is),  he  is  aivay. 

2.  in-u'-ti-lis  (in,  not,  utilis,  useful),  useless. 

3.  ob-i'-re  (ob  and  ire),  to  yo. 

30.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  called  the  ultimate^ 
()]■  ultima;  the  next  to  the  last,  the  2?e7iultimate,  or 
penult;  and  the  one  before  the  penult,  the  antepemd- 
timate,  or  antepenult. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  an-ten'-n5.,  sail-yard.  4.  in-fa'-mi-S,  infamy. 

2.  fg-ne'-strS.,  irindow.  5.  ma'-l^,  apples. 

3.  im-pe-di-men'-t&,  Ja^^/a^e.         0.  disci' -Tp^X-VSis,  pupil. 

Oii8.  Ill  tlie  foregoing  words  j)oint  out  the  ultimate,  the  penult, 
and  the  antepenult. 

EXERCISES. 

Syllabicate  and  pronounce  the  following  words  :  — 

1.  scri'ba,  derk;  in'sula,  island;  aal,  salt;  rsi'im,  frog ; 
ara'tra,  2^^ough.  2.  ma'ppa,  ttajMn  ;  disci'pidiis,  scholar  ; 
ar'ma,  arms;  al'tera,  another;  \)^ii^  foot ;  habe'na,  thong; 
bel'hun,  icar ;  sani'tas,  health;  pa'ries,  a  ivall ;  do'lor,  pain; 
magi'ster,  'master.  3.  vnl'nus,  wound;  consuetu'do,  custom; 
Him' \'is,  sweet ;  liae'diis,  A.'icZ;  pre'tium,  jmce;  cica'trix,  scar; 
hieti'tia,  joy  ;  re'gnum,^  kingdom;  pu'er,  boy  ;  inju'ria,  i^i- 
J-'ry;  di'xit,^  he  said;  ma'gnus,  greed;  a'mnis,^  river;  ad'eo,* 
/  go  to;  li'ttera,  letter. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  combination  r/ii  can  begin  a  syllable. 

2.  X  is  treated  in  syllabication  as  a  single  consonant. 

3.  The  combination  mn  can  begin  a  syllable. 

4.  Compounded  of  ad,  to,  and  eo,  T  (jo. 


QUANTITY.  31 


What  is  a  syllable  ?  How  is  the  quantity  of  a  syllable  determined'? 
How  can  the  number  of  syllables  in  Latin  be  found  ?  Why  does  b 
belong  to  the  first  syllable  in  abest  ?  Wliat  is  the  last  syllable  called? 
The  last  but  one  'i     Write  three  Latin  words,  and  syllabicate  each. 


LESSON   IV. 

QUANTITY. 

31.  The  quantity  of  syllables  is  the  relative  time 
occupied  in  pronouncing  them.  A  syllable  containing  a 
long  or  short  vowel  is  said  to  be  long  or  short  %  7iature^ 
because  the  Romans  so  pronounced  it.  The  quantity 
of  such  syllables  must  be  learned  by  observation  and 
practice. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  a'r§.,  altar.  3.  ra'na.,fro(j. 

2.  /?/'oelium,  battle.  4.  ara'tTSL,  plough. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  italicized  syl- 
lables contain  long  vowels  or  diphthongs,  and  are  therefore  long. 
The  syllahles  not  italicized  contain  short  vowels,  and  are  therefore 
short. 

32.  The  following  rules  of  quantity  decide  the  length 
of  most  syllables  not  long  or  short  hy  7iature.  A  syllable 
is  long  in  quantity  — 

1.  If  it  contains  a  diphthong. 

2.  If  its  vowel  is  followed  by  y,  2;,  or  2,  or  any  two 

consonants  except  a  mute  followed  by  I  or  r. 

3.  A  syllable  formed  by  contraction  is  long. 

33.  A  syllable  is  short  if  its  vowel  is  followed  by 
another  vowel,  by  a  diphthong,  or  by  the  letter  A. 


32  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


EXAMPLES. 

1.  /in gua.,  tongue.  5.  Justus,  Just. 

2.  annus,  year.  6.  6b/lum,  war. 

3.  arsrvLtn.,  jiloughed JieUl.  7.  dux,  leader. 

4.  laudo,  I  praise.  8,  proelium,  battle. 

Obs.  In  each  of  the  foregoing  examples  the  italicized  vowel  i.s 
followed  by  two  consonants,  or  by  a  double  consonant ;  the  vowel 
may  be  long  (as  in  Ex.  5)  or  short  (as  in  Exs.  1,  2),  but  the  syl- 
lable in  each  case  is  long.  When  a  short  vowel  is  so  placed,  it  is 
said  to  be  long  by  jmsition.  In  Exs.  2,  5  the  quantity  of  the  syllable 
and  of  the  vowel  is  the  same,  i.e.  long  or  short.  Exs.  4,  8  contain 
a  diphthong,  and  are  long.  The  i  in  proelium  is  short,  according 
to  33. 

34.  A  syllable  may  therefore  be  — 

1.  Long  by  nature as,  ara. 

2.  Short  by  nature '■'•   ra  na. 

8.  Long  by  position       ....       "a/?  nus,  ga  za.^ 
4.  Short  by  position "   via.,traho. 

35.  In  a  syllable  long  by  position  merely,  the  vowel  is 
pronouneed  short ;  as,  — 

1.  lux,  like  oo  in  moon. 

2.  niix,  like   u  in  full. 

36.  But  7//,  ?<s,  and  ,;  make  both  the  preceding  vowel  and 
syllable  long. 

Note.  In  the  following  lessons  the  quantity  of  every  syllable 
not  determined  by  the  preceding  rules  will  be  marked  as  indicated 
in  Le.sson  I. ;  excepting  final  syllables,  which  will  be  marked  only 
when  they  are  long,  or  until  rules  have  been  given  by  which  their 
quantity  may  be  determined.  Thus,  in  ara,  the  absence  of  any 
mark  over  the  final  a  indicates  that  it  is  short. 


NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  X,  though  a  double  consonant,  is  treated  as  a  single  consonant  in 
syllabication. 

What  is  meant  by  a  vowel  being  short  by  nature  ?  When  is  a  vowel 
short  by  nature  ?  When  long '?  What  is  the  difference  between  the 
length  or  quantity  of  a  vowel,  and  the  length  or  quantity  of  a  syllable  1 


ACCENT.  33 


Iny'wstus  the  italicized  vowel  and  syllable  are  both  long;  in  annua  the 
italicized  syllable  is  long,  but  the  vowel  is  short.  The  vowel  is  said  to 
be  long  bi/  position,  llemeniber,  then,  that  the  quantity  of  the  vowel 
does  not  always  coincide  with  the  quantity  of  the  syllable.  Is  the 
vowel  in  rex  long  by  nature  ?     Is  the  vowel  in  dux  long  by  nature  ? 


LESSON   V. 

ACCENT. 

37.  Accent  is  a  special  stress  of  the  voice  placed  upon 
a  syllable  in  pronouncing  it. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  va-ga'-ry.      2.  in-fer'.      3.  dis'-mal.      4.  de-riv'-ing. 

38.  The  accent  of  Latin  words  is  determined  by  the 
following  rules :  — 

1.  In  words  of  two  syllables  the  accent  is  always  on 

the  first. 

2.  In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables  the  penult,  if 

long,  is  accented;    if  short,  the  antepenult  is 
accented.^ 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  an'nvLa,  year.  5.  de'vdro,  I  devour. 

2.  stel'la,  star.  6.  pS'ptllus,  people. 

3.  in'siila,^  island.  7.  impera'tor,  commander. 

4.  matro'na,  married  woman.         8.  ingg'nium,-  character. 

EXERCISES. 
Spell,  syllabicate,  and  pronounce  the  following  words :  — 
1.  regina,  queen;  aquila,  eagle;  insula,  island.     2.  domi- 

nus,    lord;    helium,    war;    annus,    year;    amicus,   friend. 

3.  judex,  judge  ;  pneri,  hoys;  virgines,  maidens  ;  animaUa, 

animals;  flumen,  river ;  civitas,  state. 


34  FIRST  STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


NOTJKS    AND    iJUKSTIONS. 

1.  The  accent,  as  affected  by  an  enclitic,  will  be  explained  later. 

2.  Notice  tliat  the  penult  is  short. 

What  is  accent  ?  Write  a  word  with  the  accent  on  the  penult.  How 
do  you  accent  Latin  words  of  two  syllables  ?  Of  three  syllables  ?  Is 
the  last  syllable  of  a  Latin  word  ever  accented  ?  Does  the  quantitij  of 
the  sijllable  or  of  the  voicel  detennine  the  place  of  accent'?  (A7is.  The 
quantity  of  the  syllable ;  the  vowel  may  be  short,  but  the  syllable  long.) 
When  can  a  short  penult  take  the  accent  ? 


LESSON   VI. 
THE    ENGLISH    METHOD. 

39.  For  those  who  prefer  to  retain  the  English  pronuncia- 
tion, the  following  rules  are  given.  The  pupil  should  notice 
that  the  long  or  short  vowel-sounds  indicated  in  these  rules 
are  wholly  independent  of  the  real  quantity  of  the  vowel. 

1.  In  monosyllables  the  vowel  has  — 

a.  The  long  sound,  if  it  ends  the  syllable ;  as,  si,  me,  spe. 

h.  The  sliort  sound,  if  followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  Sb,  cum, 
hoc,  has.  Except  post,  niono.syllables  in  es,  and  (in  plural  cases) 
OS,  where  it  has  the  long  sound ;  as,  res,  hos,  6s. 

2.  An  accented  penult  has  — 

a.  The  long  vowel-sound  before  a  single  consonant  (or  a  mute 
with  /  or  ?'),  or  before  a  vowel  or  diphthong;  as,  pS'ter,  lib-er-S'lis, 
dg'us,  sa'cra,  pa'tris. 

b.  The  short  vowel-sound  before  two  consonants  (except  a  mute 
followed  by  /  or  r)  or  x;  as,  reg'nam,  rex'i. 

3.  An  accented  antepenult  has  — 

a.  The  long  vowel-sound  before  a  vowel ;  as,  6'adem,  hi'e-mis, 
fii'e-rat. 

b.  The  short  vowel-sound  before  a  consonant;  as,  in'su-la, 
i-tin'e-ris. 

Exceptions,  (a)  u  before  a  single  consonant  (or  a  mute  with 
I  or  r)  has  the  long  sound :  jtl've-nis,  lu'ri-dus,  pu'tri-dus ;  but 
before  bl  the  short  sound,  as  in  res-pub'li-ca. 


THE   ENGLISH    METHOD.  35 

(b)  a,  e,  o,  before  a  single  consonant  (or  a  niiite  with  I  or  r)  fol- 
lowed by  two  vowels,  the  first  of  which  is  e,  i,  or  y,  have  the  long 
sound;  as,  impe'ri-um,  do'ce-o,  a'cri-a. 

4.  Ill  all  unaccented  syllables  the  vowel-sound  is  — 

a.  Long,  if  followed  by  a  single  consonant  (or  a  nnitc  with  /  or  r)  : 
as  do-lo'ris ;  but  final  sylla])les  ending  in  a  consonant  are  short, 
in  a  vowel,  long;  as,  con-sul  (except  es,  and  in  pliu^al  cases  os  at 
the  end  of  tlie  word). 

h.  Short  before  x,  or  any  two  consonants;  as,  bel-lo'rum, 
rex-is'set. 

Exception.  Final  a  is  sounded  as  m  the  last  syllable  of  America, 
as  men'sa;  and  the  vowel-sounds  in  tibi  and  sibi  are  as  in  the 
English  lily. 

Note.  Compounds  generally  follow  the  same  rules;  but  if  the 
first  part  ends  in  a  consonant,  the  vowel-sound  is  short:  as,  ob'it, 
red'it,  ab-e'rat,  prae-ter'e-a,  trans 'i-tur  (except  post  and  its 
compounds,  and  iinal  syllables  in  as  and  os  of  plural  cases :  as, 
post-quam,  hos'ce). 

5.  Diphthongs  follow  the  same  rules  as  the  vowels  which 
represent  them  in  English  ;  thus,  — 

a.  ce  and  ce  have  the  sound  of  e ;  that  is,  long  in  cse'lum,  a-inoe'- 
nus,  short  in  haes'l-to,  a-moen'i-tas. 

h.  In  poetry  ei  may  be  regarded  as  a  diphthong,  as  in  dein'de, 
having  the  sound  of  i  in  mind ;  eu,  au,  oi,  have,  when  di|)lithongs, 
the  same  sound  as  in  feud,  author,  coin,  as  Orpheus,  Oileiis.  aurum; 
ui  is  a  diphthong,  having  the  long  sound  of  i  in  huic,  cui,  hui ; 
u,  in  connection  with  other  vowels  or  diphthongs,  sometimes  has 
the  somid  of  w  after  r/  or  s,  as  qui,  lin'gua,  sua'deo,  quae'ro. 

c.  In  such  words  as  Gaius,  Pompeius,  Aquileia,  i  is  sounded 
like  ?/ ;  as,  Qa-yus,  Pom-pe-yus,  etc. 

G.  Consonants  have  generally  the  same  power  as  in  Eng- 
lish;  thus, — 

a.  Before  e,  i,  y,  and  the  diphthongs  ce,  eu,  ce,  c  has  the  sound 
of  s,  and  g  oi  j ;  ch  has  always  the  sound  of  k,  as  in  chemist ;  c,  s,  t 
often  have  the  sound  of  sh  before  i  followed  by  a  vowel,  and  before 
eu  when  preceded  by  an  accented  syllable,  and  x  of  ksh,  as  socius, 
censui,  ratio,  caduceus,  anxius. 

Note.  It  is  to  be  understood  that  in  these  examples  the  rule  is 
only  j>ermissive,  and  that  usage  varies  considerably  among  the  best 
authorities.  In  general,  when  the  word,  or  the  combination  of 
letters,  is  distinctly  foreign  to  us,  it  may  be  l^etter  to  retain  the  pin-e 
consonant  sound,  as  in  men-ti-e'tur,  Miu'cius,  ca-du'ce-us, 
Ly'si-as,  McB'si-a,  ax-i-o'ma,  noc'ti-um. 


36  nil  ST  STEPS   IN   LATJN. 

It  is  very  common,  in  English  pronunciation,  to  slur  or  suppress 
the  more  difficult  consonant-sounds,  particularly  m  such  cases  as 
en,  gn,  ps,  pt,  im,  or  x,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  as  in  Cnidus, 
gnotus,  pseudopteris,  Tmolus,  xylon.  But  in  an  accurate 
pronunciation  of  these  as  Latin  or  Greek  words,  the  full  consonant- 
sound  will  be  retained. 

Finally,  there  can  be  no  correct  rule  to  authorize  the  slipshod 
and  slovenly  habit  of  enunciation  which  is  frequently  allowed.  'Jo 
cultivate  a  clear  and  vigorous  utterance  of  unfamiliar  words  is  one  of 
the  incidental  benefits  of  careful  instruction  in  a  foreign  tongue. 


LESSON  VII. 
LATIN    VERBS. 

40.  Verbs  in  Latin,  ns  in  English,  assert  action^  being,  or 
state  of  being. 

41.  Verbs  are  also  classified,  according  to  their  meaning, 
into  — 

1 .  Transitive  verbs,  which  require  an  object ;  as,  — 

He  beats  the  slave. 

2.  Intransitive  verbs,  which  do  not  require  an  object;  as, — 

The  man  runs. 

42.  Verbs  have  also  voice.,  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person. 

43.  Verbs  have  two  voices  :  — 

1.  The  active  voice,  which  shows  that  the  subject  does  the  action ; 
^'*'  The  father  loves  his  son. 

2.  The  passive  voice,  which  shows  that  the  subject  suffers  the 

The  son  is  loved  by  his  father. 

44.  There  are  four  modes :  the  indicative,  subjunctive, 
imperative,  and  infinitive.  The  indicative,  imperative,  and 
infinitive  have,  in  general,  the  same  use  in  Latin  as  in  P^ng- 
lish.  The  use  of  the  subjunctive  can  be  learned  best  in 
connection  with  the  syntax  of  the  verb. 


LATIN    VERBS.  37 


45.  Verbs  have  six  tenses  ^ :  three  for  incomplete  action 
and  three  for  completed  action. 

I.  Tenses  for  Incomjilete  Action, 

1.  Present /  write,  /  ajn  writing. 

2.  Imperfect /  was  vrt^iting,  I  ivrote. 

3.  Future /  shall  write,  I  will  write. 

II.  Tenses  for  Completed  Action. 

1.  Perfect I  have  ivritten,  I  ivrote. 

2.  Pluperfect  ...      .    .     .     /  had  ivritten. 

3.  Future  Perfect   .    .    .    ,     I  shall  have  ivritten. 

Obs.  The  indicative  mood  has  all  six  tenses  ;  the  suhjunctive  has 
the  present,  imperfect,  perfect,  and  pluperfect;  the  imperative  has 
the  present  and  future  only;  and  the  infinitive  has  the  present, 
perfect,  future,  and  future  perfect. 

46.  Tenses  are  also  distinguished  as,  — 

I.  Principal^  or  PrUnary  Tenses. 

1.  Present I  ivrite. 

2.  Perfect  Definite I  have  ivritten. 

3.  Future /  shall  ivrite. 

II.  Historical,  or  Secondary  Tenses, 

1.  Imperfect /  ivas  writing. 

2.  AoRis T,  or  Historical  Perfect  .    /  ivrote. 

3.  Pluperfect     ......../  had  written. 

47.  The  present,  future,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect^" 
tenses  have,  in  general,  the  same  use  in  Latin  as  in  English. 

48.  The  imperfect  tense  expresses  an  action  as  going  on 
in  past  time,  i.e.  a  continued,  repeated,  or  customary  past 
action  ;  as,  — - 

/  ivas  writing.         I  used  to  ivrite. 

49.  The  perfect  tense  has  two  uses,  distinguished  as  per- 
fect definite  and  aorist,  or  historical  perfect,  corresponding 
to  the  perfect  and  past  tenses  in  English  ;  as,  — 

/  have  written  (definite). 

/  wrote  (aorist,  or  historical  perfect) . 


38  FIRST  STEPS   IN    LATIN. 

50.  Verbs,  like  nouns,  have  two  numbers^  singular  and 
plural ;  and  three  x>ersons^  first,  second,  and  third. 

51.  The  voice,  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  a 
Latin  verb  is  indicated  by  the  endings;   as, — 

^niat,  lie  loves.  ^mabat,  he  was  loving. 

52.  The  various  verbal  forms  that  have  voice,  mood,  tense, 
number,  and  person,  make  up  thQ  finite'''  \qy\).  liesides  these, 
there  are  three  other  forms  derived  from  verbs,  and  partaking 
of  their  signification.     These  are  :  — 

1.  The  participle,  which  gives  the  meaning  of  the  verb  in  the 
form  of  an  adjective.  A  Latin  verb  has  four  participles :  two  in 
the  active,  the  piesent  and  the  future ;  and  two  in  the  passive,  the 
perfect  and  tlie  gerundive ;  as,  — 

Active. 

Present Smans,  loving. 

FuTiUE S.maturus,  about  to  love. 

Passive. 

Perfect hiatus,  loviid. 

Geriindive      ....      Smandus,  deserving  to  he  loved. 

2.  The  gertind,  which  gives  the  meaning  of  tlio  verb  in  the  form 
of  a  verbal  noun  of  the  second  declension.  It  corresponds  to  the 
English  verbal  noun  in  -ing ;  as, — 

Smandi,  of  loving. 

3.  The  supine,  which  gives  the  meaning  of  the  verb  in  the  form 
of  a  verbal  noun  of  the  fourth  declension.  It  has  two  forms,  one 
in  -nm,  the  other  in  -ii;  as, — 

Smatum,  to  love.  S.matu,  to  he  loved. 

53.  The  principal  parts  of  a  verb  are,  the  j^reser?^  indica- 
tive., tlie  ^7rese?i<  infinitive,  the  perfect  indicative,  and  the  jk'v- 
fect  particij)le.  These  are  called  t\\Q  principal  parts,  because 
all  the  other  parts  of  the  verb  are  formed  from  them. 

Obs.  The  supine  in  -urn,  called  by  many  grammarians  one  of 
the  principal  parts  of  the  verb,  belongs,  in  fact,  to  only  about  two 
hundred  I^atin  verbs ;  then,  again,  those  verbs  that  are  invariably 
intransitive  have  the  perfect  participle  in  the  neuter  gender  only. 
This  part,  then,  called  in  the  dictionaries  the  supine  in  -mn,  must, 


CONJUGATION    OF   THE    LATIN   VERB.  39 

in  most  cases,  be  the  neuter  of  the  perfect  participle ;  and  I  have 
ventured,  in  the  enumeration  of  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb,  to 
give  it  this  naiue,  and  also  to  substitute,  in  place  of  supine  stem,  the 
more  correct  term  participial  stem. 

NOTES     AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  six  tenses  are  found  only  in  the  indicative  mood. 

2.  The  imperfect,  aorist,  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  sometimes  called 
the  preterite  tenses, 

3.  A  verb  in  any  mood  except  the  infinitive  is  called  a  ^finite  verb. 
How  many  tenses  in  Latin  1     Define  the  word  tense.     Define  voice  as 

used  in  grammar.  {Ans.  Voice  is  a  modification  which  shows  whether 
the  subject  acts  or  is  acted  upon.)  Define  mode.  Mention  the  primary 
tenses.  How  are  voice,  mode,  tense,  etc.,  expressed  in  English  1  {Ans. 
By  the  use  of  auxiliaries,  or  helping  words.)     How  in  Latin  1 


LESSON   VIII. 

CONJUGATION    OP    THE    LATIN    VERB. 

Obs.  In  English,  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  verbs 
are  indicated  chiefly  by  certain  words  prefixed  to  the  verb,  but  in 
some  cases  by  the  endings  of  the  verbs;  as,  Present,  he  icrites ; 
Future,  he  will  write;  Imperfect,  he  was  loriting.  In  Latin,  these 
forms  are  always  denoted  by  the  endings  of  the  verb;  as,  5mat,  he 
loves;  Smabit,  he  ivill  love ;  Smabat,  he  was  loving.  Each  of  these 
Latin  words  shows  its  person  by  its  ending,  which  is,  therefore, 
called  the  personal  ending ;  hence,  with  Latin  verbs,  the  personal 
pronouns  may  be,  and  generally  are,  omitted.  The  changing  of 
these  endings  to  denote  some  modification  of  meaning,  or  to  show 
some  relation  to  other  words,  is  called  Conjugation. 

54.  In  order  to  determine  how  to  conjugate  a  Latin, 
verb,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  Present  Infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Present.  Infinittve. 

1.  ^mo,  /  love ;  apare,  to  love. 

2.  in6neo,  /  advise  ;  m6nere,  to  advise. 

3.  rggo,  I  rule;  rgggre,  to  ride. 

4.  audio,  I  hear ;  audire,  to  hear. 


40 


FIRST    STEPS  IN  LATIN. 


Obs.  The  pupil  will  notice  that  the  infinitive  in  Latin  is  formed 
not  as  in  English,  by  placing  the  preposition  to  before  the  simple 
form  of  the  verb,  )jut  by  adding  -re.  Each  of  these  verbs  has,  also, 
a  characteristic  vowel  befoi-e  the  infinitive  ending,  which  in  Smo 
is  -a-,  in  mSneo  is  -e-,  in  rego  is  -e-,  and  in  audio  is  -t-. 

55.  Accordingly,  Latin  verbs  are  divided  into  four 
classes,  called  Conjugatioiis^  distinguished  from  one  an- 
other by  the  characteristic  vowel  before  the  ending  -re 
of  the  present  infinitive  active,  as  follows :  — 


Conjugation. 

Characteristic 
Vowels. 

Infinitive 
Kndings. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

a 

e 
e 
i 

are 
ere 
ere 
i-re 

1.  The  vowel  before  -re  is  called  the  stem-char  act  eristic; 
thus,  the  stem  of  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  ends  in  a, 
the  second  in  c",  the  third  in  e^  the  fourtli  in  L 

2.  Besides  the  present  stem,  there  is  often  a  simpler  form 
that  forms  the  basis  of  the  entire  conjugation,  called  the 
verb-stem.  In  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations 
the  verb-stem  is  generally  the  same  as  the  present  stem ;  in 
tlie  third  conjugation  reg-  is  the  verb-stem,  and  rege-  the 
present  stem ;  as, 


Verb-stem .    . 
Infinitive   .    . 

Conj.  I. 

Conj.  II. 

Conj.  III. 

Conj.  IV. 

ama- 
ama-re, 

to  fore. 

mone- 
mone-re, 

to  (1(1  rise. 

reg-,  minu- 
reg-ere,  to  rute. 
ra\mji-ere,tofessen. 

audi- 
audi-re, 

to  hear. 

3.  The  verb-stems  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  couju- 
gations  end  in  the  vowels  a,  e,  ?  ;  the  verb-stem  of  the  third 
conjugation  ends  in  a  consonant  or  in  u ;  hence  the  distinc- 
tion of  vowel  and  consonant  conjugations. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION.  41 

Tell  to  which  conjugation  each  of  the  following  verbs 
belongs :  — 

Pkesent  Indicative.  Infinitive. 

1.  Isiudo,  I  praise ;  ^  Isiudaie,  to  praise. 

2.  deleo,  /  destroy  ;  delere,  to  destroy. 

3.  tggo,  /  cover  ;  tgggre,  to  cover. 

4.  munio,  I  fortify  ;  munire,  to  fortify. 

5.  audio,  /  hear;  audire,  to  hear. 

6.  habeo,  /  have;  habere,  to  have. 

7.  haurio,  /  drain ;  haurire,  to  drain. 

8.  niimgro,  I  count ;  niimgrare,  to  count. 
d.fiiQio,Iflee;  fUg^ie,  to  fee. 

10.  err  o,  I  wander ;  err  axe,  to  wand  e7\ 

11.  m6veo,  /  move;  m6vere,  to  move. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Notice  that  the  pronoun  /  is  supplied  in  translating. 

How  many  conjugations  are  there  1  How  is  each  distinguished  1 
What  is  meant  by  the  conjugation  of  a  verb  1  How  does  the  Latin 
verb  express  tense  ?    person  ?    number  ? 


LESSON   IX. 
riEST    CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT    INDICATIVE    ACTIVE. 

56.  All  verbs  whose  characteristic  vowel  before  the 
ending  -re  in  the  Present  Infinitive  is  -a-  belong  to  the 
first  conjugation. 

Present  Tense, 

57.  The  Present  Tense  is  formed  by  adding  personal 
endings J;o  the  Present  Stem.^ 


42 


FIRST   STEPS   IN    LATIN. 


PARTIAL     PARADIGM. 


Person. 

rormation. 

Example. 

£:n;?li.sh. 

Sim/.  1 

Present  Stem +0  2 

amo 

/  lore. 

2 

"      +  s 

amas 

Thou  lovest. 

8 

"      + 1 

amat 

He  loves. 

r/nr.  1 

"          "      +  mus 

amamus 

We  love. 

2 

"      +  tis 

amatis 

You  love. 

3 

"      +  nt 

amant 

Theij  love. 

Oijs.  1.  Note  that  the  vowel  in  the  ending  of  the  third  person 
singnlar  is  shortened ;  short  vowels  in  final  syllables  are  generally 
not  marked. 

Obs.  2,  Tn.  English  we  indicate  the  person  and  number  of  the 
verb  chiefly  by  means  of  pronouns  standing  before  the  verb ;  as, 

Sing.  1.  /  love.  Plur.  1.    We  love. 

2.  Thou  lovest.  2.   You  love. 

3.  He  loves.  3.   They  love. 

The  verb  changes  its  ending  in  but  two  forms ;  with  these  excep- 
tions it  would  be  impossible  to  tell  the  person  or  luimber  of  this 
verb  unless  a  pronoun  was  used  with  it.  In  Latin  the  endings  of 
the  verbs  were  originally  pronouns,  and  they  are  changed,  as  the 
pronouns  in  English  are,  to  indicate  the  person  and  number  of  the 
verb ;  as, 

lore-tve  love-he  love-thou 

dmS-mus  &in&-t  Sma-s 


VOCABUI.ARY. 

rnESENT. 

ruE8.  Stem. 

Phes.  Infinitive 

laudo,  praise.^ 

lauda.^ 

laudare. 

porto,  carry. 

porta. 

portare. 

pugno,  /?>////. 

pugna. 

pugnare. 

v6co,  call. 

v6ca. 

v6care. 

dono,  give. 

dona. 

donare. 

EXERCISES. 
Translate  into  EnsrHsh  :  — 


1.  laudat.5 

2.  vScant. 


3.  pugnamus. 

4.  portas. 


.5.  donatis. 
6.  laudamus. 


7.  donas. 

8.  pugnant. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION.  43 


NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  endings  were  originally  personal  pronouns :  laudas  means 
not  love,  hut  thou  hvest.  The  pronoun,  when  used  as  the  subject  of  the 
verb,  need  not,  therefore,  he  expressed.  Note,  further,  that  the  endings 
show  the  number  and  person  of  the  subject,  but  not  the  gender. 

Obs.  This  is  true,  in  general,  only  when  the  verb  is  of  the  first  or 
second  person.  With  the  third  person,  a  definite  subject  should  be  ex- 
pressed, unless  implied  in  what  precedes  or  follows. 

2.  Note  that  the  Present  Indicative  =  present  stem  +  personal  end- 
ings, and  that  &ma  +  o  —  amo;  also,  that  it  has  lost  the  m  (which 
appears  in  sum,  inquam).  The  o  stands  for  m  and  the  preceding 
vowel ;  as,  amo  =  Sma-o-m. 

3.  Head,  I  praise,  etc. 

4.  The  stem  is  lauda,  and  by  adding  the  personal  ending  we  get 
lauda-o,  which  is  contracted  into  laudo. 

5.  Remember  that  the  present  tense  in  English  has  three  forms  :  — 

1.  laudo,  I  praise,  I  am  praising,  I  do  praise. 

2.  laudas,  thou  praisest,  thou  art  praising,  thou  dost  praise. 

3.  laudat,  he  praises,  he  is  praising,  he  does  praise. 

6.  Observe  that  no  separate  Latin  word  is  required  for  the  pronouns 
7,  thou,  he,  ice,  they,  etc. ;  thus,  pugnamus,  u-e  fight,  contains  the  pro- 
noun we,  and  is  a  complete  sentence  in  one  word,  i.e.  contains  a  subject 

and  predicate ;  as, 

pugna-mus 

fight-we 

pugna-,  signifying  fight,  is  the  stem,  and   -mus,  signifying  toe,  the 
personal  ending. 

How  is  the  first  conjugation  distinguished  ?  What  is  meant  by  the 
characteristic  vowel  ?  How  is  the  stem  found  1  What  are  the  personal 
endings  ?  What  do  these  endings  show  ?  Does  the  present  tense  denote 
completed  or  incomplete  action  %  Ans.  The  i)resent  stem,  and  the  tenses 
formed  from  it,  —  present,  imperfect,  and  future,  —  denote  incomplete 
action. 


44 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


LESSON    X. 

FIEST    CONJUGATION    {continued). 

Imperfect  and  Future   Tenses, 

58.  The  Imperfect  and  Future  Tenses  are  formed, 
like  the  Present,  by  adding  the  endings  to  the  Present 
Stem. 

PARTIAL     PARADIGM. 


Imperfect. 


Person. 


Formation. 


^Example. 


English. 


Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 


Present  Stem  +  bam 

+  bas 

+  bat 

+  bamus 

+  batis 

4-  bant 


amabam 

amabas 

amabat 

amabamus 

amabatis 

amabant 


1  was  loving. 
T/iou  irert  loving. 
Tie  iras  loving. 
We  irere  loving. 
You  were  loving. 
TJteij  were  loving. 


Future. 


Person. 


Sing.  1 
2 
3 
1 
2 
3 


Pli 


Formation. 


Present  Stem  +  bo 

"      +  bis 
"     +  bit 
"      +  bimus 
"      +  bitis 
"      +  bunt 


Fxample. 

amabo 

amabis 

amabit 

amabimus 

amabitis 

amabunt 


Fnglish. 


/  shall  love. 
Thou  wilt.  love. 
He  will  love. 
We  shall  love. 
You  ivlll  love. 
The//  ivlll  love. 


1.  Analysis  of  the  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Futm'e  Indica- 
tive Active  :  — 

1.  Present  ind.  =  Pres.  stem  -f  Personal  endings. 

2.  Iniperf.  ind.  —  Pres.  stem  +  Tense-sign  {-ha-)  +  Personal  endings. 

3.  Future  ind.  ==  Pres.  stem  +  Tense-sign  {-hi-)  4-  Personal  endings. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION.  45 

Obs.  The  future,  like  the  present,  has  lost  the  m  in  the  first 
person  singular :  ^mabo  =  amabom  as  the  present  amo  —  amom 
(cf.  sum). 

VOCABULARY. 

Present.  Present  Stem. 

1.  r6go,  ask.  roga-. 

2.  ^o,  plough.  Sra-. 

3.  p^ro,  prepare.  pSra-. 

4.  narro,  narrate.  narra-. 


EXERCISES. 
Analyze  ;  translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  rSgat.  6.  pugnabatis. 

2.  narrant.  7.  donabimus. 

3.  rSgabis.i  8.  pSrabit. 

4.  portabant.2  9.  Srabunt. 

5.  laudabamus.  10.  vdcabis. 


NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  In  translating  the  second  person  singular,  as  well  as  the  second 
person  plural,  you  is  commonly  used ;  as,  Smas,  you  love,  and  Smatis, 
you  love;  but  ^mas  is  used  of  one  person,  and  ^matis  of  more 
than  one. 

2.  Observe  that,  in  the  conjugation  of  the  imperfect  and  future,  the 
stem  and  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  present ;  that  between 
these  there  is  a  tense-sign,  -ba-  in  the  imperfect  and  -bi-  in  the  future. 
The  elements  of  the  verb  then,  in  the  imperfect  and  future  tenses,  are  : 
1st.  The  Stem ;   2d.  The  Tense-sign  ;  3d.  The  Personal  Endings ;  as, 

lauda-ba-mus 

praising-were-we 

lauda-  being  the  stem ;  -ba-,  ivere,  the  tense-sign ;  and  -mus,  we,  the 
personal  ending. 

What  is  tense  ?  How  many  divisions  of  time  1  What  is  mode  ? 
How  many  modes  1  How  is  the  present  tense  formed  ?  How  the  future "? 
Write  the  inflection  in  the  imperfect ;  in  the  future. 


46  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON   XI. 

LATIN    NOUNS. 

INFLECTION, 

59.  The  meaning  of  Latin  nouns  is  altered  by  In- 
llection ;  that  is,  by  changing  the  form  of  the  word, 
generally  the  endings,  to  denote  some  modification  of 
its  meaning,  or  to  show  its  relation  to  other  words. 
The  Inflection  of  nouns,  of  pronouns,  and  of  adjectives, 
is  called  Declension.  The  Inflection  of  verbs  is  called 
Conjugation. 

Stem  (uid  Suffix, 

60.  The  body  of  the  word,  to  which  the  suffix  is  attached, 
is  called  the  stem;  as,* 

militis  :  mllit-  is  the  stem,  and  -is  the  termination. 

When  the  stem  ends  in  a  vowel  and  the  suffix  begins  with 
a  vowel,  contraction  takes  place,  and  the  final  vowel  of  the 
stem  sometimes  disappears  ;  as, 

mensae :  the  stem  is  mensd-,  and  the  suffix  -i-s,  which  unite 
to  form  mensae,  the  s  being  dropped. 

1.  Each  case-form,  therefore,  contains  two  distinct  parts  : 
the  stem,  which  gives  tlie  general  menning  of  the  word ;  and 
the  case-svffix.  which  shows  the  relation  of  that  meaning  to 
some  other  word  ;  as,  in 

militis.  of  a  soldier :  the  general  idea,  soldier,  is  expressed  by 
the  stem  milit-;  the  relation  of,  by  the  suffix  -is. 

Obs.  It  may  be  found  convenient  to  divide  inflected  words  not 
only  into  stem  and  tea-mination,  but  into  base  and  termination,  the 
base^  being  the  part  of  the  word  that  remains  unchanged  by  inflec- 
tion;  as,  servus  (wliich  stands  for  servos),  a  slave,  gen.  servi,  of 
a  slave.  serv6-  is  the  stem,  -i  is  the  termination,  or  case-suffix ; 
the  o  is  dropped  before  i  to  form  servi,  of  a  slave;  but  serv-,  to 
which  the  case-endings  are  added,  remains  unchanged  by  inflection, 
and  may  be  called  the  base. 


LATIN   NOUNS.  4T 


Mo(llficatio7is  of  Nouns, 

61.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  nonns  have  Gender, 
Number,  Person,  and  Case. 

GENDER. 

62.  The  gender  of  English  nouns  is  determined  by 
their  meaning.^  Gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  determined 
either  by  their  meaning  or  by  their  endi7igs.  When  de- 
termined by  their  meaning,  it  is  called  Natural  G-ender ; 
when  by  their  endings,  Grammatical  Gender. 

63.  Rules  for  gender  according  to  meaning :  — 

1.  Names  of  male  beings  are  masculine  ;  as, 

Romulus,  llomulus  :  agricSla, /anwer;  equus,  horse. 

2.  Names  of  females  are  feminine  ;  as, 

Cornelia,  Cornelia  :  miilier,  woman ;  puella,  girl, 

3.  Some  nouns  without  7iatural  geyider  have  their  gender 
determined  by  their  meaning  ;  as  : 

(1)  Rivers,  winds,  months,  and  mountains  are  masculine ;  as, 

Tibgris,  the  Tiber ;  Aquilo,  north  wind ;  Aprilis,  April. 

(2)  Cities,  countries,  towns,  islands,  trees,  poems,  and 
gems  are  feminine  ;  as, 

Aegyptus,  Egypt;  Corinthus,  Corinth. 

(3)  Indeclinable  nouns  are  neuter  ;  as, 

fas,  divine  right ;  nihil,  nothing. 

NUMBER    AND    PERSON. 

64.  Latin  nouns  have  two  numbers,  singular  and 
plural ;  and  three  persons,  firsts  second^  and  third. 

CASES. 

65.  In  Latin  ^  the  same  noun  may  have  six  different 
forms  to  express  its  relation  to  other  words  ;  these  forms 
are  called  the  six  cases  of  the  noun.  The  names  of  the* 
cases  are :  — 


48  FIRST   STEPS   IN    LATIN. 

1.  The  Nominative,  the  case  of  the  subject  of  the  sentence. 
It  answers  the  question  ivhof  or  what?;  as, 

The  boy  reads.     Who  reads? —  The  hoy. 
The  fire  bw^ns.     What  burns?—  The  fire. 

Boy  andj^Ve  are,  therefore,  in  the  nominative  case. 

2.  The  Genitive,  usually  translated  into  English  by  the 
possessive  case,  or  by  the  preposition  of.  It  answers  the 
question  whose  f  of  whom?  ofivhat?;  as, 

The  man's  coat.     AVhose  coat? —  The  man's. 
The  heat  of  the  fire.     Of  what  ?  —  Of  the  fire. 
Man's  and  of  the  fire  are  genitives. 

3.  The  Dative,  usually  translated  by  the  prepositions  to 
or  fo7\    It  answers  the  question  to  or  for  whom  or  what?  ;  as. 

The  teacher  gives  a  book  to  the  boy.     To  whom? — To 
the  boy. 
To  the  boy  is,  therefore,  in  the  dative. 

4.  The  Accusative,  the  object  of  a  transitive  verb,  and  of 
many  Latin  prepositions.  It  names  the  object,  whom  ?  or 
what  ? ;  as. 

The  man  strikes  the  boy.     Strikes  whom? —  The  boy. 
The  child  fears  the  fire.     Fears  what? —  The  fire. 

Boy  and  fire  are  accusative. 

5.  The  Vocative,  or  the  case  used  in  addressing  a  person 
or  thing ;  as, 

O  boy !     O  fire ! 

The  fault,  dear  Brutus,  is  not  in  our  stars. 

Boy,  fire,  and  Brutus  are  in  the  vocative  case. 

6.  The  Ablative,  usually  translated  by  from,  with,  by,  in, 
or  at;  as. 

The  boy  strikes  the  hall  with  the  bat.    With  what  ?  —  With 
the  hat. 
Then  with  the  bat  is  the  ablative. 

Obs.  1.  The  Genitive,  Dative,  Accusative,  and  Ablative  are 
palled  the  oblique  cases. 

Obs.  2.  A  seventh  case,  the  Locative,  denoting  the  place  where, 
is  found  in  a  few  words. 


LATIN   NOUNS. 


49 


GENKKAL,    VIEW    OF     THE     CASES     ANI>     THEIK     ENGLISH 
EQUIVALENTS. 


Latin  Cas«. 

lU'latioji  to 
Other  Words. 

Correspoiidiiii^f 
Cano  ill  English. 

Aiiswer.s  wliat 
Ouestion. 

Nominative. 

Subject. 

Nominative. 

who  ?  or  what  f 

Genitive. 

Possessive,  or  of. 

Possession,  or  of 
with  objective. 

whose?  of  whom? 
of  what? 

Dative. 

Indirect  Object. 

Objective,  with 
to  or  for. 

To  or  for  — 
whom  ?  ox  what? 

Accusative. 

Direct  Object. 

Objective. 

whom  ?  or  what  ? 

Vocative. 

Case  of  Address. 

Independent. 

Used  in  addressing 
person  or  thing. 

Ablative. 

1 

Adverbial. 

Objective,  with 
with,  in,  from, 
or  by. 

With,  in,  from,  by, 

at  — 
whom?  or  what? 

DECLENSION. 

66.  Latin  nouns  have  five  Declensions,  which  are 
distinguished  by  the  final  letters  of  the  stem,  or  by  the 
terminations  of  the  genitive  singular ;  as, 


Declension. 

Genitive 
Eiulinsr. 

Characteristic. 

I. 
II. 

III. 

IV. 
V. 

ae 

-1     1 

us  (uis) 
ei 

a  =  a-stems.-^ 

6  =  o-stems. 

i  or  a  consonant 

=  consonant  or  /-stems. 
ii  =  w-stems. 
e  =  e-stems. 

Obs.  The  method  of  distinguishing  the  declension  by  the  end- 
ing of  the  genitive  singular  had  ])etter  be  adopted  at  first,  because 
it  is  used  in  dictionaries  and  vocabularies  to  desiunate  the  declen- 


50  FIKST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

sion,  and  because  the  use  of  the  stem  is  coufusing  to  young  pupils. 
The  plan  of  cutting  ofC  -rum  or  -urn  from  the  genitive  plural  in 
order  to  find  the  stem,  and  so  determine  the  declension,  presupposes 
that  the  pupil  is  already  able  to  decline  the  word. 

1 .  General  Rules  of  Declension  :  — 

(1)  Neuter  nouns  of  all  declensions  have  the  nominative,  accu- 

sative, and  vocative  singular  alike;  the  nominative, 
accusative,  and  vocative  plural  are  also  alike,  and  always 
end  in  a. 

(2)  The  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural  are  alike  in 

all  nouns  of  the  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  declensions, 

(3)  The  nominative  and  vocative  are  alike,  except  in  the  singular 

of  nouns  in  -us  of  the  second  declension. 

(4)  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  are  always  alike. 

(5)  The  genitive  plural  always  ends  in  -um. 

EXERCISES. 
Analyze  the  following  sentences.    State  the  Latin  case  to 
be  used  to  represent  each  noun  :  — 

1.  The  sailor  lias  a  cottage.  2.  The  cottage  of  the  sailor 
has  a  table.  3.  Galba  sees  the  gates  of  Home.  4.  Titus 
wounded  the  man  with  an  arrow.  5.  Titus  gave  the  book 
to  his  friend.  G.  The  sailors  of  Galba  wound  the  sailors  of 
Titus  with  arrows.  7.  The  soldiers  of  Caesar  defend  the 
towers  with  stones.  8.  Cicsar  sees  the  walls  of  Rome. 
9.  The  leaders  of  the  people  give  peace  to  the  city. 

NOTES    AND     (QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  base  is  the  same  as  the  stem  with  the  final  vowel  removed ; 
the  endings,  tliercfore,  contain  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem  and  the 
suffixes,  both  being  obscured  by  contraction.  If  the  stem  ends  in  a 
consonant,  then  the  stem  and  base  are  the  same,  and  tlie  endings  are 
the  simple  case-endings ;  as,  reg-is.  Rerj-  is  both  tlie  stem  and  tlie  base 
to  which  the  case-endings  may  be  attached  unchanged. 

2.  Note  that  gender  in  English  denotes  sex,  —  masculine  nouns 
denoting  males,  feminine  nouns  females,  and  neuter  nouns  neither  male 
nor  female.     In  Latin,  this  natural  distinction  of  gender  is  applied  only 


NOUNS.  —  FIRST    DECLENSION. 


51 


to  males  und  females ;  the  gender  of  all  other  nouns  depends  on  artificial 
distinctions,  and  is  determined  by  special  rules. 

3.  ICnglisli  nouns  have  few  changes  of  forms.  The  possessive  case 
is  the  only  one  that  always  has  a  special  form. 

4.  The  final  vowel  of  the  stem  is  called  the  stem-letter,  or  stem- 
characteristic. 

Define  inflection.  How  many  cases  have  nouns  ?  How  is  the  gender 
of  Latin  nouns  determined  1  What  is  meant  by  grammatical  gender  ? 
Name  the  cases.  What  is  inflection  ?  How  does  inflection  differ  from 
declension  1  Wliat  parts  of  speech  are  declined  ?  What  are  the 
properties  of  Latin  nouns  ?  Define  the  word  "  projierties."  How 
many  declensions  have  Latin  nouns?     Explain  the  meaning  of  stem; 


of  base. 


LESSON  XII. 

NOUNS.  -  riEST    DECLENSION. 

67.   Nouns  of  the  First  Declension  end  in  -a  and  -<?,i 
feminine  ;  -as  and  -es^^  masculine. 
Nouns  in  -a  ^  are  thus  declined:] 

PARADIGM. 


Casc8. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Case  Sndiiigs. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 
Voc. 

Abl.  1 

mensa,^  a  table.* 
mensae,  of  a  table. 
mensae,  to,  for  a  table. 
mensam,  a  table. 
mensa,  0  table. 
mensa,  icith,  from,  or 
bi/  a  table. 

mensae,  tables. 
menssiYmn,  of  tables. 
mensTs,  to,  for  tables. 
m.ensa,s,' tables. 
mensae,  0  tables. 
mensis,  icith,from,  or 
by  tables. 

-a 

-ae 

-ae 

-am 

-a 

^    a 

-ae 

-arum 

-is 

-as 

-ae 

-IS 

VOCABUI.AKY.s5 

Squa,  -ae,^  f.,'^  water.  nauta,  -ae,  m.,  sailor. 

puella,  -ae,  f.,  (jirl.  agricola,  -ae,  'm.,  farmer. 

insiila, -ae,  f.,  island.  victoria, -ae,  f.,  victory. 


porta,  -ae,  r.,  gate. 


umbra,  -ae,  f.,  ^Lade. 


r 


52 


FIRST    STEPS    IX    LATIN. 


EXERCISES. 

Decline  the  following  words  like  mensa.  Give  the  mean- 
ing,^ the  case,  the  stem,  the  gender,  the  number,  and  the 
case-endings  of  each  ;  — 

1.  insiilae.  4.  puellis.  7.  puella. 

2.  agricolae.  ,         5.  puellae.  8,  nautae. 

3.  uautaiMi.         .6.  agricolarumv  9>  aquae. 

68.  The^eclensioiT'of  the  following" Gr6ek  nouns  is  in- 
serted for  convenience  of  reference  ;  they  should  be  omitted 
for  the  present :  — 


Cast's. 

coinetes,  m., 

co7iiet. 

tpitome,  F., 
epitome. 

Aeneas,  m., 

.Eneas. 

NoM. 

cometes 

epitome 

Aeneas 

c 

Gen. 

cometae 

epitomes 

Aeneae 

s 

DAT. 

Ace. 
Voc. 

A  HI.. 

cometae 
cometen 
cometa 
cometa 

epitomae 
epitomen 
epitome 
epitome 

Aeneae 
Aenean  (-am) 
Aenea 
Aenea 

Num. 

cometae 

epitomae 

Gen. 

cometarum 

epitomarum 

rt 

Dat. 

cometis 

epitomis 

^ 

Arc. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

cometas 
cometae 
cometis 

epitomas 
epitomae 
epitomis 

Syn.    Porta  is  tlie  f/ate  of  a  city ;   janua,  the  door  (street-door) 
of  a  house  ;  val-vae,  /oldinf/-doors  in  a  temple  and  fine  buildings. 


NOTES    AN1>     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Nouns  in  -e,  -as,  and  -es  are  Greek  words,  mostly  proper  names. 

2.  All  nouns  in  -a  are  feminine  unless  they  denote  males ;  as,  nauta, 
a  sailor,  is  masculine  by  signification.    (See  63.) 

3.  The  base  of  mensa  is  mens-,  and  to  tliis  the  case-endings  are 
added  to  form  the  cases.  The  stem  of  mensa  is  mensa-;  the  final  -a-  of 
the  stem  disappears  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural. 


SUBJECT   AND  PREDICATE.  53 

4.  As  there  is  no  article  in  Latin,  meiisa  may  mean  tal)la,  a  table,  or 
the  table,  according  to  the  sense  required. 

5.  The  pupil  should  learn  the  vocabularies  so  well  that  he  can  give 
at  once  the  English  when  the  Latin  is  pronounced,  or  the  Latin  when 
the  English  is  pronounced. 

0.  The  ending  -ae  is  the  case-ending  of  the  genitive.    (See  61.) 

7.  In  the  vocabularies,  m.  indicates  the  mascxdine  gender;  r,,  the 
feminine;  and  N.,  the  neuter. 

8.  In  translating  the  exercises,  give  all  possible  meanings  of  each 
form.  For  example,  iusillae  may  be  genitive  or  dative  singular,  or 
nominative  or  vocative  plural :  of  an  island,  to  or  for  an  island,  ye 
islands,  or  0  islands. 

How  do  you  distinguish  nouns  of  the  first  declension  1  How  the 
gender?  How  do  you  find  the  stem?  (This  can  be  found  by  taking 
away  the  case-ending  of  the  genitive  plural,  -rum.)  How  do  you  accent 
agric61ae  1  What  is  the  quantity  of  the  penult  of  puella  1  How 
many  numbers  have  Latin  nouns  ?  How  many  cases  1  Name  them. 
How  many  genders  1 


LESSON   XIII. 

SUBJECT    AND    PEEDIOATE. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  agricfila  v6cat,  the  farmer  calls. 

2.  agric61ae  v6cant,  the  farmers  call. 

3.  puellae  laudant,  the  girls  praise. 

Obs.  In  the  sentence  the  farmer  calls,  farmer  is  the  subject, 
and  is  in  the  nominative  case ;  calls  is  the  predicate.  Study  the 
other  examples,  and  note  (1)  if  the  subject  is  singular,  the  verb  is 
singular;  (2)  if  the  subject  is  plural,  the  verb  must  also  be  plural; 
and  (3)  that  the  subject  and  the  predicate  agree  in  person  as  well 
as  in  number.     Hence  the  following  rules  :  — 

SUBJECT -NOMINATIVE . 

69.  Rule  T.  —  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  put 
in  the  nominative  case. 


54  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

AGREEMENT    OF    THE    VERB. 

70.  Rule  II. 
ject-nominative  in  niiiuber  and  person. 

71.  Model  for  parsing  nouns  :  — 

agric61a  v6cat,  the  fanner  calls  :  agric61a  is  a  masculine  noini, 
masculine  by  signification  (64)i ;  first  declension,  because  it  has  -ae 
in  the  genitive  singular;  stem,  agrlcold- ;  declined,  sing,  a^nco/a, 
ac/ncolae,  agricolae,  agricolam,  agricula,  agncold,  plural  agricolae, 
ar/rtcoldrum,  agricolis,  agricolds,  agricolae,  agricolls.  It  is  nomina- 
tive singular,  and  is  the  subject  of  v6cat,  according  to  Rule  L : 
Tlie  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  in  the  nominatice  case. 

72.  Model  for  parsing  verbs  :  — 

agricSla  v6cat,  the  farmer  calls :  v6cat  is  a  transitive  verb  of 
the  first  conjugation,  indicative  mode,  present  tense,  third  person 
singular,  to  agree  with  the  subject  agricSIa,  according  to  Rule  II. : 
A  finite  verb  agrees  with  the  subject-noniinatice  in  number  and  person. 

VOCABULARY. 

regina,  -ae,  f.,  queen.  ■pH^no, -are,  fight. 

scriba,  -ae,  m.,  clerk,  con-firmo,  -are,  establish. 

delecto,"  -are,  delight.  porto,  -are,  carry. 

occiipo,  -are,  take  possession  of,  seize,  done,  -are,  gice. 

EXERCISES. 

Analyze  the  following  sentences  ;  parse  each  word  ;  trans- 
late into  English :  — 

1.  regina  laudat.^  4.  Laudas.'* 

2.  scribae  portant.  5.  Laudamus. 

3.  puellae  laudant.  G.  Reglnae  donant. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  We  fight,  tliey  fight,  he  fights.  2.  The"^  sailor  calls. 
3.  The  queen  praises.  4.  The  queens  praise.  5.  We  praise. 
6.  They  establish. 


SUBJECT    AND    OBJECT.  55 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  These  figures  refer  to  sections  in  this  book. 

2.  Give  the  infinitive  of  each  verb. 

3.  When  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  expressed,  the  pronoun,  although 
contained  in  the  verb,  is  not  needed  in  English ;  thus,  regina  laudat, 
the  queen  praises,  not  tlie  queen  she  praises. 

4.  The  subject  of  laudas  is  implied  in  the  ending  of  the  verb. 

5.  Remember  that  the  article  is  not  to  be  translated. 

6.  As  to  the  order  of  words  in  the  Latin  sentences,  the  subject 
usually  stands  first,  but  the  predicate  may  be  placed  before  the  sub- 
ject for  the  sake  of  emphasis. 

What  is  a  transitive  verb  ?  Define  subje(;t ;  predicate.  What  part 
of  speech  must  the  subject  always  be  ?     Why  is  the  u  in  puella  short? 


LESSON   XIV. 

SUBJECT    AND    OBJECT. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  agrlc61a  nautas  v6cat,  the  farmer  calls  the  sailors. 

2.  regina  puellas  laudat,  the  queen  praises  the  girls. 

3.  amicitiam  confirmat,  he  establishes  friendship. 

Obs.  In  the  sentence  the  farmer  calls  the  sailors,  farmer  is 
the  subject,  calls  the  predicate,  and  sailors,  which  completes  the 
meaning  of  the  verb  by  telling  ichom  or  luhat  the  farmer  calls,  is 
the  direct  object.  Notice  that  this  object  in  English  is  in  the 
objective  case,  and  follows  the  verb  calls ;  the  direct  object  in  Latin 
is  in  the  accusative  case,  and  precedes  the  verb.     Hence  the  follow- 


DTRECT    OBJECT. 

73.  Rule  III.  —  The  direct  object  of  a  transitive 
verb  is  put  in  the  accusative. 

a.  Many  verbs  that  are  transitive  in  Latin  are  translated  into 
English  by  a  verb  and  preposition ;  as,  pecuniam  postiilat,  he  asks 
for  (demands)  money. 


56   '  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

74.    Model  for  parsing  the  object :  — 

agricSla  nautas  v6cat,  the  farmer  calls  the  sailors :  nautas  is  a 
masculine  noun  of  the  first  declension,  masculine  by  signification, 
and  first  declension  because  it  has  -ae  in  the  genitive  singular; 
stem,  nautCi-;  declined,  sing,  nauta,  nautae,  nautae,  nautam,  nauta, 
nnutd,  plural  nautae,  nautdrum,  nautls,  nautas,  nautae,  nautls.  It  is 
in  the  accusative  plural,  the  object  of  v6cat,  according  to  Rule  III. : 
The  direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the  accusative. 

VOCABUT.AKY. 

filia,!  -ae,  f.,  daughter.  pikio,^  prepare. 

pecunia,  -ae,  f.,  money.  ^ro.  plough. 

Sniicitia,  -ae,  f.,  friendship.  do,"^  give. 

gpisttila,  -ae,  f.,  lettei'.  exspecto,  expect. 

EXERCISES. 

Analyze  the  following  sentences  ;  parse  each  word  ;  trans- 
late into  English  :  — 

1.  Agricolae^  nantam  vocant.  2.  Vocamus.  3.  Regina 
filiam''' aniat.    4.  Regina  amicitiam  confirinat.    5.  Laudamus. 

6.  Fuella  epistiilam  exspectabat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  queen  calls.  2.  The  queen  calls  her''  daughter. 
3.  They  establish  friendship.  4.  They  praise,  they  call, 
they    prepare.       5.    The    queen    praises.       G.    We    praise. 

7.  The  girls  are  expecting'  letters. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  A  few  words  of  the  first  doclension  have  the  dative  and  ablative 
plural  in  -abus;  as,  filia,  a  daughter ;  dea,  a  goddess. 

2.  Write  tlie  infinitive. 

3.  The  infinitive  of  do  is  dSre  ;  short  a  before  -re. 

4.  See  63. 

6.  Render  her  daughter.  The  pronouns  his,  her,  their,  are  seklom 
expressed  in  Latin,  wlicn  no  confusion  coukl  arise  from  their  omission. 
In  translating,  they  are  to  be  supplied  from  the  context. 


NOUNS. 


SECOND   DECLENSION. 


57 


6.  Not  to  be  translated. 

7.  Remember  that  tlie  indicative  has  three  forms  in  Engllsli. 
Whicli  cases  of  the  first  declension  are  alike  in  the  singular  ?   Whicli 

in  the  plural  1  Write  the  ablative  singular  of  filia.  How  many  ways 
can  you  translate  v6cant  ?  Name  the  stem  of  vocant.  Is  vdcant  a 
complete  sentence  ?  why  ?  What  is  a  sentence  1  What  is  the  case  of 
the  direct  object  in  Latin  ^  What  tenses  express  incomplete  action  ? 
Where  does  the  direct  object  usually  stand  ? 


LESSON   XV. 

NOUNS.  -  SECOND    DECLENSION. 

75.   Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension  end  in  -<?r,  -zV, 
-MS,  and  -OS,  masculine ;  -um  and  -on^  neuter. 

a.  Those  in  -os  or  -on  are  Greek  words,  chiefly  proper  nouns. 

1 .  Nouns  in  -us  are  declined  as  follows  :  — 

PAKAI>TGM. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

dominus,  a  lord. 

domini,  lords. 

Gen. 

domini,  of  a  lord. 

dominorum,  of  lords. 

Dat. 

domino,  to  or  for  a  lord. 

dominis,  to  or  for  lords. 

Ace. 

dominum,  a  lord. 

dominos,  lords. 

Voc. 

domine,  0  lord. 

domini,  0  lords. 

Vnr    > 

domino,  ivith,  from,  or  hy  a 

dominis,  with,  from,  or  hi/ 

lord. 

lords. 

2.  The  stem  of  nonns  of  the  second  declension  ends  in  -o- ; 
thns  the  stem  of  d6ininus  is  dominS-. 

3.  The  cliaracteristic  -o-  becomes  -?;-  in  the  nominative  of 
nouns  in  -us  or  -um  ;  it  disappears  in  the  endings  -i  and  -is 
(for  -o-i  and  -o-is).  The  nominative  singular  of  dSminus 
was  originally  dSminos. 


58 


FIRST    STEPS    IX    LATIN. 


4.  Tlie  case-endings  are  as  follows  :  — 


Cases. 

Siiigvilar. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

-US 

-i 

Gen, 

-i 

-orum 

DAT. 

-5 

-is 

Ace. 

-um 

-OS 

Voc. 

-e 

-i 

Ahl. 

-5 

-is 

5.  The  genitive  of  nouns  in  -ins  and  -iuin  ends  in  a  single 
-I:  as,  filius,  gen.  fill;  H6ratius,  geii.  Horati.  The  vocative 
of  proper  names  in  -ius  contract  -ie  into  -I  witliout  change  of 
accent:  as,  H6rati,  0  Iloratius;  also,  filius  has  fill  in  the 
vocative. 

G.  Nearly  all  nouns  in  -us  arc  mascvlinp ;  but  the  names 
of  trees^  2)lants^  etc.,  are  feminine  by  the  general  rule 
(63.3(2)). 

VOCABULARY. 


servus,  -i,  .m.,  slave. 
Smicus,  -1,  M.,  friend. 
Sciilus,  -1,  M.,  eye. 
Gallus,  -1,  M.,  a  Gaul. 
expugno,  storm^  captwe. 


fHius,  -1,  M.,  son. 
hortus,  -1,  M.,  (jar den. 
postiilo,  demand. 
Ronianus,  -i,  m.,  a  Roman, 
pugno,  fght. 


EXERCISES. 

Analyze  the  following  sentences  ;  parse  each  word  ;  trans- 
late into  Eno-lish  :  — 


S.  O.  V.  T. 

1.  Regina  amicum  amat. 

2.  Amici  servos  vocabunt. 

3.  Servos  laudabimus. 


4.  AmTcos  amabatis. 

5.  Amici  amicos  amaut. 
G.  Servi  pugnant. 


NOUNS. 


SECOND   DECLENSION. 


59 


LESSON   XVI. 
NOOTS.-SEOOro    DECLENSION. 
76.    Nouns  in  -^r,  -zV,  are  declined  as  follows  : 

TAKAniGM. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

magisfer,  a.  iiuistcr. 

magistri,  masters. 

Gen. 

magistri,  of  a  inasfcr. 

magistrorum,  of  masters. 

DAT. 

magistro,  to  ov  for  a  m 

aslcr. 

magistris,  to  or  for  masters. 

Ace. 

magistrum,  a  nwster. 

magistros,  masters. 

Voc. 

magister,  0  master. 

magistri,  0  masters. 

AlJL.  ^ 

magistro,  vith,fro)n,  oi 

h)j  (I 

magistris,  ■)rith,frnm,  or  hy 

mnsfer. 

masters. 

NoM. 

puer,  a  hoi/. 
pueri,  (fa  hoij. 

pueri,  hoys. 

Gen. 

puer5rum,  of  hoys. 

Dat. 

puero,  to  ovfor  a  boi/. 

pueris,  to  or  for  hoys. 

Ace. 

puerum,  hot/. 

puer 5s,  hoys. 

Voc. 

puer,  0  hoy. 

pueri,  0  hoys. 

AliL.  i 

puer5,  icith,  from,   or 

by   a 

pueris,   in'th,  from,   or   hy 

hoy. 

hoys. 

1 .  deus,  a  god  (stem  deo-) ,  is  declined  as  follows 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NoM. 

deus 

dei,  dii,  di 

Gen. 

dei 

deorum 

Dat. 

deo 

deis,  diis,  dis 

Aec. 

deum. 

deos 

Voc. 

deus 

dei,  dii,  di 

Abe. 

deer 

deis,  diis,  dis 

2.  The  endings  of  the  nominative  and  A^ocativc  singular 
are  wanting  in  nouns  in  -er ;  thus,  puer  is  for  pugrus;  the 
e  in  puer  belongs  to  the  stem,  and  is  not  dropped.  Most 
other  nouns  of  the  second  declension  whose  stem  ends  in  -ro-, 


60  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

preceded  by  another  consonant,  drop  us  and  insert  e  in  the 
nominative  ;  as,  ager,  stem  agro-.  The  -us  of  the  nominative 
and  vocative  has  been  dropped,  and  e  inserted.  The  follow- 
ing nouns  retain  e  in  all  the  cases:  viz.,  puer,  boy;  s6cer, 
father -iyi-law ;  gener,  son-in-laic ;  vesper,  evening;  liberi 
(used  only  in  plural),  cJiildren;  and  a  few  others. 


The    Genitive   and   the   Appositive, 

Kx  A  mpi.es. 

1.  Labienus  legatus,  Lahienus,  the  lieutenant. 

2.  Filia^  reginae,  the  daughter  of  the  queen,  or  the  queen's  daughter. 

3.  Filia  amici,  the  daughter  of  the  friend,  or  the  friend^ s  daughter. 

Obs.  In  the  first  example,  observe  that  the  noun  lieutenant  de- 
notes the  same  person  or  thing  as  Labienus ;  it  modi^es  Labienus 
by  telling  what  Labienus  is  meant.  It  has  the  same  case  and  the 
same  number,  and  is  said  to  be  in  apposition  (a  modifier  in  near 
position) . 

In  the  second  example,  of  the  queen,  or  queen's,  limits  daughter 
by  telling  tohat  or  ichose  daughter  is  spoken  of,  and  is,  therefore,  a 
modifier  of  it.  The  three  examples  repi'esent  two  kinds  of  noun 
modifiers,  —  the  possessive  and  tlie  explanatory:  or,  in  Latin,  the 
genitive  and  the  explanatory.  In  Latin,  note  that  the  limiting  word 
in  the  first  example  is  in  the  same  case  as  the  word  it  limits ;  that 
it  denotes  the  same  person  or  tiling  as  the  noun,  or  name,  preced- 
ing. In  the  second  and  third  examples  note  :  (1)  that  the  limiting 
word  is  in  the  genitive ;  (2)  that  it  denotes  a  different  person  or 
thing  from  that  denoted  by  the  limited  noun ;  and  (3)  that  the 
relation  of  this  genitive  to  the  limited  noun  is  expressed  in  English 
either  by  of  or  by  the  possessive.  Notice,  finally,  that  the  genitive 
stands  after  the  noun  which  it  limits.  It  may,  however,  be  placed 
before  the  noun  for  the  sake  of  emphasis;  as,  reginae  filia,  the 
queen's  daughter.     Ileuce  the  following  rules:  — 


APPOSITIVE. 

77.  Rule  IV.  —  A  noun  used  to  describe  another 
noun  or  pronoun,  and  denoting  the  same  person  or 
thing,  is  put  in  tlie  same  case. 

1.  This  construction  is  called  apposition,  and  the  limiting 
noun  an  appositive. 


NOUNS.  —  SECOND   DECLENSION.  61 


GENITIVE    WITH    NOUNS. 

78.  Rule  V.  —  A  noun  limiting-  the  nieaninj?  of 
another  noun,  ami  denoting-  a  different  person  or 
thing-,  is  put  in  the  genitive. 

VOCABULARY. 

Sger,  Sgri,  M.,Jield.  campus,  -i,  field. 

ggner,  g6n6ri,  m.,  son-in-law.  fSber,  fabri,  m.,  smith. 

vir,  vii'i,  M.,  man.  enuntio,  report. 

liber,  libri,  m.,  book.  p6pfllus,  -i,  m.,  people. 

narro,  narrate,  tell.  vasto,  lay  waste. 

vicus,  -1,  M.,  village.  schSla,  -ae,  f.,  school. 

Syn.  Ager  is  afield  in  general ;  arvum,  the  ploughed  Jield ;  and 
campus,  the  enclosed  Jield,  ov  plain. 


EXERCISES. 

Analyze  the  following  sentences  ;  parse  each  word  ;  trans- 
late into  English  :  — 

1.  Servi  agrnm  arribunt.  2.  Pueri  vocant.  3.  Vir!  lau- 
dant.  4.  Filiam^  reginae  laudant.  5.  Gener  tirat.  6.  Ma- 
gistiT  vocant.       7.   Fllium^  vocat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  We  are  ploughing^  the  field.''  2.  They  call  the  boys. 
3.  They  praise  the  man's  sons.  4.  They  were  praising  the 
men.     5.  The  queen's  daughter  is  calling. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  What  is  the  dative  plural  ? 

2.  Form  the  genitive  and  voeative. 

3.  How  many  forms  has  the  indicative  present  1 

4.  Notice  the  order  of  the  Latin  words. 

What  endings  do  noims  in  -/•  drop  ?  Is  the  vowel  u  in  puer  long  or 
short  7     Which  syllable  of  Hdratius  is  accented  ?     Of  H6rati  ? 


62 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON    XVII. 

NOUNS.  -  SECOND    DECLENSION. 
79.    Nouns  in  -um  are  declined  as  follows :  — 


PAKAWIGM. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

bellum,  icar. 

bella,  loars. 

Gen. 

belli,  of  war. 

bellorum,  of  tears. 

DAT. 

bello,  to  or  for  war. 

bellls,  to  or  for  wars. 

Ace. 

bellum,  ruar. 

bella,  ivars. 

Voc. 

bellum,  0  icar. 

bella,  0  wars. 

Abl. 

bello,  icilh,from,  or  hij  tear. 

bellis,  with,  from,  or  by 

wars. 

1.  Like  bellum,  decline  :  — 

1.  templum,  temple. 

2.  donum,  (jift. 


3.  exemplum,  example. 

4.  oppidum,  totvn. 


Dative    Case   after    Transitive    Verbs* 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Librum  puSro  dat,  he  gives  the  book  to  the  hoy. 

2.  Galba  Belgis  insidias  pErat,  Galha  prepares  snares  for  the 

Belgians. 

Obs.  In  the  sentence,  he  gives  the  book  to  the  bog,  or  he  gives  the 
hog  the  hook,  note  that  the  verb  gives  is  transitive,  and  that  it  is 
followed  by  the  direct  object,  book,  in  the  accusative,  and  an  in- 
direct object,  bog,  in  the  dative.     Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 

INDIRECT    OBJECT. 

80.  Rule  VL  —  The  indirect  object  of  an  action 
is  put  in  the  dative. 

1 .  After  many  transitive  verbs  the  dative  of  the  indirect 
object  is  used,  together  with  the  accusative  of  the  direct. 


NOUNS. —  SECOND  DECLENSION.  63 

2.  The  indirect  object  is  Jilso  used  after  some  intransitive 
and  passive  verbs.  But  some  verbs,  transitive  in  English, 
are  intransitive  in  Latin  ;  and  some,  intransitive  in  English, 
are  transitive  in  Latin. 

VOCABUIiARY. 

littgra,  -ae,  f.,  letter  {of  alphabet),  festino,  hasten. 

littSrae   (pi.),  -arum,  f.,  letter^  via,  -ae,  f.,  way,  road. 

epistle.  castrum,   -i,  n.,  fort,    pi. 
insidiae  (l)l.),  -arum,  snares,  am-  camp. 

hush.  Belgae,  -arurn,  m.,  Belgian. 

oppidum,  -1,  N.,  town.  jugum,  -i,  n.,  yoke. 

r6sa,  -ae,  f.,  rose.  monstro,  show. 

matrona,  -ae,  f.,  married  tvoman.  porta,  -ae,  f.,  gate. 

consilium,  -i,  n.,  counsel,  plan.  dono,  give. 

auxilium,  -i,  n.,  aid.  im-ploro,  implore. 

Syn.  Pugri,  children,  as  a  class  ;  libgri,  children,  with  reference 
to  their  parents. 

EXERCISES. 

AnaWze  the  following  sentences  ;  parse  each  word  ;  trans- 
late into  English .  — 

1.  Agricola  viam  nautls  monstrat.  2.  Matrona  rosas 
fUiabns  dant.  3.  Filia^  reginae  puellls  libros  donabit.^ 
4.  Titus  Labienus  legatus  consilia  Gallorum  enunciat.  5. 
RomanTs  consilia  Belgarum  enunciabit.  6.  liomanl  oppida 
expugnabunt. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  gave  the  book  to  the  boy.  2.  Labienus  was  storm- 
ing the  town.  3.  We  report  the  plans  of  the  Gauls.  4.  We 
report  the  plans  of  the  Gauls  to  the  Romans.  5.  The}' 
sliow  the  wa}'  to  the  men. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 
1.  Filia  is  the  subject,  which  is  modified  by  reginae;  donablt  is 
the  simple  predicate,  modified  by  the  direct  object  libros,  and  the  in- 
direct object  puellls. 


64  FIKST    STEPS    IK   LATIN. 

2.  Note  the  order  of  the  words  :  the  indirect  object  usually  precedes 
the  direct. 

What  nouns  of  the  second  declension  are  neuter  ?  What  is  the 
difference  in  the  manner  of  declining  mSgister  and  puer  i  What 
cases  are  alike  in  neuter  nouns  ? 


LESSON    XVIII. 

PKEPOSITIONS. 

81.   Latin  Prepositions  are  used  either  with  the  Ac- 
cusative or  with  the  Ablative. 


EXAMPLES. 

1.  in  Galliam,  into  Gaul. 

2.  in  Gallia,  in  Gaul. 

3.  cum  virls,  ivitk  (in  company  witlt)  the  men. 

4.  ex  (or  e)  provincia, //-o?/*  (out  of)  the  jrroi-ince. 

5.  per  opplda,  through  the  towns. 

Obs.  Note  that  the  preposition  in,  with  the  accusative,  means 
i7ito ;  with  the  ablative,  it  means  in.  per  means  through,  and  is 
followed  by  the  accusative ;  cum  is  followed  by  the  ablative,  and 
means  with  (in  company  with). 


VOCABULARY. 

cum,  prep.  w.  abl.,  with.  provincia,  -ae,  t.,  province. 

de,  prep.  w.  abl.,  from,  concern-  sine,  prep.  w.  abl.,  loithout. 

ing,  for.  Gallia,  -ae,  f.,  Gaul, 

e}  ex,  prep.  w.  abl., /rom,  oat  <f.  in,  prep.  w.  ace,  into;  w.  abl., 
a,i  ab,  prep.  w.  abl.,  from,  away  in  or  on. 

from.  ambiilo,  iimlk. 

ad,  prep.  w.  ace,  to,  towards.  hSbito,  dwell  in. 

frumentum,  -i,  n.,  grain.  porto,  carry. 

ora,  -ae,  f.,  coast,  shore.  comporto,  collect. 


PREPOSITIONS.  65 


EXERCISES. 

Ana,l3'ze  the  following  seuteuces  ;  parse  each  word  ;  trans- 
late into  English :  — 

1.  Frumentum  in  provinciam^  portant.  2.  In  oppido 
habitabat.  3.  Magister  cum  puerls  in  agro  ambulat.  4.  Vir 
ab  msCilae  ora  ambiilat.  5.  Cum  Belgls  amicitiam  confir- 
mant.  6.  Frumenta  ex  agris  comportant.  7.  Auxilium  a 
viris  implorant.     8.  Romani  agros  vastabunt. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  dwell  in  the  town.  2.  In  the  province.  3.  Into 
the  province.  4.  He  conveys  grain  from  the  fields.  5.  In 
the  town.  6.  Into  the  town.  7.  He  conveys  the  grain  into 
the  town.  8.  He  walks  in  the  field  with  (his)'^  son.  9.  They 
walk  away  from  the  shore.  10.  With  the  Gauls.  11.  He 
establishes  friendship  with  the  Romans. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  a  and  e  are  used  only  before  Avords  beginning  with  a  consonant; 
ab  and  ex  before  either  a  vowel  or  a  consonant. 

2.  A  preposition  with  its  noun  is  a  phrase;  when  the  phrase  limits  a 
verb,  as  it  does  in  this  case,  it  is  called  an  adverbial  phrase ;  when  it 
limits  a  noun,  it  is  an  adjective  jihrase.  No  special  model  is  necessary 
for  parsing  nouns  with  prepositions. 

Obs,  Observe  the  distinction  between  the  prepositions  in  and  ex,  and 
ad  and  ab.  in  (with  tlie  accusative)  and  ex  denote  motion  to  and//o//i 
the  inside  of  a  place ;  ad  and  ab  (or  a)  denote  motion  to  and  from  the 
outside  of  a  place.  Thus,  venit  in  Italiam,  when  one  comes  into  Itabj  ,- 
ex  Italia,  when  one  comes  out  of  Itxdij ;  but  ad  Italiam,  to  Italij,  when 
there  is  no  notion  of  entering  into  Italy  conveyed;  just  so  ab  Italia, 
away  from  Italy,  when  it  is  simply  expressed  that  he  came  away  from 
Italy. 

3.  Words  in  parenthesis  are  not  to  be  translated. 

Which  cases  do  prepositions  govern?  Mention  a  preposition  tliat 
governs  the  accusative.  What  kind  of  a  phrase  is  a  preposition  and 
its  noun  ? 


66 


FIRST  STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON    XIX. 

ADJECTIVES. -FIRST    AND    SEOOND    DEOLElfSIONS. 

82.  Adjectives  are  words  used  to  describe  nouns ;  and 
lis  nouns  are  of  different  genders,  adjectives  are  declined 
to  agree  with  the  genders  of  the  noun. 

1 .  Adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  have 
one  form  for  the  masculine  gender,  another  for  tlie  feminine, 
and  a  third  for  the  neuter.     Thus  :  — 

The  masculine  is  declined  like  dominus. 
The  feminine  is  declined  like  meiisa. 
The  neuter  is  declined  like  bellum. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  vir  b6nus,  a  f/ood  man.  3.  viri  b6ni,  good  men. 

2.  regina  b6na,  a  good  queen.         4.  viros  bSnos,  good  men. 

5.  templum  magnum,  a  great  temple. 

Obs.  In  these  examples,  note  that  the  adjectives  are  all  in  the 
same  gender,  number,  and  case  as  the  nouns.  Hence  the  following 
rule :  — 

agrp:ement  of  adjectives. 

83.  Rule  VII.  —  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns 
in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

1.  Declension  of  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declen- 
sions (stems  ending  in  -6-  or  -d-)  is  as  follows  :  — 


PARADIGM.  — 

-bSnus,  good. 

Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

XOM. 

bonus 

bona 

bonum 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Gek. 

boni 

bonae 

boni 

bonorum 

bonarum 

bonorum 

DAT. 

bono 

bonae       bono 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

Acc. 

bonum 

bonam     bonum 

bonos 

bonas 

bona 

Voc. 

bone 

bona      I  bonum 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Abl. 

bono 

bona         bono 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

ADJECTIVES. 


67 

it 


2.  Decline  together  murus  altus,  a  high  ivall. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

murus  altus,  a  high  trail , 

muri  alti,  high  iral/s. 

Gkn. 

muri  altl,  of  a  hi(jh  icalL 

murdrum  altorum,  of  high  walls. 

DAT. 

muro  alto,  to  or  for  a  hi<jh  ivall. 

muris  altis,  to  or  for  high  walls. 

Ace. 

murum  altum,  a  hiijh  imll. 

muros  altds,  high  walls. 

Voc. 

mure  alte,  0  hiyh  icall. 

muri  alti,  0  high  iralls. 

Abl. 

j  mur5  alto,  with,  from,  or  by 

muris  altis,  with,  from,  or  bg 

\       a  high  iraJI. 

high  Willis. 

3.  Adjectives  usually  stand  after  tbeir  nouns,  but  an  em- 
phatic adjective  may  stand  Ixfore  the  noun. 

4.  Adjectives  are  often  used  as  nouns,  especially  in  the 
plural  masculine  or  neuter  :  as,  bom,  good  men ;  multa  (neut. 
■plur.),  many  things;  omnia,  all  things. 

84.   Model  for  parsing  an  adjective  :  — 

reginam  b6nam  laudo,  /  praise  the  good  queen :  b5nam  is  an 
adjective  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  ;  stems,  bono-  and 
hand-;  declined,  singular  honus,  bona,  honum,  etc.;  plural  boni, 
bonae,  bona,  etc.  It  is  in  the  accusative  feminine  singular,  and 
agrees  with  reginam,  according  to  Rule  VII. :  Adjectives  agree  with 
their  nouns  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


VOCABUI.ARY. 


multus,  -a,  -um,  mamj. 
ndvus,  -a,  -um,  new. 
carus,  -a,  -um.,  dear. 
altus,  -a,  -um,  high  or  deep. 
magnus,  -a,  -um,  large. 
fliivius,  -1,  :m.,  river. 
rapidus,  -a,  -um,  swift. 


discipulus,  -1,  M.,  pupil. 
murus,  -1,  i\i.,  wall. 
lacrima,  -ae,  f.,  tear. 
Rhenus,  -i,  m.,  BJiine  (river). 
ripa,  -ae,  f.,  bayik. 
latus,  -a,  -um,  broad. 
verus,  -a,  -um,  true. 


Syx.  Murus  denotes  any  tvall ;  paries  (gen.  -gtis),  icall  of  a 
house;  nioenia  (gen.  -orum),  wall  of  a  city  to  protect  from  the 
enemy. 


68  rillST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

85.  Decline  together  tlie  following,  making  the  adjective 
agree  with  the  noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

1.  oppidum  munitum,  a  fortified  tovm. 

2.  puer  bonus,  a  good  chUd. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  MultTs  cum  lacrimTs.  2.  In^  provinciam  magnam. 
3.  Per  multos  agros.  4.  Cum  servis  bonis.  5.  Trans- 
Rhenum  piignat.  6.  Importamus  frumentum  in  Galliam. 
7.  Magister  bonus  dat  librum  novum  caro  discipiilo.^  8.  Ad 
ripam  Rlieni. 

Translate  i'nto  Latin  :  — 

1.  Of  the  high  walls.  2.  Across  the  broad  river.  3.  The 
master  gives  the  book  to  the  good  boy.  4.  With  many  men. 
5.  With  good  slaves.  6.  Across  the  broad  rivers.  7.  The 
good  girl  loves  the  queen. 

Syn.  MSgister  (mSgis,  greater)  is  a  master  of  a  school,  of  a 
feast,  etc. ;  dSminus,  master  of  a  family,  or  of  slaves. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Note  the  meaning  of  in,  followed  by  the  accusative. 

2.  The  preposition  trans  is  followed  by  the  accusative,  and  means 
across. 

3.  The  pupil  is  expected  to  analyze  the  sentences,  to  point  out  the 
modifiers  of  the  subject  and  of  the  predicate,  and  to  parse  each  word. 

What  is  an  adjective  ?  Of  what  declensions  are  adjectives "?  The 
rule  for  the  agreement  of  adjectives  'i 


LESSON   XX. 

ADJECTIVES. -riEST    AND    SECOND    DECLENSIONS. 

86.  Besides  adjectives  in  -us,  -a,  -um,  there  are  others 
of  three  terminations  in  -er,  -a,  -urn.  They  are  declined 
as  follows :  — 


ADJECTIVES. 


69 


PARADIGM.  —  uiger,  hhick. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

niger 

nigri 

nigro 

nigrum 

niger 

nigr5 

nigra 

nigrae 

nigrae 

nigrum 

nigra 

nigra 

nigrum 

nigri 

nigro 

nigrum 

nigrum 

nigro 

nigri 

nigrorum 

nigris 

nigr5s 

nigri 

nigris 

nigrae 

nigrarum 

nigris 

nigras 

nigrae 

nigris 

nigra 

nigrorum 

nigris 

nigra 

nigra 

nigris 

t§ner,  lender'. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Akl. 

tener 

teneri 

tenero 

tenerum 

tener 

tenero 

tenera 

tenerae 

tenerae 

teneram 

tenera 

tenera 

tenerum 

teneri 

tenerd 

tenerum 

tenerum 

tenero 

teneri 

tener5rum 

teneris 

teneros 

teneri 

teneris 

tenerae 

tenerarum 

teneris 

teneras 

tenerae 

teneris 

tenera 

tenerorum 

teneris 

tenera 

tenera 

teneris 

1.  niger  is  declined  in  the  masculine  like  magister,  and 
drops  the  e  ;  tSner  is  declined  in  the  masculine  like  puer, 
and  keeps  the  e.  Both  are  declined  in  the  feminine  like 
mensa,  and  in  the  neuter  like  bellum. 

2.  Most  adjectives  in  -er  drop  the  e  in  inflection  ;  i.e.,  are 
declined  like  niger.  The  following  retain  the  e,  and  are  de- 
clined like  tgner  :  — 

1.  miser,  ivretched.  4.  lacer,  toj-n. 

2.  asper,  rough.  5.  liber,  free. 

3.  tener,  tender.  6.  prosper,  fortunate. 

And  the  compounds  of  -ger  and  -fer. 

87.  Decline  together,  making  the  Adjective  agree  with 
the  Noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case  :  — 

1.  puer  aeger,  a  .^ick  hoy.  2.  vir  liber,  a  free  man. 

3.  puella  pulchra,  a  beautiful  girl. 


70  FIRST   STEPS    lis'    LATl^'. 

VOCABULARY. 

aeger,  -gra,  -grum,  siclc.  p6pulus,  -i,  m.,  people. 

miser,  -era,  -erum,  icretched.  meus,  -a,  -um  (voc.  m.  mi),  luji. 

noster,  -tra,  -trum,  our.  pgricftlum,  -i,  n.,  danger. 

asper,  -era,  -erum,  rough.  IQcus,-^  -i,  m.,  place. 

Romanus,^  -a,  -um,  Roman.  castra,  -orum  (pL),  n.,  camp. 

Rhddanus,  -i,  m  .,  Rhone  (river),  matrimonium,  -i,  x.,  marriage. 

occiipo,  seize.  ludus,  -i,  m.,  school. 

Syn.  Miser  (opp.  heatns,  fortunate),  said  of  one  who  feels  him- 
self unfortunate;  infelix  (opp.  felix),  of  one  for  whom  nothing 
goes  according  to  his  wish. 

EXERCISES. 

Pronounce ;  translate ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;   parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Magno  cum^  perTcrdo.  2.  Ex  Gallia.  3.  In  Galliam. 
4.  In  Gallia.  5.  Trans  Rhodanum  in  Galliam.  G.  In  asperis 
locis  castra  lata  conlocat.  7.  Ivomani  libera  Gallorum'*  op- 
pida  occri})ant.     8.  Puellae  bonae  reginam  pulchram  amant. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  In  great  danger.  2.  With  great  danger.  3.  In  com- 
pany with  the  beautiful  girl.  4.  The  beautiful  girl  loves 
the  queen.  5.  Out  of  Gaul  into  Italy.  G.  Into  the  free 
tow^n.     7.  The  Roman  people  seize  the  towns. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  In  tlie  Latin  expression  for  Roman  people  the  adjective  Romanus 
always  follows  the  noun. 

2.  16cus  is  masculine  in  the  sinj,mlar,  but  is  both  masculine  and 
neuter  in  the  plural,  and  is  thus  declined  :  nom.  16ci,  passmjes  in  hooks, 
and  16ca,  places;  gen.  Idcorum;  dat.  16cTs;  ace.  16c6s  and  15ca; 
voc.  16ci  and  16ca ;  al)l.  16cis. 

o.  cum  stands  between  the  adjective  and  the  noun. 

4.  The  ^^enitive  of  the  possessor  (190)  usually  stands  between  the 
noun  and  the  adjective  limiting  the  noun. 

With  what  cases  are  Latin  prepositions  used  ?  When  is  in  used 
with  the  accusative  ?  Wliat  is  the  irender  of  nouns  of  the  second  de- 
clension ^     How  does  viri  aegri  differ  in  meaning  from  aegri  virl"? 


FlltST    CONJ  ITG ATJ  ON . 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 


71 


What  is  the  meaning  of  castra  in  the  singular?  (Sec  General  Vocab.) 
What  is  tlie  regular  position  of  an  adjective  ?  What  is  the  stem  of 
tgner  '?  Is  -a  final  in  the  first  declension  ever  long  ?  When  '?  What 
is  the  regular  position  of  the  genitive  ?  Give  the  reasons  for  the  accent 
of  the  following  words  :  amici,  servorum,  tgnera,  Hhddanus. 


LESSON   XXI. 

riEST    CONJUGATION. -ACTIVE    VOICE. 

PERFECT,  PLUPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT. 

88.  The  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect 
Tenses  denote  completed  action,  and  are  formed  by 
adding  the  endings  to  the  perfect  stem. 

89.  The  Perfect  Stem  of  a  verb  of  the  First  Conju- 
gation is  formed  by  adding  -vl  to  the  present  stem ;  as, 

EXAMPLES. 


Pres.  Infill. 

Pres.  Stem. 

Perf.  Stem. 

Perf.  Iiul. 

amare 
piignare 

ama- 
piigna- 

amavi- 
piignavi- 

amavi 
piignavi 

Obs.  The  i  in  the  perfect  is  undoubtedly  a  part  of  the  stem ; 
and,  as  there  is  nothing  to  be  gained  by  considering  amuv-  the 
perfect  stem,  the  correct  form  is  here  given. 


PERFECT     TENSE. 


Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Perfect. 

Aorist. 

Sim/.  1 

Perf.  stem 

amavi 

I  have  loved.     | 

/  loved,  or 
/  did  love. 

2 

"    +sti 

amavisti 

Thou  hast  loved. 

Thou  lovedst. 

3 

"        "    +t 

amavit 

He  has  loved. 

He  loved. 

Plur.  1 

"        "    +  mus 

amavimus 

We  have  loved. 

We  loved. 

2 

"        "    4-  stis 

amavistis 

You  have  loved. 

You  loved. 

3 

,,  j  +  runt 
\    or  re 

amaverunti 
or  amavere^ 

The//  have  loved. 

Thet/  loved. 

72 


FIRST  STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


PI^UPEKFECT     TENSE. 


Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plar.  1 
2 
3 

Perf.  stem  +  ram 
"     +  ras 
"     +  rat 
"         "     +  ramus 
"         "     +  ratis 
"     +  rant 

amaveram 

amaveras 

amaverat 

amaveramus 

amaveratis 

amaverant 

I  had  loved. 
Thoa  hadst  loved. 
He  had  loved. 
We  had  loved. 
You  had  loved. 
The//  had  loved. 

FUTURE     PERFECT    TENSE. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

P/«/-.  1 
2 
3 

Perf.  stem  +  I'o 
"         "     +  ris 
"     +  rit 
"         "     4-  rimus 
"         "     +  ritis 
"         "     +  rint 

amavero 

amaveris 

amaverit 

amaverimus 

amaveritis 

amaverint 

I  shall  have  loved. 
Thou  tvilt  have  loved. 
He  will  have  loved. 
We  shall  have  loved. 
You  ivill  have  loved. 
Theij  will  have  loved. 

Obs.  The  cliaracteristic  vowel  of  the  stein  is  shortened  in  the 
first  person  phiral  of  the  perfect,  and  in  the  third  person  plural  it 
is  changed  to  t ;  in  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect  it  is 
changed  to  e.  Final  consonants  are  usually  less  distinctly  pro- 
nounced, and  for  this  reason  are  oftener  dropped.  In  this  way 
Smaverunt  is  shortened  to  Smavere,  —  in  this  form  v  is  never 
dropped. 

1 .  Analysis  of  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect 
Active  of  all  Conjuoations  :  — 

1.  Perfect  =  Perf.  stem  +  Personal  endings. 

2.  Pluperfect    =      "         "     +  Tense  sign  -ra-  +  Personal  endings. 

3.  Fut.  perfect  =      "         "     +  Tense  sign  -ri-  +  Personal  endings. 


2.  In  the  tenses  formed  from  the  perfect  stem,  v  between 
two  vowels  is  often  suppressed,  and  the  second  vowel  is 
merged  in  the  first  (except  ie) ;  as, 


PLUrEKFECT   ,   .   . 

Future  Perfect .     . 
Perfect,  3d  per.  plur. 
Perfect,  2d  per.  plur. 


EXAMPLES. 

amaveram  —  amaeram  =  amaram 
amavero      =  amaero      =  amaro 
amaverunt  —  amaerunt  =  amarunt 
amavisti      —  amaisti      =  amasti 


FIRST   CONJUGATION.  —  ACTIVE   VOICE. 


73 


3.  The  synopsis  of  the  verb  consists  of  the  different  forms, 
arranged  according  to  the  stems  (seep.  261).  The  synopsis 
of  the  Indicative  Mode  is  as  follows  :  — 


Present  Stem,  ama-. 
Pres.       Imperf.  Fut. 


Ind. 


Perfect  Stem,  amavi-. 
Perf.         Pluperp.        Fut.  Perf. 


.   .  amo     a 

binabam     amabo 

amavi      amaveram     amavero 

VOCABULARY. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

v6co 

v6care 

v6cavi,  call. 

occupo 

occiipare 

occiipavi,  i^eize,  occupij. 

vasto 

vastare 

vastavi,  lay  waste,  devastate. 

v61o 

volare 

volavi,  Jly. 

vulnero 

vulnerare 

vulngravi,  ivound. 

r6go 

rSgare 

rogavi,  ask. 

do 

darei 

dedi,  give. 

higmo 

higmare 

hiemavi,  pass  the  winter. 

in  matrimonium  dare,  to  give  in  marriage. 

Syn.    V6co,  call,  and  to  address  with  the  appropriate  title ; 
nomine,  call,  or  mention  by  name. 


EXERCISES. 

Pronounce  ;  translate  ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;   parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Vocaverat.  2.  Pugnaverit.  3.  Pngnabit.  4.  Roga- 
veratis.  5.  Vocaverimus.  6.  Laudaverit.  7.  Vastavit.^ 
8.  Galli  oppidnm  occnpaverant.  9.  Aniicitiam  cum  RoraanTs 
conflrmaverit.  10.  Circnm"  Romam  hiemaverant.  11.  Cas- 
sius  Tito'*  filiam  in  matrimonium  dedit. 


3.  Ye  were 
are  calling. 


Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  had  called.  2.  We  have  called, 
calling.  4.  They  will  call.  5.  They  call,  or 
6.  They  did  fight.  7.  They  fought.  8.  They  have  fought. 
9.  They  had  fought.  10.  We  praise  the  boy.  11.  We 
praised  the  boy.  12.  We  have  praised  the  boy.  13.  We 
had  praised.     14.  We  shall  have  praised. 


74  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

NOTES     AND     <>UESTIONS. 

1.  do  is  irregular;  it  lias  a  short  before -re,  and  the  perfect  is  dSdi. 

2.  Translate  the  perfect  both  ways;  as,  he  lias  laid  iraste,  and  he  laid 
waste. 

3.  The  preposition  circum  means  around,  and  is  followed  hy  the  ac- 
cusative, as  are  also  trans,  across,  inter,  between,  among,  and  propter, 
on  account  of. 

4.  Note  the  two  objects  of  dSdit. 

()]$s.  Note  that  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect  have,  in  addition 
to  the  personal  endings,  a  tense  sign,  -ra,  -ri;  as, 

amave-ra-nt,  loved-had-theij, 

the  perfect  stem  being  amavi-;  tlie  i)lui)erfect  tense  sign  -ra,  had;  the 
personal  ending  -nt,  thej. 

What  kind  of  time  does  the  perfect  denote  ?  What  are  the  divi- 
sions of  time  ?  How  is  the  present  stem  found  ?  The  perfect  stem  ? 
Decline  filia. 


LESSON    XXII. 

FIRST    CONJUGATION. -ACTIVE    VOICE. 

IMPERATIVE    MODE.-QUESTIONS. 

90.  Simple  sentences  are,  in  Latin  as  in  English :  — 

1.  Declarative;  as,  puer  laudat,  the  hoy  praises. 

2.  iNTEnHOGATiVE ;  as,  puerne^  landat,  does  the  hou pi'ai.^e? 
i].  Imperative;  as,  laudate, /^m/se //<?. 

4.  Exclamatory;   as,  quam  fortiter   pugnat,  how  bravely  he 
fyhts! 

91.  In  Latin,  questions  are  asked  by  means  of  Inter- 
rogative Pronouns,  Adverbs,  or  Particles,  and  are  not 
distinguished  by  the  order  of  the  words,  as  they  are  in 
English. 

1.  In  simple  questions,  expecting  the  answer  yes  or  no, 
an  Interrogative  Particle  is  used,  indicating  what  answer  is 
expected. 


FIRST    CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE   VOICE. 


75 


a.  Questions  with  tlie  syllable  -no.  appended  (enclitic)  ask 
for  information,  without  indicating  what  answer  is  expected. 
h.   Questions  witli  nonne  ex[)ect  tiie  answer  yes. 
c.    Questions  with  num  expect  the  answer  no. 

2.  For  questions  with  Interrogative  Pronouns,  see  245. 

92.    The  Imperjitive  Mode  is  used  in  commands,  ex- 
hortations, and  entreaties. 

PRESKNT. 


Person. 

Formation. 

Exanijile.                    English. 

Situ/.  1 
2 

Plur.  1 
2 

3 

Pres.  stem 
Pres.  stem  +  te 

ama 

amate 

Love,  or  love  thou. 
Love,  or  love  ije. 

FUTURE. 

Shir/.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  to 
"     +  to 

Pres.  stem  +  tote 
"     4-  nto 

amato 
amato 

amatote 
amanto 

Thou  shall  love. 
Lie  shall  love. 

Ye  shall  love. 
They  shall  love. 

VOCATIVE. 

93.  Rule  VIII.  —  The  vocative  is  used,  eitlier  witli 
or  without  an  interjection,  in  addressing'  a  person  or 
thing. 

VOCABULARY. 

arma, -orum  (pl.)>  ^^v  cirm)<.  r6sa,  -ae,  f.,  rose. 

proelitim,  -i,  x.,  battle.  narro,  tell,  narrate. 


Galba,  -ae,  m.,  Galha. 
porta,  -ae,  f.,  fjate. 
aedificitim,  -T,  x.,  huildinf/. 
vir,  viri,  m.,  num. 
insidiae,  -arum  (pi.)'  i"'-.  i^nares. 


copia,  -ae,  f.,  ahundance. 
copiae  (pi.),  F.,Jm'ces. 
Titus,  -1,  :\r.,  Titus. 
natura,  -ae,  f.,  nature. 
negotium,  -i,  n.,  business. 


76  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

Syx.  "Vir,  a  7>ian,  a  distinguished  man,  a  liusband ;  homo, -inis, 
a  man,  a  Jtuman  heing,  includes  both  sexes  (opposed  to  vir  =  a 
fellow). 

EXERCISES. 

Pronounce  ;  translate  ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;   parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Vastate  provinciam.  2.  Vita,  Tite,  proelium.  3.  Voca 
pueros.  4.  Matronane^  puellam  vocat?  Vocat.  5.  Nonne 
Galba  insidias  parat?  G.  Num  poeta  reglnae-  rosam  dat? 
7.  Matin-ate,  virT."  8.  Miitura,  Cassi."*  9.  Date,  viri,  Ro- 
manis  arnia. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Call.  2.  Call  (ye).  3.  Call  the  men.  4.  Does  the 
sailor  call?  Yes.  5.  Does  the  farmer  plough ?  (>.  Tell  the 
story.  7.  Call  the  men,  Cassins.  8.  Hasten,  men.  9.  Haste 
(3^e).  10.  Call  the  men  from ^  the  fields.  11.  Praise  (ye). 
12.  Praise  the  pupils. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  -ne  is  an  enclitic,  i.e.  it  seems  to  lean  on  the  word  before  it.  The 
most  common  enclitics  are  -que  {and),  -ve,  and  -ne,  used  in  asking 
questions,  and  also  cum,  with,  when  used  witli  pronouns ;  as,  — 

pu§ri  puellaeque  adsunt,  the  boi/s,  and  girls  too,  are  here. 

-que  is  the  enclitic ;  in  Enghsli,  too  is  tlie  enclitic.     The  -ne  appended 
to  matrona  in  Ex.  4  throws  the  accent  on  the  penult ;  as,  ma-tro-na'ne. 

2.  Dative  case. 

3.  See  lUde  VIII. 

4.  See  75.  5. 

5.  Use  tlie  preposition. 

From  what  stem  is  the  imperative  formed  ?  Does  the  imperative 
denote  completed  action  ?  Give  the  personal  endings  of  the  impera- 
tive. Note  that  the  imperative  has  no  first  j^erson.  How  many  tenses 
has  the  imperative "? 


NOUNS.  —  THIKD   DECLENSION.  77 

LESSON    XXIII. 
NOUNS. -THIED   DECLENSION. 

94.  NouDS  whose  genitive  singular  ends  in  -is  belong 
to  the  Third  Declension. 

a.  The  nominative  endings  are  various :  a,  e,  i,  o,  y,  c,  I,  n,  r, 
s,  t,  and  x;  and  nouns_of  all  three  genders  belong  to  this 
declension.  " 

95.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  may  be  divided 
into  two  classes  :  — 

1.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  a  consonant. 

2.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  the  vowel  i. 

96.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  a  consonant  increase  in 
the  genitive  ;  that  is,  the  genitive  has  more  s}  llables  than 
the  nominative  ;  as,  judex,  judic-is. 

97.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  a  vowel  do  not  increase  in 
the  genitive  ;  as,  turris,  turris.     See  110  and  113. 

98.  Consonant  stems  are  divided,  like  the  consonants, 
into  — 

1.  Labial  stems p,  b,  v,  m. 

2.  Dental  stems t,  d,  s,  n. 

3.  Lingual  stems r,  1. 

4.  Guttural  stems  . c,  g. 

99.  The  sign  of  the  Nominative  Singular  is  .s,  which, 
however,  is  dropped  after  Z,  n,  r,  s,  or  combines  with  c  or  g 
of  the  stem  to  form  x  =  c  oy  g  -\-  s\  t  ov  d  disappears  before 
s;  as,  st.  milit- +  s  =  milits  =  milis  (with  change  of  vowel) 
=  miles.  The  nominative  of  neuter  nouns  is  the  same  as  the 
stem  (with  sometimes  changed  vowel,  see  100.  2). 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


I.    Consonant    Stems, 
100.   Stems  ending  in  a  Labial :  |?,  h,  v,  w. 


PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

Siiiguliir. 

Plviial. 

No.M. 

princeps,  .^i.,  a  chic/. 

principes,  chiefs. 

Gen. 

principis,  of  a  chief. 

principum,  if  chiefs. 

DAT. 

principi,  fo  or  for  a  < 

■hief 

principibus,  to  or  for  ch 

\fs. 

Ace. 

principem,  a  chief 

principes,  chiefs. 

A^oc. 

princeps,  0  chief. 

principes,  0  chiefs. 

AiJi    ^ 

principe,  icifh,  from, 

or  Ih/  a 

principibus,  with,  from, 

or  1)1/ 

chief. 

chiefs. 

Cases. 

trabs,  F.,  fi  beam. 

hiems,  f.,  winter. 

Case-Endings. 

NOM. 

trabs 

hiems 

-s 

u 

Gen. 

trabis 

hiemis 

-is 

68 

•3 

DAT. 

trabi 

hiemi 

-i 

S 

Ace. 

trabem 

hiemem 

-em 

S 

Voc. 

trabs 

hiems 

-s    ■ 



Abl. 

trabe 

hieme 

-e  . 

NOM. 

trabes 

hiemes 

-es 

Gex. 

trabum 

hiemum 

-um 

2 

Dat. 

trabibus 

hiemibus 

-ibus 

s 
S 

Ace. 

trabes 

hiemes 

-es 

Voc. 

trabes 

hiemes 

-es 

A,,,.. 

trabibus 

hiemibus 

-ibus 

1 .  Note  that  the  stems  are  princip-,  trSb-,  hi6m-. 

2.  In  forming  the  nominative,  the  vowel  before  the  final 
consonant  of  tlie  stem  is  often  changed.  Tlie  most  common 
changes  are  :  — 

(1)  From  i  to  e ;  as  princeps,  from  stem  princip-. 

(2)  From  i  to  u ;  as  cSput,  from  stem  cSpit-. 

(3)  From  i  to  o',  as  virgo,  from  stem  virgin-. 

(4)  From  oto  u;  as  corpus,  from  stem  corpor-  (which  stands 

for  corpos-). 

(5)  From  e  to  m  ;  as  Spus,  from  stem  dpSr. 


NOUNS.  —  THIUD    DKCLKNSlON.  79 


3.  Tlie  case-eiulings  of  prmceps  appear  distinct  and  sepa- 
rate from  the  stem. 

4.  The  genitive  ending  -is  is  short. 

VOCABUI.AKY. 

inter,  prep.  w.  ace,  between,  sub,  prep.  w.  ace.  or  abl.,  tmf/er. 

aiiioncj.  conjuro,  conjurare,  conjuravi, 
verbuin,  -i,  k,,  ivord .  plot,  co/i spire. 

prmceps,  principis,  m.,  chief,  Divitiacus,  -i,  m.,  Divitiacus. 

leader.  fabtila,  -ae,  f.,  story,  fable. 

Cassias,  -i,  m.,  Cassius.  el6quentia,  -ae,  r.,  eloquence. 

Syn.  Princeps  (primus  capio),  the /ore?«o.?^,.  whose  example 
others  follow,  —  the  first  in  rank  and  authority ;  primus,  the  first  in 
time  and  07-der  (often  interchangeable). 

101.    Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  princeps  magnus,  a  great  chief. 

2.  trabs  longa,  a  lonci  beam. 

EXERCISES. 

Pronounce  ;  translate  ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;  parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Ad  prmcipem  Galliae.  2.  Cum  principe  Galliae. 
3.  Principes  circum  Romam  hiemaverunt.  4.  Titus  prin- 
cipes  laudat.     5.   Cum  prlncipibns.     0.    Yir  principes  vocat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  With^  the  chiefs.  2.  He  praises  the  chiefs.  3.  The 
chiefs  have  passed  the  winter  around  Rome.  4.  To  Diviti- 
acus, the  chiefs  of  the  Gauls. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  In  company  with  ~  cum. 

2.  Appositive. 

How  are  nouns  of  the  third  declension  classified  ?  How  is  the  nom- 
inative formed  from  tlie  stem  ?  How  is  the  stem  formed  ?  Of  what 
genders  are  nouns  of  the  third  declension  "? 


80 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON   XXIV. 

NOUNS. -THIED  DECLENSION. 
102.  Stems  ending  in  Dentals :  t^  d^  s,  n. 
1.    Stems  in  t^  cl. 

PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

pes,  M.,  afoot. 

pedes, /ee?. 

Gen. 

pedis,  of  a  foot. 

pedum,  of  feet. 

Dat. 

pedi,  to  ov for  afoot. 

pedibus,  to  or  for  feet. 

Ace. 

pedem,  ybo^ 

pedes, /ee^ 

Voc. 

pes,  Ofoot. 

pedes,  Ofeet. 

Ahl. 

pede,  with,  from,  or  hjj  a  foot. 

pedibus,  icith,from,  or  hijfeet. 

NOM. 

miles,  M.,  a  soldier. 

milites,  soldiers. 

Gen. 

militis,  of  a  soldier. 

militum,  of  soldiers. 

Dat. 

militi,  to  or  for  a  soldier. 

militibus,  to  or  for  soldiers. 

Ace. 

militem,  soldier. 

milites,  soldiers. 

Voc. 

miles,  0  soldier. 

milites,  0  soldiers. 

Ar.L.  1 

milite,  with,  from,  or  />//  a 

militibus,  with,  from,  or  by 

soldier. 

soldiers. 

2.    Stems  in  s  (r). 


PARADIGM. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

flos,  M.,  floicer. 

Rbre3,foicers. 

Gen. 

floris,  a  floicer. 

fl5rum,  of  fowers. 

Dat. 

fl5ri,  to  or  for  a  flower. 

floribus,  to  ov  for  flowers. 

Ace. 

florem, /o?x'er. 

flores,  flowers. 

Voc. 

flos,  Ofower. 

flores,  0  flowers. 

Abl.  1 

fl5re,  ivith,  from,   or  hi/  a 

fl5ribus,   with,  from,  or  hy 

flower. 

flowers. 

NOUNS.  —  THIRD   DECLENSION. 


81 


PARADIGMS. 


tf^oc^^c- 

opus,  N., 

corpus,  N., 

gSuUS,  N., 

fulgur,  N., 

ivork. 

body. 

kind. 

Ughtiiimj. 

NOM. 

opus 

corpus 

genus 

fulgur 

c 

Gen. 

operis 

corporis 

generis 

fulguris 

s 

Dat. 

operi 

corpori 

generi 

fulguri 

iJD 

Ace. 

opus  ,i> 

corpus 

genus 

fulgur 

(T. 

Voc. 

opus 

corpus 

genus 

fulgur 

Abl. 

opere 

corpore 

genere 

fulgure 

NOM. 

opera 

corpora 

genera 

fulgiira 

Gen. 

operum 

corporum 

generum 

fulgiirum 

g 

DAT. 

operibus 

corporibus 

generibus 

fulgiiribus 

s 

Ace. 

opera 

corpora 

genera 

fulgura 

Voe. 

opera 

corpora 

genera 

fulgiira 

Abl. 

operibus 

corporibus 

generibus 

fulgiiribus 

3.    Stems  in  n. 


PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

rSgio,  F.,  region. 

virgo,  F.,  virgin. 

nomen,  N.,  name. 

NOM. 

regis 

virgo 

nomen 

i 

Gen. 

regionis 

virginis 

nommis 

DAT. 

region! 

virgin! 

n5mini 

Ace. 

regionem 

virginem 

nomen 

m 

Voc. 

regio 

virgo 

nomen 

Abl. 

regione 

virgme 

nomine 

NoM. 

regiones 

virgines 

nomina 

Gen. 

regionum 

virgmum 

nommum 

1 

Dat. 

regionibus 

virginibus 

nominibus 

0 
^ 

Ace. 

regiones 

virgines 

nomina 

Voe. 

regiones 

virgines 

nomina 

Abl. 

regionibus 

virginibus 

nominibus 

a.  The  stems  are  pSd-,  milit-,  flor-,  6pgr-,  corp6r-,  ggngr-, 
fulgiir-,  rggion-,  virgin-,  nomin- ;  in  some  instances  the  vowel  is 
variable. 

h.  Note  that  the  dental  d  or  t  is  dropped  before  s ;  as,  pes  for 
pgds,  miles  for  milits  (with  change  of  vowel) . 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


c.  Note  that  s  of  the  stem  becomes  r  between  two  vowels ;  as, 
flos,  floris  (lor  flosis);  hSnos,  later  form  li6nor,  honoris  (for 
honosis). 

d.  J 11  tlie  nommative  and  vocative  singular,  tlie  case-ending  6-  is 
sometimes  dropped;  as,  fulgur,  rggio,  virgo,  nomen.  Nomina- 
tives ill  o  have  also  lost  the  final  n  of  the  stem ;  the  stem  of  rSgio 
is  region-. 

VOCABULARY. 

cSput,  capitis,  N.,  head.  causa,  -ae,  r,,  cause,  reason. 

flumen,  fluminis,  n.,  river.  legatio,  legationis,  f.,  embassy. 

Jura,  -ae,  m.,  the  Jura.  virtus,  virtutis,  f.,  valor. 

ob,  prep.  w.  ace,  on  account  of.     longus,  -a,  -um,  long. 

Syn.  P6piilus  (originally  the  patricians)  came  to  include  the 
ichole  people;  plebs,  tlte  plebeians,  a  part  of  the  people  without 
political  rights,  until  political  equality  was  established  by  the 
Licinian  law,  B.C.  3U7 ;  Quirltes,  the  Roman  people  in  their  civil 
capacity. 

103.   Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  caput  magnum,  a  large  head. 

2.  miles  bSnus,  a  good  soldier. 

3.  miles  acer,  a  spirited  soldier. 

EXERCISES. 

Pronounce  ;  translate ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;  parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Milites  laudant.  2.  Reglna  virtutem  militum  laudat. 
3.  Virgiues  carmen  longum  cantant.  4.  Ad  flumen  Rhoda- 
num.  5.  Milites  ob  cupiditiltem  gloriae  pQgnant.  6.  Fiin- 
ceps  mores  virls  ^  dabat. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Note  that  the  ending  -is  is  long  in  plural  cases  of  the  second 
declension. 

How  is  the  stem  of  nouns  of  the  third  declension  found  ?  What 
cases  are  alike  in  neuter  nouns  ?  Tlie  stems  of  Latin  words  often 
appear  in  English  words  derived  from  the  Latin ;  as,  princip-al  (princip-, 
stem  of  princeps). 


NOUNS. — THIllD   DECLENSION. 


83 


LESSON    XXV. 
NOUNS.  — THIED  DECLENSION. 
104.    Stems  ending  in  a  Lingual :  r,  I. 


PAKADIGai. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

victor,  M.,  a  conqueror. 

victores,  conquerors. 

Gen. 

victoris,  of  a  conqueror. 

victorum,  of  conquerors. 

Dat. 

victori,  to  or  for  a  conqueror. 

victoribus,  to  or  for  conquei 

ors. 

Ace. 

victor  em,  conqueror. 

victdres,  conquerors. 

Voc. 

victor,  0  conqueror. 

victdres,  0  conquerors. 

Abl.  i 

victdre,  with,  from,  or  btj  a 

victoribus,  with,  from,  or 

% 

conqueror. 

conquerors. 

1.  Ill  the  nominative  and  A^ocative  singular  of  victor, 
not  added.. 


IS 


2.  Most  nouns  in  -er  are  declined  like  anser,  but  those  in 
■ter,  and  a  few  others,  are  declined  like  pater :  — 


PARADIGMS. 


sol,   H., 

consul,  M., 

pater,  m., 

anser,  m., 

sun. 

consul. 

father. 

goose. 

NoM. 

s5l 

consul 

pater 

anser 

u 

Gen. 

solis 

consulis 

patris 

anseris 

* 

DAT. 

s51i 

consul! 

patri 

anseri 

s 

Ace. 

solem 

consulem 

patrem 

anserem 

yj 

Voc. 

sol 

consul 

pater 

anser 

Abl. 

sole 

consule 

patre 

ansere 

NOM. 

s51es 

consules 

patres 

anseres 

Gen. 

consilium 

patrum 

anserum 

s 

Dat. 

solibus 

consulibus 

patribus 

anseribus 

Aec. 

soles 

consiiles 

patres 

anseres 

Pm 

Voc. 

soles 

consiiles 

patres 

anseres 

Abt>. 

solibus 

consiilibus 

patribus 

anseribus 

84  FIKST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

VOCABULARY. 

consul,  consiilis,  m.,  consul.  s6ror,  s6r6ris,  r.,  sister. 

agger,  aggSris,  m.,  mound.  impgrator, -toris,  m.,  com7«ant/er. 

frater,  fratris,  m.,  brother.  orator,  oratoris,  m.,  orator. 

Caesar,  CaesSris,  m.,  Ccesar.  victor,  victoris,  m.,  victor. 

105.    Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  consul  designatus,  consul  elect. 

2.  timor  magnus,  great  fear. 

EXERCISES. 

Pronounce  ;  translate  ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  the 
stem  ;    parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Consul  oratorem  laudat.  2.  Consul  oratoris  eloquentiam 
laudavit.  3.  Frater  sororem  amat.  4.  Fratrem  liberavit. 
5.  Caesar  sororem  in  matrimoniuni  dedit  ((/a (ye).  6.  Caesar 
consul  consulem  Titum  accusaverat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  have  praised  the  orator.  2.  They  praise  the 
orator's  eloquence.  3.  The  brothers  love  (their)  sisters. 
4.  They  have  liberated  the  consul.  5.  To  Caesar,  the 
consul.  6.  They  accuse  Caesar,  the  consul.  7.  The 
judge  praises  the  king.  8.  I  praise  the  justice  of  the 
king. 

NOTES     AND    OUESTIONS. 

How  is  the  nominative  singular  of  most  nouns  formed  ?  -  (Ans.  The 
nominative  is  formed  by  adding  .s  to  the  stem.)  What  exceptions  ? 
(^Ans.  Neuters,  and  nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  a  lingual.)  pSter,  mater, 
frater  (gen.  patris,  matris,  fratris),  seem  not  to  increase  in  the  geni- 
tive. The  stems  are  really  pSter-,  mater-,  frater-,  and  they  are  con- 
tracted to  pXtr-,  matr-,  fratr- ;  i.e.,  pStris  stands  for  p^tSris,  etc. 


NOUNS.  —  THIRD   DECLENSION. 

LESSON    XXVI. 
NOUNS.  — THIED  DECLENSION. 


106.    Stems  ending  in  a  Guttural :  c,  g. 


85 


PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

judex,  M.,  a  judge. 

judices,  judges. 

Gen. 

judicis,  of  a  judge. 

judicum,  of  judges. 

DAT. 

judici,  to  or  for  a  judge. 

judicibus,  to  or  for  judges. 

Ace. 

judicem,  judge. 

judices,  judges. 

Voc. 

judex,  0  judge. 

judices,  0  judges. 

AuL.  1 

judice,  ivith,  from,  or  hi/  a 

judicibus,  with,  from,  or  hy 

judge.     ■ 

judges. 

rex,  M., 

radix,  F., 

dux,  M.  &  F., 

lex,  F., 

king. 

root. 

leader. 

law. 

NOM. 

rex 

radix 

dux 

lex 

u 

Gex. 

regis 

radicis 

diicis 

legis 

1 

Dat. 

regi 

radici 

diici 

legi 

Ace. 

regem 

radicem 

ducem 

legem 

rfi 

Voc. 

rex 

radix 

dux 

lex 

Abl. 

rege 

radice 

duce 

lege 

NoM. 

reges 

radices 

diices 

leges 

Gen. 

regum 

radicum 

ducum 

legum 

t 

Dat. 

regibus 

radicibus 

ducibus 

legibus 

s 

Ace. 

reges 

radices 

diices 

leges 

Voc. 

reges 

radices 

diices 

leges 

Abl. 

regibus 

radicibus 

ducibus 

legibus 

1.  Note  that  the  stems  are  jiidic-,  reg-,  radio-,  diic-,  and 
Igg- ;  judic-  has  a  variable  vowel. 

2.  The  case-endings  are  the  same  as  those  given  in  100. 

3.  The  s  of  the  nominative  and  vocative  singnlar  nnites 
with  c  or  ^  of  the  stem  to  form  ic ;  as,  regs  =  rgx.     See  32.  2, 


86  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

4.  Hitherto  long  final  syllables  have  been  marked  ;  the 
quantity  of  final  syllables  will  hereafter  be  marked  only  when 
not  determined  by  the  following  rules  :  — 

a.    Most  monosyllables  are  long. 

h.   Final  {,  o,  and  u  are  long ;  a,  e,  and  y,  short.     Final  a  is 

long  in  the  ablative  singular  of  the  first  declension . 
c.   Final  as,  es,  and  as  are  long ;  is,  us,  and  ys,  short. 

0.  In  the  increments  of  nouns  a  and  o  are  geuerallj'  long ; 
e,  i,  7/,  and  ?/,  short. 

Exc.   -is  is  long  in  plural  cases. 

VOCABULAKY. 

VOX,  vocis,  !• .,  voice.  gSnus,  ggngris,  n.,  kmd. 

sine,  i)rep.  w.  abl.,  without.  gloria,  -ae,  f.,  glory. 

rex,  regis,  m.,  king.  n6vus,  -a,  -um,  ne.w. 

radix,  radicis,  f.,  root.  rggiila,  -ae,  f.,  rwZe. 

107.    Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  flumen  latum,  a  hrond  river. 

2.  pSter  vester,  your  father. 

Syn.  Flumen  (fluo,  tojiow),  properly  a  stream,  with  the  idea  of 
fiovnng ;  fliivius,  general  word  for  a  river;  amnis,  a  broad,  deep 
river ;  rivus,  a  brook. 

EXERCISES. 

Pronounce  ;  translate ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;    parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Reges  pugnaverunt.  2.  Regem  vocavisti.  3.  Re- 
gina  judicem  bonum  laudabat.  4.  Judex  puero  librum 
donat.  5.  Sine  rege.  6.  Ad  regem.  7.  Multa  genera 
frumenti  importabimus.  8.  Prlncipes  Gallorum  pugnave- 
runt. 9.  Romidus  fratrem  liberavit.  10.  Romulus  uomen 
novae  urbi  dat. 


NOUNS. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


NOTES     AND    QUESTIONS. 

Wliat  nouns  belong  to  tlie  tliird  declension  ?  What  is  meant  by  tlie 
stem  of  a  word  ?  How  may  the  stem  of  nouns  of  the  third  declension 
be  found  ?  {Ans.  1st.  The  stem  of  nouns  ending  in  a  consonant  is 
found  by  dropping  -is  of  tlie  genitive  singular ;  2d,  The  stem  of  nouns 
ending  in  a  vowel  is  found  by  dropiiing  -s  of  the  genitive  singular ; 
3d.  The  stem  of  monosyllabic  nouns  ending  in  two  consonants  is  found 
by  dropping  -is  for  the  singular,  and  -s  only  for  the  plural :  as,  urbs, 
St.  urh-  (sing.),  jirhi-  (plural).  See  113.)  What  becomes  of  the  s  that 
is  added  to  the  stem  to  form  tlie  nominative  in  dux  (gen.  diic-is)  ?  of 
the  d  in  the  stem  of  l^pis  (gen.  15pid-is)  ?  What  is  the  ending  of  the 
genitive  sinuular  of  nouns  of  the  tliird  declension  '! 


LESSON   XXVII. 

NOUNS.  -  THIED   DEOLENSION. 

108.  Vowel  stems  of  the  Third  Declension  end  in  -i ; 
as,  turris,  stem  turri-.  Nouns  of  this  class  include  the 
folloAving :  — 

1.  Xouns  ill  -is  and  -es  not  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

2,  Neuters  in  -e,  -al,  -ar. 

o.  Monosyllal)les  with  stems  ending  in  two  consonants. 
4.  Most  nouns  in  -ns  and  -rs. 


PARADIGM. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

XoM. 

turris,  m.,  a  tower. 

turres,  toicers. 

Gex. 

turris,  of  a  ton-er. 

turrium,  of  towers. 

Dat. 

turri,  to  oY  for  a  tourer. 

turribus,  to  or  for  towers. 

Arc. 

turrem,  or  -im,  a  tower. 

turres,  or  -is,  towers. 

Voc. 

turris,  0  tower. 

turres,  0  towers. 

Abl.  i 

turre,  -i,  with,  fmw,  or  hy  a 

turribus,  with,  from,   or  /;// 

tower. 

towers. 

88 


FIKST  STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

ignis,  31., 
Jire. 

hostis,  M.&F., 

enemy. 

imbes,  F., 
cloud. 

Case- 
Endings. 

s 

NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

ignis 

ignis 

igni 

ignem 

ignis 

igne,  -i 

hostis 

hostis 

hosti 

hostem 

hostis 

hoste 

nubes 

niibis 

niibi 

nubem 

nubis 

nube 

-is,  -es 

-is 

-i 

-em,  -im 

-is 

-e,  -i 

t 

s 

NoM. 
Ge?c. 

DAT. 

Ago. 
Voc. 
Ahl. 

ignes 

ignium 

ignibus 

ignes,  -is 

ignes 

ignibus 

hostes 

hostium 

hostibus 

hostes 

hostes 

hostibus 

nubes 

niibium 

niibibus 

nubes,  -is 

niibes 

nubibus 

-es 
-ium 
-ibus 
-es,  -is 
-es 
ibus 

1.  Only  five  or  six  nouns  in  connnon  nse  have  -im  in  the 
accusative  singular ;   and  about  as  many  liave  -em  or  -im. 

2.  All  stems  in  -i-  have  -ium  in  the  genitive  plural ;  the 
accusative  plural  is  often  written  -v.s  instead  of  -es. 

109.    Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  ignis  clarus,  a  hrightjire. 

2.  collis  asper,  a  rugged  hill. 


VOCABUI^ARY. 


w.    ace,     hetiveen, 


inter,     prep. 

among. 
finis,  finis,  m.,  limit ;  pL,  territory. 
niimerus,  -i,  :\r.,  number. 
latro,  latrare,  latravi,  hark. 


cS.nis,  c3.nis,  m.  and  f.,  dog. 
hostis,  hostis,  m.  and  f.,  enemy. 
supSro,  -are,  -avi,  conquers. 
pro,  prep.  w.  abl,,  hefore,  for. 
instead  of. 

Syn.  Hostis  is  a  foreign  enemy  in  loar ;  inimicus,  a  private, 
personal  enemy:  adversarius,  any  opponent. 

EXERCISES. 

Pronounce ;  translate ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;    parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Canis^  latrat.  2.  Nonne  hostes  agros  vastant  ? 
3.    Caesar   hostes  superabat.      4.    Rex   turres  oppugnabit. 


NOUNS. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


89 


5.  Milites  pro  ITbertate  pngnant.  6.  Inter  fines  Gallorum. 
7.  In  hostium  nnmero.  8.  Canes  pfignant.  9.  Caesar 
turrim  oppugnabat. 


NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Canis  forms  the  genitive  plural  in  -niii,  as  cSnum;  so  also 
panis,  bread ;  and  juv^nis,  a  youth. 

Do  nouns  having  /-stems  increase  in  the  genitive  1  Wliat  is  meant 
by  increasing  in  the  genitive  ?  How  do  such  nouns  form  the  nomina- 
tive from  tlie  stem  ?  What  vowel  change  is  common  ?  In  what  does 
the  genitive  plural  usually  end  ? 


LESSON   XXVIII. 


NOUNS. -THIED   DECLENSION. 


110.    Neuters  ending  in  -e,   -al^ 
follows :  —  "^ 


-ar 


are  declined  as 


PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

rnSre,  sea. 

S^nimal, 

an  animal. 

calcar,  spur. 

Case- 
Endings. 

i 

! 

t 

NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Acc. 
Yoc. 
Abl. 

mare 

maris 

mari 

mare 

mare 

mari. 

animal 

animalis 

animali 

animal 

animal 

animali 

calcar 

calcaris 

calcari 

calcar 

calcar 

calcari 

-e 
-is 
-i 
-e 

-6 

-1 

NOM. 

Gex. 
Dat. 
Acc. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

maria 

marium 

maribus 

maria 

maria 

maribus 

animalia 

animalium 

animalibus 

animalia 

animalia 

animalibus 

calcaria 

calcarium 

calcaribus 

calcaria 

calcaria 

calcaribus 

-ia 

-ium 

-ibus 

-ia 

-ia 

-ibus 

90  FIRST    STEPS   IN   Lx\TIN. 

1.  The  stem  of  m^e  ends  in  -i-,  which  is  changed  in  the 
nominative  to  e.  The  stem  of  animal  ends  in  -«/i-,  the  i 
being  dropped,  and  the  a  shortened  in  the  nominative  singu- 
lar ;  as,  stem  animali-,  nominative  animal,  animal  stands 
for  animale,  the  final  e  being  lost,  and  does  not,  therefore, 
increase  in  the  genitive. 

111.    Rules  for  Position  :  — 

1.  Adjectives  and  genitives  generally  follow  their  nouns. 

2.  Adverbs  and  oblique  cases,  with  or  without  prepositions, 
generally  immediately  precede  the  verb. 

3.  The  indirect  object  generally  precedes  the  direct  object. 

4.  When  a  noun  with  an  adjective  is  limited  by  a  noun  in  the 
genitive,  the  adjective  stands  first,  and  the  genitive  between  it  and 
its  noun ;  as,  magnum  reginae  pociilum,  the  large  cup  of  the 
queen;   or,  the  queen's  large  cup. 

5.  The  rules  may  be  reversed  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  then 
the  emphatic  j)lace  for  the  verb  is  at  the  beginning; 

for  the  object,  at  the  end  of  a  sentence ; 
for  the  genitive,  before  tlie  noun  it  limits ; 
for  the  adjective,  before  the  noun ; 
for  the  adverb,  at  a  distance  from  the  verb ; 
for  the  indirect  object,  after  the  direct. 


AOCABULARY. 

tSlgro,  tSlSrare,  t61gravi,  bear,  tempus,  temp6ris,  n.,  time. 

endure.  jus,  juris,  n.,  right,  law, 

Siiimal,  Snimalis,  n.,  animal.  coUis,  collis,  m.,  hill. 

crSmo,  -are,  -avi,  hum.  vectigal,  vectlgalis,  n.,  tax, 
custos,  custodis,  m.,  guard.  revenue. 

frigus,  frig6ris,  n.,  cold,  frost.  nomen,  nominis,  n.,  name. 


112.    Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  navis  longa  (lit.,  a  long  ship),  a  ship  ofivar, 

2.  vectigal  magnum,  a  large  revenue. 

3.  mare  magnum,  a  great  sea. 


NOUNS.  —  THIllD    DECLENSION. 


91 


EXERCISES. 

Pronounce ;  translate  ;  decline  each  noun,  and  give  its 
stem  ;    parse  the  verbs  :  — 

1.  Nautae  mare  amant.  2.  Dux  hostium  fines  regis 
vastaverat.  3.  Rex  jura  virTs  dabat.  4.  Propter  frigora. 
5.  In  (on)  coUe.  G.  Miles  vulnus  tolerat.  7.  Bonos 
homines  laudamus. 


LESSON   XXIX. 

NOUNS. -THIED   DECLENSION. 

113.    Many  nouns  in  -.s'  and  -x,  generally  preceded  by 
a  consonant,  were  originally  z-stems.     These  are  :  — 

1.  Nouns  of  one  syllable,  with  stems  ending  in  two  con- 
sonants. 

2.  Nouns  of  two  or  more  syllables  ending  in  -ns  or  -rs. 

3.  Note  that  these  nouns  are  declined  in  the  singular  like 
consonant  stems,  and  in  the  plural  like  vowel  stems. 

PAllADIGMS. 


urbs,  r., 

nox,  F., 

mus,  M., 

arx,  r., 

city. 

night. 

mouse. 

citadel. 

NOM. 

urbs 

nox 

_ 
mus 

arx 

h* 

Gen. 

urbis 

noctis 

muris 

arcis 

.2 

3 

Dat. 

urbi 

nocti 

muri 

arci 

it 

Ace. 

urbem 

noctem 

murem 

arcem 

c« 

Voc. 

urbs 

nox 

mus 

arx 

Abt>. 

urbe 

nocte 

mure 

arce 

NOM. 

urbes 

noctes 

mures 

arces 

Gkn. 

urbium 

noctium 

murium 

arcium 

1 

Dat. 

urbibus 

noctibus 

muribus 

arcibus 

Ace. 

urbes,  -is 

noctes,  -is 

mures,  -is 

arces 

Voc. 

urbes 

noctes 

mures 

arces 

Abl, 

urbibus 

noctibus 

muribus 

arcibus 

92  FIEST    STEPS  IN   LATIN. 


Rules  for  the  Oblique  Cases  of  Nouns  of  the  Third 
Declension, 

ACCUSATIVE    SINGULAR. 

114.  The  accusative  singular  of  all  neuter  nouns  is  like 
the  nominative.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculine  and 
feminine  nouns  generally  ends  in  -em  ;  but  a  few  proper 
nouns  in  -zs,  denoting  places  or  rivers,  have  the  accusative 
in  -m,  and  also  sitis,  tussis,  and  vis ;  a  few  have  either  -em 
or  -im,  as  febris,  turris,  navis. 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

115.  The  al)lative  singular  commonly  ends  in  -e  ;  but 

1.  Neuters  in  -e,  -al,  and  -ar  have  -i  in  the  ablative. 

2.  Nouns  that  have  -hi  in  the  accusative,  and  names  of  months 
in  -er  or  -is,  haxe.  -i  in  the  ablative. 

0.  Nouns  that  have  -em  or  -im  in  the  accusative  have  their  abla^ 
tive  in  -e  or  -7:  ignis,  Jtre,  navis,  vessel,  turris,  toiver,  civis,  citizen, 
finis,  ejid,  and  a  few  others,  have  -e  or  -I. 

GENITIVE    PLURAL. 

116.  The  genitive  plural  generally  ends  in  -um  ;  but 

1 .  Nouns  tliat  have  -i  or  both  -e  and  -i  in  the  ablative  singular 
have  -iwn  in  the  genitive  plural. 

2.  Nouns  in  -es  and  -is,  not  increasing  in  the  genitive  singular, 
have  -ium  in  the  genitive  plural. 

3.  Nouns  of  one  syllable  ending  in  -s  or  -x  preceded  by  a  conso- 
nant have  -iwn  in  the  genitive  plural. 

4.  Nouns  of  two  or  more  syllables  ending  in  -ns  or  -rs,  and  names 
of  nations  in  -as  and  -Is,  generally  have  -ium  in  the  genitive  plural. 


VOCABULARY. 

mons,  mentis,  m.,  mountain.  sto,  stare,  stStT,  stand. 

urbs,  urbis,  f.,  city.  lux,  lucis,  f.,  light. 

pars,  partis,  f.,  /)«r^.  ante,  prep.  w.  ace,  he/ore. 

litus,  litSris,  n.,  sliore.  servo,  servare,  servavi,/>resert;e. 


NOUNS.  —  THIRD   DECLENSION.  93 

117.   Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  sinistra  pars,  the  left  side. 

2.  rupes  sinistra,  a  rock  on  the  left. 

3.  6pus  completum,  a  finished  work. 

Obs.  Note  that,  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension,  the  stem  is 
the  same  as  the  nominative;  as,  consul,  genitive  consul-is,  or 
becomes  the  same  after  the  vowel  is  modified ;  as,  nomen,  genitive 
nomin-is ;  or  that  s  is  added  to  the  stem  to  form  the  nominative ; 
as,  hostis,  genitive  hosti-s. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Partem  urbis  occupant.  2.  Consul  in  nrbe  habitabat. 
3.  Romulus  nomen  novae  urbi  dat.  4.  Fratres  in  lltore 
maris  cum  sororibus  stant.  5.  Ante  lucem.  6.  De  monte 
in  flumen.  7.  In  monte.  8.  In  pace  paramus  bellum. 
9.    Mllites  arcem  servabant. 

Syn.  Oppidum  is  a  fortified  town,  a  fortress ;  a  small  city  or 
town ;  urbs,  a  large  city  (with  reference  to  its  buildings ;  espe- 
cially to  Rome) ;  civitas,  a  state,  (1)  a  community  living  under  the 
same  laws  ;  (2)  right  of  citizenship ;   res  publica,  a  commonwealth. 


NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

What  is  the  genitive  plural  of  mons,  urbs,  pars  ?  Are  these  words 
declined  in  the  singular  like  consonant  stems  *?  What  three  classes  of 
nouns  of  the  third  declension  1  [Ans.  1st.  Consonant  stems  ;  2d.  Vowel 
stems;  3d.  Mixed  stems.)  What  nouns  have  -i  as  the  regular  ending 
in  the  ablative  singular  1  What  nouns  have  -e  or  -i '?  In  what  does 
the  nominative  plural  of  masculine  and  feminine  nouns  end  ?  {Ans.  -es.) 
In  what,  the  nominative  plural  of  neuter  nouns  ?  {Ans.  In  -a,  and  those 
whose  ablative  singular  ends  in  -i  only,  or  in  -e  and  -/,  have  -la.)  What 
nouns  have  -ium  in  the  genitive  plural  ?  How  is  the  nominative  formed 
from  the  stem  '?  What  is  the  regular  ending  of  the  accusative  singular  1 
What  nouns  have  -im  in  the  accusative  'i 


94  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

LESSON   XXX. 

THIED  DECLENSION. -EULES   OP   GENDEE. 

118.  The  rules  for  gender,  when  determined  by  the 
meaning,  have  been  given  under  63. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Caesar,  m.,  Ccesar.  7.  hostis,  m.  or  f.,  enemy. 

2.  nauta,  m.,  sailor.  8.  civis,  m.  or  f.,  citizen. 

3.  vir,  M.,  man.  9.  judex,  m.  or  ¥.,  Judge. 

4.  Tullia,  F.,  Tullia.  10.  Roma,  f.,  Rome. 

.5.  miilier,  f.,  ivoman.  11.  Rhenus,  m.,  Rhine. 

0.  puella,  F.,  girl.  12.  Martius,  m.,  March. 

Obs.  Examine  the  fore*ioiiig  words,  and  give  the  gender  of  each 
noun  and  the  rule.  Note  that  Exs.  7-9  designate  either  males  or 
females,  and  that  they  are  of  the  common  (jender  (c). 

Rules  of  Gender, 

119.  The  following  are  the  rules  for  gender  when  de- 
termined by  the  endings  of  the  nominative  singular :  — 

1.  Nouns  of  the  third  declension  ending  in  -o,  -or,  -os., 
-e)',  -5s,  -68  (increasing  in  the  genitive  to  -Idis  or  -Uis)  are 
masculine. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  sermo, -onis,  m.,  speech.  5.  pes,  p6dis,  M.,foot. 

2.  d61or, -oris,  M.,  7)am.  G.  trames, -itis,  m.,  pa<^. 

3.  flos,  floris,  M.,y?o?/;er.  7.  eques, -itis,  m.,  y^or.^e/nan. 

4.  career,  -eris,  m.,  prison.  8.  miles,  -itis,  m.,  soldier. 

2.  Nouns  of  the  third  declension  ending  in  -as  (gen.  -dtis), 
-es  (not  increasing  in  the  genitive) ,  -zs,  -ys^  -x,  -s  (preceded 


THIRD  DECLENSION.  —  KULES   OF  GENDER.  95 

by  a  cousonaiit)  ;    also  -do,  -go  (gen.  -Inis),  -io  (abstract^ 
and  collective^),  and  -us  (gen.  -udis^  -utis),  are  feminine. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  aetas,  -atis,  f.,  age.  8.  pars,  partis,  f.,  2^cirt- 

2.  civitas,  -atis,  f.,  state.  U.  trabs,  tr^bis,  f.,  a  beam. 

3.  nubes,  -is,  f.,  cloud.  10.  imago,  -inis,  f.,  image. 

4.  navis, -is,  f.,  67i?/>.  11.  in.\i].titvLd.o,-inia,F.,  multitude. 

5.  chlamys,  -ydis,  f.,  cloak.  12.  6rati5,  -onis,  f.,  speech. 
C.  pax,  pacis,  f.,  jjeace.  13.  legio,  -onis,  f.,  legion. 
7.  urbs,  urbis,  f.,  city.  14.  virtiis,  -litis,  f.,  virtue. 

3.  Nouns  of  the  third  declension  ending  in  -a,  -e,  -l,  -y ; 
-c,  -?,  -t ;  -ar,  -ur,  -us  (genitive  -oris  or  -em) ,  and  -men 
(genitive  -minis) ,  are  neuter. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  poema, -Stis,  N.,  poem.  8.  tempus, -6ris,  n.,  ^me. 

2.  mare,  -is,  n.,  sea.  9.  genus,  -eris,  n.,  class. 

3.  lac,  lactis,  n.,  milk.  10.  nomen,  -inis,  n.,  name. 

4.  vectigal, -alis,  N.,  reyenwe.  11.  agmen, -inis,  n.,  arm?/. 

5.  cSput,  -itis,  N.,  head.  12.  IStus,  -eris,  n.,  side. 

6.  calcar,  -aris,  x.,  spur.  13,  rete,  retis,  x.,  net. 

7.  guttur,  -iiris,  n.,  throat.  14.  animal,  -alis,  n.,  animal. 

120.  The  following  nouns  in  common  use  are  exceptions 
to  these  rules  :  — 

Exc.  1.  Arbor,  a  tree,  car o,Jiesh,  and  ordo,  order,  are  feminine; 
aequor,  the  sea,  marmor,  mai'ble,  and  cor,  cordis,  the  heart,  are 
neuter ;   ordo,  ixmk,  is  masculine  ;  iter  is  neuter. 

Exc.  2.  Latin  nouns  ending  in  -nis  are  masculine  or  doubtful ; 
as,  crinis,  hair,  ignis,  Jire,  panis,  bread,  are  masculine.  The  fol- 
lowing are  masculine  or  fennuine :  amnis,  a  river,  cinis,  ashes, 
finis,  end,  cliinis,  the  haunch,  cSnis,  a  dog,  funis,  a  rope ;  the  plural 
fin§s,  boundaries,  is  always  masculine. 

Exc.  3.  Dens,  a  tooth,  fons,  a  fountain,  mens,  a  mountain,  and 
pons,  a  bridge,  are  masculine. 


96 


FIKST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


121.    Nouns  Irregular  in  Declension. 

PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

bos,  M.& 

F.,  OX. 

vis,  F., 

strength. 

SllS,  M.& 

F.,  sivine. 

HJX,  F., 

snow. 

sfnex.M., 

old  man. 

Jupiter, 

M.,  Jitpiter. 

NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Acc. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

bos 

bovis 

bovi 

bovem 

bos 

bove 

vis 

vis  (rare) 
Vi  (rare) 

vim 

vis 

vi 

sus 

suis 

sui 

suem 

sus 

sue 

nix 

nivis 

nivi 

nivem 

nix 

nive 

senex 

senis 

seni 

senem 

senex 

sene 

Jupiter 

Jovis 

Jovi 

Jovem 

Jupiter 

Jove 

i 

s 

NOM. 

Gex.  1 

DAT.  j 

Acc. 
Voc. 

Abl.  1 

boves 

bovum 

boum 

bdbus 

bubus 

boves 

boves 

bobus 

bubus 

vires 
virium 

viribus 

vires 
vires 

viribus 

sues 

suum 

\  suibus 
i  subus 
sues 
sues 
( suibus 
1  subus 

nives 
nivium 

nivibus 

nives 
nives 

nivibus 

senes 
senum 

senibus 

senes 
senes 

senibus 

iter,  N., 

jusjuraiidum, 

inaterfS,intllas, 

journey. 

N.,  oath. 

mother  of  a  family. 

NoM. 

iter 

jusjurandum 

materfamilias 

u 

Gex. 

itineris 

jurisjurandi 

matrisfamilias 

Dat. 

itineri 

jurijurando 

matrifamilias 

s 

Acc. 

iter 

jusjurandum 

matremfamilias 

c2 

Voc. 

iter 

jusjurandum 

materfamilias 

Abl. 

itinere 

jurejurand5 

matrefamilias 

NOM. 

itinera 

jurajuranda 

matresfamilias 

Gex. 

itinerum 

matrumfamilias 

"^ 

Dat. 

itineribus 

matribusfamilias 

s 

Acc. 

itinera 

jurajuranda 

matresfamilias 

M 

Voc. 

itinera 

jurajuranda 

matresfamilias 

Abl. 

itineribus 

matribusfamilias 

1.  The  locative  case  of  nouns  of  the  third  declension  ends 
like  the  dative,  sometimes  like  the  ablative  ;  as,  Karthagini, 
or  Karthagine,  at  Carthage;  riiri,  m  the  country. 


ABLATIVE.  97 


EXERCISES. 

Determine  by  the  foregoing  rules  the  gender  of  the  fol- 
lowing nouns  :  — 

1.  consul,  -iilis,  consul.  14.  civitas,  -atis,  state. 

2.  sermo,  -onis,  discourse.  15.  legatio,  -onis,  embassy. 

3.  oratio,  -onis,  speech.  16.  lex,  legis,  laio. 

4.  dux,  diiois,  leader.  17.  virtus,  -utis,  virtue. 

5.  multitudo,  -inis,  multitude.  18.  frigus,  -6ris,  cold. 

6.  imperator,  -oris,  commander.       19.  6nus,  -eris,  load. 

7.  ISgio,  -onis,  legion.  20.  vulnus,  -eris,  ivound. 

8.  obses,  -idis,  hostage.  21.  crus,  cruris,  leg. 

9.  p6testas,  -atis,  power.  22.  custos,  -odis,  guard. 

10.  Snimal,  -alis,  animal.  23.  radix,  -icis,  root. 

11.  turris,  -is,  toicer.  24.  princeps,  -ipis,  chief. 

12.  contentio,  -onis,  contention.  25.  semen,  -inis,  seed. 

13.  crimen,  -inis,  charge.  26.  litus,  -6ris,  shore. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality ;  as,  valor,  virtue. 

2.  A  collective  noun  denotes  in  the  singular  number,  a  collection  of 
individuals ;  as,  aryny,  legion. 

How  many  ways  of  determining  the  gender  of  nouns  ?  What  are 
they  ?  What  nouns  are  masculine  by  signification  ?  What,  by  ter- 
mination ?  What  nouns  in  common  use  are  exceptions  ?  Give  the 
rules  for  feminine  nouns.    What  are  the  terminations  of  neuter  nouns ' 


LESSON   XXXI. 

ABLATIVE. 
CAUSE,     MANNER,     MEANS,     AND     INSTRUMENT. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  pallidus  ira  fuit,  he  was  pale  ivith  anger. 

2.  magno  fletu  auxilium  a  Caesare  petunt,  with  a  Jlood  of  tears 

they  seek  aid  from  Cccsar. 

3.  Divitiacus  Gallorum  animos  verbis  confirmat,  Divitiacus 

encourages  the  minds  of  the  Gauls  hy  (or,  hy  means  of)  words. 


98  riKST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

4.  ferro  dimicant  fratres,  the  brothers  Jight  with  the  sword  for 

their  country. 

5.  mllites  ISpidibus  pugnant,  the  soldiers  Jight  luith  stones. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples  the  nouns  that  denote  the  cause 
(ira),  the  manner  (fletu),  the  means  (verbis),  the  instrument  (ferro, 
lapidibus),  by  M^hich  the  action  of  the  verb  is  performed,  are  in 
the  ablative  without  a  preposition,  and  are  modifiers  of  the  predi- 
cate.    This  usage  is  expressed  by  the  following  rule :  — 

ABLATIVE    CASE. 

122.  Rule  IX.  —  The  cause,  manner,  means,  and 
instrument  are  denoted  by  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition. 

123.  Rule  for  position  :  — 

Expressions  of  manner,  means,  and  insfrwnent  are  placed  after 
the  direct  object;  those  of  cause  usually  precede  it;  all  precede 
the  predicate. 

VOCABULARY. 

pgdes,  pgditis,  u.,  foot-soldier,  timidus,  -a,  -um,  timid,  afraid. 

ISpis,  lapidis,  M.,  stone.  passer,  passgris,  m.,  sparrow. 

sSgitta,  -ae,  r.,  an  arrow.  musca,  -ae,  F.,flij. 

vester,  -tra,  -trum,  your.  dev6ro,  -are,  -avi,  devour. 

Syx.  Consilium,  advice,  counsel ;  concilium,  an  assembly,  a 
meeting  (of  part  of  the  people)  ;  lex,  a  lata  passed  in  a  cSmitia,  an 
assembly  of  the  whole  people,  and  regularly  approved;  scitum 
(plebiscitum),  a  law  passed  in  a  concilium. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Caesar  urbem  cremat.  2.  Pater  tuns  urbes  Galliae 
igne  cremat.  3.  Regnum  copiis  conciliabat.  4.  Viros  igne 
cremant.  5.  Hostium  sagittae  regem  vestrum  vulnerant. 
C.  Amate,  piieri,  sorores.  7.  Consules  oppidis  nomina  dant. 
8.  MTlites  consulis  laudant.  9.  Virginem  timidam  vocant. 
10.  Passer  magno  cum  gaudio^  miiscam  devorabat.  11.  Marci 
filius  Gallis  si2:niim  tuba  dat. 


SUBJECT   AND    COPULA.  99 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  gives  a  name.  2.  He  gives  a  name  to  the  city. 
3.  He  gives  a  name  to  the  new  city.  4.  The  soldiers  have 
called.  5.  The  soldiers  have  called  the  consul.  6.  They 
have  praised.  7.  The}'  have  praised  the  eloquence  of  the 
consul.  8.  The  father  calls  (his)  son.  0.  The  consul 
praised  the  soldier.  10.  The  consul  praised  the  valor  of  the 
soldier.  11.  They  are  fighting.  12.  They  are  fighting  with 
the  sword.  13.  The  brothers  are  fighting  with  the  sword. 
^4.  To^  the  city.  15.  Into  the  city.  16.  Out  of  the  city. 
17.  Away  from  the  city.  18.  With  the  chiefs.  19.  They 
burn  the  city.     20.  They  burn  the  city  with  fire. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  ablative  of  manner  commonly  takes  cum  unless  an  adjective 
is  used,  then  cum  may  be  omitted. 

2.  Note  that  when  there  is  motion  towards  a  person  or  place  (except 
names  of  towns),  a  preposition  with  the  accusative  is  used;  the  dative 
is  wrong. 

What  nouns  end  in  -I  in  the  ablative  singular  '^  In  -ium  in  the  geni- 
tive plural  ?  What  is  the  gender  of  mens  ?  Give  the  rule  for  the 
gender  of  nouns  of  the  second  declension.  What  is  the  gender  of 
nauta  ?  Give  the  rule.  The  gender  of  nouns  not  provided  for  by 
the  rules  must  be  learned  by  practice;  as,  jus  (gen.  juris),  right,  and 
iter  (gen.  itineris),  joumei/,  march,  are  both  neuter.  Name  the  stems 
of  m^e,  mos,  Animal,  iter,  ignis,  mens,  rex,  corpus. 


LESSON   XXXII. 

SUBJECT    AND    COPULA. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  regina  b6na,  a  good  queen. 

2.  regina  bona  est,  the  queen  is  good. 

3.  Tullia,  filia  reglnae,  poetam  laudat,  Tullia,  the  daughter  of 

the  queen,  praises  the  poet. 


100  FIRST    STEPS   IN    LATIN. 


4.  Tullia  filia  reginae  est,  TuUia  is  the  daugltter  of  the  queen. 

5.  puella  Smata  est,  the  girl  is  loved. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  in  Ex.  1  the  adjective 
simply  modifies  the  noun,  without  the  intervention  of  a  vei'b ;  in 
Ex.  2  the  adjective  is  connected  with  the  noun  by  means  of  the 
verb  est.  The  first  adjective  is  called  an  attributive  adjective,  the 
second  is  a  predicate  adjective,  and  is  called  the  complement.  In 
Ex.  3  note  that  the  descri])tive  noun  filia  stands  in  the  same  part 
of  the  sentence  as  the  subject  which  it  modifies;  it  is  called  an 
apposilive.  h\  Ex.  4  the  descriptive  noun  is  used  to  form  the 
predicate,  and  is  called  a  2)7-edicate  noun,  or  complement.  Note  that 
the  predicate  adjective  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender,  number,  and 
case,  the  predicate  noun  agi'ees  with  the  subject  in  case.  Note 
the  position  of  the  predicate  adjective ;  it  may,  however,  precede 
the  verb  for  the  sake  of  emphasis.  In  Ex.  5  tlie  verb  sum  helps 
to  form  the  perfect  tense  of  the  verb,  and  is  therefore  called  an 
auxiliary  verb ,   hence,  — 

124.  The  verb  sum  is  cither  an  auxiliary  or  a  copulative 
verb.  It  is  an  auxiliary  verb  when  it  helps  to  form  some  of 
the  tenses  of  other  verbs ;  it  is  coijulative  when  it  joins  the 
subject  to  some  other  word  which  is  used  to  describe  the 
subject.  The  woi-d  thus  used  to  describe  the  subject  may  be 
a  noun  or  an  adjective,  and  is  called  tiie  complement.  If  the 
descriptive  word  is  a  noun,  it  is  called  a  predicate  noun;  if 
it  is  an  adjective,  then  it  is  called  a  predicate  adjective. 

PREDICATE    NOUN. 

125.  Rule  X.  —  A  noun  in  tlic  predicate,  denoting 
the  same  person  or  thing-  as  the  subject,  agrees  with 
it  in  case. 

Obs.  Note  that  a  noun  used  to  describe  another  noun  or  pro- 
noun, and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  same 
case.  AVlien  the  descriptive  noun  is  in  the  same  part  of  the  sen- 
tence, it  is  called  an  Appositi  ve  ;  and  when  it  stands  in  the  predicate, 
usually  after  intransitive  verbs  of  to  be,  to  become,  to  remain,  etc., 
and  with  passive  verbs  of  naming,  calling,  choosing,  appointing,  etc., 
it  is  called  a  Predicate  Nominative. 

PREDICATE    ADJECTIVE. 

126.  Rule  XI.  —  A  predicate  adjective  agrees  with 
its  subject  in  g-ender,  number,  and  case. 


SUBJECT    AND   COPUIJA.  "  1<)1 


127.    Partial  Paradigm  of  sum,  /  (int. 

Obs.  The  verb  sum,  1  am,  belongs  to  none  of  tlie  four  conjuga- 
tions ;  it  is  both  irregular  and  defective,  i.e.,  it  wants  certain  parts. 
It  is  used  in  Latin,  as  in  English,  to  help  conjugate  the  passive 
voice  of  regular  verbs. 

PKINCIPAL  PARTS. 

Present  Stem,  es-.  Perfect  Stem,  fui-. 

PuESENT.  Infinitive.  Perfect.  Future  Part. 

sum  esse  fui  fiiturus 

INDICATIVE     PRESENT. 


Shvj.  1    sum,  I  am. 

2  es,  thou  art. 

3  est,  he  is. 


Pliir.  1    sumus,  7ve  are 

2  estis,  ijou  are. 

3  sunt,  the//  are. 


VOCABULARY.' 

testis,  testis,  m.  &  f.,  vntJiess.  bellicosus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  icarlike. 

Arar,  Araris,  ace.  Ararim,  m.,       pulcher,    -chra,    -chrum,    adj., 

ile  Arar  (now  the  Saoiie).  heautiful. 

c6m.es, -itis,-M.&F.,  a  companion.       miilier,  miilieris,  f.,  woman. 
c^a,  -ae,  f.,  cottage.  equus,  -i,  m.,  horse. 

128.   Decline  together  the  following  :  — 

1.  reliquae  copiae  (ph),  the  remaining  forces. 

2.  puella  pulchra,  a  beautiful  girl. 
P).  oppidum  magnum,  a  large  toivn. 

Syk,  Festino,  hasten  impatiently,  hurry;  prSpero,  hasten  with 
energy,  but  without  hurry  or  impatience. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

s.       v.c.        c.  s.       v.c.       c. 

1.  Puella  est  pulchra.  2.  Equus  est  animal.  3.  Oppidum 
est  magnum.  4.  PopCdus  Romanus  est  testis.  5.  Flumeu 
est  Arar. ^  6.  AmTci  siiuuis  {ice  are).  7.  Caesar  est  impe- 
rator.  8.  Ariovistus  est  rex.  9.  Virtus  est  comes  sapien- 
tiae.  10.  Puella  est  nnutae  fllia.  11.  Est  {it  is)  casa 
agricolae.  12.  Est-  {there  is)  parva  insula.  13.  Multa 
animalia  pulchra  sunt. 


102 


FlilST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


Ti  ahslate  iiito  ^Latiii :  — 

1.  We  are,  they  are,  you  are.      2.    The  fields  are  large. 

4.    She  is  the  daughter  of  the 


3.   The  islands  are   small 

sailor.      5.    We   are   Romans.      6.    The   cities   are   large. 

8.  We  are  friends.      9.  It  is  a 
10.  The  town  is  large. 


7.  There  is  a  large  town 


large  town 


NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  What  is  the  rule  for  the  gender  of  Arar? 

2,  In  English,  when  tlie  subject  is  indefinite,  we  use  the  word  there 
with  some  form  of  the  verb  to  be;  as,  insxila  est  parva  may  mean 
the  island  is  small,  an  island  ts  small,  (there)  is  a  small  island,  (it)  is  a 
small  island,  or  the  island  is  a  small  (one). 

What  is  tlie  present  tense  of  sum  i  AVhy  is  sum  called  a  copula  T 
What  is  the  noun  or  adjective  after  it  called  ?  Why  1  Note  that  the 
complement,  if  a  noun,  agrees  with  the  subject  in  case ;  if  an  adjective, 
in  gender,  number,  and  case.  Note  that  the  verb  sumi  in  ail  the  fore- 
going examples  is  copulative. 


LESSON   XXXIII. 

INDICATIVE   or  *S'ro/.-PEEDIOATE    GENITIVE. 

129.   The  verb  sum  is  cunjugated  in  the   Indicative 
Mode  as  follows :  — 


PARTIAI.    PARADIGM. 


Person. 

Present. 

Perfect. 

Aorist. 

Shuj.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 

3 

snm,  I  am. 
es,  thou  art. 
est,  he  is. 
sumus,  ive  are. 
estis,  you  are. 

sunt,  they  are.    3 

fui,  /  have  been. 
fuisti,  thou  hast  been. 
fuit,  he  has  been. 
fuimus,  M-e  have  been. 
fuistis,  you  have  been. 

/  2vas. 
Thou  wast. 
Tie  was. 
We  were. 
You  were. 

They  were. 

PK  KD  1(J  ATE    GENITIVE 


108 


PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 


Person. 

Imperfect. 

Pluperfect. 

Sl7lCj.  1 

eram,  /  was. 

fueram,  /  had  heen. 

2 

eras,  thou  ivast. 

fueras,  thou  hadst  heen. 

3 

erat,  Ae  was. 

fuerat,  he  had  heen. 

FJnr.  1 

eramus,  ive  were. 

fuerainus,  we  had  heen. 

2 

eratis,  yon  were. 

fueratis,  you  had  heen. 

3 

erant,  theij  v:ere. 

fuerant,  they  had  heen. 

>S7«7.  1 

Fviture. 

Future  Perfect. 

ero,  /  shall  or  will  he. 

fuero,  I  shall  or  mil  have  heen. 

2 

eris,  thoa  ivilt  he 

fueris,  thou  unit  have  heen. 

3 

erit,  he  will  he. 

fuerit,  he  wdl  have  heen. 

PInr.  1 

erimus,  ive  shall  or  will  he. 

faerimus,  it'e  shall  or  ivill  have  heen. 

2 

eritis,  ijou  will  he. 

fueritis,  you  will  have  heen. 

3 

erunt,  theij  will  he. 

fuerint,  they  will  have  heen. 

130.   Predicate  Genitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  haec  domus  Caes§.ris  est,  this  house  is  Ccesar^s  property,  or 

this  is  Ccesars  house. 

2.  haec  hostium  erant,  these  things  ivere  the  enemi/s. 

3.  est  sSpientis,  it  is  the  part  of  a  wise  man. 

4.  Ii6c  est  praeceptoris,  this  is  the  business  of  the  instructor. 

Obs.  Tn  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  nonn  which  the 
genitive  limits  is  omitted;  that  these  genitives  all  stand  in  the 
predicate  after  the  verb  sum,  and  that  the  M^ord  to  be  snpplied 
is  a  general  word  suggested  by  the  sense.  In  translating  into 
English,  we  supply  the  words  part,  pj'operty,  dutij,  office,  business, 
characteristic,  etc.  The  idiom  may  be  expressed  in  the  following 
rule :  — 


PREDICATE    GENITIVE. 

131.  Rule  XTI.  —  A  noun  in  the  predicate,  denot- 
inj^  a  different  person  or  thing  from  the  subject,  is 
put  in  the  genitive. 


104  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

1.  The  predicate  genitive  occurs  most  frequently  witli 
sum  and  facio,  and  the  passives  of  piito,  habeo,  and  existimo. 

2.  The  genitive  of  Personal  Pronouns  is  never  used  in  this 
construction  ;  the  neuter  of  the  corresponding  Possessive 
Pronoun  is  used  ;  as, 

EXAMPLE. 

est  tuum  (not  tui)  videre,  it  is  your  dutij  to  see. 


VOCABULARY. 

multitude,  -mis,  f.,  multitude.  tempus,  temp6ris,  n.,  time. 

oratio,  -oiiis,  v.,  speech,  oration.  mercator,  -oris,  m.,  merchant. 

miser, -era, -erum,  adj.,  wre/t7<e//.  mors,  mortis,  f.,  death. 

svLip-gWcivira., -I,  y,.,  punishment.  creber,  crebra,  crebrum, /?'e- 
imperium,  -i,  n.,  power,  sway.  quenf,  numerous. 

Syx.  Provoco,  (1)  to  call  forth,  sximmon :  (2)  to  appeal  to  the 
people.  Appello,  (1)  to  address  vvitli  the  appropriate  title;  (2)  to 
app)eal  to  one  magistrate  from  the  decision  of  another. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Iveglna  erat  pulchra.  2.  Viri  in  proelio  fuerant. 
3.  Ariovistus  fuit  rex  Germanoruni.  4.  Erimus^  beat!. 
5.  Eritis  miseri.  G.  Puellae  fuerunt  pulchrae.  7.  Erantne 
puellae  in  silva?  8.  Num  Caesar  consul  erit?  9.  Copiae 
Belgarum  in  proviucia  sunt.     10.   Sumus  in  Gallia. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Tlie  pronoun  is  contained  in  tlic  verb. 

Give  the  rule  for  tlie  gender  of  nouns  in  -do.  For  nouns  in  -io.  Wliat 
are  the  principal  parts  of  sum  ?  Give  a  synopsis  of  sum  in  the  indica- 
tive. What  is  the  rule  for  a  noun  in  the  genitive  "i  The  position  ? 
What  is  meant  hy  a  predicate  genitive  ?  On  what  does  the  predicate 
genitive  depend  ? 


ADJECTIVES.  —  THIRD  DECLENSION. 


105 


LESSON    XXXIV. 
ADJECTIVES.  -  THIED    DECLENSION. 

132.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  are  declined 
like  nouns,  and  may  have  — 

1.  A  different  form  for  each  gender  in  the  nominative  singular. 

2.  Two  forms,  —  one  for  the  masculine  and  feminine,  and  an- 

other for  the  neuter. 

3.  The  same  forms  for  all  three  genders. 

133.  Adjectives  of  tlie  Third  Declension  in  -er  have  three 
endings  in  the  nominative,  and  are  declined  like  acer,  sharp. 
The  stem  ends  in  -i-. 

PARADIGM. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc- 

Fern 

Neuter. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

Xo^r. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

acres 

acres 

acria 

Gen. 

acris 

acris 

acris 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium 

Dat. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

Ace. 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

acres,  -is 

acres,  -is 

acria 

Voc. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

acres 

acres 

acria 

Abl. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

134.    Decline  like  acer  the  following  :  — 

1.  celer,  cgl^ris,  cglSre,  sioift. 

2.  gquester,  equestris,  gquestre,  equestrian. 

3.  alacer,  alacris,  alacre,  Uvely,  eager. 

1.  Celer  is  the  only  adjective  of  this  class  that  keeps  the 
e  before  the  r  in  the  obli(ine  cases.  Celer,  when  nsed  as  an 
adjective,  has  the  genitive  plural  in  -him  ;  but  as  a  noun, 
denoting  military  rank,  it  has  celerum  in  genitive  plural,  and 
celere  in  ablative  singular. 

Obs.  Xote  that  adjectives  ending  in  -er  have  -i  in  the  ablative 
singular  of  all  genders. 


106 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


135.  Adjectives  of  two  endings  have  -is  or  -or  in  the  nom- 
inative masculine  and  feminine,  and  -e  or  -ns  in  the  neuter. 
'Iliey  are  declined  like  mitis,  mild,  and  mitior,  milder. 


PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

^[asc.  and  Fern. 

Neuter. 

Masc.  and  Fein. 

Neuter, 

NOM. 

mitis 

mite 

mites 

mitia 

Gen. 

mitis 

mitis 

mitium 

mitium 

J)at. 

miti 

miti 

mitibus 

mitibus 

Ace. 

mitem 

mite 

mites,  -is 

mitia 

Voc. 

mitis 

mite 

mites 

mitia 

Abl. 

miti 

miti 

mitibus 

mitibus 

mitior,  milder  (comparative  degree). 


NOM. 

mitior 

mitius 

mitiores 

mitiora 

Gen. 

mitioris 

mitioris 

mitiorum 

mitiorum 

DAT. 

mitiori 

mitiori 

mitioribus 

mitioribus 

Ace. 

mitiorem 

mitius 

mitiores,  -is 

mitiora 

Voc. 

mitior 

mitius 

mitiores 

miti5ra 

Abl. 

raiti5re,  -i ' 

miti5re,  -i 

mitioribus 

mitioribus 

Obs.  Adjectives  ending  in  -Is  are  also  /-stems,  and  have-i  in  the 
ablative  of  all  genders.  Note  that  comparatives  have  two  endlnr/s 
in  the  nominative ;  and  that  the  ablative  singular  ends  in  -e  or  -/, 
and  the  nominative  plural  in  -c.s-  and  -a,  not  -ia. 


1.  Mitis  is  declined  like  acris,  acre;  all  comparatives  of 
adjectives  are  declined  like  mitior,  except  pliis,  7nore,  wliicli 
is  declined  as  follows  :  — 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc.  and  Feni.               Neuter. 

Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

plus 

plures 

plura 

Gen. 

pluris 

plurium 

Dat. 

■ 

pluribus 

Ace. 

plus 

plures,  -is 

plura 

Voc. 

plures 

plura 

Abl. 

plure 

pluribus 

ADJECTIVES.  —  THIRD  DECLENSION.  107 

VOCABULAKY. 

utilis,  utile,  useful.  omnis,  omne,  all. 

navalis,  navale,  naval.  iininortalis,inimortale, ////»>  o?7a/. 

Silvester,  -tris,  -tre,  wood//.       fortis,  forte,  brave. 
voliicer,  v61ftcris,  vSliicre,      Germanus,  -i,  m.,  German, 
winf/ed.  acer,  acris,  acre,  sharp,  severe. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Puer  est  tristis.  2.  Timor  oranes  mllites  occiipavit. 
?).  Leges  sunt  utiles.  4.  Iter  est  facile.  5.  Equi  sunt 
celeres.  G.  Cum  omnibus  copiis.  7.  Milites  fortes  erunt. 
8.  DiT  immortales  sunt.  9.  Tempus  breve  est.  10.  Consul 
virtntem  militis  fortis  laudat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Tlie  boys  were  sad.  2.  The  journeys  are  difficult. 
3.  The  soldiers  were  brave.  4.  The  gods  are  immortal. 
5.  The  horse  is  swift.  6.  The  laws  are  severe.  7.  The 
consul  praises  the  brave  soldiers.  8.  The  soldiers  will  be 
brave.     9.  They  will  be  brave. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Endings  enclosed  in  brackets  are  rare. 

Give  the  stem  of  acer.  How  are  adjectives  of  three  endings  de- 
clined ?  Give  the  ablative  singular  of  acer.  Ilovr  are  adjectives  of 
two  endings  declined  1  Give  the  ablative  singular  of  mitis.  The  geni- 
tive plural.     What  is  an  adjective  ? 


LESSON   XXXV. 

ADJECTIVES.  -  THIRD    DECLENSION. 

136.  Adjectives  of  one  ending  in  the  nominative  are 
strictly  consonant  stems,  but  they  follow  in  part  the 
declension  of  vowel  stems ;  that  is,  they  have  -i  or  -e  in 
the  ablative  singular,  -ia  in  the  neuter  plural,  and  -ium 


108 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


ill  tlie  genitive  plural.  In  other  cases  they  follow  tlie 
declension  of  consonant  stems.  They  all  end  in  s,  a:,  Z, 
or  7*,  and  are  declined  like  audax,  hold. 

PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc.  and  Fem.              Neuter. 

Masc.  and  Fem.               Neuter. 

XoM. 

audax 

audaces                audacia 

CxKN. 

audacis 

audacium 

DAT. 

audaci 

audacibus 

Acc. 

audacem                audax 

audaces  (is)          audacia 

Voc. 

audax 

audaces                audacia 

AUL. 

audaci  or  audace 

audacibus 

iiigens,  vast 

• 

Xo.M. 

ingens 

ingentes               ingentia 

Cen. 

ingentis 

ingentium 

])AT. 

ingenti 

ingentibus 

Ace. 

ingentem               ingens 

ingentes,  -is         ingentia 

Voo. 

ingens 

ingentes              ingentia 

Ap.l. 

ingenti  or  ingente 

ingentibus 

1.   Present  Piirticiples  arc  declined  like  Smans,  except  in 
the  ubhitive  siii«iular,  where  thev  have  -e. 


PAKADIGMS. 


Cast's. 

fellx,  happy. 

amaiis,  loring. 

priuleiis,  j?«*M^/e/j<. 

M.&F.           X. 

M.  &  F.              N. 

M.  &  F.                   N. 

XOM. 

felix 

amans 

priidens 

Gkn. 

felicis 

amantis 

prudentis 

^' 

DAT. 

felici 

amanti 

priidenti 

Acc. 

felicem     felix 

amantem   amans 

prudentem   prudens 

x 

Voc. 

feh-x 

amans 

prudens 

- 

Ap.l. 

NOM. 

felici,  -e 

amante,  -i 

prudenti,  -e 

felices     felicia 

amante,?  amantia 

prudentes  prudentia 

Gkn. 

felicium 

amantium 

prudentium 

"S 

Dat. 

felicibus 

amantibus 

priidentibus 

s 

Acc. 

felices     felicia 

amantis  amantia 

prudentes  prudentia 

Ph 

Voc. 

felices     felicia 

amantes  amantia 

priidentes  prudentia 

Al5L. 

felicibus 

amantibus 

prudentibus 

ADJECTIVES.  —  THIRD   DECLENSION. 


109 


PAKADIGMS. 


Cases. 

vStus,  old. 

iens,  (/oiuff. 

par,  equal. 

M.  &  F.              N. 

M.  &  F.              N. 

M.  &  F.               N. 

NOM. 

vetus 

iens 

par 

Gen. 

veteris 

euntis 

paris 

1 

Dat. 

veteri 

eunti 

pari 

Ace. 

veterem       vetus 

euntem        iens 

parem         par 

Voc. 

vetus 

iens 

par 

Akl. 

vetere  (-i) 

eunte,  -i 

pari 

NOM. 

veteres         Vetera 

euntes          euntia 

pares          paria 

Gex. 

veterum 

euntium 

parium 

t 

Dat. 

veteribus 

euntibus 

paribus 

a 
S 

Ace. 

veteres,  -is  Vetera 

euntes          euntia 

pares          paria 

Voc. 

veteres         Vetera 

euntes          euntia 

pares          paria 

Abl. 

veteribus 

euntibus 

paribus 

Rules  for  the  Oblique  Cases  of  Adjectives  of  the  TJiird 
Declension, 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

137.  Most  fidjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  -i  in  the 
ablative  singular,  Ijut  consonant  stems  have  -i  when  nscd  as 
adjectives,  -e  when  used  as  nouns.  Participles  in  -us,  when 
used  as  such,  or  as  nouns,  regularly  have  -e ;  but  as  adjec- 
tives, -I. 

GENITIVE    AND    NEUTER    PLURAL. 

138.  The  genitive  plural  commonly  has  -ium.  Consonant 
stems  have  -ium  when  tlie  stem-characteristic  is  preceded  by 
a  long  vowel  or  b}'  a  consonant ;  -um,  w^hen  the  stem-charac- 
teristic is  preceded  by  a  short  vowel;  as,  audax,  gen.  plur. 
audacium;  dives,  gen.  sing,  divitis,  gen.  plur.  divitum;  so 
vetus  (vgteris),  vStgriim;  iiber  (iiberis),  iiberuni;  caelebs, 
tmmarried,  caelibum.  The  neutei'  plural  has  -ia  ;  only  vgtus 
has  vgtgra. 

Participles  have  -iu7n  ;  as,  Smans,  amantium. 

139.  Decline  together  tlic  following  :  — 

1.  puella  felix,  a  Jiapp/j  (jirl.      o.  donum  ingens,  a  lart/e  gifl. 

2.  mSre  ingens,  a  vast  sea.         4.  servus  audax,  a  hold  servant. 


110  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

VOCABULARY. 

felix,  gen.  felicis,  liappy.  recens,  gen.  rgcentis,  recent. 

audax,  gen.  audacis,  hold,  auda-  oriens,  gen.  6rientis,  rising, 

clous.  miilier,  miilieris,  f.,  icoman. 

dIvSs,  gen.  divitis,  i-lch.  flens,  gen.  flentis,  weeping. 

par,  gen.  paris,  equal.  vStus,  gen.  vStSris,  old,  ancient. 

pdtens,  gen.  TpbtQJitis,  powerful.  grex,  gen.  grSgis,  M.,Jiock. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  MTlites  sunt  audaces.  2.  Reges  sunt  potentes. 
o.  VirT  (ITvites  sunt.  4.  Mulieres  fclices  erant.  5.  Belgae 
spectant  in^  orientem  s5lem.  6.  Consilium  ducis  audax  est. 
7.  Mulieres  flentes  Caesarem  implorant. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  soldier  is  brave.  2.  The  leaders  are  bold.  3.  The 
men  are  rieh.  4.  The  weeping  woman  implores  the  consul. 
5.  The  town  is  old.      G.  The  women  are  not  happj. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.    Tnivards. 

What  adjectives  have  but  one  ending  ?  Arc  they  vowel  or  con- 
sonant stems  ?  Do  they  increase  in  tlio  genitive  ?  In  wliat  docs  the 
abhitive  singular  end  ?  In  what  docs  the  genitive  plural  end  ?  Does 
the  ablative  always  end  in  -/ ?  ])oes  the  genitive  plural  always  have 
-iam  ?     Explain  when  they  have  -i  in  the  ablative,  and  when  -e. 


LESSON    XXXVI. 

OOMPAEISON    or    ADJECTIVES. 

ABLATIVE     WITH      COMPARATIVES. 

140.  Adjectives  are  compared,  in  Latin  as  in  English, 
in  three  ways  :  1st.  Kegularly,  i.e.,  by  adding  peculiar 
terminations ;  2d.  By  prefixing  the  adverbs  mSgis  and 
maxime,  mo7'e  and  most;  and  3d.  Irregularly. 


coMPAiiisoN  OF  adjectivp:s. 


Ill 


I.    liegiilar   Conipai'isoii, 

141.  Adjectives  are  regularly  compared  by  adding  to 
the  stem  of  the  positive,  after  the  final  vowel  has  been 
dropped,  the  following  endings :  — 

SUPERLATIVE. 

Masc.  Fem.  Nkut. 

-isslmus     -issima     -issimum 


COMPARATIVE. 
Masc.  Feji.  Neut, 

-ior  -ior  -ius 


EXAMPLES. 


Positive. 

Stem. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

durus, 

liard. 

duro- 

durior, 

harder. 

durissimus, 

hardest,  very  hard. 

dulcis, 

siceet. 

dulci- 

dulcior, 

siveeter. 

dulcissimus, 

sireetest. 

prudens, 

sayacioas. 
felix, 
happy. 

prudent- 
felic- 

prudentior, 

more  sagacious. 
felicior, 
happier. 

prudentissimus, 

most  sagacious. 
felicissimus, 
happiest. 

1.  Note  that  the  stems  are  dur6-,  dulcT-,  prudent-,  felic-; 
the  final  vowel  disappears  before  the  initial  vowel  of  the 
suffix. 

2.  All  superlatives  are  declined  like  bSnus,  b6na,  bSnum. 

3.  All  comparatives,  except  plus,  are  declined  like  mglior^ 
hptte7\ 

PARADIGM. 


Cases. 

Siaij^ular. 

Plural. 

Masc.  &  Fem.               Neut. 

Masc.  &  Fem.                  Neut. 

NOM. 

melior                 melius 

meliores               meliora 

Gkn. 

melioris 

meliorum 

Dat. 

meli5ri 

meli5ribus 

Ace. 

meliorem           melius 

meliores,  -is         meliora 

Voc. 

melior                melius 

meliores               meliora 

Al5L. 

meliore,  -i 

melioribus 

Obs.  Xote  that  the  ablative  singular  ends  in  -e  or  -i;  the  neuter 
plural  in -a;  the  accusative  phn-al,  masculine  and  feminine,  in -e*' 
or  -IS ;  and  the  genitive  plural  in  -um,  not  -iujn. 


112  FIKST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

142.  The  Construction  with  Comparatives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  servus  est  felicior  rege,  the  slave  is  hapjjier  than  the  king. 

2.  servus  est  felicior  quam^  rex,  the  slave  is  happier  than  the  kinq. 

(.)us.  Ill  the  lirst  example,  Dote  that  tlie  comparative  is  followed 
by  the  ablative ;  in  the  second  example,  quam,  tluin,  is  used  with 
the  comparative,  and  the  following  word  is  in  the  same  case  as  the 
noun  preceding  the  adjective.  The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the 
following  rule :  — 

ABLATIVE    WITH    COMPARATIVES. 

143.  Rule  XIII.  —  The  comparative  degrree  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  ablative  when  qiiam,  than,  is  omitted. 

1.  Comparatives  with  quam  are  followed  (by  the  nomina- 
tive, or)  by  the  case  of  the  correspoudiug  noun  before  them. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  fortiorem  vidi  neminera  quam   M^ium,   /  have  seen  no 

hraver  man  than  Marius ;  or 

2.  Hibernia  minor  quam  Britannia  existimatur,  Ireland  is 

considered  smaller  than  Britain. 

144.  ^lodel  for  parsing  comparatives  and  superlatives  :  — 
servus  est  felicior  rege,  the  servant  is  happier  than  the  king: 

felicior  is  an  adjective  in  the  comparative  degree,  from  the  posi- 
tive felix;  stem/eZlc-,  com\).  felicior^  Huper.  felicisstmus.  Felicior 
is  an  adjective  of  the  third  declension,  and  is  declined  like  mglior, 
melius,  etc.  It  is  nominative  singular  masculine,  and  agrees  with 
servus.  Rule  VIII. :  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender, 
number,  and  case. 

VOCABULARY. 

rapax,  -acis,  ravenous.  aer,  agris,  m.,  the  air. 

CicSro,  Cicgronis,  m.,  Cicero.      clarus,  -a,  -um,  clear,  famous. 
doctus,  -a,  -um,  learned.  velox,  gen.  velocis,  swift. 

gravis,  -e,  heavy,  severe.  mendax,  -acis,  b/ing. 

Syx.  VulnSro,  to  wound  by  a  cut  or  thrust;  saucio,  to  icound 
hi  any  way. 


COMPARISON    OF   ADJECTIVES.  113 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Vir  fellx  erat.  2.  Vir  fcllcior  erat.  3.  Judex  sapiens 
est.  4.  Judex  siipientior  erat  quam  rex.  5.  Sumus- 
potentes.  G.  Estis  potentiores.  7.  Reges  sunt  potentissimT. 
8.  Cicero  erat  vir  doctissimus.  9.  Lux  est  velocior  quam 
sonitus.  10.  Koma  clarissima^  urbs  erat.  11.  Galloruni 
omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae.  12.  Jura  est  mons  altis- 
siraus. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  men  are  happy.  2.  We  are  happier.  3.  The 
soldiers  are  brave.  4.  The  brave  soldiers  are  powerful. 
5.  The  soldiers  are  more  powerful.  C.  The  journey  was 
difficult.  7.  Gold  is  heavier  than  silver.  8.  The  servants 
are  very  happy.  9.  The  Romans  were  braver  than  the 
Gauls.  10.  Cicero  was  a  very  renowned  orator.  11.  The 
soldiers  are  braver  than  the  general. 

NOTES     AND    fJUESTIONS. 

1.  Quam  is  a  conjunction,  and  is  not  inflected;  it  means  than. 

2.  The  subject  is  included  in  the  verb. 

3.  The  superlative  is  not  always  translated  by  most;  it  is  sometimes 
best  rendered  by  r^ry.  So  the  comparative  may  be  translated  in  vari- 
ous ways;  as,  audScior,  holder,  nither  bolder  (/.r;.  bolder  tlian  usual), 
ioo  bold. 

In  how  many  ways  are  adjectives  compared  ?  Decline  the  compara- 
tive of  potens,  altus.  To  wdiat  declension  of  adjectives  do  superla- 
tives belong-  ?  Wbat  is  the  rule  for  tlie  agreement  of  adjectives  'i 
By  what  case  is  the  comparative  degree  followed  ? 


114 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


LESSON   XXXVII. 

OOMPAEISON    or    ADJECTIVES. 

GENITIVE    AND    DATIVE    WITH    ADJECTIVES. 
II.    Coin2Jarison  by  Adverbs. 
145.   Adjectives  ending  in  -us  preceded  by  a  vowel 
(except  those  in  -quus)  commonly  form  their  compara- 
tive  and  superlative    by  means  of  the  adverbs  magis, 
more^  and  maxime,  7nost. 

EXAMPLES. 


Positive. 

Coiiiiiarative. 

Sai»erlative. 

idoneus,  yj7. 
dubius,  doubtful. 
ndxius,  Iturtfil. 

magis  idoneus 
magis  diibius 
magis  noxius 

maxime  idoneus 
maxime  dubius 
maxime  noxius 

1.  Adjectives  in  -quus  form  their  comparjitives  and  super- 
latives regularly  ;  as, 

aiitiquus,  ancient,  antiquior,  antiquissimus. 

146.  Dative  with  Adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  victoria  Germanorura  pSptllo  Romano  perictllosa  est,  the 

victor//  of  the  Germans  is  dantjerous  to  the  Roman  jyeople. 

2.  puella  Srat  matri  similis,  the  (jirl  ivas  like  her  mother. 

3.  castris  idoneus  16cus  est,  the  place  is  suitable  for  a  camp. 

Obs.  Til  the  foregoing  examples,  note  the  adjectives  periculosa, 
similis,  and  idoneus,  and  that  each  is  construed  with  the  dative. 
The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule :  — 

DATIVE    WITH    ADJECTIVES. 

147.  Rule  XIV.  —  The  dative  is  vised  after  many 
adjectives  to  denote  the  object  to  which  the  quality 
is  directed. 

1.  The  adjectives  that  take  the  dative  are  chiefly  those 
signifying  useful.,  pleascutt,  friendly.,  fit.,  like,  inclined.,  ready., 


COMPAKISON    OF    ADJECTIVES.  115 

easy^  clear,  equal,  and  their  opposites  ;  also  those  signifying 
near ;  many  compounded  with  con- ;  and  verbals  in  -bills. 

2.  Similis  and  dissimilis  take  also  the  genitive,  espe- 
cially of  persons,  when   denoting  likeness   or   unlikeness   in 

CllAllACTEK. 

GENITIVE    WITH    ADJECTIVES. 

148.  Rule  XV.  —  Many  adjectives  are  followed 
by  the  genitive  to  complete  tlieir  meaning". 

1.  The  adjectives  governing  the  genitive  are  those  den,oting 
desire,  knoivledge,  memory,  fabiess,  mastery,  participation, 
guilt,  and  their  opposites  ;  and  verbals  in  -ax. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  avidus  laudis,  desirous  of  praise. 

2.  niSinor  virtutis,  mindful  of  virtue. 

3.  belli  pSritus,  stilled  in  war. 

VOCABUIiAKY. 

carus,  -a,  -um,  dear.  Belgae,  -arum,  m.  pL,  the  Belgians. 

idoneus,  -a,  -um,  suitable.  p6riciil6sus,  -a,  -um,  dangerous. 

iuimicus,  -a,  -um,  unfriendly,  Amicus,  -a,  -um,  friendly, 

hostile.  Graecus,  -a,  -um,  Greek. 

Syn.  Animus,  the  mind,  the  soul;  mens,  thought  or  intellectual 
faculty ;  Snima,  the  life,  the  vital  principle. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Magister  discipulis  carus  est.  2.  Locus  magis  id5neas 
castris  quam  urbi  fuit.  3.  Belgae  proximi  sunt  GermanTs. 
4.  Filius  patris^  simillimus  est.  5.  Dux  inimlcus  Dumnorigl 
fuit.  C.  Tullus  HostTlius'-'  proximo  regi  dissimilis  fuit. 
7.  Ilomerus  est  veterrimus^  omnium  Graecorum  poetfirum. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  See  Pvule  147.  2. 

2.  Decline  Tullus  Hostilius  together.  3.  See  149.  1. 

How  are  adjectives  compared  by  means  of  adverbs  1  What  is  an 
adverb  ?  Compare  beatitifidly.  AVhat  class  of  adjectives  are  followed 
by  the  dative  ?     Give  tlie  rule. 


116 


FIRST  STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON   XXXVIII. 

OOMPAEISON    or    ADJECTIVES. 

111.    Irregular  and  Defective  Comparison, 

149.    Adjectives  in  -er  form  their  comparative  reg 


lai-ly,  but  their  superlative  is  formed  by  addiii 


p"  -rim  us 


to  the  nominative. 


EXAMPLES. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

acer,  s/iarj>. 

acrior 

acerrimus 

miser,  icretched. 

miserior 

miserrimus 

celer,  s)rift. 

celerior 

celerrimus 

pulcher,  bedutiful. 

pulchrior 

pulclierrimus 

niger,  hlark. 

nigrior 

nigerrimus 

1.  Also  v6tus,  old  (gen.  v6t6ris)  has  the  super,  vgterrimus. 

2.  The  following  six  adjectives  in  -ilis^  declined  like 
mitis,"  form  their  superlative  by  adding  -Ihnns  to  tlie  sti  in, 
after  dropping  the  final  vowel :  — 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

facilis,  (-(isi/. 

facilior 

facillimus 

difficiHs,  dij/iadt. 

difficilior 

diricillimus 

similis,  slini/ar. 

similior 

simillimus 

dissimilis,  unlike. 

dissimilior 

dissimillimus 

gracilis,  slfuder. 

gracilior 

gracillimus 

humilis,  loir. 

humilior 

humillimus 

3.  Compound  adjectives  ending  in  -cUais^  -ficus,  -volvs, 
form  their  comparatives  in  -entlor,  and  their  superlatives  in 
-eutissriUHs  (as  if  from  positives  ending  in  -ens)^  ;  as, 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Sni)erlative. 

maledicus,  s/andcrous. 
beneficus,  beneficent. 
benevolus,  liencnJefif. 

maledicentior 
beneficentior 
benevolentior 

maledicentissimus 
beneficentissimus 
benevolentissimus 

Note.   These  comparatives  and  superlatives  are  formed  as  from 
the  participles  dicens,  sa//mg,  faciens,  doing,  v61eiis,  wisJdng. 


COMPAKISON   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


117 


4.  The  following  adjectives,  in  common  use,  are  compared 
irreouliirly  :  — 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Sviperlative. 

bonus,  (jood. 

melior,  better. 

optimus,  best. 

malus,  hdd. 

pejor,  irorse. 

pessimus,  ivorst. 

magnus,  (jrcal. 

major,  (/renter. 

maximus,  greatest. 

parvus,  small. 

minor,  less. 

minimus,  least. 

multus,  much. 

plus  (neut.),  7nore. 

pliirimus,  most. 

f  ^^«'  I  rich. 
dis,       ) 

divitior,  }      ■  , 

'  '   richer. 
ditior,      ) 

divitissimus,),..^/^^^^^ 
ditissimus,     ) 

150.    Defective  Comparison. 

1.  Seven  adjectives  have  no  positive  ;  they  are  — 

1.  citerior,  citinius,  hither,  hithermost. 

2.  deterior,  deterrimiis,  luorse. 

3.  interior,  intimus,  inner,  innermost. 

4.  ocior,  ocissimus,  swifter. 

5.  prior,  ^xiyoms,  former,  first. 

G.  pr6pior,  proxinius,  nearer,  next. 
7.  ulterior,  ultimus,  farther,  farthest. 

2.  The  following  are  irregular  in  the  superlative^: 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

Meaning. 

exterus 
inferus 
superus 
posterus 

exterior 
inferior 
superior 
posterior 

extremus  and  extimus 
infimus  and  imus 
supremus  and  summus 
postremus  and  postumus 

outward, 
lower, 
upper, 
next. 

3.  The  following  adjectives  are  irregular 
jiivenis,!  young.     } 

senex,  old. 


junior 
minor  natu 


j  senior  \ 

{  major  natu  \ 


minimus  natu 
maximus  natu 


151.    Compare  the  following  :  — 

1.  c61er,  swift.  4.  miser,  wretched. 

2.  audax,  hold.  5.  amaiis,  loring. 

3.  fortis,  brave.         C.  sapiens,  icise. 

7.  altus,  high. 


8.  latus,  broad. 

9.  diligens,  diligent. 
10.  bSnus,  good. 


118  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

Obs.  1.  The  comparative  may  be  translated  in  various  w^ays ;  as, 
audacior,  holder,  rather  hold,  too  hold. 

Obs.  2.  The  superlative  audacissimus  may  mean  holdest  or 
very  hold. 

Obs.  3.  The  superlative  with  quam  denotes  the  highest  degree 
possible ;  as,  quam  plurimi,  as  many  as  possihle  :  quam  maximum, 
as  large  as  possihle. 

Obs.  4.  Per  in  composition  with  adjectives  has  the  force  of  vei-y; 
as,  permagnus,  very  great. 

VOCABUIiARY. 

primus,  -a,  -VLm,Jirst.  sxipSrior,  siipgrius,  higher,  upper. 

sol,  solis,  M.,  sun.  Horatius,  -i,  m.,  Horace. 

terra,  -ae,  r.,  earth.  Labienus,  -i,  m.,  Lahiemis. 

luna,  -ae,  f.,  moon.  Vergilius,  -i,  m.,  Vergil. 

pr6pior,  prSpius,  nearer.  H6merus,  -I,  m.,  Homer. 

citSrior,  citgrius,  hither.  scientia,  -ae,  F.,  hnoioledge,  skill. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Nostrae  flliae  pulehemmae  snnt.  2.  Iter  per  provin- 
cinm  est  faciliiis.  3.  Itinera  erant  difficillima.  4.  Sol 
major  est  qnani  terra.  5.  Luna  minor  est  quam  terra. 
().  Reges  cum  proximis  chitatibus  pacem  confirmant. 
7.  Oppidum  est  in  citeriore  Gallia.  8.  Labienus  summum 
montem^  occCq^avit.  9.  Horatius  erat  bonus  poeta,  Vergi- 
lius melior,  Homerus  optimus. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  These  words  are  added  for  convenience  of  reference;  they  can 
be  omitted  for  the  present, 

2.  The  summit  of  tlie  mountain. 

How  do  adjectives  ending  in  -er  form  their  comparatives  ?  How 
may  superLatives  be  translated  ?  Wliat  adjectives  form  their  superla- 
tives like  facilis  ?  What  is  meant  by  comparison  of  adjectives  ?  How 
many  degrees  of  comparison  are  there  ?  How  is  each  formed  ?  How 
declined  1 


USE    OF    ADVERBS.  119 


LESSON   XXXIX. 

USE  OF  ADVEEBS.-riEST  CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT,     IMPERFECT,     AND     FUTURE     PASSIVE. 

EXAMPLE. 

mUes  fortiter  pugnat,  the  soldier  Jights  hravehj. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  sentence,  note  that  the  soldier  Jights  ex- 
presses a  fact  in  a  general  way.  We  may  add  a  word,  and  say 
the  soldier  fights  bravely ,  we  may  add  a  word  to  bravely,  and  say  the 
soldiers  fight  very  bravely.  Here  very  modifies  bravely  ;  very  bravely 
modifies  the  predicate.  Such  words  as  very  and  bravely  are  called 
Adverbs  (ad,  to,  and  verbum,  ivord,  or  verb).  This  use  of  adverbs 
is  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

USE    OF    ADVERBS. 

152.  Rule  XVI.  —  Adverbs  modify  verbs,  adjec- 
tives, and  other  adverbs. 

153.  Rule  of  position  :  — 

The  adverb  generally  precedes  the  word  it  limits;  but  fSre 
usually  stands  between  the  adjective  and  the  noun ;  as,  omnes 
fgre  hSmines,  almost  all  men. 

Voices  of  Verbs, 

154.  Transitive  verbs  have  two  voices^  the  Active  and  the 
Passive. 

1.  The  active  voice  shows  that  the  subject  is  the  actor. 

2.  The  passive  voice  shows  that  the  subject  is  acted  upon. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  mSgister  laudat,  the  teacher  praises. 

2.  discipiilus  laudatur,  the  pupil  is  praised. 

3.  disoipulus  laudatus  est,  the  pupil  has  been  praised. 

Obs.  Tn  the  foregoing  examples  the  form  of  the  verb  shows 
whether  the  subject  is  the  actor,  or  the  thing  acted  upon.  These 
different  forms  of  tlie  verb  are  called  voice.  Tlie  passive  form  in 
English  is  compovmded,  and  maybe  resolved  into  some  form  of  the 
verb  to  be,  and  the  complement,  which  is  the  perfect  participle  of  a 
transitive  verb. 


120 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


155.  The  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Tenses,  In- 
dicative Mode,  Passive  Voice,  are  formed  by  adding  the 
verbal  endings  to  the  present  stem.  Thej  are  inflected 
as  follows :  — 

PARTIAI.    PARADIGM. 


Pkesent. 


Person. 


Sinfj.  1 
2 
o 

Plur.  1 

2 


Formation. 


Pres.  stem  +  or 

+  ris  or  re 
+  tur 
+  mur 
+  mini 
+  ntur 


Example. 


amor 

amaris,  -re 

amatur 

amamur 

amamini 

amantur 


Elngflish. 


I  am  loved. 
Thou  art  loved. 
lie  is  loved. 
We  are  loved. 
Yoii  are  loved. 
Theij  are  loved. 


Imperfect. 


Sing.  1 


Ph 


Pres.  stem  +  bar 

"     +  baris,-re 
"     +  batur 
"     +  bamur 
"     +  bamini 
"     -f  bantur 


amabar 

amabaris,  -re 

amabatur 

amabamur 

amabamini 

amabantur 


/  iras  being  loved. 
Thou  wast  being  loved. 
lie  was  being  loved. 
We  were  being  loved. 
You  were  being  loved. 
They  were  being  loved. 


Future. 


Sing.  1 


riur.  1 
2 
3 


Pres.  stem  +  bor 
"        "     -fberis.-re 

"     +  bitur 
"        "     -f  bimur 
"        "     -f  bimini 
"         '*     -f  buntur 


amabor 

amaberis,  -r 

amabitur 

amabimur 

§,mabimini 

amabuntur 


I  shall  be  loved. 
Thou  shalt  be  loved. 
He  shall  be  loved. 
We  shall  be  loved. 
You  shall  be  loved. 
They  shall  be  loved. 


156.  Analysis  of  the  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future 
Passive  :  — 

1.  Notice  that  the  passive  voice  of  these  tenses  differs  from 
the  same  tenses  in  the  active  voice  only  in  the  endings ;  as, 

a.  Pres.  Act.  —  pres.  st.  -f  personal  endings ;  as,  ama  +  mus,  ive 
love.  Pres.  Pass.  =  pres.  st.  -f  personal  endings  -f  passive  sign  ;  as, 
Sma-mu-r,  we  are  loved. 


VSE   OF   ADVERBS.  121 


b.  Impcrf.  Act.  =  pres.  st.  +  tense  sign  (-ba-)  +  personal  endings ; 
as,  ama-ba-mus,  we  ivere  loving.  Iinperf.  Pass.  —  pies.  st.  +  pei'sonal 
endings  +  passive  sign ;   as,  Sma-ba-mu-r,  loe  toere  loved. 

c.  Future  Act.  =  pres.  st.  +  tense  sign  {j-bi-)  +  personal  endings  ; 
as,  ama-bi-mus,  ive  shall  love.  Future  Pass.  --  pres.  st.  +  personal 
endings  +  passive  sign ;  as,  ama-bi-mu-r,  ivc  shall  be  loved.  Tlie 
second  person  singular  future  has  -be-  instead  of  -lA- ;  as,  ama-bg-ris 
or  -re. 

Obs.  1.  The  passive  voice  is  a  reflexive  form,  made  by  adding 
the  reflexive  stem  -se-  (srd-)  to  the  active  ;  the  s  changes  to  r,  except 
in  the  second  person  singular;  as, 

Sine/.  1  amo-s(e)       —amor  Plur.l  ama-mu(s)-s(e)  —  ama-mu-r 

2  ama-si-s(e)  —  ama-ri-s  2  

3  ama-tu-s(e)  —  ama-tu-r  3  ama-ntu-s(e)      =  ama-ntu-r 
Obs.  2.  Amor  is  for  ama-or,  same  as  amo  is  for  ama-o. 

Obs.  3.  The  distinction  in  meaning  between  tlie  tenses  denoting 
Incomplete  action  and  those  denoting  Completed  action  is 
often  obscured  in  English  on  account  of  the  want  of  special  forms 
to  express  incomplete  action  in  the  passive ;  as,  bellum  paratur 
means,  not.  the  tear  is  prepared,  but  the  tear  is  jjveparing,  is  being 
prepared.  The  perfect  bellum  pS.ratum  est  means  ivar  has  been 
prepared,  and  so  war  is  jrrejKired  (or  aorist,  war  ivas  prepared) . 
Notice  the  imperfect  bellum  parabatur,  war  was  j^reparing,  not 
icar  was  prepared. 

VOCABULARY. 

culpo,  culpare,  culpavi,  cul-  acriter,  adv.,  sharply,  fiercely. 

patum,  blame.  graviter,  adv.,  heavily,  severely. 

6nus,  6n^ris,  x.,  burden.  celeriter,  adv.,  quickly. 

porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  carry.  audacter,  adv.,  boldly. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Laudiibitnr.  2.  Onus  portatur.  3.  Non  vocaberis. 
4.  Vocabaris.  5.  VulnerabiminT.  6.  Pueri  culpantur. 
7.  Culpabamur.  8.  Milites  audacter  pfignant.  9.  Milites 
castra  diligenter  servant.  10.  Caesar  Dumnorigem  graviter 
accusavit.  11.  Milites  fortiter  pugnabant.  12.  Germanl 
Helvetios  facile  siiperabunt. 


122 


FIRST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  We  are  blamed.  2.  They  are  praised.  3.  You  were 
being  praised.  4.  They  will  be  praised.  5.  The  girls  are 
called.  6.  The  boy  is  calling.  7.  The  men  fight  bravel}'. 
8.  They  will  be  carried.  9.  We  were  being  called.  10.  They 
will  be  called.  11.  He  is  (being)  praised.  12.  He  was 
being  praised.  13.  They  blame  the  Romans  severely. 
14.  They  are  blamed  severely  by  the  Romans. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

What  is  meant  by  voice  in  grammar  ?  IIovv  many  voices  ?  Give 
the  meaning  of  tlio  present  passive  in  Latin.  What  verbs  only  can  be 
in  the  passive  voice  ? 


LESSON   XL. 

ADVEEBS. 

FORMATION,    CLASSIFICATION,    AND    COMPARISON. 
I.    Formation  of  Advei'bs, 


EXAMPLES 

Adjective. 

Stem. 

Adverb. 

1.  carus,  dear. 

2.  dignus,  ir  or  fill/. 

.'5.  pulcher,  henntifal. 
4.  miser,  irretched. 

caro- 
digno- 
pulchro- 
misero- 

care,  dearly. 
digne,  irorthibj. 
pulchre,  heautifulhj. 
misere,  icretchedly. 

Obs.  In  tlic  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  adjectives  are  all 
of  the  first  and  second  declensions ;  that  the  adverbs  are  formed 
by  changing  -o-,  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem,  into  -e-. 
llence  the  rule  :  — 

157.  Adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  of  the  First 
and  Second  Declensions  by  changing  the  characteristic 
vowel  of  the  stem  to  -e-. 


ADVERBS. 


123 


KXAMPLES. 


Adjective. 

Stem. 

Adverb. 

1.   fortis,  brave. 

forti- 

fortiter,  braveli/. 

2.  gravis,  licacij. 

gravi- 

graviter,  heavi/;/. 

fj.  acer,  eager. 

acri- 

acriter,  eafjerlij. 

4.  ferdx,  wild. 

feroc- 

ferociter,  in'/dlij. 

5.  sapiens,  wise. 

sapient- 

sapienter,  wiseli/. 

G.  prudens,  prudent. 

prudent- 

prudenter,  prudentbj. 

Obs.  Note  (1)  that  the  adjectives  are  all  of  the  third  declen- 
sion ;  (2)  that  1,  2,  3  add  -ter  to  the  stem  ;  (-5)  that  4  assumes  -i- 
before  the  suffix  -tei'\  (4)  that  5  and  6  end  in  -n.s,  gen.  -nt-is;  (5) 
that  these  adjectives  drop  -t-  from  the  stem  before  adding  -ter. 
Hence  the  rule  :  — 

158.  Adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  of  the  third 
declension  by  adding  -ter  to  the  stern ;  but  stems  ending  in 
c,  A:,  or  g  assume  -^-  before  the  sufiix  -ter^  and  those  in  -nt- 
drop  final  t  of  the  stem  before  adding  -ter. 

159.  Some  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions 
have  adverbs  in  -ter  as  well  as  in  -e  ;  as, 


Adjective. 

Stem. 

Adverb. 

1.  durus,  severe. 

diiro- 

dire  and  diiriter 

2.  firmus,  ^^7-7/1. 

firmo- 

firme  and  firmiter 

o.  largus,  hounteons. 

largo- 

large  and  largiter 

4.  hiiinanus,  courteous. 

humano- 

humane  and  hiimaniter 

5.  miser,  wretched. 

misero- 

miser e  aiid  miseriter 

160.    The  neuter  accusative  of  many  adjectives  is  used  as 
an  adverb  ;  neuter  comparatives  are  especially  so  used. 


EXAMPLES. 


Adjective. 

Accusative. 

Adverb. 

1.  multus,  ninch. 

multum 

multum 

2.  facilis,  easn. 

facile 

facile 

3.  recens,  Jate. 

recens 

recens 

4.  acer,  eager. 

acrms 

acrius 

5.  dulcis,  sioeet. 

dulce 

dulce 

0.  primus,  .//V.sV. 

primum 

primum 

124 


FIRST  STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


II.     Classification  of  Adverbs. 

161.  The  adverbs  enumerated  in  the  foregoing  examples 
denote,  for  the  most  part,  the  manner  of  the  action,  and  are 
therefore  called  adverbs  of  manner.  Adverbs  may  also 
denote  the  time.,  the  place,  the  degree,  or  the  cause  of  the 
action  expressed  by  the  verb. 


Ill,    Comparison  of  Adverbs, 

162.  The  comparative  of  adverbs  that  are  reguhirly  com- 
pared is  the  same  as  the  neuter  accusative  singular  of  the 
comparative  of  adjectives,  and  consequently  ends  in  -ius. 

1.  The  superlative  of  the  adverb  is  formed  from  the  super- 
lative of  the  adjective  by  changing  the  final  vowel  of  the 
stem  to  -e. 

FXAMPT.KS. 


Adjectives. 

Adverbs. 

Positive. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

carus,  dear. 
miser,  vretrhed. 

audax,  hold. 

levis,  light. 
acer,  eager. 
prudens,  prudent. 
felix,  happg. 

care 
\  misere 
\  (miseriter) 
j  audacter 
\  (audaciter) 

leviter 

acriter 

prudenter 

feliciter 

carius 
miserius 

audacius 

levius 
acrius 
prudentius 
felicius 

carissime 
miserrime 

audacissime 

levissime 
acerrime 
prudentissime 
felicissime 

2.    If  the  adjectives  are  irregular  in  their  comparison,  the 
adverbs  have  the  same  irregularity. 


p:xampli:s. 


Adjectives. 

Adverbs. 

Positive. 

I'ositivc. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

bonus,  good. 
malus,  had. 
multus,  mncli. 
magnus,  great. 

bene 
male 
multum 

melius 
pejus 
pms 
magis 

optime 
pessime 
pliirimum 
maxime 

ADVERBS. 


125 


3.    A  few  adverbs  not  derived  from  adjectives  are  com- 
pared. 

EXAMPLES. 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

din,  for  a  long  time. 
saepe,  often. 

diutius 
saepius 

diutissirae 
saepissime 

4.  Form  from  each  of  the  following  adjectives  an  adverb, 
and  compare  it :  — 


1.  similis,  -e,  lil-e. 

2.  fortis,  -e,  brave. 

3.  cgler,  -6ris,  -ere,  quick. 

4.  gravis,  -e,  Iteavy. 

5.  liber, -era, -gruni,/ree. 

6.  amicus,  -a,  -wva.,  friend hj. 


7.  aeger,  -gra,  -grum,  sick. 

8.  Smans,  gen.  -ntis,  looing. 

9.  elegans,  gen.  -ntis,  elegant. 

10.  altus,  -a,  -um,  Ingli,  deep. 

1 1 .  cxipidus,  -a,  -um,  greedy. 

12.  ferox,  gen. -ocis, ^6rce. 


163.    Model  for  parsing  adverbs  :  — 

railites  fortiter  pugnant,  the  soldiers  flgld  bravely :  f ortiter  is 
an  adverb  of  manner  (161),  derived  from  the  adjective /or/ /.s  (157)  ; 
compared,  fortiter,  fortius,  fortisslme  (157)  ;  of  the  positive  degree, 
and  modifies  pugnant,  according  to  Rule  XVI. :  Adverbs  modify 
verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs. 


NOTES    ANI>    QUESTIONS. 

What  is  an  adverb  ?  Wliat  is  the  usual  position  of  an  adverb  in  a 
sentence?  {Ans.  It  stands  immediately  before  the  word  it  limits.) 
How  are  adverbs  classified  ?  How  are  adverbs  formed  from  adjectives 
of  the  second  declension  ?  How  from  adjectives  of  the  third  declen- 
sion 1  How  are  adverbs  compared  1  How  are  English  adverbs  formed  ? 
Form  an  adverb  from  brave;  compare  it.  Write  a  sentence  in  English 
containing  an  adverb  of  place ;  of  manner ;  of  degree. 


126  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

LESSON   XLI. 

riEST    CONJUGATION. 

PERFECT,   PLUPERFECT,  AND    FUTURE    PERFECT    PASSIVE. 

164.    The   Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and    Future    Perfect 
Tenses_of_the  Passive  Voice  are  made  up  of  the  PexfoiiL^ 
Participle  in  combination  with  the  forms  of  sum.     ^"~** 
EXAMPLE.  —  amare,  to  love. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 
PuEs.  Stem.       T'ehf.  Stem.         Part.  Steji.  Nom. 

^ma-  Sinavi-  ^mato-       Smatus, -a, -um 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 
Pres.  Stem.  Preh.  Inkin.  Phrfect. 

S.ma-  §.mari        Smatus,  -a,  -um  sum 

1.  The  Participial  Stem  is  formed  b}'  adding  -to^  iiom.  -tus 
(often  changed  to  -so,  nom.  -sus)^  to  the  present  stem. 

EXAMPLES. 

Present.       Pres.  Stem.       Perf.  Stem.  I'art.  Stem.  Nom. 

Smo              Sma-            Smavi-  Smato-  amStus 

v6co            v6cat-         vScavi-  v6cato-  vdcatus 

laudo           lauda-          laudavi-  laudato-  laudatus 

2.  The  Principal  Parts  of  a  verb  are  :  — 

(1)  The  Present  Indicative,  >   showing  the  present  stem  and  the 

(2)  Tlie  Present  Infinitive,    )  conjugation. 

(3)  The  Perfect  Indicative,  showing  the  perfect  stem.  * 

(4)  The  Xeuter  Nominative  and  Accusative  of  the  Perfect  Parti- 

ciple, showing  the  participial  stem. 

EXAMPLES. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

Present.  Pres.  Tnf.  Perfect.  Perf.  Part» 

S.mo  amare  amavi  amatum 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 
Present.  Pres.  Inp.  Perfect. 

^mor  ^mari  amatus,  -a,  -um  sum 


FIRST   CONJUGATION. 


127 


PARTIAL    PAKADIGM. 


Perfect  and  Aokist. 

rerson. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Perfect. 

Aoritit. 

Sing.  1 

•      2 

o 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Verb-stem  — 

+  tus  sum 
+  tus  es 
+  tus  est 
+  ti  sumus 
+  ti  estis 
+  ti  suiit 

amatus  sum 
amatus  es 
amatus  est 
amati  sumus 
amati  estis 
amati  sunt 

I  have 
Thou  hast 
He  has 
We  have 
You  have 
The  1/ have 

s 

J 

/  ivas  loved. 
Thou  wast  lorcd. 
He  icas  loved. 
We  ivere  loved. 
You  were  loved. 
Thei/  were  loved. 

PLUrERFECT. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sim/.  1 
2 
3 

P/ur.  1 
2 
3 

Verb 

-stem  4-  tus  eram 
'           -f  tus  eras 
'           -f  tus  erat 
«          -h  ti  eramus 
'           +  ti  eratis 
+  ti  erant 

amatus  eram 
amatus  eras 
amatus  erat 
amati  eramus 
amati  eratis 
amati  orani 

I  had  been  loved. 
Thou  hadst  been  loved 
He  had  been  loved. 
We  had  been  loved. 
You  had  been  loved. 
The])  had  been  loved. 

Future  Perfect. 

Sinrj.  1 

2 

3 
P/wr.  1 

2, 
3 

Verb-stem  +  tus  ero 
-f  tus  eris 
"          +  tus  erit 
"           -f  ti  erimus 

+  ti  eritis 
"           +  ti  erunt 

amatus  ero 
amatus  eris 
amatus  erit 
amati  erimus 
amati  eritis 
amati  erunt 

I  shall  have 
Thou  ivilt  have 
lie  shall  have 
We  shall  have 
Yoa  shall  have 
The  11  shall  have  . 

^ 

c" 
'^ 

■^ 

165=   Analysis    of   the   Perfect,    Pluperfect,    and   Future 
Perfect  Passive :  — 


1.  The  perfect 

2.  The  pluperfect 

3.  The  future  perf. 


=  parti c.  stem  +  -5  together  with  sum. 
=  partic.  stem  -f  -s  together  with  gram. 
-  partic.  stem  -f  -s  together  with  Sro. 


128 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


OiiS.  1.  The  perfect  participle  has  three  endings  for  the  three 
genders,  and  is  declined  like  bSnus  ;  as,  umatus,  -a,  -urn.  It  must 
agree,  like  an  adjective,  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  with  the 
subject. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  puer  amatus  est,  the  hoy  was  loved. 

2.  virgo  amata  est,  the  virgin  was  loved. 

3.  iiomen  amatum  est,  the  name  was  loved. 

4.  pu6ri  amati  sunt,  the  boys  were  loved. 

5.  virgines  S.matae  sunt,  the  virgins  were  loved. 
C.  nomiua  Smata  sunt,  the  names  were  loved. 

Obs.  2.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  participle 
agrees  with  the  subject  like  an  adjective. 


PuES.  Tni).  Act. 
^mo,  love. 
laudo,  praise. 
porto,  carry. 
v6co,  call. 
gnuntio,  report.^ 
occulto,  conceal. 
comporto,  collect. 


VOCABULARY. 

Pres.  Tnf.  Act.       Peuf.  Ind.  Act. 


Sniare 

laudare 

portare 

vdcare 

enuntiare 

occultare 

comportare 


Smavi 

laudavi 

portavi 

v6cavl 

enuntiavi 

occultavi 

comportavi 


Perf.  Part.  Pass. 

amatum 

laudatum 

portatum 

v6catum 

enuntiatum 

occultatum 

comportatum 


Syx.  Infans  (in,  not,  fari,  to  speak),  an  infant ;  puer,  a  hoy,  from 
about  seven  to  sixteen;  Sdiilescens  (adSlesco,  to  groiv),  a  youth, 
from  about  sixteen  to  twenty-four ;  jiiv6uis,  a  young  man  or  woman, 
from  about  twenty-four  to  forty-five. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English :  — 

1.  Laudati  estis.  2.  Onus  portatum  est.  3.  Reges 
culpatT  sunt.  4.  Vulneratus  sum.  5.  Vulnerati  sumus. 
G.  Nostra  consilia  hostibns-  enuntiata  sunt.  7.  In  tanta 
multitudine  equitura  nostra  fuga  occultata  est.  8.  Magna 
copia  frumenti  comportata  erat. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION.  129 


Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  You  were  called.  2.  You  were  praised.  3.  You  have 
been  praised.  4.  You  shall  have  been  praised.  5.  The 
corn  has  been  collected.  6.  An  abundance  of  corn  has  been 
collected.  7.  They  shall  have  been  praised.  8.  We  had 
been  called.  9.  They  were  loved. ^  10.  They  were  (being) 
loved.'*  11.  They  were  loving.'^  12.  The  work  was  praised. 
13.  The  girl  has  been  called. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Written  also  enuncio. 

2.  Dative  case. 

3.  The  aorist  (perf.)  passive. 

4.  Imperfect  passive. 

5.  Imperfect  active. 

From  what  stem  is  the  perfect  passive  formed  ?  What  are  the 
principal  parts  of  a  verb  1  Mention  the  three  stems.  What  verbs  can 
have  a  passive  voice  ?     Can  they  take  an  object  in  the  passive  voice  1 


LESSON   XLIL 

SECOND    OONJUaATION. 

PRESENT,   IMPERFECT,  AND   FUTURE   ACTIVE.-ABLATIVE 
OF  AGENT. 

166.  All  verbs  whose  characteristic  vowel  before  the 
ending  -re  in  the  Present  Infinitive  is  e",  belong  to  the 
Second  Conjugation.     Thus  — 


Present. 

Pres.  Stem. 

Pres.  Inf. 

mSneo 

m6ne- 

mSne-re 

h&beo 

hSbe- 

hSbe-re 

terreo 

terre- 

terre-re 

tSceo 

tace- 

tace-re 

130 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


1.  The  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Active  are  formed 
by  adding  the  verbal  endings  to  the  present  stem. 

PARTIAL     PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  first  conjugation;  the 
"  connective  vowel,"  or  tlie  final  vowel  of  the  stem,  is  e  instead  of  d, 
and  is  retained  in  the  present  tense.] 


Present. 


Person. 


Formation. 


Example. 


English. 


Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 


Pres.  stem  +  o 


+  t 

+  mus 
+  tis 
+  nt 


moneo 

mones 

monet 

monemus 

monetis 

monent 


I  advise. 
Thou  adrisest. 
He  advises. 
We  advise. 
Yott  advise. 
Then  fidvise. 


iMrEUFECT. 


Sing.  1 


Pli 


Pres.  stem  -f  bam 

+  has 

+  bat 

+  bamus 

+  batis 

+  bant 


monebam 

monebas 

monebat 

monebamus 

monebatis 

monebant 


/  teas  advising. 
Thou  ivast  advising. 
lie  iras  advising. 
We  were  advising. 
You  ivere  advising. 
Theg  irere  advising. 


FiTURE. 


Sing.  1 

Pres.  ste 

2 

U                  ,i 

3 

a 

Plur.  1 

«             ( 

2 

" 

3 

" 

+  bis 
+  bit 
+  bimus 
+  bitis 
+  bunt 


monebo 

monebis 

monebit 

monebimus 

monebitis 

monebunt 


/  shall  or  ivill  advise. 
Thou  wilt  advise. 
He  will  advise. 
We  shall  or  ivill  advise 
You  will  advise. 
They  ivill  advise. 


a.  The  verbal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  first  con 
jugation.     See  58.  1. 

167.   Ablative  of  Agent. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  vulneratiis  est  sSgittls,  he  was  wounded  with  arroios. 

2.  vulngratus  est  a  mllite,  he  tvas  wounded  hy  a  soldier. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION. 


131 


Obs.  Tn  the  foregoing  examples,  compare  the  two  ablatives; 
note  that  the  noun  sSgittis,  which  designates  the  instrument  by 
which  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb  is  pei-formed,  is  in  the  abla- 
tive, without  a  preposition,  according  to  llule  IX.  In  the  second 
sentence  the  ablative  designates  the  person,  or  (ujent,  by  M-hicli  the 
action  expressed  by  the  verb  is  performed,  and  it  is  accompanied 
by  the  preposition  a  or  ab.  The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  follow- 
ing rule :  — 

ABLATIVE    OF    AGENT. 

168.  Rule  XVII.  —  The  voluntary  agent  after  a 
passive  verb  is  put  in  the  ablative  with  d  or  ab. 


Present. 
d5ceo,  teach. 
timeo,  fear. 
hSbeo,  have. 
deleo,  destroy. 


VOCABULARY. 

Pres.  Stem.     Pres.  Inf. 
d6ce-         d6cere 
time-  timere 

habe-  habere 

dele-  delere 


Perfect.  Participle. 

dScui  doctum 

timui  

habui  habitum 

delevi  deletum 


prShibeo,  restrain.    prShibe-    prShibere   prdhibui    prSlnbitum 

Syn.  D6ceo,  to  teach ;  edSceo,  to  make  one  learn  :  perdSceo, 
to  teach  thorouglthj :  eriidio  (e  and  riidis,  rough),  to  instruct,  lit.  to 
bring  from  a  rougli  condition ;  ediico,  to  educate,  whether  in  a 
physical  or  moral  sense. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Docemns  puellam.  2.  Docetis.  3.  Multa  castra  habe- 
bimus.  4.  Monet.  5.  Timebat.  6.  Reglnae  timent. 
7.  Piiellae  non  timent.  8.  Monebit.  9.  Habebant.  10.  Timet. 
11.  Docebunt.      12.  Docebimus. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  We  fear,  we  were  fearing,  we  shall  fear.  2.  Ye  teach, 
they  were  teaching,  they  will  teach.  3.  The  girl  will  fear. 
4.   I  will  teach,   I  was  teaching.       5.    Ye  were  teaching^. 


6.   Thev  call,  thev  were  calling,  they  will  call. 


Thon 


didst  call.    8.  You  will  not  have  fought.     9.  Thou  dost  fear. 
10.  The  master  praises  the  pupil.     11.  The  pupil  is  praised 


132 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


b\'  the  master.  12.  Tlie  girl  is  crowned  by  (her)  mother. 
13.  He  was  wounded  by  a  spear.  14.  He  was  wounded  by 
a  soldier.  15.  Crassus  is  called  by  (his)  friend.  16.  The 
towns  will  be  seized  by  the  Belgians. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

What  is  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  second  conjugation  ?  In 
what  does  the  present  stem  end  I  Analyze  the  imperfect;  i.e.,  mention 
the  stem,  the  tense  sign,  the  personal  endings. 


LESSON   XLIII. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


PERFECT,   PLUPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE   PERFECT   INDICATIVE 

ACTIVE. 

169.  The  Perfect  Stem  of  a  regular  verb  of  the 
Second  Conjugation  may  be  formed,  — 

1.  By  adding  vl^  to  the  present  stem.  (This  rule  is 
applicable  to  but  few  verbs.) 

2.  By  dropping  e  of  the  present  stem  and  adding  ui. 
This  is  the  more  common  way  of  forming  the  perfect  stem 
of  the  second  conjugation. 

EXAMPLES. 


Present. 


deleo,  destroi/. 
moneo,  admonish. 


Pres.  Stem. 


dele- 


Perf .  Stem. 


delevi- 


Part.  Stem. 


deleto- 
monito- 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Present. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perfect. 

Participle. 

deleo 
moneo 

delere 
monere 

delevi 
monui 

deletum 
monitum 

SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


133 


170.  The  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Tenses 
are  iutlected  as  follows  :  — 

PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  first  conjugation;  the 
cliaracteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  clianges  from  i  to  e  in  the  third  per- 
son plural  of  the  ])erfect,  to  I  in  the  first  person  plural,  and  to  e  in  the 
pluperfect  and  future  perfect.] 


Perfect  and  Aouist. 


Pei'son. 


Sine/.  1 
o 

3 

P/nr.  1 

2 


Forination. 


Perf.  St. 

-f  sti 
+  t 
-f  mus 
-f  stis 
j  -f  runt 
I    or  re 


Example. 


monui 

monuisti 

monuit 

monuimua 

monuistis 

monuerunt, 

or  monuere 


English. 


Perfect. 


/  have  advised. 
Thou  hast  advised. 
He  has  advised. 
We  have  advised. 
You  hare  advised. 

Theij  have  advised. 


Aorist. 


/  advised. 
Thotc  advisedst 
He  advised. 
We  advised. 
You  advised. 

They  advised. 


Pluperfect. 


Person. 


nuj. 


Plur. 


Formation. 


Perf.  stem  -f  ram 

"     +  ras 
"     4-  rat 
"     +  ramus 
"     +  ratis 
"     +  rant 


Example. 


monueram 

monueras 

monuerat 

monueramus 

monueratis 

monuerant 


English. 


/  had  advised. 
Thou  hadst  advised. 
He  had  advised. 
We  had  advised. 
You  had  advised. 
Theij  had  advised. 


Future  Perfect. 


Sing.  1 
2 


Plur 


Perf.  stem  f  ro 

"     +  ris 


4-  rit 
+  rimus 
+  ritis 
+  rint 


monuero 

monueris 

monuerit 

monuerimus 

monueritis 

monuerint 


/  shall  have  advised. 
Thou  ivilt  have  advised. 
He  wi/l  have  advised. 
We  shall  have  advised. 
You  ivill  have  advised. 
Theij  will  have  advised. 


134 


FIRST    STEPS    IX    LATIN. 


VOCABULARY. 

Tresent. 

Pres.  Stem. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perfect. 

Participle. 

deieo,  destroij. 

dele- 

delere 

delevi 

deletum 

compleo,  Jill. 

comple- 

complere 

complevi 

completum 

m6neo,  adcise. 

m6ne- 

mdnere 

monui 

mduitum 

taceo,  he  silent. 

tace- 

tacere 

tacui 

taciturn 

debeo,  oive. 

debe- 

debere 

debm 

debitum 

hSbeo,  have. 

habe- 

habere 

habul 

liSbitum 

d6ceo,  teach. 

d6ce- 

dScere 

d6cui 

doc  turn 

tgneo,  hold. 

tene- 

tgnere 

tenul 

tentum 

m&neo,  remain. 

man(e-) 

mS.nere 

mansi 

mansum 

augeo,  increase. 

aug(e-) 

augere 

auxi 

auctum 

jiibeo,  command. 

jiib(e-) 

jiibere 

jussi 

jussum 

EXERCISES. 

Traiislnto  into  English  :  — 

1.  DelGvit,  deleverant,  deleverint.  2.  Docnerfis,  docnerit. 
3.  Monuistis.  4.  Habuerit,  monnernnt,  docuerunt.  ;">.  1)6- 
cuistl  pnollam.  6.  Regina  nionucrit.  7.  Tenuimus  saoittas. 
8.  Keglna  timet.  9.  Pnellae  timnerunt.  10.  jMonebit, 
monuerit,  inonnerant.  11.  Docueras,  docuerint,  docebunt, 
doeent.     12.  Mansit,  auxit,  jussit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  AVe  have  destroyed,  they  had  destroyed.  2.  We  have 
taught,  he  has  taught.  3.  They  were  teaching,  he  had 
taught.  4.  They  taught,  they  are  silent,  they  were  advising. 
5.  You  fear,  3'ou  were  fearing,  you  will  fear,  you  have 
feared,  you  had  feared.  C.  They  command,  they  will 
command,  they  have  commanded,  they  had  commanded. 
7.  Thev  have  increased. 


NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  -vl  of  the  perfect  stands  for  fui,  perfect  of  sum;  as,  ^ma- 
(st.  of  amo)  +  fui  =  perf.  Smafui  —  amaui  =  amavi;  so  dele-  (st. 
of  deleo)  +  fui  =  delefui  =  deleui  =  delevi;  m6n(e-)  -f  fui  = 
monfui  =  mdnuT  (the  final  vowel  of  tlie  stem  being  dropped) ;  also, 
d6c(e-)       fill  -  docfui  =  d6cui.     Sometimes  the  final  vowel  of  the 


SECOND   CONJUGATION. 


135 


stem  is  woakenod  to  i  and  retained  in  the  participial  stem ;  as,  InSneo, 
mdnere,  mdnui,  m6nitum. 

2.  Some  verbs  drop  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  and  add  -si 
to  form  the  perfect;  as,  aug(e-)  +  si  =  augsi  =  auxi;  in^(e-)  +  si 
~  mansl ;  jiib(e-)  +  si  =  jubsl  =  jussl;  but  indulgeo,  indnhjc,  in- 
dulgere,  indulsi,  indultum,  wliere  the  rj  as  well  as  the  characteristic- 
vowel  of  the  stem  is  dropped. 

How  many  stems  has  a  verb  ?  How  many  uses  has  the  perfect  ? 
How  can  you  distinguish  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  ?  How  do 
verbs  of  this  conjugation  form  tlieir  perfects  *? 


LESSON   XLIV. 

SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT,    IMPERFECT,   AND    FUTURE    PERFECT    INDICATIVE 

PASSIVE. 

171.    The  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Indica- 
tive Passive  are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 

PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings,  tlie  tense  signs,  and  passive  sign,  are  the 
same  as  those  of  the  first  conjugation.] 


PllESEXT. 


Person. 


Slny.  1 

2 


PU 


Formation. 


Pres.  stem  +  or 
"         "     +  ris  or  re 

"     +  tur 
"        "     +  mur 
"         "     +  mini 
"         "     +  ntur 


Example. 


moneor 

moneris,  -re 

monetur 

monemur 

monemini 

monentur 


English. 


I  am  (being)  advised. 
Tliou  art  advised. 
He  is  advised. 
We  are  advised. 
You  are  advised. 
Thei)  are  advised. 


Imperfect. 


Sii 


PI, 


Pres.  stem  +  bar 

"     -f  baris,  re 
"     4-  batur 
"     -f  bamur 
"     -f  bamini 
"     +  bantur 


monebar 

monebaris,  -re 

monebatur 

monebamur 

m6nebamini 

monebantur 


I  teas  being 
Thou  wast  being 
He  was  being 
We  were  being 
You  were  being 
Theg  icere  being 


136 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


FUTUKE. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  bor 
"         "     +  beris,  re 

"     +  bitur 
"         "     +  bimur 
"         "     -f  bimini 
"         "     +  buntur 

monebor 

moneberis,  -re 

monebitur 

monebimur 

monebimini 

monebuntur 

/  shall  be  advised. 
Thou  wilt  he  advised. 
He  rvill  be  advised. 
We  shall  be  advised. 
You  shall  be  advised. 
Theij  shall  be  advised. 

Obs.  Forinula  for  tlie  conversion  of  sentences  to  the  passive 
voice :  — 

172.  The  subject  of  the  active  voice  becomes,  in  the 
passive  voice,  the  Ablative  of  Agent  (with  a  preposition), 
or  Instrument  (without  a  preposition).  The  object  in  the 
active  voice  becomes  the  subject  in  tlu;  passive. 

EXAMPLES. 


1.    mSgister      laudat      pu6rum 


s. 
puer 


I 

V.P.V.  Ab.  of  Agent. 

laudatur     a  mSgistro 


sSgitta     vulngrat      militem 


I  1 

S.  V.  P.V.  Ab.  of  Inst. 

miles     vulngratur     sSgitta 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Deletur,  timcntur,  timebantnr,  timebuntur.  2.  Docetur, 
docebatur,  docebitur.  3.  Tenebantur,  tenebat.  4.  Haberis, 
habebaris,  habeberis.  5.  Onera  gravia  a  servis  timebantnr. 
6.  Summus  mons^  a  Tito  Labieno  tenebatur.  7.  DiscipulT 
a  magistro  docentur.  8.  Monebimini,  monebatur,  mone- 
batis.      9.  Augentur,  jubetur,  jubebitur. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION. 


137 


Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  are  (being)  taught,  they  were  (being)  taught, 
they  will  be  taught.  2.  The  master  teaches  the  pupils. 
3.  The  pupils  are  taught  by  the  master.  4.  He  is  feared, 
he  was  feared,  he  will  be  feared.  5.  We  are  advised,  we 
were  advised,  we  shall  be  advised.  G.  The  boys  were  being 
taught  by  the  master.  7.  The  soldiers  are  wounded  by  the 
arrows. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.    The  top  of  the  mountain;  lit.,  the  highest  mountain. 

Define  voice  in  grammar.  From  what  stem  are  the  tenses  of  in- 
complete action  formed  ?  Give  the  rule  for  changing  a  sentence  from 
the  active  to  the  passive  voice. 


LESSON  XLV. 

SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

PERFECT,   PLUPERFECT,  AND    FUTURE  PERFECT   INDICATIVE 

PASSIVE. 

173.  The  Participial  Stem  of  verbs  of  the  Second  Conju- 
gation is  formed  by  adding  -to  (or  -so) ,  nom.  -tus  (or  -sus) , 
to  the  verb-stem.  Some  verbs  change  final  e  of  the  present 
stem  to  short  i  in  the  participial  stem  ;  others  drop  the  stem 
vowel  altogether.  Many  verbs  of  this  conjugation  have  no 
participial  stem. 

EXAMPI.ES. 


Pres.  Indicative. 

Present  Stem. 

Perfect  Stem. 

Part.  Stem. 

deleo,  destroij. 

dele- 

delevi- 

deleto- 

moneo,  advise. 

mone- 

monui- 

monito- 

doceo,  teach. 

doce- 

docui- 

docto- 

maneo,  remain. 

mane- 

mansi- 

manso- 

haereo,  stick. 

haere- 

haesi- 

haeso- 

sileo,  be  silent. 
timeo,/ear. 

sile- 
time- 

silui- 
timui- 

1.    The  tenses  of  the  indicative  mode,  formed  from  the 
participial  stem,  are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 


138 


lli:«T    STEi'S    IN    LATIN. 


PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 

[The  analysis  of  the  tenses  formed  from  the  participial  stem  in  the 
second  conjugation  is  the  same  as  in  the  first  conjugation.] 


rjCKFECT    AND    AOUIST.                                                            1 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Perfect. 

Aorist. 

Sine/..  1 

Verb-stem  — 
-f  tus  sum 

moiiitus  sum 

/  Itace        -1 

1  ivas 
Thou  wast 

2 

4-  tus  es 

monitus  es 

Thou  hast 

^ 

y. 

3 

+  tus  est 

monitus  est 

lie  has 

4 

He  was 

'% 

Plur.  1 

4-  ti  sumus 

moniti  siimus 

We  have 

We  tvere 

2 

+  ti  estis 

moniti  estis 

You  have 

J5 

You  xvere 

T- 

3 

+  ti  sunt 

moniti  sunt 

Theji  have 

' 

Theij  were 

PLUrERFECT. 

Siiif/.  1 

-1  tus  eram 

monitus  eram 

I  had  been  advised. 

2 

-f  tus  eras 

monitus  eras 

Thou  hadst  been  advised. 

o 
•> 

-f  tus  erat 

monitus  erat 

Tie  had  been  advised. 

Plur.  1 

+  ti  eramus 

moniti  eramus 

We  had  been  advised. 

2 

+  ti  eratis 

moniti  eratis 

You  had  been  advised. 

o 

+  ti  erant 

moniti  erant 

Theij  had  been  advised. 

Fl'TrKE    rET!FECT. 

Sing.  1 

+  tus  ero 

monitus  ero 

I  sludl  have  been  advised. 

2 

-f  tus  eris 

monitus  eris 

Thou  wilt  have  been  advised. 

3 

+  tus  erit 

monitus  erit 

He  ivill  have  been  advised. 

Plur.  1 

-f  ti  erimus 

moniti  erimus 

We  shall  have  been  advised. 

2 

+  ti  eritis 

moniti  eritis 

You  ivill  have  been  advised. 

3 

+  ti  erunt 

moniti  erunt 

Theji  will  have  been  advised. 

VOCABULARY. 

fleo 

flere 

flevi 

fletum,^  weep. 

plS.ceo 

plScere 

plScui 

placitum,^  pleaxi. 

n6ceo 

nScere 

n6cul 

nScitum,  hurt. 

contineo 

continere 

continui 

contentum,^^  hem 

cgnseo 

censere 

c  ens  HI 

censum/^  think. 

haereo 

haerere 

haesi 

haesum,4  stick. 

rideo 

ridere 

risi 

risum,^  laugh. 

SECOND    CONJUGATION.  139 

jiibeo  jttbere  jussi  jusaiim,'''  command. 

video  videre  vidi  visum,  see. 

timeo  timere  timui  ,  fear. 

lateo  latere  latul  ,  lie  hid. 

Garumna,  -ae,  m.,  (/te  Garonne. 

undique,  adv.,  on  all  sides.         et,  coiij.,  and. 
Syn.    Judico,  J ud(/e  ;  censeo, ///i'e  official  opinion. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Moniti  ernnt.  2.  Doctus^  erat.  3.  Pueri  docti  sunt. 
4.  Servi  inoniti  erunt.  5.  rucr  monitus  erit.  G.  Undique 
loci  iifitura  Ilelvetii  continentur.  7.  FTlius  tuns  et  soror 
inea  a  niagistro  bono  docti  ernnt.  8.  Roma,  urbs  nostra,  a 
Romiilo  rege  aedifieata  est.  9.  Pulchra  soror  a  fratre  doce- 
bitur.  10.  MTlites  jussT  sunt.  11.  Aves  innltae  puerorum 
sao-ittls  vulneratae  sunt. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The^^  have  been  taught,  they  had  been  taught,  they 
will  have  been  taught.  2.  He  has  been  advised,  he  had  been 
advised,  he  will  have  been  advised.  3.  The  boys  have  been 
taught  by  the  master.  4.  The  soldieis  have  been  wounded. 
0.  The  soldiers  have  been  wounded  with  the  arrows.  C.  The 
king  has  been  wounded  by  the  soldier.  7.  The  mountain 
will  be  held  by  Caesar.  <S.  The  top  of  the  mountain  has 
been  held  by  Cffisar.  9.  The  Germans  are  hemmed  in  on 
all  sides. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Participle  formed  regularly. 

2.  Characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  weakened  to  i. 

3.  Characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  dropped. 

4.  Characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  dropped  ;  haer-eo,  haer-  is  for 
haes-,  s  being  changed  to  r  between  two  vowels  ;  the  participle  — 
haestum  =  haessum  =  haesura. 

5.  Characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  dropped  =  rid-  +  -t-  =  ridt-  — 
ris-  ^-  risum.     See  179.  2. 

G.  jiib-  +  -t-  =  jubt-  =  jutt-  =  juss. 


140 


FIEST    STEPS  IN  LATIN. 


LESSON    XLVI. 

FOUETH    DECLENSION. 
174.    Nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension  end  in -us  mas- 


cuhiie,  and  -u  neuter. 


They  are  declined  as  follows 

PARADIGMS. 


Feminine. 

Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

manus,  a  hand. 

manus,  hands. 

Gen. 

manus,  of  a  hand. 

manuum,  (f  ha  n ds. 

Dat. 

manlii,  -u,  to  or  for  a  hand. 

manibus,  to  or  for  hands. 

Ace. 

manum,  fuind. 

manus,  hands. 

Voc. 

manus,  0  hand. 

manus,  0  hands. 

Abl. 

manu,  irith,fruin,orhi/a  hand. 

manibus,?/v7//,//-om,or  htj  hands 

Netteu. 

NOM. 

genu,  a  knee. 

genua,  knees. 

Gen. 

genus,  of  a  knee. 

genuum,  of  knees. 

Dat. 

genu,  to  or  for  a  knee. 

genibus,  to  or  for  knees. 

Ace. 

genu,  hiee. 

genua,  knees. 

Voc. 

genu,  0  knee. 

genua,  0  knees. 

Abl. 

genu,  irith,  from,  or  hi/  a  knee. 

genibus,  with,from,  or  h})  knees. 

Cases. 

fructus, 

yi.,  fruit. 

c«rnu, 

N.,  horn. 

doinus,  r.,  hoiiae. 

Case- 
Ill  iidiug-s. 

NoM. 

fructus 

cornu 

domus 

-US       -u 

u 

(iKN. 

fructus 

cornus 

domus,  domi 

-US 

5 

Dat. 

fructui,  -u 

cornu 

domui  (domo) 

-Ul        -u 

s 

Acc. 

fructum 

cornu 

domum 

-um     -u 

•Ji 

Voc. 

fructus 

cornu 

domus 

-us      -u 

AliL. 

fructu 

cornu 

dt)mb  (domu) 

-u        -u 

Noji. 

fructus 

cornua 

domus 

-us      -ua 

Gen. 

fructuum 

cornuum 

domuum,  domorum 

-uum 

;« 

Dat. 

fructibus 

cornibus 

domibus 

-ibus  (-iibus) 

s 

Acc. 

fructus 

cornua 

domus,  -OS 

-us      -ua 

Voc. 

fructus 

cornua 

domus 

-us      -ua 

AliL. 

fructibus 

cornibus 

domibus 

-ibus  (-ubus) 

FOURTH   DECLENSION.  141 

1.  The  stem  of  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  ends  in  -m-,  which 
is  usually  changed  to  i  before  -bus.  Masculine  and  feminine  nouns 
form  the  nominative  by  adding  s ;  neuters,  which  are  very  few, 
have  for  the  nominative  the  simple  stem  lengthened  to  u. 

2.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  the  following  words  ends 
in  -uhus :  artuB,  Joint,  partus,  cJiild-birth,  poitus,  harbor,  tribus, 
tribe,  v6ru ;  and  also  of  words  of  two  syllables  in  -cus,  as  IScus. 

3.  A  few  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  are  feminine ;  as,  d6mus, 
house,  idus  (pi),  Ides,  manus,  hand,  Sous,  needle,  and  some  others. 

4.  Carefully  distinguish  the  fourth  from  the  second  de- 
clension :  — 

(1)  A  noun  with  nominative  in  -us  and  genitive  in  -i  is  of  the 

second  declension. 

(2)  A  noun  with  nominative  in  -us  and  genitive  in  -ils  is  of  the 

fourth  declension. 

VOCABULARY. 

exercitus,  -iis,  m.,  nrmij.  currus,  -us,  m.,  a  chariot. 

ddmus,  -us,  F.,  hotise.  mSiius,  -us,  f.,  a  hand. 

lusus,  -us,  M.,  playing,  sport.  sgnatus,  -us,  m.,  senate. 

equitatus,  -us,  m.,  cavalry.  conspectus,  -us,  m.,  sight,  view. 

Scus,  -us,  F.,  a  needle.  sustineo,  sustinere,  sustinui, 
arcus,  -us,  m.,  a  boio.  sustentum,  sustain. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Senatus  exercitum  laudat.  2.  Agricola  taurum  corni- 
bus  tenet.  3.  Pater  d(5mus  aedificat.  4.  Currus  hostium 
ab  omnibus  militibus  visi  erunt.  5.  Galba  domi^  fuit. 
6.  In  conspectu  exercitus.  7.  In  conspectu  exercitus  nostri 
agri  vastantur.     8.  Equitatus  sustinebat  hostium  impetum. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  locative  form  ddmi  means  at  home;  it  has  the  same  form  as 
the  genitive  of  the  second  declension. 

How  many  declensions  in  Latin  ?  How  is  each  distinguished  ?  Of 
what  gender  are  most  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  ?  Mention  a 
feminine  noun  of  this  declension. 


142 


FIKST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON   XLVIL 

PirTH     DECLENSION. 

175.    Nouns  of  the  Fiftli  Declension  end  in  -(%s,  and 
are  feminine.     Tliej  are  declined  as  follows  :  — 

PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

dies,  a  dai/. 

dies,  days. 

Gen. 

diei  (die),  of  a  daij. 

dierum,  of  days. 

DAT. 

diei  (die),  to  or  for  a  day. 

diebus,  to  or  for  days. 

Ace. 

diem,  a  day. 

dies,  days. 

Voc. 

dies,  0  day. 

dies,  0  days. 

Abl. 

die,  icith,from,  or  hy  a  day. 

diebus,  iritli,from,  or  by 

days. 

res,  F., 

fides,  F., 

respiibllca. 

Case- 

thing. 

faith. 

commonwealth. 

Endings. 

NoM. 

res 

fides 

respublica 

-es 

u 

Gen. 

rei 

fidel 

reipublieae 

-li,  -e 

s 

DAT. 

rei 

fidei 

reipiiblicae 

-li,  -e 

s 

Ace. 

rem 

fidem 

rempublicam 

-em 

ir. 

Voc. 

res 

fides 

respublica 

-es 



AlJL. 

re 

fide 

republica 

-e 

NoM. 

res 

Wantincj. 

respublicae 

-es 

Gen. 

rerum 

reriirapublicarum 

-erum 

t 

Dat. 

rebus 

rebuspublicis 

-ebus 

Ph 

Ace. 

res 

respublicas 

-es 

Voc. 

res 

respublicae 

-es 

Ar.L. 

rebus 

rebuspublicis 

-ebus 

1.  Only  hvo  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  are  masculine:  dies, 
a  day,  mgridies,  midday ;  though  dies  is  sometimes  feminine  in 
the  singular,  especially  when  it  means  infixed  time. 

2.  Only  two  nouns  of  this  declension  are  declined  throughout 
the  plural ;  they  are  di§s  and  res.  In  some  words,  only  the  nomi- 
native, accusative,  and  vocative  plural  are  used  ;  others  want  the 
plural  entirely. 


FIFTH    DECLENSION.  143 

3.  The  stem  of  nouns  of  this  declension  ends  in  -e,  whicli  appears 
in  all  the  cases,  but  it  is  generally  shortened  in  the  ending  -c'l  when 
preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  also  in  the  ending  -ew. 

VOCABULARY. 

dies,  diei,  m.  and  r.,  day.  pernicies,  perniciei,  f.,  ruin. 

fides,  fidgi,  F.,  faith,  faithful-  militaris,  -e,  military;  res  mili- 

ness.  taris,  military  ajfairs. 

res,  rgi,  r.,  thlnrj,  affair.  portus,  -us,  m.,  harbor. 

spes,  spgi,  F.,  hoj^e,  expectation.  usus,  iisus,  m.,  use,  experience. 

Syx.  Exercitus  (exerceo,  to  exercise)  is  the  drilled  army ;  Scies, 
the  army  draion  up  in  battle  array;  and  agmen  (^go,  move),  the  army 
on  the  line  of  march. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  P^nglish  :  — 

1.  Rem  RomanTs  nuntiant.  2.  Spes  victoriae  magna  fuit. 
3.  Sine  spe.  4.  Magnas  spes  habemus.  o.  Res  Helvetiis 
enuntiata  est.  6.  Cum  pernicie  exercitus.  7.  Caesar 
Divitiaco^  maximam  fidem  habebat.  8.  Hostes  portum 
tenebant.  9.  Timor  omnem  exercitiim  occiipavit.  10.  Italia, 
patria  nostra,  omnibus  fortibus  cara  est.  11.  Magnum  in 
re  militari  usum  habet. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  With  the  army,  with  the  armies.  2.  The  consul  praises 
the  army.  3.  They  have  built  houses.  4.  The  leaders  of 
the  army  fight  bravely.  5.  There  are  many  houses  in  the 
city.  6.  With  hope.  7.  Hope  delighted  the  army.  8.  The 
consul  will  hold  the  harbor.  9.  We  praise  the  faithfulness 
of  the  soldier.  10.  The  army  is  brave.  11.  The  consul 
has  large  experience  in  military  affairs.  12.  Labienus  was 
in-  Caesar's  army. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Lit.,  had  confidence  to  Divitiacus  ;  i.e.,  confidence  in  Divitiacus. 

2.  Use  the  preposition  in. 

What  is  the  stem  «f  dies  ?  When  is  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem 
short '?     What  nouns  are  complete  in  the  plural  ? 


144 


FIIIS^   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON   XLVIII. 
THIKD    CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT,    IMPERFECT,    AND    FUTURE     INDICATIVE    ACTIVE. 

176.  Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  are  distinguished  by 
having  e  short  before  -re  in  the  present  infinitive.  Tlie  verb- 
stem,  obtained  by  dropping  this  characteristic  e,  ends  in  a 
consonant  or  in  ii. 

EXAMPLES. 


Present. 

Pres.  Stein. 

Verb-Stem. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf .  and  Part. 

rego,  rule. 
minuo,  lessen. 

rege- 
imnu- 

reg- 
minu- 

regere 
minuere 

rexl,  rectum 
minui,minutum 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Present. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perfect. 

Participle. 

rego 
minuo 

regere 
minuere 

rexi 
minui 

rectum 
miniitum 

1 .  The  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Indicative  Active 
are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 


PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 


[The  characteristic  vowel  of  tlie  present  stem  changes  to  i,  u,  etc.,  in 
the  inflection  of  the  verb.  The  personal  endings  and  tense  signs  are 
the  same  as  in  the  first  conjugation,  except  those  of  the  future,  where 
tlie  characteristic  vowel  changes  to  a  or  e  before  the  personal  endings.] 


Present. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  o 

"       +  t 

«     +  mus 
«     +  tis 
"     +  nt 

rego 

regis 

regit 

regimus 

regitis 

regunt 

I  rule. 
Thou  rulest. 
lie  rules. 
We  rule. 
You  rule. 
They  rule. 

THIliD   CONJUGATION. 


145 


ImI'EIIFECT. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
o 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  bam 

"         "      +  bas 
"      +  bat 
"         "      +  bamus 
"        "     +  batis 
"     +  bant 

regebam 

regebas 

regebat 

regebamus 

regebatis 

regebant 

/  was  ruling. 
Thou  wast  ruling. 
lie  was  ruling. 
We  were  ruling. 
You  were  ruling. 
They  were  ruling. 

Future. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

P/(«-.  1 

2 
o 

Pres.  stem  +  m 

"      +  s 
"        "     +t 

"     +  mus 
"     +  tis 
"      +  nt 

regam 

reges 

reget 

regemus 

regetis 

regent 

I  shall  or  icill  rule. 
Thou  ivilt  rule. 
He  ivill  rule. 
We  shall  or  will  rule. 
You  will  rule. 
They  loill  rule. 

Obs.  In  the  formation  of  the  tenses,  note  that  the  future  of  the 
first  and  second  conjugations  always  has  the  tense  sign  -hi-]  the 
i  disappears  before  o  (as,  amabio  —  amabo),  and  becomes  u  in 
the  third  person  plural.  The  future  of  the  tliird  conjugation  con- 
sists of  the  present  stem  (the  characteristic  vowel  being  lengthened) 
and  the  personal  endings ;  /  becomes  e  in  the  second  and  third 
persons  singular,  and  in  the  plural. 


scribo 

scribgre 

lego 

leggre 

instruo 

instrugre 

contendo 

contendere 

dimitto 

dimittgre 

ggro 

ggrgre 

mitto 

mittere 

cingo 

cinggre 

VOCABULARY. 

scrips!,  ivrite. 


legi,  collect,  read. 
instruxi,  erect,  arrange. 
contend!,  hasten. 
d!m!s!,  dismiss. 
gess!,  carry,  carry  on. 
m!s!,  send. 
cinxi,  surround. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

S.  O.  V.T.  V.T.      S.  O. 

1.  Puer  libriim  scrlbebat.     2.  Mittitis  servos.     8.  Frater 
legebat.      4.    Hostes  urbem  cingunt.      5.    DiscipiilT  litteriis 


146 


rillST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


scrlbciit.     6.  Caesar  acicm  instruebat.     7.  Piier  dona  mittel. 

8.  Caesar  celeriter^  conciliuiii  diiuittit.  9.  Caesai"  in  Italiain 
magiiis  itineribus-  conteiulit.  10.  Belg-ae  cum  Germfinls 
coiitinenter  bellum  geruut.  11.  llelvetil  legatos  ad  Caesa- 
reiii  mittuiit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  We  write,  we  were  writing,  we  shall  write.  2.  He 
reads,  he  was  reading,  he  will  read.  3.  We  send,  we  were 
sending,  we  shall  send.  4.  The  queen  writes  a  book. 
5.  Friends  will  send  books.  G.  The  boys  were  writing. 
7.  They  had  called  a  slave.      8.   Cjvsar  hastens  into  Gaul. 

9.  The  K(jmans  are  carrying  on  war  with  the  Gauls.  10.  We 
read,  tiiey  write.  11.  We  draw  up  the  line  of  battle,  we 
were  drawing  up  the  line  of  battle. 

NOTKS     ANI>    OUESTIONS. 

1.  For  words  not  given  in  the  special  vocabularies,  look  in  the 
general  vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

2.  Z>//  loiuj  mdrrhes. 

Define  sentence.  What  are  the  essential  parts  of  a  sentence  ?  Men- 
tion the  personal  endings  of  the  present,  of  the  imperfect,  of  the  future 
indicative. 


LESSON    XLIX. 

THIED    CONJUGATION. 

PERFECT,   PLUPERFECT,  AND   FUTURE  PERFECT   INDICATIVE 

ACTIVE. 

177.    The  Perfect  Stem  of  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation 
is  i-egularly  formed  by  adding  -al  to  the  verb-stem. 

KXAMPLES. 


Pies.  Iiul. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Verb-Stem. 

Perfect  Stem. 

rego 
scribe 

reg-ere 
scrib-ere 

reg.          1 
scrib-       1 

reg  +  SI    =  regsi 
{see  18)  =  rexi 

scrib  +  si  =  scribsi 
{see  20)  —  scripsi 

THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


147 


1.  The  Perfect,  riuperfeet,  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative 
Active  are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 

PARTIAT.    PARADIGM. 

[Tlie  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  tlie  first  and  second  con- 
jngations.  Note  tlie  change  of  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  to 
short  /,  to  long-  e,  and  then  to  short  e.] 


I'EIil'ECT    AND    AOKIST. 

Person. 

1 

English. 

Perfect.          !           Aorist. 

Siny.  1 

Perf.  stem 

rexi 

/  have  ru 

hd. 

I  ruled. 

2 

"    +  sti 

rexisti 

Thou  hast  ruled. 

Thou  didst  rule. 

o 

«    +t 

rexit 

He  has  ruled. 

He  ruled. 

Plar.  1 

"        "    4-  mus 

reximus 

We  have 

ruled. 

We  ruled. 

2 

"         "    +  stis 

rexistis 

You  have 

ruled. 

You  ruled. 

3 

,,  ^  +  runt 
\    or  re 

rexerunt 
or  rexere 

They  have  ruled. 

They  ruled. 

Pluperfect. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

En.irlish. 

Sincj.  1 

Perf.  stem  +  ram 

rexeram 

/  had  ruled. 

2 

"        "      4-  ras 

rexeras 

Thou  hadst  ruled. 

8 

"      +  rat 

rexerat 

He  had  ruled. 

Plur.  1 

*'         "      +  ramus 

rexeramus 

We  had  ruled. 

2 

"        "      +  ratis 

rexeratis 

You  had  ruled. 

3 

"        "      +  rant 

rexerant 

Then  ^«f^  '■"^^^• 

Future  Perfect. 

Sing.  1 

Perf.  stem  +  ro 

rexero 

•  /  shall  have  ruled. 

2 

"        "      +  ris 

rexeris 

Thou  wilt  have  ruled. 

3 

"         "      4-  rit 

rexerit 

He  ivill  have  ruled. 

Plar.  1 

"        "      +  rimus 

rexerimus 

We  will  have  ruled. 

2 

"        "      +  ritis 

rexeritis 

You  will  have  ruled. 

3 

"         "      -f  rint 

rexerint 

They  will  have  ruled. 

178.    Forniation  of  tlie  Perfect  Stem. 

1.  The  perfect  stem  of  the  third  conjugation  is  regularly 
formed  by  adding  -si  to  the  verb-stem. 


148  FIRST    STErS    IN   LATIN. 

2.  Some  verbs  have  a  reduplicated  perfect;  ^^e.,  the  first 
consonant  of  the  word  is  prefixed  with  a  vowel,  generally  e. 

Obs.  1 .  Compound  verbs  oiiiit  the  reduplication,  except  do,  sto, 
disco,  and  posco,  sometimes  curro. 

EXAMPLE. 

Present.  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect.  Participle. 

c^AOffall.  c^dgre  c6cidi  casum 

Obs.  2.    The  vowel  of  the  stem  is  often  weakened  to  i,  and 
before  r  to  e ;  in  the  example  above  a  is  weakened  to  i. 
Obs.  3.  Sometimes  the  reduplication  has  been  lost. 

EXAMPLE. 

findo,  sjilit.      findgre      fidi  (which  stands  for  fifidi). 

3.  The  stem  vowel  is  sometimes  lengthened. 

EXAMPLES. 

Sgo,  do,     SgSre      egi  6mo,  but/,      gmdre      emi 

4.  The  perfect  stem  has  sometimes  the  same  form  as  the 
present  stem,  with  i  added. 

EXAMPLES. 

ru-o       ru-6re       rul  vert-o      vert-6re      verti 

5.  Sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  stem  is  transposed  and 
lengthened. 

EXAMPLE. 

cer-no  cer-ngre  cre-vi  cre-tum 

6.  Stems  of  the  third  conjugation,  like  those  of  the  third 
declension,  are  divided,  according  to  tlieir  final  consonant, 
into :  — 

I.  Labial  Stems,  p,  h,  m  :  as,  carp-o,  pluck,  carp-si;  scrib-o, 

?v}'ite,  scrip-si;  pr6m-o,  pluck,  pres-si. 
II.  Dextal  Stems,  t,  d,  s,  n,  (s)  :  as,  mit-to,  ser^d,  mi-si;  claud-o, 

clau-si;  ced-o,  ces-si. 
III.  Lingual  Stems,  r,  I:  as,  gSr-o,  ges-si;  vel-lo,  tear,  vel-li 

(vulsT). 
i\.  Guttural    Stems,    c,  <ju,  k,   g,  h:    as,   dic-o,  5a?/,    dix-i; 

coqu-o,  cook,  cox-i ;   ping-o,  painl,  pinx-i ;    trah-o,  draw, 

trax-i. 
y.  u-Stems  :  as,  minu-o,  lessen,  minu~i. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


149 


179.    Laws  of  Euphony  :  — 
1.  6  is  changed  to  p  before  .9. 

KX  AM  PI.es. 

scribo,  ivrile,  perf.  (scribsi)  =  scripsi. 

nubo,  marry  (of  woman),  perf.  (nubsi)  —  nupsi. 


2.  t  and  d  are  dropped  before  s,  or  become  with  s,  ss. 

EXAMPLES. 

mitto,  send,    perf.  (mittsi)    =  misi. 
claudo,  shut,      "     (claudsi)  =  clausi. 
laedo,  injure,     "     (laedsi)     =  laesi. 
cedo,  yield,         "     (cedsi)      =  cessl. 

3.  c,  (/,  gw,  h,  with  .s,  become  x. 

EXAMPLES. 

dico,  say,  perf.  (dicsi)      —  dixi. 

jungo,  join,  ''     (jungsi)    =  junxi. 

coquo,  cook,  "     (coqusi)  —  c6xi. 

traho,  draiv,  "     (trahsi)     -  traxi. 

4.  Verbs  whose  stems  end  in  Z,  m,  n,  or  r,  and  a  few 
others,  form  their  perfects  in  -iil ;  those  whose  stems  end  in 
a  vowel  form  their  perfects  in  -vl  {-dvJ,  -evJ.,  -ivt). 


EXAMPLES. 

c61o 

c61gre 

coluT,  cultivate. 

aio 

algre 

alui,  nourish. 

sgro 

sergre 

sgrui,  connect. 

fremo 

frgmgre 

frgmui,  rage. 

pono 

pongre 

p6sui,  place. 

pasco  (v.  st, 

,  pa-)         pascgre 

pavi,  feed. 

cerno 

cerngre 

crevi  (178.  5),  decide. 

ciipio 

ciipgre 

ciipivi,  desire. 

VOCABULARY. 

rggo 

reggre 

rexi,  rule. 

carpo 

carpere 

carpsl,  pluck. 

duco 

ducgre 

duxi,  lead. 

pingo 

pinggre 

pinxi,  paint. 

necto 

nectgre 

nexi,  or  nexui,  tie. 

nubo 

nubgre 

nupsi,  marry  (said  of  a  woman) 

ascendo  ^ 

ascendgre 

ascendi,  ascend. 

150  riKST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

EXERCISES. 

Form  the  perfect  of  the  following  verbs,  and  account  for 
the  euphonic  changes : — 

1.  dimitto,  dismiss.  8.  dico,  sa?/,  tell. 

2.  contendo,'  hasten.  9.  vinco,  conquer. 

3.  cingo,  surround.  10.  deligo,  select. 

4.  duco,  lead.  11.  traho,  draiv. 

5.  tggo,  cover.  12.  defendo,  defend. 

6.  ludo,  play.  13.  claudo,  shut. 

7.  tango,2  touch.  14.  frango,=^  break. 

Translate  into  P^nglish  :  — 

1.  Reglna  nuntios  non  niTserat.  2.  Puerl  cpistulas  scrip- 
serunt.  3.  Caesar  acieni  instruxernt.  4.  Imperator  urbera 
muris^  cinxit.  5.  Belgae  cum  GermiinTs  continenter  bellum 
gesserunt.  6.  Magister  filium  et  puellam' docuit.  7.  Reglna 
et  rex  epistulas  scrlbent.^ 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  bovs  have  written  letters.  2.  We  have  written, 
we  had  written,  we  shall  have  written.  3.  He  has  conquered, 
he  had  conquered,  he  shall  have  conquered.  4.  They  have 
sent,  they  sent,  they  had  sent,  they  shall  have  sent.  5.  The 
boys  and  the  girls  wrote  *^  letters.  0.  The  slaves  have  led 
the  boys  and  girls. ^  7.  They  have  defended.  8.  We  are 
playing.     0.  He  hastened  into  Gaul. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Stems  ending  in  -nd  form  tlie  perfect  by  adding  -i,  not  -si. 

2.  tango:  verb-stem  tay-,  present  stem  tan//-,  present  tamjo,  infini- 
tive tarvjerc,  perfect  tetuj'i. 

3.  The  verb-stem  is  frarj-,  the  present  stem /m/;//-,  perfect /?%!. 

4.  Why  ablative  ? 

5.  Wlien  tlie  object  consists  of  two  or  more  nomis  joined  by  et,  and, 
both  must  be  in  tlic  accusative. 

6.  When  the  subject  consists  of  more  than  one  noun  joined  by 
et,  and,  the  verb  must  be  plural. 

How  is  the  perfect  stem  of  the  third  conjugation  regularly  formed'? 
How  are  stems  of  the  third  conjugation  classified  ? 


THIllD    CONJUGATION. 


151 


LESSON   L. 
THIED    CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT,    IMPERFECT,    AND    FUTURE    INDICATIVE    PASSIVE. 
-ABLATIVE    OF    ACCOMPANIMENT. 

180.   The  Present,  Imperfeet,  and  Future  Indicfitive  Pas- 
sive are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 


PARTIAL    PAKADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings  and  tense  signs  are  the  same  as  in  the  first 
and  seeond  eonj ligations,  exeept  in  the  future,  where  the  vowel  ehanges 
to  a,  and  then  to  e,  as  in  the  future  active.] 


Pkesext. 


Person. 


Shuj.  I 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 


Formation. 


Pres.  stem  +  r 

"      -f  ris  or  re 
"     +  tur 
"     4-  mur 
''      +  mini 
"      +  ntur 


Example. 


English. 


regor 

regeris,  -re 

regitur 

regimur 

regimini 

reguntur 


/  am  {behhj)  ruled. 
Thou  art  ruled. 
He  is  ruled. 
We  are  ruled. 
You  are  rxded. 
Theij  are  ruled . 


Imi'erfect. 


Sinej.  1 
2 

o 
•J 

Plur.  1 

9 


Pres.  stem  +  bar 
"        "     +  baris,  re 
"■        "     -f  batur 
"         "      +  bamur 
"        "     +  bamini 
"        "     +  bantur 


regebar 

regebaris,  -re 

regebatur 

regebamur 

regebamini 

regebantur 


I  icas  (being)  ruled. 
Thou  tcast  rxded. 
He  was  ruled. 
We  were  ruled. 
You  ivere  ruled. 
They  were  ruled. 


Sing.  1 

Pres.  ste 

2 

" 

- 

«< 

Plur.  1 

... 

2 

" 

3 

" 

4-  ris  0   re 
+  tur 
-f  mur 
+  mini 
+  ntur 


regar 

regeris,  -re 

regetur 

regemur 

regemini 

regentur 


I  shall  be  rxded. 
Thou  wilt  he  rided. 
He  ivill  be  ruled. 
We  will  be  rxded. 
You  will  be  ruled. 
Theij  will  be  ruled. 


152 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


1 .  Note  the  change  in  the  present  of  short  e  to  /,  and  in 
the  third  person  phiral  to  v.  In  the  imperfect  the  character- 
istic is  long  e  ;  in  the  future  a,  which  changes  to  e. 

ABLATIVE    OF    ACCOMPANIMENT. 

181.  Rule  XVIII.  —  The  ablative  is  used  to  denote 
acconipaiiiment,  usually  with  the  preposition  cum, 

1.  Note  that  vjith,  when  it  means  together  with  or  m  com- 
liany  ivith^  is  translated  by  cum  with  the  ablative. 

EXAMPLES. 

L  mitto  servum  cum  pu6r6,  /  se?id  a  slave  with  a  boy. 

2.  nostri  gquites  cum  funditoribus  sagittariisque  flumen 

transgressi  sunt,  oiw  cavalry  crossed  the  river  w^iTH  the 

SLINGEliS  AND  AKCIIEKS. 

2.  Carefully  distinguish  this  construction  from  the  instru- 
mental ablative,  which  shows  icith  ivhat  or  by  ivhat  an  action 
is  done. 

EXAMPLE. 

puer  vulnSratus  eat  sagittis,  the  boy  ivas  loounded  iv'Uh  (J>y)  arroivs. 


VOCABULARY. 

Present. 

PuEs.  Inf. 

Perfect. 

Participle. 

cingo 

cingSre 

cinxi 

cinctum,  surround. 

frango 

frangere 

fregi 

fractum,  Itreak. 

occido 

occidgre 

occidi 

occisum,  kill. 

divide 

divldgre 

dlV13l 

divisum,  divide. 

diligo 

diliggre 

dilexi 

dllectum,  love. 

deligo 

deliggre 

delegi 

delectum,  select. 

defendo 

defendgre 

defend! 

defensum,  defend. 

vinco 

vincSre 

VlCl 

victum,  conquer. 

VIVO 

vivgre 

vixi 

vie  turn,  live. 

laedo 

laedgre 

laesT 

laesum,  hurt. 

flecto 

flectere 

flexi 

flexum,  lend. 

mergo 

mergere 

mersi 

mersum,  dip. 

OiiS.    Form  the  perfect  of 

each  verb, 

and  account  for  the 

phonic  changes. 

THIIID   CONJUGATION.  153 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Deligitnr.  2.  Cingitur.  3.  Puer  ah  omnibus  dllige- 
batur.  4.  Urbs  muro^  cingitnr.  5.  Urbs  a-  civibus  defen- 
ditur.  G.  Oranes  vincentur.  7.  Tells  occideiis.  8.  A 
Cacsare  ducebamur.  9.  Non  ducebaminl.  10.  Bella  gere- 
bantur.  11.  Cum  GermanTs  pugnant.  12.  Cum  deeima 
legione  venit.     13.  Titus  cum  equitibus  mittitur. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  are  (being)  selected.  2.  We  are  conquered,  we 
were  conquered,  we  shall  be  conquered.  3.  The  city  will  be 
surrounded  by  a  wall.  4.  The  soldiers  will  be  conquered  by 
the  enemy.     5.  The  soldiers  will  be  killed  with  the  weapons. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Why  ablative  ? 

2.  Why  is  the  preposition  expressed  1      • 

What  are  the  personal  endings  of  the  present  passive  voice  ?  What 
are  the  future  endings  of  this  conjugation  1  What  verbs  have  a  passive 
voice  ?     What  is  meant  by  voice  in  grammar  1 


LESSON   LI. 

THIED    CONJUGATION. 

PERFECT,   PLUPERFECT,  AND   FUTURE  PERFECT  INDICATIVE 
PASSIVE. -TWO   ACCUSATIVES    WITH    ONE    VERB. 

182.  The  Participial  Stem  of  verbs  of  the  third  conjuga- 
tion is  formed  by  adding  -to-,  nom.  -tus  (or  -so-,  nom.  -sus), 
to  the  verb-stem. 


EX  AMPLE. 

Present. 

Verb-Stem. 

Perf.  Stem. 

Tart.  Stem. 

NOM. 

dico,  say. 

dic- 

dixi- 

dicto- 

dictus 

154 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


1.  The  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative 
Passive  are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 

PARTIAL     PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings,  tense  signs,  and  formation,  are  the  same  as 
in  the  first  and  second  conjugations.] 


Perfect  and  Aokist. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Fxample. 

English. 

Perfect. 

Aorist. 

Sing.  1 

Verb-stem  — 
+  tus  sum 

rectus  sum 

/  Jinve          \ 

/  icas  ruled. 

2 

+  tus  es 

rectus  es 

Thou  Iiast 

S~ 

Thou  wast  ruled. 

3 

+  tus  est 

rectus  est 

He  has 

He  was  ruled. 

Plur.  1 

+  ti  sumus 

recti  sumus 

We  have 

s: 

We  icere  ruled. 

2 

+  ti  estis 

recti  estis 

You  have 

a. 

You  were  rided. 

•> 

-f  ti  sunt 

recti  sunt 

Titcji  have  . 

They  were  ruled. 

Pluperfect. 

Person. 

S'nuj.  1 

Formation. 

Example. 

EnjE^lish. 

Verb- St.  -f  tus  ei^m 

rectus  eram 

/  had  been  ruled. 

2 

"        +  tus  eras 

rectus  eras 

Thou  hadst  been  ruled. 

:) 

*•        +  tus  erat 

rectus  erat 

He  had  been  ruled. 

Phn:  1 

"        4-  ti  eramus 

recti  eramus 

We  had  been  ruled. 

2 

-f-  ti  eratis 

recti  eratis 

You  had  been  ruled. 

- 

"        -f  ti  erant 

recti  erant 

Theij  had  been  ruled. 

Fi;tl:ue  Perfect. 

Simj.  1 

Verb-st.  +  tus  ero 

rectus  ero 

I  sh(dl  have  been  ruUd . 

2 

+  tus  eris 

rectus  eris 

Thou  wilt  have  been  ruled. 

3 

"        4"  tus  erit 

rectus  erit 

He  will  have  been  ruled. 

Phir.  1 

"        -f  ti  erimus 

recti  erimus 

We  shall  have  been  ruled. 

2 

+  ti  eritis 

recti  eritis 

You  will  have  been  ruled. 

3 



"        +  ti  erunt 

recti  erunt 

They  ivill  huve  been  ruled. 

183.   Euphonic  changes  :  — 
I.  g,  qu,  h  become  c  before  t. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

M.  F. 

rSgo,  ride,  part,  stem  (regtus)     -  rectus,    -a, 
cSquo,  cool;       "  (coqutus)  —  coctus,  -a, 

trSho,  draw,       "  (trShtus)   —  tractus,  -a, 


N. 

-um 
-um 
-um 


THIKD    CONJUGATION.  155 


II.  h  becomes  }>  before  t. 

EXAMPLES. 

M.  F.         N  • 

scribo,  write,  partic.  stem  (scrlbtus)  =  scriptus,  -a,  -urn 
nubo,  marry,        "         "      (nubtus)    =■■  nuptus,    -a,  -urn 

III.  d  and  t  are  dropped  before  the  t  of  the  participial  stem, 
which  is  then  changed  to  s. 

EXAMPLES. 

laedo,  injure,  partic.  stem  (laedtus)    =^  laesus,     -a,  -urn 
claudo,  shut,         "         "      (claudtus)=  clausus,  -a,  -urn 

fleoto.  lend,         ''         "    |  ^^f,^/  \  "    flexus.      -a.  -um 

IV.  In   some   cases,   but  rarely,  tlie   d  or  t  of  the   stem 
becomes  s. 

EXAMPLES. 

cedo,  yield,      partic.  stem  (cedtiis)     —  cessus,     -a,  -um 
mitto,  send,  "         "      (mittus)     —  missus,    -a,  -um 

V.  h  is  sometimes  assimilated,  and  tt  becomes  ss  or  s. 

EXAMPLE. 

jiibeo,comwan(/,  partic.  st.  (jtibtus  =  jut-tus)  —  jussus,  -a,  -um 

VI.  Verbs  with  present  stem  ending-  in  11^  rr^  change  the 
participial  suffix  -t-  to  -s-,  and  drop  I  or  r  of  the  stem. 

EXAMPLES. 

fallo,  deceive,  partic.  st.  (falltus  —  falsus)     —  falsus,    -a,  -um 
curro,  run,  "         (currtus  — cur-sus)  -  cursus,  -a,  -um 

Note  1.   The  verb-stem  isfal-;  fallo  =  falio  (faljo)  ;  cur-,  curio 
(cur  jo). 

Note  2.  In  enumerating  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb,  we  give 
the  neuter  of  the  perfect  participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind.  Participle. 

dico  dic-gre  dixi  dictum 


156 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


Learn   the    principal    parts  of   the    following  verbs,   and 
account  for  the  euphonic  changes : — 


vivo 

vivere 

vixi 

victum,  live. 

duco 

ducere 

duxi 

ductum,  lead. 

divide 

dividere 

divisi 

divisum,  divide. 

liido 

ludere 

lusi 

lusum,  plai/. 

cano 

cangre 

cecini 

,  sing. 

lego 

Idggre 

legi 

lectum,  read. 

34.    Two 

A 

ccusatives 

with  one 

Vei 

•b. 

KXAMPLES. 

1.  Caesarem  sententiam  rdgavit,  he  asked  Coisar  (his)  opinion. 

2.  Caesar  Aeduos  fiumentum  flagitavit,  Ccesar  demanded  corn 

of  the  yEdiii. 

3.  Titus  regem  sermoueni  celavit,  Titus  concealed  the  conversa- 

tion from  the  king. 

4.  Caesar  sententiam  a  constile  rdgatus  est,  Cmsar  ims  asked 

his  opinion  by  the  corisid. 

5.  pacem  ab  Romanis  pStit,  he  seeks  peace  from  the  Romans. 

Ors.  Note  that  in  Exs.  1,  2,  and  3  the  verbs  of  asking,  demand- 
ing, concealing,  are  in  the  active  voice,  and  are  followed  by  two 
accusatives,  one  of  the  person,  the  other  of  the  thing.  Tn  Ex.  4  the 
verl)  of  asking  is  in  the"  passive  voice,  and  the  accusative  of  the 
person  in  the  active  becomes  the  subject  in  the  passive.  In  Ex.  5 
the  person  after  a  V(n-b  of  asking  (pStit)  is  piit  in  the  ablative  with 
a  preposition.     The  idiom  is  ex})ressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 


TWO  ACCUSATIVES.— PERSON   AND  THING. 

185.  Rule  XIX.  —  Verbs  of  asking,  demanding, 
teaching f  and  concealing  take  two  accusatives,  one  of 
the  person  and  the  other  of  the  thinj?. 

1.  The  accusative  of  the  thing  may  remain  with  the  passive 
voice  of  verbs  of  teaching,  and  also  with  r6go. 

2.  PSto  and  postiilo  generally  take  the  accusative  of  the  thing 
and  the  ablative  of  the  person  with  a  or  ab  ;  quaero,  the  accusative 
of  the  thing  and  the  ablative  of  the  person  with  e,  ex,  a,  ab,  or  de. 

Syn.  Pgto,  to  leg,  r6go,  to  ask,  are  general  terms  for  either  a 
request  or  a  demand ;  postiilo,  to  demand  as  a  right ;  flagito,  to  de- 
mand with  earnestness  ;  posco,  to  ask  as  a  right,  as  a  price,  or  salary. 


rOUllTlI    CONJUGATION.  157 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  DuctT  erant,  missus  est,  cincti  sunt.  2.  Victi  sunt. 
3.  Puerl  a  magistro  munitT  erant.  4.  Castra  vallo  eincla' 
sunt.  5.  Exercitus  UOnianus  ab  llelvetiis  sub  jugum  missus 
est.  G.  Nuntil  ad  exercitum  nostrum  missi  sunt.  7.  Kex  et 
regina  omnibus^  cari^  fuerunt.  8.  Caesar  onniia  consilia 
Aeduos  eelat.     9.   Consul  Caesareni  seutentiam  rogabat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  have  been  led,  they  have  been  sent.  2.  He  has 
been  sent,  we  have  been  sent,  he  had  been  sent.  3.  You 
shall  have  been  sent.  4.  The  city  has  been  surrounded  by 
a  wall.  5.  The  Helvetians  have  been  sent.  6.  We  have 
been  conquered,  we  had  been  conquered,  we  shall  have  been 
conquered.  7.  He  was  sent,  he  will  be  sent,  he  has  been 
sent,  he  had  been  sent.  8.  We  shall  not  be  conquered  by 
the  enemy.  9.  They  asked  Titus  his  opinion.  10.  Caesar 
concealed  his  plans  from  the  Helvetians.  11.  The  Helvetians 
seek  peace  from  Ca^^sar. 

NOTES    AND    <JUESTIONS. 

1.  Neuter  plural. 

2.  Dative  after  carl. 

3.  Masculine  by  preference. 


LESSON   LIL 
FOUETH    CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT,    IMPERFECT,   AND    FUTURE    INDICATIVE   ACTIVE.- 
ACCUSATIVE    OF    THE    SAME    PERSON. 

186.  The  Fourth  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  that  have 
I  long  before  -re  in  the  present  infinitive.  The  present  stem 
is  found  by  dropping  -re  of  the  present  infinitive. 


EXAMPLE. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Pres.  Stem. 

audio,  liear. 

audiie 

audi- 

158 


FIRST   STErS    IN   LATIN. 


1.  The  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Futnre  Tenses,  Indicative 
Active,  are  formed  by  adding  the  verbal  endings  to  the 
present  stem. 

PARTIAI.     PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings  and  the  tense  signs  are  the  same  as  in  the 
first  and  second  conjugations,  excei)t  in  tlie  future,  wliere  the  cliarac- 
trristic  vowel  of  the  stem  becomes  a  or  e.  The  third  person  plural 
indicative  is  audiunt,  not  audi-nt.] 


PUESENT. 


Pers<ni. 


Sing.  1 
2 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 


Formation. 


Pres.  stem  +  o 


"  +t 

"  +  mus 

"  +  tis 

"  +  unt 


Exami>le. 


audio 

audls 

audit 

audimus 

auditis 

audiunt 


li^iiglish. 

I  hear. 
Thou  heurcst. 
lie  hears. 
We  hear. 
You  hear. 
The  II  hear. 


Imperfect. 


Siwj.  1   I    Pr 


Plur.  1 
2 
3 


es.  stem  +  bam 
"      +  bas 
"      +  bat 
"      +  bamus 
"      +  batis 
"      +  bant 


audiebam 

audiebas 

audiebat 

audiebamus 

audiebatis 

audiebant 


/  icas  hearing. 
Thou  least  hearing. 
He  teas  hearing. 
We  ivere  hearing. 
You  ivere  hearing. 
Thei)  icere  hearing 


Future. 


Sing.  1 

Pres,  ste 

2 

«         ii 

3 

((        (( 

Plur.  1 

" 

2 

" 

3 

" 

+  s 

+ 1 

+  mus 
+  tis 
+  nt 


audiam 

audies 

audiet 

audiemus 

audietis 

audient 


/  shall  or  will  hear. 
Thou  icilt  hear. 
lie  will  hear. 
We  shall  or  will  heai 
You  will  hear. 
Then  will  hear. 


187.   Two  Accusatives  of  the  Same  Person. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  CaesSrem  consiilem  creaverunt,  they  elected  Ccesar  consul. 
•2.  consules  creantur  Caesar  et  Servilius,  Caesar  and  Servilius 
are  elected  consuls. 

3.  Romiilus  urbem  Romam  vdcavit,  Romulus  called  the  city  Rome. 

4.  urbs  Roma  a  Ronafllo  vocata  est. 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION.  159 


()i?s.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  verbs  of  electing, 
calling,  choosing,  making,  etc.,  are  followed  by  two  accusatives  of  the 
same  person  or  thing ;  one  accusative  is  the  direct  object  of  the 
verb,  and  the  other  is  an  essential  part  of  the  predicate,  and  is 
called  the  Pkkdicate  Accusative.  (In  Exs.  2  and  4  consiiles 
and  Roma  are  predicate  nondnatives  after  creantur  and  vdcata 
est.)     The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

TWO  ACCUSATIVES   OF  THE  SAME  PERSON  OR  THING. 

188.  Rule  XX. — Verbs  of  natning,  calling ,  choos- 
ing, niaJi-ing,  reclioning,  regarding,  esfeenting,  shoiv- 
ing,  and  the  like,  take  two  accusatives  of  the  same 
person  or  thing-. 

VOCABULARY. 

Foi'm  tlie  infinitives  of  the  following  verbs  of  the  fourth 
conjugation  :  — 

1.  mrniio,  fortifg.  4.  punio,  punish. 

2.  vSnio,  come.  5.  dormio,  sleep. 

3.  griidio,  educate.  6.  finio,Jinish. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Audimns,  aiuliemus.  2.  Eriidit,  erudient.  3.  Munitis, 
munies.  4.  MTlites  imperatorem  audiunt.  5.  Pummns  pue- 
rum.  G.  MTlites  castra  muniunt.  7.  Puer  dormiebat. 
8.  Puniemns.  9.  Caesar  in  Galliam  citeriorem  venit. 
10.  Roman!  suam^  urbem  Romam  appellaverunt.  11.  Oppi- 
dum  appellant  Genavam.  12.  Caesar  oppidum  virtute^ 
suorum  militum  expugnavit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  hear,  they  were  hearing,  they  will  hear.  2.  He 
fortifies  the  town.  3.  They  will  punish  the  boys.  4.  He 
sleeps,  3'ou  sleep,  they  sleep.  5.  The  Romans  call  their 
city  Rome.  6.  The  soldiers  hear.  7.  Wa  come.  8.  They 
punish  the  boy.  1).  The  soldiers  are  fortifying  their-'  camp. 
10.  He  will  punish  the  boy.  11.  The  soldiers  wore  fortify- 
ing their  camp. 


160 


FIRST  STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  When  suus  refers  to  a  noun  in  tlie  plural,  as  is  the  case  in  this 
sentence,  render  it  their)  when  it  refers  to  a  noun  in  the  singular, 
render  it  his,  her,  or  its. 

2.  By  means  of,  etc.     Why  ablative  ? 

3.  Their  can  be  omitted  in  translating. 

What  are  the  personal  endings  of  the  present  ?  What  is  the  present 
stem  of  audio  ?  What  is  a  predicate  accusative  ?  How  many  con- 
jugations ?  How  do  you  distinguish  each?  What  is  the  prc^eent  stem 
of  each  1     How  found  ? 


LESSON   LIII. 
rOUKTH    CONJUGATION. 

PERFECT,    PLUPERFECT,    AND    FUTURE    PERFECT    ACTIVE. - 
THE    SUBJECTIVE    AND    THE    OBJECTIVE    GENITIVE. 

189.   The  Perfect  Stem  of  a  ref^iilar  verb  of  the  fourth 
conjugation  is  formed  by  adding  -vl  to  the  present  stem. 

EXAMPLE. 

Present.  Tres.  Stem.  Terf.  Stem.  PEUFEeT. 

audio,  hear.  audi-  audivi-  audivi 


1 .  The  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative 
Active  are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 

PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings,  the  tense  signs,  the  formation,  and  the  changes 
of  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  are  the  same  as  in  the  first, 
second,  and  third  conjugations.] 


Peri  EOT  and  Aorist. 

Person. 

Forination. 

Example. 

EngH-sh. 

Perfect. 

Aorist. 

Sin(j.  1 
2 
3 

Plar.  1 
2 

3 

Perf.  stem 

+  sti 
"       +t 
+  mus 
+  stis 
.,     (  +  runt 
(    or  re 

audivi 

audivisti 

audivit 

audivimus 

audivistis 

audiverunt 

or  audivere 

/  have  heard. 
Thou  hast  heard. 
He  has  heard. 
We  have  heard. 
Yon  leave  heard. 

Then  fi<^*^^  heard. 

/  heard. 
Thou  didst  hear. 
He  heard. 
We  heard. 
You  heard. 

Then  heard. 

FOURTH   COKJUGATION. 


161 


Pi.T:  PERFECT. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Perf.  stem  +  ram 

"         "      +  ras 
"      +  rat 
"         "      +  ramus 
"         "      +  ratis 
"         ''      4-  rant 

audiveram 

audiveras 

audiverat 

audiveramus 

audiveratis 

audiverant 

I  had  heard. 
Thou  hadst  heard. 
He  had  heard. 
We  had  heard. 
You  had  heard. 
They  had  heard. 

Future  Perfect. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 

3 

Perf.  stem  +  ero 

erit 
erimus 
eritis 
"        "          erunt 

audivero 

audiveris 

audiverit 

audiverimus 

audiveritis 

audiverint 

I  shall  have  heard. 
Thou  wilt  have  heard. 
He  will  have  heard. 
We  will  have  heard. 
You  will  have  heard. 
They  ivill  have  heard. 

2.  Synopsis  of  Rules  for  Forming  the  Perfect  Stem :  — 

1.  Most  Vowel  Stems  (55.  3)  form  the  perfect  stem  by  adding 
-VI  (-ui)  to  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  present  stem :  as,  Smo, 
Smavl;  deleo,  delevi;  m6neo,  mdnui;  audio,  audivi. 

2.  Most  Consonant  Stems  form  the  perfect  stem  by  adding  -si 
to  the  verb-stem  :  as,  duco,  duxi ;  tggo,  texl. 

3.  Many  Labial  and  Lingual  Stems,  and  a  few  others,  form  the 
perfect  stem  by  adding  -ul  to  the  verb-stem :  as,  d6mo,  d6mui ; 
aio,  aiui;  tgneo,  tgnui. 

4.  A  few  Consonant  Stems  form  the  perfect  stem  simply  by 
adding  -I  to  the  verb-stem  (this  is  the  case  when  the  stem  vowel  is 
long  by  nature  or  by  position) :  as,  accendo,  accendi ;  verto, 
verti ;  pr§-hendo,  pr6-hendi. 

5.  The  Perfect  Stem  is  sometimes  formed  by  reduplication  and 
by  adding  -i  to  the  verb-stem  (the  stem  vowel  a  is  generally  weak- 
ened to  i,  but  before  ?-  to  e)  :  as,  c^do,  cgcidi ;  tondeo,  tStondi ; 
c^no,  c6cini ;  pSrio,  p6p6ri. 

6.  Some  verbs  lengthen  the  stem  vowel  and  add  -i  to  form  the 
perfect  (that  is,  the  reduplication  disappears  and  the  vowel  is 
lengthened)  :  as,  Iggo  (Ig-ligi  =  16-ig-i  =  legi),  leg! ;  f^cio  (fg-fic-i 
r=  fg-ic-1  =  feci),  feci ;  cSpio,  cepi ;  Sgo,  egi. 

Obs.  The  V  is  often  dropped  and  the  syllable  contracted;  as, 
Sma(v)grat  —  Smarat,  audi(v)grat  =  audigrat. 


162  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

190.   Subjective,  Possessive,  and  Objective  Genitives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  oppidum  Remorum,  a  town  of  (i.e.,  belonging  to)  the  Remi. 

2.  Divitiaci  stiidium,  the  zeal  of  Divitiacus  (i.e.,  the  zeal  that 

Divitiacus  manifests'). 

3.  amor  gloriae,  love  of  glory  (i.e.,  a  desire  to  obtain  glory). 

4.  timor  hostium  crescit,  fear  of  the  enemy  (i.e.,  fear  towards 

the  enemy,  not  fear  experienced  by  the  enemy)  increases. 

Obs.  In  the  first  example,  note  that  the  genitive  designates  the 
possessor ;  it  is  called  the  possessive  genitive.  In  Ex.  2  the  genitive 
designates  the  subject  or  agent  of  the  action  or  feeling ;  it  is  called 
the  subjective  genitive.  In  Exs.  3  and  4  the  genitive  designates  the 
object  towards  which  the  action  or  feeling  is  directed ;  it  is  called 
the  objective  genitive.     Hence  the  qualifying  genitive  may  be  — 

1.  A  Possessive  Genitive,  denoting  the  author  or  the  possessor ; 

as,  Caes^is  provincia,  CcBsar's  province. 

2.  A  Sub.jective  Genitive,  denoting  the  subject  or  agent  of  the 

action  or  feeling;  as,  ^mor  Del,  the  love  of  God  (i.e.,  the 
love  which  He  feels). 

3.  An  Objective  Genitive,  denoting  the  object  of  the  action 

or  feeling ;  as,  ^mor  Dei,  love  to  (i.e.,  towards)  God. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Punivit,  puiiTverat,  puniverit.  2.  Audlveram,  aud!- 
vero.  3.  Mllites  castra  muniverant.  4.  Punlvimus  puerum. 
5.  EriidTvi,  eriidivit,  erudivTstT,  erudlveram.  6.  Pueri^ 
librum  tenes.     7.  Legatus  consilia  Gallorum  enuntiat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  We  have  heard,  we  heard,  we  had  heard,  'we  shall  have 
heard.  2.  They  have  punished,  they  had  punished,  they 
will  have  punished.  3.  He  has  slept.  4.  We  fortify,  we 
have  fortified,  we  had  fortified,  we  shall  have  fortified. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Why  genitive  ? 

What  is  meant  by  the  possessive  genitive  ?  Give  the  rule  for  the 
genitive  after  nouns.  What  is  the  objective  genitive  ?  How  is  the 
perfect  stem  of  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  formed  ? 


FOURTH   CONJUGATIOISr. 


163 


LESSON   LIV. 
FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT,   IMPERFECT,  AND   FUTURE   INDICATIVE  PASSIVE.- 
DATIVE  WITH    INTRANSITIVE  VERBS. 

191.   The  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Indicative  Pas- 
sive are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 


PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings  and  tense  signs  are  the  same  as  in  the  first 
and  second  conjugations,  except  in  the  future,  when  the  characteristic 
vowel  of  the  stem  becomes  a  or  e.] 


Present  Passive. 


Person. 


Formation. 


Example. 


English. 


Siny.  1 
2 
8 

Plur.  1 


Pres.  stem  +  or 

"      +  ris  or  re 
"     +  tur 
"     +  mur 
"     +  mini 
"      +  imtur 


re 


audior 

audiris 

auditur 

audimur 

audimini 

audiuntur 


/  am  (being)  heard. 
Thou  art  heard. 
He  is  heard. 
We  are  heard. 
You  are  heard. 
They  are  heard. 


Imperfect. 


Sing.  1 

Pres.  ste 

2 

«        (( 

3 

((        (( 

Plur.  1 

«        < 

2 

«        < 

3 

((        < 

+  baris,  re 
+  batur 
+  bamur 
+  bamini 
+  bantur 


audiebar 

audiebaris,  -re 

audiebatur 

audiebamur 

audiebamin! 

audiebantur 


I  teas  {being)  heard. 
Thou  wast  heard. 
He  was  heard. 
We  ivere  heard. 
You  ivere  heard. 
They  were  heard. 


Future. 


Sing. 


Plur.  1 
2 
3 


Pres.  stem  -f  r 

4-  ris  or  re 
+  tur 
+  mur 
+  mini 
+  ntur 


audiar 

audieris,  -re 

audietur 

audiemur 

audiemini 

audientur 


/  shall  be  heard. 
Thou  wilt  be  heard. 
He  will  be  heard. 
We  shall  be  heard. 
You  will  be  heard. 
They  will  be  heard. 


164  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

192.  Dative  with  Intransitive  Verbs. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  haec  sententia   pugro  plS.cet,  ilia  displicet,  this  opinion 

pleases  the  boy,  that  disjjleases  (Jiini). 

2.  militis  est  diici  parere,  it  is  the  duty  of  a  soldier  to  obey  the 

leader. 

3.  f  ortuna  f  Svet  f  ortibus,  fortune  favors  the  brave. 

Obs.  We  have  alread}'  learned  that  the  dative  is  the  case  of  the 
indirect  object,  and  is  used  to  express  the  person  or  thing  to  or 
for  whom  or  which  anything  is  done.  In  the  sentence,  /  send  the 
book  to  the  boy,  boy  in  Latin  must  be  in  the  dative,  as  mitto  librum 
pugro ;  but  in  the  sentence  Ccesar  comes  to  the  city,  city  in  Latin  is  not 
dative,  —  a  preposition  must  be  used,  as  Caesar  ad  urbem  vgnit. 
In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  verbs  are  intransitive ; 
that  they  signify  to  favor,  to  please,  to  obey,  etc. ;  that  they  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  dative  generally  without  the  sign  to  or  for.  The 
idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule :  — 

DATIVE   WITH   INTRANSITIVE   VERBS. 

193.  Rule  XXI.  —  The  dative  of  the  indirect 
object  may  be  used  with  most  intransitive  verbs 
signifying"  to  favor,  please,  trust,  assist,  and  their 
contraries ;  also,  to  believe,  persuade,  cormnand,  obey, 
serve,  resist,  threaten,  spare,  pardon,  be  angry, 

1.  Some  verbs  which,  from  their  signification,  might  be 
included  in  the  foregoing  lists  are  transitive,  and  take  the 
accusative  ;  as,  jtivo,  adjtivo,  to  help.,  laedo,  to  injure.,  delecto, 
to  delight,  offendo,  to  offend,  and  jtibeo,  to  command. 

2.  Verbs  compounded  with  sStis,  b6ne,  male,  take  the 
dative. 

EXAMPLE. 

illis  satisfScSre,  to  satisfy  them,  lit.  to  do  enough  for  them. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Muniel)antur,  punieris,  puniuutur.  2,  AudTtur,  audie- 
bantur,  audietur.  3.  Castra  a  Labieno^  mOniebantur. 
4.  Bellum  a  Caesare  fiuiebatur.  5.  Milites  castra^  munie- 
bant.  6.  Mali  puerl  a  magistro  punientur.  7.  ImprobT^  a 
magistratibus  punientur.     8.  Caesar  bellum  fhiit.    9,  Bellum 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 


165 


a  Caesare  finitur.  10.  Farce  puero.  11.  Probus'^  invidet 
nemini.''     12.  Maledicimus  malls. ^ 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  will  be  heard,  they  will  be  heard,  they  were  (})eing) 
heard,  they  are  (being)  heard.  2.  The  soldiers  fortify  the 
camp.  3.  The  camp  is  fortified  by  the  soldiers.  4.  The 
war  is  (being)  finished,  the  war  will  be  finished,  the  wars 
were  (being)  finished.  5.  The  boys  are  (being)  punished, 
the  boys  will  be  punished,  the  boys  were  (being)  punished 
by  the  master.     6.  The  soldiers  obey  the  leader. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  See  172.  2.  See  80.  2.  3.  Used  as  a  noun ;  see  83.  4. 

4.  The  genitive  and  ablative  of  nuUus  are  used  instead  of  neminis 
and  nemine. 

What  is  the  passive  voiee  1  In  what  case  is  the  agent  after  a  verb 
in  the  passive  voice '?  What  are  the  principal  parts  of  a  verb  in  the 
passive  voice  1 


LESSON   LV. 
rOUETH    CONJUGATION. 

PERFECT,    PLUPERFECT,    AND    FUTURE    PERFECT     PASSIVE. 

194.  The  Participial  Stem  of  the  fourth  conjugation  is 
formed  by  adding  -io,  nom.  -tus  (or  -so,  nom.  -sus),  to  the 
present  stem. 

EXAMPI.E. 


Pres.  Ind. 
audio,  hear. 


Pres.  Stem. 
audi- 


Perf.  Stem. 
audivi- 


Partic.  Stem. 
audito- 


Present. 
audio 


PRINCIPAI.    PARTS. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 
Pres.  Inf.  Perfect. 

audire  audivi 


(Neuter  of) 

Perf.  Partic. 

auditum 


PASSIVE   VOICE. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect. 

audior  audlrl         auditus,  -a,  -um  sum 


166 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


1.  The  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative 
Passive  are  all  formed  by  adding  to  the  perfect  participle 
the  present,  imperfect,  and  future  tenses  of  the  verb  sum. 

PARTIAl,    PARADIGM. 

[The  personal  endings,  tense  signs,  the  changes  of  the  characteristic 
vowel  of  the  stem,  and  the  formation,  are  tlie  same  as  in  the  other 
conjugations.] 


Perfect  and  Aorist  Passive. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English.                        1 

rerfect. 

Aorist. 

Sing.  1 

Verb-stem  — 
+  tus  sum 

auditus  sum 

/  have         -] 

/  icas  heard. 

2 

+  tus  es 

auditus  es 

Thou  hast 

^ 

Thou  wast  heard. 

3 

+  tus  est 

auditus  est 

Re  has 

s 

He  was  heard. 

Plur.  1 

+  ti  siimus 

auditi  sumus 

We  have 

We  were  heard. 

2 

+  ti  estis 

auditi  estis 

You  have 

a. 

You  were  heard. 

3 

+  ti  sunt 

auditi  sunt 

They  have  . 

They  were  heard. 

Pluperfect  Passive. 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sincf.  1 

Verb-stem  — 

-f  tus  eram 

auditus  eram' 

I  had  been  heard. 

2 

-f  tus  eras 

auditus  eras 

Thou  hadst  been  heard. 

3 

-f  tus  erat 

auditus  erat 

He  had  been  heard. 

Plur.  1 

+  ti  eramus 

auditi  eramus 

We  had  been  heard. 

2 

4-  ti  eratis 

auditi  eratis 

You  had  been  heard. 

3 

+  ti  erant 

auditi  erant 

They  had  been  heard. 

Future  Perfect  Passive. 

Sing.  1 

+  tus  ero 

auditus  ero 

I  shall  have  been  heard. 

2 

+  tus  eris 

auditus  eris 

Thou  wilt  have  been  heard. 

3 

+  tus  erit 

auditus  erit 

He  ivill  have  been  heard. 

Plur.  1 

+  ti  erimus 

auditi  erimus 

We  shall  have  been  heard. 

2 

+  ti  eritis 

auditi  eritis 

You  will  have  been  heard. 

3 

-f  ti  erunt 

auditi  erunt 

They  ivill  have  been  heard. 

2.  The  Participial  Stem  of  verbs  of  all  four  conjugations 
is  generall}^  formed  b}'  adding  -to  (euphonically  -so) ,  nom. 
-tus  (or  -sus) ,  to  the  present  stem. 


FOUKTH   CONJUGATION.  167 

195.  Accusative  and  Ablative  of  Time. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  primo  anno  occisus  est,  he  was  killed  in  the  first  year. 

2.  multos  annos  m^iebit,  he  will  7'emain  many  years. 

Obs.  In  Ex.  1  note  that  anno  answers  the  question  when  ?  within 
what  time?  In  Ex.  2  annos  answers  the  question  how  long?  This 
Latin  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

ACCUSATIVE    AND    ABLATIVE    OF    TIME. 

196.  Rule  XXII.  —  Time  when^  or  within  which,  is 
put  in  the  ablative ;  time  hoiv  long,  in  the  accusative. 

1.  The  use  of  the  preposition  in  with  the  ablative,  and  per 
with  the  accusative,  in  order  to  express  the  time  with  greater 
precision,  is  common. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  in  diebus  proximis  decern,  within  the  next  ten  days. 

2.  per  annos  vigintT  certatum.  est,  the  war  was  luaged  for 

twenty  years. 

EXERCISES. 
Translate  into  English  :  — 
1.   Eruditi   sunt.      2.    Punitus   erat.      3.    Aiiditi   erant. 

4.  Puer  punitus  est.  5.  Puer  a  magistro  punitus  erat. 
6.  Bellum  finitum  erit.  7.  Castra  a  Caesare  munita  erant. 
8.  Proxima  nocte  castra  movit.  9.  Solis  occasu  suas  copias 
Ariovistus  in  castra  reduxit.  10.  Multas  horas  pugnave- 
runt.     11.  Multos  annos  bellum  gerebant. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  has  been  heard,  he  had  been  heard,  he  shall  have 
been  heard.  2.  They  hear  the  boy.  3.  The  teacher  pun- 
ishes the  boy.     4.  The  boy  has  been  punished  by  the  teacher. 

5.  The  wars  will  have  been  finished.  6.  Caesar  fortifies  the 
camp.  7.  The  camp  has  been  fortified  by  Caesar.  8.  On 
the  next  daj^  he  fortifies  the  camp.  9.  The  soldiers  have 
fought  many  hours.     10.  He  has  lived  many  years. 


168 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON    LVL 
THIED   OONJUaATION.-YEEBS   IN  -to, 

197.  A  few  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  ending  in  -lo, 
'tor  (passive),  are  inflected  in  the  tenses  formed  from  the 
present  stem  Uke  the  fourth  conjugation  wherever  the  fourth 
has  i  followed  by  a  vowel. 


PAKTIAI.    ] 

PARADIGM. 

Principal  Parts. 

capio    capere     cepi    captum 

capior      capi 

captus  sum 

Active.                    Present.                 Passive. 

Indicative.                  Subjunctive. 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

capio                     capiam 

capior 

capiar 

capis                      capias 

caperis  (re) 

capiaris  (re) 

capit                     capiat 

capitur 

capiatur 

caplmus                capiamus 

c&pimur 

capiamur 

c&pitia                  c&piatis 

ca,pimini 

capiamini 

c&piunt                 c&piant 

capiuntur 

capiantur 

Imperfect. 

capiebam              capSrem 

capiebar 

caperer 

Put 

CRE. 

capiam                  capiemus 

capiar 

capiemur 

capie3                   capietis 

capieris  (re) 

capiemini 

capiet                   capient 

capietur 

capientur 

Perf.  cepi               ceperim 

captus  sum 

captus  sim 

Plup.  ceperam        cepissein 

captus  eram 

captus  essem 

P.P.    cepero 

captus  ero 

Imp.     cape                capite 

capere 

capimini 

capito            capitote 

capitor 

capito            capiunto 

capitor 

capiuntor 

Inf.     c&pere            cepisse 

capi 

captus  esse 

Put.    capturus  esse 

captum  iri 

Part,  capiens           capturus 

captus 

capiendus 

Ger.  capiendi,  -do,  -dun 

1         Sup.  captum, 

captu 

THIRD    CONJUGATIOK. 


169 


VOCABUI.AKY. 

ciipio 

ctipgre 

ciipivi 

ciipitum,  desire. 

fScio 

fScgre 

feci 

factum,  make,  do. 

f6dio 

fSdgre 

fodi 

fossum,  dig. 

fiigio 

fiiggre 

fugl 

fiigitum,y?ee. 

jScio 

jScgre 

jeci 

j  actum,  throw,  hurl. 

pSrio 

pSrgre 

pgpgri 

partum,  hririg  forth. 

quStio 

quStgre 

(no  perf .) 

quassum,  shake. 

rSpio 

rSpgre 

r^pui 

rap  turn,  seize. 

s&pio 

sSpgre 

sSpivi 

,  taste. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Foginnt,  fugiebant,  fugient,  fugiant.  2.  Jacit,  jacie- 
bat,  jaciet,  jaciat.  3.  Capiraur,  capiebamur,  capiemur, 
capiamur.  4.  Milites  arma  capiunt.  5.  Arma  a  mllitibus 
capiuntur.  6.  Vir  fossam  fodit.  7.  Fossa  a  viro  foditur. 
8.  Milites  lapides  ac  tela  comciebant.^  9.  Lapides  ac  tela  a 
militibus  coujecta  erant.     10.  Ffigite,  milites,  in  urbem. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Written  also  conjiciebant. 

When  does  a  verb  in  -io  keep  the  il  What  is  the  verb-stem  of 
cSpio'?  Alls.  The  verb-stem  of  c^pio  is  cap-;  the  present  stem  is 
formed  by  adding  -i-  {=  jo  =  io)  to  the  verb-stem.  Inflect  the  present 
of  c^pio;  of  j^cio.  The  compounds  of  jacio  are  written  and  pro- 
nounced as  follows :  (ex  -f  jScio)  =  eicio,  pronounced  as  if  written 
e-yicio;  so  also  abicio  (=  ab  +  jScio)  =  abyicio,  etc. 


LESSON   LVII. 
USES    OF    THE    DATIVE. 

DATIVE    OF    INTEREST.- DATIVE   OF    PURPOSE. 

Obs.  We  have  learned  that  the  dative  may  be  used  v^^ith  transi- 
tive or  intransitive  verbs  ;  the  datives  with  these  verbs  are  essential 
to  the  completion  of  the  sense,  and  are  usually  so  closely  connected 
with  their  verbs  that  they  could  not  be  omitted.     The  dative  is 


170  FIRST    STEPS  IN    LATIN. 

often  merely  added  to  a  sentence,  which  would  make  complete 
sense  without  it,  for  the  purpose  of  designating  the  person  or  thing 
interested  in  the  action  of  the  verb,  or  affected  by  it.  This  use  of 
the  dative,  called  dative  of  interest,  may  be  stated  as  follows :  — 

198.  Dative  of  Interest. 

1.  The  dative  of  advantage  and  disadvantage. 

2.  The  dative  of  possessor. 

3.  The  dative  of  apparent  agent  with  perfect  participles  and 
gerundives  (this  dative  designates  the  person  interested  in  doing 
the  action,  and  not  merely  the  agent). 

4.  The  dative  of  reference  (this  dative  depends  not  on  a  single 
word,  but  is  loosely  connected  with  the  whole  predicate,  and  merely 
designates  the  person  or  thing  with  reference  to  whom  or  which  the 
action  is  done). 

5.  The  dative  used  where  the  English  idiom  would  lead  us  to 
expect  the  genitive. 

6.  The  dative  of  purpose  or  end,  denoting  the  object  or  end  for 
which  something  is  or  is  done. 

DATIVE    OF    PURPOSE    OR   END. 

199.  Rule  XXIII.  —  The  dative  is  used  with  sum 
and  a  few  other  verbs  to  denote  the  purpose  or  end, 
usually  with  another  dative  of  the  person  or  thing 
affected  or  interested. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  ddmuB  ddminis  aedificata  est,  non  muribus,  a  house  is 

built  for  its  owners,  not  for  the  mice.    (See  198.  1.) 

2.  mihi  est  amicus,  /  have  a  friend,  lit.  there  is  a  friend  to  me 

(emphasizes  the  fact  of  possession;  see  198.  2). 

3.  virtus  nobis  colenda  est,  we  have  virtue  to  cultivate.  (198.  3.) 

4.  tggimenta  gSleis  milites  f^cSre  jtlbet,  he  orders  the  soldiers 

to  make  coverings  for  their  helmets.    GSlels  depends  on  tSgi- 
menta  f^cSre  rather  than  on  f&cgre  alone.  (See  198.  4.) 

5.  legati   Caes&rl  ad   pgdes  proiciunt,  the  ambassadors  threw 

themselves  at  Ccesar's  feet,  lit.  to  Ccesar  at  his  feet.    (198.  5.) 

6.  sanavit  mihi  fHium,  he  cured  my  son,  out  of  regard  to  me ; 

sanavit  filium  meum,  he  cured  my  son,  not  caring  whose 
son.     (See  198.  5.) 


PREPOSITIONS.  171 


7.  magno  usui  nostris  fuit,  it  was  of  great  service  to  our  men. 

(See  198.  G.) 

8.  tertiam  5ciem  nostris  subsidio  misit,  he  sent  the  third  line 

as  a  relief  to  our  men.  (See  198.  6.) 

Obs.  Note  that  the  dative  of  purpose  takes  the  place  of  the 
complement,  i.e.,  it  is  a  predicate  dative.  The  two  datives  {purpose 
with  another  dative)  occur  after  only  a  few  verbs,  such  as  esse  and 
verbs  of  giving,  coming,  se7iding,  leaving,  and  a  few  others. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Non  scholae,  sed  vitae  discimus.  2.  Virtutcs  liomi- 
nibus  decori  gloriaeque  sunt.  3.  Caesar  milites  castris 
praesidio  relinquit.  4.  Legiones  praesidio  impedlmentis 
erant.  5.  Legatus  equitatum  auxilio  Caesari  miserat. 
6.  Caesar  tertiam  aciem  nostris  subsidio  mIsit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.   Caesar   sent   the   cavalry  as   an   aid   to   the    soldiers. 

2.  He  sent  the  third  line  for  a  protection  to  the  baggage. 

3.  Do  not  trust  fortune.  4.  He  gave  the  book  to  (his) 
friend.  5.  Caesar  did  not  trust  the  Gauls.  6.  The  Gauls 
desire  a  revolution. 


LESSON    LVIIL 

PEEPOSITIONS. 

200.   Prepositions  show  the  Relation  between  a  Noun  or 
Pronoun  and  some  other  word. 

1.  Twenty-six  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  accusative  : 

1.  ad,  to,  towards,  at  (opposite  of      5.  circa,  -um,  -iter,  around,  about 

ab).  (circiter  is  used  chiefly  with 

2.  adversus,  -um,  against,  towards.  numerals ) . 

3.  ante,  before.  6.  cis,  citra,  on  this  side. 

4.  apud  (chiefly  of  persons),  near,  7.  contra,  against. 

at,  with,  at  the  house  of,  in  the       8.  erga,  towards  (usually  of 
writings  of.  friendly  relations). 


172  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

9.  extra,  outside,  beyond.  19,  praeter,  past,  besides. 

10.  infra,  below,  under.  20.  prope,  near. 

11.  inter,  between,  among.  21.  propter,  on  account  of. 

12.  intra,  within.  22,  secundum,  following,  after,  ac- 

13.  juxta,  next  to.  cording  to. 

14.  ob, /or,  on  account  of.  23.  supra,  above. 

15.  penes,  in  the  power  of  24.  trans,  across,  on  the  other  side. 

16.  per,  through,  by  the  aid  of.  25.  ultra,  beyond. 

17.  pone,  behind.  26.  versus,  towards  (placed  after 

18.  post,  behind,  after,  since.  noun). 

2.  Ten  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  ablative  :  — 

1.  a,  ab,  abs,  from,  after,  by.  6.  e,  ex,  out  of,  from. 

2.  absque,  but,  for,  loithout  (rare       7.  prae,  before,  in  comparison  ivith. 

in  classic  authors),  8.  pro,  before,  for,  instead  of 

3.  coram,  in  presence  of.  9.  sine,  without. 

4.  cum,  with.  10.  tenus,  uj)  to,  as  far  as  (some- 

5.  die,down from, from, concerning.  times  with  genitive), 

3.  The  following  four  prepositions  are  followed  by  the 
accusative  when  motion  to  a  jjlace  is  implied  ;  by  the  ablative 
when  rest  in  a  ]}lace  is  implied  :  — 

in,  denoting  motion  to  a  place,  into  with  accusative ;  rest  in  a 
place,  IN  with  ablative, 

sub,  denoting  motion  to  a  place,  under  with  accusative ;  rest  in  a 
place,  UNDER  with  ablative, 

super,  denoting  motion  to  a  place,  above  with  accusative ;  rest 
in  a  place,  above  with  ablative. 

supter  (subter),  denoting  motion  to  a  place,  under  with  accusa- 
tive ;  rest  in  a  place,  under  with  ablative. 

Obs.  1,  TSnus  (with  abl.),  like  versus  (with  ace),  is  placed  after 
its  case ;  and  cum  is  annexed  to  the  ablative  of  the  personal  and 
relative  pronouns. 

Obs.  2.  A  and  §  are  used  before  consonants ;  ab  and  ex  before 
vowels  and  consonants. 

201.   The  Use  of  Prepositions. 

We  have  learned  (81.  n.  2)  that  a  preposition  with  its  object  is  a 
prepositional  phrase  (or  adjunct).     Such  a  phrase  enables  us  to  ex- 


\ 


PREPOSITIONS.  173 


press  an  idea  more  distinctly :  as,  CcEsar  came  there ;  if  we  substi- 
tute into  Gaul  for  there,  the  sentence  reads  Ccesar  came  into  Gaul, 
expressing  the  thought  with  greater  precision  than  with  the  adverb 
alone.  The  preposition  with  its  object,  into  Gaul,  or  in  Qalliam, 
is  a  phrase  modifying  the  verb. 

The  pupil  should  gradually  commit  the  lists  of  prepositions 
to  memory. 

202.  Dative  with  Verbs  Compounded  with  a  Preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  dux  suis  militibus  adgrat,  the  leader  was  assisting  his  soldiers. 

2.  Caesar  Galliae  praefuit,  Ccesar  ruled  over  Gaid. 

3.  Caesar  interfuit  pugnae,  Ccesar  was  present  in  the  battle. 

Obs.  Verbs  compounded  with  certain  prepositions  govern  the 
dative,  when  they  acquire  a  meaning  from  the  preposition  which 
calls  for  the  dative.  When  the  simple  verb  is  transitive,  the  com- 
pound may  take  both  the  dative  and  the  accusative  :  as,  junggre, 
to  join,  takes  the  accusative  ;  but  adjunggre,  to  join  to,  takes  the 
dative  also ;  when  the  verb  is  intransitive,  it  takes  the  dative  only. 
Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 

DATIVE    VTITH    COMPOUNDS. 

203.  Rule  XXIV.  —  The  dative  of  the  indirect 
object  is  used  with  many  verbs  compounded  with 
adf  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  oh,  post,  pvae,  pro,  suh^  and 
super,  and  sometimes  circum, 

VOCABULARY. 

Aquitlnia,  f.,  Aquitania,  a  province  in  Southern  Gaul. 

Pyrenaei,  -orum,  m.  pl.,  the  Pyrenees. 

pertineo,  pertinere,  pertinui,  sti-etch. 

specto,  spectare,  spectavi,  spectatum,  look  at. 

septentriones,  -onum,  m.,  the  north. 

divido,  dividgre,  divisi,  divisum,  separate,  divide. 

dives,  -itis,  rich. 

inc61o,  -c616re,  -c61uV ,  inhabit,  dwell. 

contendo,  contendere,  contend!,  contentum,  contend,  hasten. 
pervgnio,  pervenire,  pervgni,  perventum,  arrive  at. 


174  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine^  ad  Pyrenaeos  pertmet. 

2.  Apud  Helvetios  nobilissimus  et  ditissimus  fuit  Orgetorix. 

3.  Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  Garumna  flumeu  dividit.  4.  Ger- 
man! trans  Rhenum  incolunt.  5.  Spectat  inter  occasum 
solis  et  septentriones  Aquitania."*  6.  Caesar  hiberms  Labi- 
enum  praeposuit.  7.  Belgae  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis 
Rheni  pertinent.  8.  Caesar  in  Italiam  magnis  itineribus^ 
contendit.  9.  Apud^  Ciceronem  legimus.  10.  Milites 
omnes  in  oppidum  irrumpunt.'' 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Commit  to  memory  tlie  prepositions  that  always  require  the 
ahlative. 

2.  No  participial  stem, 

.3,  How  is  flumine  parsed  ? 

4.  Subject  of  spectat. 

5.  Why  ablative  ? 

G.  Apud  is  used  with  names  of  authors  (instead  of  in,  with  the  name 
of  the  work).     Translate,  we  read  in  Cicero. 

7.  Most  of  the  prepositions  enumerated  above  are  often  used  as  pre- 
fixes in  composition  with  verbs,  and  modify  their  meaning :  as,  pon6re, 
to  place;  post-ponSre,  to  place  after.  A  few  prepositions  are  never 
used  alone,  but  always  occur  in  composition :  — 

amb-,  round,  about;  as,  ambire,  to  walk  around. 

con-,  together ;  as,  conjungSre,  to  join  together. 

dl-,  dis-,  asunder ;  as,  disc§dSre,  to  depart. 

in-,  with  adjectives  and  verbs,  means  not,  un-;   as  indoctUB, 

unlearned ;  i-gnosco  not  to  know. 
r6-  or  red-,  back,  again ;  as,  rSfic6re,  to  make  again,  rejit. 
se-,  aside ;  as  seducSre,  to  lead  astray. 
ve-,  7iot  (serves  to  negative  the  positive  idea  in  the  word  with 

whicli  it  is  compounded,  or  intensifies  it) ;  vSgrandis,  not  large. 

When  do  in  and  sub  require  the  accusative  ?  How  does  the  use  of 
a  differ  from  ab  ?  When  is  to  the  sign  of  the  dative  ?  When  must  it 
be  translated  by  ad  1 


CLASSES   OF   CONJUNCTIONS.  175 

LESSON   LIX. 

CLASSES    OP   CONJUNCTIONS. 

204.  Conjunctions  connect  words,  phrases,  or  clauses ; 
they  are  divided  into  two  general  classes,  Coordinate  and 
Subordinate. 

1.  Coordinate  Conjunctions  connect  words,  phrases,  or 
clauses  of  the  same  rank. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  luna  et  stella  fulgSbant,  the  moon  and  the  stars  were  shining. 

2.  pugri  student  et  paellae  ludunt,  the  hoys  study  and  the  girls 

play. 

3.  pugri  puellaeque  ludunt,  the  hoys  and  the  girls  are  playing. 

4.  milites  atque  impgrator,  the  soldiers  and  the  commander  too. 

I.    Coordinate  Conjunctions, 

205.  The  Coordinate  Conjunctions  comprise  — 

1.  Copulative  Conjunctions,  denoting  union:  as,  et,  and ;  -que 
(enclitic),  and;  atque,  ajid ;  ac,  and ;  et  .  .  .  et,  hoth  .  .  .  ayid ;  nee, 
neque,  and  not ;  neque  .  . .  neque,  nee  . .  .  nee,  neither  .  .  .  nor. 

EXAMPLE. 

His  father  is  dead,  and  his  friends  have  deserted  him. 

2.  Disjunctive  Conjunctions,  denoting  separation:  as,  aut,  vel,  or; 
aut .  .  .  aut,  vel  .  .  .  vel,  either  .  .  .  or. 

EXAMPLE. 

Either  his  father  is  dead  or  his  friends  have  deserted  him. 

3.  Adversative  Conjunctions,  denoting  opposition:  as,  sed, 
autem,  verum,  vero,  hut ;  at,  but,  on  the  contrary. 

EXAMPLE. 

His  father  has  abandoned  him,  but  his  fiends  have  not. 

4.  Illative  (inferential  or  conclusive)  Conjunctions,  denoting 
inference:  as,  ergo,  igitur,  itSque,  therefore. 

EXAMPLE. 

His  father  has  abandoned  him,  therefore  his  friends  will. 


176  FIRST  STEPS    IK   LATIN. 

5.  Causal  Conjunctions,  denoting  cause:  as,  nam,  namque, 
gnim,  gtgnim,  for. 

EXAMPLE. 

His  friends  will  abandon  him,  for  his  father  has  done  so. 

II.    Suhordinate  Conjunctions,       v 

Obs.  a  subordinate  clause  is  so  united  to  another  clause  (or 
clauses)  as  to  be  dej)endent  on  it ;  as,  the  messenger  departed  -when 
he  was  sent.  Here  the  messenger  departed  is  the  principal,  or- lead- 
ing clause ;  2vhen  he  icas  sent  modifies  departed,  and  is  the  subordi- 
nate clause.  Dependent  clauses  perform  the  office  of  a  noun,  an 
adjective,  or  an  adverb,  and  hence  are  called  noun,  adjective,  or 
adverb  clauses;  they  are  often  named  from  the  subordinate  con- 
junctions by  which  they  are  introduced.     (See  317.) 

206.  The  Subordinate  Conjunctions  comprise  — 

1.  Temporal,  denoting  time;  as,  cum,  ivhen. 

2.  Comparative,  denoting  comparison ;  as,  quam,  v61ut,  as,  Just  as. 

3.  Conditional,  denoting  condition ;  as,  si,  if. 

4.  Concessive,  denoting  concession;  as,  licet,  although. 

5.  Final,  denoting  purpose  or  end ;  as,  ut,  ne,  that,  that  not. 

6.  Consecutive,  denoting*  consequence  or  result;  as,  quin,  so  that 
not;  ut,  so  that. 

7.  Causal,  denoting  cause ;  as,  quid,  quod,  quSniam,  because. 

8.  Interrogative,  used  in  asking  questions :  as,  -ne  (enclitic),  nonne, 
num,  whether ;  an,  or ;  anndn,  or  not. 

Obs.  1.  Of  the  three  words  meaning  and  — 

a.  et  connects  independent  words  and  clauses,  as  in  Exs.  1,  2. 

b.  -que  (enclitic)  connects  words  or  clauses  that  are  to  be  con- 

sidered togetlier,  or  as  a  whole,  as  in  Ex.  3. 

c.  atque  (ad,  in  addition  to,  and  que,  and),  and  also,  indicates 

that  the  second  word  is  more  important  than  the  first, 
as  in  Ex.  4. 

Obs.  2.  Most  of  the  causal  conjunctions  are  subordinate. 

207.  Model  for  Parsing  a  Conjunction :  — 

In  Ex.  1  et  is  a  coordinate  conjunction,  and  connects  the  com- 
pound subject  luna  and  stella.     Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 

208.  Rule  XXV.  —  Conjunctions  connect  words, 
phrases,  clauses,  and  sentences. 


GENITIVES   IK   -lUS. 


177 


EXERCISES. 
Parse  tlie  conjunctions  in  the  following  sentences  :  — 
1.    Neque    pater  neque   filius  virnm   laudat.       2.    Hostes 
Italiam    longe    lateque    vastaverant.       3.    LTberi   erant  non 
magni,  sed  bonl  piilclirique.      4.    Homines  sunt  aut  felices 
aut  infelices. 


LESSON   LX. 

GENITIVES    IN    -ius. 

IMPERATIVE    MODE,    ACTIVE    VOICE. 

209.  Nine  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions 
have  their  genitive  singular  in  -ms,  and  dative  in  -z,  in  all 
genders.     Tiiese  adjectives  are  :  — 

alius,  other.  totus,  loliole.         alter,  other  (of  two). 

nullus,  7ione.         iillus,  any.  neuter,  neither. 

solus,  alone.  unus,  one.  titer,  which  (of  two). 

1 .  The  plural  of  these  adjectives  is  declined  like  the  plural 
of  bSnus.     The  singular  is  thus  declined  :  — 

PARADIGMS. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

Masc 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

unjis 

una 

unum 

liter 

utra 

utrum 

Gex. 

unius 

unius 

unius 

utrius 

utrius 

utrius 

DAT. 

uni 

uni 

uni 

utri 

utri 

utri 

Acc. 

unum 

iinam 

unum 

utrum 

utram 

utrum 

Voc. 

Abl. 

uno 

iina 

iino 

utro 

utra 

utro 

NOM. 

alius 

alia 

aliud 

alter 

altera 

alterum 

Gex. 

alius 

alius 

alius 

alterius 

alterius 

alterius 

Dat. 

alii 

alii 

alii 

alteri 

alteri 

alteri 

Acc. 

alium 

aliam 

aliud 

alterum 

alteram 

alterum 

Voc. 

Abl. 

alio 

alia 

alio 

altero 

altera 

altero 

178 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


210.  The  Imperative  Mode  has  two  tenses,  the  Present 
and  the  Future. 

1.  The  Present  Imperative  has  only  the  second  nerson. 

2.  The  Future  Imperative  has  the  second  and  third  persons. 

3.  The  first  person  of  the  Imper.  is  supplied  by  the  Subjunctive. 

4.  The  Negative  of  the  Imperative  is  ne. 

211.  The  Present  and  Future  Imperative  Active  of  the 
Four  Conjugations  is  inflected  as  follows  :  — 


First  Coxjugatiox. 

1 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Pliir.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem 

ama 

Love  thou. 

Love  ye. 

Pres.  stem  +  te 

amate 

0 
13 

Siny.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  to 
«     +to 

amato 
amato 

Thou  shalt  loi'^e. 
He  shall  love. 

Pres.  stem  +  tote 
"     +  nto 

amatote 
amanto 

Ye  shall  love. 
They  shall  love. 

Second  Conjugation. 

.^:^r.  1 

i 

2 
3 
Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem 

mone 

Advise  thou. 

Pres.  stem  +  te 

monete 

Advise  ye. 

u 

p 

1 

Siny.  1 

2 

o 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  to 
"     +  to 

moneto 
moneto 

Thou  shah  advise. 
He  shall  advise. 

Pres.  stem  +  tote 
"     4-  nto 

monetote 
monento 

Ye  shall  advise. 
They  shall  advise. 

IMPERATIVE   ACTIVE. 


179 


Third  Conjugation. 

a 

1 

Person. 

Formation. 

Kxample. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem 

rege 

Jin/a  thou. 

Rule  yc. 

Pres.  stem  +  te 

regite 

4J 

"S 

AS'iM/7.   1 

2 
3 

P/ur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  to 
"     +  to 

regito 
regito 

TJiou  shall  rule. 
lie  shall  rule. 

Pres.  stem  +  tote 
"     +  nto 

regitote 
regunto 

Ye  shall  rule. 
Tlieji  shall  rule. 

Fourth  Conjugation. 

*S'//i(/.  1 
2 

o 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem 

audi 

Hear  thou. 

Pres.  stem  +  te 

audite 

Hear  ye. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

P/wr.  1 
2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  to 
"      +  to 

audito 
audito 

TJiou  sJialt  hear. 
He  shall  hear. 

Pres.  stem  +  tote 
"         "     +  nto 

auditote 
audiunto 

Ye  shall  hear. 
The]]  shall  Jicar. 

Obs.  1.  Note  that  the  personal  endings  are  the  same  for  all  four 
conjugations.  The  characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  is  the  same  as 
in  the  infinitive  active,  i.e.,  a,  e,  e,  i  (but  in  the  third  conjugation 
the  e  changes  to  t,  and  in  the  future  third  person  plural  to  u). 
Note  the  future  third  person  plural  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

Obs.  2.  Four  verbs,  dico,  diico,  facio,  fero,  with  their  com- 
pounds, drop  the  final  vowel  of  the  imperative ;  as,  die,  due,  fae, 
f6r.     But  compounds  in  -ftcio  retain  the  final  e  ;  as,  conf lee. 

Obs.  3.  For  the  first  person  of  the  imperative,  see  p.  241;  for 
the  expression  of  a  negative  command  (i.e.,  a  prohibition),  see 
278.  2. 


180  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

EXERCISES.  / 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Lauda,  exerce,  scribe,  obedi.  2.  Laudate,  exercete, 
scribite,  obedite.  3.  Disce,  puer.  4.  Tacete,  pneri.^  5.  Mili- 
tes  in  unum  locum  veniunto.  G.  Miles  ex  altera  parte  urbis 
venito.     7.   Spes  tota  Romanos  deserit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Praise  thou,  exercise  thou,  write  thou,  obe}'  thou. 
2.  Praise  ye,  exercise  ye,  write  ye,  obey  ye.  3.  Call  the 
boy.  4.  Learn,  boys.^  5.  Call  ye,  punish  ye,  advise  ye, 
rule  ye.  6.  The  soldiers  of  both  armies  are  brave.  7.  They 
come  to  one  place.     8.  Which  (of  the  two)  does  he  praise? 

NOTES     AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Case  and  rule. 

IIow  many  modes  ^  Define  each.  Does  the  use  of  the  Latin  impera- 
tive differ  from  the  same  mode  in  Enghsli  ?  How  many  persons  has 
the  imperative  ?     How  is  the  first  person  supplied  '^ 


LESSON    LXL 

NUMEEALS. 

ACCUSATIVE    OF    TIME    AND    SPACE.- ABLATIVE    OF 
DIFFERENCE. 

212.    Numeral   adjectives   express  numher ;    they  are 
divided  into  three  principal  classes :  — 

1.  Cardixals,  which  answer  the  question  Iwio  many :  as,  unus, 

one.  ;  tres,  three. 

2.  Ordinals,  which  express  rank  or  order ;  they  answer  the  ques- 

tion u'hich  in  order,  or  one  ofhoiv  many:  as,  primus,  j^rs^ 

3.  DiSTRiBUTiA^ES,  whicli  answer  the  question  lioio  many  to  each, 

or  how  many  at  a  lime :    as,  bini,  two  each,  or  two  hy  two  ; 
bis  bina  mala,  twice  tivo  apples. 

4.  Numeral  adverbs  answer  the  question  hon^  often  :  as,  bis,  twice. 


NUMERALS. 


181 


213.    The  Cardinal  Numbers  are  indeclinable,  except 
unus,  one^    duo,  two^    tres,  three^    and  the  hundreds   be- 


gnmir 


ler  wi 


th  dticenti,  two  liundred.     The  hundreds  are 


declined  like  the  plural  of  bSnus;    and  the  first  three 
cardinals  are  declined  as  follows :  — 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

Masc.           Fem. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

unus 

una 

unum 

uni           unae 

una 

Gen. 

unius 

unius 

unius 

unorum    unarum    un5rum  | 

DAT. 

uni 

uni 

uni 

unis          unis 

unis 

Ace. 

unum 

unam 

unum 

unos         Unas 

una 

Voc. 

une 

una 

unum 

uni            unae 

una 

Al?L. 

uno 

una 

uno 

Tims          unis 

unis 

duo,  two. 

tres,  three. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

Masc.  &  Fem. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

duo 

duae 

duo 

tres 

tria 

Gen. 

duorum 

duarum 

duorum 

trium 

trium 

DAT. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

tribus 

tribus 

Ace. 

duos,  duo  duas 

duo 

tres  or  tris 

tria 

Voc. 

duo 

duae 

duo 

tres 

tria 

Abl. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

tribus 

tribus 

1.  In  the  plural,  unus  often  has  the  meaning  of  same.,  only.  It 
is  also  used  in  its  ordinary  sense  with  a  plural  noun  of  a  singular 
meaning;   as,  una  castra,  one  camp. 

2.  Mille  is  either  an  Adjective  or  a  ISToun  :  — 

a.  As  an  Adjective  it  is  indeclinable,  and  limits  the  noun ;  as, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  mille  hSmines,  a  tJwusand  men. 

2.  cum  bis  mille  h6minibus,  ivith  two  thousand  men. 

b.  As  a  noun  it  is  indeclinable  in  the  singular;  in  the  plural  it 
is  declined  like  the  plural  of  mare  (110)  :  milia,  milium,  milibus, 
mHia,  milibus.  It  is  followed  by  the  genitive,  unless  a  declined 
numeral  comes  between,  as  in  Ex.  3 ;  as, 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  mille  hSminum,  a  thousand  men  (lit.,  of  men). 

2.  tria  milia  h6minum,  three  thousand  men  (lit.,  of  men). 

3.  tria  milia  trScenti  militgs,  three  thousand  three  hundred  soldiers. 


182  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

. / . 

Obs.  1.  The  numbers  between  20  and  100  are  expressed  either 
by  the  larger  numeral  first  without  et,  or  by  the  smaller  numeral 
first  with  et ;  as,  viginti  unus,  ticenty-one,  or  unus  et  viginti,  one 
and  twenty.  The  numbers  above  100  always  have  the  larger  number 
first;  as,  centum  et  sexaginta  sex,  or  centum  sexaginta  sex, 
one  hundred  and  sixty-six. 

Obs.  2.  The  numerals  18,  19,  28,  29,  38,  39  have  the  smaller 
numeral  first,  with  the  preposition  de  to  indicate  subtraction ;  as, 
duSdeviginti,  undeviginti,  du6detriginta,  etc. 

3.  Distributive  numerals  are  sometimes  used  to  show  a  plural 
signification  in  those  nouns,  the  plural  forms  of  which  liave  other- 
wise a  singular  meaning;  as,  bina  castra,  two  c.amj)s :  binae 
aedgs,  two  houses ;  binae  littSrae,  two  epistles.  Duo  castra  would 
mean  two  forts:  duae  aedes,  two  temples;  duae  littgrae,  two  letters 
(of  the  alphabet) . 

Obs.  3.  The  year  is  expressed  by  annus  with  the  ordinal 
numerals ;  as,  annus  millesimus  octingentesimus  octogesimus 
quintus,  tJie  year  1885. 

Obs.  4.  Prior  is  used  instead  of  primus  when  only  two  things 
are  spoken  of ;  alter  is  often  used  for  sgcundus. 

214.  Accusative  of  Time  and  Space. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Romiilus    septem    et   triginta   rggnavit    annos,   Romulus 

reigned  thirty-seven  years. 

2.  fossa  p6des  trScentos  longa  est,  sex  pgdSs  alta,  the  ditch 

is  three  hundred  feet  lony,  six  feet  deep. 

3.  castra  ab  urbe  milia  passuum  octo  absunt,  the  camp  is 

eight  miles  distant  from  the  city. 

Obs.  Note  that  annos,  in  Ex.  1,  expresses  duration  of  time ;  that 
p§des  and  milia,  in  Exs.  2  and  3,  denote  the  extent  of  space,  and 
are  also  in  the  accusative.  The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following 
rule :  — 

ACCUSATIVE    OF    TIME    AND    SPACE. 

215.  Rule  XXVI.  —  Duration  of  time  and  extent 
of  space  are  expressed  by  the  accusative. 

1.  Distance  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the  ablative.  (See 
Ablative  of  Difference,  302.) 

EXAMPLE. 

milibus  passuum   sex  a   Caes^ris   castiis   consedit,  he  en- 
camped AT  THE  DISTANCE  of  SIX.  MILES /rom  CcBsar's  camp. 


NUMERALS.  183 


2.  Duration  of  time  may  be  expressed  by  per  with  the 
accusative,  and  sometimes,  though  rarely,  by  the  ablative. 

EXAMPLKS. 

1,  ludi  dScem  per  dies  facti,  the  games  were  celebrated  tiikougii 

ten  entire  days. 

2.  pugnatum  est  continenter  horis  quinque,  they  fought  for 

five  hours  incessantly. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Amicus  mens  habet  duos  filios  et  duas  filias.  2.  Oppi- 
dum  Remorum  ab  castris  octo  milia  passuum  aberat.  3.  Mons 
decem  milia  trecentos  pedes  altus  est.  4.  Erant  itinera 
duo  ;  unum  per  Sequanos  ;  alterum  per  provinciam  nostram. 

5.  Milia  passuum  tria  ab  urbe  castra  posuit.  6.  Quot  lioras 
habet  unus  dies?  Quattuor  et  viginti.  7.  Milibus  passuum 
sex  a  Caesaris  castris  consedit.  8.  Decem  annos  urbs  op- 
pugnata  est. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  boy  has  six  books.  2.  The  men  have  ten  apples. 
3.  Caesar  will  come  with  ten  vessels.  4.  Caesar  leads  out 
five  legions  from  Italy.      5.  The  town  is  six  miles  distant. 

6.  The  river  is  sixteen  feet  deep.  7.  The  river  is  twenty- 
two  feet  deep.  8.  The  mountain  is  four  thousand  feet  high. 
9.  Three  gifts,  seven  hostages,  five  kings,  a  thousand 
soldiers,  eleven  friends,  ten  towns.  10.  The  first  friend,  the 
second  town,  the  third  king,  the  ninth  queen,  the  tenth 
enemy.  11.  They  fought  five  hours.  12.  He  lived  sixty 
years. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  pupil  should  learn  the  declension  of  unus,  duo,  and  tres, 
and  memorize  the  cardinals  to  one  hundred,  and  the  ordinals  to  twenty. 

2.  The  adjectives  longus,  latus,  and  altus  usually  accompany  the 
accusative  of  space. 

What  is  a  cardinal  number  1  Decline  unus.  Is  unus  ever  used  in 
the  plural  1  Mention  the  ordinal  numbers  from  first  to  twentieth. 
Decline  duo. 


184 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


TABL,E     OF    NUMERALS.i 


Arabic 

Roman 

Symbols. 

Symbols. 

Cardinals. 

Ordinals. 

1 

I. 

unus,  -a,  -um,  one. 

primus,  first. 

2 

II. 

duo,  -ae,  -o,  tvjo. 

secundus,  second. 

3 

III. 

tres,  tria,  th7'ee. 

tertius,  third. 

4 

IV. 

quattuor,  four. 

qunvtuH,  foiirth. 

5 

V. 

quTnque,  "  etc. 

qulntus,  fifth,  etc. 

6 

VI. 

sex 

sextus 

7 

VII. 

septem 

Septimus 

8 

VIII. 

{     octo 

octavus 

9 

IX. 

novem 

nouus 

10 

X. 

decern 

decimus 

11 

XI. 

niidecim 

undecimus 

12 

XII. 

duodeeim 

duodecimus 

13 

XIII. 

tredecim 

tertius  decimus 

14 

XIV. 

quattiiordecim 

quartus  decimus 

15 

XV. 

quTndecim 

qulntus  decimus 

16 

XVI. 

sedecim 

sextus  decimus 

17 

XVII. 

septendecim 

Septimus  decimus 

18 

XVIII. 

dnodevTginti 

duodevTccsimiis 

19 

XIX. 

undeviginti 

undevicesimus 

20 

XX. 

vTginti 

vTcesimus 

21 

XXI. 

/  unus  et  vTginti 
\  or  viiiintT  unus 

primus  et  vTcesimus 
or  vTcesimus  prTmus 

28 

XXVIII. 

duodetrlginta 

duodetrTcesiinus 

29 

XXIX. 

undetrigintfi 

undetrTcesiraus 

30 

XXX. 

trlgintfi 

trTcesimus 

40 

XL. 

quadraginta 

quadrfigcsimus 

50 

L. 

quinqufiginta 

qulnquagesimus 

60 

LX. 

sexagintii 

sexilgesimus 

70 

LXX. 

septuaginta 

septuagesimus 

80 

LXXX. 

octoginta 

octogcsimus 

90 

XC. 

nonagiuta 

nonagesimus 

100 

c. 

centum 

ccntesimus 

101 

CI. 

/  centum  unus 
\  centum  et  unus 

centesimus  primus 

ccntesimus  et  prTmus 

200 

cc. 

ducenti,  -ae,  -a 

ducentesimus 

300 

ccc. 

trecenti,  -ae,  -a 

trecentesimus 

400 

cccc. 

quadringentl,  -ae,  -a 

quadringentesimus 

500 

D.  or  10. 

quiugenti,  -ae,  -a 

quTugeutesimus 

600 

DC. 

sescent!,  -ae,  -a 

sescentesimus 

700 

DCC. 

septingenti,  -ae,  -a 

septingentesimus 

800 

DCCC. 

octingentT,  -ae,  -a 

octingentesimus 

900 

DCCCC. 

nongenti,  -ae,  -a 

ndngeutesimus 

1000 

M.  OJ'  CIO. 

mille 

mTllesimus 

2000 

MM. 

duo  milia  (millia) 

bis  mTllesimus 

5000 

100. 

quiuque  milia 

quinquies  mTllesimus 

10,000 

CCIOO. 

decern  milia 

decies  mTllesimus 

100,000 

CCCIOOO. 

centum  milia 

centies  mTllesimus 

NUMERALS. 


185 


TABLE    OF    NUMERALS.  —  Continued. 


Arabic 

Roman 

Symbols. 

Symbols. 

Distributives. 

Numeral  Adverbs. 

1 

I. 

singulT,  one  a  piece. 

semel,  once. 

2 

11. 

binl,  two  a  piece,  etc. 

bis,  twice,  etc. 

3 

III. 

terni  or  tiiui 

ter 

4 

IV. 

quaterni 

quater 

5 

V. 

quiiiT 

quinquics 

6 

YI. 

80111 

sexies 

7 

VII. 

septeni 

septies 

8 

VIII. 

octoni 

octies 

9 

IX. 

iioveni 

novies 

10 

X. 

cleni 

decies 

11 

XI. 

undenT 

undecies 

12 

XII. 

cluodeui 

duodecies 

13 

XIII. 

term  deni 

terdecies  or  tredecies 

14 

XIV. 

quaterni  deiil 

quattuordecies 

15 

XV. 

quTiiT  deui 

quindccies 

IG 

XVI. 

sen!  deiiT 

sedecies 

17 

XVII. 

septeni  deni 

septiesdecies 

18 

XVIII. 

duodevlceni 

duodcvicies 

19 

XIX. 

iindcviceni 

undevicies 

20 

XX. 

vicenT 

vicies 

21 

XXI. 

/  viceni  singiili 
\  or  viceni  oct5ni 

semel  et  vicies 

or  vicies  et  semel 

28 

XXVIII. 

duodetriceni 

duodetricies 

29 

XXIX. 

undetiiceni 

undetiicies 

30 

XXX. 

triceni 

tricies 

40 

XL. 

quadragem 

quadragies 

50 

L. 

quinquageni 

quTnquagies 

60 

LX. 

sexagcni 

sexagies 

70 

LXX. 

septuageni 

septuagies 

80 

LXXX. 

octogeni 

octogics 

90 

xc. 

nonageni 

nonagies 

100 

c. 

centeni 

centies 

101 

CI. 

/  centeul  singuli 
\  centeni  et  singuli 

centies  semel 

200 

cc. 

duceni 

ducenties 

300 

ccc. 

treccul 

trecenties 

400 

cccc. 

quadringeul 

quadringenties 

500 

D.  orio. 

quiugeni 

qulngeutics 

600 

DC 

sesceni 

sescenties 

700 

DCC. 

septingeui 

septingentics 

800 

DCCC. 

octingeni 

octingenties 

900 

DCCCC. 

n5ngeni 

nongenties 

1000 

M.  or  CIO. 

singula  milia 

millies 

2000 

MM. 

bina  milia 

bis  millies 

5000 

100. 

quina  milia 

quinquies  millies 

10,000 

ccioo. 

dena  milia 

decies  millies 

100,000 

ccciooo. 

centena  milia 

centies  millies 

186 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


LESSON   LXII. 
IMPERATIVE  PASSIVE   OF  THE  POUE   OONJUaATIONS. 

THE    PLACE    TO    WHICH. 

216.    The  Imperative  Passive  of  the  Four  Conjugations  is 
inflected  as  follows  :  — 


First  Conjugation. 

4a 

Person. 

Formation. 

£xainple. 

English. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 

3 

Pres.  stem  +  re 

amare 

Be  thou  loved. 

Pres.  stem  +  mini 

amanuni 

Be  7je  lorded. 

t 

Sing.  1 

3 

Plur.  1 

2 

3 

Pres.  stem  +  tor 

''      +  tor 

amator 
amator 

Thou  shall  he  loved. 
He  shall  be  loved. 

Pres.  stem  +  ntor 

amantor 

Theij  shall  he  loved. 

Second  Conjugation. 

AS//?y.  1 
2 
3 

P/m/-.  1 
2 

0 

Pres.  stem  +  re 

monere 

Be  thou  advised. 

Pres.  stem  +  mini 

monemini 

Be  ye  advised. 

t 

5%.  1 
2 

Plur.  1 

2 

Pres.  stem  +  tor 

«      +  tor 

monetor 
monetor 

Thou  shalt  he  advised. 
He  shall  he  advised. 

Pres.  stem  +  ntor 

monentor 

Theg  shall  he  advised. 

IMPERATIVE   PASSIVE. 


187 


Third  Conjugation. 

i 

1 

i 

Person. 

Formation. 

Example. 

Knglish. 

*S?'??,y.  1 
2 
3 

P/»r.  1 
2 
3 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 

2 
3 

Pres.  stem  +  re 

regere 

Be  thou  ruled. 

Pres.  stem  +  mini 

regimini 

Bo  ijp  ruled. 

Pres.  stem  +  tor 
"      +  tor 

regitor 
regitor 

Thou  shalt  he  ruled. 
He  shall  he  ruled. 

Pres.  stem  +  ntor 

reguntor 

They  shall  he  ruled. 

Fourth  Conjugation. 

s 

*Snir/.  1 

2 

3 

P/ur.  1 

i) 

o 
o 

Pres.  stem  +  re 

audire 

Be  thou  heard. 

Pres.  stem  +  mini 

audimini 

Be  ye  heard. 

/S/nr/.  1 
2 
o 

P/«r.  1 

2 

3 

Pres.  stem  +  tor 
"      +  tor 

auditor 
auditor 

Hum  shalt  be  heard. 
He  shall  he  heard. 

Pres.  stem  +  ntor 

audiuntor 

They  shall  he  heard. 

Obs.  Xote  that  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  is  variable 
in  the  third  conjugation,  weakened  to  i  and  then  to  w;  the  stem  of 
the  third  person  plural  future  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  is  audiu-. 

217.    The  Place  to  Which. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  in  Galliam  venit,  he  came  into  Gaul. 

2.  in  Italiam  contendit,  he  hastens  into  Italy. 

3.  ad  urbem.  venit,  he  came  to  the  city. 

4.  Romam  prSfectus  est,  he  set  out  for  Rome. 

5.  C6rinthum  pervenit,  he  came  to  Corinth. 
G.  puer  dSmum  ibat,  the  hoy  was  going  home. 
7.  rus  ibo,  /  will  go  to  the  country. 


188  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  in  1,  2,  3,  the  names 
of  the  places  to  which  the  motion  is  directed  are  not  the  names  of 
towns ;  in  each  case  the  preposition  is  expressed.  In  Exs.  4,  5,  the 
nouns  denoting  the  place  to  wliich  the  motion  is  directed  are  names 
of  tow7is :  the  accusative  is  used  without  a  preposition.  Note, 
further,  that  d6mum,  d6m6s,  and  rus,  like  names  of  towns,  have 
no  preposition.     The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

THE  NAME  OF  THE  PLACE  TO  WHICH. 

218.  Rule  XXVII.  —  The  name  of  the  place 
whither,  or  to  which^  regularly  requires  the  preposi- 
tion in  or  ad, 

1.  But  with  names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  and  with 
ddmum,  ddmos,  and  rus,  the  preposition  is  omitted. 

VOCABITI.AKY. 

ediico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  educate. 
strenug  (adv.),  briskly,  vigorously. 
Britannia,  -ae,  f.,  Britain. 
attingo,  -tinggre,  -tigi,  tactum,  touch,  reach. 
institutum,  -T,  x.  custom;  PL.  institutions. 
ggro,  ggrere,  gessi,  gestum,  hear,  carry  on. 

vergo,  verggre, , ,  turn,  lie  toward. 

persuadeo,  -suadere,  -suasT,  -suasum,  convince,  persuade. 
fScile,  fScilius,  fScilissime,  easily. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  nito  English  :  — 

1.  Puer,  bene  edueare.  2.  Puer,  stremie  exercere. 
3.  Puer,  probe  excolere.  4.  Puer,  diligenter  erudire. 
5.  Puer,  bene  educator,  strenue  exercetor,  probe  excolitor, 
diligenter  eruditor.  G.  In  fines  Vocontiorum  die  septimo 
pervenit.  7.  Hora  quarta  Britanniam  attigit.  8.  Nocte  ad 
Caesarem  pervenerunt.  9.  In  Gallia  ulteriore  multos^  annos 
manebimus.  10.  Proximo  die  Caesar  e  castiis  copias 
suas  eduxit.  11.  Consul  Athenas  profectus  est.  12.  Caesar 
Miletum  properavit.  13.  Multi  ex  urbe  rus  migrabant. 
14.    Sero  domum  venisti. 


CLASSIFICATION   OF    SENTENCES.  189 


NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

The  quantity  of  long  final  syllables  has  hitherto  been  marked ;  the 
pupil  should  be  taught  to  account  for  the  quantity  of  all  final  syllables. 

Define  the  imperative.  How  many  tenses  has  the  imperative  1  Are 
the  personal  endings  the  same  for  all  four  conjugations  ?  After  verbs 
of  motion,  how  is  the  place  to  which  expressed  ?  With  names  of  towns, 
how  is  the  place  to  which  expressed  1  What  other  words  omit  the 
preposition  ? 

LESSON    LXIII. 

CLASSIFICATION  OP  SENTENCES. -ANALYSIS  OF  SIMPLE 
SENTENCES. 

219.  Sentences  may  be  classified,  with  respect  to 
their  meaning,  as:  — 

1.  Simple,         2.  Complex.         3.  Compound. 

220.  A  Simple  Sentence  contains  but  one  subject  and 
one  predicate,  either  of  which  may  be  compound. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Messengers  come. 

2.  The  swift  messengers  come  quickly. 

3.  The  hoys  and  girls  laugh  and  play. 

Obs.  Messenger  is  the  subject  of  the  first  sentence,  and  come  is 
the  predicate.  In  Ex.  2  the  and  sivift  modify  messengers,  and  are 
called  the  Modifiers  of  the  Subject.  The  sivift  messengers  is  the 
modified,  or  logical  subject ;  come  quickly  is  the  modified,  or  logical 
predicate.  The  third  sentence  has  a  compound  subject,  hoys  and 
girls,  connected  by  the  coordinate  copulative  conjunction  and,  and 
a  compound  predicate. 

221.  A  Complex  Sentence  is  composed  of  one  inde- 
pendent clause  in  combination  with  one  or  more  de- 
pendent clauses. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  The  general,  ivho  is  cautious,  will  succeed. 

2.  When  the  rain  descended,  the  floods  came. 

Obs.  The  first  sentence  contains  two  parts :  the  general  loill 
succeed,  and  who  is  cautious.  Each  part  contains  a  subject  and 
predicate,  and  is  called  a  clause ;  hence  the  definition  :  — 


190  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

222.  A  clause  is  a  part  of  a  sentence  containing  a 
subject  and  predicate. 

Obs.  The  clause,  luho  is  cautious,  really  performs  the  office  of  an 
adjective,  as  we  may  use  in  place  of  it  simply  the  word  cautious, 
and  say  the  cautious  general  ivill  succeed.  The  adjective  clause, 
who  is  cautious,  performing  the  office  of  a  single  word,  is  called  a 
Dependent  Clause  ;  the  other  clause,  the  general  will  succeed,  not 
performing  the  office  of  a  single  word,  is  called  an  Independent 
Clause.  The  two  clauses,  connected  by  who,  are  so  combined  that 
one  modifies  the  other;  they  form  in  combination  a  Complex 
Sentence.  In  the  second  sentence,  the  Jloods  came  is  the  indepen- 
dent clause,  modified  by  the  clause  ivhen  the  rain  descended,  i.e.  by 
a  clause  telling  ivhen  the  floods  came ;  and  as  this  clause  performs 
the  office  of  a  single  word,  an  adverb,  the  two  clauses  in  combina- 
tion form  a  Complex  Sentence. 

223.  A  Compound  Sentence  is  composed  of  two  or 
more  independent  clauses. 

EXAMPLE. 

The  rain  descended,  and  the  Jloods  came. 

Obs.  This  sentence  consists  of  two  parts,  the  rain  descended  and 
the  Jloods  came,  each  of  which  is  independent,  and  makes  complete 
sense  by  itself.  The  sentence  is  Compound,  because  it  consists  of 
two  independent  clauses. 


SIMPLE    SENTENCES    CLASSIFIED. 

224.   Simple  sentences  may  ])e  Declarative.  Interrogative, 
Imperative,  or  Exclamatory. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Ccesar  was  stabled.  3.  Love  justice,  and  hate  evil. 

2.  Was  Ccesar  stabbed  by  Brutus  ?     4.  What  a  cruel  deed  he  has  done! 


Modifiers, 

225.    The  Subject  or  the  Predicate  may  be  modified  by 
(1)  a  word,   (2)  a  phrase,   (3)  a  clause. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  mllites  fortes,  bi-ave  .soldiers. 

2.  oppida  sine  praesidio,  toivns  tvithout  garrisons. 

3.  rex  Albanorum,  the  king  oj the  Albans. 

4.  puer,  qui  legit,  the  boy,  icho  reads. 


CLASSIFICATION   OF   SENTENCES.  191 

226.  A  Phrase  is  a  group  of  words,  without  a  subject  or 
predicate,  used  in  the  sense  of  an  adjective  or  an  adverb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  A  largp.  army  crime  there. 

2.  An  army  of  sixty  thousand  men  came  to  Rome. 

Obs.  In  the  first  sentence,  the  adjective  large  modifies  army, 
and  the  adverb  there  modifies  came.  If  we  wish  to  express  the 
thought  with  greater  distinctness,  we  should  use  the  second  sent- 
ence, in  which  the  groups  of  words,  of  sixty  thousand  men  and  to 
Rome,  liave  been  substituted,  the  one  for  the  adjective  large,  and 
the  other  for  the  adverb  there.  These  groups  of  words  we  call 
Phrases. 

227.  Directions  for  Analyzing  Sentences  :  — 

Tell  (1)  whether  the  sentence  is  simple,  complex,  or  compound. 
If  the  sentence  is  Simple,  tell  (2)  whether  it  is  declarative,  inter- 
rogative, imperative,  or  exclamatory ;  (3)  mention  the  subject  and  its 
modifiers,  (4)  the  predicate  and  its  modifiers.  If  the  sentence  is 
Complex,  analyze  each  clause  like  a  simple  sentence;  name  the 
connective,  and  tell  whether  the  subordinate  or  dependent  clause 
stands  for  an  adjective,  an  adverb,  or  a  noun,  i.e.,  whether  it  is  an 
Adjective,  Adverbial,  or  Noun  Clause.  If  the  sentence  is  Com- 
pound, analyze  each  clause  as  a  simple  sentence,  name  the  connec- 
tive, and  the  class  of  conjunctions  to  which  it  belongs. 

EXERCISES. 

Classify  the  following  sentences ;  name  the  clauses ; 
analyze  each,  and  mention  the  modifiers  :  — 

1.  The  bridge  spans  the  river.  2.  The  great  iron  bridge 
spans  the  broad  river.  3.  The  great  iron  bridge,  built  by  a 
skilful  engineer,  spans  the  broad  river. ^  4.  Great  men  are 
rare.  5.  The  man  dies,  but  his  memory  lives.  6.  How  won- 
derful is  the  advent  of  spring  !  7.  Are  there  any  accidents 
in  the  providence  of  God?  8.  Thank  you,  sir.  9.  Has  the 
gentleman  finished?  10.  While  Louis  XIV.  reigned,  Europe 
was  at  war.  11.  Great  men  lived  during  the  Revolution. 
12.  Franklin,  who  was  a  great  philosopher,  was  born  in 
Boston.      13.  Hamilton  smote  the  rock  of  the  national  re- 


192  FIRST  STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

sources,  and  abundant  streams  of  revenue  gushed  forth. 
14.  There ^  is  a  pleasure  in  the  pathless  woods.  15.  The 
soldiers  were  brave. ^ 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Expand  this  sentence  into  a  compound  sentence. 

2.  There  is  used  as  an  introductory  word,  to  fill  out  the  sentence, 
and  is,  therefore,  called  an  expletive  (Lat.  explere,  to  Jill  out). 

3.  Is  this  adjective  attributive  or  predicate  ? 

What  is  a  sentence  1  Classify  sentences.  Write  a  simple  sentence. 
Expand  it  to  a  complex,  then  to  a  compound  sentence.  Of  what  is  a 
complex  sentence  composed  ?  What  is  a  clause  ?  What  is  a  depen- 
dent clause  ?  (Ans.  A  dependent  clause  is  one  used  as  a  noun,  an 
adjective,  or  an  adverb.)  Mention  the  modifiers  of  the  subject ;  of  the 
predicate.  , 


LESSON    LXIV. 

PEONOU!fS. 

Obs.  Charles  went  to  Rome  with  his  mother,  and  he  came  hack 
without  her.  In  this  sentence  we  use  three  little  words  called 
Pronouns  ;  they  are  his,  he,  and  her.  If  we  had  not  these  words,  we 
would  be  compelled  to  say  :  *'  Charles  went  to  Rome  with  Charles's 
mother,  and  Charles  came  back  without  Charles's  mother."  The 
pronouns  take  the  place  of  the  nouns,  and  hence  the  definition  :  — 

228.  A  Pronoun  is  a  word  used  for  a  noun.  Pronouns 
are  divided  into  eight  classes :  — 

1.  Personal  Pronouns:  6go,  /;  nos,  ice,  etc. 

2.  Reflexive  Pronouns  :  svH,  of  himself . 

3.  Possessive  Pronouns  :  meus,  my,  etc. 

4.  Demonstrative  Pronouns  :  hie,  this,  etc. 

5.  Determinative  Pronouns:  is,  he,  that:  ipse,  self,  etc. 

6.  Relative  Pronouns :  qui,  who,  and  its  compounds. 

7.  Interrogative  Pronouns  :  quis,  who  ?  and  its  compounds. 

8.  Indefinite  Pronouns :  Sliquis,  some  one,  etc. 


PRONOUNS. 


193 


PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

229.  The  Personal  Pronouns  are  so  called  because 
they  designate  the  person  of  the  noun  for  which  they 
stand.  They  are  ggo,  J,  tu,  thou,  and  are  declined  as 
follows :  — 

I.  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  First  Person. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

ego,  /. 

nos,  tve. 

Gen. 

mei,  of  me. 

ndstrum  and  nostri,  of  us. 

Dat. 

mihi,  to  or  for  me. 

nobis,  to  or  for  us. 

Ace. 

me,  me. 

nos,  us. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

me,  with,  from,  or  hy  me. 

nobis,  with,  from,  or  hy  us. 

II.  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  Second  Person. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NOM. 

tu,  thou. 

vos,  ye  or  you. 

Gen. 

tui,  of  thee. 

vestrum  and  vestri,  of  you. 

Dat. 

tibi,  to  or  for  thee. 

vobis,  to  or  for  you. 

Ace. 

te,  thee. 

vos,  you. 

Voc. 

tu,  0  thou. 

vos,  0  ye  or  you. 

Abl. 

te,  with,  from,  or  hy  thee. 

vobis,  with,  from,,  or  hy  you. 

Obs.  The  genitives  nostrum,  vestrum,  are  used  partitively  (see 
236);  as,  unus  nostrum,  one  of  us.  Nostri  and  vestri  are  used 
as  objective  genitives ;  as,  mSmor  es  nostri,  he  mindful  of  us. 

1.  Ego  and  nos  are  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  first  person,  and 
tu,  vos,  of  the  second.  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person, 
—  he,  she,  it,  they,  —  are  wanting  in  Latin. 

2.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  person  may  be  strengthened  by  the 
addition  of  the  syllables  m6t  or  tS,  or  both  :  as,  gg6mgt,  /  myself; 
ttltg,  tutgmet,  thou  thyself;  nosmet,  vosmet,  loe  ourselves,  you 
yourselves. 


194  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

REFLEXIVE    PRONOUNS. 

230.  The  Reflexive  Pronouns  refer  to  the  subject  of 
the  sentence,  and  do  not,  therefore,  require  a  nomina- 
tive case.  The  reflexive  pronouns  of  the  first  and 
second  persons  are  the  same  as  the  first  and  second  per- 
sonal pronouns;  the  reflexive  of  the  third  person  is 
thus  declined :  — 

Singular  and  Plural. 

NoM.  (Wanting.) 

Gex.    sui,  of  himself  J  herself  itself  or  themselves. 
Dat.    Bihi,  for  himself  herself  itself  or  themselves. 
Ace.    se,  himself  herself  itself  or  themselves. 

Voc.   

Abl.    se,  hy  himself,  herself  itself  or  themselves. 

1.  Tlie  nse  of  the  Personal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns  can  be  under- 
stood from  the  following  conjugation  of  laudo,  with  subject  and 
object  expressed :  — 

ggo  me  laudo,  /  praise  myself;  nos  nos  laudamus,  ive  praise 
ourselves ;  tu  te  laudas,  you  praise  yourself ;  vos  vos  laudatis, 
you  praise  yourselves ;  is  (ea)  se  laudat,  he  {she)  praises  hijnself 
(herself)  ;  ii  (eae)  se  laudant,  they  praise  themselves ;  also,  CicSro 
se  (i.e.  CicSrSnem)  laudat,  Cicero  praises  himself;  CicSro  eum 
(i.e.  CaesS.rein)  laudat,  Cicero  praises  him. 

2.  The  I'eduplicated  forms,  sesg,  tete,  meme,  for  se,  te,  me, 

often  occur. 

3.  Cum,  when  used  with  the  ablative  of  the  personal  pronoun, 
is  appended  to  it:    as,  mecum,  ivith  me;  xobiBcmai,  with  you. 

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

231.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  formed  from  the 

personal  pronouns,  and  denote  possession.    They  are  :  — 

meus,  mea,  meum,  my  or  mine. 
tuus,  tua,  tuum,  thy  or  thine. 
suus,  sua,  suum,  his,  hers,  its,  or  their. 
noster,  nostra,  nostrum,  our. 
vaster,  vestra,  vestrum,  your. 


PRONOUNS.  195 


Obs.  1.  The  vocative  singular  masculine  of  meus  is  ml 

Obs.  2.  Note  that  sui  and  suus  refer  to  the  leading  subject  of 
the  sentence ;  but  when  no  ambiguity  can  arise,  sui  sometimes 
refers  to  some  other  word  than  the  leading  subject. 

232.    Decline  together  :  — 

1 .  meus  frater,  my  brother. 

2.  tuum  caput,  thy  head. 

3.  spes  omnis  nostra,  our  only  hope. 

4.  sua  mSnus  dextra,  his  right  hand. 


233.  Examples  Illustrating  the  Uses  of  the  Personal  and 
Reflexive  Pronouns :  — 

1.  inter  se   diffgrunt,  they  differ  (among  themselves)  from  one 

another. 

2.  tu  laudas  me,  sed  ggo  te  culpo,  you  praise  me,  but  I  blame 

you. 

3.  Ariovistus  tantos  sib!  spiritus  sumpsgrat,  Ariovistus  had 

taken  such  airs  upon  himself. 

4.  SI  tu  et  Tullia  vSletis,  6go  et  Cicgro  valemus,  if  you  and 

Tullia  are  tcell,  Cicero  and  I  are  well. 

5.  inter  nos  Smamus,  we  love  each  other. 

6.  inter  se  amant,  they  love  each  other. 

7.  obsides  inter  sese  dant,  they  give  hostages  to  each  other. 

8.  puella  gpistiilam  manu  sua  scribit,  the  girl  lorites  the  letter 

with  her  oivn  hand. 

9.  nos   Squitamus,   ambiilatis  vos,   or  equitamus  nos,  vos 

ambiilatis. 

Obs.  The  personal  pronouns  are  implied  in  the  endings  of  the 
Latin  verb,  and  are  not  expressed  in  Latin  unless  they  are  emphatic 
(see  57,  n.  1).  Note  that  if  there  are  two  subjects  connected  by  and, 
the  verb  is  plural ;  if  the  subjects  are  of  different  persons,  as  in 
Ex.  4,  the  verb  takes  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second,  the 
second  rather  than  the  third.  Note,  also,  that  the  first  person  is 
the  first  in  order,  not  the  last,  as  by  courtesy  in  English.  His,  her, 
its,  referring  to  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  must  be  expressed  by 
suus,  sua,  suum ;  when  not  referring  to  the  subject,  the  genitive 
(ejus)  of  is,  ea,  id,  is  used. 


196  FIRST    STEPS   IN  LATIN. 

Rule  for  Position  :  — 

1.  The  Personal  Pronouns,  when  connected  by  conjunctions  to 
other  words,  stand  first.     Ego  always  precedes  (see  Ex.  4). 

2.  Contrasted  words  are  put  as  near  together,  or  as  far  apart,  as 
possible  (see  Ex.  9). 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Ego  voco,  tu  vocas,  amicus  vocat.  2.  Tu  es  tristis. 
3.  Nos  sumus  potentes,  sed  vos  potentiores  estis.  4.  In  me 
et  in  te  et  in  nobis  omnibus  est  animus  immortalis.  5.  Ego 
et  f rater  ambulamns.  6.  Ego  a  te  laudabor,  sed  tii  a  me 
punieris.  7.  Ml  frater,  audi.  8.  Ego  sum  mains,  sed  tu  es 
bonus.  9.  Caesar  suos  inTlites  in  Galliam  mittet,  sed  in 
provinciam  nostros.     10.  Caesar  Divitiacum  ad  se  vocat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  I  call,  thou  callest,  the  friend  calls.  2.  I  praise  you, 
you  praise  me,  we  praise  you.  3.  He  comes  in  company 
with  you.  4.  I  give  (to)  you  the  book.  o.  I  am  sad,  but 
you  are  joyful.  G.  I  am  a  Roman,  ])ut  you  are  a  Gaul. 
7.  I  am  praised  by  you.  8.  My  l)rotlier  and  I  are  praising 
you.  9.  You  are  reading,  but  I  am  writing.  10.  They 
differ  from  one  another. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

Why  arc  reflexive  pronouns  so  called  ?  Name  the  personal  pro- 
nouns. How  is  the  lack  of  a  third  personal  pronoun  sux)plied  1  Give 
the  rule  for  the  use  of  possessive  pronouns.  {Arts.  Same  as  for  adjec- 
tives:  Adjectives,  adjective  promnms,  etc.,  agree.  See  Rule  VIII.)  How 
can  you  tell  after  a  transitive  verb  whether  suos  milites  means  his, 
her,  its,  or  theii-  soldiers  9  Tlie  reflexive  se  is  often  Avritten  sese ;  as, 
puer  sese  laudat,  the  boy  praises  himself. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


197 


LESSON   LXV. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  -  PAETITIYE  GENITIVE. 

234.    Demonstrative  Pronouns  are  so  called  because 
they  point  out  what  object  is  meant.     They  are  :  — 

1.  Hie,  this^  this  near  me. 


Cases. 

Siiif^ular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

XOM. 

hic 

haec 

hoc 

hi 

hae 

haec 

Gen. 

hujus 

horum 

harum 

horum 

DAT. 

huici 

his 

Ace. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoc^ 

hos 

has 

haec 

Abl. 

hoc 

hac 

hoc 

his 

2.  Iste,  that,  that  near  you. 


NOM. 

iste 

ista 

istud 

isti            istae         ista 

Gkn. 

istius 

ist5rum    istarum    istorum 

DAT. 

isti 

istis 

Ace. 

istum 

istam 

istud 

ist5s         istas          ista 

Ahl. 

isto 

ista 

isto 

istis 

3.  lUe,  that,  that  near  him. 


NOM. 

ille 

ilia 

illud 

illi 

illae 

ilia 

Gex. 

illius 

illorum 

illarum 

ill5rum 

DAT. 

illi 

iUis 

Ace. 

ilium 

illam 

illud 

iUos 

illas 

ilia 

Al5L. 

iUo 

ilia 

ill5 

illis 

235.    Decline  together  :  — 

1.  haec  2  dies,  ihis  day. 

2.  ista  tua  soror,  that  sister 

of  thine. 

3.  haec  ISgio,  this  legion. 


4.  illud  onus,  that  burden. 

5.  istud  tempus,  that  time. 

6.  h6mo  iste,  that  (worthless) 

man. 


Obs.  1.    Hic,  used  for  what  is  near  the  speaker,  is  called  the 
demonstrative  of  the  first  person  ;  iste,  used  of  what  is  near  the  per- 


198  FIKST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

son  addressed,  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person  ;  ille, 
used  of  what  is  remote  from  both,  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the 
third  person. 

Obs.  2.  The  demonstratives  are  often  used  in  the  oblique  cases 
as  personal  pronouns  (Jiim,  her,  it,  them)  of  the  third  person. 

EXAMPLE. 

eum  et  fratrem  ejus  video,  /  see  him  and  his  brother. 

236.  Partitive  Genitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  pars  mlli turn,  j^arf  of  the  soldiers. 

2.  alter  consilium,  one  of  the  (two)  consuls. 

3.  unus  mHitum,  one  of  the  soldiers. 

4.  nihil  vini,  (^nothing  of  wine)  no  wine. 

5.  multum  aestatis,  a  large  part  of  the  summer. 

6.  magna  est  corporis  pars  Sperta,  a  great  part  of  the  body  is 

exposed. 

Obs.  In  each  of  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  genitive 
expresses  the  whole,  and  that  the  word  which  the  genitive  limits 
designates  a  part.  This  use  of  the  genitive  is  called  the  partitive 
genitive.     The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

PARTITIVE    GENITIVE. 

237.  Rule  XXVIII.  —  Words  denoting  a  part  are 
followed  by  the  genitive  denoting  the  whole. 

Note.  Instead  of  the  partitive  genitive  with  numerals,  the 
ablative  with  ex,  out  of,  de,  from,  is  regularly  used  with  cardinals. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  unus  ex  militibus,  one  of  the  soldiers. 

2.  quinque  ex  militibus,  fve  (of)  soldiers. 

3.  unus  de  multis,  one  of  the  many. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  IllP  virum  laudant.  2.  Hoc''  bellum  est  saevissimum. 
3.  Hujus  discipiili  diligentiam  laudo.  4.  Hic  piier  diligens 
est,  ille  iners.  5.  Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae. 
G.   Laudabo  illius^  filium.      7.  Pater  filiam  suam  et  filiam 


DEMONSTKATIVE  PKONOUNS.  199 

Tulliae  ad  se  vocabat.  8.  Haec  sententia  mihi  placet,  ilia 
displicet.  9.  Hi  omnes  inter  se  differunt.  10.  Oppidum  abe- 
rat  inllia  passiium  octo.     11.  Magna  est  corporis  pars  aperta. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  I  will  give  you  this  book,  and  you  give  me  that. 
2.  These  men,  those  men.  3.  These  places,  those  places. 
4.  This  mountain,  that  mountain.  5.  This  opinion,  that 
opinion.  6.  This  soldier  is  brave,  that  one  is  cowardly. 
7.  These  things*^  were  announced  to  Caesar.  8.  A  part  of 
the  army  came.  9.  The  army  marched  six  miles.  10.  The 
wall  is  ten  feet  high.  11.  Cicero  was  a  very  distinguished 
orator  ;  we  shall  hear  him  with  pleasure.  12.  The  man  calls 
his  own  son  to  him. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  HulC  is  to  be  pronounced  as  a  monosyllable, 

2.  The  vocative  of  demonstrative,  relative,  interrogative,  and  in- 
definite pronouns  is  wanting. 

3.  Demonstrative  pronouns  may  be  used  as  personal  or  as  adjective 
pronouns :  as,  hi  omnes  diffSrunt,  all  these  differ ;  ad  eos  mercatores 
saepe  comineant,  traders  often  resort  to  them  ;  ad  has  suspiciones, 
to  THESE  suspicions.  In  the  former  case  parse  them  as  nouns ;  in  the 
latter,  as  adjectives. 

4.  Demonstrative  pronouns  usually  precede  their  nouns. 

5.  For  his  or  her  not  referring  to  the  subject,  ejus  (see  231.  obs.  2) 
should  be  used  when  not  emphatic ;  illius,  or  hujus,  if  the  word  is  em- 
phatic ;  istius,  if  very  emphatic,  or  at  all  sarcastic,  or  referring  to  the 
second  person. 

6.  The  neuter  plural  of  pronouns,  as  well  as  of  adjectives,  is  often 
used  as  nouns,  where  we  use  in  English  the  word  thing  or  things;  as, 
haec,  these  things,  this. 

Is  the  nominative  of  the  pronouns  he,  she,  it,  often  expressed  1  When 
they  must  be  expressed,  what  is  used  1  Ayis.  Generally  hic,  is,  or  ille  ; 
as,  hIc  dixit,  he  {this  man)  speaks.  What  is  a  pronoun  ?  Mention 
the  dijBferent  classes.  Define  personal  pronoun.  What  is  meant  by 
partitive  genitive  ?  Give  the  Latin  for  a  part  of  the  soldiers.  Which  is 
the  partitive  genitive  ?  How  is  all  of  the  soldiers  expressed  in  Latin  ? 
Ans.  mllites  omnes ;    all  does  not  denote  a  part,  but  the  whole. 


200 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


LESSON    LXVI. 

DETEEMINATIVE  (DEMONSTEATIVE)  PRONOUNS. 

238.  The  Determinative  Pronouns  are  is,  ea,  id,  this 
(and  lie^  she^^  that;  its  compound  idem,  eadem,  idem,  the 
same ;  and  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  7ie,  self^  very  same.  They 
refer  to  some  person  or  thing  determined  by  the  con- 
text :  — 

1.  Is,  this^  and  /ie,  she^  it. 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

MaBc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

is 

ea 

id 

ei  vr  ii 

eae 

ea 

Gen. 

ejus 

eorum 

earum 

eorum 

DAT. 

ei 

eis  or  lis 

Ace. 

eum 

earn 

id 

eos 

eas 

ea 

Ahl. 

eo 

ea 

eo 

eis  or  iis 

2.   Idem,-  the  same. 

NOM. 

idem        eadem      idem 

lfiXen.1  -ede.      e.de„. 

Gen. 

ejusdem 

eorundem  earundem  eorundem 

Dat. 

eidem 

eisdem  or  iisdem 

Acc. 

eundem  eandem   idem 

eosdem       easdem      eadem 

Abl. 

eodem     eadem      eodem 

eisdem  or  iisdem 

3.   Ipse,  self^ 

he. 

NOM. 

ipse 

ipsa 

ipsum 

ipsi 

ipsae 

ipsa 

Gen. 

ipsius 

ipsorum 

ipsarum 

ipsorum 

Dat. 

ipsi 

ipsis 

Acc. 

ipsum 

ipsam 

ipsum 

ipsos 

ipsas 

ipsa 

Abl. 

ipso 

ipsa 

ipso 

ipsis 

Obs.  1.  Ipse  is  often  called  an  intensive  pronoun ;  it  should  not 
be  confounded  with  se;  as,  vir  ips^  pe  Jaudat,  the  man  himself 
praises  himself. 


DETERMINATIVE   PRONOUNS.  201 

Obs.  2.   Idem  often  means  also ;  as,  Cicgro  6rat  orator  Idem- 

que  phiI6s6phus,  Cicero  was  an  orator,  and  also  a  philosopher  (lit., 
ike  same  was  a  philosopher). 

Obs.  3.  Is,  that,  is  often  used  as  a  personal  pronoun  (he,  she,  it, 
they,  them,  etc.)  of  the  same  gender  with  the  noun  for  which  it 
stands :  as,  CicSro  multos  libros  scripsit ;  eos  (i.e.  libros) 
libenter  ISgo,  Cicero  has  written  many  hooks ;  I  read  them  (i.e.  the 
books)  with  jileasure. 

239.   Decline  together  :  — 

1.  ipse  h6ino,  the  man  himself. 

2.  id  oppidum,  that  town. 

o     .  (  the  cause  itself. 

3.  ipsa  causa,  -I  -' 

(  the  very  same  cause. 

4.  hoc  ipsum  tempus,  this  very  time. 

5.  idem  princeps,  the  same  chief. 

6.  idem  bellum,  the  same  war. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Is  orabat  populum.  2.  Ipse  tu  me  laudabas.  3.  Ipse 
magister  me  laudabit.  4.  Ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  ge- 
runt.  5.  Caesar  eodem  itinere  ad  e5s  contendit.  6.  Caesar 
Divitiacum  ad  se  vocavit.  7.  Pater  filiam  suam  et  filium 
ejus  ad  se  vocat. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Idem,  compounded  of  is  and  -dem,  is  declined  like  is,  but  it 
shortens  isdem  to  idem,  and  iddem  to  idem,  and  clianges  m  to  n 
before  the  ending  -devi. 

Why  are  demonstrative  pronouns  so  called?  [Ans.  Because  they 
point  out  the  noun.)  Mention  the  demonstrative  of  the  first  person. 
When  must  his  or  her  be  expressed  by  ejus  "?  When  by  suus  ?  What 
are  determinative  pronouns  "?  Why  so  called  ?  Mention  them.  Ipse 
is  often  called  an  intensive  pronoun,  because  it  makes  the  word  to  which 
it  is  added  more  emphatic. 


202 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


LESSON   LXVIL 

RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

240.  Relative  Pronouns  are  so  called  because  they 
relate  to  some  preceding  noun  or  pronoun,  called  the 
antecedent;  they  are  qui  and  its  compounds.  Qui  is 
declined  as  follows  :  — 


Cases. 

Singrular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

]^euter. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen. 

CUJUS 

quorum 

quarum 

quorum 

Dat. 

cui 

quibus 

Ace. 

quern 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

Abl. 

quo 

qua 

quo 

quibus 

1.  Quicumque  (quicunque)  and  quisquis,  ivlioever,  are  called, 
from  their  signification,  general  relatives.  Quicumque  is  declined 
like  qui.  The  only  forms  of  quisquis  in  use  are  quisquis,  the 
neuter  quidquid,  and  the  ablative  quoquo. 

241.   Agreement  of  Relative  Pronouns :  — 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  puer  qui  mSgistrum  Smat  bdnus  est,  the  hoy  who  loves  the 

master  is  good. 

2.  puer  quem  mSgister  ^mat   bSnus  est,  the  hoy  whom  the 

master  loves  is  good. 

3.  Sgo,  qui  te  laudavi,  rex  sum,  /,  who  have  praised  you,  am  king. 

Obs.  In  Ex.  1,  qui  stands  for  puer,  and  connects  the  second 
statement  or  clause,  loves  the  master,  with  the  hoy  is  good.  The  word 
qui  is  said  to  relate  to  puer ;  it  is,  therefore,  called  a  Relative 
Proxoun  ;  it  also  binds  the  two  clauses  together  like  a  conjunc- 
tion, and  this  is  the  real  peculiarity  of  relatives,  as  all  pronouns 
have  antecedents.  The  word  puer,  which  the  clause  qui  mSgis- 
trum  Smat  modifies,  is  called  the  Antecedent.  The  sentence  in 
which  the  relative  stands  is  called  the  relative  clause ;  the  other,  the 
principal  clause. 

Note  (1)  that  qui  is  masculine  gender,  to  agree  with  its  ante- 
cedent, puer;    (2)  that  it  is  singular  number  and  third  person,  to 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  203 

agree  with  puer,  while  qui,  in  Ex.  3,  is  first  person,  to  agree  with 
Sgo;  note  (3)  also  that  the  relatives,  in  Exs.  1  and  3,  are  in  the 
nominative  case  ;  but  in  Ex.  2  the  relative  is  in  the  accusative  case, 
because  it  is  the  object  of  Smat.     Hence  the  following  rule :  — 

AGREEMENT    OF    RELATIVES. 

242.  Rule  XXIX.  —  The  relative  pronoun  agrees 
with  its  antecedent  in  g-ender,  number,  and  person, 
but  its  case  depends  on  the  construction  of  the 
clause  in  which  it  stands. 

1.  The  relative  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  is  trans- 
lated like  a  personal  or  demonstrative  pronoun  with  a  con- 
junction, determined  by  the  construction. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  qui  proelium  committunt,  they  engage  in  battle. 

2.  quae  cum  ita  sint,  since  these  (things)  are  so. 

2.  The  relative  is  often  omitted  in  English ;  it  is  never 
omitted  in  Latin. 

EXAMPLE. 

liber  quern  milii  dSdisti,  the  book  (ivhich)  you  gave  me. 

3.  In  English,  as  is  often  a  relative  pronoun,  especially 
after  such  and  same.  It  must  then  be  rendered  by  qui  after 
idem,  and  by  quails  or  quantus  after  talis,  such^  tantus,  so 
great. 

243.  Position  of  the  Relative  :  — 

The  relative  generally  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  relative 
sentence,  after  the  antecedent,  and  as  near  to  it  as  possible;  but  for 
the  sake  of  emphasis  the  relative  sentence  is  often  placed  first. 

1.  When  the  antecedent  is  indefinite,  it  is  often  omitted  alto- 
gether; as,  qui  tertiam  partem  inc61unt  Galli  appellantur, 
(those)  who  inhabit  the  third  part  are  called  Gauls.  (Cf.  the  English, 
"  who  steals  my  purse  steals  trash,"  i.e.,  any  one  who,  etc.) 

244.  Model  for  Parsing  a  Relative  :  — 

puer,  qui  mSgistrum  Smat,  bSnus  est :  qui  is  a  relative  pro- 
noun; decline  qui,  quae,  quod,  etc. ;  masculine  gender,  singular, 
to  agree  with  its  antecedent  puer,  and  is  in  the  nominative  case. 


204  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

the  subject  of  amat ;  Rule  XXTX.  The  three  words,  qui  mSgis- 
trum  Smat,  are  called  a  clause;  it  is  a  relative  clause,  because 
introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun ;  it  performs  the  office  of  an 
adjective,  i.e.,  it  describes  puer,  and  is  therefore  called  an  adjective 
clause.  Since  it  is  subjoined  to  the  leading  clause  (puer  b6nus 
est),  as  modifying  it,  it  is  called  a  subordinate  clause.  A  sentence 
consisting  of  two  clauses,  one  of  which  is  subordinate,  is  called  a 
complex  sentence.     (See  221.) 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Puer,  qui  studet,  discit.  2.  Felix  est  is  rex,  quern 
omnes  cTves  amant.  3.  Allobroges,  qui  trans  Rhodanum 
vicos     possessionesque    habebant,    ad    Caesarem    veniunt. 

4.  Multi  homines  aedificaverunt  domos,  in  quibus  non  habi- 
taverunt.  5.  Caesar  vocat  Castieum,  cujus^  pater  regnum 
multos  annos^  obtinuerat.  6.  Ab  Ocelo,  quod  est  citerioris 
provinciae  oppiduni  extremum.  7.  Proximi  sunt  Germams, 
qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.    The    boy,   whom   you   have    blamed,    is   m}^  brother. 

2.  The  man  has  built  a  house,  in  which  he  has  not  lived. 

3.  He  summons  Casticus,  whose  father  held  the  sovereignty 
in  Gaul  for  many  years.     4.  The  boy  who  studies  will  learn. 

5.  The  Germans,  w^ho  dwell  across  the  Rhine,  came  into 
Gaul.  6.  Caisar  will  hasten  into  the  province  with  the  three 
legions  which  he  had  levied  in  Gaul.  7.  Cajsar  led  from 
winter  quarters  the  three  legions  which  were  wintering  in 
Gaul. 

NOTES    AND     CJUESTIONS. 

1.  Cujus,  whose. 

2.  Why  accusative  ? 

Give  the  rule  for  the  use  of  relative  pronouns.  What  is  a  pronoun  ? 
How  many  classes  ?  What  is  a  clause  ?  A  relative  clause  ?  What  is 
the  antecedent  ?  Define  sentence.  To  what  is  a  relative  equivalent  ? 
{Ans.  A  personal  pronoun  +  a  connective;  as,  the  hoy  who  studies,  etc., 
=  the  boy  and  he  studies.) 


INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


205 


LESSON   LXVIIL 

INTEEEOaATIVE    PEONOUNS. 

245.  The  Interrogative  Pronouns,  quis  and  qui,  with 
their  compounds,  are  used  in  asking  questions.  They 
are  declined  as  follows  :  — 

1.  Quis,  wlio,  which,  what? 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neuter. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

quis 

quae 

quid 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen. 

CUJUS 

quorum 

Dat. 

cui 

quibus 

Ace. 

quem 

quam 

quid 

quos 

quas 

quae 

Abl. 

quo 

qua 

quo 

quibus 

2.  Qui,  ivho,  which,  ivhat?  is  declined  Hke  the  relative  qui. 

3.  Quis  is  used  both  as  a  noun  and  as  an  adjective;  quid  is 
always  used  as  a  noun  ;  qui  and  quod  are  used  as  adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  quid  commisit,  ivhat  has  he  done  ?    (N"oun.) 

2.  quod  facinus  commisit,  what  deed  has  he  done?    (Adj.) 

3.  quis  v6cat,  who  calls  f   (Noun.) 

4.  qui  (or  quis)  homo  vQcat,  what  man  calls  ?   (Adj.) 

4.  Quis  and  qui  are  often  strengthened  by  the  addition  of  nam 
in  emphatic  interrogation;  as,  quisnam,  or  quidnam,  who  then? 
what  then  ? 

5.  When  the  question  refers  to  one  of  two,  liter,  iitra,  iitrum, 
which  of  two,  is  used. 

6.  Recollect  that  the  interrogative  particles  are  -ne,  used  when 
asking  for  information  simply;  nonne,  when  the  answer  yes  is 
expected;  and  num,  when  the  answer  no  is  expected.  If  an  inter- 
rogative pronoun  or  adverb  is  used,  then  -ne,  nonne,  or  num  is 
not  required.  There  is  no  single  word  in  Latin  equivalent  to  our 
yes  and  no,  in  answer  to  questions.     The  answer  may  be  expressed 


206  FIRST  STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

by  repeating  the  verb  with  a  negative  adverb,  if  no  is  tlie  answer ; 
and  with  or  without  an  adverb,  if  yes  is  the  answer. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  venitne,  has  he  come  ?   venit,  or  venit  vero,  yes  (he  has 

come) . 

2.  matronane  puellam  v6cat,  does  the  mother  call  the  girl? 

v6cat,  yes  {she  calls). 

3.  nonne  b6nus  puer  est,  is  not  the  boy  good  ? 

7.  Ne  is  annexed  to  the  word  to  which  it  especially  refers. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  tune  puerum  d6ces,  do  you  teach  the  hoy? 

2.  dScesne  puSrum,  do  you  teach  the  boy? 

3.  puSrumne  d6ces,  do  you  teach  the  boy? 

8.  Questions  in  Latin,  as  in  English,  may  be  single  or  double. 
7s  the  soldier  brave  ?  is  a  single  question.  Is  the  soldier  brave  or 
cowardly?  is  a  double  question.  In  asking  a  double  question  in 
Latin,  the  first  clause  usually  has  utrum  or  -ne,  and  the  second  an. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  utrum  vir  ISgit  an  scribit,  does  the  inan  read  or  torite  ? 

2.  utrum  patriam  Smat,  annon,  does  he  love  his  country  or  not  ? 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Quis  me  vocat?  2.  Quis  scribit  has  litteras?  3.  Quod 
carmen  legis?  4.  Quis  tibi  huuc  librum  dedit?  5.  Quae 
est  mulier  quae  venit?  G.  Uter  consulum  amicus  vester  est? 
7.  Quisuam  te  vocavit,  TuUi?  8.  Qui  consul  est  Cicerone 
prudentior  ? 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Who  is  that  man?  2.  Who  are  those  soldiers? 
3.  What  soldiers  are  these  ?  4.  AYho  has  called  us  ? 
5.  Which  book  have  you?  6.  Who  gave  you  that  book? 
7.  Who  has  come  into  the  city?  8.  Who  was  walking  with 
you  in  the  garden?  9.  Which  boy  wounded  you  with  a 
stone  ? 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 


207 


LESSON   LXIX. 

imEPINITE    PKONOUNS. 

246.  Indefinite  Pronouns  are  sucli  as  designate  an 
object  in  an  indefinite  or  a  general  manner.  They 
are :  — 

1.  Sliquis,  subst.,    Sliqui,  adj.,   some  one  (I  do  not  know 

who),  some,  any. 

2.  siquis,  if  any  one. 

3.  nequis,  lest  any. 

4.  quisque,  each  or  each  one. 

5.  quisquam,  any  one  (where  all  are  excluded). 

6.  quispiam,  some  one. 

7.  unusquisque,  each  (stronger  than  quisque). 

8.  quidam,  subst.,  a,  a  certain  (I  know  who,  though  I  may 

not  wish  to  say);  adj.,  a  certain,  some;  plural,  some 
(uneniphatic)  ;  neuter,  something. 

'       _  .      '  [■  any  one  you  please  (where  all  are  included). 
11.  quis,i  subst.,  and  qui,  adj.,  any,  some. 

1.  Quis  and  qui  are  declined  like  the  interrogatives  quis  and  qui. 

2.  Aliquis  is  thus  declined  :  — 


Cases. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc.          Fem.         Neuter. 

Masc.                Fem.              Neuter. 

NOM. 

aiiquis    .Uqua    i^^ 

aliqui          aliquae       aliqua 

Gen. 

alicujus 

aliquorum  aliquarum  aliquorum 

Dat. 

alicui 

aliquibus 

Ace. 

aliqaemallquam|ijj^^°j* 

aliquos        aliquas        aliqua 

Abl. 

aliqud     aliqua      aliquo 

aliquibus 

3.  Aliquis,  aliqua,  aliquid,  are  used  as  nouns;    and  aliquis, 
aliqua,  S.liquod,  as  adjectives. 

4.  The  following  are  declined  like  the  Relative  or  Interrogative  ; 
the  neutei's  in  quid  are  used  as  nouns,   and  those  in  quod   as 


208  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

adjectives ;  the  masculines  and  feminines  are  used  either  as  nouns 
or  adjectives  :  — 

quidam,  qnaedam,  quoddam  or  quiddam,  a  certain  one. 
quispiain,  quaepiam,  quodpiam  or  quidpiam,  ^ome  one. 
quivis,  quaevis,  quodvis  or  quidvis,  )      any  one 

quilibet,  quaelibet,  quodlibet  or  quidlibet,^  {you  please'). 
quisque,  quaeque,  quodque  or  quidque,  every  one. 
unusquisque,  unaquaeque,  unumquodque,  each. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  quivis  h6mo,  any  man. 

2.  aliquis  hfimo,  a  man,  any  man  (it  matters  not  who). 

3.  quidani  hSmo,  a  certain  man  (whose  name  I  could  men- 

tion, or  whom  1  could  identify,  if  I  chose). 

4.  aliquem  ad  me  mittent,  they  will  send  somebody  to  me. 

5.  Sliquod  b6num,  some  good  thing. 

G.  ^liquid  b6ni  (part,  gen.),  something  good. 

247.   Decline  together  :  — 

1.  -p^ter  men^,  my  father.  G.  tbtusiWe  Aiea,  that  lohole  day. 

2.  is  consul,  that  consul.  7.  vir    quidam    Romanus,   a 

3.  idem  vir,  the  same  man.  certain  Roman. 

4.  e^Aem  ndLvia,  the  same  shi}^.  8.  iste  alter,  that  other  fellow. 

5.  qulvia  h6in.o,  any  man.  9.  qxiis  nauta.,  what  sailor  ? 

10.  CicSro  ipse,  clarissimus  orator,  Cicero  himself,  the  most 
famous  orator. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Aliqnos^  ad  eum  miserunt.  2.  Narravit  qaidam  coram 
me  istam  fabvilam.  3.  Narrabit  aliquis  coram  me  illam 
fabulam.  4.  Aliquem  locum  occupavit.  5.  Cum  aliquibus 
mllitum'^  venit.  6.  Quidam  ex  mtlitibus^  decimae  legionis 
veniebat.     7.  Titus  quendam  Galium  ad  Caesarem  misit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  In  company  with  those  soldiers.  2.  In  company  with 
these  soldiers.     3.  Some  one  praises  the  king.     4.  A  cer- 


USES    OF   THE   ABLATIVE.  209 

tain  one  is  praising  the  king.  5.  Who  praises  the  king? 
6.  Some  soldiers  are  brave.  7.  A  soldier  came  to  Caesar. 
8.  Some  one  will  tell  this  story.  9.  The  generals  will  come 
in  company  with  some  of  the  chiefs.  10.  Is  the  soldier 
brave?  11.  Is  the  soldier  brave  or  not?  12.  Cicsar  sent  a 
Gaul  to  Cicero. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Used  only  after  si,  ne,  nisi,  nam,  and  relatives ;  as,  si  quis,  ne 
quis ;  but  of  course  S.liquis,  quidam,  etc.,  may  be  used  after  the  same 
particles:  as,  si  quis,  if  any ;  si  ^liquis,  if  some. 

2.  Is  ^iquos  used  as  a  noun  or  adjective  ? 

3.  See  237. 


LESSON    LXX. 

USES   OF  THE  ABLATIVE. 

SEPARATION,   SOURCE,    CAUSE,    MATERIAL,   AGENT. 

Obs.  We  have  learned  that  the  ablative  is  used  to  denote  the 
relations  expressed  in  English  by  the  prepositions /rom;  with  or  hy; 
at  or  in.  In  expressing  all  these  relations,  the  ablative  performs 
the  offices  of  three  cases  that  in  some  languages  were  kept  distinct. 
These  uses  of  the  ablative  may  be  classified  as  follows :  — 

1.  The  Ablative   Proper,   expressing  the  relation  from,  or 

WHENCE. 

EXAMPLE. 

virum  culpa  liberat,  he  frees  the  man  from  blame. 
*2.  'The  Instrumental,   expressing  the  relation  with,  hy,  or 

WHEREWITH. 

EXAMPLE. 

liostium  fines  ferro  et  igni  vastant,  they  lay  waste  the 
enemy's  territory  with  sword  and  fire. 

3.  The  Locative,  expressing  the  relation  in,  at,  or  where. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Romae  vivit,  he  lives  at  Rome. 

2.  castris  se  tgnuit,  he  kept  himself  in  camp. 


210  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

The  general  rule  for  the  Ablative  Proper  may  be  stated  as 
follows :  — 

ABLATIVE    PROPER. 

248.  Rule  XXX.  —  Separation,  cause,  source,  and 
origin  are  denoted  by  the  ablative  with  or  without 
a  preposition. 

EXAMPLE. 

me  timore  libSras,  you  free  me  from  fear  (separation). 

Obs.  The  prepositions  are  omitted  chiefly  with  verbs  signifying 
to  abstain,  relieve,  remove,  exclude,  deprive,  cease,  and  want,  and  with 
adjectives  of  kindred  meanings ;  but,  if  a  person  is  specified,  the 
preposition  must  be  used ;  as,  te  ab  1116  imprSbo  libSravi,  /  have 
rid  you  of  that  scoundrel. 

1.  Compounds  with  a,  ab,  de,  e,  ex,  denoting  separation  from  a 
person  or  place,  take  the  ablative  when  used  figuratively ;  but,  in 
a  local  and  literal  sense,  they  usually  require  a  preposition  with  the 
ablative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  iter  ab  ArSre  Helvetii  avertSrant,  the  Helvetians  had 

turned  their  inarch  from  the  Aj'ar. 

2.  Helvetii  hoc   conatu   desistunt,   the   Helvetians   desist 

from  this  attempt. 

2.  The  Ablative  of  Cause  is  used  without  a  preposition  with  in- 
transitive and  passive  verbs  of  emotion,  and  with  adjectives  that 
are  passive  in  meaning. 

EXAMPLE. 

Helvetii  sua  victoria  insSlenter  gloriabantur,  the  Helve- 
tians boasted  insolently  because  of  their  victory  (cause). 

Obs.  1.  When  the  moving  cause  is  a  person,  the  preposition  a 
or  ab  is  used  with  the  ablative ;  or  ob,  per,  or  propter,  with  the 
accusative. 

Obs.  2.  The  ablatives  causa  and  gratia, /or  the  sake  of,  are  used 
with  a  genitive  preceding,  or  with  a  possessive  pronoun  in  agree- 
ment. 

Obs.  3.  Expressions  of  trust  and  distrust  (fido,  confido,  diffido), 
and  many  adjectives  and  participles  expressing  emotion,  and  fretus 
and  contentus,  are  used  with  the  ablative. 

3.  Perfect  Participles  denoting  parentage  or  birth,  —  ggnitus, 
natus,  ortus,  etc.,  —  generally  take  the  ablative  without  a  prep- 
osition. 

EXAMPLE. 

Piso  amplissimo  gSiiSre  natus,  Piso,  born  of  a  very  illus- 
trious frimily. 


KEADING   LATIN    AT    SIGHT.  211 

Ablative  of  Agent. 
4.  The  voluntary  agent  after  a  passive  verb  is  jmt  in  the  abla- 
tive with  a  or  ab. 

KXAMPI.JES. 

1.  mS-gister  discipiilos  laudat,  the  teacher  iwdiaes  the  pupih. 

2.  discipuli  a  magistro  laudantur,  the  pupils  are  praised  hy 

the  teacher. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Ars  utilitate  laudatur.  2.  Caedem  a  vobls  depello. 
3.  Hostes  proelio  excedebant.  4.  Animo  constamus  et 
corpore.  5.  Itinere  exercitum  nostrum  prohibent.  6.  Dis- 
cipuli a  magistro  docentnr.  7.  Omni  Gallia  interdicit  R6- 
manos.     8.  Proelio  abstinebat. 


LESSON   LXXI. 
BEADING  LATIN  AT  SIGHT. 

249.  It  may  now  be  taken  for  granted  that  the  pupil  has  become 
familiar  with  the  inflectional  endings,  the  general  order  of  words 
in  a  Latin  sentence  (HI),  and  the  principal  rules  of  syntax.  He 
has,  also,  learned  many  words,  mostly  selected  from  the  First  Book 
of  Caesar,  and  it  is  now  time  for  him  to  try  to  unravel  the  dif- 
ficulties of  an  ordinary  Latin  sentence. 

1.  In  the  first  place,  the  pupil  should  pronounce  the  Latin  care- 
fully and  slowly,  noticing  the  endings  of  each  word,  in  order  to 
determine  which  words  are  nouns  and  which  verbs,  etc. 

2.  Then,  if  the  first  sentence  is  simple,  find  the  Subject,  and 
determine  its  number  and  meaning.  Sometimes  the  subject  is  not 
expressed,  but  is  contained  in  the  ending  of  the  verb.  It  can  be 
found  by  noticing  the  person  and  number  of  the  verb,  as  it  must 
be  a  pronoun  of  the  person  indicated  by  the  verb. 

3.  N^ext  find  the  Predicate,  and  translate  it,  noticing  carefully 
its  voice,  mode,  and  tense. 

4.  Find  and  translate  the  modifiers  of  the  subject ;  and,  lastly, 
the  modifiers  of  the  predicate. 


212  FIliST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

5.  If  the  sentence  is  complex,  translate,  first,  the  principal  clause, 
and  then  the  subordinate  clauses  in  the  order  of  their  importance. 
It  is  always  easier  for  the  pupil  to  translate  tlie  principal  clause 
first  than  it  is  to  pick  out  woi'ds  here  and  there  with  the  hope  of 
being  able  finally  of  putting  them  together  into  a  sentence.  When 
the  meaning  of  the  principal  clause  has  been  obtained,  then  take 
the  subordinate  clauses. 

6.  Consult  the  dictionary  or  vocabularies  only  as  a  last  resort. 
The  pupil  must,  however,  remember  that  only  the  nominative  singu- 
lar of  nouns,  adjectives,  and  i)ronouns,  and  the  first  person  singular 
present  indicative  active  of  verbs,  are  given  there ;  i.e.,  the  dictionary 
gives  the  meaning  of  words  without  reference  to  their  grammatical 
relations.  The  case,  pej'sori,  numher,  mode,  tense,  or  voice,  must  be 
determined  by  the  grammar.  It  is,  therefore,  essential  that  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  the  inflection  of  the  regular  verbs  be 
thoroughly  memorized,  so  that  the  pupil  can  distinguish  by  the  end- 
ings the  different  parts  of  speech,  and  deterndne  at  once  the  force 
and  relation  of  the  Avords. 

Siffht-Meading. 

FABLE. 

In  prato  eraut  tres  boves   in  maxima  concordia.      Sed 

meadow  oxen  greatest  harmony 

dissidio  inter  eos  orto,  singiili  a  feris  petlti  et  laniati  sunt. 

discord  arising  one-by-one    wild-beasts  attack  tear 


NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

The  pupil  can  discover  by  the  forms  of  the  words  that  bSves  is  in 
the  nominative  plural,  and  is  tlie  subject  of  tlie  verb  grant;  prSto, 
after  the  preposition,  is  in  the  ablative  singular,  and  its  nominative 
is  pratum,  for  which  form  the  pupil  must  look  in  the  dictionary. 
Concordia  is  also  in  the  ablative,  and  is  modified  by  the  adjective 
maxima. 

Note  the  mode,  tense,  and  voice  of  pgtiti  and  laniati  sunt,  and 
translate  them. 

What  is  the  subject  of  the  first  sentence  1  The  predicate  1  Has 
the  subject  any  modifiers  1  Has  the  predicate  'i  In  what  case  is  tres  ? 
In  what  case  is  singuli  ? 


infinitivp:  mode.  213 


LESSON   LXXIl. 

INPINITIYE    MODE,   ACTIVE  AND    PASSIVE. 

EXERCISE    FOR    SIGHT-READING. 

Obs.  In  the  sentence  /  wish  to  see  you,  the  verb,  to  see,  names 
the  action  in  an  indefinite  way,  without  limiting  it  to  any  particular 
subject;  and  hence,  a  verb  that  expresses  an  action  in  this  un- 
limited manner  is  said  to  be  in  the  Infinitive  Mode  (Lat.  infinitus, 
toithout  limit).  The  infinitive  expresses  simply  the  action  or  state 
implied  in  the  verb  in  an  abstract  manner,  without  specifying 
either  person,  number,  or  time,  and  thus  merely  indicates  whether 
an  action  is  in  progress  or  completed.  The  infinitive  may  be  used, 
like  a  noun,  as  the  subject  or  object  of  a  vprb,  but  it  differs  from  a 
noun  in  several  important  particulars  :  (1)  It  may  be  modified  by 
adverbs,  bat  not  by  adjectives,  as  /  wish  to  see  you  immediately; 
(2)  it  governs  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  objective  like  a  verb.  In 
Latin,  the  infinitive  has  voice  and  tense  like  a  verb,  but,  like  a 
noun,  admits  of  two  cases :  the  nominative  when  it  is  the  subject 
of  a  verb,  and  the  accusative  when  it  is  the  object  of  a  verb.  The 
infinitive  is  also  used  in  Latin  to  represent  the  tenses  of  the  indica- 
tive mode  in  Indirect  Discourse.  (For  this  use,  see  347.)  Hence 
the  uses  of  the  infinitive  may  be  stated  as  follows  :  — 

250.  Uses  of  the  Infinitive. 

1.  The  infinitive  is  used  as  an  indeclinable  abstract  noun 
in  the  nominative  and  accusative. 

2.  The  infinitive  is  used  in  Indirect  Discourse  to  represent 
the  tenses  of  the  indicative.    (See  347.) 

Obs.  The  infinitive  has  voice  and  tense,  and  takes  adverbial 
modifiers  like  any  verb  ;  it  governs  the  case  of  its  verb. 

251.  In  Latin  there  are  Four  Infinitives  in  each  voice, — 
the  Present,  Perfect,  Future,  and  Future  Perfect.  They  are 
formed  from  the  stems  as  follows  :  — 

ACTIVE   VOICE. 

Present  infinitive  =  present  stem  +  re. 
Perfect  infinitive  =  perfect  stem  +  sse. 
Future  infinitive   =  future  participle  and  esse. 
Fut.  perf.  infiu.     =  future  participle  and  fuisse. 


214 


FIKST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 

Present  inlinitive  =  present  stem  +  ri  for  1st,  2d,  4th  conjugations. 
"  "         =  verb-stem  +  i  for  3d  conjugation. 

Perfect  infinitive  =  perfect  passive  participle  and  esse. 

Future  infinitive  =  supine  and  iri  (the  word  iri  is  the  present  in- 
finitive passive  of  eo,  /  go,  and  amatum  irl  has  the  idea  of 
going  to  he  loved). 

Fut.  perf.  infin.     =  Perfect  passive  participle  and  f6re. 


PAKTIAl,     PARADIGM. 


Infinitives.  —  Active. 

4^ 

Formation. 

Sxample. 

English. 

ama- 

amare 

to  love. 

£ 

mone- 

rege- 

audl- 

+  re 

monere 

regere 

audire 

to  advise, 
to  rule, 
to  hear. 

^ 

amavi-  ] 

amavisse 

to  have  loved. 

1 

monui 
rexi- 

'  I  +  sse 

monuisse 
rexisse 

to  have  advised, 
to  have  ruled. 

^ 

audivi-  J 

audivisse 

to  have  heard. 

aiua- 

amaturus  esse 

to  be  about  to  love. 

I 

s 

moni- 
rec- 

.  +  turus  esse 

moniturus  esse 
recturus  esse 

to  be  about  to  advise, 
to  be  about  to  rule. 

audi- 

auditurus  esse 

to  be  about  to  hear. 

ama- 

amaturus  fuisse 

( to  love. 

I 

moni- 
reg- 

-1-  turus  fuisse 

moniturus  fuisse 
rectiirus  fuisse 

to  have  been    to  advise, 
about        j  to  rule. 

^ 

audi- 

J 

auditurus  fuisse 

{ to  hear. 

Infinitives.  — Passive. 

. 

ama- 

+  ri 

amari 

to  be  loved. 

s 

mone- 

+  ri 

moneri 

to  be  advised. 

I 

reg- 
audi- 

4-  i 
+  ri 

regi 
audiri 

to  be  ruled, 
to  be  heard. 

ama- 

-h  tus,  -a,  -um 

amatus  esse 

to  have  been  loved. 

S 

moni- 

monitus  esse 

to  have  been  advised. 

rec- 

esse 

rectus  esse 

to  have  been  ruled. 

!k 

audi- 

auditus  esse 

to  have  been  heard. 

i:nfi:nitive  mode. 


215 


9 

Infinitives.  —  Passive. 

Formation. 

Exami>le. 

English. 

ama-     ] 

amatum  iri 

to  be  about  to  be  loved. 

3 

moni- 

+  turn  iri 

monitum  iri 

to  be  about  to  be  advised. 

rec- 

rectum  iri 

to  be  about  to  be  ruled. 

(H 

audi-     . 

auditum  iri 

to  be  about  to  be  heard. 

ama-     ' 

amatus  fore 

( loved. 

^ 

moni- 
rec- 

.  -f  tus  fore 

monitus  fore 
rectus  fore 

to  be  about  to  J  advised, 
have  been     1  ruled. 

f^ 

audi- 

auditus  fore 

I  heard. 

VOCABULARY. 

vSto,  -are,  vStui,  vStitum,  ybr&fc/. 

Conor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  undertake,  attempt. 

con-fido,  fidgre,  fisus  sum,  trust,  confide. 

rg-miniscor,  -isci,  no  perf.,  dep.,  recall  to  mind,  recollect. 

disco,  discgre,  didici,  no  partic.  stem,  learn. 

incomLmddumL,  -i,  n.,  loss,  defeat. 

re-scindo,  scindSre,  scidi,  scissum,  cut  down. 

vitium,  -il,  is;.,  fault,  vice. 

consanguineus,  -a,  -um,  related  hy  blood. 

vgtus, -gris,  adj.,  old;  vgtgres,  -um,  m. pl.,  the  ancients, ancestors. 

pristinus,  -a,  -um,  former,  early,  pristine. 


Sight-Reading. 

Cesar's  description  of  gaul. 
Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres,  quarum  unam  in- 

of  which 

colunt  Belgae,  aliam  AquItanT,  tertiam  qui     ipsoriim  lingua 

another  third  (those)  who  their  own  in  language 

Celtae,   nostra  Galli  appellantur.      Horum  omnium   fortis- 

in  our  (language)  call  of  these 

simi  sunt  Belgae ;  proximique  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans 
Rhenum  incolunt,  quibuscum  continenter  bellum  gerunt. 
Qua    de    causa    Helvetii    quoque    reliquos    Gallos    virtute 

and  for  this  also 

praecedunt,    quod    fere    cottidianis    proeliis    cum    Germanis 

because  almost  daily 

contendunt,   cum   aut  suTs    finibus   eos   prohibent,   aut  ipsi 

(they)  contend      while  their-own  (they)  themselves 

in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt. 


21 G  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

What  is  the  subject  of  the  leadmg  clause  1  the  predicate  ?  The 
modifiers  of  the  predicate  1  The  subject  of  the  subordinate  clause  1 
What  kind  of  a  clause  is  it  1  In  what  case  is  Galli  ?  Why  is  Ger- 
manis  dative  1  How  is  qua  translated  1  Define  the  word  infinitive. 
Give  the  uses  of  the  infinitive.  How  is  the  present  infinitive  formed  ? 
Form  the  present  infinitive  of  rSgo,  v6co,  timeo,  munio,  punio. 
How  is  the  perfect  infinitive  formed  1  How  the  future  infinitive  ? 
With  what  does  the  participle,  of  which  the  future  infinitive  is  com- 
posed, agree  ?  Write  all  the  active  and  passive  infinitives  of  the 
following  words  :  dono,  to  give  ;  nomino,  to  name ;  h&beo,  to  have  ; 
debeo,  to  owe ;  duco,  to  lead ;  dico,  to  saij ;  finio,  to  finish ;  munio, 
to  fortify.  Write  a  sentence  in  English  with  an  infinitive  as  subject; 
as  object. 


LESSON   LXXIII. 

INPimTIVE  AND   SUBJEOT-AOOUSATIYE.- COMPLEMEN- 
TARY INFINITIVE. 

EXERCISE    FOR    SIGHT-READING. 

252.  Infinitive  and  Subject-Accusative. 

Obs.  1.   Sometimes  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb  is  a  whole 


clause,  beginuing  with  the  word  that. 


EXAMPLES. 

Subject.  Predicate. 


1.  That  Ccesar  conquered  Gaul  is  certain. 
Sub.  Pred. Object. 

2.  He  says  that  Ccesar  conquered  Gaul. 

In  the  first  sentence,  that  Ccesar  conquered  Gaul  is  the  subject  of 
the  verb,  and  is  called  a  subject-clause ;  in  the  second  sentence,  the 
same  words  become  the  object  of  the  verb  say,  and  are  called  an 
object-clause.  Such  clauses  are  expressed  in  Latiu  by  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

Sulyect.  Object.     ,  ^g^^.  ^ 

1.  Caesarem  (ace.)  vicisse  (mfin.)  Gallos  -j    ^  ,_   " 

2.  ptltat  me  scribgre,  he  thinks  I  am  writing. 

3.  Divico  rgspondit   ita   Helvgtios  institutes   esse,   Divico 

replied  that  the  Helvetians  had  been  so  educated. 


INFINITIVE   AND    SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE.  217 

4.  Caesar  DumnSrigem  designari  sentiebat,  Ccesar  perceived 

that  Dumnorix  was  meant. 

5.  dicit  montem  ab  hostibus  tgneri,  he  says  that  the  hill  is  held 

hy  the  enemy. 

6.  rumor  6rat  Catilinam  servos  armasse,  there  ivas  a  report 

that  Catiline  had  armed  the  slaves. 

Oks.  2.  Note  the  translation  of  the  foregoing  sentences.  The 
subject-accusative  is  translated  as  if  it  were  a  nominative  preceded 
by  the  word  that.  The  infinitive  is  translated  like  any  finite  verb. 
Note,  further,  that  dicit  is  a  verb  of  saying ,  piitat,  a  verb  of  think- 
ing ;  rSspondit,  a  verb  of  telling ,  and  sentiebat,  a  verb  of  per- 
ceiving.    Hence  the  following  rules  :  — 

SUBJECT   OF    THE    INFINITIVE. 

253.  Rule  XXXI.  —  The  subject  of  the  infinitive 
is  put  in  the  accusative. 

SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE . 

254.  Rule  XXXII.  —  Verbs  of  saying^  thinking, 
knowing,  perceiving,  hearing,  and  the  like,  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  accusative  witli  the  infinitive. 

1.  Various  Impersonal  Phrases,  such  as  certum  est,  it  is  certain, 
nScesse  est,  it  is  necessary,  justum  est,  it  is  just,  etc.,  are  followed 
by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive. 

INFINITIVE    AS    SUBJECT. 

255.  The  Infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject-accusa- 
tive, may  be  used  as  the  Subject  of  a  Verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  dulce  pro  patria  mSri  est,  to  die  for  one's  country  is  sweet. 

2.  CaesSri  nuntiatum  est  gquites  accedgre,  it  loas  announced 

to  Ccesar  that  the  cavalry  ivas  apjjroaching. 

Obs.  The  predicate  adjective,  agreeing  with  the  infinitive,  is 
neuter. 

COMPLEMENTARY    INFINITIVE. 

256.  Rule  XXXIII. —  The  infinitive  without  a 
subject-accusative  is  used  with  many  verbs  to  com- 
plete their  meaning. 


218  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Caesar  pr6ficisci  maturat.  Ccescw  hastens  to  set  out. 

2.  pSrat  bellum  gerere,  he  prepares  to  wage  ivar. 

3.  mHites  pugnare  possunt,  the  soldiers  are  able  tojight. 

Obs.  The  Complementary  Infinitive  is  used  with  certain  verbs 
to  complete  their  meaning ;  it  is  generally  either  the  direct  object 
of  a  transitive  verb,  or  an  accusative  of  limitation,  as  in  Ex.  3,  the 
soldiers  are  able  as  to  fighting.  The  verbs  that  the  complementary 
infinitive  is  used  after  usually  denote  abilitg,  obligation,  intention, 
or  endeavor ,  after  verbs  signifying  to  abstain,  to  begin,  to  cease,  to 
continue,  to  dare,  to  fear,  to  hesitate,  to  be  icont,  and  after  the  passive 
voice  of  verbs  of  saying,  believing,  reckoning. 

Note  the  translation  of  the  following  sentences ;  parse 
each  infinitive,  and  give  the  nde :  — 

1 .  gratum  est  tecum  ambiilare,  it  is  i)leasant  to  walk  with  you. 

2.  p^rat  bellum.  gSrSre,  he  jyrepares  to  wage  war. 

3.  aqua  frigida  est,  water  is  cold. 

4.  sentio  Squam  frigidam.  esse,  [perceive  that  icater  is  cold. 

5.  audio  Smicum  aegrotum  esse,  I  hear  that  {my)  friend  is  sick. 
G.  Caesar  in  Gallia  hiSmare  constituit,  Ccesar  determined  to 

winter  in  GauL 

7.  miilites  urbem  custodire  debent,  the  soldiers  ought  to  guard 

the  city. 

8.  libgri  eorum  in  servitutem  abduci  non  debent,  their  chil- 

dren ought  not  to  be  led  into  servitude. 

9.  constituerunt   jumentorum   quam   maximum   nttmSrum 

coemere,  they  determined  to  buy  up  as  great  a  number  of 
beasts  of  burden  as  possible. 

Sight-Heading, 

STORY    OF    HOKATIUS. 

Tullo  regnante,  bellum  inter  Albanos  et  Romanos  exor- 

Tullus         reigning  nom.  arise 

turn  est.    Forte  in  duobus  exercitibus  erant  trlgemini  fratres, 

by  chance  three  born  at  one  birth 

nec    aetate    nee   viribus    dispares,   apud    Romanos    Horatii, 

neither  nor  unlike 

apud  Albanos  CuriatiT.     Cum  his   agunt  reges,  ut  pro  sua 

arrange 

quisque  patria  dimicent  ferro.     Arma  igitur  capiunt,  et  in 

light  accordingly  they  take 


PARTICIPLES,    ACTIVE   A:ND    PASSIVE.  219 

medium  inter  duas  acies  procedunt.     Datur  signiim,  infes- 

with 

tlsque   armis   terul  juvenes,   magnorum  exercituum   animos 

hostile  arms  spirit 

gerentes,  concurrunt. 

bearing  rush  together. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

Define  infinitive.  How  many  infinitives  in  tlie  active  voice  ?  How- 
many  in  the  passive  voice  1  Give  the  stem  of  the  present  infinitive ; 
of  the  perfect ;  give  the  endings  of  each.  Do  infinitives  have  personal 
endings  ?  Of  what  forms  is  the  future  infinitive  composed  ?  Mention 
the  uses  of  the  infinitive.  What  is  the  complementary  infinitive  1  Give 
the  rule  for  the  complementary  infinitive.  What  case  is  the  subject 
of  the  infinitive  1  After  what  verbs  may  the  accusative  and  infinitive 
be  used  ? 


LESSON    LXXIY. 

PAETIOIPLES,   ACTIVE  AND   PASSIVE.  -  ABLATIVE 
ABSOLUTE. 

EXERCISE    FOR    SIGHT-READING. 
EXAMPI.E. 

The  river,  Jiowing  from  the  mountain,  waters  the  plain. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  sentence,  note  that  the  word  Jiowing  is  a 
form  of  the  verb,  but  that  it  does  not  make  a  statement  like  a  verb. 
It  is  used  (1)  as  an  adjective,  describing  river  by  assuming  or  im- 
plying an  action ;  (2)  it  is  used  as  a  verb,  by  expressing  the  act  of 
Jiowing  as  going  on  at  the  time  the  river  loaters  the  plain.  Flowing 
Jrom  the  mountain  is  a  participial  phrase,  modifying  river.  This 
form  of  the  verb  is  called  a  participle  (Lat.  pars,  part,  and  cSpSre, 
to  take),  because  it  partakes  of  or  shares  the  nature  of  an  adjective 
and  of  a  verb.  The  principal  word  of  the  phrase  is  Jiowing  ;  its 
meaning  is  completed  and  made  more  distinct  by  the  prepositional 
phrase /rom  the  mountain.     Hence  the  following  definition  :  — 

257.  Participles  in  Latin,  as  in  English,  give  the 
meaning  of  the  verb  in  the  form  of  an  adjective. 

1.  Participles  are  sometimes  translated  by  the  English  participle 
or  infinitive,  and  sometimes  by  a  clause.     (See  259.) 


220 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


2.  Like  a  verb,  the  Participle  has  different  voices  and  tenses; 
like  an  adjective,  it  has  declension  and  gender;  and  like  both,  it 
has  two  numbers. 

3.  Transitive  verbs  have  usually  Four  Participles :  two  in  the 
active  voice  (present  and  future),  as  amans,  Smaturus ;  and  two 
in  the  passive  voice  (perfect  and  the  gerundive,  or  future),  as 
^matus,  ^maudus. 

4.  Intransitive  verbs  have  usually  only  the  participles  of  the 
active  voice. 

5.  Participles  govern  the  same  cases  as  their  verbs. 

6.  Participles  agree  with  nouns  like  adjectives. 


FORMATION     OF    PARTICIPLES. 

[The  present  participle  is  formed  by  adding  -7it,  nom.  -ns,  to  the 
present  stem ;  the  future,  by  adding  -tfiro,  nom.  -tHrus,  to  the  modified 
present  stem,  or  verb-stem  ;  the  perfect,  by  adding  -to,  nom.  -tus  {-so, 
nom.  -sHs),  to  the  verb-stem;  the  gerundive,  by  adding  -jido,  nom. -ndus, 
to  the  present  stem.] 


Pakticipleh.  —  Active  Voice. 

Tense. 

Formation. 

Example. 

EngliHli. 

£ 

Pres.  stem  -f  ns 

amans 
monens 
regens 
audiens 

loving, 
advising, 
ruling, 
hearing. 

1 

Verb-st.  -f  turus  esse  . 

amaturus  esse 
monitiirus  esse 
rectiirus  esse 
auditiirus  esse 

about  to  love, 
about  to  advise, 
about  to  rule, 
about  to  hear. 

Participles.  —  Passive  Voice. 

i 

1 

Verb-stem  -}-  tus 

amatus 
monitus  i 
rectus 
auditus 

having  been  loved, 
having  been  advised, 
having  been  ruled, 
having  been  heard. 

3S 

Pres.  stem  +  ndus 

amandus        | 
monendus 
regendus 
audiendus 

to  be  loved, 
deserving  to  he  loved, 
to  be  advised, 
to  be  rided. 
to  be  heard. 

PAKTICIPLES,    ACTIVE   AND   PASSIVE.  221 

7.  The  present  stem  of  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  ends  in 
-ie  (as  audie-)  in  the  present  participle  and  gerundive. 

8.  The  Present  Participle  is  declined  like  amans  or  prudens; 
note  that  the  vowel  is  long  before  -ns,  but  short  before  -nt.  The 
Perfect  and  Future  Participles  are  declined  like  b6nus. 

Form  and  translate  the  Present  and  Future  Active 
Participles,  the  Perfect  Passive,  and  the  Gerundive  of  the 
following  verbs  :  — 

v6co,  -are,  -Svi,  -atum,  call.  deleo,  -ere,  -evi,  -etum,  destroy/. 

pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -a.tnm,  Jight.  fleo,  -ere,  -evi,  -etum,  weep. 

habeo,  -ere,  -m,  -ituni,  have.  tSceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  silent. 

duco,  -Sre,  duxi,  ductum,  lead,  vivo,  -ere,  vixi,  victum,  live. 

rego,  -ere,  rexi,  rectum,  ride.  dico,  -ere,  dixi,  dictum,  say. 

munio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -Ituni,  fortify,  finio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itum,  ^^nz's^. 

Distinctions  of  Time. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  sese  omnes  flentes  CaesSri  ad  pedes  projecerunt,  they  all, 

weeping,  threw  themselves  at  Ccesar^s  feet. 

2.  G-allia  in  tres  partes  est  divisa,  Gaul  is  divided  into  three  parts. 

3.  Divitiacus  flens,  a  Caes^re  haec  petebat,  Divitiacus,  weep- 

ing, hegged  these  things  from  Cwsar, 

4.  Labienus,  monte  occiipato,  nostros  expectabat,  Labienus, 

having  taken  possession  of  the  mountain,  was  waiting  for  our  men. 

5.  miles  pugnans  c^dit,  the  soldier  falls  fghting . 

6.  hostibus  fiigatis  Caesar  suos  rgvScavit,  when  the  enemy 

were  put  to  flight,  Ccesar  recalled  his  men. 

Obs.  The  Present  Participle  has  usually  the  same  meaning  and 
use  in  Latin  as  in  English.  It  denotes  the  action  as  going  on  at 
the  time  denoted  by  the  principal  verb.  The  Perfect  Participle  is 
used,  in  Ex.  2,  like  a  predicate  adjective,  but  the  ideals  conveyed  of 
the  action  being  completed  before  the  time  denoted  by  the  principal 
verb.     Note  the  translation  of  Exs.  3,  4,  5,  and  6. 

TIME    OF    THE    PARTICIPLE. 

258.  Rule  XXXIV.  —  The  participle  represents 
the  time  as  present,  past,  or  future,  relatively  to 
that  of  the  principal  verb. 


222  FIRST   STEPS  IN   LATIN. 


ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 

259.  In  Latin  there  is  no  Perfect  Participle  in  the  active 
voice.  Its  place  is  often  supplied  (1)  by  the  Ablative 
Absolute  (^.e.,  the  noun  and  the  participle  are  both  in  the 
ablative,  a  construction  similar  to  our  independent  case), 
or  (2)  by  a  Clause  with  a  Conjunction. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  urbe  capta  (abl.  abs.)  elves  fugerunt,  the  city  having  been 

taken,  or  being  taken,  or  after  the  city  had  been  taken,  the 
citizens  Jled. 

2.  urbe  a  CaesSre  capta,  cives  fugerunt,  when  the  city  had  been 

taken  by  Cmsar,  the  citizens  Jled . 

Obs.  Note  that  when  the  noun  and  participle  are  both  in  the  ab- 
lative, and  used  independently  of  the  rest  of  the  sentence,  the  con- 
struction is  called  ablative  absolute,  i.e.  absolute  meaning,  freed  from 
dependence.  (A  word  is  said  to  depend  on  another  when  its  case, 
gender,  number,  mode,  tense,  or  person  is  determined  by  that 
word.)  In  English,  the  Independent  Case  is  used  in  the  same  way 
with  Participles ;  as, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Noun  -f-  participle ;   as,  the  city  having  been  taken,  the  citizens 

fled. 

2.  Noun  +  being  -}-  adjective ;  as,  the  soldiers  being  brave,  the  enemy 

was  conquered. 

3.  Noun  -1-  being  +  noun ;  as,  he  came  to  Rome,  Ccesar  being  consul. 

Note  (1)  that  the  noun  in  the  Ablative  Absolute  denotes  a 
different  person  or  thing  from  that  denoted  by  any  other  word  in 
the  sentence ;  note  (2)  that  the  words  in  the  Ablative  Absolute 
express  the  time  or  circumstance  of  the  action  in  the  leading  clause ; 
note  (.3)  that  words  like  a  CaesSre,  modifying  the  Ablative  Abso- 
lute, stand  between  the  noun  and  the  participle.  Hence  the 
following  rule:  — 

ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 

260.  Rule  XXXV.  —  A  noun  or  pronoun,  with  a 
participle  or  an  adjective,  or  two  nouns,  may  he  put 
in  the  ahlative,  to  express  the  Time  or  Circumstance 
of  an  action. 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE.  223 


Translation  of  the  Partic/ijjles, 

EXAMPLES. 

L  audivlstine   me  id   dicentem,  did  you  hear  me  (lit.  mying 
that)  v^hen  I  said  that. 

2.  Caesar  eorum  prgcibiis  adductus  bellum  suscepit,  Coisar 

(lit.  having  been  influenced),  because  he  had  been  influenced 
by  their  entreaties,  undertook  the  icar. 

3.  milites  in  oppidum  accept!  elves  interfecerunt,  the  soldiers 

(lit.  having  been  received),  lohen  they  had  been  received  into 
the  toum,  killed  the  citizens. 

4.  ager  colendus  est,  the  field  must  be  cultivated. 

Obs.  Note  the  translation  of  each  participle;  that  the  time 
represented  by  the  participle  is  present,  past,  or  future,  relatively  to 
that  of  the  principal  verb.  Note,  finally,  that  the  gerundive,  used 
as  an  adjective,  has  the  meaning  of  inust  or  ought,  as  in  Ex.  4. 

261.   Directions  for  Parsing  a  Participle. 

Give  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb  ;  the  stems  from  which  each 
participle  is  formed;  name  the  participles;  mention  the  time  de- 
noted by  the  participle ;  decline ;  rule. 

Sight-Reading, 

STORY  OF  HORATius  {contmued) . 
Ut  primo  concursu  increpnere  arma,  horror  ingens  spec- 

as      at  first  onset  resound  nora.  spectators 

tantes  perstrinxit.      Statim  duo  Eomani  alius   super  alium 

seize  upon 

exspirantes   ceciderunt ;    tres   Albani    vulnerati    sunt.      Ro- 

oxpire  fall 

manos  jam  spes  deserebat.      Unum  Horatium  tres  Curiatii 

forsake 

circumsteterant.       Is,   quamvis    integer,    quia  tribus    impar 

surround  although  unhurt       because  unequal 

erat,  fugam  simulavit.     Jam  aliquantum  spatii  ex  eo  loco 

flight  pretend  some  distance 

ubi    pugnatum  est,   aufugerat,   cum   respiciens  videt   unum 

(they)  fought  flee  looking  back 

Curiatium  hand  procul  ab  se  esse.     Horatius  in  eum  magno 

not  far  against  him 

impetu  redit ;    hoc    interfecto,   alterum    delude,    priusquam 

returns  killed 

tertius  posset  consequT,  interfecit. 

was  able  to  come  up 


224  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIK. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Sole  oriente/  fugiunt  tenebrae.  2.  Bellum  Gallicum, 
Caesare  imperatore,  gestum  est.  3.  Puer,  me  invito,  abiit. 
4.  Gives  cum  liostibus  urbem  oppngnantibus  acriter  dimica- 
bant.      5.  Hostes,  victoriam  adept!,  in  castra  se  receperunt. 

6.  Milites,  pilis  eonjectis,  phalangem  hostium  perfregerunt. 

7.  Caesar,  urbe  capta,-  discessit.  8.  Exercitus  rediit,  belli 
casum  de  integro  tentaturus.  9.  Quis  est,  qui  me  unquam 
viderit  legentem?  10.  Hostes  ainnem  transgress!  castra 
mumverunt.  11.  Ex  amiss!s  civibus  dolor  fuit.  12.  Caesar 
cum  sola  decima  legione  profecturus  est.  13.  Solem  orien- 
tem^  cum  maxima  volnptate  spectamus. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  WJien  this  was  knoimi^  Caesar  departed.  2.  Wlien  this 
reply  had  been  given,  the  men  departed.  3.  Caesar,  when  he 
went  to  Gaul,  took  three  legions.  4.  Caesar,  aftei'  he  had 
subdued  Gaul,*  set  out  for  Rome.  5.  He  assists  others  ivith- 
out  robbiyig  himself.'^  6.  Under  Ccesar  as  commander,  the 
soldiers  fought  bravely.  7.  Many  things  go  on  without  your 
perceiving  it.^  8.  After  I  had  spoken,  you  went  away. 
9.  Because  their  leader  was  Mlled,  the  soldiers  ^ed.  10.  The 
soldiers,  by  throwing  their  weapons,  repulsed  the  line  of  the 
enemy.  11.  I  come  to  assist  you.  12.  Wheii  the  leader 
ordered,  the  soldiers  assaulted  the  town.  13.  This  happened 
one  hundred  years  before  the  founding  of  the  city.  14.  Did 
you  hear  me  ivhen  I  said  that  9  15.1  saw  my  friend  sitting 
in  the  garden  yesterday.  16.  Caesar  is  going  to  set  out  from 
the  camp  with  five  legions.  17.  Caesar  lost  his  father  when 
he  was^  sixteen  years  (old). 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Wheji  the  sun  rises,  temporal  clause. 

2.  Remember  that  there  is  no  perfect  active  participle ;  its  place  is 
supplied  by  the  ablative  absolute,  or  by  a  clause  with  cum ;  as,  urbe 
capta  =  cum  urbem  cepisset 


GERUND    AND    GEIUJNJUVE.  225 


0.  The  present  indicative  follows  the  third  conjugation.     See  176. 

4.  Observe  that  the  ablative  absolute  can  be  used  only  when  the 
subject  of  the  subordinate  clause  is  different  from  that  of  the  principal 
clause  (except  in  such  phrases  as  se  invito,  against  his  n-ill,  used  in 
indirect  discourse,  and  a  few  others  not  to  be  imitated. 

5.  Lit.  not  robbing  himself,  se  non  sp61ians. 

6.  Lit.  you  not  perceiving  it,  te  non  sentiente. 

7.  Use  Sgens,  present  participle. 

Note  that  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  often  weaken  the  char- 
acteristic vowel  of  the  stem  to  i ;  as,  ni6ni-tus.  Sometimes  this  vowel 
disappears ;  as,  dSceo,  doc-tus. 

How  many  participles  may  a  transitive  verb  have  ?  What  is  a 
participle  ?  Give  the  meaning  of  the  word.  Show  how  the  participle 
is  used  as  a  verb,  and  as  an  adjective.  What  time  do  participles  de- 
note ?  How  are  they  generally  best  translated  ?  What  is  the  meaning 
of  absolute  ?  Of  ablative  absolute  ?  Have  we  a  similar  construction  in 
English  1  Explain  the  English  construction.  Give  the  rule  for  the  abla- 
tive absolute  in  Latin.  When  is  one  word  said  to  depend  on  another  ? 
What  active  participle  is  found  in  English,  but  not  in  Latin  ?  {Ans. 
The  perfect ;  as,  having  loved.)  Give  the  stem  and  ending  of  the  present 
participle  of  ^mo. 

LESSON    LXXV. 
GEKUND   AND   GEEUraiVE. 

EXERCISE     FOR     SIGHT-READING. 

262.  The  Gerund  is  a  verbal  novm  of  the  Second 
Declension,  used  only  in  the  Genitive,  Dative,  Accusa- 
tive, and  Ablative  singular.  It  corresponds  to  the 
English  verbal  noun  in  -ing. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Smandi  causa,  jTor  the  sake  of  loving. 

2.  utilis  bibendo,  useful  for  drinking. 

3.  ad  agriim  arandum,  for  ploughing  the  field. 

4.  dScendo  discimus,  we  learn  hy  teaching. 

1.  The  Nominative  of  the  Gerund  is  supplied  by  the  Present 
Infinitive. 

EXAMPLE. 

scribgre  est  utile,  ivriting  (Jo  write)  is  useful. 


226 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


2.  The  Gerund  and  Gerundive  are  formed  b}'  adding  -7idJ 
and  -ndus,  respectively,  to  the  present  stem. 


PARADIGM. 


Gerund. 

rc)rinatioii. 

Example. 

English. 

Pres.  stem  +  ndi    -' 

[ 

amandi 
monendi 
regendi 
audiendi  ^ 

of  J  ov  in  (J. 
ofadvis'nuj. 
of  rxdiny. 
of  hearing. 

Gerundive. 

Pres.  stem  +  ndus  ; 

[ 

amandus 

monendus 

regendus 

audiendus 

j  to  be  loved, 

I  deservimj  to  he  loved. 

to  he  (idrised. 

to  he  ruled. 

to  he  heard. 

3.   Declension  of  the  Gerund. 


Cases. 

Exainx)le. 

English. 

NoM. 

Gen. 

l^AT. 

Acc. 
Arl. 

amare 

amandi 

amando 
\  amare,  or  with  a  pro-  ( 
I      position  amandum  \ 

amando 

to  lore. 

of  lovirtfj. 

to  or  for  loving. 

loCIUIJ. 

with,  from,  or  hy  loving. 

*:XAMPLES. 

XoM.  scribgre  est  utile,  (to  write)  loriting  is  useftd. 
(iEX.    ars  scribendl  est  utilis,  the  art  of  ivriting  is  useful. 
j)at.    charta  scribendo  est  utilis,  paper  is  usefid  for  meriting. 
.      ^  j  scribgre  disco,  /  learn  to  write ;  or, 

I  inter  scribendum  disco,  I  learn  during  writing. 
Abl.    scribendo  discimus,  ve  learn  hy  ivriting. 

Obs.  Note  that  the  accu.sative  case  of  the  gerund  is  found  only 
after  prepositions,  and  cannot  be  used  as  the  direct  object  of  a 
transitive  verb. 


GERUND   AND    GERUNDIVE.  227 

4.  The  (ieruiid  governs  the  same  case  as  its  verb. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  jus  v6candi  sgnatum,  the  authority  (of  convening^  to  con- 

vene the  senate. 

2.  consilium  urbem  cSpiendi,  the  design  of  taking  the  city. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  sentences  the  gerund  is  used  in  each, 
with  its  object  in  the  accusative ;  but  instead  of  using  the  gerund 
with  its  object  in  the  accusative,  we  generally  use  the  gerundive 
in  agreement  with  the  noun,  which  then  takes  the  case  of  the 
gerund;  as, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  jus  sSnatus  v6candi,  the  authority  of  convening  the  senate. 

2.  consilium  urbis  capiendae,  the  design  of  taking  the  city. 

5.  Equivalent  Gerundive  Forms  :  — 

IsToM.    urbem  capgre  (infirx.),  to  take  a  city. 

Gen.  urbem  capiendi,  or  using  the  Gerundive  =  urbis  cSpi- 
endae,  of  taking  a  city. 

Dat.  urbem  capiendo,  or  using  the  Gerundive  =  urbi  c5pi- 
endae,  to  or  for  taking  a  city. 

Ace.  urbem  capere  (infin.)  ;  Ace.  after  a  preposition  =  (ad) 
urbem  cS.piendum,  or  using  the  Gerundive  =  ad 
urbem    cS.piendam,  taking  a  city. 

Abl.  urbem  capiendo,  or  using  the  Gerundive  =  urbe  capi- 
endo, ivith,  front,  by  taking  a  city. 

The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

GERUNDIVE    CONSTRUCTION. 

263.  Rule  XXXVI.  —  Instead  of  the  g-eruiid  witli 
its  object  in  the  accusative,  the  gerundive  is  gener- 
ally used,  the  noun  taking-  the  case  of  the  gerund, 
and  the  gerundive  agreeing  with  the  noun  in 
gender,  number,  and  case. 

Obs.  1.    The  rule  requires  the  following  changes  :  — 

1.  The  Accusative  is  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  Gerund. 

2.  The  Gerund  is  changed  to  the  Gerundive. 

3.  The  Gerundive  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender,  number,  and 

case.     This  construction  is  called  the  gerundive  construction. 


228  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


EXAMPLKS. 

1.  agricola  li6mines  misit  ad  agrum.  arandum  (gerundive), 

t lie  farmer  sent  men  (for  plowiiig)  to  plow  the  f  eld. 

2.  ad  eas  res  conficiendas  (gerundive)  Orggtorix  deligitur, 

Orgetorix  is  chosen  {for  executing)  to  execute  these  plans  — 
ad  eas  res  conficiendiim  (gerund),  etc. 

3.  ars  pu€r6s  educandi  difficilis  est,  the  art  of  training  hoys 

is  difficult. 

Obs.  2.  In  the  dative,  and  in  the  ahlatire  u-ith  a  preposition,  the 
gerund  with  a  direct  object  is  rarely  used.  Generally  after  preposi- 
tions the  gerundive  construction  should  be  used  ;  as,  ad  capiendam 
urbem,  not  ad  capiendum  urb em,  /or  taking  the  city. 

Obs.  3.  The  gerundive  construction  can  l)e  used  only  after  verbs 
that  take  the  accusative,  so  also  after  utor,  fruor,  fungor,  p6tior, 
and  vescor,  which  in  early  Latin  were  followed  by  the  accusative. 
If  the  verb  is  intransitive,  or  governs  any  otlier  case  than  the  accusa- 
tive, tlu;  gerundive  is  used  imiiersonally  with  est  in  the  nominative 
singular  neuter. 

EXAMPLE. 

1.  vSletudinI  parcendum  est,  the  health  must  he  spared  (lit., 
there  must  he  sparing  of  the  health). 

Obs.  4.  The  gerundive  construction  cannot  be  used  when  the 
object  is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  an  adjective,  as  it  would  be  impossible 
to  distinguish  the  gender. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  stildium  Sgendi  ^liquid,  desire  of  doing  something. 

2.  ciipiditas  plura  habendi,  greed  for  having  more. 

264.    Gerund  and  Gerundive  Constructions. 

1.  The  genitive  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  is  used  after  nouns 
and  adjectives  as  an  objective  genitive. 

a.  The  genitive  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  is  common  with 
causa, /ar  the  sake  of  to  express  purpose. 

2.  The  dative  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  is  used  after  adjec- 
tives (rarely  after  nouns)  that  are  followed  by  the  dative  of  nouns. 

3.  The  accusative  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  is  used  after  the 
preposition  ad,  to  denote  purpose,  and  sometimes  after  inter,  circa, 
ob ;  also  after  verbs  signifying  to  give,  to  deliver,  to  agree  for,  to 
have,  to  receive,  to  undertake,  to  demand. 


GERUND   AND    GERUNDIVE.  229 

4.  The  ablative  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  is  used  to  express 
means,  or  cause  (rarely  of  manner),  and  after  the  prepositions  a,  ab, 
de,  e,  ex,  in  (rarely  after  cum  and  pro). 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  spes  urbis   delendae,   the   hope  of  destroying  the   city;    or, 

audiendi  ctipidus,  desirous  of  hearing. 

2.  5qua  utilis  est  bibendo,  umter  is  useful  for  drinking.    (See 

263.  Obs.  2.) 

3.  ad  discendum  propensi  siimus,  we  are  inclined  to  learn  ;  or, 

Caesar  pontem  in  ArSri  faciendum  curat,  Ccesar  {takes 
care  to  have)  has  a  bridge  built  over  the  Arar. 

4.  mens  discendo  alitur,  the  mind  is  nourished  by  learning.  (See 

263.  Obs.  2.) 

VOCABUT.AKY. 

im-pello,  -pellSre,  -piili,  -pulsum,  drive  against,  impede. 

cresco,  crescerS,  crevi,  cretum,  groiu,  increase. 

au-fugio,  fiigere,  fugi,  fugitum,  flee  away. 

p6tior,  -iri,  -itus  sum,  take  possession  of. 

Sliquantus,  -a,  -um,  some. 

pareo,  parere,  parui,  paritum,  obey. 

de-ligo,  -ligere,  -legl,  -lectum,  choose  out. 

crSmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  bwm. 

vinculum,  -i,  n.,  bond,  fetter. 

EXERCISES. 
Convert  the  following  into  the  gerundive  construction  :  — 
1.  Ars  pueros  educandi  difficilis  est.  2.  Dat  operam 
agros  colendo.  3.  Jus  vocandi  senatum.  4.  Galli  legiones 
opprimendT  consilium  ceperunt.  5.  Cupido  urbem  condendi 
eum  cepit.  6.  Agricola  homines  misit  agrum  arandi  causa. 
7.  Ad  eas  res  conficiendum  Orgetorix  deligitur.  8.  Mer- 
catores  ea  important  quae  ad  effeminandum  animos  pertinent. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  In  ambiilando  mecum  cogito.  2.  NatandT  ars  utilis 
est.      3.  Ars  civitatem  gubernaudl  difficillima  est.      4.   In 


230  FIKST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

libris  tuTs  legendTs  hos  tres  dies  cum  miilta  voluptate  exegi. 
5.  Ars  cTvitatis  gubernandae  est  difficiUima.  6.  Proficis- 
cendiim-  mihi  erat  illo  ipso  die.  7.  Hostes  in  spem  veneraut 
potiendorum  casu'oriim.  8.  Caesar  loqiiendi  finem  facit. 
9.  Asinus  id5neus  est  onera  portando.  10.  Asinus  idoneus 
est  oneribiis  portandTs.  11.  CatilTna  bellum  suscepit  rei- 
publicae  dSlendae  causa.     12.  Ager  colendus  est. 


Sight- Reading . 

STORY  OF  HORATius  (contiuued) . 
Jam   singuli   siipererant,  sed  uec  spe   nee  vTribus   pares. 

one  on  oacli  side      survive 

Alterius  erat  intactum   ferro   corpus,   et   geminata   victoria 

untouched  double 

ferox  animus.     Alter  fessura  vulnere  fessum  cursu  trahebat 

weary  running         drag 

corpus.     Nec  illud  proelium  fuit.    Romanus  exsultans  Alba- 

exult 

num  male  sustinentem  arma  conficit,  jacentemque  spoliat. 

holding  up  kill  lying  prostrate         strip 

NOTES     AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  stem  of  audio  is  here  audie-. 

2.  Tlie  gerundive  used  impersonally. 

What  is  a  gerund  "i  How  is  the  gerund  declined?  Wliat  is  used  as 
the  nominative  of  the  gerund  ?  How  is  the  gerund  formed  ?  Is  the 
gerund  ever  used  in  the  plural  ?  What  is  generally  used  instead  of 
the  gerund  with  its  object  ? 

Note  that  the  gerundive  has  three  uses:  (1)  The  predicate  use  with 
the  verh  sum,  to  form  the  passive  periphrastic  conjugation  (286) ;  as, 
urbs  delenda  est,  the  city  must  he.  dfstroyed,  see  288.  (2)  The  imper- 
sonal use  (263.  Obs.  3)  in  the  neuter  gender,  with  the  verb  est,  witli 
the  same  force  as  above ;  as,  pugnatum  est  mihi,  /  vmst  fight  (lit., 
Jightwg  must  he  done  by  me).  (3)  The  gerundive  use,  which  is  always 
active  in  meaning,  being  equivalent  to  the  gerund  (see  263).  With 
transitive  verbs  the  personal  construction  is  regularly  used ;  as, 
Spistiila  mihi  est  scribenda,  /  vmst  write  a  letter  (lit.,  a  letter  must  be 
ivritten  by  me). 


INFLECTION   ANT)   SYNTAX   f)F   SrPrNP:S. 


231 


LESSON   LXXVL 
INFLECTION   AND   SYNTAX   OF  SUPINES. 

EXERCISE    FOR    SIGHT-READING. 

265.  The  Supine  is  a  Verbal  Noun  of  the  Fourth  Declen- 
sion, used  only  in  the  accusative  and  ablative.  The  supine 
in  -Mm,  sometimes  called  the  Former  Supine,  is  used  only 
after  verbs  of  motion  to  express  purpose^  like  the  P^nglish 
infinitive ;  the  supine  in  -u^  sometimes  called  the  Latter 
Supine,  is  used  after  adjectives,  and  rarely  after  verbs,  as 
the  ablative  of  specification. 

1.  The  Supine  has  the  same  form  as  the  neuter  of  the  perfect 
participle ;  the  Former  Supine  is  formed  by  adding  -turn  (or  -siaii) 
to  the  present  stem  of  the  1st,  2d,  and  4th,  and  to  the  verb-stem  of 
the  3d  conjugations  (the  final  letter  of  which  is  generally  modified 
before  t^  and  in  the  second  conjugation  i  is  inserted  before  /)  ; 
the  Latter  Supine  is  formed  by  adding  -lu  (or  -su). 


PARADIGM 

Former  Supine. 

Formation. 

Example. 

English. 

c 

amatum 

to  love. 

Verb-stem  -f  turn     . 

monitum 
rectum 

to  advise, 
to  rule. 

I 

auditum 

to  hear. 

Latter  Supine. 

Verb-stem  -f  tu        .] 

amatu 

to  love,  or  to  he  loved. 

monitu 
rectu 

to  advise,  or  to  he  advised. 

to  rule,  or  to  he  riUed. 

auditu 

to  hear,  or  to  he  heard. 

Uses  of  the  Supine. 

EXAMPLES. 

legates  mittunt  rQgatum  auxilium,  thejj  send  ambassadors  to 

ask  for  aid. 
venerunt  pacem  pStitum,  thef/  came  to  ask  for  peace. 
id  facile  factii  est,  this  is  easy  to  do,  or  to  be  do?ie. 


232  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

Obs.  Note,  in  the  first  two  of  the  foregoing  examples,  that  the 
supines  rdgatum  and  pgtitum  are  construed  with  mittunt  and 
venerunt,  both  verbs  of  motion ;  tliese  supines  express  the  purpose 
of  the  motion.  In  Ex.  3  the  supine  is  used  with  the  adjective 
fScile,  and  answers  the  question  in  ichat  respect?  (298.)  Note, 
further,  that  rdgatum  and  pgtitum  are  each  followed  by  the 
accusative,  the  same  case  that  the  verbs  r6go  and  p6to  require. 
The  idioms  are  expressed  in  the  following  rules :  — 

FORMER    SUPINE. 

266.  Rule  XXXVII.  —  The  supine  in  -um  is  used 
after  verbs  of  motion,  to  express  the  purpose  of  the 
motion. 

1.  The  supine  in  -um  governs  the  same  case  as  its  verb. 

LATTER    SUPINE. 

267.  Rule  XXXVIII.  —  The  supine  in  -u  is  used 
to  limit  the  meanings  of  adjectives  sigrnifying  tvonder- 
fulf  agreeable,  easy  or  difficult,  worthy  or  iimvorthy, 
honorable  or  base,  and  the  nouns  /as,  nefds,  and 
6pu8, 

1.  The  supine  in  -u  takes  no  object. 

Obs.  1.  The  future  infinitive  passive  ^Un&tum  iri  is  made  up  of 
the  present  infinitive  passive  of  eo,  /  (jo,  and  the  supine  in  -um  of 
Sjno,  and  is,  literally  translated,  it  is  beinc/  gone  (by  somebody)  to 
love ;  so  that  the  apparent  (or  logical)  subject  is  really  the  gram- 
matical object. 

Obs.  2.  The  supine  in  -um  is  not  very  common ;  only  about  two 
hundred  and  fifty  verbs,  chiefly  of  the  first  and  third  conjugations, 
have  a  supine ;  the  supine  in  -a  is  still  less  common.  Hence  the 
propriety  of  calling  the  third  stem  the  particimal  stem,  as  Vani9ek 
and  other  noted  grammarians  have  done. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Legati  totius  fere  Galliae  ad  Caesarem  gratiilatum 
couvenerunt.  2.  Orator  dlgnus  est  auditu.  3.  Divitiacus 
Romam  ad  senatum  venit  auxilium  postulatuni.  4.  Id  facile 
dictu  est.      5.  Aedul  legatos  ad  Caesarem  mittunt  rogatum 


INFLECTION   AND    SYNTAX  OF   SUJMNFS.  233 

auxilium.^  6.  Fas  est  dictu ;  nefas  est  dictu.  7.  ExclfisT 
eos,  quos  tii  ad  me  salutatum  miseras.  8.  In  urbem  migravl 
habitatum.  9.  Ariovistus  dixit  omnes  Galliae  civitates  ad 
se  oppugnandum  venisse. 

Sight'Reading, 

STORY  OF  iioRATius  (coucluded) . 

Romani  ovantes  ac  gratulantes  Horatium  accipiunt,  et  do- 
rejoice  cheering 

mum  deducunt.    Princeps  ibat  Horatius,  trium  fratrum  spolia 

home         conduct  first  go 

prae  se  gerens.     Cm  obvia  fiiit  soror,  quae  desponsa  fuerat 

before  him      bear  him  met  betrothed 

uni  ex  Curiatiis,  visoque  super  limeros  fratris  paludamento 

on 

sponsT,  quod  ipsa  confecerat,  flere  et  crines  solvere  coepit. 

make  hair  tear  begin 

Movit  ferocis  jiivenis  animum  comploratio  sororis  in  tanto 

stir  fierce  youth  temper  weeping 

gaudio   publico ;    stricto    itaque   gladio   transflgit   puellam, 

drawn  therefore  sword  stab 

siraul  earn  verbis  increpans  :   "  Abi  hinc  cum  immaturo  amore 

at  the  same  time  chide  go     hence  untimely  love 

ad  sponsum  tuum,  oblita  fratrum,  oblita  patriae."     Sic  eat 

forgetting  (your)  brothers  perish 

quaecumque  Romana  lugebit  hostem. 

whatever 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Accusative  after  rSgatum. 

What  is  a  gerund  1  What  is  the  gerundive  ?  How  many  cases  has 
the  gerund  ?  What  is  used  as  the  nominative  of  the  gerund  ?  Is  the 
gerund  used  in  the  plural  1  When  is  the  gerundive  used  instead  of  the 
gerund  1  Remember  that  the  gerundive  construction  is  preferred  to 
the  gerund  construction,  unless  the  use  of  the  former  would  cause 
ambiguity.  In  connection  with  the  prepositions,  the  gerundive  con- 
struction is  always  used.  What  is  a  supine  "?  How  many  supines  has 
a  Latin  verb  1  From  what  stem  are  they  formed  1  After  what  verbs 
may  supines  be  used  ?  After  what  other  words  may  the  supine  be 
used "?     Give  the  rules  for  the  use  of  the  supine. 


234  FIKST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

LESSON   LXXVII. 

LOCATIVE. 

PLACE    WHITHER?    WHENCE?    WHERE? 

268.  The  name  of  the  place  wliither^  whence^  and 
where^  regularly  requires  a  preposition. 

1.  The  name  of  the  place  whither,  or  to  which,  regularly  requires 
ad  or  in  with  the  accusative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  in  Galliam,  into  Gaul. 

2.  in  urbem,  into  the  city. 

3.  ad  urbem,  towards  {the  vicinity  of)  the  city. 

4.  ad  Romam,  towards  {the  vicinity  of)  Rome. 

Ohs.  Note  that  at,  meaning  near,  not  in,  is,  with  all  names  of 
places,  to  be  translated  by  ad  or  apud,  with  the  accusative. 

2.  The  name  of  the  place  whence,  or  from  whicJi,  regularly 
requires  a,  ab,  de,  e,  or  ex,  with  the  ablative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  ab  urbe,  anmy  from  the  city. 

2.  ex  Africa,  //-om  {out  of)  Africa. 

3.  ex  oppido,  from  the  town. 

i.  a  Roma.,  fro7n  about  {the  vicinity  of)  Rome. 

3.  The  name  of  the  place  where,  or  in  ichich,  regularly  requires 
in  with  the  ablative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  in  Gallia,  in  Gaul.  3.  in  Africa,  in  Africa. 

2.  in  portu,  in  the  harbor.         4.  in  castris,  in  the  camp. 

Katnes  of  I*laces, 

269.  Rule  XXXIX.  —  Relations  of  place  are  ex- 
pressed by  a  noun  with  a  prejiosition ;  but  with 
names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  and  also  with 
domtiSf  riis,  and  a  few  other  words,  the  preposition 
is  omitted,  and 

PLACE    TO    WHICH. 

1.  The  name  of  the  place  whither,  or  to  which,  is  juit  in  the 
Accusative. 


LOCATIVE.  235 


PLACE    FROM    WHICH. 

2.  The  name  of  the  place  whence,  or  froiri  which,  is  put  in  the 
Ablative. 

PLACE    IN    WHICH. 

3.  The  name  of  the  place  ichere,  or  in  lohich,  takes  the  Locative. 

270.  The  Locative  has  tlie  same  form  as  tlie  Dative  in 
the  first  and  third  declensions  ;  in  the  second  declension  it 
has  the  same  form  as  the  Genitive.  In  the  plural  of  all  three 
declensions,  Dative,  Locative,  and  Ablative  are  alike. 

EXAMPLES. 

Locative. 

Sing.  IstDecl.  Roma,  Rome ;  Romae,  at  Rome. 

2d      "      'BxvindCiByynn.,  Brundlsium ;  'Brund.isii,  at  Brundisium. 

3d     "      Karthago,  Crtr//?a</e;  K.a.rtha.Qini,  at  Carthar/e. 

Plur.  1st     "      A-thenae,  Athens ;  Athenis,  at  A the?is. 

2d      "      Delphi,  Delphi;  Delphis,  at  Delphi. 

3d      "      Cures,  Cures ;  Curibus,  at  Owes. 

1.  A  similar  construction  is  used  with  the  words  :  — 
ddmuni,  home  ;  dQmo,  from  home ;     d6ini,  at  home. 
iViB,into  the  country;   rure(-i),  from  the      xwci  {e),  in  the  country. 
ddmds,  home.  country ;  m'U.itia.e,  in  military  service. 

terra,  by  land.  belli,  abroad. 

inS.ri,  by  sea.  hiimi,  on  the  ground. 

2.  That  is  — 

a.  D6mus  in  both  numbers,  and  rus  in  the  singular,  are  put  after 
verbs  of  motion  in  the  accusative,  like  names  of  towns,  without  a  pre- 
position ;  but  if  a  genitive  or  possessive  pronoun  limits  d6nium,  the 
preposition  in  or  ad  may  be  used,  as  in  d6mum  meam,  to  my  house. 

b.  The  ablatives  d6m6,  htimo,  riire,  are  used  like  the  names  of 
towns,  to  denote  the  place  from  ivhich. 

c.  The  ablatives  16c6, 16cis,  parte,  partlbus,  dextra,  on  the  right, 
laeva,  sinistra,  on  the  left  hand,  terra,  on  kmd,  and  mSri,  on  sea, 
especially  when  they  are  modified  by  adjectives,  are  often  used  like 
names  of  towns,  without  a  preposition. 

d.  The  forms  d6mi  (gen.  dSmus),  at  home,  belli  (used  with 
d6mi),  abroad,  militiae,  in  military  service,  hflnii,  07i  the  ground, 
being  locatives,  take  no  preposition. 


236  FIRST   STErS   IN   LATIN. 

Examples  Illustrating  the  Uses  of  the  Locative  :  — 

1.  in  Galliam  contendit,  he  hastens  into  GaiiL 

2.  ab  urbe  venit,  he  came  from  the  city. 

3.  Srat  in  Gallia  legio  una,  one  legion  was  in  Gaul. 

4.  R5mani  venit,  he  came  to  Rome. 

5.  dSmum  venit,  he  came  home. 

6.  Roma  venit,  he  came  from  Rome. 

7.  d6m6  duxgrat,  he  had  brought  from  home. 

8.  Romae  vixit,  he  lived  at  Rome. 

9.  CSrinthi  pugros  dScebat,  he  taught  hoys  at  Corinth. 

10.  nihil  d6mi  gestum  est,  nothing  has  been  done  at  home. 

11.  d6mi  militiaeque,  m3.ri  atque  terra,  at  home  and  abroad, 

on  land  and  on  sea. 

Obs.  1.  In  the  foregoing  examples  note  that  1,  2,  and  3  illustrate 
the  general  rule ;  in  Exs.  4,  6,  and  8,  the  words  denoting  the  place 
to  which,  the  place  from  which,  and  the  j^lo-ce  at  which,  are  names  of 
towns,  and  the  preposition  is  therefore  omitted.  In  Exs.  5  and  7 
ddmum  and  ddmo  are  in  the  accusative  and  ablative  without  a 
preposition.  In  Ex.  11  tlie  locative  forms  d6mi  and  mGitiae  are 
used  without  a  preposition,  and  also  mSxi  and  terra.  Note  that 
in  the  first  and  third  declensions  the  locative  is  the  same  as  the 
dative;  in  the  second  declension  it  takes  the  form  of  the  genitive. 
In  the  plural  of  all  three  declensions,  dative  locative,  and  ablative 
are  alike. 

Supplementary  Examples  :  — 

1.  in  Gallorum  finibus,  in  the  territory  of  the  Gauls. 

2.  a  Gallia  contendit,  he  hastens  away  from  Gaul. 

3.  Romam  pr6fectus  est,  he  set  out  for  Rome. 

4.  RomS.  pr6fectus  est,  he  set  out  from  Rome. 

5.  Romae  vixit,  he  lived  at  Rome. 

6.  Athenis  vixit,  he  lived  at  Athens. 

7.  d6mi  vixit,  he  lived  at  home. 

8.  Karthagini  (e)  vixit,  he  lived  at  Carthage. 

9.  Atlienia  iTl^iMnt,  they  flee  from  Athens.  , 

10.  Brundisii  vixit,  he  lived  at  Brundisium. 

11.  d6mum  venit,  he  came  home. 

12.  d6m6  prSfectus,  having  set  out  from  home. 

13.  miles  hum!  jScebat,  the  soldier  was  lying  on  the  ground. 

14.  belli  d6mique,  in  icar  and  in  peace. 

15.  d6mi  militiaeque,  at  home  and  abroad. 

IG.  terra  m^ique  (seldom  mSri  et  terra),  by  land  and  sea. 


lo(;ative.  237 


Obs.  2.  Note  that  when  we  wish  to  express  simply  motion 
towards  a  place,  or  that  one  is  near,  or  in  the  vicinity  of  a  place, 
prepositions  must  be  used,  even  with  names  of  towns  and  small 
islands,  because  it  would  be  impossible  to  tell  whether  Romam 
ivit  meant  he  ivent  to  Rome,  or  toicards  Rome;  or  Roma  venit, 
he  came  from  Rome,  or  J'rom  the  vicinity  of  Rome. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Romam  profectus  est,  he  ivent  to  Rome  ; 

ad  Romam  prSfectus  est,  he  set  out  tonmrds  Rome. 

2.  GSnavam  pervenit,  he  came  to  Geneva; 

ad  Genavam  -pex^emtjie  arrived  in  the  neiyhhorhood  of  Genera. 

3.  Capua  venit,  he  came  from  Capua; 

a  CSpua  venit,  lie  came  from  about  Capua. 

271.  The  way  or  road  hy  which  is  put  in  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Aurelia  via  pr6fectus  est,  he  set  out  hy  the  Aurelian  way. 

2.  exeroitum  vado  transducit,  he  leads  his  army  across  hy  a  ford. 

VOCABULARY. 

hiems,  -Smis,  f.,  winter.  at-tingo,-tinggre,-tigi,-tactum, 

initus,  -a,  -tim,  (part,  of  ineo),  touch. 

having  begun.  strepitus,  -us,  m.,  noise. 

Athenae,  -arum,  f.,  Athens.  ab-do,    -dere,    -didi,   -dltum, 

de-fendo,  -dere,  -di,  -sum,  ivard  hide,  conceal. 

off,  defend.  con-cido,  -cidgre,  -cidi,  -cisum, 

im-pSdio,  -Ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum,  cut  to  pieces,  kill. 

entangle,  impede.  per-solvo,      -solvere,      -solvT, 

cSlSmitas,  -atis,  f.,  loss,  calamity.  -sSlutum,  pay,  render. 

con-s6quor,  -qui,  -cutus  sum,  rgpentinus,    -a,    -um,    sudden, 

dep.,  follow  after.  unlooked  for. 
jaceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  lie. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Consul  in  Italiam  profectus  est.  2.  Cicero  profectus 
est  Atheuas,  in  urbem^  celeberrimam.  3.  Consul  Roma 
Athenas  profectus  est.  4.  Caesar  Romam  profectus  est. 
5.  Puer  veuiebat  domum.     6.  Puer  profectus  est  rils.     7.  Cas- 


238  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

tris  se  tenuit.  8.  Vir  multos  aniios  doiiii  vixit.  9.  Miles 
liiimi  jricebat.  10.  Atticus,  Ciceronis  amicus,  multos  auuos 
Athenis  vIxit.  11.  KarthaginI  reges  creabantur.  12.  Mag- 
nas  res  Pompejus  dorai  militiaeque,  terra  marlque  gessit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Cciesar  came  to  the  camp.     2.  Caesar  came  into  Gaul. 

3.  Caesar  came  from  Gaul.  4.  The  consul  lived  at  Rome. 
r>.  The  consul  came  from  Rome  to  Athens.  0.  Caesar  came 
into  Italy.  7.  The  bo}'  set  out  for  home.  8.  In  the  summer 
my  friends  and  I  shall  depart  from  Rome.  9.  I  shall  set  out 
for  Miletus,  they  will  set  out  for  Athens.  10.  In  the  first 
watch,  the  soldiers  departed  from  the  camp  with  a  great 
tumult.  11.  Caesar  set  out  for  Rome.  12.  Caesar  set  out 
from  Rome.  13.  Caesar  wished  to  be  first  at  Rome.  14.  I 
will  depart  into  the  country  at  the  beginning  of  summer. 
15.  My  friend  lived  many  years  at  Athens.  16.  Your  friend 
lived  many  years  at  my  house.  17.  Man}-  apples  lay  on  the 
ground. 

Sui)plementary  P^xercises  :  — 

1.  I  will  dwell  at  Athens,  l)ut  you  at  Rome.  2.  Many 
great  generals  were  born  at  Rome.     3.   lie  died  at  Corinth. 

4.  The  soldiers  lie  on  the  ground  in  summer.  5.  Caesar, 
(when  lie  was)  made  qua3stor,  hastened  from  Italy  to  Spain. 
T).  He  came  into  Italy.  7.  They  were  with  me  both  in  peace 
and  in  war.     8.   He  returned  from  the  city  to  the  country. 

9.  I   have    lived    at  Athens,    at    Rome,    and    at    Carthage. 

10.  When  the  speech  had  ])een  delivered,  Caesar  departed. 

11.  He  came  to  Rome  in  the  consulship  of  Cicero.  12.  In 
Ca^^sar's  consulship,  the  Germans  crossed  the  Rhine. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  If  urbs  or  oppidum  is  added  in  apposition,  tlie  preposition  in 
must  be  used. 

How  is  the  place  to  ivhich  expressed  ?  Tlie  place  from  which  ?  The 
}>lace  at  which,  or  where  ?  AVitli  names  of  towns,  liow  is  the  place  to 
tchich,  the  place  frovi  u-hich,  and   tlie  place  at  irhich  expressed  ?      With 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MODE.  239 

nouns  of  tlio  first  declension,  wliat  form  docs  tlic  locative  take  ?  Write 
the  locative  of  Roma,  Athenae,  Thebae.  With  nouns  of  the  third 
declension,  what  form  does  the  locative  take  ?  AVrite  the  locative  of 
Cures,  Gades,  Karthago.  With  nouns  of  the  second  declension, 
what  form  does  the  locative  take?  Write  the  locative  of  Argi  (pi.)* 
Delphi  (pi.))  Cdrinthus.  With  all  plural  noims,  what  form  does  the 
locative  take  ?  Write  the  locative  of  Athenae,  Argi,  Thebae,  Curgs, 
Delphi.  Write  the  Latin  for  at  home,  on  the  ground,  at  Atliens,  at  Rome, 
at  Cures,  at  Corinth,  at  Carthage.  Is  the  preposition  ever  expressed 
with  names  of  towns  ?  AVhen,  and  for  what  purpose  ?  Write  in  Latin  : 
he  icent  to  Home;  he  u-ent  towards,  or  near,  Home;  lie  came  from  Home; 
lie  came  from  {the  neighborhood  of)  Home. 


LESSON   LXXVIII. 

SUBJUNOTIVE    MODE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    OF    SUM.-D^T\^IE    OF    POSSESSOR. 

Obs.  1.  The  verb  asserts  action  or  being.  The  Modes  of  the 
verb  are  used  to  denote  the  manner  in  which  the  action  or  being  is 
asserted.  The  Indicative  Mode  asserts  the  action  or  being  as  a 
fact;  as,  I  write.  Here  writing  is  asserted  as  an  actual  fact.  The 
Imperative  Mode  asserts  the  action  not  as  an  actual  or  possible 
fact,  but  as  a  command ;  as,  James,  write  the  letter.  Writing  is  not 
asserted  as  a  fact,  but  James  is  ordered  to  make  it  a  fact.  The 
Subjunctive  Mode  is  used  to  express  the  action  or  being  not  as  a 
fact,  but  as  merely  conceived,  or  thought  of;  as,  if  I  should  ivrite. 
Here  irrlting  is  asserted  not  as  an  actual  fact,  but  only  as  thought  of 
or  conceived  in  the  mind,  without  regard  to  its  becoming  an  actual 
fact.  So  with  /  may  rcrite ;  ivriting  is  not  asserted  as  an  actual  fact, 
but  only  as  a  possible  or  doubtful  fact.  As  the  assertions  of  fact 
are  made  more  often  in  principal  sentences,  it  is  obvious  that  the 
indicative  chiefly  is  used  in  such  clauses ;  but  the  subjunctive  is 
used,  even  in  independent  clauses,  to  express  an  action  doubtfidly 
or  indirectly,  or  to  represent  it  as  possible,  not  as  7'eal. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  sint  beati,  ?nag  they  be  happy. 

2.  amemus  patriam,  let  us  love  our  country. 
?).  quid  f  S.ciam,  what  am  I  to  do  ? 

Obs.  2.  Tlie  subjunctive  in  Ex.  1  expresses  a  7vish,  representing 
the  action  as  desired  ;  the  indicative  would  assert  as  a  fact  that  they 


240 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


are  happy.  Ex.  2  expresses  a  command  indirecthj,  i.e.  commanding 
an  act  in  which  the  first  or  third  person  is  to  be  the  actor ;  the 
imperative  is  used  to  express  a  direct  command.  The  question  in 
Ex.  o  implies  doubt,  or  uncertainty,  and  hence  the  subjunctive  is 
used.  The  indicative  is  used  in  asking  questions  that  do  not 
imply  doubt. 

Obs.  3.  The  pupil  should  note  that  may,  can,  must,  might,  could, 
would,  shoidd,  when  denoting  emphasis  or  contrast,  or  meaning  joe?-- 
mission  or  duty,  are  not  the  signs  of  the  subjunctive,  but  require 
separate  verbs ;  as,  the  soldiers  can  Jiyht,  meaning  the  soldiers  are 
able  to  Jicjht  —  militgs  pugnare  possunt.  May  and  miyht  are  usually 
rendered  by  the  proper  tenses  of  licet;  can  and  could,  by  possum; 
must  and  .should,  by  Sportet,  nScesse  est,  or  the  gerundive. 

Obs.  4.  The  translations  of  the  subjunctive  mode  given  below 
in  connection  with  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  are  the  most 
common  meanings  when  used  in  independent  sentences.  Tlie 
meanings  in  dependent  sentences  will  be  illustrated  in  the  exercises 
further  on. 


SUBJUNCTIVE     MODE. 


rUESENT. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  sim,  /  may  he. 

2.  sis,  thou  may  St  he. 
•>.  sit,  he  may  he. 

simus,  we  may  be. 
sitis,  yoii  may  be. 
sint,  they  may  be. 

liMl'EUFECT. 

1.  essem,  /  should  he. 

2.  esses,  thou  wouldst  be. 

3.  esset,  he  ivould  he. 

essemus,  we  should  be. 
essetis,  you  icoidd  be. 
essent,  they  ivould  be. 

Peukect. 

1.  fuerim,  /  may  have  been. 

2.  fueris,  thou  may  si  have  been. 

3.  fuerit,  he  may  have  been. 

fuerimus,  we  may  have  been. 
fueritis,  you  may  have  been. 
fuerint,  they  may  have  been. 

PLUPERrECT. 

1.  fuissem,  /  should  have  been.             fuissemus,  we  shoidd  have  been. 

2.  fuisses,  thou  wouldst  have  been.  \       fuissetis,  you  would  have  been. 

3.  fuisset,  he  would  have  been.             fuissent,  they  would  have  been. 

fmTP,Jt^XOTlVE   MODK. 


!41 


TMriniATivK. 

Trks.  2.    es,  he  Ihou. 
Fi'T.   2.    esto,  ihou  shall  he. 
3.    esto,  Ite  shall  he. 

este,  /><"  //<". 
estdte,  lie  shall  he. 
sunto,  the  11  shall  he. 

Infinitive.                                       Participlks. 

Pres.  esse,  to  he. 

Perf.  fuisse,  to  have  heen. 

FuT.    fiiturus  esse,  or  fore,  to 

he  about  to  he. 

futurus,  -a,  -um,  ahout  to  he. 

Obs.  5.  The  subjunctive  is  sonietiines  translated  by  the  English 
Indicative ;  sometimes  by  the  Potential,  with  the  auxiliaries  vim/, 
might,  luould,  .should:  sonietimes  by  tlie  Subjunctive;  sometinies  by 
the  Infinitive ;  and  it  is  often  used  for  the  Imperative,  especially  in 
prohibitions. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  cum  Sim,  since  I  am.  5.  adsum  ut  videam,  /  am  here 

2.  sim,  may  I  he.  to  see  (that  I  may  see'). 

3.  SI  essem,  if  I  were.  G.  simus,  let  us  he,  may  ice  he. 

4.  ne  fugris,  he  thou  7iot.  7.  si  fuSrit,  if  he  should  have  heen. 

Obs.  6.  The  Present  Imperative  has  no  first  or  third  person. 
If  it  is  required,  in  an  imperative  sentence,  to  use  the  first  or  third 
person,  the  subjunctive  is  to  be  used ;  as, 


Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  sim,  let  me  he. 

2.  es,  he  thou. 

3.  Bit,  let  him  {her,  it)  he. 

simus,  let  us  he. 
este,  he  ye. 
sint,  let  them  he. 

272.  Instead  of  the  regular  forms  of  the  Imperfect  Sub- 
junctive, and  the  Future  Infinitive  of  sum,  the  followinf> 
are  frequently  used  :  — 


Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

forem  =  essem 
fores   =  esses 
foret   —  esset 

forent  ^  essent 

Future  Infinitive. 

fore  =  fiitiirus  esse 

242  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


273.    Dative  of  P 


ossessor. 


EXAMPI.KS. 

1.  est  mih!  liber,  /  have  a  hook  (among  other  things)  ;  or, 

2.  liber  est  meus,  the  book  is  mine  (and  no  one  else's)  ;  or, 
o.  habeo  librum,  1  have,  I  hold,  I  keep,  a  hook. 

Obs.  From  the  foregoing  examples  the  pupil  will  notice  that 
possession  may  be  expressed  in  three  different  ways ;  the  dative 
emphasizes  the  possessor,  and  is  the  usual  Avay  of  expressing  simple 
possession.     The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule:  — 

DATIVE    OF    POSSESSOR. 

274.  Rule  XL.  —  The  dative  of  the  possessor  is 
used  witli  the  verh  sum. 

VOCABII.AKY. 

obses,  -idis,  m.  a  v.,  hostaye. 

creo,  -are,  -Svi,  -atum,  make,  choose,  elect. 

persuadeo,  -suadere,  -suasi,  -suasum,  convince,  persuade. 

divide,  -vidSre,  -visi,  -visum,  separate,  divide. 

A116br6ges,  -um,  m..  the  AUohrofies. 

testis,  -is,  M.  &  v.,  irituess. 

contineo,  -tingre,  -tinui,  -tentum,  hold  in,  hound. 

Sger,  agri,  m.,  field. 

IScus,  -us,  M.,  lake. 

Aeduus,  -T,  m.,  an  Ai,diian. 

influo,  -flugre,  -fluxi,  -fliixum,  /7o?o  into. 

EXERCISES. 

Tell  the  Mode,  Tense,  Number,  and  Person  of  the  fol- 
lowing ;  parse  each  word  :  — 

1.  Este,  est,  sunt.  2.  Ero,  sitis,  esset.  3.  Eramus, 
sfimus,  esset.  4.  Fuerit,  fnissemus,  sint.  5.  P^iit,  es, 
sim.  G.  P^iere,  fueramus,  essent.  7.  Esse,  fuisse,  sunto. 
8.  Forent,  fuerit,  forem.  9.  Esses,  estis,  essetis.  10.  Multi 
rnihi  sunt  librl.  11.  Sex  nobis  filii  sunt.  12.  Caesari  erant 
multae  leg-iones  et  fideles  amIcT. 


FIllST  CONJUGATION.  — SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE.       24^:^) 


LESSON   LXXIX. 

FIEST  OONJUGATION.- SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 

275.  The  Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive  Active  are 
formed  from  the  present  stem  ;  the  Perfect  and  Phiperfect 
from  the  perfect  stem,  by  adding  tlie  verbal  endings. 

SUBJUNCTIVE     MODE.  —  ACTIVE. 


Pkkskxt. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  amem,  may  1  love. 

amemus,  let  us  love. 

2.  ames,  love  thou. 

ametis,  love  ye. 

3.  amet,  let  him  love. 

ament,  let  tliem  love. 

Impekfect. 

1.  amarem,  /  should  love. 

amaremus,  ice  should  love. 

2.  amares,  thou  u-ouldst  love. 

amaretls,  you  vwuld  love. 

3.  amaret,  he  would  love. 

amarent,  they  would  love. 

Perfect. 

1.  amaverim,  /  maij  have  loved.        amaverimus,  we  may  have  loved. 

2.  amaveris,  thou  viayst  have  loved,     amaveritis,  you  may  have  loved. 

3.  amaverit,  he  may  have  loved.         amaverint,  they  may  have  loved. 

Pluperfect. 

1.  amavissem,  I  should  have  loved. 

amavissemus,  we  should  have  loved. 

2.  amavisses,  thou  ivoiddst  have  Vd. 

amavissetis,  you  would  have  loved. 

3.  amavisset,  he  icould  have  loved. 

amavissent,  they  icould  have  loved. 

1.  The  Analysis  of  the  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  in  the 
Active  Voice  is  as  follows  :  — 


Pres.  Subj.  :  Pres.  st.  ama-  («  changed  to  e)      +  personal  endings. 
Impf.  SuB.j. :         "         ama-     +  tense  sign -re- +         "  " 

Pekf.  Suii.r. :         "         amavi-  +  tense  sign  -ri-  +         "  " 

Plup.  SuB.j. :         "         amavi- -}- tense  sign -sse- 4-         "  " 


244  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


2.  Translation  of  the  Subjunctive:  — 

1.  amet,  let  him  love. 

2.  amemus,  let  us  love. 

3.  cum  venisset,  iclien  he  had  come,  or  har/ng  come. 

4.  SI  Caesar  pugnet,  ifCcesar  {should)  fujht. 

5.  si  Caesar  esset  dux,  if  Ccesar  were  leader. 
G.  Smaverit,  suppose  he  (has)  loved. 

7.  cum  amavgrit,  sitice  he  loved. 

8.  elves  niei  sint  beati,  may  my  felloiv-citizens  he  happy. 

9.  ne^  audiat,  let  him  not  hear. 

VOCABUI.ARY. 

trans-grSdior,  -grSdi,  -gressus  sum,  dep.,  crosa. 

extra,  prep,  and  adv.,  outside  of,  beyond. 

incredibilis,  -e,  incredible. 

jungo,  jungSre,  junxi,  junctum,  Join,  unite. 

Sagittarius,  -ii,  m.,  archer. 

excelsus,  -a,  -um,  lofty. 

consanguineus,  -a,  -um,  related  by  blood,  kindred. 

in-fluo,  -fluere,  -fluxi,  -fluxum,  y/ort?  into,  empty. 

impSditus,  -a,  -um,  part.,  hindered. 

EXERCISES. 

Tell  the  mode,  tense,  numl)er,  and  i)erson  of  the  following  : 
1 .  Anifiret,   amemus,    amet.      2.  Amiivissem,  amaverint, 

amarent.     8.  Laudaret,  laudavissent,  landaverit.     4.  Vocet, 

vocarent,    vocavissent.       o.    Vulneres,   vidneret,   vulnerent. 

G.  Exspectemus,  exspectaremus,  exspectavissemus.     7.  Ro- 

gem,  rogaverim,  rogavissem. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Ne  may  ho  an  advorh,  as  ne  ^met,  let  him  not  love ;  ne  may  be  a 
conjimction,  as  ne  commeatu  pr6hiberetur,  castris  idoneum 
16cum  delegit,  he  chose  a  suitable  ji/ace  for  (i  camp,  that  he  raiyht  not  be 
cut  off  from  sttpjdies  (i.e.  lest  he  shonhl  be  cut  off,  etc.)  ;  ne  is  an  inter- 
rogative particle  (always  an  enclitic),  as  audivitne,  does  lie  hear? 

How  many  tenses  has  the  subjunctive  ?  How  is  the  imperfect 
formed  ? 


SUBJUNCTIVE   OF   THE  EOUK   CONJUGATIONS.       245 


LESSON    LXXX. 

SUBJUNCTIVE   OF   THE   EOUK   CONJUGATIONS. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

276.    The  inflection  of  the  Subjunctive  Active  of  the  four 
conjugations  is  as  follows  :  — 

PAllTIAL    PAKAKIGM. 


Tresknt. 

1.   amem 

moneam 

regam 

audiam 

2.    ames 

moneas 

regas 

audias 

3.   amet 

moneat 

regat 

audiat 

1.   amemus 

moneamus 

regamus 

audiamus 

2.   ametis 

moneatis 

regatis 

aiidiatis 

3.   ament 

moneant 

regant 

audiant 

Imperfect. 

1.   amarem 

monerem 

regerem 

audirem 

2.   amares 

moneres 

regeres 

audires 

3.   amaret 

moneret 

regeret 

audiret 

1.   amaremus 

moneremus 

regeremus 

audiremus 

2.   amaretis 

moneretis 

regeretis 

audiretis 

3.   amarent 

monerent 

regerent 

audlrent 

Perfect. 

1.   amaverim 

monuerim 

rexerim 

audiverim 

2.   amaveris 

monueris 

rexeris 

audiveris 

3.   amaverit 

monuerit 

rexerit 

audiverit 

1.    amaverimus 

monuerimus 

rexerimus 

audiverimus 

2.    amaveritis 

monueritis 

rexeritis 

audiveritis 

3.   amaverint 

monuerint 

rexerint 

audiverint 

Plfperfect. 

1.    aniavissem 

monuissem 

rexissem 

audivissem 

2.   amavisses 

monuisses 

rexisses 

audivisses 

3.   amavisset 

monuisset 

rexisset 

audivisset 

1.    amavissemus 

monuissemus 

rexissemus 

audivissemus 

2.   amavissetis 

monuissetis 

rexissetis 

avdivissetis 

3,    amavissent 

monuissent 

rexissent 

audivissent 

246 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


rStis,  -is,  F.,  raft. 

statuo,  statugre,  statui,  sta 

tutum,  place  at. 
statura,  -ae,  f.,  size^  statue. 
nihil    (indecl.    neiit.    noun), 

nothing. 


AOCAIJULAKY. 

lenitas, -atis,  f.,  softness,  smoothness. 
im-pedio,  -ire,  -ivi    or  -ii,   -itum, 

hinde?'. 
funditor,   oris,  m.,  slinfjer. 
linter,  -tris,  f.,  boat. 
calvus,  -a,  -um,  baUL 


EXERCISES. 

Tell  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  the  following  : 
1.  Moneat,  m(5neremus,  monerent.  2.  Monuerim,  monu- 
issem,  monuisseni.  3.  Habeam,  habeant,  haberent.  4.  De- 
leret,  deleverim,  delevissem.  5.  Doceat,  doceret,  docuerit. 
6.  Regat,  regeret,  rexerit.  7.  Regamus,  regeremus,  rexe- 
rimus.  8.  Mittfimus,  mitterent,  misTssent.  9.  Contendas, 
contenderes,  contenderis.  10.  Ducant,  ducerent,  dfixerint, 
duxissent.  11.  Yincat,  vicerit,  vicisset.  12.  Audiat, 
audiret,  audiverit.  10.  Audlvisset,  audlremus,  audiant. 
14.  Munias,  munlres,  mfuiiveris.  15.  Venifitis,  venlretis, 
veneritis.  ' 


LESSON   LXXXI. 

VEEBS.  -  SUBJUNCTIVE   PASSIVE. 

277.  The  inflection  of  the  Subjunctive  Passive  of  the  four 
conjugations  is  as  follows  :  — 

PARTIAL     PARADIGM. 


rRKSP:NT. 

1.  amer 

monear 

regar 

audiar 

2.  ameris,  or -re 

monearis,  or  -re 

regaris,  or  -re 

audiaris,  or  -re 

3.  ametur 

moneatur 

regatur 

audiatur 

1.  amemur 

moneamur 

regamur 

audiamur 

2.  amemini 

moneamini 

regamini 

audiamini 

.'}.  amentur 

moneantur 

regantur 

audiantur 

VEIM'.S. 


SUB,IUNCTIVE    PASSrVE. 


247 


ImI'ERK 

•xrr. 

1.  amarer 

monerer 

regerer 

audirer 

2.  amarer  is,  or -re 

monereris,  or  -re 

regereris,  -re 

audireris,  0/ -re 

o.  amaretur 

moneretur 

regeretur 

audiretur 

1.  amaremur 

moneremur 

regeremur 

audiremur 

2.  amaremini 

moneremini 

regeremini 

audiremini 

o.  amarentur 

monerentur 

regerentur 

audirentur 

Peiifect. 

1.  amatus  sim 

monitus  sim 

rectus  sim 

auditus  sim 

2.  amatus  sis 

monitus  sis 

rectus  sis 

auditus  sis 

o.  amatus  sit 

monitus  sit 

rectus  sit 

auditus  sit 

1.  amati  simus 

moniti  simus 

recti  simus 

auditi  simus 

2.  amati  sitis 

moniti  sitis 

recti  sitis 

auditi  sitis 

o.  amati  sint 

moniti  sint 

recti  sint 

auditi  sint 

Pluperfect. 

1.  amatus  essem 

monitus  essem 

rectus  essem 

auditus  essem 

2.  amatus  esses 

monitus  esses 

rectus  esses 

auditus  esses 

3.  amatus  esset 

monitus  esset 

rectus  esset 

auditus  esset 

1.  amati  essemus 

moniti  essemus 

recti  essemus 

auditi  essemus 

2.  amati  essetis 

moniti  essetis 

recti  essetis 

auditi  essetis 

8.  amati  essent 

moniti  essent 

recti  essent 

auditi  essent 

EXERCISES. 

Tell  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  the  following  : 
1.  Ametur,  amarentur,  amatus  sit,  amatus  esset.  2.  Ame- 
mur,  amaremur,  amati  simus,  amati  essemus.  3.  Lauder, 
laudarer,  laudatus  sim,  laudatus  essem.  4.  Ediiceris,  educa- 
reris,  educatus  sis,  educatus  esses.  5.  Vocemur,  vocaremur, 
vocati  simus,  vocatT  essemus.  6.  Moneamur,  moneremur, 
moniti  sTmus,  momti  essemus.  7.  Docear,  docerer,  doctus 
sim.  8.  Habeantur,  haberentur,  habitus  sit.  9.  Regatur, 
regeretur,  rectus  sit,  rectus  esset.  10.  Mittamur,  mitteremur. 
missus  sit.  11.  Vincar,  vincantur,  vincerentur.  12.  Dicatur, 
diet!  sTmus.  13.  Audiatur,  audiretur,  auditus  sit.  14.  Mu- 
niamini,  munirentur,  mimitl  sTmus.  15.  Puuiatur,  puniretur, 
punitT  essent. 


248  FIKST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

LESSON   LXXXII. 
SUBJUNCTIVE   m  INDEPENDENT  SENTENCES. 

IMPERATIVE. 
278.  The  Latin  Subjunctive  has  two  principal  uses :  — 
I.   It  is  used  in  Independent  Sentences  to  express  — 

1.  A  Wish  {Optative  Suhjunctioe) ;  negative  is  ne. 

2.  An  Exhortation  or  a  Mild  Command,  chiefly  in  Prohibitions 

{Hortatory  Subjunctice)  ,  negative  is  ne. 

3.  A  Question  of  Doubt  or  of  Deliberation  (Duhilatlre  or  Delihcr- 

ative  Subjunctive)  ,  negative  is  ne. 

4.  An  Action  as  Possible,  not  as  Real  {Potential  Subjunctive)  ; 

negative  is  nou. 

5.  A  Concession  {Concessive  Subjunctive)  ;  negative  is  ne. 

IL   It  is  used  in  Dependent  Clauses  to  express  — 

1.  Condition  {Conditional  Clause,  see  325). 

2.  Comparison  {Comparative  Clause,  see  327). 

3.  Concession  {Concessive  Clause,  see  328). 

4.  Purpose  {Final  Clause,  see  321). 

5.  Ilesult  {Consecutive  Clause,  see  322). 

6.  Characteristic  {Relative  Clause,  see  323). 

7.  Cause  {Causal  Clause,  see  330). 

8.  Time  {Temporal  Clause,  see  331). 

9.  Indirect  Question  {Interrogative  Clause,  see  342). 

a.  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  in  relative  clauses  (see  355), 
in  intermediate  clauses  (see  359),  and  in  subordinate  clauses  in 
Indirect  Discourse  (see  346) . 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  (iitinam)  militgs  fortiores  fuisseut,  would  that  the  soldiers 

had  been  brave. 

2.  pugnemus,  let  us  Jight. 

3.  pugnet,  let  him  fight. 

4.  ne  pugnemus,  let  us  not  fight. 

5.  quid  fScerem,  what  was  I  to  do  1 

6.  ego  censeam,  /  am  inclined  to  think,  or  /  should  think. 

7.  sit  clarus  Scipio,  granted  that  Scipio  be  renowned. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   IN  INDEPENDENT   SENTENCES.       241) 

Obs.  Ex.  1  expresses  a  vnsli^  and  the  verb  is  therefore  in  the  Op- 
tative Subjunctive ;  iitinam,  vnmld  that,  0  that,  l"re([uent]y  precedes 
the  optative  subjunctive ;  the  negative  particle  is  ne.  Note,  further, 
that  the  present  and  perfect  imply  that  the  wish  may  be  fulfilled ; 
the  imperfect  and  pluperfect,  that  the  wish  is  not  fulfilled,  —  the 
imperfect  representing  an  unfulfilled  wish  in  present  time,  the 
])luperfect  in  past  time.  Exs.  2  and  3  express  a  nnld  command, 
commanding  an  act  in  which  the  first  or  third  person  is  the  actor ; 
the  verbs  are  in  the  Hortatory  Subjunctive ;  the  negative  particle  is 
ne,  not  non.  Ex.  4  expresses  a  Prohibition.  Ex.  5  asks  a  delibera- 
tive or  doubtful  question  ;  the  verb  is  in  the  Dubitative  or  Delibera- 
tive Subjunctive.  Ex.  6  makes  a  cautious,  polite,  or  modest  statement, 
and  the  verb  is  in  the  Potential  Subjunctive.  Ex.  7  expresses  a 
concession,  and  the  Concessive  Subjunctive  is  used. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Scribamus.  2.  Ne  scribamus.  3.  Laudenuis  nomen 
Del.  4.  Mall'  secernant  se  a  bonis. ^  5.  Utinam  pater 
veniat.  G.  Amenius.  7.  Veniamus  in  urbem.  8.  Sint 
beati.^  9.  Utinam  magister  discipulos  laudet.  10.  Utinam 
magister  discipulos  laudaret.  11.  Utinam  in  IT  tore  maris 
ambCilarem.     12.  Utinam  magister  discipulos  laudavisset. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Let  us  love  our  country.  2.  Let  us  praise  our  friends. 
3.  May  you  be  happy.  4.  Do  not  write  the  letter.  5.  Would 
that  he  were  present.  6.  May  the  pupil  study.  7.  May 
the  teacher  praise  the  pupils.  8.  Would  that  the  teacher 
praised  the  pupils.  9.  Would  that  the  teacher  had  praised 
the  pupils.     10.   Let  him  walk  with  his  friends. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  See  83.  4. 

2.  Note  that  (1)  when  the  ivish  is  for  something  future,  the  present 
subjunctive  is  used,  hut  the  perfect  may  he  used;  (2)  wlien  it  is  for 
something  present,  the  imperfect  subjunctive  is  used ;  (3)  when  it  is  for 
.something  past,  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  used.  As  the  present  and 
^Hist  cannot  be  changed,  the  wish  expressed  by  these  tenses  is  unfulfilled. 

Mention  the  chief  uses  of  the  subjunctive.  Give  the  uses  of  the 
subjunctive  in  independent  clauses.  "What  negative  is  used  with  the 
subjunctive  1  What  with  the  imperative '?  How  many  persons  has 
the  imperative  1     How  is  a  future,  a  present,  and  a  past  wish  expressed  1 


250 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


SYNOPSIS    FOR    REVIEW. 


Subjunctive  in 


1.  Optative    .   . 

2.  Hortatory .  . 


3.  Dubitative,  or 


Independent    -^        Deliberative 
Sentences 


4.  Potential  .   . 
-  5.  Concessive  . 


.  Wishes, 
r  Exhortations. 
■\  Commands. 
1^  Prohibitions, 
f  Questions  of  — 

Doubt. 

Deliberation. 

Indignation. 

Impossibility, 
r  Cautious, ") 

■{  Polite,  or  ^statements. 
l^  Modest     J 
.  Concession. 


LESSON   LXXXIII. 

DEPONENT   VEEBS   OF  THE  PIEST  CONJUGATION. - 
ABLATIVE  WITH  DEPONENTS. 

279.  Many  verbs  are  used  only  m  tiic  Passive  Voice,  but 
with  an  Active  meaning.  These  are  called  Deponent 
{laying  aside),  because  they  lay  aside  the  active  form  and 
the  jyassive  meaning. 

1.  They  occur  in  all  four  conjugations,  and  the  conjugation  to 
which  they  belong  is  determined  by  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the 
present  infinitive.  They  are  inflected  like  the  passive  of  other 
verbs,  and  have  also  the  gerund,  participles,  and  supines  of  the 
active  voice. 

2.  Deponents  of  the  First  Conjugation  are  inflected  as  follows  : 


PRINCIPAL 

PARTS. 

Present. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

1.  miror 

2.  hortor 

3.  glorior 

4.  vagor 

mirari 
hortari 
gl5riari 
vagari 

miratus  sum,  admire. 
hortatus  sum,  exhort. 
gloriatus  sum,  boast. 
vagatus  sum,  irander  about. 

DEPONENT  VERBS. 


251 


I'AKTIAL,  PARADIGM. 


Indicative.                   Pkesknt.                 Subjunctive. 

miror,  I  admire. 

mirer,  may  T  he  admired. 

miraris,  -re,  thou  advdrest. 

mireris,  -re,  he  thou  admired. 

miratur,  lie  admires. 

miretur,  let  him  he  admired. 

miramur,  ve  admire. 

miremur,  let  us  be  admired. 

miramini,  you  admire. 

miremini,  he  ye  admired. 

mirantur,  thetj  admire. 

mirentur,  let  them  he  admired. 

Imi'erfkct. 

mirabar,  I  admired. 

mirarer,  I  should  admire 

mirabaris,  -re,  thon  admiredst. 

mirareris,-re,  thou  wouldst  admire. 

mirabatur,  he  admired. 

miraretur,  he  would  admire. 

mirabamur,  ice  admired. 

miraremur,  we  would  admire. 

mirabamini,  you  admired. 

miraremini,  you  would  admire. 

TnTrabantur,  they  admired. 

mirarentur,  they  would  admire. 

FUT 

IRE. 

mirabor,  /  shall  admire. 

miraberis,  -re,  thou  wilt  admire. 

mirabitur,  he  will  admire. 

mirabimur,  we  shall  admire. 

mirabimini,  you  icill  admire. 

mirabuntur,  they  will  admire. 

Peri 

^ECT. 

miratus  sum,  I  have  admired. 

miratus  sim,  /  may  have 

miratus  es,  thou  hast  admired. 

miratus  sis,  thou  mayst  have 

S 

miratus  est,  he  has  admired. 

miratus  sit,  he  may  have 

a 

mirati  sumus,  tve  have  admired. 

mirati  simus,  we  may  have 

•^r 

mirati  estis,  you  have  admired. 

mirati  sitis,  you  may  have 

mirati  sunt,  they  have  admired. 

mirati  sint,  they  may  have 

Plupe 

RFECT. 

miratus  eram,  T  had  admired. 

miratus  essem,  /  should      ^ 

miratus  eras,  thou  hadst  admired. 

miratus  esses,  thou  icouldst 

miratus  erat,  he  had  admired. 

miratus  esset,  he  would 

mirati  eramus,  we  had  admired. 

mirati  essemus,  we  should 

mirati  eratis,  j/ou  had  admired. 

mirati  essetis,  you  would 

mirati  erant,  they  had  admired. 

mirati  essent,  they  icoidd     J 

252  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


Fi  TURK  Perfect. 


miratus  ero,  /  shall  have  admired. 
miratus  eris,  thou  wilt  have  admired. 
miratus  erit,  he  rvill  have  admired. 
mirati  erimus,  ive  shall  have  admired. 
mirati  eritis,  i/ou  will  have  admired. 
mirati  erunt,  theij  loill  have  admired. 


Imperative. 


Singular 
Pre.s.  2.  mirare,  admire  thou. 
Fi;t.    2.  imra.tor,  thou  shalt  admire. 
3.  mirator,  he  shall  admire. 


Plural. 
miramini,  admire  ye. 

mirantor,  theij  shall  admire. 


Infinitive. 


Prks.  mirari,  to  admire. 

Peri-  miratus  esse,  to  have  admired. 

FuT  miratiirus  esse,  to  be  about  to  admire. 

F.  P.  miratus  fore,  to  have  been  about  to  admire. 


Participles. 


Prks.   miraLna,  ad miritij.  Flt.    mira.iu.rvi3,  about  to  admire. 

Perk    mirsiina,  having  admired        Gkr.  mirsindvia,  to  be  a  din  ired. 


Gerund. 


Gen.  mirandi,  of  admirinfj.        \cv.  mirandum,  admirintj. 

Dat.  Toirsnidb, to,/or admirinfj.  Acl.  m.ira,ndb,ivith,froin,  hi/ admirinfj. 


Supine. 


T,  _  _,  ^       J    ■  ,  -  -,-    (  to  (iflmire, 

loRAiER.  miratum,  <o  art m/r^.         Latter,  miratu,  <  ,    ,        i    •     i 

'  '     to  be  admired. 


a.  Note  that  Deponent  Verbs  have  four  participles,  —  the  two 
active  and  the  two  passive.  They  are  the  only  Latin  verbs  that  have 
a  perf.  partic.  with  an  active  meaning;  as,  hortStus,  having  exhorted. 

h.  The  Gerundive,  being  passive  in  meaning,  is  found  only  in 
transitive  verbs  (263.  Obs.  1),  or  in  intransitive  verbs  used  imper- 
sonally ;  lience  only  the  gerundives  of  transitive  deponent  verbs,  or 
the  impersonal  forms  of  intransitive  deponent  verbs,  can  be  used;  as, 

EXA3IPLES. 

1.  hortandus, y?^  to  he,  or  must  he  exhortefl. 

2.  pugnandum  est  mihi,  /  must  fifjht  (lit.,  fighting  must  he  done 

hy  me). 

3.  mSriendum  est  nobis,  we  must  die. 


DEPONENT  VERBS. 


258 


(;.  The  rerfect  I'articiple  of  a  few  deponent  verbs  may  have  a 
passive  meaning ;  as, 

KXAMPI.K. 

1.  Sdeptus,  having  ohtained,  or  having  heen  jhtained. 

280.  Ablative  with  utor,  fnior,  etc. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  plurimis  maritimis  rebus  fruimur  et  utimur,  we  enjoy  and 

use  very  many  maritime  productions. 

2.  Caesar  oppido  p6titur,  Ccesar  obtains  possession  of  the  ioivn. 

3.  lacte  vescuntur,  they  live  on  milk. 

4.  fungitur  officio,  he  performs  his  duty. 

Obs.  Note  the  translation  of  the  deponent  verbs  in  each  of  the 
foregoing  sentences  ;  note  that  each  is  construed  with  the  ablative, 
as  if  it  Avere  an  accusative.  The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  follow- 
ing rule :  — 

ABLATIVE    WITH    DEPONENTS. 

281.  Rule  XLI.  —  J7to7%  fmor,  fungor,  jjotior, 
vescoVf  and  their  conipoimds,  are  followed  by  the 
ablative. 


LESSON    LXXXTV. 

DEPONENT   VEEBS. 

282.    A   Synopsis  of  Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Four  Con- 
jugations is  as  follows  :  — 

PKINCIPAI.     PARTS. 


Present. 

1.    miror 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

mirari 

miratus  sum,  admire. 

2.    vereor 

vereri 

veritus  sum,  fear. 

o.    sequor 

sequi 

secutus  sviva.,folluu: 

4.    potior 

potiri 

potitus  sum,  possess. 

254 


FIRST    STEPS   IN  LATIN. 


PAliAl>IGMS. 


Indicative. 

Pres. 

miror 

vereor               sequor 

potior 

miraris,  or  -re 
miratur 

vereris,  or  -re 
veretur 

sequeris,  or  -re 
sequitur 

potiris,  or  -re 
potitur 

Imp. 

FUT. 

Perk. 

miramur 

miramini 

mirantur 

mirabar 

mirabor 

miratus  sum 

vereraur 

veremini 

verentur 

verebar 

verebor 

veritus  sum 

sequimur 

sequimini 

sequuntur 

sequebar 

sequar 

secutus  sum 

potimur 

potimini 

potiuntur 

potiebar 

potiar 

potitus  sum 

Plu]>. 

miratus  eram 

veritus  eram 

seciitus  eram 

potitus  eram 

F.  P. 

miratus  ero 

veritus  ero 

secutus  ero 

potitus  ero 

Subjunctive. 

Pres. 

Imp. 

Perk. 

mirer 
mirarer 
miratus  sim 

verear 
vererer 
veritus  sim 

sequar 
sequerer 
secutus  sim 

potiar 
potirer 
potitus  sim 

Pn;p. 

miratus  essem 

veritus  essem 

seciitus  essem 

potitus  essem 

Imperative. 

Pres. 
Flt. 

mirare 
mirator 

verere 
veretor 

sequere 
sequitor 

potire 
potitor 

Infinitive. 

Pres. 
Perk. 

mirari 
miratus  (-a, 
-um)  esse 

vereri 

veritus  (-a, 
-um)  esse 

sequi 

secutus  (a, 
-um)  esse 

potiri 
potitus  (-a, 
-um)  esse 

Fut. 

miratiirus  (a, 
-um)  esse 

veriturus  (-a, 
-um)  esse 

secuturus  (-a, 
-um)  esse 

potiturus  (-a 
-um)  esse 

F.  1'. 

miratus  (-a, 
-um)  fore 

veritus  (a, 
-um)  fbre 

seciitus  (-a, 
-um)  fore 

potitus  (-a, 
-um)  fore 

Participles. 

Pres. 

FlTT. 

mirans 
miraturus  (-a, 
-um) 

verens 

veritufus  (-a, 
-um) 

sequens 
seciitiirus  (-a, 
-um) 

potiens 
potiturus  (a 
-um) 

Perk. 

miratus  (-a, 
-um) 

veritus  (-a, 
-um) 

seciitus  (-a, 
-um) 

potitus  (-a, 
-um) 

Ger. 

mirandus  (-a, 
-um) 

verendus  (-a, 
-um) 

sequendus  (-a, 
-um) 

potiendus  (a, 
-um) 

DEPO:^!  ENT    VERBS. 


255 


Gerund. 

Gkn. 

DAT. 

Arc. 

AliL. 

mirandi 
mirando 
mirandum 
mirando 

verendi 
verendo 
verendum 
verendo 

sequendi 
sequendd 
sequendum 
sequendo 

potiendi 
p6tiend5 
potiendum 
potiendo 

Supines. 

POKMEU 

Latteu 

miratum 
miratu 

veritum 
veritu 

secutum 
secutu 

potitum 
potitu 

Obs.  1.  The  future  infinitive  is  to  be  given  in  the  active  form 
(the  passive  being  rare)  ;  thus  of  sgquor  it  is  sScuturus  esse,  not 
sgcutum  iri. 

Obs.  2.  The  gerund  and  gerundive  of  the  3d  and  4th  conjuga- 
tions, instead  of  -endl,  -endus,  may,  especially  after  i,  end  in  -undl 
and  -undus ;  as,  p6tiundus,  fScundi. 


SEMI-DEPONENT    VERBS. 

283.  Four  verbs,  having  no  perfect  stems,  take  the  form 
of  the  passive  in  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect 
tenses  only.  Thej^  form  the  tenses  derived  from  the  present 
stem  regularly.  Sucli  verbs,  being  half  active  and  half  pas- 
sive in  form,  are  called  semi-deponents^  or  neuter  passives. 
They  are  :  — 


Present. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Passive. 

audeo 
gaudeo 
soleo 
fido 

audere 
gaudere 
solere 
fidere 

ausus  sum,  dare. 
gavisus  sum,  rejoice. 
solitus  sum,  am.  accustomed. 
fisus  sum,  trust. 

Syn.    Pr6ficiscor,  to  set  out  on  a  journey  ;  iter  fScgre,  to  travel, 
either  at  home  or  abroad ;  peregrinari,  to  travel  abroad. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Caesar  suos  milites  cohortatus  est.  2.  Omnes  admi- 
rantur  splendorem  virtutis.  3.  Milites  agros  populabantur. 
4.  Ml  fill,  verere  parentes.  5.  Intuemur  praeclara  virtutis 
exempla.     G.  Virtutis  viam  sequimur.     7.  Amicus  moritur. 


256  FIRST   STEPS    IX   LATIN. 


8.  Hostes  url)em  aggrediuntiir.  9.  Piier,  iie  nientltus  sis. 
10.  Magnos  homines  virtute  metlmur,  noii  fortuna.  11.  Prae- 
ceptor  gaudebat.  12.  CTves  maxime  gavisi  sunt.  13.  Remus 
Numitoris  greges  infestare  solitus  est. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1,  We  admire,  we  fear,  we  approach,^  we  measure.  2.  You 
admire,  3'ou  fear,  you  approach,  you  measure.  3.  We  ad- 
mire, we  were  admiring,  we  have  admired,  we  had  admired. 
4.  Vie  rejoice,  they  rejoice.  5.  We  have  rejoiced,  they 
have   rejoiced.       G.    We   dare,   we    dared,   we  have    dared. 

7.  We   trust,  we   trusted,  we  liave   trusted,  we   will  trust. 

8.  The  garden  of  the  king  is  adorned. 

NOTKS     AN1>     QUESTIONS. 

1.    Use  the  proper  tense  of  aggrSdior. 

Define  deponent  verbs.  Why  are  these  verbs  so  called  1  Of  what 
conjugation  are  tliey  ?  How  many  participles  may  a  deponent  verb 
have  ?  What  deponents  have  four  partici])les  ?  How  many  stems  has 
a  deponent  verb  i     What  active  forms  have  deponent  verbs  ? 


LESSON    LXXXV. 

PEEIPHEASTIO   CONJUGATIONS.  —  DATIVE   OF   AGENT. 

284.  The  Periphrastic^  Conjugations  are  formed  by 
combining  the  tenses  of  esse  with  the  future  active 
participle  and  with  the  gerundive. 

I.  Active  Periphrastic   Cotijtigation. 

285.  The  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation,  formed  by 
combining  the  tenses  of  esse  with  the  future  active  parti- 
ciple, denotes  an  intended  or  fntiire  action. 

Obs.  The  subjunctive  has  no  future  tense;  its  place  may  be 
supplied,  whenever  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  accurately  future 
from  present  time  in  su):)ordinate  clauses,  by  the  periphrastic  sub- 
junctive, which  may  be  called  the  future  subjunctive. 


PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATIONS. 


257 


PAKTIAI.     PARADIGM. 


Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Pres. 

Imp. 

Put. 
Perf. 
Plup. 
P.  P. 

amaturus  sum,  /  am  about  to  love. 
amaturus  es,  thou  art  about  to  love. 
amaturus  est,  he  is  about  to  love. 
amaturi  sumus,  we  are  about  to  love. 
amaturi  estis,  you  are  about  to  love. 
amaturi  sunt,  they  are  about  to  love. 
amaturus  eram,^  /  was  about  to  love,  etc. 
amaturus  ero,'^  /  shall  be  about  to  love,  etc. 
amaturus  fui,  /  have  been  about  to  love,  etc. 
amaturus  fueram,  /  had  been  about  to  love. 
amaturus  fuero  (not  used). 

amaturus  sim 
amatiirus  sis 
amatiirus  sit 
amatdri  simus 
amaturi  sitis 
amaturi  sint 
amaturus  essem 

amaturus  fuerim 
amaturus  fuissem 

Infinitive. 

Pres. 
Perf. 

amaturus  esse,  to  be  about  to  love. 
amaturus  fuisse,  to  have  been  about  to  love. 

II.   Passive*  Pe7nphrastic   Conjugation, 

286.  The  Passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation,  formed  by 
combining  the  tenses  of  esse  with  the  gerundive,  denotes 
necessity  or  duty. 

PARTIAL     PARADIGM. 


Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Pres. 

amandus  sum,  1  am  to  be  loved. 

amandus  sim 

amandus  es,  thou  art  to  be  loved. 

amandus  sis 

amandus  est,  he  is  to  be  loved. 

amandus  sit 

amandi  sumus,  ive  are  to  be  loved. 

amandi  simus 

amandi  estis,  you  are  to  be  loved. 

amandi  sitis 

amandi  sunt,  they  are  to  be  loved. 

amandi  sint 

Imp. 

amandus  eram,  I  was  to  be  loved. 

amandus  essem 

Put. 

amandus  ero,^  /  shall  be  [worthy )  to  be  loved. 

Pkkf. 

amandus  fui,  /  have  been,  or  ivas  to  be  loved. 

amandus  fuerim 

Plup. 

amandus  fueram,  /  had  been  to  be  loved. 

amandus  fuissem 

P.  P. 

amandus  fuero 

Infinitive. 

Pres. 

amandus  esse,  to  befit  to  be  loved. 

Perf. 

amandus  fuisse,  to  have  been  fit  to  be  loved. 

FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


287.  Dative  of  the  Agent. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  diligentia  cdlenda  est  nobis,  ive  must  cultivate  a  habit  of 

carefulness    (lit.,    (a    hahit    of)    carefulness    is    to    us    to    he 
cultivated). 

2.  Caes^i  omnia  uno  tempSre  6rat  Agenda,  Ccesar  had  to 

do  everi/lhing  at  one  time  (lit.,  everytliing  iras  to  (Uesar  to  he 
done  at  one  time). 

3.  omnibus  m6riendum  est,  all  must  die  (lit.,  {tlie  necessity  of) 

dying  is  to  all). 

4.  Caesari  in  Galliam  mtturandum,  Coisar  had  to  hasten  into 

Gaul    (lit.,    (the   necessity  of)    hastening  into    Gaul   was    to 
Ccesar) . 

Obs.  In  Exs.  1  and  2  note  that  with  the  gerundive  the  person 
upon  whom  the  obligation  rests  of  doing  the  action  is  expressed  by 
the  dative ;  this  dative  expresses  not  merely  the  doer  of  the  action, 
])ut  the  person  interested  in  doing  it,  and  is,  therefore,  to  be  classi- 
fied under  the  Dative  of  Interest  (see  193.  3).  Xote  that  the  verbs 
in  Exs.  1  and  2  are  transitive,^  and  the  periphrastic  forms  have  a 
subject  with  which  they  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  in  Exs. 
3  and  4  the  verbs  are  intransitive,  the  periphrastic  forms  have  no 
subject,  but  are  of  the  third  person  singular,  neuter  gendei-.  The 
verb  is  here  used  impersonally,  but  the  agent  is  in  the  dative. 
Tlie  idiom  may  be  stated  as  follows:  — 

DATIVE    OF    AGENT. 

288.  Rule  XLII.  —  The  dative  of  the  agent  is  used 
with  the  g^erimdive  to  denote  the  person  intereste<l 
in  doinji**  the  action. 

1.  The  dative  of  agent  is  often  used  after  perfect  participles. 

2.  The  agent  with  passive  verbs  is  usually  denoted  by  the  abla- 
tive with  a  or  ab. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Patria  amanda  est.  2.  Amanclus  est  ille  puer.  3.  Hie 
liber  tibi  legendus  est.  4.  Caesar  castra  moturus  est. 
5.  Caesar  cum  sola  decima  legione  profecturus  erat.  G.  Mihi 
seribendum  est.  7.  Obsides  tibi  daturus  sum.  8.  Frumen- 
tum  Aeduls^  dandum  est.     9.  Epistfda  tibi  scribenda  est. 


TABLE  OF  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS.      259 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  town  must  be  stormed  by  the  soldiers.  2.  Caesar 
must  hasten  into  Gaul.  3.  They  must  write  the  letter. 
1.   You  will  have  to  fortify  the  town. 

NOTKS    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  word  periphrastic  is  derived  from  two  Greek  words,  and 
means  round-about  speaking  —  the  English  word  circumlocution  (circum, 
around,  and  iQquor,  /  speah). 

2.  The  periphrastic  forms  are  inflected  regularly. 

3.  The  subjunctive  has  no  future  tense.    (See  285.  Obs.) 

4.  Tlie  passive  periphrastic  conjugation  occurs  only  in  transitive 
verbs.  With  intransitive  verbs  used  in  the  passive,  the  impersonal 
(263.  Obs.  1)  form  is  used,  and  the  agent  is  in  the  dative;  as,  civibus 
subvgniendum  est,  ive  must  help  the  citizens. 

5.  Whenever  the  verb  itself  takes  the  dative,  tlie  agent  is  usually 
expressed  by  the  ablative  with  a  or  ab ;  as,  civibus  a  vobis  con- 
stilendum,  the  interest  of  the  citizens  must  be  consulted  />//  all. 

G.  In  what  two  ways  may  this  dative  be  translated  ? 


LESSON   LXXXVL 

TABLE   or   THE  POUE   OONJUaATIONS. 

289.  We  have  learned  that  there  are  three  stems  on  which 
all  the  tenses  of  the  verb  are  formed  :  — 

1.  The  Present  Stem,  found  by  dropping  -re  of  the  Present 
TnfinitiA^e  Active,  on  which  are  formed  the  tenses  expressing  in- 
complete action ;  viz., 

a.  The  Present,    Imperfect,  and   Future   Indicative, 

active  and  passive. 
h.   The  Present  and  Imperfect  Si^bjunctive,  active  aiul 

passive. 

c.  The  Imperative,  active  and  passive. 

d.  The  Present  Infinitive,  active  and  passive. 

e.  The  Present  Active  Participle. 
/'.    The  Gerund  and  the  Gerundive. 


260 


FIKST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


TKESENT     STKM.  —  ACTIVE    VOICE. 


Tense,  Mode, 
and  Pei'son. 

1st  Con j. 

2d  Conj. 

3d  Conj. 

4tli  Conj. 

1     . 

1     Ui 

Sin(/.  1 

aina-o  ^ 

mune-0 

reg-e-o  i 

aiidi-0 

> 

2 

uma-s 

iiK^ne-s 

reg-i-s 

audi-s 

H 

3 

Tima-t 

moue-t 

reg-i-t 

audi-t 

^ 

PlurA 

amfi-mus 

moiie-mus 

reg-i-mus 

audi-mus 

^ 

2 

ama-tis 

mone-tis 

reg-i-tis 

audl-tis 

3 

uma-nt  ^ 

mune-nt 

reg-u-ut 

audiu-ut 

> 

,Sm^.  1 

ame-m 

monea-m 

reg-a-m 

audia-m 

2 

ame-s 

munea-s 

reg-a-s 

audia-s 

3 

fimg-t 

munea-t 

reg-a-t 

audia-t 

4^ 

Plur.  1 

ame-m  us 

monea-mus 

reg-a-mus 

audia-mus 

S 

2 

ame-tis 

munea-tis 

reg-a-tis 

audia-tis 

^ 

QQ 

3 

ame-nt 

mouea-nt 

reg-a-ut 

audia-nt 

^ 

.Smry.2 

ama 

mono 

reg-e 

audi 

g 

Plur. 2 

ama-te 

mune-te 

reg-i-te 

audi-te 

Infinitive 

ama-re 

moiie-re 

reg-d-re 

audl-re 

Participle 

ama-ns 

mune-ns 

r?g-e-ns 

audie-ns 

n 

Gen. 

ama-ndi 

muiic-iidi 

reg-c-ndl 

audie-ndi 

S5 

I)at. 

ama-udo 

mune-ndo 

reg-e-ndo 

audie-ndo 

« 

Ace. 

ama-ndum 

mone-ndum 

reg-e-ndum 

audie-udum 

O 

Ahl. 

ama-ndo 

mone-udo 

reg-e-ndo 

audie-udo 

^ 

Sing.  1 

ama-ba-m 

muiie-ba-m 

rgg-e-ba-m 

audie-ba-m 

2 

ama-ba-s 

moiie-ba-s 

reg-e-ba-s 

audie-ba-s 

3 

ama-ba-t 

mone-ba-t 

reg-e-ba-t 

audie-ba-t 

d 

PlurA 

ama-ba-mus 

mone-ba-mus 

r6g-e-ba-mus 

audic-ba-mus 

t 

n 

2 

ama-ba-tis 

munc-ba-tis 

rgg-e-ba-tis 

audie-ba-tis 

3 

ama-ba-iit 

mone-ba-nt 

r(^g-e-ba-nt 

audie-ba-ut 

H 

<Sm(7. 1 

ama-re-m 

mune-re-m 

reg-e-re-m 

audi-re-m 

s 

2 

ama-re-s 

mone-rC'-s 

rCg-C-re-s 

audi-re-s 

H 

3 

ama-re-t 

mone-re-t 

r6g-C-re-t 

audi-re-t 

P^wr.  1 

ama-re-mus 

mone-re-mus 

rgg-C-re-mus 

audi-re-mus 

a 

2 

ama-re-t  is 

mone-re-tis 

reg-C-re-tis 

audi-re-tis 

CO 

3 

ama-re-nt 

mone-re-nt 

reg-e-re-ut 

audi-re-nt 

Sinr/.l 

a  ma-bo 

nione-bo 

reg-a-m 

audia-m 

>■ 

9 

ama-bi-s 

mone-bi-s 

reg-e-s 

audie-s 

H 

3 

ama-bi-t 

mone-bi-t 

r6g-6-t 

audiC-t 

. 

O 

P^wr.  1 

ama-bi-mus 

mone-bi-mus 

r6g-e-mus 

audie-mus 

t 

2 

ama-bi-tis 

mune-bi-tis 

reg-e-tis 

audie-tis 

s 

3 

ama-bu-nt 

mone-bu-iit 

reg-e-nt 

audie-nt 

,S'mr/.2 

ama-to 

mone-to 

rCg-i-to 

audl-to 

3 

ama-to 

moiie-to 

rog-i-to 

audi-to 

ps 

Plur. 2 

ama-tote 

mone-tote 

reg-i-tote 

audl-tote 

3 

ama-nto 

mune-nto 

rC'g-u-nto 

audiu-nto 

TABI.E   OF   THF:    FOUR    CONJUGATIONS. 


261 


2.  The  Perfect  Stem  (found  by  adding  to  the  present  stem 
-VI  for  the  1st  and  4th  conjugations ;  -vl,  or  generally  -m,  for  the  2d; 
and  -SI  to  the  verb-stem  of  the  3d),  on  which  are  formed  the 
tenses  in  the  active  voice  that  express  completed  action ;   viz., 

PLurEUFECT,    and    FuTiinE     Perfect 


a.  The    Perfect, 

Indicative. 

b.  The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

c.  The  Perfect  Infinfiive. 


PERFKCT    STEM. 


Tense,  Mode, 
and  Person. 

1st  Conj. 

2d  Conj. 

,3d  Conj. 

4th  Conj. 

< 
O 

P 

Sing.  1 

2 

2 
3 

amav! 

amavi-sti 

amavi-t 

amavi-mus 

amavi-stis 

amavc-runt,  re 

monui 

monul-sti 

monui-t 

monui-mus 

monui-stis 

monue-runt,  re 

rexi 

rexl-sti 

rexi-t 

rexi-mus 

rexi-stis 

rexe-runt,  re 

audivi 

audivi-sti 

audivi-t 

audivi-mus 

audivi-stis 

audive-runt,  re 

f4 
> 

p 

,S'/«r/.  1 

2 

3 

P^ur.  1 

2 

3 

amavC-ri-m 
araave-ri-s 
amavC-ri-t 
amave-ri-nms 

amav6-ri-tis 
aniave-ri-nt 

monud-ri-m 

monue-ri-s 

monue-ri-t 

monu(5-ri-raus 

mouu6-ri-tis 

monuc-ri-nt 

rexe-ri-m 

rC'xe-ri-s 

rexe-ri-t 

rexe-ri-mus 

rex6-ri-tis 

rexe-ri-nt 

audive-ri-m 

audive-ri-s 

audive-ri-t 

audive-ri-mus 

audive-ri-tis 

audive-ri-nt 

Infinitive 

amavi-sse 

monul-sse 

rexi-sse 

audivi-sse 

i 
& 

I 

> 

1 

Sine/.  1 
2 

3 

Plur.  1 

2 

3 

amave-ra-m 

amave-ra-s 

amave-ra-t 

amavc-ra-mus 

amave-ra-tis 

amave-ra-nt 

monue-ra-m 

monu6-ra-s 

monuC-ra-t 

monuS-ra-mus 

monug-ra-tis 

monue-ra-nt 

rexe-ra-m 

rexc-ra-s 

rexc-ra-t 

rexe-ra-mus 

rexe-ra-tis 

rexe-ra-nt 

audiv6-ra-m 

audive-ra-s 

audiv6-ra-t 

audivg-ra-mus 

audiv6-ra-tis 

audive-ra-nt 

> 

i 

m 

>Smf/.  1 
2 

3 

Plur.  1 

2 

3 

amavi-sse-m 

amavi-sse-s 

amavi-sse-t 

amavi-sse-mus 

amavi-sse-tis 

amavi-sse-nt 

monui-sse-m 

monui-sse-s 

monui-sse-t 

monui-sse-mus 

monui-sse-tis 

monui-sse-nt 

rexi-sse-m 

rexi-sse-s 

rexi-sse-t 

rexi-ssc-mus 

rexi-ssc-tis 

rexi-sse-nt 

audlvi-sse-m 

audivi-sse-s 

audivi-sse-t 

audivi-sse-mus 

audivi-ssc-tis 

audivi-sse-nt 

>- 

H 
O 
ft 

;2; 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

PZwr.  1 
2 
3 

amave-ro 

amave-ri-s 

amave-ri-t 

amave-ri-mus 

amave-ri-tis 

amave-ri-nt 

monu6-ro 

monue-ri-s 

monue-ri-t 

monue-ri-mus 

monue-ri-tis 

monue-ri-iit 

rcxe-ro 

rexc-ri-s 

rcxe-ri-t 

rcxe-ri-mus 

rexe-ri-tis 

rexe-ri-nt 

audiv6-ro 

audive-ri-s 

audive-ri-t 

audive-ri-mus 

audivc-ri-tis 

audive-ri-nt 

262 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


THE    FOUR    CONJUGATIONS. -ACTIVE    VOICE. 


Give    the    meani 
euphonic    changes, 
each  of   the  followi 

1.  audit 

2.  eriidiebat 

3.  amamus 

4.  d6cemus 

5.  rggit 

G.  vScemus 

7.  vulnerat 

8.  Sma 

9.  timent 

10.  monebunt 

11.  culpabant 

12.  credunt 
lo.  mittunt 

14.  frangitis 

15.  terretis 
10.  laudabit 

17.  clauslnius 

18.  narrant 


Recapitulation, 

ng,    stem,    formation, 
mode,    tense,    number, 


duxSrimus  ^ 

miserunt 

eriidivgrant 

timuimus 

fregisti 

clausSris 

rexgramus 

scripsgram 

legSrant 

d6cuerunt 

scribe 

donavgrint 

d6mui 

d51uimus 

movSrit 

audivistis 

legist! 

dScuistis  * 


principal    parts, 
and    person    of 

Iggebat^ 

puniverunt 

pangunt 

patent 

persuasgrat 

d6cebunt 

lauda(vg)ro 

erudi(v)grit 

ducebat 

exercebis 

ertldi(vi)stl 

discit 

hSbitaverunt 

v6cat 

scripsSro 

dgdit 

tgnugrat^ 

narrate 


Supplementary  Exercises  :  — 

1.  Lauda,  exerce,  scribe,  obedi.  2.  Laudemus,  exer- 
ceamus,  scrlbamiis,  obediamus.  3.  Utinam  pater  fabiihim 
novam  narret !  4.  Fidem  servemus.  5.  Tacete,  puerl. 
0.  Laudate,  exercete,  scrlbite,  obedite.  7.  Copias  majores 
haberemus.  8.  Utinam  pater  veniat !  1).  Ne  pugnemus. 
10.  Dicit  Caesarem  oppidum  expugnavTsse.  11.  DIcit  Cae- 
sarem  oppidum  expugnare.  12.  Caesar  in  Gallia  hiemare 
constituit.      13.   Litteras  scribamus. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  praises.      2.  We  teach.  3.  They  write.      4.  He 

hears.     5.  The3Mvere  teaching.     6.  He  will  write.      7.   They 

will  hear.       8.    We   do   not  ask.  1).    They  are    reading. 


TABLE    OF    THE   FOUR    CONJUGATIONS.  26:J 


10.  Praise  the  l)oy.  11.  Do  not  blame  the  boy.  12.  Let 
us  hear.^  13.  May  we  hear?  14.  AVe  have  praised. 
15.  They  had  taught.  IG.  They  wrote.  17.  lie  has  heard. 
18.  We  have  sent.  19.  Thou  wilt  have  heard.  20.  lie  has 
taught.  21.  I  have  called,  'n.  I  had  read.  23.  I  shall 
have  written.  24.  I  had  heard.  'Ih.  They  had  sent. 
26.  They  were  teaching.  27.  You  did  not  fear.  28.  Thou 
wert  praising.  29.  I  will  hear.  30.  Ye  write.  31.  I  shall 
have  called.  32.  Ye  have  punished.  33.  Do  not  punish. 
34.  Do  not  write.  35.  Praise  ye  the  l)oys.  30.  I  gave. 
37.  I  have  given.  38.  We  have  instructed.  39.  AV^rite  the 
letter. 

Supplementary  Exercises':  — 

1.  May  you  write  the  letter.  2.  He  determines  to  remain' 
in  the  city.  3.  He  says  that  Caesar  is  storming  the  town. 
4.  Let  us  instruct  the  boys.  5.  Would  that  my  friend  had 
written  the  letter !  6.  AYould  that  my  father  had  told  the 
story  !  7.  He  determines  to  write.  8.  May  the  teaclier 
praise  the  scholars.  9.  Praise  ye,  teach  ye,  write  ye,  punish 
ye.  10.  Would  that  the  teacher  had  not  punished  the 
scholar ! 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  first  person  singular  is  Smo  for  Sma-o  ;  rego  for  rege-o. 

2.  The  translation  is, — 

Pres.  I  loce,  aia  loving,  do  love,  etc.         Pp:rf.  /  have  loved,  etc. 
Imp.      /  was  lovinrj,  did  love,  etc.  AoR.     /  loved,  etc. 

FuT.     I  shall  or  icill  love,  etc.  Plup.  /  had  loved,  etc. 

FuT.  Perf.  I  shall  or  tvill  have  loved. 

3.  Account  for  the  x  in  the  perfect. 

4.  A  few  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  form  tlieir  jiarticipial  stem 
without  a  connecting  vowel ;  as,  doceo,  doctum. 

5.  Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  with  a  short  stem-syllable  take 
their  perfect  stem  by  adding  -I  to  the  verb-stem,  and  lengthening  the 
stem-syllable  («  is  changed  to  e) ;  as,  Sgo,  egi. 

G.  Keview  the  rules  for  the  subjunctive  in  independent  clauses. 
7.  Review  the  rules  for  the  uses  of  the  infinitive. 


264 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


PRESENT     STEM.  —  PASSIVE     VOICE. 


Tense,  Mo  do, 
and  Person. 

1st  Conj. 

2d  Conj. 

3i\  Conj. 

4th  Conj. 

Sinq.  1 

ftma-or  1 

mone-ur 

reg-or 

audi-or 

> 

2 

ama-ris,  -re 

mone-ris,  -re 

reg-e-ris,-re 

audi-ris,  -re 

5; 

3 

ama-tur 

mone-tur 

reg-i-tur 

audl-tur 

0 

Plur.l 

ama-mur 

m(  )nc-mur 

rt'g-i-mur 

audi-mur 

0 
J5 

2 

5ma-mmi 

mone-mini 

reg-i-mini 

audi-mini 

l-( 

3 

ama-ntur 

moue-utur 

reg-u-ntur 

audiu-ntur 

.S'm.g.  1 

a,m6-r 

monea-r 

reg-a-r 

audia-r 

2 

ame-ris,  -re 

ni()nea-ris,-re 

reg-a-ris,  -re 

audia-ris 

0 

3 

ame-tiir 

mrmea-tur 

reg-a-tur 

audia-tur 

P/7/r.l 

ame-mur 

m(  >nea-mur 

reg-a-mnr 

audia-mur 

;^ 

2 

ame-mmi 

munefi-mini 

reg-a-mini 

audia-mini 

02 

3 

Time-ntur 

monea-ntur 

rC'g-a-ntur 

audia-ntur 

Pi^ 

Sinfj.2 

tlma-re 

moiu'-re 

rCg-C-re 

audi-re 

Plur.3 

jlma-mlui 

monC'-minl 

reg-i-mini 

audi-miui 

Sing.l 

amri-ba-r 

iiiuiie-ba-r 

rdg-e-bil-r 

audie-ba-r 

2 

ama-ba-ris,-re 

m5ne-ba-ri8,-re 

rgg-e-ba-ris,  -re 

audie-ba-ris,-re 

^ 

3 

runa-ba-tur 

mone-ba-tur 

r^g-e-ba-tur 

audie-ba-tur 

0 

Phn\  1 

ama-ba-mur 

nione-ba-mur 

rdg-e-ba-mur 

audie-ba-mur 

» 

2 

ama-ba-mini 

inone-bri-mini 

r6g-e-bri-mini 

audie-ba-mini 

«M 

3 

rima-ba-ntiir 

mone-ba-ntur 

rog-e-ba-ntur 

audie-ba-ntur 

i 

.S'/wv.  1 

araa-re-r 

moue-re-r 

r^g-g-re-r 

audi-re-r 

s 

2 

t1ma-re-ris,-re 

niftnC'-rr'-ris,  -re 

rCg-e-rc-ris,  -re 

audi-re-ris,-re 

3 

ama-re-tur 

mune-re-tur 

rCg-C-re-tur 

audi-re-tur 

p 

PZ?/?'.l 

r»ma-re-raur 

mone-re-mur 

rgg-6-re-mur 

audi-re-mur 

n 

2 

ama-rc-mini 

raone-re-miiii 

rCg-CM'o-mTni 

audi-re-mini 

02 

3 

ilraa-re-ntur 

mone-re-ntur 

r6g-o-re-utur 

audi-re-utur 

H 

Sin;/.  1 

ama-bo-r 

muiie-bo-r 

rCg-a-r 

audia-r 

t* 

2 

ama-bC-ris.-re 

nionc-be-ris,  -re 

r6g-e-ris,  -re 

audie-ris,  -re 

5 

3 

ama-bi-tur 

nione-bi-tur 

r6g-e-tur 

audiC'-tur 

s 

0 

Plur.l 

rima-bl-mur 

mone-bi-mur 

r6g-e-mur 

audie-mur 

A 

2 

Jlma-bi-mini 

mone-bl-mini 

r6g-e-mini 

audie-mini 

3 

ftma-bu-ntur 

inone-bu-ntur 

rgg-e-utur 

audie-ntur 

b; 

<S'mf/.  2 

ilma-tor 

inMiie-tor 

reg-i-tor 

audi-tor 

y 

3 

ama-tor 

mono-tor 

r6g-i-tor 

audi-tor 

« 

Plur.B 

runa-ntor 

mone-utor 

r6g-u-ntor 

audiu-utor 

Infinit 

riVE. 

ama-ri 

mone-ri 

rPg-i 

audi-ri 

Gerun 

DIVE. 

ama-ndus, 

mone-ndus, 

rdg-e-ndus, 

audie-ndus 

-da,  -dum 

-da,  -dum 

-da,  -dum 

-da,  -dum 

3.  The  Participial  Stem  (found  by  adding  -turn  to  the  present 
or  to  the  verb-stem),  on  M^hich  are  formed  — 

a.  The  rp:RFECT  Passive  Participle,  which,  with  the  proper 
parts  of  tlie  auxiliary  verb  sum,  forms  in  the  passive  voice  all  those 
tenses  which  in  the  active  are  derived  from  the  perfect  stem. 

b.  The  FuTriiE  Active  Participle,  which,  with  esse  and 
fuisse,  forms  the  future  and  the  future  perfect  infinitive  active. 

c.  The  Supines  in  -urn  and  in  -il,  the  former  of  which,  with  Iri, 
forms  the  future  infinitive  passive. 


TABLE  OF  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS. 


265 


PARTICIPIAL,     STEM. 


Tense,  Mode, 
and  Person. 

1st  Conj. 

8d  Conj. 

3d  Conj. 

4th  Conj. 

1 

> 

o 

s 

"A 
O 

/Smf/.  1 
2 
3 

rinr.  1 

2 

3 

ama-tu-s  2  sum 
-ta  es 
-tu-m  est 
-ti  siinms 
-tae  estis 
-ta  sunt 

moni-tu-s  sum 
-ta  es 
-tu-m  est 
-ti  sumus 
-tae  estis 
-ta  sunt 

rec-tu-s  sum 
-ta  es 
-tu-m  est 
-ti  sumus 
-tae  estis 
-ta  sunt 

audi-tu-s  sum 
-ta  es 
-tu-m  est 
-ti  stimus 
-tae  estis 
-ta  sunt 

Sing.  1 
2 

3 

P^«r.  1 

2 

3 

ama-tu-s  sim 
-ta  SIS 
-tu-m  sit 
-ti  simus 
-tae  sitis 
-ta  sint 

munl-tu-s  sim 
-ta  SIS 
-tu-m  sit 
-ti  simus 
-tae  sitis 
-ta  sint 

rec-tu-s  sim 
-ta  sis 
-tu-m  sit 
-ti  simus 
-tae  sitis 
-ta  sint 

audi-tu-s  sim 
-ta  sis 
-tu-m  sit 
-ti  simus 
-ti  sitis 
-ta  sint 

Particip. 

ama-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m;  pi.  -ti, 
-tae,  -ta 

moni-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m;  pi.  -^ti, 
-tae,  -ta 

rec-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m;  pl.-ti, 
-tae,  -ta 

audi-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m;  pl.-ti, 
-tae,  -ta 

Infinitive 

ama-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m, -ti, -tae, 
-ta  esse 

moni-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m,  -ti,  -tae, 
-ta  esse 

rec-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m,  -ti, 
-tae, -ta  esse 

audi-tu-s,  -ta, 
-tu-m, -ti, -tae, 

-ta  esse 

5 

M 

^wir/.  1 

o 

3 

Plur.  1 

2 

3 

ama-tu-s  eram 
-ta  eras 
-tu-m  drat 
-ti  gram  us 
-tae  gratis 
-ta  grant 

moni-tu-s  gram 
-ta  gras 
-tu-m  grat 
-ti  gramus 
-tae  gratis 
-ta  -grant 

rec-tu-s  gram    audi-tu-s  gram 
-ta  gras                 -ta  eras 
-tu-m  grat  |         -tu-m  grat 
-ti  gramus            -ti  gramus 
-tae  gratis             -tae  gratis 
-ta  grant              -ta  grant 

1 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.l 

2 
3 

ama-tu-s  essem 
-ta  esses 
-tu-m  esset 
-ti  essemus 
-tae  essetis 
-ta  essent 

moni-tu-s  essem 
-ta  esses 
-tu-m  esset 
-ti  essemus 
-tae  essetis 
-ta  essent 

rec-tu-s  essem 
-ta  esses 
-tu-m  esset 
-ti  essemus 
-tae  essetis 
-ta  essent 

audi-tu-s  essem 
-ta  esses 
-tu-m  esset 
-ti  essemus 
-tae  essetis 
-ta  essent 

s 

0 
"A 

M 

^S'm.g.  1 

3 

Plur.  1 

2 

3 

ama-tu-s  gro 
-ta  gris 
-tu-m  grit 
-ti  grim  us 
-tae  gritis 
-ta  grunt 

monl-tu-s  gro 
-ta  gris 
-tu-m  grit 
-ti  grlmus 
-tae  gritis 
-ta  grunt 

rec-tu-s  gro 
-ta  gris 
-tu-m  grit 
-ti  grimus 
-tae  gritis 
-ta  grunt 

audi-tu-s  gro 
-ta  gris 
-tu-m  grit 
-ti  grimus 
-tae  gritis 
-ta  grunt 

F.  Inf.  Act. 
F.  P.  Inf.  Act. 

ama-tiiru-s,-ra, 

-rum  esse 
ama-tiiru-s,-ra, 

-rum  fuisse 

moni-turu-s,  -ra, 

-rum  esse 
moni-tiiru-s,  -ra, 

-rum  fuisse 

rec-turu-s,  -ra, 
-rum  esse 

rec-turu-s, -ra, 
-rum  fuisse 

audi-turu-s,-ra, 

-rum  esse 
audi-turu-s,  -ra, 

-rum  fuisse 

F.  Inf.  Pass. 
F.  P.  Inf.  Pass. 

ama-tu-m  iri 

ama-tu-s,  -ta, 

-tu-m  fore 

moni-tu-m  iri 

moni-tu-s,  -ta, 

-tu-m  fore 

rec-tu-m  iri 

rec-tu-s,  -ta, 

tu-m  fore 

audi-tu-m  iri 

audi-tu-s,  -ta, 

-tu-m  fore 

F.  Part.  Act. 

ama-turu-s,  -ra, 
-ru-m 

moni-turu-s,  -ra, 
-ru-m 

rec-triru-s,-ra, 
-ru-m 

audi-turu-s,  -ra, 
-ru-m 

F.  Supines. 
L.  Supines. 

ama-tu-m 
ama-tu 

moni-tu-m 
moni-tu 

rec-tu-m 
rec-tu 

audi-tu-m 
audi-tii 

266 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


THE    FOUR    CONJUGATIONS.-PASSIVE    VOICE. 
Mecajntiilatioii, 

Give  the  meaning,  stem,  formation,  principal  parts, 
euphonic  changes,  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  each 
of  the  following  :  — 


1.  narratur 

2.  docentur'^ 

3.  ISgebantur* 

4.  audiebar 

5.  in6neris 

6.  vScabgris 

7.  puniuntur 

8.  duc6ris'5 

9.  vincar 

10.  narrantur 

11.  mdvemur 

12.  dScere  pugros 
18.  auditor 

11.  Smemur 


amati  sumus 
docti  sunt 
auditus  est 
missa  est 
eruditi  sunt 
lectus  est 
vScatus  es 
munitum  est 
puniti  eramus 
laudatus  Srat 
laudatae  sunt 
pugri  exerciti  sunt 
puella  ornata  est 
mSniti  erant 


videmini 

vincebaris 

mSnebunt 

aedificatis 

paratT  eramus 

eruditur 

punitae  sunt 

educator 

oppugnata  est 

ediicati  fnSrant 

culpabaris 

laudetur 

visi  erant 

cingetur 


Supplementary  P^xercises  ;  — 

1.  Discipulus  a  magistro  laudatur.  2.  Puer,  bene  edu- 
cator. 3.  Laborii.  4.  DTcit  puer  se  laudiltum  esse.  o.  Dc- 
])enuis  laudari.  G.  MTlites  jussT  sunt  pugnare.  7.  Disci j)uli 
fi  magistro  docentur.  8.  Credo  eum  illos  pueros  laudaturum 
esse.     0.  BonT  discipull  stfident  exercerl  in  litterarum  studils. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  was  told.  2.  They  are  telling,  o.  I  was  (being) 
taught.  4.  We  are  taught.  5.  He  is  heard.  G.  Tliey  will 
be  taught.  7.  We  shall  be  sent.  8.  He  was  conquered. 
9.  They  were  seen.  10.  I  was  being  called.  11.  Thou  wilt 
have  been  blamed.  12.  He  is  being  praised,  lo.  Thou  wilt 
have  been  praised.  14.  They  have  been  sent.  15.  They 
have  been  called.  16.  They  will  have  been  heard.  17.  She 
has  been  taught.     18.  He  has  been  heard.     19.  Ye  have  been 


thp:  four  conjugations.  267 

praised.  20.  She  has  been  heard.  21.  The  bo}'  had  been 
taught.  22.  Call  ye.  23.  Hear  ye.  24.  We  are  led. 
25.  The}^  are  exercised.  2G.  We  have  been  exercised. 
27.  We  had  been  instructed.  28.  They  have  been  punished. 
29.  It  has  been  finished.  30.  He  is  sent.  31.  The  town 
has  been  stormed.     32.  It  is  being  read. 

Remember  the  formula  for  converting  a  sentence  into  the 
passive  form :  — 

S.  V.  T.  O. 

magister       laudat       pugrum 

S.  V.  p.  Ab.  of  Agent. 

puer   laudatur   a   magistro 

Obs.  If  the  ablative  expresses  not  the  Agent  or  Doer  of  the 
action,  but  only  the  cause,  ineans,  or  instrument,  no  preposition  is 
used.  Change  the  following  to  the  passive  form ;  translate  into 
Latin  :  — 

1.  The  master  praises  the  boys.  2.  The  general  punishes 
the  soldiers.  3.  The  father  is  calling  tlie  boy.  4.  The 
arrow  wounds  the  soldier.  5.  The  teacher  praises  the  boys 
and  the  girls.  6.  The  man  writes  the  letter.  7.  The  soldiers 
storm  the  town. 

Supplementary  Exercises  :  — 

1.  The  soldiers  are  praised  by  their  commander.  2.  The 
war  has  been  finished.  3.  The  soldier  was  killed  by  a  jave- 
lin. 4.  Let  those  boys  be  praised.  5.  Let  the  letter  be 
written.  6.  I  think  these  soldiers  will  finish  the  war.  7.  They 
desire  to  depart.     8.   The  men  are  commanded  to  fight. 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  translation  is  — 

Pres.  T  am  being  loved,  or  /  am       Perf.  I  have  been  loved,  etc. 

loved,  etc.  AoR.    I  was  loved,  etc. 

Imp.     I  was  being  loved,  etc.  Plup.  I  had  been  loved,  etc. 

FuT.    /  shall  or  will  be  loved,  etc.       F,  P.    /  shall  or  icill  have  been  loved,  etc. 

2.  The  form  is  inflected  as  follows  :  — 

Masc.  Fern.  Neuter. 

Sing.   Smatus  amata  amatum  sum,  es,  etc. 

Pltir.   Smatl  Smatae         amata  sumus,  estis,  etc. 


268  FIRST  STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

3.  See  above,  note  4. 

4.  Notice  that  reg  +  tus  =  rectus. 

5.  Verb-stem  =  due-  -}-  turn  =  ductum. 

How  do  you  distinguish  the  conjugations  1  Give  the  present  stem 
of  the  first  conjugation.  What  is  meant  hy  the  principal  parts  of  a 
verb  1  What  are  the  principal  parts  in  the  passive  voice  ?  How  is  the 
perfect  of  each  conjugation  formed  ?  What  verbs  take  two  accusatives 
of  the  same  i)erson  or  tiling  ?  Give  the  tense-sign  of  the  imperfect 
indicative  active.  How  is  tlie  participial  stem  of  each  conjugation 
formed?  AVhat  is  the  tense-sign  of  the  present?  (Ans.  It  has  none.) 
What  is  the  tense-sign  of  the  future  perfect?  {Ans.  aniavS-ri-mus. ) 
Has  the  indicative  any  special  sign  to  mark  the  mode?  (^l».s-.  No.) 
What  are  the  personal  endings  of  the  present  ?  These  endings  were 
originally  personal  pronouns,  and  have,  accordingly,  the  force  of  pro- 
nouns in  English.     Kemember  that  the  verbal  endings  contain  — 

1.  Tlie  tense-sign  ;  as  -ha-  in  Sma-ba-m. 

2.  Tlie  mode-vowel ;  as  -a-  in  rgg-a-s. 

3.  The  personal  ending ;  as  -s  in  rgg-a-s. 

Are  the  future  participle  active  and  supines  formed  from  this  stem  ? 
(Ans.  Strictly  they  are  not;  the  future  participle  active  is  an  adjective 
form  to  nouns  in  -tor,  -sor :  as,  lec-tor,  fut.  part,  lec-turus ;  the  supine 
is  a  noun  of  the  fourth  conjugation  in -/«  or  -su,  nom.  -tuni  or  -sutu  ; 
but  as  the  form  is  the  same  as  the  participial  stem,  and  as  the  suffixes 
begin  with  t,  these  forms  are  usually  referred  to  this  stem.) 


LESSON    LXXXVir. 

GENITIVE  AND   ABLATIVE   OF   QUALITY. 

EXERCISE    FOR    SIGHT-READING. 

290.    Genitive  of  Quality. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  vir  maximi  consilii,  a  man  of  very  great  sagacity. 

2.  fossa  quindecim  pgdum,  a  ditch  of  Jifteen  feet. 

3.  vir  est  excellentis  ingSnii,  lie  is  a  man  of  excellent  disposition. 

4.  Caesar  Diimn6rigem  magni  animi  et  magnae  inter  Gallos 

auctoritatis  cogiioverat,  Ciesar  knew  that  Dumnorix  was 
(a  man)  of  great  courage  and  influence  among  the  Gauls. 


GENITIVE   AND   ABLATIVE   OF    QUALITY.  269 

291.  Ablative  of  Quality. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  summa  virtute  Sdiilescens,  a  youth  of  the  greatest  valor. 

2.  C^tilina  inggnio  mS.16   fuit,    Catiline  loas  a  man  of  a  had 

disposition. 
?).  Caesar  fuisse  traditur  excelsa  stStura,   Ccesar  is  said  to 

have  been  of  tall  stature. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  the  nouns  added  for 
description  (as  consilii,  pgdum,  inggnii,  S.nimi,  auctoritatis)  are 
all  in  the  genitive  case,  and  that,  in  every  instance,  the  genitive  is 
accompanied  by  an  adjective  (as  maximi,  quind^cim,  excellentis, 
magni,  magnae).  This  genitive  cannot  be  used  without  an  accom- 
panying adjective :  as,  a  man  of  talent  is  hSmo  ingSniosus  (not 
hSmo  inggnii) ;  but,  a  rnan  of  great  talent  is  h6mo  magni  inggnii, 
Note,  further,  that  in  every  instance  the  relation  expressed  is  be- 
tween two  nouns  ;  thus,  a  ditch  of  ff teen  feet  is  fossa  quindgcim 
pgdum,  but  when  latus  is  added,  we  must  say  fossa  quindScim 
pgdes  lata,  a  ditch  ff  teen  feet  deep.  (Xote  that  ^iml  and  aucto- 
ritatis, in  Ex.  4,  stand  in  the  predicate  after  the  intransitive  verb 
esse  understood.)  A  genitive  added  in  this  way  to  a  noun  for 
further  description  is  called  a  Descriptive  Genitive,  or  a  Geni- 
tive OF  Quality,  or  of  Characteristic  ;  if  it  stands  in  the 
predicate  after  an  intransitive  verb,  it  is  called  a  Predicate 
Genitive  of  Quality,  etc.  Note  that  in  Exs.  1,  2,  3,  under  291, 
the  nouns  virtute,  ingSnio,  and  statura  are  added  to  express  quality, 
or  for  further  desci'iption,  and  that  these  nouns  are  in  the  ablative. 
Distinguish  the  attributive  (virtute)  and  the  predicate  use  (inggnio, 
st3.tura) .     The  idioms  are  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

GENITIVE    AND    ABLATIVE    OF    QUALITY. 

292.  Rule  XLIII. — A  noun  denoting  quality,  quan- 
tity, or  description,  and  having  an  adjective  joined 
with  it,  may  be  put  in  tlie  genitive  or  in  the  ablative. 

Obs.  The  use  of  the  ablative  is  more  common,  but  the  two  cases 
are  often  used  indifferently,  and  sometimes  both  are  found  in  the 
same  sentence. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  German!  viii  corporum  ingenti  magmtudine  fuerunt. 
2.  CatilTiia  fuit  magna  vi  et  am  mi  et  corporis.  3.  Bibracte 
est  oppidum  apud  Aeduos  maximae  auctoritatis.  4.  Caesar, 
vir  summi  ingenii  (or  summo  ingenio),  prudentiam  cum 
eloquentia  junxit. 


270  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


Sight -Reading. 

C^SAll'.S    LANDING    IN    BRITAIN. 

Erat^  ob  has  causas  siimma  cliff icultas,  quod  naves  propter 

for  because 

magnitudinem,  nisi  in  alto,  constitul^  non  poterant ;    militi- 

eize  deep  (water)     station  could 

bus"  autein  —  ignotis  locTs,^  impeditls  manibus,  nifigno  et  gray! 

unknown  encumber 

armorum  onere  oppressis  —  simnl  et  de  nfivibus  desiliendum 

weight  load  both 

et  in  fluctibus  consistendum  et  cum  liostibus  erat  pugnan- 

and  wave  stand-firm 

duin  ;  cum  illi"'  aut  ex  arido,  aut  paulum  in  aquam  progress!, 

while  dry  (land)  a-little  advance 

omnibus   meinbrls'*  expeditl,   notissimis   locTs,   audacter  tela 

limbs  free  well-known  dart 

conicerent,  et  equos  insuefactos  incitarent. 

hurl  train  push-on 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Subject '^     Position?      Yjixg.  —  there  iras, 

2.  Pule  for  tliis  infinitive  1 

3.  The  construction  is,  militibus  desiliendum  6rat,  the  soldiers 
had  to  leaj).     Pule  for  militibus  being  in  the  dative  ? 

4.  Explain  these  ablatives.         5.  To  wlioin  does  ill!  refer  7 


LESSON    LXXXVIII. 

IKREGULAE   VERBS. 

293.  Irregular  Verbs  deviate  from  the  common  inflection 
in  some  of  the  parts  formed  from  the  present  stem.  The 
tenses  formed  from  the  perfect  and  participial  stems  are 
inflected  alike  in  all  verbs.  The  forms  called  irregular  are, 
for  the  most  part,  either  syncopated  or  ancient  forms. 

1.  Tlie  most  common  Irregular  Verbs  are  :  — 


1. 

sum,  /  am. 

5. 

fgro,  /  hear. 

2. 

v61o,  /  ivish. 

6. 

eo,  /  go. 

3. 

malo,  T  prefer. 

7. 

flo,  /  am  made,  or  become. 

4. 

nolo,  /  am  umvillinfj. 

8. 

gdo,  /  eat. 

9.  queo,  /  am  able. 


ir^KEGULATl    VERBS. 


271 


2.  Pos-sum,  /  am  aide,  I  can,  a  compound  of  tin;  adjective  p6tis 
(p6te),  able,  and  sum,  is  inflected  as  follows :  — 


IMtlNCirAL     PARTS. 

Pres.  Tnd.  1'ki:s.  Ink.  Pekf.  Inf. 

pos-sum  pos-se  p6t-ui 

I'AKADIGM. 


^ARTICirLE. 


I'erson. 

FUESK.NT. 

Indicative.        Subjunctive. 

1'eufect. 
Indicative.         Subjunctive. 

Si  Jig.  1 
2 

o 

Plur.  1 

2 

pos-sum             pos-sim 
p6t-es                 pos-sis 
pot-est               pos-sit 
pos-siimus         pos-simus 
pot-estis            pos-sitis 
pos-sunt             pos-sint 

pot-ui                   pot-uerim 
pot-uisti              pot-ueris 
pot-uit                 pot-uerit 
pot-uimus           pot-uerimus 
pot-uistis            pot-ueritis 
pot-uerunt,  -re  pot-uerint 

ASing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Impekfkct. 

Pluperfect. 

pot-eram           pos-sem 
pot-eras             pos-ses 
p6t-erat             pos-set 
pot-eramus        pos-semus 
pot-eratis          pos-setis 
pot-erant           pos-sent 

pot-ueram          pot-uissem 
pot-ueras            pot-uisses 
pot-uerat            pot-uisset 
pot-ueramus       pot-uissemus 
pot-ueratis         pot-uissetis 
pot-uerant          pot-uissent 

Si7ig.  1 

2 

•> 

P//0-.  1 

2 

o 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

pot-ero 

pot-eris 

pot-erit 

pot-erimus 

pot-eritis 

pot-erunt 

pot-uero 

pot-ueris 

pot-uerit 

pot-uerimus 

pot-ueritis 

pot-uerint 

Inflnitive. 

Participle. 

Pkks.  pos-se       Pekf.  pot-uisse 

Pres.  pot-ens 

Obs.  In  forming-  the  compound  possum,  note  that  p6tis  drops 
is,  and  that  t  becomes  s  before  s ;  as,  (pot-sum)  =  possum.  In 
the  perfect,  /of  fui,  etc.,  is  dropped  after  t.  The  infinitive  posse, 
subjunctive  possem,  are  shortened  forms  of  pStesse  and  pStes- 
sem.  Possum  has  no  imperative,  no  future  jmrticiple,  no  gerund, 
and  no  supine;  p6tens  is  used  only  as  an  adjective.  The  omitted 
forms  are  wantino-. 


272 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN". 


3.  Pro-sum,  /  help,  I  projit,  is  inflected  like  sum,  but  retains  its 
original  d  (prod-)  before  a  vowel,  and  loses  it  before  a  consonant; 

as, 

PRINCIPAL,    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.               Pres.  Ikf.              Perf.  Ind.           Participle. 
pro-sum  prod-esse  pro-fui  


Person. 

Present. 
Indicative.       Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 
Indicative.          Subjunctive. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

pro-sum            pro-sim 
prod-es             pro-sis 
prod-est            pro-sit 
pr5-sumus        pro-simus 
prod-estis         pr5-sltis 
pro-sunt           pro-sint 

pro-fui                 pro-fuerim 
pro-fuisti             pr5-fueris 
pro-fuit                pro-fuerit 
pro-fuimus          pro-fuerimus 
pro-fuistis           pro-fueritis 
pro-fuerunt,  -re  pro-fuerint 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Imperfect. 

Pluperfect. 

pr5d-eram        prod-essem 
pr5d-eras         pr5d-esses 
prod-erat          prod-esset 
prod-eramus    prod-essemus 
prod-eratis       prod-essetis 
prod-erant        pr5d-essent 

pr5-fueram         pro-fuissem 
pro-fueras           pro-fuisses 
pr5-fuerat           pro-fuisset 
pro-fueramus     pro-fuissemus 
pro-fueratis        pr5-fuissetis 
pr5-fuerant         pro-fuissent 

Sing.  1 
2 

o 

Plur.  1 

2 

3 

Flture. 

Future  Perfect. 

prod-ero 

prod-eris 

prod-erit 

prod-eriraus 

prod-eritis 

prod-erunt 

pro-fuero 

pro-fueris 

pr5-fuerit 

pro-fuerimus 

pro-fueritis 

pro-fuerint 

Imperative. 

Pres.  prod-es,  prod-este         Fit.  prod-esto,  prod-esto,  pro-sunto 

Infinitive. 

Participle. 

Pres.  prod-esse      Perf.  pro-fuisse 

Fut.  pro-fiitiirus 

4.    Like  sum  are  conjugated  ab-sum,  ad-sum,  de-sum,  in-sum, 
inter-sum,  ob-sum,  prae-sum,  sub-sum  (no  perfect),  super-sum. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Caesar  p6test  iter  dSre  (256),  Ccesar  is  able  to  give,  or  can 
give,  a  passage. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


273 


2.  Caesar  p6t§rat  iter  dSre,  Cwsar  was  able  to  give,  or  could 
give,  a  passage. 

0.  Caesar  p6tSrit  iter  dare,  CcEsar  will  be  able  to  give  a  passage. 
4.  Caesar  p6tuit  iter  dSre,  Ccesar  has  been  able  to  give,  or  could 

have  given,  a  passage. 

Syn.  Possum,  /  am  able,  because  I  have  sufficient  power ;  queo, 
/  am  able,  because  circumstances  allow. 

EXERCISES. 

Name  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  the  fol- 
lowing forms  :  — 

1.  Potest,  poterat,  poterit.  2.  Possiimus,  poteramus,  pote- 
rimus.  3.  Ego  possum  legere,  tu  potes  scribere.  4.  Caesar 
oppidum  expugnare  potest.  5.  Amicisi  prodesse  possumus. 
6.  Caesar  potest  iter  Helvetiis  dare.  7.  Divitiacus  pluri- 
mum^  in  reliqua  Gallia  poterat.  8.  Caesar  urbT  praeerat. 
9.  Multi'^  supersumus.     10.  Caesar  equites  praemittit.'' 

NOTES     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  202.        2.  •plvLTira.uia  posse,  to  be  very  powerful ;  see  Vocabulary. 

8.  multi  modifies  nos  (we),  the  omitted  subject  of  supersflmus. 
Translate,  inamj  of  us  survive;  of  us  is  appositive.     See  202. 

If  the  simple  verb  is  transitive,  the  compound  is  transitive,  and  is 
followed  by  the  accusative.  What  is  an  irregular  verb  1  Mention  the 
most  common  irregular  verbs.  Of  what  is  possum  compounded  1 
Give  its  composition ;  account  for  the  euphonic  changes. 


LESSON   LXXXIX. 

lEEEaULAE   YEEBS   {continued). 

294.    The  Irregular  Verbs  v61o,  and  its  compounds,  nolo 
and  malo,  are  inflected  as  follows  :  — 

PKINCIPAI.    PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Participle. 

1.   volo 
1.   n51o 
3.   malo 

velle 
nolle 
malle 

volui 
nolui 
malui 

,  ivlsh. 

,  he  unwilling. 

,  prefer. 

274 


FIRST    STEPS   IN  LATIN. 


Present.                                                        | 

Ind.                Subj. 

Ind.                 Subj. 

Ind.                  Subj. 

volo              velim 

nolo              nolim 

malo               malim 

VIS                 veils 

nonvis           nobs 

mavis             malis 

vult              velit 

nonvult         nolit 

mavult           malit 

volumus       velimus 

noltiinus       noliraus 

mfilumus       malimus 

vultis            velitis 

nonvultis      nolitis 

mavultis        malitis 

volunt          veliiit 

nolunt           noliut 

malunt           malint 

Imperfect.                                                       | 

volebam       vellem 

nolebam       nollem 

nullebam       mallem 

volebiis         velles 

nolobas         nolles 

nijilebas         malles 

volebat         vellet 

nolebat         nollet 

malebat         mallet 

volebamus   vellemus 

nolebamus    nollemus 

malebamus    mallemus 

volebatis      velletis 

nolebatis       nolletis 

malebatis      mallotis 

volebant       vellent 

nolt'bant       uolleut 

malebant       mallent 

Future.                                                          | 

volam,  voles,  volet, 

nolam,  noles,  nolet, 

malam,  males,  malet, 

volemus,  etc. 

nolemus,  etc. 

malemus,  etc. 

Perfect.                                                        | 

volul             voluCrim 

nolui             noluCrim 

malm             malugrim 

voluisti         voludris 

nolulsti         nolugris 

maluisti         maluCris 

voluit            voluCrit 

noluit            uoluerit 

mfiluit            malugrit 

voluimus      volu^rimus 

noluimus      noluCriraus 

maluimus      miiludrimus 

voluistis       voluCritis 

noluistis       noluCritis 

maluistis       maluCritis 

voluerunt,  J  ^Qi^.^^int 

"^!^f;^^"*'{noluermt 

maluerunt.  {  ,^.^i„^,j.int 

or  -re       j 

PI.UFERFECT.                                                                            | 

voluerani     voluissem 

noluCram     noluissem 

maluCram      maluissem 

voluCras       voluisses 

nolueras       noluisscs 

maluCras       maluisses 

voluCrat       voluisset 

noluerat       noluisset 

maliierat       maluisset 

voludramus  voluissemus 

iiolueramus  noluissemus 

malueramus  maluisscmus 

volugratis     voluissetis 

noluCratis    noluissetis 

maluoratis     maluissetis 

volugrant     voluisseut 

uoluCrant     iioluissent 

maluCrant     maluissent 

Future  Perfect. 

volugro 

noluCro 

malugro 

volugris 

nolueris 

malugris 

v61u6rit 

noluCrit 

malugrit 

volugrimus 

nolugrimus 

malugrimus 

v61u6ritis 

nolu(?ritis 

maluCritis 

volugrint 

noluCrint 

maluerint 

Imperative. 

Pres.   noli,  nollte 

FuT.    nolito,  noli 

to,  nolitote,  nolunto 

Infinitive. 

Pres.   velle    nolle 

malle             Perf.  voluis 

SB    noluisse    maluisse 

Participles. 

Pres.   \ 

^olens,  loilling.     nolens,  ^ 

imoilling. 

IRREGULAR    VERBS.  275 


Obs.  Nolo  is  a  compound  of  ne  (non),  yiof,  and  v61o;  malo, 
of  mSgis,  7norc,  and  v61o,  weakened  in  pronunciation  to  ma-lo. 
Notice  that  nolo  alone  lias  an  imperative.  The  omitted  forms  are 
wanting. 

Syn.  Aveo,  lo7if/  for ;  desIdSro,  desire  what  one  has  had,  but 
now  feels  the  loss  of  (hence,  regret)  ;  v61o,  wish ;  opto,  choose ; 
otipio,  desire  (general  term)  ;  gestio,  desire,  and  manifest  it  by 
gestures;  ciipio,  desire,  long  for  anything. 

EXERCISES. 

Name  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  the  fol- 
lowing forms  :  — 

1.  Volumus,  volebamus,  volemus,  velimus.  2.  Ego  volo 
legere,  tii  vis  scribere,  frater  vult  pingere.  3.  Nolumus, 
nolebamus,  nolemus,  nolimus.  4.  Puer  vult  audire.  5.  Dum- 
norix  quam^  plurimas  civitates  habere  volebat.  6.  Noli- 
scribere.  7.  Malumus,  malebamus,  malemus,  malimus. 
8.  Mons,  quem  a  Labieno^  occiipari  voluit,  ab  hostibus 
tenetur.      9.  Caesar  ab  HelvetiTs  discedere  nolebat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  You  are  wishing,  3'ou  were  wishing,  you  will  be  wish- 
ing. 2.  They  are  unwilling,  they  were  unwilling,  they  will 
be  unwilling.  3.  You  prefer,  you  preferred,  you  will  pre- 
fer, you  have  preferred.  4.  I  have  wished,  I  had  wished. 
5.  You  wish  to  know.  6.  We  had  been  unwilling.  7.  Do 
you  prefer  to  read  or  to  write? 

NOTES     AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Quam  strengthens  plurimas  =  as  many  as  possible. 

2.  Proliibitions  are  often  expressed  by  noli  with  the  infinitive; 
translate  do  not  write.     N6I1  is  softer  than  ne  scribe. 

3.  Agent  after  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice. 

What  is  meant  by  an  irregular  verb?  In  what  tenses  are  they 
irregular  ?  Give  the  compounds  of  v61o.  The  stem  of  v61o  is  vdl-, 
tlie  root-vowel  0  being  changed  to  e  or  ii.  The  form  vTs  stands  for 
v61-is,  vel-is,  vil-is  (=  vis).  Velle  is  for  vel-se,  so  vellem  for 
vel-sem. 


276 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


LESSON    XC. 

IREEGULAE    VEEBS    icojiUnuecl) . 

ABLATIVE    OF    SPECIFICATION. 

295.    The  irreoular  verb  f6ro  is  inflected  as  follows  :  — 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

fgro  ferre  tiili 

ACTIVE     VOICE. 


Participle. 
latum 


Person. 

Prksent. 
Indicative.       Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 
Indicative.         Subjunctive. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

fero 

fers 

fert 

ferimus 

fertis 

ferunt 

feram 

feras 

ferat 

feram  us 

feratis 

ferant 

tuli                     tulerim 
tulisti                tiileris 
tiilit                   tiilerit 
tiilimus              tiilerimus 
tiilistis               tuleritis 
tiilerunt,  -re      tiilerint 

Sivg.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 

3 

Impeufect. 

Pluperfect.      ♦ 

ferebam 

ferebas 

ferebat 

ferebamus 

ferebatis 

ferebant 

ferrem 

ferres 

ferret 

ferremus 

ferretis 

ferrent 

tuleram              tiilissem 
tuleras                tiilisses 
tiilerat               tiilisset 
tiileramus          tiilissemus 
tiileratis             tiilissetis 
tiilerant              tiilissent 

Sinq.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

feram 

feres 

feret 

feremus 

feretis 

ferent 

tulero 

tiileris 

tiilerit 

tiilerimus 

tuleritis 

tulerint 

Imperati 

ve. 

Put 

s.  fer,  ferte 

FuT.  fert 

0,  ferto,  fertote,  ferunto 

Infinitive. 

P 

*RES.  ferre 

Perf.  tulisse 

FuT.  latiirus  esse 

Participl* 

es. 

Pres. 

ferens      Put 

laturus,  -a,  -u 
Gerund:   ferei 

m        Supines  :  latum ^  latii 
adi,  etc. 

IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


277 


PASSIVE   voicj:. 


Person. 

Present. 
Indicative.        Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 
Indicative.          Subjunctive. 

Sing.  1 

3 

7'lur.  1 
2 
3 

feror                   ferar 
ferris,  -re          feraris 
fertur                feratur 
ferimur             feramur 
ferimini             feramini 
feruntur            ferantur 

latus  sum         latus  sim 
latus  es            latus  sis 
latus  est          latus  sit 
lati  sumus        lati  simus 
lati  estis           lati  sitis 
lati  sunt           lati  sint 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Imperfect. 

Pluperfect. 

ferebar             ferrer 
ferebaris           ferreris 
ferebatur          ferretur 
ferebamur         ferremur 
ferebamini       ferremini 
ferebantur        ferrentur 

latus  eram       latus  essem 
latus  eras        latus  esses 
latus  erat        latus  esset 
lati  eramus      lati  essemus 
lati  eratis        lati  essetis 
lati  erant         lati  essent 

»S'/«(/.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

FlTTlTRE. 

Future  Perfect. 

ferar 

fereris 

feretur 

feremur 

feremini 

ferentur 

latus  ero 
latus  eris 
latus  erit 
lati  erimus 
lati  eritis 
lati  erunt 

Imperative. 

Pres.  ferre,  ferimini           Fut.  fertor,  fertor,  feruntor 

Infinitive. 

Pres.  ferri     Perf.  latus,  -a,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse     Fi  t.  latum  iri 
FuT.  Perf.   latus  fore 

Participles. 

Perf.  latus,  -a,  -um                  Ger.  ferendus,  -a,  -um 

Obs.  1.  In  the  Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses  of  fero  tlie  only  irregu- 
larity is  the  omission  of  e  and  i  in  some  of  the  terminations :  thus, 
fer-s  =  fer-is,  fer-t  =  fer-it,  fer-rem  =  fer-erem,  fer-re  =  fer-ere,  etc. 
The  forms  of  fero  are  derived  from  three  independent  stems,  seen  in 
fero,  tuli,  latum. 

Obs.  2.  The  compounds  of  fero  are  conjugated  in  the  same  way :  — 

af -fero  (ad,  fero)        af -ferre       at-tiili       nl-\iitum,  bring  to. 

au-fero  (ab,  fCro)        au-ferre      ab-stuli     ab-latum,  cai-ry  au-ai/. 

ef -fero  (ex,  fero)         ef-ferre       ex-tuli       e-latum,  carry  out. 

in-fero  (in,  fero)         in-ferre       in-tfdi       il-latum,  carr^  m/o. 

of-fero  (ob,  fero)         of-ferre       ob-tuli       oh-lhium,  present. 

pro-fero  (pro,  fero)     pro-ferre     pro-tuli     pro-latum,  carr^;/ /or «-arc/. 

re-f6ro  (re,  fero)         re-ferre       ret-tuli      re-latum,  bring  back. 


278  FIRST    STEPS    IK   LATIN. 


296.  Ablative  of  Specification. 

EXA3IPLKS. 

1.  rex  nomine  fuit,  he  ivas  king  in  name. 

2.  Claudius  altero  pgde,  lame  in  one  foot. 

3.  Helvetii  rgliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  the  Helvetians 

surpass  the  other  Gauls  in  valor. 

4.  oppida  sua  omnia,  nilmgro  ad  duSdgcim  incendunt,  they 

hum  all  their  towns,  about  tivelve  in  number. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  nomine,  pSde,  virtute,  and 
niimgro,  show  in  what  respect  or  particular  the  statement  is  true, 
i.e.,  {lie  Helvetians  surpass  the  other  Gauls  in  respect  to  valor.  The 
principle  is  expressed  in  the  following  rule  :  — 

ABLATIVE    OF    SPECIFICATION. 

297.  Rule  XLIV.  —  A  noun,  adjective,  or  verb 
may  be  followed  by  the  ablative  to  denote  in  Avhat 
respect  its  sij^nification  is  taken. 

EXERCISES. 

Name  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  the  fol- 
lowing verbs  :  — 

1.  Ferimiis,  ferebamus,  feramus,  feremus.  2.  Quid  fers, 
ml^  amice?  i^.  Ferte  viro  auxiliuin.  4.  Populus  Eomanus 
din  injurias  tulit.  r>.  Helvetils  bellum  inferre  volumns. 
G.  Ferimur,  ferebamur,  feremur,  feramur.  7.  Auxilium 
militibus  a  dnce  fertur.  8.  HI  omnes  linoufi,  institutis, 
legibus  inter  se  differunt.  0.  Fer  mihi  auxilium.  10.  Oppi- 
dum  Remorum  nomine  Bibi'ax-  longe  aberat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  We  bear,  we  were  bearing,  we  will  bear.  2.  They 
bear,  they  will  bear.  3.  He  has  borne,  he  had  borne,  they 
had  borne.  4.  We  are  borne,  we  were  borne,  we  shall  be 
borne.  5.  He  is  borne,  he  was  borne.  6.  He  has  been 
borne,  he  had  been  borne.  7.  Bear  aid,  they  will  bear  aid, 
he  has  borne  aid.     8.  They  differ  in  language  and  laws. 

NOTES     AND    (QUESTIONS. 

1.  231.  Ohs.  1. 

2.  Bibrax,  gen.  -actis,  r.  (Frencli  modern  name  Bievre). 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


279 


LESSON   XCI. 

lEEEGULAE  VEKBS    {continued). 

ABLATIVE   OF    DIFFERENCE. 

r/o,  and  gdo,  /  eat,  are 


298.   The  Irregular  Verbs   eo,  / 
inflected  as  follows  :  — 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.        Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

60  ire  ivi  or  -ii 


Participle. 
itum 


Person. 

Present. 
Indicative.      Subjunctive. 

•  Perfect. 
Indicative.              Subjunctive. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plxir.  1 
2 
3 

eo                       earn 
IS                        eas 
it                        eat 
imus                   eamus 
itis                      eatis 
eunt                   eant 

ivi  or  -ii            iverim  or  -ierim 
ivisti,  etc.          iveris,  etc 
ivit,  etc.             iverit,  etc. 
ivimus,  etc.      iverimus,  etc. 
ivistis,  etc.        iveritis,  etc. 
iverunt,  -re      iverint,  et.c 

Sing.  1 

2 
3 
Plur.  1 
2 
3 

Imperfect. 

Pluperfect. 

ibam                  irem 

ibas                    ires 
ibat                    iret 
ibamus               iremus 
ibatis                 iretis 
ibant                  irent 

j  iveram             ivissem, -iissem 
\    or  -ieram           or  issem 
iveras,  etc.         ivisses,  etc. 
iverat,  etc.        ivisset,  etc 
iveramus,  e^'.   ivissemus,  etc. 
iveratis,  etc.      ivissetis,  etc 
iverant,  etc      ivissent,  etc. 

Sing.  1 
Plur.  1 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

ibo,  ibis,  ibit 
ibimus,  etc. 

ivero  or  -iero,  iveris,  etc. 
iverimus,  etc 

Imperative. 

Pres.  T,  ite                Fut.  ito,  ito,  it5te,  eunto 

Infinitive. 

Pres.  11 

•e        Perf.  ivisse,  -iisse  or  -isse       Fut.  iturus,  -a,  -um,  esse 

Participles. 

] 

Geruni 

;*REs.  iens  (Gen.  euntis)                Fut.  iturus,  -a,  -um 

)ivE  :  eundus,  -a,  -um        Gerund  :  eundi,  etc       Sup.  itum 

Obs.  1.  Eo  is  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  with  variations ;  the  stem  is 
i  (lengthened  to  i,  except  in  the  future  i)artieiple  and  in  the  supines), 
which  is  changed  into  e  before  a,  0,  and  n ;  as,  eo,  eunt,  earn,  etc. 

Obs.  2.  Eo  and  its  intransitive  compounds  are  used  in  the  passive 
only  impersonally :  Ind.  itur,  ibatur,  ibitur,  itum  est,  etc. ;  Sub.j. 
eatur,  iretur,  itum  sit,  etc. ;  but  the  transitive  compounds  are  used 
regularly  in  the  passive ;  iri  occurs  as  an  auxiliary  in  the  future  infini- 
tive passive.     (Sec  251.) 


280 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


Obs.  3.  The  compounds  of  eo  usually  take  -ii,  rarely  -Iri  in  the  per- 
fect tenses  ;  as,  adeo,  I  approach,  makes  adii,  adieram,  adissem,  etc. 

Oi5s.  4.  Tlie  compounds  of  eo  which  have  a  transitive  meaning  are 
conjugated  throughout  in  the  passive:  as,  adeo,  I  approach;  Pass. 
adeor,  adiris,  aditur,  adimur,  adimini,  adeuntur,  etc. 

Oi!s.  5.  Ambio,  /  go  about,  retains  the  /  throughout,  and  is  conju- 
gated regularly  like  a  verb  of  the  fourth  conjugation.  Hence  we  find 
ambiebam,  but  occasionally  ambibam,  the  gerund  ambiendi,  etc.  The 
])erfect  participle  is  ambitus,  though  the  verbal  substantive  is  ambitus. 


299.   Edo,  I  eat. 


PR  INC  IP  AI.    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.         '  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind.         Participle. 

Sdo         gdere  or  esse  edi  esum 


Person. 

Present. 
Indicative.            Subjunctive. 

Peuke(  t. 
Indicative.    Svibjunctive. 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 

2 
3 

edo                    edam  or  edim 
edis  or  es          edas  or  edis 
edit  or  est         edat  or  edit 
edimus             edamus  or  edimus 
editis  or  estis    edatis  or  editis 
edunt                edant  or  edint 

edi                   ederim 
edisti               ederis 
edit                 ederit 
edimus            ederimus 
edistis             ederitis 
ederunt,  -re     ederint 

ImI'EREECT. 

PUUPEUFECT. 

SInq.  1 
2 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 

edebam            ederem  or  essem 
edebas              ederes  or  esses 
edebat              ederet  or  esset 
edebamus        ederemus  or  essemus 
edebatis           ederetis  or  essetis 
edebant            ederent  or  essent 

ederam            edissem 
ederas             edisses 
ederat              edisset 
ederamus        edissemus 
ederatis          edissetis 
ederant           edissent 

SInq.  1 
Plur.  1 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

edam,  edes,  edet 
edemus,  efr. 

edero,  ederis,  ederit, 
ederimus,  r/r. 

Imperative. 

Pres.  ede  or  es,  edite  or  este 
FuT.  edito  or  esto,  edito  or  esto,  editote  or  estote,  edunto 

Infinitive. 

Pres.  edereoresse         Perf.  edisse         Fut.  esiirus, -a, -um  esse 

Participles. 

Pres.  edens            Fut.  esurus,  -a,  -um 
Supines  :  esum,  esii                 Gerund  :  Gen.  edendi,  etc. 

Ons.  1.  Edo  is  of  the  third  conjugation,  with  variations  ;  ^  or  i 
before  s  or  Ms  dropped,  and  the  d  of  the  stem  changed  to  .s  ,•  also  the 
original  .s  takes  the  place  of  the  r ;  as,  ede-re  =  es-se,  not  es-re. 

Obs.  2.  The  passive  voice  is  regular;  only  estur  is  generally  used 
instead  of  editur,  and  essetur  instead  of  ederetur.  The  perfect  par- 
ticiple is  esus. 


IRREGTTLAR   VERBS.  281 

300.  The  Ablative  of  Difference. 

KX  AMPLE  S. 

1.  sol  multis  partibus  major  est  quam  terra,  the  sun  is  very 

much  (lit.,  hij  many  parts)  larger  than  the  earth. 

2.  altgrum  iter  multo  expgditius  Srat,  the  other  route  vms  much 

more  passable  {more  passable  by  much). 
?}.  hio  16cus  aequo  spStio  ab  castrls  AriovistI  et  Caesaris 
abSrat,  this  place  icas  (^distant  by  an  equal  space)  the  same 
distance  from  the  camp  of  Ariovistus  and  {from  that)  of  Ccesar. 

Obs.  Ill  the  foregoing-  examples,  note  that  the  ablatives  parti- 
bus, multo,  spStio,  express  the  measure  of  difference.  These 
words  follow  the  comparatives,  major  and  expgditius ;  the  abla- 
tive spStio  denotes  extent  of  space,  which  is  usually  put  in  the 
accusative  (see  215),  but  may  be  in  the  ablative,  as  it  is  in  this 
case,  denoting  the  degree  of  difference  (lit.,  teas  cdtsent  by  an  equal 
distance).     Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 

ABLATIVE    OF    DIFFERENCE, 

301.  Rule  XLV.  —  The  ablative  is  used,  with 
comparatives  and  words  implying-  comparison,  to 
denote  the  measure  of  difference. 

Obs.  The  ablative  of  difference  includes  the  ablative  of  distance. 
(See  215.  1.) 

EXERCISES. 

Name  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  the  fol- 
lowing verbs  :  — 

1.  Imus,  ibamns,  ibimus,  efimus.  2.  Ego  Tibeo,  tu  ex 
itinere  redls.  3.  It,  eiint,  ibit.  4.  Ivit,  Tverat,  ite,  Itis, 
iveramus.  5.  I,  quo  te  fata  v<5cant.  G.  I,  lictor,  deliga 
puerum  ad  palum.  7.  Caesar  multo  gravius  quentur.  8.  Uno 
die  longiorem  mensem  faciunt.  9.  Hibernia  dimidio  minor 
(est)  quam  Britannia.  10.  Multo  major  alacritas  exercitui 
iujecta  est.     11.  Ite,  milites.     12.   Edimus,  edamus,  edunt. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  They  go,  they  were  going,  they  will  go.  2.  He  was 
going,  he  will  go,  he  goes.  3.  We  go,  we  were  going,  we 
will  go.  4.  Go  thou,  I  go,  I  have  gone,  I  had  gone.  5.  The 
sun  is  much  larger  than  the  earth.  G.  The  tower  was  ten 
feet  higher  than  the  wall.  7.  My  country  is  much  dearer 
to  me  than  life.     8.  They  make  the  year  one  day  longer. 


282 


FIRST  STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


LESSON   XCII. 
IREEaULAR   VERBS    {continued), 

ABLATIVE    AND     GENITIVE     OF     PRICE.  -  EXERCISE     FOR 
SIGHT-READING. 

302.    The  Irregular  Verb  flo,  /  became  or  am  made,  is 
inflected  as  follows  :  — 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

f lo  figri  factus  sum 


Person. 


Present. 
Indicative.      Subjunctive 


Perfect. 
Indicative.  Subjunctive. 


Si7ig.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 

2 


fio 

fis 

fit  or  fit 

[fimus] 

[fitis] 

fiunt 


flam 

flas 

fiat 

fiamus 

fiatis 

fiant 


factus  sum 
factus  es 
factus  est 
facti  sumus 
facti  estis 
facti  sunt 


factus  sim 
factus  sis 
factus  sit 
facti  simus 
facti  sitis 
facti  sint 


Imperfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Sin(/.  1 
Pliir.  1 


fiebam 
fiebamus 


fierem 
fieremus 


factus  eram 
facti  eramus 


factus  essem 
facti  essemus 


P'UTrRE 


Plur.  1 


fiam,  fies,  etc. 
fiemus 


Ft  TIRE  PEItFECT. 


factus  ero,  eris,  eU 
fact!  erimus 


Iini)erative. 

Pkes.  fi,  fite 


Infinitive. 


Pres.  fieri 


Perf.  factus,  -a,  -um,  esse 


FuT.  factum  iri 


Participles. 


Perf.  factus,  -a,  -um 


Ger.  faciendus,  -a,  -um 


Oijs.  1.  Fio  (wliicli  stands  for  fa-i-o)  is  used  as  the  passive  of  facie, 
which  lias  no  ])assive  forms  (except  faciendus  and  factus) ;  on  the 
other  hand,  factus  sum,  /  have  become,  has  tlie  meaning  of  the  perfect 
of  fio ;  fieri  is  not  really  a  passive  form,  but  an  old  infinitive  active, 
fierei. 

Obs.  2.  The  /  in  fio  is  always  long,  except  in  fit  and  when  not  fol- 
lowed by  r  (in  present  infinitive  and  imperfect  subjunctive). 

OiiS.  3.  Most  compounds  of  facio  with  prepositions  change  a  to  i 
(present  stem),  and  are  inflected  regularly;  the  passive  ends  in  -ficior; 
other  compounds  retain  a  and  have  fio  in  the  passive. 

Obs.  4.  Queo,  /  am  able,  is  conjugated  like  eo,  but  as  it  is  an  un- 
usual verb,  it  is  here  omitted ;  it  has  a  compound,  nequeo,  /  ayn  unable. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS.  283 

303.  Genitive  and  Ablative  of  Price. 

KXAMPLES. 

1.  d6mum  duobus  tSlentis  emit,  lie  bought  a  house  for  two  talents. 

2.  viginti  taientis  unam  orationem  vendidit,  he  sold  a  single 

speech  for  twenty  talents. 

3.  pace  bellum  mutavit,  he  exchanged  war  for  peace. 

4.  emit  hortos  tanti,  he  purchased  the  gardens  at  so  great  a  price. 

5.  virtus  maximi  aestimatur,  virtue  is  valued  very  highly. 
Obs.    Xote  that  emit,  a  verb  of  buying,   vendidit,  a  verb  of 

selling,  mutavit,  a  verb  of  exchanging,  are  each  followed  by  the 
ablatives  talentis,  pace,  denoting  the  price,  and  fixing  it  at  a  defi- 
nite sum;  the  ablative  is  used  because  the  price  is  the  means  by 
which  a  thing  is  bought,  sold,  or  exchanged.  In  Exs.  4  and  5,  after 
tlie  same  verbs,  emit  and  aestimatur,  the  price  is  expressed  by 
tanti  and  maximi,  both  being  in  the  genitive,  and  both  designat- 
ing the  price  indefinitely.  The  idiom  is  expressed  in  the  following 
rule :  — 

ABLATIVE    OF    PRICE. 

304.  Rule  XL VI.  —  Price  is  expressed  by  the 
ablative  when  it  is  a  definite  sum. 

1.  If  the  price  is  indefinitely  expressed,  the  genitive  is 
used ;  in  this  way  the  genitives  of  certain  adjectives  of 
Quantity,  as  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris,  magni,  parvi,  etc., 
are  used. 

EXERCISES. 

Name  the  mode,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  each  of 
the  following  verbs  :  — 

1.  Fiunt,  fiebant,  fient,  flamus.  2.  Fimus,  fiebamus, 
fiemus.  3.  Factus  est,  fact!  sunt.  4.  Fi,  fiamus,  fiant. 
5.  Fit,  fitis,  fiet.  6.  Amicus  fieri  sapiens^  potest.  7.  Duo 
virT  consiiles^  fact!  erunt.  8.  Caesar  cum  his  quinque  legi- 
onibus  ire'^  contendit.  9.  Nemo  fit  casu  bonus.  10.  Fiat* 
lux,  et  lux  facta  est.  11.  Dumnorix  omnia  Aeduorum  vectl- 
galia  parvo  pretio  redemit.  12.  Vendo  meum  frumentum 
non  pluris  quam  ceteri,  fortasse  etiam  minoris.  13.  Nulla 
pestis  humano  generi  pluris  stetit  quam  Ira. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  becomes,  they  become,  they  will  become.  2.  They 
became,  he  will  become,  we  have  become.     3.  Become  thou. 


284  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIK. 

he  can  become  good.  4.  The  soldier  sells  his  country  for 
gold.  5.  The  soldier  values  money  highly.  G.  He  sold  his 
corn  at  a  less  price.     7.  Caesar  became  consul. 

NOTE8     AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Predicate  adjective  ?       2.  Kule  for  consiiles  ?       3.  Rule  ? 
4.  Why  subjunctive  ? 

How  may  jtrice  he  expressed  ?     When  is  the  ablative  used  ?     When 
the  genitive  ? 

Sight-JReading . 

Caesar's  landing  in  Britain  (continued). 
Quod   liln   Caesar  animadvertit,   naves'   longas    (quarum 

and  this    when  (ace.) 

ot  species  erat  barbaris^  inusitatior,  et  motus  ad  usuin  ex- 
appearance  unusual  motion  service 
poditior)   paulum  removerl   ab   onerarils   navibus,  et  remis^ 

remove  of  burden  oar 

incitari,  et  ad  latus  Tipertum  liostium  constituT,'  atque  inde 

])iisli-on  side  open  thence 

fundis,  sagittTs,  tormentis  hostes  submoveri'  jussit.     Atque, 

sling  engine  (ace.)  driven  order 

nostiTs  multibus   cunctantibus,   maxime  propter  altitudinem 

delay  chiefly  depth 

maris,  (is)  qui  decimae  legionis  aquilam  fere})at,  contestatus 

tenth  appeal-to 

deos  ut  ea  res  legion!  felTciter  eveniret :   "  DesilTte,"  inquit, 

happily  turn-out 

"  milites,  nisi  vultis*  aquilain  hostibus  prodere.     Ego  certe 

abandon  at-least 

raeum   reipfiblicae    atque    imperator!    officium    pra^estitero." 

duty  fulfil 

Hoc  cum  magna  voce  dlxisset,  se  ex  navi  projecit,  atque  in 
hostes  aquilam  ferre  coepit.      Tum  nostri,  cohortati  inter  se, 

exhort 

ne  tantum  dcdecus  adinitteretur,   iiuiversi   ex   navT  desilue- 

shame  permit  all-at-once 

runt.      Hos  item  ex  proximls   navibus   cum   conspexissent, 

also  nearest  caught-sight-of 

subsecutT  liostibus^  appropinquarunt. 

follow-close  approach 

notp:s   and   questions. 

1.  The  construction  is  jussit  nSves  rgmSveri,  etc. 

2.  Why  dative  ?         3.  AVhy  ablative  ?         4.  See  v61o. 
The  subjunctives  can  be  omitted  until  the  review. 


DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


285 


LESSON    XCIII. 

DEFECTIVE  VEKBS.-INSTEUMENTAL  ABLATIVE. 

305.  Defective  Verbs  want  some  of  their  parts.  The  fol- 
lowing are  the  most  common  Defective  Verbs  that  do  not 
use  the  tenses  formed  from  the  present  stem  :  — 

1.  coepi,  I  begin.       2.  rxihralxil,  I remernher .       3.  odi,  I  hate. 

OiiS.  There  is  a  large  number  of  verbs  that  are  more  or  less 
defective ;  those  enumerated  here  are  the  most  defective  of  those 
that  are  commonly  used. 

1.  Odi,  coepi  (for  the  present  of  which  incipio  is  used),  and 
mgmini  are  only  used  in  the  Perfect  Tenses,  and  hence  are  some- 
times called  preteritive  (or  past)  verbs. 

PAKTIAI.     PARADIGM. 


Tense. 

Indicative. 

Pekk. 

Pl.UP. 

r.  P. 

coepi 

coeperam 

coepero 

memini 

memineram 

meminero 

odi 

oderam 

odero 

novi 

noveram 

novero 

Subjunctive. 

Perf. 
Plup. 

coeperim 
coepissem 

meminerim 
meminissem 

oderim 
odissem 

noverim 
novissem 

Imperative. 

Put. 

( Wanting) 

memento,  mementote      { War 

ting) 

Infinitive. 

Perf. 
Fit. 

coepisse 
coepturus 

meminisse 

odisse 
osurus  esse 

novisse 

Participles. 

Perf. 
Put. 

coeptus 
coepturus 

-osus 
osurus 

Pres.  meminens 

Obs.  1.  Instead  of  coepi  and  its  tenses,  the  passive  coeptus 
sum,  etc.,  is  used  before  an  infinitive  passive ;  as,  urbs  aedificari 
coepta  est,  the  city  began  to  be  built. 


286 


FIRST    STEPS   IN  LATIN. 


Obs.  2.    Novi  is  properly  the  perfect  of  nosco,  /  learn  to  know. 

Obs.  3.  M6mini,  odi,  and  novi  have  in  the  perfect,  phiperfect, 
and  future  perfect  the  meaning  of  the  present,  imperfect,  and 
future  respectively. 

2.  The  following  have  only  the  tenses  formed  from  the  present 
stem,  and  these  are  in  many  cases  incomplete:  — 


1.  aio,  /  say. 

2.  inquam,  /  say. 


3.  fari,  to  speak. 

4.  ciVi?ieso,  I  ask,  heg. 


5.  salve,  hail. 

6,  queo,  /  can. 


a.  Aio,  I  say  (for  Sg-io,  cf.  ad-Sg-ium),  has  only  the  following 
forms :  — 


Person. 


Present. 
Indicative.        Siibjvinctive. 


Impeufect. 
Indicative.  Subjunctive. 


Siny.  1 
2 
3 

Plur.  1 
2 
3 


aio 

ais 
ait 


aiunt 


aias 
aiat 


aiant 


aiebam 

aiebas 

aiebat 

aiebamus 

aiebatis 

aiebant 


Pkes.  Pakt.  aiens 


Obs.   i  between  two  vowels  (=7)  is  pronounced  like  y;  ai-  is  not 
a  diphthong. 

h.  Inquam,  say  /,  has  only  the  following  forms  :  — 


Indicative.                                      1 

Pres.  inquam 

Imp.     inquiebam 

inquis 

inquiebas 

inquit 

inquiebat 

mquimus 

inquiebamus 

inquitis 

inquiebatis 

inquiunt 

inquiebant 

FUT.     

Pere. 

inquies 

inquisti 

inquiet 

inquit 

Imperative. 

Pres.  inque 

Ft 

T.  {2Pers.)  inquito 

Obs.  Inquam,  inquit,  like  the  English  say  I,  says  he,  are  always 
used  parenthetically,  themselves  and  subjects  following  between 
commas  after  a  word  or  words  of  the  quotation.  It  is  used, 
except  in  poetry,  only  in  direct  quotations.     (See  342.) 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


287 


c.   Fari,  (.0  speak,   a  deponent,  is   used  only    in   the   following 
forms,  unless  compounded  with  a  preposition  :  — 


Indicative.            Subjunctive. 

Participles. 

Pres.  fatur                    

Fur.    fabor,  fabitur     

Terf.  fatus  sum,  etc.     fatus  sim,  He. 
Vllv.  fatus  eram          fatus  essem 

Pres.  (fans)  fantis,e<c.  (with- 
out a  nominative). 
Perf.  fatus,  -a,  -um 
Ger.   fandus,  -a,  -um 

Imperative.                     Infinitive. 

Supine.               Gerund. 

Pres.  (Sin;/.)  fare                fari 

fatu               fandi,  etc. 

INSTRUMENTAL    ABLATIVE. 

Obs.  The  instrumental  ablative  is  used  to  express  a  variety  of 
relations,  the  most  important  of  which  may  be  stated  as  follows  :  — 


ABLATIVE    OF   MEANS    OR   INSTRUMENT. 

306.  The  means  and  instrumeyit  are  denoted  by  the  abla- 
tive without  a  preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  cornibus  tauri  se  tutantur,  bulls  defend  themselves  ivith 

their  horns. 

2.  frumentum  flumine  ArSrl  navibus  subvexSrat,  he  had 

conveyed  corn  in  ships  up  the  river  Arar. 

1.  The  ablative  of  means  without  a  preposition  is  used  with 
utor,  fruor,  etc.  (see  280)  ;  as,  plurimis  rebus  utimur,  we  use,  i.e. 
we  serve  ourselves  by  means  of  many  things. 

2.  P6tior,  in  the  sense  of  becoming  master  of  takes  the  genitive : 
as,  totius  Galliae  p6tiri,  to  become  master  of  all  Gaul. 

ABLATIVE    OF    MEASURE. 

307.  The  Ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used  to  denote 
the  standard  by  which  anything  is  measured  or  judged. 

EXAMPI.E. 

magnos  h6mings  virtute  metimur,  non  fortuna,  we  measure 
great  men  by  worth,  not  by  fortune. 


288  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

Obs.  1.  The  ablative  of  measure  is  used  with  the  comparative 
instead  of  quam  with  the  nominative  or  accusative.     (See  143.) 

Obs.  2.  The  measure  of  difference  is  denoted  by  the  ablative. 
(See  301.)  This  ablative  is  common  with  the  ablative  of  pronouns 
(eo  .  .  .  quo)  and  of  adjectives  of  quantity  (tanto,  quanto,  multo, 
paulo,  etc.)  and  with  verbs  implying  comparison  (as,  antgcello, 
excello,  supero,  etc.). 

Obs.  3.  Distance  may  be  denoted  by  the  ablative.     (See  301.) 

Obs.  4.  Price,  when  a  definite  sum,  is  denoted  by  the  ablative. 
(See  304.)  Here  belongs  the  ablative  witli  dignus,  indigniis. 
For  ablative  of  specification,  see  297. 

Obs.  ').  Here  belongs  the  ablative,  with  the  adverbs  ante  and 
post,  to  denote  Jtow  long  before  or  after  a  thing  happens ;  as,  paucis 
ante  diebus,  or  paucis  diebus  ante,  a  few  daijs  before;  paucis 
post  diebus,  or  paucis  diebus  post,  a  few  days  after.  The  accu- 
sative can  be  used;  as,  ante  paucos  annos,  a  few  years  before. 

ABLATIVE    OF    .^lATElilAL. 

308.  The  material  of  which  anything  is  made  is  regularly 
expressed  by  the  ablative  with  ex  or  de,  but  constare,  to  con- 
sist.^ sometimes  omits  the  preposition. 

EXAMPLE. 

Snimo  constamus  et  corpdre,  we  co)isisf  of  soul  and  body. 

Obs.  1.  The  ablative  of  material  is  used  with  words  of  plenty 
and  want,  especially  with  verbs  signifying y<7/«??r/,  aboundinr/,  supply- 
ing-, furnishing,  and  the  like. 

Obs.  2.  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  are  followed  by  the 
ablative  of  the  thing  needed. 

EXAMPLE. 

diice  nobis  5pus  est,  there  is  need  to  us  of  a  leader. 

Obs.  o.  Sometimes  the  thing  needed  is  the  subject  and  dpus 
the  predicate ;  hence  we  may  say  either  diice  nobis  6pus  est,  there 
is  need  to  us  of  a  leader,  or  dux  nobis  est,  a  leader  is  a  need  to  us.t 

Obs.  4.  The  adjective  praeditus  is  followed  by  the  ablative. 

EXAMPLE. 

virtute  praeditus,  endowed  with  virtue. 


DEFECTIVE   VERBS.  289 


ABLATIVE    OF    MANNER. 

309.  The  Ablative  of  Maimer  generall}^  takes  the  preposi- 
tion cum,  unless  it  has  a  modifying  adjective  or  genitive 
(when  cum  may  be  omitted). 

Obs.  But  cum  is  never  used  with  the  following  ablatives : 
m6d6,  ratione,  more,  ggngre,  rito,  etc. ;  also,  hac  mente,  hoc 
consilio,  ea  lege,  meo  pgriciilo,  jure,  injuria,  etc. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  cum  cura  scribit,  he  writes  with  care. 

2.  cum  (or  without  cum)  magna  cura  scribit,  he  writes  with 

great  care. 

3.  magno  fletu  auxilium  S  Caesare  pgtunt,  loith  a  flood  of 

tears  they  seek  aid  from  Ccesar. 

4.  intellSgebat   magno    cum   pgriciilo   provinciae   fiiturum 

(esse),  lie  perceived  that  it  would  be  attended  with  the  great 
danger  to  the  province. 

5.  Caesar  omnibus  copiis  pr6ficiscitur,  Ccesar  departs  with  all 

his  forces. 

ABLATIVE    OF    ACCOMPANIMENT. 

310.  The  Ablative  of  Accompaniment  takes  the  prepo- 
sition cum,  except  in  a  few  military  and  other  phases. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  cum  dgcima  Iggione  venit,  he  came  ivith  the  tenth  legion. 

2.  subsgquebatur  omnibus  copiis,  he  followed  close  with  all 

his  forces. 

1.  If  WITH  signifies  in  company  with,  in  conflict  with,  cum  must 
be  used ;  but  relations  cross,  and  whenever  manner  or  accompani- 
ment can  be  regarded  as  means,  the  preposition  is  omitted. 

311.  Ablative  of  Quality  or  Characteristic.      (See  292.) 

Obs.  Note  the  close  connection  between  these  three  uses  of  the 
ablative  of  manner:  the  first,  he  writes  with  care,  care  being  an 
attendant  circumstance;  the  second,  he  comes  with  the  tenth  legion, 
the  ablative  designating  that  with  which  he  is  attended  ;  the  third, 
an  attendant  quality.     (See  292.) 


Instrumental 

Ablative 


290  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

312.  Tlie  ITses  of  the  Ablative  may  be  tabulated  as  fol- 
lows :  — 

f  a.  Tlve  Place  from  which. 
I  h.  Separation. 
1.  Ablative  Proper -{  r.  Cause  (including  Source,  Origin,  fretus,  con- 
I  tentus,  fido,  ednfido,  ditfido,  and  Agency 

[  with  a  or  ab  after  passive  verbs). 

a.  Means,  Instrument,  Deponents,  utor,  etc. 

b.  Measure,  Measure  of  Difference,  Price,  dig- 
nus,  indignus. 

('.  Comparison. 
(/.  Specification. 

e.  Material,    Plenty,    and   Want,    opus,    usus, 
praeditus. 

f.  Manner,  Accompaniment  (with  cum),  Quality. 

{a.  Place  where, 
h.  Time  and  Circumstance. 
c.  Ablative  Absolute. 

Syx.  Dico,  say  or  speak  formally ;  16quor  (16qui),  speak  or  talk 
(opposed  to  tSceo,  keep  silent) ;  for  (fari),  talk.,  use  articulate 
speech  ;  aio,  assent,  say  yes,  expresses  the  assertion  of  the  speaker 
(opposed  to  nSgo) ;  inquam,  inquit,  say  I,  says  he,  used  to  intro- 
duce tlie  very  words  of  the  s[)eaker,  and  always  comes  after  one  or 
more  words  of  the  quotation  (305.  2.  Obs.). 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  PLnglish  :  — 

1.  Ait,  aisn'?  aio.  2.  Inquit,  fatur.  3.  Ociilis  videmus, 
auribus  audimus.  4.  Vir  lapide  interfectus  est.  5.  Solus 
potitus  est  imperio  Romulus.  G.  Vir  dlmicat  ferro.  7.  Vir 
culpa  dignus  est.  8.  "Omnia  perierunt,"  inquit  Caesar, 
"  consulite,  mllites,  vestrae  saluti."  9.  Eadem  eondicione 
deditionis  usus  est.  10.  German!  virl  corporum  ingenti 
magnitudine  fuerunt. 

NOTES     AND    QUESTIONS. 

Learn  the  synopsis  of  coepi,  mSmini,  odi.  What  is  a  defective 
verb  ?  Which  defective  verbs  have  in  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  the 
meaning  of  the  present  and  imperfect  ?  How  are  the  uses  of  the  abla- 
tive classified  ?  Give  the  chief  uses  of  the  ablative  proper ;  of  the  instru- 
mental ablative  ;  of  the  locative  ablative. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


291 


LESSON    XCIV. 

IMPEKSONAL   VEKBS.  -  GENITIVE  WITH  VEEB. 

313.  Verbs  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular,  and 
not  admitting  a  definite  persoii  or  thing  as  the  subject,  are 
called  impersonal} 

1.  Impersonal  Verbs  are  conjugated  like  other  verbs,  but  are 
used,  for  the  most  part,  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in 
the  present  and  the  perfect  infinitives,  with  traces  of  participles 
and  gerunds.  Impersonal  is  only  the  name  of  a  use  more  or  less 
fixed,  not  of  a  list  of  verbs.  DScet  (314.  2),  etc.,  are  not  true  im- 
personals ;  their  subject  is  an  infinitive,  or  a  sentence  used  as  a 
noun.  In  the  passive  voice  the  idea  of  the  subject  must  generally 
be  found  in  the  verb  itself ;  as,  milites  pugnant,  the  soldiers  fight, 
becomes  a  militibus  pugnatur,  it  is  fought  (i.e.  fighting  is  done) 
by  the  soldiers. 

Obs.  The  essence  of  an  impersonal  verb  is  that  it  has  no  analytic 
subject, — no  subject  expressed  or  understood  outside  of  the  verb 
itself,  —  whether  person  or  thing.  The  classification  is  purely /orwiaZ, 
not  logical.  Patur,  fama  est,  fgrunt,  pSpttlus  fert,  all  mean  the 
same ;  only  fatur  is  impersonal. 

2.  The  synopsis  of  Impersonal  Verbs  of  the  four  conjugations 
may  be  given  as  follows  :  — 

{  1.  constat,  constare,  constitit,  it  is  evident. 
PRINCIPAL.   !  2.  licet,  licere,  licuit,  /;:  is  permitted. 
PARTS.       I  8.  accidit,  accidere,  accidit,  it  happens. 
I  4.  evenit,  evenire,  evenit,  it  residts. 


constat 

licet 

accidit 

evenit 

constabat 

licebat 

accidebat 

eveniebat 

constabit 

licebit 

accidet 

eveniet 

constitit 

licuit 

accidit 

evenit 

constiterat 

licuerat 

acciderat 

evenerat 

constiterit 

licuerit 

acciderit 

evenerit 

constat 

liceat 

accidat 

eveniat 

constaret 

liceret 

accideret 

eveniret 

constiterit 

licuerit 

acciderit 

evenerit 

constitisset 

licuisset 

accidisset 

evenisset 

constare 

licere 

accidere 

evenire 

constitisse 

licuisse 

accidlsse 

evenisse 

constaturum  esse 

liciturum  esse 

eventurum  esse 

292 


FIRST  STEPS  IN    LATIN. 


314.  The  Impersonal  uses  of  verbs  may  be  classified  as 
follows  :  — 

1.  Verbs  relating  to  the  weather:  as,  fulgiirat,  it  lightens; 
grandinat,  it  hails;  lucescit,  it  groivs  light:  t6nat,  it  thunders; 
illucescit,  it  becomes  light. 

Or.s.  Sometimes  these  verbs  are  used  personally,  the  name  of 
the  deity  or  some  other  agent,  generally  expressing  a  cognate  idea, 
being  expressed  as  the  subject ;  as,  Juppiter  pluit,  Jupiter  rains ; 
digs  illucescit,  dag  dawns. 

2.  Verbs  relating  to  the  feelings.  The  person  who  feels  is  put  in 
the  accusative;  as,  me  misSret,  it  grieves  me  (i.e.  I  grieve).  The 
following  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  belong  to  this  class :  — 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind. 
decet 

dedecet 

libet 

licet 

liquet 

miseret  or  } 

miseretur  ) 

oportet 

piget 

placet 

paenitet 

pudet 

taedet 


Pres.  Inf. 
decere 

dedecere 
libera 
licere 
liquere 


oportere 

pigere 

placere 

paenitere 

pudere 

taedere 


I'ERF.  Ind. 
decuit 


Participle. 


it  becomes. 


I..atin  idiom :  — 

Becomes  a  young  man  to  he  modest,  or 
To  he  modest  becomes  a  young  man, 

English  idiom :  — 

It  becomes  a  young  man  to  he  modest, 


dedecuit,  it  is  unseemly. 
libuit  and  libitum  est,  it  pleases. 
licuit  and  licitum  est,  it  is  lawful. 
,  it  is  clear. 

miseritum  est,  it  excites  pity. 

oportuit,  it  behoves. 

piguit  and  pigitum  est,  it  vexes. 

placuit  and  placitum  est,  it  pleases. 

paenituit,  it  causes  sorrow. 

puduit  and  puditum  est,  it  shames. 

(per-)taesum,  it  wearies. 

KXAMPLE. 

ACTIVE. 


dgcet  vgrecundum  esse 
adiilescentem. 


Obs.  1.  As  the  English  idiom  requires  a  subject,  the  pronoun  it 
is  placed  before  the  impersonal  verb  in  translating. 

Obs.  2.  These  verbs  are  not  used  in  the  imperative ;  the  sub- 
junctive is  used  in  its  place ;  as,  pfldeat  te,  shame  thyself  Some  of 
these  verbs  have  a  passive  ^'oice,   as  misgreor,   /  jjity  {am  moved 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS. 


293 


hy  pity),  and  occasionally  other  parts:  —  (1)  Participles:  dScens, 
hecomimj ;  Whens,  willing ;  licens, /refi  ;  licitus,  a//ow;c^/.  (2)  Ge- 
rundives :  poenitendus,  to  he  repented  of;  piidendus,  shameful. 
(3)  Gerunds  :  pigendum,  poenitendi,  -6,  -um ;  pttdendi,  6,  -um. 

Obs.  3.  All  of  these  verbs  (except  misgret,  6portet,  taedet) 
can  have  a  neuter  pronoun  as  subject,  and  are  then  personal :  as, 
hoc  piidet  me,  this  shames  me ;  haec  libent,  these  things  please. 
Libet  and  licet  can  have  an  adjective  used  as  noun  as  subject,  as 
non  omnia  licent,  not  every  thing  pleases  :  and  dScet  and  ded6cet 
can  have  any  word  as  subject,  as  virtus  vos  d6cet,  virtue  becomes 
you.     See  315.  3(1). 

3.  Some  personal  verbs  seem,  in  certain  senses,  to  be  used  im- 
personally ;  but  they  are  not  truly  so,  because  the  real  subject  is 
generally  an  infinitive  or  a  clause.     Such  verbs  are  :  — 


Personal. 

Impersonal. 

accidit  .     ....     he,  she  (it)  falls  upon. 

it  happens  (ill). 

apparet     . 

"         appears. 

it  appears. 

attinet .     . 

"         lays  hold  of. 

it  belongs  to. 

conddcit    . 

"         leads  together. 

it  is  usefid. 

contingit  . 

"          touches. 

it  befalls  {well). 

convenit    . 

"         comes  together. 

it  is  agreed  upon 

expedit     . 

"         extricates. 

it  is  expedient. 

fallit     .     . 

"         deceives    ■\ 

fiigit     .     . 

"        flies           [ 

it  escapes. 

praeterit  . 

"         goes  past  J 

interest     . 

"         is  present  at. 

it  concerns. 

jiivat    .     . 

"         helps. 

it  delights. 

patet     .     . 

"         is  open. 

it  is  plain. 

placet   .     . 

"         pleases. 

it  seems  good. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  ut  Tibgris  inter  eos  et  pons  intgresset,  so  that  the  Tiber 

and  bridge  might  be  between  them  (personal  use). 

2.  interest  omnium  recte  f^cSre,  it  concerns  all  to  do  right 

(impersonal  use). 

4.  Intransitive  verbs,  when  used  in  the  passive  (the  participle  is 
neuter)  :  as,  curritur,  there  is  running,  or  they  run ;  mihi  creditur, 
it  is  credited  to  me,  I  am  believed  ;  non  hostibus  parcitur,  there  is 
no  quarter  given  to  the  enemy,  or  the  enemy  is  not  spared ;  mihi  invi- 
detur,  there  is  envy  to  me,  i.e.  /  am  envied;  hostibua  rSsistunt,  they 


294  FIKST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

resist  the  enemy  (used  personally)  ;  his  sententiis  rgsistitur,  resist- 
ance is  offered  to  these  opinions.  When  the  Agent  is  mentioned,  it 
is  put  in  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  a  or  ab,  or  may  remain 
in  the  dative :  as,  (Act.)  Helvetii  fortiter  pugnaverunt,  the  Hel- 
vetians/ought bravely ;  (Impers.)  Sb  Helvetiis  fortiter  pugnatum 
est,  it  was  fought  bravely  by  the  Helvetians,  i.e.  the  Helvetians  fought 
bravely. 

5.  The  passive  of  the  i^eriphrastic  conjugation  is  often  used  im- 
personally ;  the  participle  is  then  always  neuter  (see  287.  Obs.)  : 
as,  mihi  scribendum  est,  /  must  write  (lit.,  the  necessity  of  writing 
is  to  me) ;  illi  scribendum  est,  he  must  write. 

Obs.  1.  The  x>ersons  are  expressed  in  the  following  way  in  the 
present  indicative,  and  similarly  in  the  other  tenses  :  — 

piidet  me,  it  shames  me,  or  /  am  ashamed. 
piidet  te,  it  shames  thee,  or  thou  art  ashamed. 
piidet  eum,  it  shames  him,  or  he  is  ashamed. 
piidet  nos,  it  shames  us,  or  ice  are  ashamed. 
piidet  vos,  it  shames  you,  or  you  are  ashamed. 
pudet  eos,  it  shames  them,  or  they  are  ashamed. 

Obs.  2.  The  impersonal  verbs  libet,  it  pleases,  licet,  it  is  laivful, 
and  expSdit,  it  is  expedient,  are  used  with  the  dative;  as,  licet 
mihi  ire,  it  is  lawful  for  me  to  go,  or  /  inay  go. 

315.    Genitive  with  Verbs. 

VERBS    OF   MEMORY. 

1.  Verbs  of  reminding,  remembering,  and  foj-getiing,  —  rScordor 
(rarely),  mgmini,  rgminiscor,  and  obliviscor,  —  are  followed  by 
the  genitive  (sometimes  by  the  accusative). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  mSmini  vivorum,  /  am  mindful  of  the  living. 

2.  rgminisci  virtu tis,  to  remember  virtue. 

GENITIVE    OF    CRIME. 

2.  Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  condemning,  and  acquitting  take 
the  accusative  of  the  person  and  the  genitive  of  the  crime. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  praetor  reum  criminis  absolvit,  the  prmtor  acquitted  the 
prisoner  of  the  crime. 

2.  arguit  me  furti,  he  accuses  me  of  theft. 


IMPEKSONAL    VERBS.  295 

VERBS    OF    FEELING. 

o.  The  genitive  is  used  with  the  following:  — 

(1)  Misgreor,  misgresco,  /  jiity.    (Cf .  314.  2.) 

EXAMPLE. 

.    misSresco  infelicium,  I  pity  the  unfortunate. 

(2)  With  the  impersonals  refert  and  interest,  it  concerns,  it 
interests.     (See  314.  3.) 

EXAMPLE. 

interest  omnium  recte  f  ScSre,  it  is  to  the  interest  of  all  to 
act  rightly. 

a.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun,  the  forms 
mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  and  vestra,  are  used. 

EXAMPLE. 

mea  nihil  refert,  it  does  not  concern  me. 

(3)  The  impersonal  verbs  misSret,  paenitet,  piget,  piidet,  and 
taedet,  take  the  genitive  of  the  object  with  the  accusative  of  the 
person.    (See  314.  2.) 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  eorum  nos  miseret,  loe  pity  them. 

2.  me  taedet  vitae,  /  am  weary  of  life. 

GENITIVE    WITH    OTHER    VERBS. 

4.  Sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  take  the  genitive  to  express  the 
price  or  value  indefnitely.  (^Definite  price  is  expressed  by  the  abla- 
tive.   See  304.) 

EXAMPLE. 

Sger  nunc  pluris  est  quam  tunc  fuit,  the  field  is  of  more 
value  now  than  it  loas  then. 

VOCABULARY. 

rg-cordor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  remember,  recollect. 
mgmini,  -isse,  def.,  /  remember.    (See  320.  Obs.  2) 
rgmXniscor,  -isoi  (no  perf.),  dep.,  recollect,  remember. 
obliviscor,  oblivisci,  oblitus  sum,  dep.,  forget. 
misgreor,  -eri,  -itus  sum,  dep.,  pity. 
misgresco,  -scgre  (no  perl,  no  partic),  feel  pity. 
refert,  it  concerns. 


296  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.    Mihi     Ire    licuit.       2.    Puguandum    est    pro    patria. 

3.  Remiuiscere  pristinae  virtiitis  Helvetiorum.  4.  Animus 
meminit  praeteritorum.  5.  Fratris  mei  me  miseret.  6.  Con- 
troversiarum  et  dissensionum  oblTviscimini.  7.  Vir  reus  est 
criminis.  8.  Te  fortunae  tuae  paenitet.  9.  Roman!  eum 
capitis  damnaverunt.  10.  Illud  mea  magn!  interest. 
11.  Absolvunt  te  judices  injuriarum.  12.  Placuit  Caesari,^ 
ut  ad  Ariovistum  legatos  mitteret.  13.  Eum  ad  mortem 
due!  oportuit.     14.  Is  ad  mortem  ducendus  fuit. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  I  may  go.     2.  I  must  fight.     3.  The  soldiers  must  fight. 

4.  We  may  go.  5.  We  must  depart.  6.  I  am  ashamed  of 
my  fault.  7.  They  accuse  him  of  treachery.  8.  A  true 
friend  never  forgets  a  friend.  9.  CiEsar  acquitted  the  soldier 
of  the  crime. 

NOTKS     AND     yUKSTIONS. 

1.  Learn  the  definition  and  translation  of  impersonal  verbs ;  how 
classified ;  and  tlie  synopsis  under  313.  3. 

2.  It  pleased  Casar,  i.e.  Ccesar  determined ;  the  clause  beginning  with 
Ut  is  the  subject  of  pl&cuit. 

What  is  an  impersonal  verb  ?  Translate  pugnatur,  pugnandum 
est,  mS  piget.  What  case  is  used  with  licet  ?  With  Sportet  ?  How 
\&inay,  can,  expressed  in  Latin?  How  is  must,  might?  In  what  two 
ways  can  7«us^  be  expressed  1  (See  Exs.  13  and  14.)  What  verbs  govern 
the  genitive  or  accusative  ?     What  the  genitive  alone  ? 


LESSON   XCV. 

OLASSIFIOATION   OF   DEPENDENT  CLAUSES. 

316.  Obs.  1.  The  pupil  has  now  learned  the  construction  of 
simple  sentences.  The  rules  and  principles  that  have  been  applied  to 
these  sentences  are  applicable  to  all  independent  clauses ;  it  is  only 
in  dependent,  or  subordinate,  clauses  that  difficulty  is  likely  to  occur. 
The  pupil  should,  therefore,  obtain  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the 


CLASSIFICATION   OF  DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.        297 

various  kinds  of  dependent  clauses,  for  this  will  aid  him  very  much 
in  determining  the  tense  and  mode  to  be  used.  We  have  learned 
that  a  complex  sentence  must  contain  one  or  more  subordinate 
clauses.  The  subordination  is  expressed  by  some  connecting  word, 
which  is  always  some  form  of  the  relative  or  some  word  that  has 
acquired  the  use  of  the  relative.  This  word  may  be  a  pronoun,  a 
conjunction,  or  a  conjunctive  adverb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  The  sea,  when  it  had  spent  its  fury,  became  calm. 

2.  The  hoy,  who  reads,  learns. 

3.  He  came,  that  lie  might  see  the  city. 

4.  He  demanded   that   Ccesar  should   not   make   war  upon  the 

jiEduans. 

5.  He  says  that  the  mountain  is  held  hy  the  enemy. 

6.  Iv  he  conquers,  he  will  rejoice. 

7.  His  friends  ivill  abandon  him,  because  his  father  has  done  so. 

8.  So  great  is  the  power  of  honesty,  that  we  love  it  even  in  an  enemy. 

9.  /  inquired  what  he  was  doing. 

10.  Life  is  short,  though  it  extend  beyond  a  thousand  years. 

Obs.  2.  In  Ex.  1  of  the  foregoing  sentences,  note  that 'the  clause 
when  it  had  spent  its  fury,  expresses  time,  and  is  combined  with  the 
leading  clause,  the  sea  became  calm,  by  means  of  the  subordinate 
temporal  conjunction  when;  the  clause  is,  therefore,  called  a  Tem- 
poral Clause  (see  206.  1).  If  we  combine  the  two  clauses  by 
means  of  a  coordinate  conjunction  (205),  the  sentence  becomes 
compound ;  as,  the  sea  spent  its  fury,  and  then  it  became  calm.  In 
Ex.  2,  the  subordinate  clause  is  introduced  by  the  relative  who 
(241.  Obs.),  and  is  called  a  Relative  Clause.  In  Ex.  3,  the  sub- 
ordinate clause  is  introduced  by  the  subordinate  final  conjunction 
that  (206.  5) ;  the  clause  is,  therefore,  called  a  Final  Clause. 
The  clause  in  Ex.  5,  introduced  by  that,  is  an  Infinitive  Clause 
(341. 1).  Ex.  6,  if  he  conquers  is  a  Conditional  Clause  ;  and  in 
Ex.  7,  because  his  father  had  done  so  is  a  Causal  Clause.  A  clause 
introduced  by  a  consecutive  conjunction  is  called  a  Consecutive 
Clause,  as  Ex.  8;  one  introduced  by  a  concessive  conjunction,  as 
in  Ex.  10,  is  called  a  Concessive  Clause. 

The  relative  clause  performs  the  office  of  an  adjective,  because 
ivho  reads  modifies  boy  =  the  reading  boy ;  it  is  called  an  Adjective 
Clause.  The  temporal  clause  in  Ex.  1  performs  the  office  of  an 
adverb,  and  is,  therefore,  called  an  Adverb  Clause  ;  in  Exs.  4,  5, 
and  9,  the  clauses  that  Ccesar  should  not  make  war  upon  the  jEduans, 
that  the  mountain  is  held  by  the  enemy,  and  lohat  he  was  doing,  are 
objects  of  the  transitive  verb  demanded,  of  inquired,  and  of  says, 
i.e.  each  performs  the  office  of  a  noun  or  substantive,  and  is,  there- 
fore, called  a  Noun,  or  Substantive,  Clause.  Hence,  clauses 
may  be  classified  as :  — 


298 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


I.  CooRDixATE,  see  205. 


11.  Subordinate  ^    7 


Final. 
Consecutive. 
Conditional. 
Comparative. 
CoJicessive. 
Causal. 
Temporal. 
Interrogative. 
9.  Infinitive. 
10.  Relative. 

1.  Substantive. 

2.  Adjective, 
o.  Adverb. 


Named  from  their  mean- 
ing, as  shown  by  some 
introductory  word ;  the 
same  word  may  intro- 
duce clauses  of  different 
kinds,  according  to  cir- 
cumstances. 


^  Named  from  the  part  of 
>  speech  whose  office  they 
J      perform. 

Obs.  3.  Noun  Clauses  include:  (1)  Infinitive  clauses,  342.  1; 
(2)  some  final  and  (3)  consecutive  clauses,  342.  2  and  3 ;  (1)  clauses 
introduced  by  quod,  which  give  prominence  to  the  fact  stated,  or 
present  it  as  a  ground  or  reason,  342.  4 ;  (5)  and  dependent  inter- 
rogative clauses,  342.  5.  Adjective  Clauses  are  connected  to  the 
clauses  on  which  they  depend  by  means  of  relative  pronouns.  Ad- 
verbial Clauses  are  connected  to  the  clauses  on  which  they  depend 
by  means  of  conditional,  comparative,  concessive,  final,  consecutive, 
causal,  or  temporal  conjunctions.  The  pupil  should  note  that  some- 
times a  clause  connected  by  a  final  or  consecutive  conjunction 
becomes  virtually  the  object  of  the  verb  on  which  it  depends,  and 
is  then  classed  as  a  Noun  Clause.    (See  342,  2  and  3.) 

EXERCISES. 

Classify  the  following  sentences  :  — 

1.  The  bridge,  which  spans  the  river,  was  built  by  a  skil- 
ful engineer.  2.  When  the  war  closed,  Washington  retired 
to  Mount  Vernon.  3.  If  you  would  be  happy,  you  must  be 
active.  4.  When  the  battle  was  concluded,  the  commander 
began  to  count  his  loss.  5.  He  takes  exercise,  that  he  may 
recover  his  health.  6.  The  ground  is  dry,  although  it  has 
rained.  7.  The  sun  causes  (that  all  things  should  bloom, 
i.e.)  all  things  to  bloom. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  clause  ?  Mention  the  various  classes  of  subordinate 
clauses.  What  is  an  adjective  clause  ?  Substantive  clause  ?  Expand 
the  complex  sentences  in  the  foregoing  lesson  into  compound  sentences. 
IIovv  many  kinds  of  adverbial  clauses  ?     Write  an  adjective  clause. 


TENSES    IN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSES. 


299 


LESSON   XCVI. 

TENSES    m  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES. 

317.   Primary  and  Secondary  Tenses. 

Obs.  We  have  learned  that  tense  denotes  the  time  of  the  action ; 
and  as  time  admits  of  a  threefold  division,  into  ])resent,  jxist,  and 
future,  there  must  be  at  least  three  tenses  to  represent  an  action  in 
present,  past,  or  future  time.  But  in  each  of  these  tenses  an  action 
may  be  represented  as  incomplete  or  as  completed,  and  from  these 
two  divisions  arise  six  tenses  of  the  Latin  verb  ;  viz. :  — 

1.  The  Present,  denoting  incomplete  action  in  the  present. 

2.  The  Future,  denoting  incomplete  action  in  the  future. 

3.  The  Imperfect,  denoting  incomplete  action  in  the  past. 

4.  The  Perfect,  denoting  completed  action  in  the  present. 

5.  The  Fut.  Perf.,  denoting  completed  action  in  the  future. 

6.  The  Pluperfect,  denoting  completed  action  in  the  past. 

Each  of  these  tenses  also  represents  the  action  either  as  in  prog- 
ress (still  unfinished)  or  at  the  close  of  its  progress  (i.e.  as 
now  finished).  An  action  may  further  be  represented  as  being 
simply  brought  to  pass,  without  reference  to  its  being  continuous 
or  momentary,  complete  or  incomplete.  This  distinction  gives  rise 
to  the  indejinite  or  aoristic  stage  of  action,  which  has  no  separate 
tense  form.  It  is  expressed  by  the  present  tense  for  the  present,  by 
the  future  for  the  future,  and  by  the  aorist  (perfect  definite)  for  the 
past.     The  following  table  will  show  these  temporal  relations  :  — 


Time. 

Action 
represented  as 

Examples. 

Common 
Names. 

Present   ) 

Incomplete. 
Completed. 
Indefinite. 

I  am  writing. 
I  have  written. 
I  write. 

Present. 
Perfect. 
Present. 

Past         ) 

Incomplete. 
Completed. 
Indefinite. 

I  was  writing. 
I  had  written. 
I IV rote. 

Imperfect. 

Pluperfect. 

Aorist. 

Future    ^ 

Incomplete. 
Completed. 
Indefinite. 

I  shall  be  writing. 
I  shall  have  ivritten. 
I  shall  icrite. 

Future. 
Fut.  Perf 
Future. 

The  rules  hitherto  given  will  always  enable  the  pupil  to  deter- 
mine what  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  should  be  used  in  independent 


300  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 


clauses.  In  dependent  clauses,  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive  is 
always  dated  at  the  same  time  as  the  tense  of  the  leading  verb. 
In  order  to  determine  what  tense  of  the  subjunctive  should  follow 
(in  the  dependent  clause)  the  leading  verb,  special  rules  are 
necessary,  called  the  rules  for  the  Sequence  of  Texses.  For 
this  purpose  the  tenses  of  the  indicative  mode  are  divided  into 
two  classes,  according  as  they  represent  actions  as  present  or  future, 
or  as  past.  The  former  are  called  Primary,  and  the  latter 
Secondary,  or  Historical,  Tenses.  The  tenses  of  each  class 
can  be  seen  from  the  following  table:  — 

1.    PlUMAKY. 


Present.  Futures.  Perfect. 

amat,  he  loves.         amabit,  he  will  love.  amavit,  he  has  loved. 

amaverit,  he  ivill  have  loved. 


2.  Secondary 


Imperfect.  Aorist.  Pluperfect. 

amabat,  he  ivas  lovimj.  amavit,  he  loved.         amaverat,  he  had  loved. 

318.   Sequence  of  Tenses. 

EXAMPLES.  ' 

Primary.  —  Present  and  Future  Time  in  Dependent  Clauses. 

1.  Present  — 

scio  quid  agas,  /  hioiv  ivhat  yon  are  doimj. 

scio  quid  egeris,  /  hnoyv  what  yon  have  done. 

scio  quid  acturus  sis,  /  know  what  you  are  gointj  to  do. 

2.  Perfect  — 

cognovi  quid  agas,  /  have  learned  what  you  are  doing. 

cognovi  quid  egeris,  /  have  learned  what  you  have  done 

cognovi  quid  acturus  sis,  /  have  learned  what  you  are  going  to  do. 

3.  Future  — 

audiam  quid  agas,  /  shall  hear  ichat  yon  are  doing. 
audiam  quid  egeris,  /  shall  hear  irhat  you  have  done. 
audiam  quid  actiirus  sis,  /  shall  hear  what  you  are  going  to  do. 

4.  Future  Perfect  — 

cognovero  quid  agas,  7  shall  have  learned  what  you  are  doing. 
cognovero  quid  egeris,  /  shall  have  learned  what  you  have  done. 
cognovero  quid  actiirus  sis,  I  shall  have  learned  what  you  will  do. 


TENSES    IN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSES  301 

Secondary,  or  Historical.  —  Past  Time  in  Dependent  Clauses. 

5.  Imi'Eufkct  — 

sciebam  quid  ageres,  /  knew  what  you  were  doing. 

sciebam  quid  egisses,  /  Inew  what  you  had  done. 

sciebam  quid  acturus  esses,  /  knew  what  you  were  going  to  do, 

G.  AORIST  — 

cognovi  quid  ageres,  /  learned  ivhat  you  were  doing. 
c5gn6vi  quid  egisses,  T  learned  ivhat  you  had  done. 
cognovi  quid  acturus  esses,  /  learned  what  you  were  going  to  do. 

7.  Pluperfect  — 

cognoveram  quid  ageres,  /  had  learned  what  you  ivere  doing. 
cogndveram  quid  egisses,  /  had  learned  ichat  you  had  done. 
cognoveram  quid  acturus  esses,  /  had  learned  what  you  loere  going 
to  do. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  (1)  that  each  verb  in  the 
leading,  or  principal,  clauses,  of  Exs.  1,  2,  3,  4,  is  in  a  primary 
tense  —  present,  perfect,  future,  future  perfect;  (2)  that  each  verb 
in  the  dependent,  or  subordinate,  clauses  of  the  same  examples,  is 
likewise  in  a  primary  tense,  but  in  the  present  subjunctive  when 
the  action  is  continued  or  incomplete  (i.e.  relatively  present  or 
future)  with  reference  to  the  action  denoted  by  the  leading  verb, 
and  in  the  perfect  subjunctive  when  the  action  is  completed  (i.e. 
.relatively  past)  with  reference  to  the  action  denoted  by  the  leading 
verb.  Note,  further,  that  each  verb  in  the  leading,  or  principal, 
clauses,  of  Exs.  5,  6,  7,  is  in  a  secondary,  or  an  historical,  tense,  — 
imperfect,  aorist,  pluperfect,  —  and  also  that  each  verb  in  the  de- 
pendent, or  subordinate,  clauses  is  likewise  in  a  secondary^  or  an 
historical,  tense :  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive  when  the  action  is 
continued  or  incomplete  with  reference  to  the  action  denoted  by  the 
leading  verb,  and  in  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  when  the  action  is 
completed  wdth  reference  to  the  action  denoted  by  the  leading  verb. 
The  pupil  should  note  that,  after  a  future  or  future  perfect  tense, 
the  simple  future  is  represented  in  the  dependent,  or  subordinate 
clause,  by  the  present  subjunctive,  and  the  future  perfect  by  the 
perfect  subjunctive;  and  also  that,  in  such  cases,  the  dependent 
subjunctive  may  be  present  or  past,  with  reference  either  to  the  time 
of  speaking  or  to  the  time  of  the  main  action  :  as,  in  audiam  quid 
Sgas,  the  doing  may  be  going  on  either  at  the  time  of  speaking  or 
at  the  time  of  hearing,  i.e.  I  shall  hear  then  what  you  are  doing 
NOW,  or  what  you  are  doing  then  (i.e.  when  I  hear).  Finally,  the 
pupil  should  note  that,  whenever  the  future  in  the  dependent 
clause  is  subsequent  to  the  future  of  the  leading  verb,  the  present 
or  imperfect  of  the  active  periphrastic  subjunctive  is  used.  Hence, 
the  pupil  will  observe  that  the  subjunctives  in  the  dependent  clauses 
adapt  their  verbs  to  the  tenses  of  the  verbs  in  the  leading  clauses ; 


302 


FIRST   STEPS   IN  LATIN. 


i.e.  a  primary  tense  in  the  leading  clause  is  followed  by  a  primary 
tense  in  the  subordinate  clause,  and  that  a  secondary,  or  an  his- 
torical, tense  in  the  leading  clause  is  followed  by  a  secondary,  or 
an  historical,  tense  in  the  subordinate  clause.  The  rule  is  called 
the  rule  for  the  Sequence  of  Tenses,  and  is,  in  general,  the  same 
in  Latin  as  in  English.  For  those  dependent  sentences  that  require 
the  subjunctive,  the  rule  may  be  stated  as  follows :  — 

SEQUENCE    OF    TENSES. 

319.  Rule  XLVIL  —  A  primary  tense  in  the  lead- 
ing? clause  is  followed  by  a  primary  tense  in  the 
dependent  clause  ;  and  a  secondary  tense  is  followed 
by  a  secondary. 

Obs.  The  rules  for  the  Sequence  of  Tenses  are  not  applicable  to 
indicative  clauses  (i.e.  to  clauses  that  have  their  verbs  in  the  in- 
dicative), nor  to  conditional  sentences  (regardless  of  mode).  For 
these,  special  rules  are  necessary  (see  325). 

320.  The  Sequence  of  Tenses  may  be  represented  as 
follows :  — 


The  Present  Subjunctive,  for 

„  „         -  ,       ,       incomplete  action, 
are  followed  by  \     ,,      n    ^   .  c  ;  •       .•      r 
"^        Ihe  Perfect  Suhjunctive,  for 

[      completed  action. 

The  Imperfect  Subjunctive, 

-  „         ,  ,  for  incomplete  action, 

are  followed  by  ^  m      r»7        ^   .  o  7  • 

"^        Ihe  Pluperfect  Subjunctive, 

for  completed  action. 


Primary  Tenses: 

Present, 

Perfect  (Definite), 

Future, 

Future  Perfect, 

Secondary  Tenses: 
Imperfect, 
Aorist  (Perfect), 
Pluperfect, 

Obs.  In  the  following  examples,  note  that  the  tense  of  the  sub- 
junctive is  always  dated  at  the  same  time  as  the  tense  of  the  leading 
verb;  i.e.  the  tense  of  the  Latin  subjunctive  is  the  same  as  the 
tense  of  the  indicative  or  potential  in  the  English  sentence.  The 
commonest  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  in  dependent  clauses  are  the 
present  and  imperfect,  the  latter  being  used  in  such  dependent 
clauses  for  the  English  aorist  as  well  as  for  the  real  imperfect. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  vSnio  ut  videam,  I  come  to  (in  order  tJiat  1 7nay)  see. 

2.  veni  ut  viderem,  /  camr^  to  (in  order  that  I  might)  see. 

3.  ita  mendax  grat,  ut  nemo  ei  credSret,  he  was  such  a  liar, 

that  no  one  believed  him. 


TENSES   TN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.  303 

In  Exs.  1  and  2,  the  seeing  is  dated  as  present  or  past,  according 
as  the  coming  is  present  or  past ;  and,  as  may  see  and  might  see  are 
present  and  imperfect  (or  past)  potential,  respectively,  so  we  use 
the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  Latin  subjunctive.  In  Ex.  3, 
credSret  is  used  for  believed,  which  is  an  aorist ;  credgret  would 
also  be  used  for  a  true  imperfect  (was  believing).  After  primary 
tenses,  the  perfect  subjunctive  is  used  to  represent  all  past  tenses 
of  the  indicative  or  potential,  except  that  unreal  conditions  (326.  3) 
must  alwavs  have  their  own  form,  regardless  of  the  Sequence  of 
Tenses  (319). 

a.  The  Perfect  (Definite)  is  properly  a  primary  tense ;  but  as 
its  action  is  commenced  in  past  time,  it  is  often  regarded  as  a 
secondary  tense,  and  is  followed  in  the  dependent  clause  by  a 
secondary  tense. 

b.  The  Present  is  often  used  in  lively  narration  for  the  Aorist, 
or  Historical,  Perfect.  We  say  in  English,  Cicero  discusses  the  im- 
mortality of  the  soul,  discusses  being  the  historical  present.  It  is 
used  whenever  the  writer  wishes  to  picture  vividly  some  past  event 
as  present.  It  is  then  really  a  past  tense,  and  is  usually  followed  by 
a  past  tense  in  the  subordinate  clause ;  though  often  it  is  followed 
by  a  primary  tense,  with  past  meaning  like  itself. 

EXAMPI.E. 

Helvetii   legates   ad    CaesSrem   mittunt,   qui   dicSrent,  the 

Helvetians  (send)  sent  ambassadors  to  Ccesar,  to  say  (=  who 
should  say). 

c.  The  Subjunctive  has  no  future  or  future  perfect  tense ;  these 
tenses  are,  in  general,  represented  in  dependent  clauses,  after  a 
primary  tense,  by  the  present  or  the  perfect  respectively  (circum- 
stances determining  whether  the  present  subjunctive  is  equivalent 
to  the  present  or  future,  etc. ;  cf.  Exs.  in  318) ;  and  after  a  secondary 
tense,  by  the  imperfect  or  the  pluperfect.  But  whenever  the  action 
in  the  subordinate  clause  is  to  be  represented  as  subsequent  to  the 
future  of  the  leading  verb,  the  periphrastic  form  is  used,  composed 
of  the  tenses  of  esse  in  combination  with  the  future  active  parti- 
ciple.   (See  285.  Obs.) 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  respondet  si  id  sit  factum,  se  nSciturum  nemini,  he  replies 
that,  if  this  should  be  done,  he  will  harm  no  one. 


304  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

2.  16quebantur,  gtiam    cum   vellet  Caesar,  sese   non   esse 

pugnaturos,  they  icere  saying  that  they  would  not  Jight,  even 
when  Ccesar  should  ivish  it. 

3.  interrSgo  te,  quid  acturus  sis,  /  am  asking  you  what  you  ivill 

do,  or  are  going  to  do. 

Obs.  1.  Instead  of  the  periphrastic  form,  fiiturum  sit  (or  esset) 
ut  may  be  used ;  and  these  words  must  he  used  when  the  verb  has 
no  participial  stem,  and  therefore  no  periphrastic  form  (and  also 
for  the  future  perfect  active,  which  is  wanting  in  the  periphrastic 
conjugation) ;  as,  non  diibito  quin  scripturus  sis  =  non  dtibito 
quin  fiiturum  sit,  ut  scribas,  /  do  not  doubt  that  you  will  write. 

Obs.  2.  The  future  perfect  represents  both  the  perfect  definite 
and  the  aorist,  transferred  to  the  future ;  as,  fecSro,  /  sliall  have 
done  it,  or  /  shall  do  it.  The  future  perfect  is  used  with  a  much 
greater  exactness  in  Latin  than  in  English ;  as,  ut  sgmentem 
fScgris,  Ita  mgtes,  as  you  shall  have  sown,  so  will  you  reap.  The 
English  idiom  often  uses  the  present,  or  the  simple  future,  for  the 
future  perfect :  as  you  sow,  or  as  you  shall  sow,  instead  of  as  you 
shall  have  sown. 

Obs.  3.  In  applying  the  rules  for  the  sequence  of  tenses,  consider 
(1)  whether  the  leading  verb  is  primary  or  secondary ;  (2)  remem- 
ber that  the  tense  of  the  Latin  subjunctive  is  the  same  as  the  tense 
of  the  indicative  or  potential  in  the  English  sentence  (may,  can, 
will,  and  shall  being  present ;  might,  could,  would,  and  should,  past). 

EXERCISES. 
Appl}^  the  rules  for  sequence  of  tenses  to  the  following 
examples :  — 

1.  scripsit  ut  nos  mdneret,  he  wrote  to  warn  us,  or  that  he  might 

warn  us. 

2.  scripsit  ut  nos  mdneat,  he  has  written  to  warn  us,  or  that  he 

may  warn  us. 

3.  causa  quae  esset  quaesiit,  he  asked  what  the  cause  ivas. 

4.  venit  iit  videat,  he  has  come  to  see,  in  order  to  see,  or  that  he 

may  see. 

5.  vgnit  ut  videret,  he  came  to  see,  or  that  he  might  see. 

6.  dux  impgrat  ut  milites  stStiones  suas  servent,  the  leader 

commands  the  soldiers  to  keep  their  stations,  or  that  the  soldiers 
should  keep  their  stations. 

7.  curat  ut  pu6ri  corpus  exerceat,  he  takes  care  that  he  may 

exercise  the  hoy's  hody  (i.e.  to  exercise  the  hoy's  hody). 


SUBJUNCTIVE    IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  305 


8.  Hannibal  magnum  exercitum  in  ItSliam  duxit  ut  cum 

Romanis  pugnaret,  Hannibal  led  a  large  army  into  Italy  to 
(that  he  might)  fight  with  the  Romans. 

9.  non  diibito  quin  Caesar  hostes  siiperavgrit,  I  do  not  douht 

that  Ccesar  has  overcome  the  enemy. 

10.  non  diibitabam  quin  Caesar  hostes  stipgravisset,  /  did 

not  doubt  that  Coisar  had  overcome  the  enemy. 

11.  considSrabimus   quid   fSciat,   we  shall  consider  what  he  is 

doing. 

12.  consldgrabimus  quid  fec6rit,  tve  shall  consider  what  he  has 

done. 

13.  considSrabimus  quid  facturus  sit,  ive  shall  consider  what  he 

is  going  to  do  (or  will  do). 

Supplementary  Exercises  :  — 

1.    Non    dubitabam    quTn    Caesar     hostes     superavisset. 

2.  Nemo    dubitabat   quin    milites    fortissime    pugnavissent. 

3.  Nemo    dubitat   quin    puerum    semper   bene   educaverim. 

4.  Pater  curat  ut  ego  bene  educer,  strenue  exercear,  probe 
excolar,  diligenter  erudiar.  5.  Magister  curabat  ut  discipu- 
lus  bene  educaretur,  strenue  exerceretur,  probe  excoleretur, 
diligenter  erudiretur.  6.  Non  est  dubium  quin  discipiilus  a 
me  bene  monitus  sit.  7.  Non  est  dubium  quin  urbs  a  mili- 
tibus  expugnata  sit.  8.  Interrogo  te  quid  acturus  sis. 
9.  Interrogavero  te  quid  acturus  sis.  10.  Interrogabam  te 
quid  acturus  esses.  11.  Non  dubitavi  quin  scripturus  esses, 
or  non  dubitavi  quin  futurum  esset  ut  scrlberes. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

How  many  tenses  has  the  indicative  mode  1  How  many  has  the 
subjunctive  ?  What  are  primary  tenses  ?  Secondary  tenses  1  How 
do  the  forms  of  the  perfect  subjunctive  differ  from  those  of  the  future 
perfect  indicative  1  Has  the  subjunctive  future  tenses  1  How  is  this 
lack  of  future  tenses  supplied  in  dependent  clauses  1  What  is  the  rule 
for  the  tense  in  a  dependent  clause  containing  a  subjunctive  ?  Is  the 
rule  for  sequence  of  tenses  applicable  to  indicative  clauses  ? 


306  FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

LESSON   XCVII. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES. 

I.    FINAL    CLAUSES. 

Obs.  Final  Clauses  are  tliose  that  tell  the  purpose  of  an  action. 
They  are  introduced  by  the  Final  Conjunctions  ut,  that,  in  ordei'  that; 
ne  (or  ut  ne),  that . . .  not,  in  order  that . . .  not,  lest ;  quo  (=  ut  eo, 
that  thereby),  xohereby,  in  order  that,  when  there  is  a  comparative  in 
the  final  clause ;  the  Relative  Pronoun  qui  (=  ut  is,  that  he),  in 
order  that  he;  and  the  Relative  Adverbs,  iibi,  unde,  etc.  —  ut  ibi,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    OF    PURPOSE. 

321.  Rule  XLVIII.— Final  Clauses  take  their  verbs 
in  the  present  or  imperfect  subjunctive,  according  as 
the  leadinjf  verb  is  in  a  primary  or  secondary  tense. 

Obs.  1.  The  leading  verb  may  be  in  any  tense,  but  the  present 
or  imperfect  subjunctive  is  usually  used  in  the  final  clause.  The 
relative  pronoun  is  used  in  final  clauses  chiefly  after  verbs  of 
sending,  coming,  giving,  choosing,  etc.,  when  the  antecedent  is 
indefinite. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  ven§runt  ut  pacem  pStSrent,  they  came  to  seek  peace. 

2.  pugnamus  ne  servi  simus,  we  fight  that  loe  may  not  he  slaves. 
:}.  Caesar  castella  communit,  quo  f5oilius  Helvetios  pr6- 

hibere  possit,  Ccesar  erects  forts  that  he  may  the  'more  easily 
keep  off  the  Helvetians. 

4.  mllltes    missi   sunt   qui   (=   ut   ii)   urbem    expugnarent 

soldiers  were  sent  {that  they  might  assault),  or  to  assault  the 
city. 

5.  15cum  iibi  considSret  delegit,  he  selected  a  place  where  he 

might  encamp  (that  he  might  there,  etc.). 

Obs.  2.  The  ablative  quo  (=  ut  eo)  is  used  in  clauses  denoting 
purpose,  especially  with  comparatives. 

Obs.  3.  These  final  clauses  may  be  translated  by  to ;  sometimes 
by  that . . .  may,  that . .  .  might,  etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  307 


Object  Clauses, 

1.  After  verbs  of  admonishing  and  allowing^  bidding  and 
forbidding^  beseeching  and  compelling^  resolving  and  striving^ 
tvilling  and  ivishing^  Final  Clauses  become  object  clauses^ 
i.e.  they  are  the  objects  of  the  verbs  on  which  they  depend. 
With  many  of  these  verbs  the  simple  infinitive,  or  the  infinitive 
with  subject-accusative,  is  often  used  (see  254.  and  342.  (2)), 
instead  of  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  te  r6go  ut  eum  jiives,  /  ask  you  to  (that  you  may)  aid  him. 

2.  contendit  ut  vincat,  he  strives  to  (that  he  may)  conquer. 

3.  sgnatus  censugrat,  iiti  {=  ut)  Aeduos  defendSret,  the  senate 

had  decreed  that  he  should  defend  the  jEduans. 

Obs.  This  form  of  final  clauses  is  usually  rendered  by  to  (never 
by  in  order  to)  ;  sometimes  by  that,  with  may  or  might,  etc.  These 
verbs  have  the  sequence  of  ordinary  final  clauses. 


Verbs  of  Fearing. 

2.  After  verbs  of  fearing,  nS,  lest,  shows  that  the  nega- 
tive is  wished  and  the  positive  feared ;  ut  (ng  n6n)  shows 
that  the  positive  is  wished  and  the  negative  feared  ;  ne  non 
is  used  regularly  after  a  negative  for  both. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  timeo  ut  ISbores  sustineas,  /  fear  that  you  will  not  endure 

the  labors  (/  wish  that  you  may) . 

2.  timebam  ne  evSnirent  ea,  I  feared  that  these  things  would 

happen  (/  ivished  that  they  would  not). 

3.  non  vSreor  ne  non  rSdeat,  /  do  not  fear  that  he  will  not 

return. 

4.  vgreor  ut  rSdeat,  I  fear  he  may  not  return. 

Obs.    Note  that  ne  is  translated  by  that;   and  ut,  or  ne  non, 

by  that  not.  Verbs  of  fearing  take  the  present  (representing  the 
present  and  future  indicative)  or  perfect  (representing  the  perfect 
or  future  perfect  indicative)  subjunctive  after  a  primary  tense,  the 
imperfect  or  pluperfect  (representing  the  present,  future,  perfect, 
and  future  perfect  indicative)  after  a  secondary  tense. 


308  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATlN. 


Verbs  of  Hindering, 

,  3.  After  verbs  of  hindering^  quominus  is  often  used 
instead  of  ne.  The  Sequence  of  Tenses  is  the  same  as  that 
in  Pure  Final  Clauses  (see  321). 

EXAMPLE. 

nihil  Gaio  obstat  quominus  ad  te  scribat,  noOiing  prevents 
Gains  from  writing  to  you. 

Obs.  1.  Purpose  is  not  expressed  in  Latin  prose  by  the  infinitive, 
as  it  often  is  in  English ;  thus,  they  came  to  see,  i.e.  for  the  purpose 
of  seeing,  must  be  rendered  by  venernnt  ut  viderent,  or  some  one 
of  the  following  forms  :  — 

1.  venerunt  ut  urbem  viderent  (final  clause  with  ut). 

2.  venerunt  qui  urbem  viderent  (final  relative  clause). 

3.  venerunt  ad  videndum  urbem  (gerund  with  ad,  rare). 

4.  venerunt  ad  videndam  urbem  (gerundive  with  ad). 

5.  vSnerunt  urbem  videndi  causa  (gerund  with  causS). 

6.  venerunt  urbis  videndae  causa  (gerundive  with  causa). 

7.  venerunt  urbem  visuri  (future  participle). 

8.  vgnerunt  urbem  visum  (supine). 

Obs.  2.    For  Final  Clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  351. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Laudas  me,  ut  a  me  invicem  lauderis.  2.  Laudabat 
me,  ut  a  me  invicem  laudaretur.  3.  Contendit  Caesar 
maximis  itineribus  in  fines  Nerviorum,  ut  consilia  eorum 
cognosceret.  4.  Caesar  milites  cohortatus  est,  quo  mortem 
fortius  obirent.  5.  Equitatum,  qui  sustineret  hostium  impe- 
tum,  misit.  6.  Postulavit  ue  Aeduis  bellum  inferret. 
7.  Caesar  milites  cohortatus  est,  ut  fortiter  castra  defende- 
rent.  8.  Timeo  ne  hostis  veniat.  9.  Timeo  ut  pater  veniat. 
10.  Non  timeo  ne  amicus  non  veniat. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  I  praise  you  in  order  that  I  may  be  praised  by  you. 
2.  The  soldiers  came  to  seek^  peace.  3.  He  sent  legates 
to  seek  for  peace.  4.  We  come  to  see  you.  5.  We  came 
to  see  you,     6.  Caisar  encouraged  his  soldiers  in  order  that^ 


SUBJU^ICTIVE   IN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.  309 

they  might  meet  death  more  bravely.  7.  Caesar  has 
encom-aged  his  soldiers  in  order  that  they  may  meet  death 
more  bravely.  8.  CiXisar  demanded  that  the  enemy  should 
not  make  war  upon  the  TFkluans.  9.  I  fear  that  my  friend 
will  not  come.  10.  I  fear  lest  my  friend  is  not  coming. 
11.  I  wish  you  to  answer  me. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  Tlie  Enghsh  infinitive  expressing  a  purpose  (equivalent  to  that, 
in  order  that)  is  to  be  translated  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 

2.  See  321.  Obs.  2. 

"What  is  a  final  clause?  When  do  final  clauses  become  object 
clauses  after  verbs  of  doubting  ?  Give  the  rule  for  the  sequence  of 
tenses  in  final  and  complementary  final  clauses.  What  is  an  object 
clause  ?  

2.    CONSECUTIVE   CLAUSES. 

Obs.  Consecutive  Clauses  are  those  that  tell  the  consequence,  or 
remit,  of  an  action.  They  are  introduced  by  the  consecutive  con- 
junctions ut,  so  that :  ut  .  .  .  non,  so  that  .  .  .  not;  (after  negatives) 
quin  (=  qui  and  ne,  horo  and  not),  whereby  not,  hut  that ;  quominus 
(=  ut  eo  minus),  that  thereby  the  less ;  and  the  relative  pronoun 
qui  (=  ut  is),  that,  so  that. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    OF    RESULT. 

322.  Rule  XLIX. —  Consecutive  Clauses  take  their 
verbs  in  the  subjunctive  mode,  the  tense  being  de- 
termined by  the  regular  rule  for  Sequence  of  Tenses. 

Obs.  In  Consecutive  Clauses  there  is  an  Exception  in  the 
Sequence  of  Tenses,  the  same  tense  being  used  that  would  be 
necessary  if  the  clause  were  independent ;  i.e.,  the  present  is  used 
after  past  tenses  to  denote  the  continuance  of  an  action  or  state  into 
the  present,  the  perfect  to  imply  final  result,  and  the  imperfect  to 
denote  that  the  action  is  contemporaneous  with  that  of  the  principal 
verb :  as,  Verres  Siciliam  per  triennium  ita  vexavit,  ut  ea 
rSstitui  in  antiquum  statura  ntiUo  mSdo  possit,  Verres  so 
harried  Sicily  for  three  years  as  to  make  it  utterly  impossible  for  it  to  he 
restored  to  its  priginal  condition. 

exampi.es. 
1.  tantus  timor  exercitum  occiipavit,  ut  omnium  mantes 
perturbaret,  so  great  fear  seized  the  army  that  it  disturbed, 
the  minds  of  all. 


310  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

2.  tempestas  (tanta)  coorta  est,  quae  naves  reic6ret,  so  great 

a  storm  arose,  that  it  drove  the  vessels  back. 

3.  Sdest  nemo  quin  videat,  there  is  no  one  present  that  (or  who) 

does  not  see. 

4.  non  diibito  quIn  sapientissimus  sis,  /  do  not  doubt  that  you 

are  very  wise. 

323.   Consecutive  Clauses  are  used  after  — 

1.  Demonstratives  like  talis,  tantus,  such;  sic,  ita,  so; 
tam,  Sdeo,  to  such  a  degree,  etc.  ;  and  expressions  implying 
characteristic  and  degree. 

2.  Verbs  and  expressions  of  hindering  and  resisting.,  delay- 
ing and  omitti7ig,  and  the  like  ;  also  of  doubt  and  uncertainty. 
These  verbs  are  followed  b}^  quin  with  the  subjunctive,  but 
only  after  a  negative,  or  a  question  implying  a  negative. 

(1)  For  ne  and  quominus,  with  the  subjunctive  after  verbs  of 
hinderimj,  etc.,  see  321.  3. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Germani  rgtineri  non  pStgrant  quin  in  hostes  tela  coni- 

cSrent,  the   Germans  could  not  be  restrained  from  hurling 
darts  against  the  enemy. 

2.  f5c6re  non  possum  quin  cSttidie  littSras  ad  te  mittam,  / 

cannot  do  ivithout  (/  cannot  help)  sending  you  a  letter  every  day. 

Obs.  1.  The  sequence  of  tenses  after  verbs  of  hindering,  and  the 
like,  is  the  same  as  in  final  clauses ;  after  verbs  of  doubt  and  un- 
certainty, the  same  as  in  interrogative  clauses  (346). 

Obs.  2.  After  Negative  Indefinite  expressions  (as  nemo,  nuUus, 
nihil,  quis),  quin  is  equivalent  to  qui  non,  quae  non,  etc. ;  quin 
is  often  used  in  the  sense  of  ut  non,  and  after  negative  expressions 
of  doubt  and  uncertainty,  in  the  sense  of  ut.  After  negative  verbs  of 
hindering  and  refusing,  quin  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  quominus 
(see  below). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  ^dest  nemo  quin  videat,  tliere  is  no  one  present  who  does  not 

see. 

2.  nemo  est  tam  fortis  quin  perturbetur,  no  one  is  so  brave  as 

not  to  be  disturbed. 

3.  non  dtibitari  debet  quin  fugrint  poetae,  it  ought  not  to  be 

doubted  that  there  loere  poets. 

4.  ngque  rScusare  quin  armis  contendant,  and  that  they  do 

not  refuse  to  contend  in  arms. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.  311 

(2)  Quominus  is  used  after  verbs  of  hindering,  preventinc/,  refus- 
ing, and  the  like  (instead  of  ne).  It  may  generally  be  rendered 
hy  from  with  the  present  participle. 

EXAMPLE. 

turba  impSdIvit  quominus   viderem,  the  crovxl  hindered  me 
from  seeing. 

Obs.  If  verbs  of  hindering,  etc.,  are  negatived  by  non,  or  some 
equivalent  v^ord,  quin  is  generally  used  instead  of  quominus. 

EXAMPI.E. 

turba  non  impgdivit  quin  viderem,  the  crowd  did  not  hinder 
me  from  seeing. 

3.  Verbs  of  effecting.,  the  negative  being  non  or  ne,  and 
the  Sequence  of  Tenses  the  same  as  in  Final  Clauses. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  sol  efficit  ut  omnia   floreant,   the  sun  causes  all  things  to 

flourish. 

2.  fortuna  vestra  fScit,  ut  irae  meae  tempgrem,  your  fortune 

causes  that  I  (makes  me)  restrain  my  anger. 

4.  As  subject  of  many  Impersonal  Verbs  and  phrases, 
such  as  it  happens.,  it  foUoivs,  it  remains^  etc. 

EXAMPLE. 

accidit  ut  esset  luna  plena,  it  happened  that  the  moon  ivas  full. 

5.  Consecutive  Clauses  become,  after  many  Impersonal 
Verbs  and  expressions,  after  verbs  of  effecting^  doubting., 
hindering.,  and  the  like.  Substantive  Clauses,  and  are  the  real 
subject  or  object  of  the  verb,  or  the  explanatory  appositive 
to  a  noun  (see  342.  3) . 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  fit  ut  quisque  delectetur,  it  hajypens  that  every  one  is  delighted 

(subject). 

2.  sol  efficit  ut   omnia  floreant,  the  sun  causes  all  things  to 

flourish  (object). 

3.  Sportebat  damnatum  poenam  sgqui  ut  igni  crgmaretur, 

it  was  necessary  that  the  punishment  of  being  burnt  should 
follow  Qiim  condemned)  his  condeinnation  (appositive). 

Obs.  For  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive,  or  quod  with  the 
Indicative  after  Impersonal  Verbs,  see  342.  1  and  4. 


312  FIKST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


Relative  Clauses  of  Result, 

324.  Relative  Clauses  of  Kesult  are  used  to  define  or 
to  characterize  an  indefijiite  or  general  antecedent. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  sScutae  sunt  tempestates   quae  nostros  in  castris  con- 

tinerent,  storms  {of  such  severity)  folloiced,  which  {that  they) 
kept  our  men  in  camp. 

2.  nemo  est  qui  non  ctipiat,  there  is  no  one  hut  (who  does  not) 

desires. 

3.  sunt  qui  piitent,  there  are  some  loho  think. 

Obs.  Relativb  clauses  of  result  are  used  to  characterize  the  ante- 
cedent, especially  when  it  is  otherwise  undefined,  as  in  the  foregoing- 
examples,  and  are,  therefore,  called  relative  clauses  of  characteiistic. 
The  relative  clause,  quae  .  .  .  continerent  (Ex.  1),  describes  the 
severity  of  the  storms  by  saying  that  they  kept  the  men  in  the 
camp,  i.e.  by  mentioning  a  characteristic  of  it ;  in  Ex.  2  the  relative 
clause  follows  a  general  negative  nemo,  and  in  Ex.  3  it  follows  an 
indefinite  antecedent. 

1 .  Relative  Clauses  of  Result  occur  also  after  — 
a.  unus  and  solus. 
h.  dignus,  indignus,  idoneus,  and  aptus. 

c.  Comparatives  with  quam,  to  express  disproportion. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  soil  centum  grant  qui  creari  possent,  there  ivere  onbj  one 

hundred  who  could  he  appoijited. 

2.  fabttlae  dignae  sunt,  quae  Iggantur,  the  fables  are  worthy  to 

he  read. 

3.  majus    gaudium   fuit,    quam   quod   universum   homines 

cSpSrent,  the  joy  teas  greater  than  (what)  men  could  take  in 
all  at  once. 

Obs.  The  Indicative  may  be  used  after  affirmative  sentences  in 
the  statement  of  definite  facts  with  a  definite  antecedent ;  but  if  a 
general  characteristic  is  denoted,  the  subjunctive  must  be  used. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  multi  sunt  qui  eripiunt,  many  are  they  who  snatch  away. 

2.  multi  sunt  qui  eripiant,  there  are  many  to  snatch  aicay. 

3.  sunt  qui  (=  the  indefinite  pronoun  quidam)  quod  sentiunt 

non  audent  dicSre,  so?ne  dare  not  say  ivhat  they  think. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES. 


313 


The  following  table  shows  the  indefinite  pronoun  or  adverb 
to  be  used  in  Negative  Final  or  Consecutive  Clauses.  In 
English  we  may  say  either  that  no  one^  or  lest  any  07ie,  etc.  ; 
but  in  Latin  always  lest  any  one,  etc. 


That  . .  .  not 

Negative  Purpose. 

Negative  Result. 

ne 

ut  non 

That  . .  .  no,  that  . .  .  not  any 

ne  ullus 

ut  nullus 

That  no  one 

ne  quis 

ut  nem5 

That  .  .  .  never 

ne  unquam 

ut  nunquam 

That  nothing 

ne  quid 

ut  nihil 

For  Consecutive  Clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  351. 


EXERCISES. 
Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Tantus  subito  timor  omnem  cxercitum  occupavit,  ut 
non    mediocriter    omnium   mentes    animosque    perturbaret. 

2.  Quid    obstat    quominus     moenia    statim     oppugnemus. 

3.  Non  dubito  quin  verum  dixeris.  4.  Nemo  erat  qui 
cuperet  me  e  civitate  expellere.  5.  Nemo  fuit  omnium 
militum  qui  vulneraretur.  6.  Vir  probus  dignus  est  qui  ab 
omnibus  diligatur.  7.  Rufum  Caesar  idoneum  judicaverat 
quern  mitteret.  8.  Tanta  vTs  probitatis  est  ut  eam  vel  in 
hoste  diligamus.  9.  Milites  retinere  non  possum  quin  lon- 
gius  procurrant.     10.   Quid  te  iinpedivit  quominus  venires. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  So  great  a  storm  arose  that  it  drove  the  vessels  back. 
2.  I  hindered  him  from  going  home.  3.  There  was  no  one 
who  did  not  rejoice.  4.  There  were  some  who  thought 
Caesar  was  in  the  city.  5.  I  do  not  doubt  that  you  speak 
the  truth.  6.  What  prevents  us  from  seeing  the  games? 
7.  The  fear  of  the  soldiers  was  so  great  that  he  did  not  lead 
them  from  the  camp.  8.  He  deserves  to  be  heard.  9.  He 
was  a  suitable  person  to  send  (  =  to  be  sent) . 


314  FIRST  STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

Mention  a  clause  of  result  in  English.  How  does  it  ditter  from  one 
of  purpose  ?  After  what  conjunctions  are  consecutive  clauses  used  1 
When  is  quominus  used  1  What  is  a  relative  clause  of  character- 
istic ?  Give  an  example  of  one.  What  is  the  antecedent  ?  After  what 
verbs  and  expressions  are  consecutive  clauses  used  ?  When  do  con- 
secutive clauses  become  substantive  clauses  ? 


3.     CONDITIONAL    SENTENCES. 

EXAMPLE. 

Condition  (Protasis).  —  Conclusion  (Apodosis). 
If  he  has  money,  he  gives  it. 

Obs.  The  foregoing  sentence  contains  a  condition,  if  he  has 
money,  and  is,  therefore,  called  a  Conditional  Sentence.  The 
sentence  is  Complex,  because  it  consists  of  two  clauses,  —  a 
principal,  or  leading  clause,  he  gives  it,  called  the  conclusion,  and 
a  subordinate,  or  dependent  clause,  if  he  has  money,  containing 
the  condition.  The  clause  containing  the  condition  is  called  the 
Protasis,  and  that  containing  the  conclusion,  the  Apodosis. 
The  apodosis  is  regularly  introduced  by  the  conditional  conjunc- 
tion if,  —  in  Latin  si,  or  a  compound  of  si :  as,  nisi,  unless  (used 
instead  of  si  non  after  negatives) ;  etiamsi,  etsi,  although ;  sin, 
hut  if  (see  Conditional  and  Concessive  Conjunctions,  331).  An 
indefinite  relative  may  introduce  a  conditional  clause  (see  328). 
Hence  the  following  definition :  — 

PROTASIS    AND    APODOSIS. 

325.  In  Conditional  Sentences,  the  clause  containing  the 
condition  is  called  the  protasis,  and  that  containing  the  con- 
clusion the  apodSsis. 

Classification  of  Conditional  Sentences, 

SIMPLE    PRESENT    AND    PAST    CONDITIONS. 

Present  or  Past  (  1.  If  he  has  money,  he  gives  it. 


w 


Indicative       (  2.  If  he  had  money,  he  gave  it. 

FUTURE    CONDITIONS. 

Fut.  Ind.  or  Pres.  ^1.  If  he  has  (or  shall  have)  money,  he  will  give  it. 
or  Perf .  Subj .     (  2.  If  he  had  (or  should  have)  money,  he  would  give  it. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   IN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.  315 


UNREAL    PRESENT    AND    PAST    CONDITIONS. 


Imperf .  or 
Plup.  Subj. 


1.  If  he  had  money  (lie  has  not),  he  would  give  it  {now, 

present  time). 

2.  1/  he  had  had  money  {he  had  not),  he  ivould  have 

given  it  (then,  at  some  past  time) . 


Obs.  One  of  the  most  obvious  classifications  of  conditional  sen- 
tences is  that  of  (1)  present,  (2)  past,  and  (3)  future  conditions,  the 
distinction  being  based  on  the  time  to  which  the  condition  refers. 
The  pupil,  however,  should  note  that  in  Ex.  1  of  the  third  set,  the 
imperfect  denotes  present  time.  We  may,  on  the  other  hand, 
classify  conditional  sentences  as  to  their  meaning,  i.e.  as  to  what 
is  implied  with  regard  to  the  fulfilment  of  the  condition.  In  the 
first  two  examples,  no  opinion  is  expressed  or  implied  as  to  the 
truth  of  the  supposition,  i.e.  as  to  his  having  money ;  but  what  is 
stated  as  a  fact  is  this :  granted  the  supposition,  i.e.  that  he  has 
money,  and  the  conclusion  must  follow,  i.e.  he  gives  it.  In  Latin 
any  present  or  past  tense  of  the  indicative  may  be  used  either  in 
the  condition  or  conclusion.  If  a  past  tense  is  used  in  this  form 
of  conditional  sentences,  the  pupil  must  take  care  not  to  confound 
such  sentences  with  those  in  the  third  set.  Observe  the  distinction 
between  if  he  had  money,  he  gave  it,  and  if  he  had  money  (he  has  not), 
he  would  give  it  (now).  The  next  two  examples  transfer  the  con- 
dition to  the  future,  and  the  question  as  to  the  fulfilment  of  the 
condition  is,  of  course,  at  pi'esent  undecided ;  hence  the  uncertainty 
of  such  conditions  being  fulfilled  is  greater  than  in  present  con- 
ditions. Such  conditions  may  be  stated  in  two  ways :  the  first 
form,  if  he  shall  have  money,  is  used  to  state  a  supposed  future  case 
in  a  distinct  and  vivid  manner ;  the  second  form,  if  he  should  have 
money,  is  used  to  state  a  supposed  future  case  in  a  less  distinct  and 
invid  manner.  We  may  say  if  he  should  have  money,  or  if  he  should 
have  had  money,  the  first  being  used  for  continued  action,  and  the 
second  (i.e.  the  perfect)  for  completed  action,  i.e.  completed  at  the 
time  denoted  by  the  verb  in  the  apodosis,  although  both  forms  are 
usually  rendered  in  English  by  the  present.  The  third  set  of  ex- 
amples, if  he  had  money,  he  ivould  give  it,  and  if  he  had  had  money, 
he  would  have  given  it,  transfer  the  conditions  to  past  time,  and 
hence  the  time  for  the  happening  of  the  conditions  has  already 
passed,  i.e.  they  state  the  supposed  case  in  such  a  manner  that  we 
perceive  the  condition  is  unfulfilled,  i.e.  he  does  not  have  money,  and 
does  not  give  it.  In  the  first  example  the  imperfect,  a  past  tense,  is 
used  to  state  the  unfulfilment  or  unreality  of  the  condition  in  present 
time.  In  both  sentences  the  supposed  case  is  represented  as  unreal, 
or  contrary  to  fact,  and  the  conclusion  states  what  would  have  been 
the  result  if  the  condition  had  been  fulfilled.  In  Latin,  the  sub- 
junctive is  used  in  both  condition  and  conclusion,  —  in  the  first  the 
imperfect,  and  in  the  second  the  pluperfect.     The  imperfect  refers 


316  FIRST  STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

to  present  time,  and  the  pluperfect  to  past  time.     Hence  the  follow- 
ing classification  of  conditional  sentences  :  — 

SIMPLE    PKP:SE^T    A^l>    I'AST    CONDITIONS. 

1.  Simple  Present  and  Past  Conditions,  nothing  implied  as  to 
their  fulfilment.  Assume  as  a  fact  the  supposition,  and  the  conclu- 
sion must  follow :  Any  present  or  past  tense  of  the  indicative 
in  both  clauses. 

KXAMPI.ES. 

a.  Present  ;  si  pgcuniam  habet,  dat,  if  he  has  money,  he  fjives  it. 
h.  Past  :  si  pgcuniam  hSbebat,  dSbat,  if  he  had  money,  he  gave  it. 

FUTURE   conditions. 

2.  Future  Conditions  may  be  stated  in  two  ways :  (1)  More 
distinct  and  vivid,  the  future  indicative  being  used  in  both 
clauses;  (2)  less  distinct  and  vivid  {i.e.  less  probable),  the  sub- 
junctive being  used  in  both  clauses.  The  present  subjunctive 
is   used   for    continued  action,   the    perfect   subjunctive  for 

completed  action. 

p:xamplks. 

a.  si  pgciiniam  h&bebit,  dSbit,  if  he  has  (i.e.  shall  have)  money, 

he  will  (jive  it. 
h.  si  pgcuniam  hSbeat,  det,  if  he  should  have  money,  he  would 

(jive  it. 
c.  si  pgcuniam  habugrit,  dgdgrit,  if  he  should  have  had  money, 

he  would  have  given  it. 

UNREAL    PRESENT    AND    PAST    CONDITIONS. 

3.  Unreal  Present  and  Past  Conditions,  unfulfilled  in  present 
or  past  time :  Imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  both 
clauses. 

EXAMPLES. 

a.  Present  :  si  pgcuniam  hSberet,  dSi-et,  if  he  had  money  {he 

has  not),  he  rvould  give  it  {now,  present  time). 

b.  Past  :  si  pgcuniam  hSbuisset,  dedisset,  if  he  had  had  money 

{he  had  not),  he  woidd  have  given  it  {then,  at  some  past  time). 

Obs.  The  pupil  should  note  that  the  rules  for  Sequence  of 
Tenses  are  not  applicable  to  Conditional  Sentences  (see  319.  Obs.). 
For  conditional  sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  355. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   IN  DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.  317 

MODE    IN  CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES. 

326.  Rule  L.-  Conditional  Sentences  with  si,  nisi, 
nl,  sin,  take  — 

SIMPLE    PRESENT    AND    PAST    CONDITIONS. 

1.  Any  present  or  past  tense  of  the  indicative  in 
both  clauses  when  nothing-  is  implied  as  to  the  fulfil- 
ment of  the  condition. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  si  ^dest,  bgne  est,  if  he  is  here,  it  is  tvelL 

2.  SI  adgrat,  b^ne  Srat,  if  he  was  here,  it  was  well. 

3.  SI  vSlet,  laetor,  if  he  is  well,  I  rejoice. 

4.  SI  valebat,  laetabar,  if  he  was  well,  I  ivas  rejoicing. 

Obs.  As  stated  in  the  rule,  the  mode  of  the  conchision  (apod- 
osis)  is,  as  a  rule,  in  the  indicative ;  but  it  may  be  also  in  the 
imperative  or  subjunctive,  according  as  a  command,  wish,  or  modest 
assertion  (278.  2)  is  to  be  expressed. 

Example. 
sT  dormis,  expergiscgre,  if  you  are  sleeping,  awake. 

FUTURE    CONDITIONS. 

2.  The  future  indicative  in  both  clauses,  to  repre- 
sent the  supposed  future  case  in  a  distinct  and  vivid 
manner  ;  the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  in  both 
clauses,  to  represent  the  supposed  future  case  in  a 
less  distinct  and  vivid  manner. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  si  id  credes,  errabis,  if  you  shall  believe  that  you  will  go  tvrong. 

2.  si  adsit,  bene  sit,  if  he  should  (hereafttr)  he  here,  it  loould  he  well. 

3.  SI  adfuSrit,  bSne  sit,  if  you  should  have  been  here,  it  would  he 

well. 

4.  SI  id   credidgris  (rare),  erraveris,  if  you  helieve  (=  should 

have  believed^  that,  you  tvould  go  (—  have  gone)  wrong. 

Obs.  1.  If  the  action  of  the  condition  is  regarded  as  completed 
before  that  of  the  conclusion  begins,  the  future  perfect  indicative 
is  used  instead  of  the  future,  or  the  perfect  subjunctive  instead  of 
the  present  subjunctive. 

Examples. 

1.  SI  milites  hortatus  grit,  fortiter  pugnabunt,  if  he  shall  have 
eiicouraged  the  soldiers,  they  will  fight  bravely. 


318  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

2.  si  milites  hortatus  sit,  fortiter  pugnent,  if  he  should  have 

encouraged  the  soldiers,  they  would  Jight  bravely. 

UNREAL   PRESENT   AND    PAST    CONDITIONS. 

3.  The  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  both 
clauses,  to  represent  the  supposed  case  as  unreal,  or 
cofiti^ary  to  fact.  The  imperfect  denotes  present  time, 
and  the  pluperfect  past. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  SI  Sdesset,  bSne  esset,  if  he  were  (now)  here  (he  is  not),  it 

ivould  he  well. 

2.  SI  adfuisset,  bSne  fuisset,  if  he  had  (then)  been  here  (he  was 

not),  it  zvould  have  been  well. 

3.  SI  vSleret,  laetarer,  if  he  were  (now)  well,  I  tvould  rejoice. 

4.  SI  vSluisset,  laetStus  essem,  if  he  had  (then)  been  well,  I 

would  have  rejoiced. 

Conditional  Clauses  after  Dutn,  Modo,  and 
Dummodo. 

327.  Conditional  Clauses  introduced  by  dum,  m6do, 
and  dumm6do  (negative  dum  ne,  m6do  ne,  dummSdo  ne), 
if  only.,  provided  that.,  take  the  present  or  imperfect 
subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  dummddo  inter  me  atque  te  murus  intersit,  provided  that 

the  city  /rail  is  between  us. 

2.  dum  r§s  mSneant,  verba  fingant,  if  only  the  facts  remain, 

they  may  make  up  words. 

Obs.  1.  The  Apodosis  —  except  in  a  few  involved  forms  of  condi- 
tional sentences — regularly  corresponds  in  mode  with  the  Apodosis 
(see  foregoing  examples).     But  see  326.  Obs. 

Obs.  2.  Frequently  the  present  subjunctive  of  a  future  condi- 
tion becomes  imperfect  by  sequence  of  tenses.  For  conditional 
sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  355. 

1.  Verbs  in  the  conclusion  of  unreal  conditions  are  some- 
times in  tlie  imperfect  or  pluperfect  indicative  (the  indica- 
tive is  regularly  used  after  verbs  denoting  duty.,  necessity^ 
2)ropriety,  ability,  and  the  like)  ;  also,  the  historical  perfect 


SUBJUNCTIVE   IN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.  319 


of  other  verbs  when  accompanied  by  paene  or  pr6pe,  and  the 
periphrastic  forms  in  -rus  and  -dus.  In  these  cases  the 
conditional  idea  is  sufficiently  expressed  in  the  meaning  of 
the  words,  and  the  regular  conditional  form  is,  therefore, 
neglected. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  deleri  exercitus  p6tuit,  si  persgcuti  victores  essent,  the 

army  iiiiglit  have  been  destroyed  (and  ivould  have  been),  if  the 
victors  had  pursued. 

2.  SI   Romae   privatus   esset  hoc   tempSre,  tSmen   is   6rat 

deligendus,  if  he  loere  at  this  time  a  private  citizen  of  Rome, 
yet  he  ought  to  be  appointed. 

3.  pons  iter  paene  hostibus  dgdit,  ni  unus  vir  fuisset,  the 

bridge  almost  furnished  a  passage  to  the  enemy  (and  ivould 
have  furnished  it)  had  thei'e  not  been  one  man. 

DISGUISED    OR    OMITTED    CONDITIONS. 

328.  A  condition  is  sometimes  introduced  by  an  Indefinite 
Relative,  or  by  a  Participial,  Imperative,  or  Interrogative 
Clause  (instead  of  a  regular  protasis)  ;  or  it  may  be  contained 
in  a  single  word  or  phrase,  or  otherwise  implied  in  the  context. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  qui  sgcum  16qui  pStSrit,  sermonem  altgrius  non  rSquiret, 

if  any  one  (let  he  who)  shall  be  able  to  converse  ivith  himself 
he  will  not  need  the  conversation  of  another. 

2.  gpistiila  accepta,  prSfectus  essem,  if  I  had  received  a  letter, 

I  should  have  set  out. 

3.  nulla  prSfecto  ^lia  gens  tanta  mole  cladis  non  obrttta 

esset,  surely  no  other  nation  ivould  have  failed  to  be  cruslied 
by  such  a  weight  of  disaster  (i.e.  if  such  a  weight  of  disaster 
had  come  upon  it;  condition  implied  in  tanta  mole). 

Obs.   For  Conditional  Clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  355. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Si  hoc  facit,  bene  est.  2.  Si  hoc  faciat,  bene  sit. 
3.  Si  hoc  fecisset,  bene  fuisset.  4.  ST  hoc  faceret,  bene 
esset.  5.  Si  tii  me  laudabis,  ego  te  laudabo.  6.  Si  quid 
habet,  dat.  7.  Si  Helvetii  AUobrogibus  satisfaciant,  cum 
iis  pacem  faciam.     8.  SI  quid  habuisset,  dedisset. 


320  FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  If  I  do  this,  it  is  well.  2.  If  I  should  do  this,  it 
would  be  well.  3.  If  I  had  done  this,  it  would  have  been 
well.  4.  If  he  says  this,  he  is  mistaken.  5.  If  he  speaks 
the  truth,  he  will  be  praised.  6.  If  he  had  had  money,  he 
would  have  given  it.  7.  If  he  had  spoken  the  truth,  he 
would  have  been  praised.  8.  If  you  were  here,  you  would 
think  differently.      9.  If  this  were  so,  I  should  be  glad. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  conditional  sentence  ?  Of  how  many  parts  does  it  con- 
sist 1  What  name  is  given  to  each  part  1  How  may  conditional 
sentences  be  classified  ?  Is  a  conditional  sentence  complex  or  com- 
pound ?  What  tenses  does  tlie  subjunctive  lack  ?  How  is  this  lack 
sometimes  supplied  '^  Is  the  conclusion  a  principal  or  a  dependent 
clause  ?     What  time  does  each  tense  denote  ? 


4.    COMPARATIVE   CLAUSES. 

Obs.  Comparative  Clauses  are  those  that  illustrate  or  explain 
the  leading  statement,  by  furnishing  a  standard  of  measure.  The 
leading  clause  often  has  some  correlative  word  like  ita,  sic,  so,  etc. 
Comparative  clauses  are  introduced  by  comparative  conjunctions ; 


as  if. 


quam,  than,  as. 

tanquam, 

ut,  uti,                     -j 

1 

quSsi, 

sicut  or  siciiti, 

y  as,  so  as. 

ut  SI, 

quemadmSdum,  J 

1 

vglut  SI, 

vglut,  just  as. 

acsi. 

J 


MODE    IN    COMPARATIVE    CLAUSES. 

329.  Rule  LI.  —  Comparative  Clauses  introduced 
by  utf  utlt  slcutf  queniachnodutnf  etc.,  followed  by  the 
demonstrative  particles  tta,  sic  (so),  etc.,  regularly 
take  the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive  as  in  indepen- 
dent sentences. 

EXAMPLE. 

"^Ttt  sementem  fgcSris,  ita  mgtes,  as  you  shall  have  sown,  so  shall 
you  reap. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  321 

330.  Rule  Lll.  —  Comparative  Clauses  introduced 
by  dc  sif  ut  si,  quajnslf  quasi,  tanquam,  tanquam  s~i, 
velut,  velut  si,  are,  in  fact,  contlitional  clauses,  of 
which  tlie  conclusion  is  omitted  or  implied,  and 
therefore  take  the  subjunctive  like  other  conditional 
sentences. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  me  adspicitis,  quSsi  monstrum  sim,  you  gaze  at  me  as  {you 

would  gaze^  if  I  were  a  monster. 

2.  SequSni  absentis  Ariovisti  crudelitatem  vSlut  si  coram 

a.desset,  horrebant,  the  Sequani  kept  shuddering  at  the 
cruelty  of  the  absent  Ariovistus  as  (they  would  have  shuddered) 
if  he  ivere  (had  been)  present. 

Obs.  Ordinary  comparative  clauses  which  merely  illustrate  a 
preceding  statement  take  the  indicative,  unless  the  subjunctive  is 
used  as  in  independent  sentences.  But  comparative  clauses  that 
express  a  condition,  with  the  apodosis  omitted,  take  the  subjunc- 
tive, the  tense  being  determined  by  the  rule  for  sequence  of  tenses 
rather  than  the  ordinary  use  of  conditional  sentences.  The  Eng- 
lish translation  would  lead  us  to  expect  only  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect,  as  it  makes  the  comparison  an  unreal  one  (326.  3). 
But  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive  is  generally  controlled  by  the  tense 
in  the  leading  clause  (319),  although  occasionally  the  sequence  is 
not  observed,  but  the  rule  for  conditional  sentences  prevails.  In 
the  first  example  the  present  subjunctive  is  used  in  the  comparative 
clause,  though  the  unreality  of  the  comparison  is  implied,  because 
the  leading  verb  is  in  the  present  tense ;  hence, 

1.  The  tenses  follow  the  rules  for  the  sequence  of  tenses, 
rather  than  the  ordinary  use  of  conditional  sentences.  In 
English,  the  translation  implies  the  unreality  of  the  com- 
parison. 

Obs.   For  Comparative  Clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  351. 


5.    CONCESSIVE    CLAUSES. 

Obs.  Concessive  Clauses  are  those  which  concede  or  admit  some- 
thing opposed  to  the  main  statement,  and  are  generally  introduced 
in  English  by  though  or  although.  The  concessive  conjunctions 
take  the  subjunctive  or  indicative  according  to  the  following :  — 


322  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

a.  quamquam,  although^  generally  takes  the  indicative. 

h.  quamvis  (quam  and  vis,  as  much  as  you  please^, 
quamtumvis,  ut,  ne,  and  cum,  although^  and  the  relative 
qui  (=cum,  is,  ggo,  etc.),  all  take  the  subjunctive  when 
used  concessively. 

c.  licet,  although,  is  properly  a  verl),  and  takes  a  sub- 
stantive clause  with  the  subjunctive. 

d.  etsT,  t&metsi,  gtiamsT,  or  si,  take  tlie  indicative  or 
subjunctive,  like  conditional  clauses  with  si. 

MODE  IN  concessivp:  clauses. 

331.  Rule  LIII.  —  Concessive  Clauses  are  intro- 
duced by  concessive  conjunctions,  —  although,  grant- 
ing that,  —  and  take  the  indicative  to  represent  the 
concession  as  a  fact;  the  subjunctive  to  represent  it 
as  merely  possible,  or  as  contrary  to  the  fact, 

KXAMPLES. 

1.  quamquam  intellggunt,  t^men  nunquam  dicunt,  although 

they  understand,  yet  they  never  speak. 

2.  quamvis  fortSs  sint,  although  they  are  brave. 

3.  ut  desint  virgs,  although  the  strength  fails . 

4.  ne  sit  summum  mSlum  dSlor,  although  pain  may  not  he  the 

greatest  evil. 

1.  The  relative  qui  is  often  concessive,  equivalent  to 
although  with  a  personal  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  and 
takes  the  subjunctive. 

EXAMPLE. 

culpatur,  qui  innScens  sit,  he  is  blamed,  although  he  is  innocent. 

OiiS.    For  Concessive  Clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  351. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Quamvis  molestus  dolor  sit,  malum  non  est.  2.  Ut 
desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda  voluntas.  3.  Licet ^  me 
hortetur,  non  pugnabo.  4.  Patres  metus  cepit,  velut  si  jam 
ad   portas  hostis  esset.-      5.  Multi  omnia  recta  negligunt, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  323 

dummodo  potentiam  consequantar.  6.  Cum  ea^  ita  sint, 
tamen,  si  obsides  ab  iis  sibi  dentur,  cum  iis  pacem  facial. 
7.  Adero  ego,  licet  absit  amicus.  8.  Caesar,  etsi  prope 
exacta  jam  aestas  erat,  tamen  eo^  exercitum  abduxit. 
9.  Sicuti  dixi  faciam.  10.  Pater  meus  septima  hora  redibit, 
slcut  pollicitus  est.  11.  Sequani  absentis  AriovistI  crude- 
litatem  velut  si  coram  adess^t,  horrebant. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Although  the  summer  was  passed,  Caesar  led  his  army 
into  Gaul.  2.  I  was  present,  although  you  were  absent. 
3.  We  will  do  this,  although  we  know  that  we  shall  be 
punished.  4.  Fear  seized  the  citizens,  as  if  the  enemy 
were  already  in  the  city.  5.  Although  they  fought  bravely, 
yet  they  did  not  conquer.  6.  I  shall  do  as  I  have  promised. 
7.  You  look  at  me  as  if  I  were  a  monster. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.    Lit.,  that  he  may  encourage  me  is  allowed.         2.    See  330. 

3.  When  the  demonstrative  is  used  substantively,  remember  that 
some  noun  is  to  be  supplied  in  English  :  as,  man,  men,  soldiers,  if  mas- 
culine ;  thing  or  things,  if  neuter.  4.    Thither. 

What  are  comparative  clauses  ?  How  introduced  ?  What  are  con- 
cessive conjunctions  ?  Name  them.  Which  take  the  indicative  ?  Is  a 
clause  connected  by  a  concessive  conjunction  adjective  or  adverbial  ? 


6.    CAUSAL   CLAUSES. 

Obs.  Causal  Clauses  are  those  that  state  the  cause  or  reason  of  the 
fact  mentioned  in  the  leading  clause.  They  are  introduced  by  the 
causal  conjunctions  quod,  quia,  because,  qudniam,  quando,  since, 
cum  (quum),  as,  since,  and  the  relative  pronoun  qui,  as  he. 

332.  Rule  LIV.  —  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by 
quod,  quia,  quoniarrif  and  quandOf  take  the  Indicative 
when  the  reason  assigned  is  stated  as  a  fact,  and 
indorsed  by  the  speaker  or  writer. 

EXAMPI.E. 

laudo  te,  quia  tu  me  laudas,  7  praise  you  because  you  praise  me. 


324  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

Obs.  The  statement  of  tlie  reason  which  is  not  the  real  one  is 
introduced  by  nou  quo,  non  quod,  iion  quia,  with  the  verb  most 
commonly  in  the  subjunctive. 

Example, 
non  quod  dSleant,  not  because  they  grieve. 

1.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  b}'  cum  or  the  relative  qui 
regularly  take  the  subjunctive. 

EXAMBLiES. 

1.  cum  vita  mStus  plena  sit,  since  life  is  full  of  fear. 

2.  quae  cum  ita  sint,  and  since  these  things  are  so. 

.*>.  O  fortunate  adiilescens,  qui  tuae  virtutis  HSmerum  prae- 
conem  invenSris,  0  fortunate  youth,  since  you  (lit.  who') 
have  obtained  Homer  as  the  herald  of  your  valor. 

2.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  quoniara, 
take  the  subjunctive  (in  Indirect  Discourse,  348)  to  state 
the  reason  as  the  assertion  or  opinion  of  some  one  else. 

EXAMPLE. 

Socrates   accusatus    est    quod    corrumpSret    jilventutem, 

Socrates  ivas  arraigned  because  (as  teas  alleged)  he  corrupted 
the  youth. 

QUOD    WITH    VERBS    OF    EMOTION. 

3.  Quod  is  used  after  verbs  of  joy  and  sorrow,  praise  and 
blame,  thanks  and  complaint,  satisfaction  and  anger,  to  give 
the  ground  of  the  emotion,  and  is  followed  by  the  subjunc- 
tive or  indicative,  according  to  332  or  332.  2  ;  but  see  342.  4. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  jiivat  mg  quod  vigent  studia,  I  am  delighted  because  studies 

are  flourish ing  (indicative). 

2.  gaudet  miles  quod  vic6rit  hostem,  the  soldier  rejoices  be- 

cause he  has  conquered  the  enemy  (subjunctive). 

Obs.  1.   For  Causal  Clauses  as  the  subject,  object,  or  appositive, 
see  342.  4 ;  for  the  Infinitive  after  Verbs  of  Emotion,  see  342.  (3). 
Obs.  2.    For  Causal  Clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  351. 

EXERCISES. 
Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Laudabat  me,  quod  filium  meum  culparera.  2.  Quo- 
uiam  jam  nox  est,  in  vestra  tecta  discedite.     3.  Caesar  ab 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  325 

Aeduis  frumentum  flagitabat,  quod  milites  magna  inopia 
urgerentur.  4.  Omnes  elves  gaudent,  quod  duces  mllitum 
cupiditates  coercuerunt.  5.  Succenseo  tibi,  quia  lucrum 
amicitiae  auteposuisti.  6.  Aedui  legatos  miserunt  questum 
quod  Harudes  agros  eorum  popidarentur.  7.  Quoniam  res 
ita  se  habet,  in  urbem  redeamus.^ 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  You  have  praised  me  because  1  have  praised  you. 
2.  The  citizens  rejoiced  because  Ciesar  restrained  the  sol- 
diers. 3.  I  am  angry  with  you,  because  you  have  preferred 
gain  to  friendship.  4.  He  complained  because  he  was  not 
assisted  by  them. 

NOTES     AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  See  278. 

What  is  a  causal  clause  'i  Mention  the  causal  conjunctions.  When 
do  clauses  introduced  by  these  conjunctions  take  the  indicative  1 
When  the  subjunctive  1  How  is  cum  translated  when  it  denotes 
cause  ?     What  is  the  construction  after  verbs  of  emotion  1 


7.    TEMPORAL   CLAUSES. 

Obs.  Temporal  Clauses  are  such  as  denote  the  time  of  an  action 
by  mentioning  something  else  which  was  (1)  antecedent  to,  (2)  con- 
temporaneous tvith,  or  (3)  subsequent  to  it.  The  temporal  conjunc- 
tions are :  — 

1.  Antecedent:   postquam  (posteaquam),  after  that,  after; 

ut,  as;  tibi,  token  (lit.  lohere) ;  simulac,  or  simul  ac,  simul, 
as  soon  as;  ut  primum,  cum  primum,  the  frst  moment  that; 
cum  (quum),  historical,  when,  after. 

2.  Contemporaneous:    dum,  donee,  while,  as  long  as,  until; 

quoad,  quamdiu,  as  long  as ;  cum  (quum),  when. 

3.  Subsequent  :  antgquam,  priusquam,  before. 

Obs.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  temporal  clauses  only  in  in- 
direct discourse,  or  to  express  cause,  doubt,  purpose,  desire,  etc.,  as 
will  be  explained  hereafter. 


326  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN.      ^ 

I.   Antecedent  Action, 

333.  Temporal  Clauses,  introduced  by  postquam,  postea 
quam,  iibi,  tit,  iit  prlmum,  iibi  primum,  simul  ac,  etc.,  take 
the  indicative  (commonly  the  aorist  indicative  or  historical 
present) . 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  postquam  id  Snimadvertit,  copias  suas  Caesar  in  proxi- 

mum  coUem  subducit,  after  Ccesar  liad  observed  this,  he 
withdreio  his  forces  to  the  nearest  hill. 

2.  tibi   sg   pSratos   esse   arbitrati  sunt,  oppida  incendunt, 

ichen  they  thought  they  were  ready,  they  burnt  their  towns. 
8.  nostri,  simul  in  arldo  constiterunt,  in  hostes  impgtum 

fecSrunt,  our  men,  as  soon  as  they  got  footing  on  dry  {ground), 

made  an  attack  on  the  enemy. 
4.  milites,  postquam  victoriam  Sdepti  sunt,  nihil  rgllqui 

victis  fgcere,  the  soldiers,  after  they  had  gained  a  victory, 

left  nothing  to  the  vaiKjuished. 
o.  postquam  vidit,  etc.,   castra  pdsuit,   he  pitched  his  camp, 

after  he  saw  it,  etc. 
6.  tibi  certiorSs  facti  sunt,  ivhen  they  were  informed. 

Obs.  After  the  antecedent  conjunctions,  the  aorist  (Lat.  perfect) 
is  frequently  rendered  in  English  by  the  pluperfect  (see  Exs.). 


II.    Contemporaneous  Action, 

334.  KuLE  LV.  —  Uum^  donee,  quoad,  while,  as  long 
as.,  take  the  indicative  (any  tense). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  hoc  feci,  dum  licuit,  /  did  this  as  long  as  I  ivas  allowed. 

2.  intermisi,  quoad  non  licuit,  /  stoppjed  it  as  long  as  I  was  not 

allowed. 

335.  Rule  LVI.  —  Dum,  donee,  quoad,  until,  take 
the  indicative  in  the  statement  of  a  fact,  the  sub- 
junctive vi^hen  purpose  is  expressed  (i.e,  if  the  accom- 
plishment of  the  purpose  is  the  limit  of  the  action). 

EXAMPL,ES. 

1.  Milo  in  sgnatu  fuit  eo  die,  quoad  sSnatus  dimissus  est, 

Milo  was  in  the  senate  on  that  day,  until  it  adjourned. 


subjunctivp:  in  dependent  clauses.        327 

2.  donee  rSdiit,  sllentium  fuit,   until   he  relumed,    there  was 

silence. 

3.  dum  navgs  eo  convSnirent,  exspectavit,  he  ivaited  until  the 

ships  should  come  up,  i.e.  for  the  ships  to  come  up. 

4.  exspectas  dum  dicat,  you  are  waiting  till  he  speaks  (in  order 

that  he  may  speak). 

5.  impgtum  hostium  siistinuit,  quoad  cetSri  pontem  inter- 

rumpSrent,  he  ivithstood  the  onset  of  the  enemy,  until  the  rest 
could  break  down  the  bridge  (in  order  that  they  might,  etc.). 

6.  dum  Caesar  m6ratur,  ad  eum  legati  yenerunt,  while  Ccesar 

icas  delaying,  envoys  came  to  him. 

Obs.  Dum  in  the  sense  of  while,  in  the  time  that,  usnally  takes 
the  present  indicative  in  narration  (see  Exs.  6  and  7),  though  the 
action  is  past  (334.  Ex.  1)  ;  but  when  it  denotes  purpose,  it  takes 
the  subjunctive.  In  the  later  prose  writers  dum,  while,  is  construed 
with  the  imperfect  and  pkiperfect  subjunctive  like  cum  Historical. 
The  principle  is  that  of  Partial  Indirect  Discourse  (see  364). 


in.   Subsequent  Action* 

336.  Rule  IjYU.  —  Antequam  and x^^iusquam,  before^ 
are  used  with  any  tense  of  the  indicative,  except  the 
imperfect  and  pluperfect,  to  express  the  mere  priority 
of  one  event  to  another. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  priusquam  lucet,  adsunt,  they  are  present  before  it  is  light. 

2.  filios  conv6cavit  antgquam  mortuus  est,  he  called  together 

his  sons  before  he  died. 

3.  priusquam  de  cgtgrTs  rgbus  respondeo,  de  Smicitia  pauca 

dicam,  before  I  reply  to  the  rest,  I  will  say  a  few  words  about 
friendship. 

337.  Rule  LVIII.  —  Antequam  and  priusquam  are 
used  with  the  subjunctive  to  express  (l)  the  inten- 
tional priority  of  one  action  to  another  (i.e.  when 
the  action  is  purposed  or  desired  by  the  subject  of 
the  leading  verb),  (2)  or  when  its  non-occurrence  is 
expressed  or  implied. 


328  FIRST  STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

EXAMPLES. 

1,  non  prius  dtlces  dimittunt  (320.  b.),  quam  sit  concessum, 

they  did  not  dismiss  the  leaders  till  it  was  granted. 

2.  priusquam  quicquam  conaretur,  Diviti^cuin  ad  se  vScari 

jiibet  (320.  /;.),  before  he  took  {should  take)  action,  he  ordered 
Divitiacus  to  be  summoned  to  him. 
nee  prius  sunt  visi  quam  castris  appr6pinquarent,  and 
they  were  not  seen  until  they  ivere  nearing  the  camp. 

1.  AntSquam  and  priusquam  often  have,  in  historical  narra- 
tion, the  same  construction  as  cum  Historical  (see  339). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  priusquam   visus   est    Caesar,    quam   f^ma    perferretur, 

Ca;s(ir  appeared  Itefore  any  tidings  icere  brought. 

2.  dtlcentis   annis  ante  quam  urbem  cSpSrent,  in  ItSliam 

Gain  descendSrunt,  the   Gauls  came  down  into  Italy  two 
liundred  years  before  they  took  the  city. 

2.  The  subjnnctive  is  used  after  antSquam  and  priusquam 
(generally  a  present  or  future  stands  in  the  leading  clause)  when 
the  action  is  represented  as  possible  (Potential  Subjunctive,  278. 
1.  4),  or  when  the  statement  of  a  general  truth  is  made. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  antg  videmus  fulgiirationem  quam  s5num  auditmus,  we 

see  the  Jlash  of  lightning  before  hearing  (i.e.  before  we  can 
hear)  the  sound  (potential). 

2.  collem,  priusquam  sentiatur,  communit,  he  fortifies  the  hill 

before  it  was  {could  be)  perceived. 

3.  tempestas  mln&tur,  antSquam  surgat,  the  tempest  threatens 

before  it  rises  (general  truth). 

3.  The  subjunctive  with  an  indefinite  second  person  as  the  sub- 
ject {you  =  one,  any  one)  is  especially  common. 

EXAMPLE. 

priusquam  incipiSs,  consults  6pus  est,  before  you  (i.e.  any  one) 
begin,  there  is  need  of  deliberation.     (See  308.  Obs.  2.) 

Obs.  AntSquam  and  priusquam  are  often  written  as  separate 
words ;  the  translation  is  often  before  with  the  present  participle. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  329 

IT.   Constructions  of  Cum, 

CUM  TEMPORAL. 

338.  Rule  LIX.  —  Cum  Temporal  (=  when),  intro- 
ducing a  clause  that  defines  the  m,ere  time  of  an 
action,  may  be  used  with  all  the  tenses  of  the 
indicative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  cum   Caesar   in    Galliam  venit,  altgrius  factionis  prin- 

cipes  grant  Aedui,  ivhen  Ccesar  came  info  Gaul,  the  ^dui 
were  at  the  head  of  one  party. 

2.  cum  verba  f&ciunt,  majores  suos  extollunt,    when    they 

speak,  they  extol  their  ancestors. 

CUM  INVERSUM. 
1.  When  the  clauses  are  inverted,  so  that  the  temporal  clause 
expresses  the  main  statement  and  becomes  substantially  the  lead- 
ing clause,  the  indicative  must  be  used. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  hoc   fScgre   noctu   app^rabant,  cum   matresfamiliae  r6- 

pente  procurrerunt,  they  were  preparing  to  do  this  by  night, 
when  the  loomen  suddenly  ran  forth. 

2.  vix  agmen  novissimum  processgrat,  cum  Galli  flumen 

transire  non  diibitant,  scarcely  had  the  rear  advanced,  when 
the  Gauls  without  hesitation  crossed  the  river. 

Obs.  The  verb  in  the  leading  clause  is  usually  the  imperfect  or 
pluperfect  indicative,  often  preceded  by  the  adverbs  vix,  jam,  etc. 
Stibito  and  rgpente  are  often  used  in  the  temporal  clause. 

ITERATIVE  USE  OF   CUM. 
2.  When  cum  (or  tibi,  simul  Sc,  or  the  general  relatives  qui- 
cumque,  quStiens)  means  whenever,  as  often  as,  and  designates 
repeated  or  customary  action,  it  is  followed  in  some  writers  by  the 
subjunctive,  in  other  writers  by  the  indicative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  cum  quaepiam  cShors  impgtum  fecSrat,  hostes  rgfiigiebat, 

whenever  any  cohort  had  made  an  attack,  the  enemy  retreated. 


330  FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

2.  cum  in  jus  duel  debitorem  vidissent,  undique  convSla- 
bant,  mhenever  they  saw  a  debtor  taken  to  court,  they  hurried 
together  {made  it  a  rule  to  hurry  together)  from  all  quarters. 

CUM  HISTORICAL. 

339.  Rule  LX.  —  Cum,  meaning  ivhen^  is  used  in 
Historical  Narration  with  the  imperfect  subjunctive 
for  contemporaneous  action,  with  the  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive for  antecedent  action. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  cum  civltas  armis  jus  suum  exsgqui  conaretur,   Crg6- 

t5rix  mortuus  est,  when  the  state  was  attempting  to  assert  its 
authority  hy  force  of  arms,  Orgetorix  died. 

2.  Caesar,  cum  Pompejum  vicisset,  in  Itaiiam  trajecit,  tvhen 

Ccesar  had  conquered  Pompey,  he  crossed  over  to  Italy. 

3.  CaesSri  cum  id  nuntiatum  esset,  mtturat  (320.  h.)  ab  urbe 

pr6ficisci,  ivhen  this  (had  been)  loas  announced  to  Caesar, 
he  hastened  to  set  out  from  the  city. 

Obs.  Cum,  followed  by  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive, 
is  generally  historical ;  i.e.,  it  is  used  in  historical  narration,  a  his- 
torical tense  standing  in  the  leading  clause.  The  subjunctive  is 
translated  like  the  indicative.  A  notion  of  cause  often  intrudes, 
as  in  Ex.  3.  Cum  nuntiStum  esset  points  out  both  the  time  and 
cause  of  Caesar's  setting  out.  Usually  the  temporal  clause  comes 
first. 

CAUSAL  AND  CONCESSIVE   CUM. 

340.  Rule  LXI.  —  Cum  Causal  {—since)  and  ctim 
Concessive  (=  although)  may  be  used  with  any  tense 
of  the  subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  quae  cum  ita  sint,  and  since  these  things  are  so. 

2.  Aedui,    cum    se    defendSre    non    possent,    legates    ad 

CaesSrem  mittunt  (320.  h.),  the  ^duans,  since  they  were  not 
able  to  defend  themselves,  sent  envoys  to  Ccesar. 

3.  nihil  me  adjiivat  (320.  h.)  cum  posset,  he  gave  me  no  assist- 

ance, although  he  had  it  in  his  power. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   IN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSES.  331 

Obs.  1.  Cum,  followed  by  the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive,  is 
almost  always  Causal  or  Concessive,  and  translated  by  since, 
while,  although;  it  cannot  be  historical. 

Obs.  2.  Note  the  translation  of  the  above  examples:  the  sub- 
junctive is  rendered  by  the  indicative  with  token;  the  temporal 
clause  may  often  be  rendered  by  a  participle. 

Obs.  3.  The  temporal  conjunction  cum  (also  ubi,  ut,  quando, 
either  alone  or  compounded  with  -cumque)  may  mean  ivhenever, 
and  then,  like  the  general  relatives,  has  the  construction  of  the 
protasis  in  conditional  sentences. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  cum  r6sam  vidgrat,  turn  incipgre  ver  arbitrabatur,  ivhen- 

ever (if  in  any  case)  he  had  seen  a  rose,  he  thought  spring 
had  begun. 

2.  cum   se  inter  turmas   insinuaverunt,  desiliunt,  whenever 

(if  in  any  case)  they  have  worked  their  ivay  into  (among)  the 
squadrons,  they  (are  wont  to)  leap  down. 

3.  cum  quaepiam  c6hors  impgtum  fec6rat,  hostes  rgfiigie- 

bant,  whenever  any  cohort  (had  made)  made  an  attack,  the 
enemy  retreated. 
Obs.   For  Temporal  Clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  351. 


EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Caesar,  cum  primum  pabuli  copia  esse  inciperet,  ad 
exercitum  venit.  2.  Legati  Ciceronem,  cum  Romae  essent, 
audiebant.  3.  Diu  cum  esset  pugnatum/  impedimentis ^ 
castrisque  nostri  potiti  sunt.  4.  Haec  cum  flens  a  Caesare 
peteret,  Caesar  ejus  dextram  prendit.  5.  Postquam  copias 
venire  vidit,  flumen  exercitum  traducere  maturavit.  6.  Simul 
atque  sTgna  nostra  viderunt,  portas  aperuerunt. 

Supplementary  Exercises :  — 

1.  Caesar  dum  reliquae  naves  convenirent,^  ad  lioram 
nonam  exspectavit.  2.  Nee  prius'*  sunt  visl  quam  castrTs 
appropinquarent.  3.  Milites  ciipide  exspectabant,  dum  dux 
se  e  castris  contra  hostes  educeret.     4,   Donee  te  vidisset, 


332  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

noluit  abire  puer.^     5.   Donee  te  viderat,  noluit  abire  piier. 

6.  Non  exspectandum  "^  sibi^  statuit  dum  in  Santones  HelvetiT 
pervenirent.  7.  Turn,  cum  res  magnas  permulti  amiserant, 
Romae  fides  cecidit.  8.  Caesar  priusquam  eodem  est  pro- 
fectus,  iQna  visa  est.  9.  Eo  postquam  Caesar  pervenit 
obsides,  arma,  servos^  poposcit.^ 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  When  I  was  at  Athens,  I  heard  Zeno.  2.  When  ambas- 
sadors came  to  Caisar,  he  demanded  corn.  3.  When  they 
had  advanced  three  days,  the  enemy  appeared.  4.  Caesar 
determined  not  to  wait  until  the  enemy  should  arrive. 
5.  After  Caesar  perceived  that,  he  led  his  forces  to  the 
nearest  hill.  6.  The  boy  was  unwilling  to  depart  until  he 
had  seen  you  (i.e.  he  waited  for  the  purpose  of  seeing  you). 

7.  While  the  senate  was  preparing  war  against  Caesar,  he 
made  himself  dictator.  8.  Before  Caesar  attempted  any- 
thing, he  calls  Divitiacus  to  himself.  9.  I  waited  until  he 
came. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  When  the  battle  had  been  gohuj  on  for  a  long  time. 

2.  Why  ablative  ? 

3.  Account  for  the  mode;  the  subjunctive  is  common  with  expecto. 

4.  See  337.  2.  Obs. 

5.  The  subjunctive  in  this  sentence  shows  that  the  boy  waited  for 
the  purpose  of  seeing  you,  i.e.  he  intended  to  see  you ;  the  next  sentence 
implies  only  that  he  did  see  you,  without  implying  an  intention. 

6.  Supply  esse. 

7.  Why  dative  ? 

8.  Note  that  when  several  nouns  follow  each  other  in  the  same  con- 
struction, the  Latin  differs  from  the  English  either  in  omitting  the 
conjunction  altogether  or  in  repeating  it  after  each  word,  e.g.  either 
obsides,  arma,  servos,  or  obsides  et  arma  et  servos;  not 
obsides,  arma,  et  servos,  as  in  English. 

9.  See  178.  2. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  333 

Mention  the  three  chief  uses  of  cum.  When  does  cum  temporal 
take  the  subjunctive  ?  Give  the  meanings  and  uses  of  dum.  Give 
the  meanings  of  cum.  What  mode  is  used  with  most  of  the  particles 
of  time  1  When  do  antSquami  and  priusquam  take  the  subjunctive  ? 
When  the  temporal  clause  refers  to  future  time,  what  mode  is  used 
after  cum?  after  antgquam?  When  the  temporal  clause  intro- 
duced by  cum  contains  the  main  statement,  what  mode  is  used? 
Which  are  correct :  cum  est,  cum  f  uit,  cum  6rat,  cum  f ufirit,  cum 
mdnebat  ? 


8.    SUBSTANTIVE   CLAUSES. 

Obs.  a  clause  may  perform  many  of  the  offices  of  a  noun,  and 
is,  therefore,  called  a  noun,  or  substantive,  clause. 

That  glass  is  malleable  was  known  to  the  ancients.  The  de- 
pendent clause,  that  glass  is  malleable,  is  equivalent  to  a 
noun,  and  is  the  subject  of  was. 

We  perceive  that  fire  is  hot.  The  dependent  clause  in  this 
sentence  is  the  object  of  the  verb  perceive. 

A  peculiarity  of  the  English  is,  that  it  has  so  many  borrowed 
WORDS.  The  clause  introduced  by  that  is  equivalent  to  a 
noun  standing  in  the  predicate  after  is ;  the  clause  is,  there- 
fore, an  attributive  complement  explanatory  of  peculiarity. 

It  is  known  that  C^sar  conquered  Gaul.  It  has  no  meaning 
until  explained  by  the  clause  introduced  by  that,  which  is 
equivalent  to  a  noun,  and  is,  therefore,  in  apposition  with  it, 
i.e.  explanatory  of  it. 

I  know  nothing  about  what  you  are  asking.  The  clause  what 
you  are  asking  is  the  object  of  about.  In  English,  what  is  at 
once  interrogative  (as  in  the  sentence  above)  and  introduces 
substantive  clauses  ;  or  it  is  a  compound  relative  (correspond- 
ing to  qui,  quae,  quod),  and  introduces  adjective  clauses. 

Hence  — 

341.  A  Substantive  Clause  is  one  which,  like  a  noun, 
is  the  subject  or  object  or  complement  of  a  verb,  or 
is  used  as  an  explanatory  modifier  of  the  subject  or 
object. 


334  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

342.    Substantive  Clauses  may  be  classified  as  follows  :  — 

INFINITIVE    CLAUSES. 

1.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  of 
esse  or  of  impersonal  verbs,  and  as  the  object  of  the  following :  — 

(1)  Verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  knowing,  perceiving,  and  (for  In- 
direct Discourse,  see  348)  equivalent  expressions. 

(2)  Verbs  of  wishing  and  willing,  pejinitting,  commanding,  and 
forhidding  (most  of  commanding  and  forhidding,  except  jiibeo  and 
v6to,  are  followed  by  ut  or  ne  with  the  subjunctive). 

(3)  Verbs  of  emotioji  (joy,  sorrow,  etc.),  and  also  verbs  of  hoping, 
promising,  threatening,  sivearing  (these  verbs  are  sometimes  followed 
by  the  complementary  infinitive,  see  256). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  dicit  montem  ab  hostibus  teneri,  he  sags  that  the  mountain 

is  held  by  the  enemy. 

2.  dulce  pro  patria  mdri  est,  to  die  for  one's  country  is  sweet. 

3.  Caesar  prdficisci  maturat,  Ccesar  hastens  to  depart. 

4.  dicltur  montem  tSngri,  it  is  said  that  the  mountain  is  held. 

Obs.  1.  In  the  foregoing  examples  the  pupil  will  notice  that 
the  infinitive  is  used  as  subject  (Ex.  2)  or  as  object  (Ex.  3),  or 
that  the  infinitive  with  a  subject  accusative  is  the  subject  or  object 
of  the  verb.  Substantive  clauses  have  their  verbs  in  the  infinitive  or 
subjunctive  mode,  with  a  subject  of  infinitive  in  the  accusative  case. 

Obs.  2.  All  substantive  clauses  are  regarded  as  of  the  neuter 
gender.  The  tense  of  the  verb  in  the  infinitive  clause  is  determined 
by  the  mle  in  319. 

FINAL    CLAUSES. 

2.  Final  Clauses  are  object  clauses  after  verbs  of  fearing,  and 
after  verbs  of  asking,  allowing,  etc.     See  321.  2. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  nititur  ut  vincat,  he  strives  to  conquer  (lit.  that  he  may  conquer). 

2.  timeo  ut  ISbores  sustineas,  /  fear  (that)  you  will  not  endure 

the  labors. 

3.  non  vgreor,  nS  non  vSnias,  /  do  not  fear  (that)  you  will  not 

come. 

4.  vgreor  ne  eat,  I  fear  (that)  he  will  go. 

Obs.  1.  The  clause  of  purpose  may  be  translated  by  that  with 
may,  might,  shall,  or  should,  or  by  the  infinitive. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  335 

Obs.  2.  After  negative  clauses,  ne  non  is  regularly  used  instead 
of  ut  (see  Ex.  3). 

CONSECUTIVE    CLAUSES. 

3.  Consecutive  Clauses  are  used  as  the  subject,  object,  or  ex- 
planatory appositive  with  many  impersonal  verbs  (it  happens,  it 
rejimim,  it  follows,  it  is  lawful,  etc.)  ;  with  ut  after  fScgre  and  effi- 
cgre ;  with  quin  (after  some  verbs  of  hindering  and  the  like),  and 
especially  after  verbs  of  doubting,  when  a  negative  precedes ;  and 
with  tantum  Sbest  (ut),  so  far  it  is  from. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  ita  fit  ut  nemo  esse  possit  beatus  (as  subject),  .so  it  comes 

to  jyass  that  no  man  can  be  happy. 

2.  quae  res,  commeatus  ut  portari  possent,  efficiebat  (as 

object),  this  movement  rendered  it  possible  (brought  it  about) 
that  supplies  could  be  brought. 

3.  accidit  ut  esset  plena  luna  (as  subject),  it  chanced  to  be  full 

moon. 

4.  fScgre  non  p6tui  quin  sententiam  dictarem,  /  could  not 

but  declare  my  opinion. 

5.  hSbet  hoc  virtus  ut  deleotet  (as  appositive),  virtue  has  this 

(advantage),  that  it  delights. 

Obs.  The  clause  of  result  is  generally  translated  by  that,  with  or 
without  can  or  could,  sometimes  by  the  infinitive  or  the  participial 
noun  in  -ing,  especially  after  verbs  of  hindering. 

INDICATIVE  WITH   QUOD. 

4.  Indicative  Clauses  with  quod  introduce  a  statement  of  fact, 
specification,  or  object  of  feeling. 

Obs.  The  quod-clause  may  be  the  subject  of  impersonal  verbs, 
the  object  of  verbs  of  emotion  (see  342.  3),  or  an  explanatory  apposi- 
tive. It  is  generally  translated  by  that,  or  the  f act-that ;  sometimes 
by  whereas. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  quod  Regiilus  rgdiit  mirabile  videtur,  the  fact  that  Regulus 

returned  seems  strange. 

2.  quod  de  d6m6  scribis,   as  to  ivhat  you  write  of  the  house 

(specification). 

3.  gaudemus  quod  civitates  sua  jura  hSbent,  ice  are  glad  that 

the  states  have  their  just  rights  (object  of  feeling). 

4.  magnum  est  bSngfioium  naturae  quod  ngcesse  est  m6ri, 

it  is  a  great  boon  of  nature  that  we  must  die  (appositive). 


336  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

Obs.  The  pupil  should  note  that,  when  the  conjunction  that 
introduces  a  clause  denoting  puiyose  or  result,  it  takes  the  subjunc- 
tive, according  to  321,  or  322 ;  but  otherwise  it  is  usually  the  sign 
of  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  (see  342.  1  and  254).  That  is 
to  be  rendered  by  quod  when  it  introduces  a  substantive  clause 
that  contains  the  ground  or  reason,  or  that  is  the  object  of  some 
verb  of  emotion  or  feeling  (accusative  and  infinitive  may  also  be 
used). 

INDIRECT   QUESTIONS. 

5.  Indirect  Questions  are  clauses  (introduced  by  some  interroga- 
tive word),  which  are  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb,  or  which 
depend  on  verbs  expressing  doubt  or  uncertainty. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  scio  quid  quaer3.s,  I  know  what  you  are  asking  (object). 

2.  quid  dies  fgrat  incertum  est,  ichat  a  day  will  bring  forth  is 

uncertain  (subject). 

3.  diibito  an  ponam,  /  douht  whether  I  should  not  place,  i.e.  /  am 

inclined  to  think,  etc. 

(1)  After  verbs  of  trial,  an  indirect  question  is  introduced  by 
81  in  the  sense  of  whether. 

EXAMPLE. 

circumfunduntur  hostSs  si  quern  aditum  rgpgrire  possint, 

the  enemy  pour  round  (to  see)  if  they  can  find  an  entrance. 

Obs.  1.  Diibito  may  also  be  followed  by  quin  with  the  subjunc- 
tive if  the  sentence  is  negative  ;  but,  if  there  is  no  negative,  it  is 
followed  by  indirect  question ;  and,  when  it  means  to  hesitate,  by 
the  infinitive. 

Obs.  2.  Note  the  difference  in  meaning  between  Ex.  1  and  scio 
quod  quaeris,  /  know  what  (=  the  thing  which)  yon  ask,  i.e.  the 
answer  to  the  question  you  ask.  In  Ex.  1,  quid  is  an  interrogative 
pronoun  ;  in  the  other  example,  quod  is  a  relative. 

Syn.  Placet,  it  pleases,  i.e.  it  is  one's  will  or  determination;  libet 
(liibet),  it  pleases,  i.e.  it  agrees  with  one's  inclination. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Milites  pontem  facere  jussT  sunt.  2.  Ego  bonus  esse 
dicor.  3.  Caesar  milites  hortatus  est,  ut  acriter  dimicarent. 
4.  Caesar  jussit  milites  castra  munire.  5.  Caesar  vetuit 
milites  pontem  reseindere.      6.   Sapiens  semper  beatus  sit^ 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  337 

necesse  est.  7.  Sol  efficit  ut  omnia  floreaiit.  8.  Onines 
cTves  metuebant,  ne  urbs  ab  hostibus  expugnaretur.  9.  Pla- 
cuit  ei  ut  ad  Ariovistum  legatos  mitteret.  10.  Nunquam 
putavi  fore^  ut  supplex  ad  te  venirem.  11.  Sentimus 
nivem  esse  albam.     12.  Gaudeo  quod  vales. 

NOTES    AND    QUESTIONS. 

1.  The  particle  ut  is  often  omitted,  especially  after  verbs  of  wishing 
(v61o,  nolo,  nialo,  and  fScio),  necessity,  etc.;  also  after  die  and  fac. 

2.  That  it  would  happen.  When  there  is  no  supine,  f6re  ut  (or 
fiiturum  esse  ut)  is  used  for  the  future  infinitive;  the  clause  with  ut 
is  the  subject  of  f6re. 

What  is  a  clause  ?  How  are  clauses  classified  ?  What  is  an  inde- 
pendent clause  ?  A  dependent  clause  '^  How  are  dependent  clauses 
classified  1  Define  each.  Express  in  Latin  to  die  for  one's  country  is 
noble.  With  what  does  noble  agree  ?  What  gender  must  it  be  ?  What 
is  the  gender  of  all  substantive  clauses  ? 


9.    INTERROGATIVE   CLAUSES. 

Obs.  Questions  are  of  two  kinds:  (1)  Fact-Questions,  or 
those  that  ask  about  the  existence  of  a  fact,  and  expect  the  ansv^^er 
yes  or  no:  as,  scribitne  pSter,  is  my  father  ivriting?  Ans.  yes  or  no. 
Such  questions  (unless  rhetorical)  are  generally  asked  by  the  help 
of  one  of  the  interrogative  particles,  -ne,  nonne,  num.  (2)  Word- 
Questions,  or  those  that  ask  about  something  connected  with  a 
fact,  as  who,  what,  where,  when,  hoiv,  why,  etc.,  and  they  cannot  be 
answered  by  yes  or  no :  as,  quis  has  littgras  scripsit,  who  rorote 
this  letter^   Ans.  Cicero,    cur  non  discedis,  why  do  you  not  depart"^ 

Rhetorical  Questions, 

Obs.  Questions  may  be  real  or  they  may  be  rhetorical.  A  real 
question  expects  an  answer;  as.  Who  is  calling?  Ans.  John.  A 
rhetorical  question  does  not  expect  an  answer,  but,  under  the 
guise  of  a  question,  contains  an  assertion,  put  for  oratorical  effect 
in  the  form  of  a  question  ;  as,  What  is  baser  than  a  lie  ?  This  is 
a  rhetorical  question,  expecting  no  answer,  but  conveying  the 
idea  that  nothing  is  baser  than  to  lie.  Sometimes  no  interrogative 
word  is  used  in  asking  a  question.  Tn  such  cases  an  affirmative 
question  generally  expects  a  negative  answer ;  a  negative  question, 
an  affirmative  answer.  The  omission  of  the  interrogative  word  is 
common  in  rhetorical  questions  (especially  with  negatives)  express- 
ing surprise,  irony,  impatience,  etc.;  p^tere  tua  consilia  non  sentis, 
do  you  not  see  {you  must  surely)  that  your  designs  are  laid  bare  ? 


338  FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

Direct  simple  questions  generally  take  the  indicative ;  but  direct 
simple  questions  that  ask  what  is  to  he  done,  when  it  is  intended  to 
imply  that  some  such  an  answer  as  nothing,  nowhere,  etc.,  is  expected, 
take  the  subjunctive  (278.  1.3);  as, 

1.  quid  Sgam,  v:hat  am  I  to  do? 

2.  quis  hoc  diibitet,  7vho  could  doubt  this  ?  (rhetorical  question) 

=  nemo  hoc  diibitet,  no  one  could  douht  it. 
Hence  the  rule :  — 

DIRECT    QUESTIONS. 

343.  Direct  Simple  Questions  are  generally  introduced 
by  interrogative  words,  and,  as  a  rule,  take  their  verbs 
in  the  indicative. 

344.  Direct  Simple  Questions  may  take  the  subjunctive 
when  they  express  douht ^  deHheratlon^  or  impossibility^ 
or  imply  a  negative  opinion  on  the  part  of  the  speaker 
or  writer  (278.  1.  3). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Romamne  vgnies,  will  you  come  to  Rome?    (Ans.  yes  or  no.') 

2.  quisnam  in  horto  ambtilat,  who  is  walking  in  the  garden  ? 

(Axs.  Casar.) 
8.  quis    paupertatem    non    extimescit,   irho    does   not   dread 
porerty  ? 

4.  quid  hoc  hSmine  fScias,  what  can  one  (yon)  do  with  this  man? 

(Ans.  nothing.) 

5.  quis  hoc  cr§dat,  vjho  would  believe  this?    (Axs.  no  one.) 

Double  Questions, 

Obs.  Fact-Questions  may  consist  of  two  parts,  i.e.  they  may  be 
disjunctive  (or  double);  as,  is  it  this  or  is  it  that?  The  first  membei- 
of  a  double  question  is  introduced  by  the  particles  utrum  or  -ne, 
and  the  second  by  an  (anne  or  -ne)  ;  as,  utrum  ea  vestra  an 
nostra  culpa  est,  is  that  your  fault  or  ours  ?  Occasionally  the  inter- 
rogative particle  is  omitted  with  the  first  member;  as,  el6quar 
an  sileam,  must  I  speak  or  be  silent?  I'he  following  exhibits  the 
various  forms  of  double  questions  :  — 

quaere  utrum  verum  an  falsum  sit,  ^ 

quaere  verum-ne  an  falsum  sit,  I  /  ask  ichether  it  is 

quaero  verum  an  falsum  sit,  !       u-ue  or  false. 

quaere  verum  falsum-ne  sit,  J 

The  principle  may  be  stated  in  the  following  rule  :  — 


SUBJITNCTIVE   TN   DEPENDENT   CLAUSP:S.  339 

345.  Direct  Double  Questions  take  the  same  mode  as 
simple  questions,  and  are  introduced  by  utrum  or  -ne, 
whether,  in  the  first  member,  followed  by  an,  anne,  or ; 
annon,  necne,  or  not,  in  the  second. 

EXAMPLE. 

utrum  puSri  Iggunt  an  scribunt,  are  the  boys  reading  or  writing  ? 

Indirect  Questions. 

Obs.  Interrogative  sentences  are  further  divided  into  direct  and 
indirect  (or  independent  and  dependent).  Who  calls  me  f  is  a  direct 
question,  i.e.  it  is  a  simple  independent  interrogative  sentence. 
Such  sentences,  as  a  rule,  take  the  indicative  or  the  deliberative 
subjunctive  (see  278. 1.  3).  He  asks  ivho  is  calling  him  is  an  indirect 
question  ;  i.e.  the  simple  interrogative  sentence,  ivho  is  calling  him, 
is  made  to  depend  on  the  verb  asks,  and  becomes  a  dependent 
clause ;  the  verb  is  calling  is,  in  Latin,  in  the  subjunctive  mode. 
Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 

INDIRECT    QUESTIONS. 

346.  Rule  LXII.  —  Indirect  Questions  take  their 
verbs  in  the  subjunctive,  the  tense  being  determined 
by  the  regular  rule  for  sequence  of  tenses  (see  319). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  quis  me  v6cat,  rvho  is  calling  me  .^     (Direct.) 

2.  rSgat  quis  se  v6cet,  he  asks  who  is  calling  him.     (Indirect.) 

Primary  Tenses  —  Subjunctive. 

rSgat,  he  asks,  \  ^"^^  ^^  ^^°®*'  '^^'^  '''  ^^^^^'^^^  ^'''''^ 

rSgabit,  he  ivill  ask,  ^^f ,  «^    vScavgrit  _  who   has 

i      called,  or  tvho  called  him.    quis 


rogavit,  he  has  asked, 
r6gavSrit,  he  will  hai^e  asked. 


I      se  v6caturus  sit,  who  is  going 
[     to  call  him. 


Secondary  Tenses —  f  quis  se  v6caret,  rcho  was  calling 

rSgabat,  he  was  asking,  \      ^'""-    <l^is  se  vScavisset,  who 

rSgavit  (aorist),  he  asked,       j      ^'^d  called  him.     quis  se  v6ca- 
r6gaverat,  he  had  asked,  I      ^^^^^   esset,  who  icas  going  to 

I      call  him  f 

Obs.  1.  Sometimes  the  interrogative  word  is  omitted  in  the  first 
clause ;  in  direct  questions  annon  is  generally  used ;  in  indirect, 
necne ;  num  in  indirect  questions  means  whether. 


340  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

Obs.  2.  The  particle  an  is  used  after  such  phrases  as  nescio, 
haud  scio,  diibito  an,  in  the  sense  /  do  not  know  but,  I  doubt  but, 
i.e.  /  am  inclined  to  think ;  as,  haud  scio  an  ita  sit,  /  do  not  knoiv 
hut  it  is  so.  The  forms  of  the  interrogative  quis,  and  qui,  combine 
with  nescio,  and  are  equivalent  to  an  indefinite  pronoun ;  as, 
nescio  quis,  somebody  or  other ;  the  verb  is  in  the  indicative. 

DEPENDENT    DOUBLE    QUESTION. 
EXAMPLES. 

1.  pugri   utrum    Iggant    an    scribant    nescio,    /  don't    knoiv 

whether  the  boys  are  reading  or  writing. 

2.  utrum  ISgat  necne  nescio,  /  douH  know  ivhether  he  is  reading 

or  not. 

Obs.  1.  Note  that  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  questions  is  trans- 
lated by  the  indicative,  because  it  stands  for  the  indicative.  Note, 
also,  that  the  indirect  question  is  always  a  dependent  clause  inti-o- 
duced  by  some  interrogative  word  which  connects  it  with  the 
preceding  clause. 

Obs.  2.  If  the  direct  question  had  its  verb  in  the  subjunctive, 
no  change  is  made  on  becoming  indirect  (except  the  tense  of  the 
leading  verb  nmst  be  in  a  secondary  tense  if  it  is  required  by  the 
sequence  of  tenses)  ;  but  the  difference  must  be  shown  by  the  Eng- 
lish rendering:  thus,  (1)  quid  Sgimus,  what  are  ire  doing f  and 
(2)  quid  Sg^mus,  uihat  are  we  to  do  .^  become  alike  in  the  indirect 
form,  —  non  sStis  constabat  quid  &g6rent,  they  did  not  rightly 
know  (1)  what  they  were  doing,  or  (2)  ichat  they  were  to  do. 

Questions  and  Answers, 

Obs.  There  is  no  one  word  in  Latin  meaning  simply  yes  and  no. 
In  answering  a  question  the  verb  is  generally  repeated ;  as,  estne 
tib!  penna,  have  you  a  pen  f  tlie  answer  would  be  est  mihi  penna, 
/  have  a  pen:  or  simply  est.  Sometimes  adverbs  are  used  in 
answer  to  a  direct  question ;  as,  6tiam,  ita,  sic,  verum,  vero, 
recte,  certe,  sanS,  etc.,  —  haecine  tua  dSmus  est?  ita,  is  this 
your  house '^  yes ;  dasne  hoc?  do  sane,  do  you  admit  this?  yes  I  do 
indeed.  No  may  be  expressed  by  repeating  the  verb  with  a  nega- 
tive, or  by  non,  non  vero,  non  ita,  minime,  by  no  means,  immo  or 
imo,  7jes  indeed,  nay  rather,  etc. ;  as,  non  irata  es  ?  non  sum  irata, 
you  are  not  angry  ?  I  am  not.  In  answer  to  a  double  question,  one 
member  of  the  alternative  must  be  repeated ;  as,  tune  an  frater 
6rat,  was  it  you  or  your  brother  ?  ego  (gram),  it  loas  I.  Hence  the 
following  rule :  — 

347.  In  answering  a  question  in  Latin,  either  the 
verb,  with  or  without  a  negative,  is  repeated  for  the 


SUBJUNCTIVE   IN    DEPENDENT  CLAUSES.  341 

words  YES  or  no  ;    or  an  intensive  or  negative  parti- 
cle is  used,  with  or  without  the  repetition  of  the  verb. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English  :  — 

1.  Fuistine  heri  in  schola  ?  2.  Die  fuerisne  heri  in 
schola?  3.  Quaerit  num  Caesar  in  urbe  sit.  4.  Num  ita 
audes  dicere?  5.  Utrum  unus  an  plures  sunt  mundi  ? 
6.  Quaeritur  utrum  unus  an  plures  sint  mundi?  7.  Utrum 
Cato  an  Caesar  tibi  praestantior  et  clarior  vir  esse  videtur? 

8.  Caesar  jussit  eos  specular!  num  hostes  ex  castris  exirent. 

9.  Quaeritur    di!  utrum    sint,   necne.       10.    Isne   est  quem 

quaero,   annon?     11.   Num  dubium   est  casune   an   consilio 

factus  sitmundus?     12.  Cujus  hie  liber  est?  tuusne?    Non, 

sed    fratris.        13.    Utrum    vestra    an    nostra    culpa    est  ? 

14.  Causa  igitur  non  bona  est?  immo  optima.     15.  Quisnam 

in  horto  ambulat?     16.  Nescio  quis  in  horto  ambulat. 

Syn.  Orbis  terrarum,  rather  than  terra,  when  there  is  decided 
reference  to  other  lands. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Is  Caesar  in  the  city?  2.  He  inquires  whether  Caesar 
is  in  the  city.  3.  Who  is  walking  in  the  garden?  4.  He 
asks  who  is  walking  in  the  garden.  5.  Is  it  true  or  false? 
6.  He  asks  whether  it  is  true  or  false.  7.  Did  Caesar  come 
into  the  senate  yesterday?  No.  8.  Is  this  3'our  book  or 
mine?  It  is  mine.  9.  Are  you  reading  or  writing?  10.  He 
asks  whether  you  are  reading  or  writing. 

NOTKS     AND     QUESTIONS. 

How  may  simple  questions  be  classified  ?  {Ans.  Fact-questions  and 
word-questions.)  How  many  kinds  of  word-questions?  What  is  a 
double  question  ?  How  is  a  direct  simple  question  asked  ?  Mention 
the  most  common  interrogative  words.  What  is  an  indirect  question  ? 
How  is  it  asked  ?  What  is  the  mode  of  the  verb  in  indirect  questions  ? 
AVhat  is  a  rhetorical  question  ?  How  is  a  question  in  Latin  answered  ? 
How  is  a  double  question  answered  ? 


342  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 


LESSON  XCVIII. 

INDIEEOT    DISCOURSE. 

Obs.  1.  Direct  Discourse  (oratio  recta)  gives  the  exact  words  of 
the  speaker  or  writer ;  as,  Arionistus  said,  "I  have  crossed  the 
Rhine  "  =  Lat.  Ariovistus  dixit,  "Rhenum  transii."  The  words 
/  have  crossed  the  Rhine  are  in  direct  discourse ;  the  original  speaker 
is  represented  by  the  narrator  as  speaking  in  the  first  person  (be- 
cause the  speaker  refers  to  himself),  and  the  words  are  given  pre- 
cisely as  they  were  uttered.  Indirect  Discourse  (oratio  obliqua) 
uses  the  same  words,  except  that  some  are  changed  to  conform  to 
the  construction  of  the  sentence  in  which  they  are  quoted.  These 
changes  aifect  only  the  pronouns,  pronondnal  adverbs,  modes,  and 
tenses  (but  not  always  all  of  these)  ;  hh,  Ariovistus  said  that  he 
HAD  CROSSED  THE  Rhine  =  Lat.  Ariovistus  dixit  se  Rhenum 
transisse.  The  original  words,  /  have  crossed  the  Rhine,  have  been 
changed  to  that  he  had  crossed  the  Rhine,  to  indicate  the  change  of 
relation  in  the  speaker ;  the  first  person  in  English  is  changed  to 
the  third,  and  the  perfect  tense  to  pluperfect,  and,  in  Latin,  the  in- 
dicative to  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  which  together  form 
an  infinitive  substantive  clause,  the  object  of  the  leading  verb  dixit. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  a.  rgx  urbem  oppugnat,  the  king  assaults  the  city. 

a.  dux  dicit,  "  rex  urbem  oppugnat,"  the  leader  says,  "  The 

king  is  assaulting  the  city." 

b.  dux  dicit  regem  urbem  oppugnare,  the  leader  says  that 

the  king  is  assatdting  the  city. 

2.  a.  scribit,  he  writes. 

b.  dicit  sg  scribSre,  he  says  that  he  is  (now)  writing. 

3.  a.  nos  pSrati  siimus,  tee  are  ready. 

b.  se  pS.rat6a  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  they  thought  that  they  ivere 
ready. 

4.  a.  sunt  nonnulli  quorum  auctoritas  Spud  plebem  pluri- 

mum  v&let,  there  are  some  whose  injluetice  prevails  most 
with  the  common  people. 
b.  Liscus  dicit  esse  nonnullos  quorum  auctoritas  Spud 
plebem  plurimum  vSleat,   Liscus  says  that  there  are 
some  whose  influence  prevails  most  with  the  common  people. 

Obs.  2.  In  the  foregoing  examples  marked  a,  note  that  each  gives 
the  exact  words  of  the  original  speaker  or  writer,  and  is,  therefore, 
in  Direct  Discourse ;  note,  also,  that  each  sentence  marked  a  is  a 
declarative  sentence,  and  that  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  indicative. 


INDIKECT    DISCO  UKSE.  343 

Note  further,  that,  in  the  corresponding  examples  of  Indirect  Dis- 
course, marked  b,  the  nominative  has  been  changed  to  the  accusa- 
tive, the  indicative  has  been  changed  to  the  infinitive,  and  the 
personal  pronoun  nos  (Ex.  3)  has  been  changed  to  the  reflexive 
se.  Jn  Ex.  2.  a.  the  subject  is  not  expressed,  but  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course the  subject  must  (as  a  rule)  be  expressed.  Note  finally,  that 
vSlet  in  the  dependent  clause,  in  Ex.  4,  has  been  changed  to  the 
subjunctive  vSleat,  in  order  to  show  the  difference  of  relation,  i.e.  to 
relieve  the  quoter  of  undue  responsibility.  If  we  again  examine  the 
sentences  in  the  foregoing  examples,  after  their  change  to  Indirect 
Discourse,  we  shall  notice  that  they  differ  from  those  in  Direct  Dis- 
course partly  in  the  use  of  different  modes  and  tenses,  and  partly 
in  the  use  of  different  pronouns.    Hence  the  following  rules  :  — 

indirp:ct  discourse. 
348.    Rule  LXIII.  —  In  passing  from  Direct  to  In- 
€lirect  Discourse,  principal  clauses,  if  declarative,  are 
changed  to  the  infinitive  with  a  subject  accusative, 
and  subordinate  clauses  to  the  subjunctive. 

EXAMPL,KS. 

1.  a.  Caesar  in  Galliam  venit. 

b.  Caesarem  fgrunt  in  Galliam  venisse. 

2.  a.  mons  tSnetur. 

b.  nuntius  dicit  montem  teneri. 

3.  a.  scientia  utilis  est. 

/;.  utilem  arbitror  esse  scientiam. 

4.  a.  obsides    quos    ab    Aeduis    hSbeo,   inquit   Ariovistus, 

non  reddam. 
b.  Ariovistus  respondit  se  obsides  quos  ab  Aeduis  ha- 
beret  non  redditurum  esse. 

Supplementary  Examples  :  — 

DIRECT  DISCOURSE.  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE. 


SI  pacem  popillus  Romanus 
cum  Ilelvetiis  fS.ciet,  in  eam 
partem  ibunt  atque  ibi  erunt 
Helvetii  iibi  tu  eos  constituSris 
atque  esse  v61u6ris ;  sin  bello 
persequi  persgverabis,  rgmini- 
soSre  et  veteris  incommodi  p6- 
piili  RomanI  et  pristinae  virtlitis 
Helvetiorum. 


Si  pacem  popiilus  Romanus 
ciun  Helvctiis  faceret,  in  eam 
partem  ituros  atque  ibi  fiituros 
Helvctios,  iibi  eos  Caesar  con- 
stituisset  atque  esse  voluisset ; 
sin  bello  persequi  persgveraret, 
rgminiscSretur  et  veteris  in- 
commodi popiili  Romanl  et  pris- 
tinae virtlitis  Helvetiorum. 


344  FIRST    STEPS   IN    LATIN. 

Translation . 

Divico  treated  icith  Ccesar  as  folio  as 


If  the  Roman  people  shall  make 
peace  ivith  the  Helvetians,  the 
Helvetians  will  go  to  that  place 
and  •will  remain  there  where  you 
shall  have  determined  and  wished 
litem  to  he ;  hut  if  you  shall 
persist  in  following  them  icith  ivar, 
remember  the  ancient  disaster  of 
the  Roman  people  and  the  ancestral 
valor  of  the  Helvetians. 


If  the  Roman  peojyle  should 
make  peace  with  the  Helvetians, 
the  Helvetians  would  go  to  that 
place  and  remain  there  ichere 
Caesar  should  have  determined 
and  wished  them  to  he  :  hut  if  he 
should  persist  in  following  them 
icith  tear,  let  him  remember  the 
ancient  disaster  of  the  Roman 
people  and  the  ancestral  valor  of 
the  Helvetians. 

Obs.  1.  Xote  that,  in  passing  from  Direct  to  Indirect  Discourse, 
the  first  and  second  persons  of  pronouns  and  of  verbs  are  changed, 
when  the  sense  so  requires,  to  the  third  person.  Lt  all  cases,  the 
changes  of  pi'onouns  depend  on  sense  (354). 

Obs.  2.  The  report  in  Indirect  Discourse  may  be  made  either 
from  the  standpoint  of  the  speaker,  i.e.  as  if  the  speaker  reported  was 
still  speaking  (vivid  form),  or  from  the  standpoint  of  the  reporter, 
the  report  being  made  as  if  the  speech  was  a  matter  of  the  past. 

INFINITIVE    IN    INDIRECT    DISCOURSE. 

349.  The  Tenses  of  the  Infiiiitive  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course represent  tlie  time  of  the  action  as  preseiit.,  past^ 
or  future,  relatively  to  that  of  the  principal  verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  dicit  montem.  ab  hostibus  t6neri,  he  sags  that  the  mountain 

is  held  hy  the  enemy. 

2.  dixit  montem  ab  hostibus  tgneri,  he  said  that  the  mountain 

was  held  hy  the  enemy. 

Obs.  Note  that,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  the  leading  verbs 
dicit  and  dixit  have  as  an  object  a  clause  whose  verb  is  in  the 
infinitive,  and  whose  subject  is  in  the  accusative.  Note,  further, 
that  the  present  infinitive  is  translated  by  the  present  tense  after 
dicit,  and  by  a  piast  tense  after  dixit ;  i.e.  the  infinitives  denote  the 
same  time  as  the  verbs  on  which  they  depend.  Hence  we  observe 
that  these  infinitives  represent  the  time  of  the  action  not  as  present 
absolutely,  but  as  present  relatively  to  the  time  denoted  by  the 
principal  verb ;  i.e.  the  present  infinitive  expresses  contemporaneous 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE.  345 

action,  the  perfect  infinitive  prior  action,  and  the  future  infinitive 
future,  or  subsequent,  action. 

EXAMPI.ES. 
1.    CONTEMPORANEOUS  ACTION. 

dicit  se  scribSre,  he  says  that  he  is  (now)  writing. 

dicebat  se  scribgre,  he  was  saying  that  he  was  (then)  writing. 

dicet  se  scribgre,  he  will  say  that  he  is  (then  or  now)  writing. 

2.    PRIOR  ACTION. 

dicit  se  scripsisse,  he  says  that  he  wrote,  has  or  had  written,  or 

was  loriting. 
dicebat  se  scripsisse,  he  was  saying  that  he  tvrote,  had  written,  or 

was  (previously)  writing. 
dicet  fee  scripsisse,  he  will  say  that  he  has  (had  now  or  theii) 

written,  or  ivrote. 

3.    SUBSEQUENT  ACTION. 

dicit  se  scripturum  esse,  he  says  that  he  ivill  write. 

dicebat  se  scripturum  esse,  he  icas  saying  that  he  would  write, 

or  was  going  to  ivrite. 
dicet  se  scripturum  esse,  he  will  say  that  he  is  going  to  write  (note 

or  then). 
dicit  f 6re  (fiitiirum  esse)  ut  scribat,  he  says  that  (it  ivill  happen) 

he  icill  write  (then  or  now). 
dicebat  f6re  ut  scribSret,  he  ivas  saying  that  (it  icould  happeti) 

he  would  icrite  (then  or  now). 

Obs.  1.  The  perfect  infinitive  represents  in  Indirect  Discourse 
the  perfect,  the  aorist,  the  pluperfect,  and  the  imperfect  indicative. 
When  the  leading  verb  is  in  the  future,  the  infinitive  expresses  a 
double  relation,  —  (1)  to  the  time  of  asserting,  and  (2)  to  the  time 
of  the  action  asserted ;  as,  dicet  se  scribere,  he  will  say  (1)  that  he 
is  NOW  writing,  (2)  that  he  is  then  writing.,  i.e.  at  the  time  of  saying. 
The  future  infinitive  can  be  formed  only  from  verbs  that  have  a 
perfect  passive  participle.  The  want  of  it  is  supplied  by  the  use 
of  the  future  infinitive  of  sum  (f6re  or  fiitiirum  esse)  with  a 
consecutive  clause.  This  periphrase  sometimes  occurs  when  the 
regular  forms  might  be  used. 

Obs.  2.  In  Indirect  Discourse,  note  that  the  present  infinitive 
stands  for  the  present  indicative  (or  sometimes  for  the  imperfect, 
especially  after  mgmini) ;  and  that  the  perfect  infinitive  stands 
for  any  past  tense  of  the  indicative. 

Obs.  3.  With  verbs  of  hoping,  promising,  threatening,  and  the 
like,  the  Latin  idiom  differs  from  the  English  in  requiring  the  sub- 
ject to  be  (usually)  expressed ;  as,  sperat  sg  scripturum  esse,  he 
hopes  to  write  (lit.  he  hopes  that  he  ivill  ivrite). 


346  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

Obs.  4.  The  infinitive  is  said  to  stand,  in  Indirect  Discourse, 
and  its  tenses  to  correspond  to  those  of  the  finite  modes,  when  it 
depends  on  a  verb  implying  thought,  or  the  expression  of  thow/ht  ; 
thus,  ciipit  venire,  he  desires  to  come,  venire  is  not  in  Indirect 
Discourse,  but  is  really  a  noun,  the  object  of  cttpit.  But  in  dicit 
vgnire,  he  sai/s  he  is  cominf),  vSnire  represents  vgnio  (indicative) 
of  Direct  Discourse. 

Ojjs.  5.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse  must 
(as  a  rule)  be  expressed,  even  though  it  is  wanting  in  Direct  Dis- 
course :  as,  Clemens  sum ;  dicit  se  esse  clementem. 

TENSES    IN    INDIRECT    DISCOURSE. 

350.  Tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse  generally  conform 
to  the  ordinary  rules  for  the  use  of  tenses  in  the  Sub- 
junctive and  Infinitive,  as  determined  by  the  tense  of 
the  introductory  verb;  but  an  Aorist  (i.e.  a  Perfect) 
Infinitive  takes  the  sequence  of  past  tenses,  even  if  the 
introductory  verb  is  primary  (see  348.  2). 

Obs.  1.  Each  tense  in  Direct  Discourse  is  ordinarily  represented 
by  the  same  tense  in  Indirect  Discourse ;  but,  when  the  indicatives 
of  those  tenses  that  have  no  subjunctive  (viz.,  future  and  future 
perfect)  are  to  be  changed  to  the  subjunctive,  or  when  the  indica- 
tives of  those  tenses  that  have  no  infinitive  (viz.,  imperfect  and  plu- 
perfect) are  to  be  changed  to  the  infinitive,  on  passing  to  Indirect 
Discourse,  they  take  the  tense  nearest  them  in  time.     Thus  the  — 

Future  Indicative  becomes  Present  or  Imperfect  Subjunctive, 
according  to  sequence  of  tenses. 

Future  Perfect  Indicative  becomes  Perfect  or  Pluperfect  Sub- 
junctive, according  to  sequence  of  tenses. 

Imperfect  Indicative  ==  Perfect  Infinitive. 

Pluperfect  Indicative  =  Perfect  Infinitive. 

Future  Indicative  becomes  Future  Infinitive. 

Future  Perfect  Indicative  —  Future  Perfect  Infinitive. 

Obs.  2.  The  Historical  Present  is  often  treated  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course as  a  past  tense,  and  is  followed  by  a  past  tense  of  the 
subjunctive  in  the  dependent  clauses;  as,  Helvetii  legates  ad 
CaesSrem  mittunt,  qui  dicgrent,  the  Helvetians  sent  ambassadors 
to  CcBsar  {who  should  say,  i.e.)  to  saip 

Obs.  3.  For  the  sake  of  vividness,  a  past  tense  may  be  followed 
by  the  present  subjunctive;  as,  exitus  fuit  orationis,  neque 
vkcare  agros,  qui  dSri  possint,  the  close  of  the  oration  was,  that 
there  were  (ai^e)  not  lands  unoccupied  which  could  (can)  be  given. 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE. 


347 


SEQUENCE   OF    TENSES    AETEK   OTHER   MODES. 

1.  The  Imperative  and  tlie  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunc- 
tive have  the  sequences  of  primaiy  tenses  ;  the  Imperfect, 
Aorist,  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  have  the  sequences  of  the 
secondary,  or  historical,  tenses. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  praesta  quod  recepisti,  perform  what  you  kai:e  undertaken. 

2.  quid  me  pr6hiberet  Epicureum  esse,  si  prSbarem  quae 

ille  dicSret?  irhat  could  prevent  vie  from  being  an  Epicurean 
if  I  approved  what  he  said  (says) . 

SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES  AFTER  AN    INFINITIVE  OR  A  PARTICIPLE. 

2.  Wlien  a  subordinate  clause  depends  on  any  part  of  an 
infinite  verb  (Infinitive,  Participle,  Gerund,  Supine),  the 
tense  of  that  clause  is  determined  by  that  of  the  verb  on 
which  the  Infinite  verb  depends  (as  these  have  no  time  of 
their  own,  but  a  Perfect  Infinitive  or  Perfect  Participle  has 
the  sequence  of  past  tenses)  ;   as, 

ciipio  scire  quid  agas,  /  desire  to  know  what  you  are  doing. 
ciipiebain  scire  quid  Sggres,  I  ivas  desirous  to  know  ivhat  you 
were  doing. 

351.  The  following  table  presents  a  synopsis  of  the  chief 
Uses  of  the  Modes  in  Direct  and  Indirect  Discourse  :  — 


Clauses. 

Clauses. 

Direct 
Discourse. 

Indirect 
Discourse. 

Declarative     ] 
Interrogative  \ 
Imperative      \ 

Principal 

Subordinate 

Principal 

Subordinate 

Principal 

Subordinate 

Indicative  ^ 
Ind.  or  Subj. 
Indicative  ^ 
Ind.  or  Subj. 
Imperative  ^ 

Acc.  with  Inf. 

Subjunctive. 

Subj.  or  Inf. 2 

Subjunctive. 

Subjunctive. 

Subjunctive. 

Final 

Consecutive 

Conditional 

Concessive 

Comparative 

Temporal 

Causal 

Relative 

Subordinate 

Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Ind.  or  Subj. 
Ind.  or  Subj. 
Ind.  or  Subj. 
Ind.  or  Subj. 
Ind.  or  Subj. 
Ind.  or  Subj. 

Subjunctive. 
Subj.  or  Ind. 

348  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

Obs.  1.  When  the  principal  clause,  or  apodosis,  is  in  the  sub- 
junctive, as  in  Unreal  Conditions,  then  special  rules  are  required 
(see  355.  5). 

Obs.  2.  Interrogative  sentences  may  sometimes  have  their  verbs 
in  the  subjunctive,  as  in  Rhetorical  Questions  (344)  :  the  subjunc- 
tive is  either  retained  or  changed  to  mfinitive.  The  deliberative 
subjunctive  (278)  is  always  retained.  But  Rhetorical  Questions 
that  are  in  the  indicative  in  Direct  Discourse  are  changed  to  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse  if  the  subject  is 
of  the  first  or  third  person,  into  the  subjunctive  if  the  subject  is  of 
the  second  person  (see  356) . 

Obs.  3.  Imperative  clauses  may  have  their  verbs  in  the  subjunc- 
tive (278)  ;  the  subjunctive  is  then  retained  in  Indirect  Discourse. 

352.  The  Construction  of  Indirect  Discourse  is  used 
after  verbs  of  saying  and  thinkiyig  (declarative),  asking 
(interrogative),  commanding  (imperative). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Caesar  cognovit  Helvetios  castra  movisse,  Cccsar  learned 

that  the  Helvetians  had  broken  up  their  camp. 

2.  Caesar  oertior  factus  est  exercitum  venisse,  Cccsar  was 

informed  that  the  army  had  come. 


REFLEXIVE    PRONOUNS. 

353.  Reflexive  Pronouns,  sui  and  suus,  refer  primarily 
to  the  subject  of  the  clause  in  which  they  stand. 

1.  In  some  Subordinate  Clauses  the  Reflexive  must  be 
used  to  refer  either  to  the  subject  of  the  principal,  or  to  the 
subject  of  the  subordinate  clause  ;  but  this  happens  only 
when  reference  is  made  to  the  thought  or  will  of  the  subject 
in  the  leading  clause,  as  in  Infinitive  Clauses,  Final  Clauses, 
or  in  Indirect  Discourse  (Indirect  Questions). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  animus  sentit  se  vi  sua  mSveri,  the  mind  perceives  that  it  is 

moved  bj/  its  own  power. 

2.  quaesiverunt  num  se  esset  gtiam  mSri  pr6hibiturus,  they 

asked   lohether  he  was   going  to  (would)  prevent   them  from 
dying  too. 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE.  349 


riiONOUNS    IN    INDIUECT    DISCOURSE. 

354.  In  passing  from  Direct  Discourse  to  Indirect,  pronouns 
of  the  first  or  second  person  are  regularly  changed,  if  the  sense 
requires,  to  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  as  follows  :  — 

1.  Personal:  Sgo  (nos)  is  changed  to  forms  of  the  reflexive 
se  (sometimes  ipse)  ;  tu  is  changed  to  forms  of  ille  or  is. 

2.  Possessive  :  meus  (noster)  and  tuus  (vester)  are  changed 
to  forms  of  suus  (sometimes  genitive  of  ipse  or  of  is). 

3.  Demonstrative  :  •  ^^  f  are  changed  to  forms  of  ille  or  is ; 
nunc  is  changed  to  turn  and  tunc. 

4.  Intensive  :  ipse  may  be  retained,  and  then  refers  to  the 
principal  subject,  like  an  emphatic  reflexive. 

Ons.  Hence  we  have  two  reflexives  in  some  clauses,  referring 
to  (1)  leading  subject,  (2)  subject  of  the  infinitive. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  Direct  :  anniilum  6go  mea  mSnu  confeci,  /  have  wade  the 

ring  lolth  my  ovm  hand. 
Indirect  :  gloriatus  est  anntilum  se  sua  niS.nu  confecisse, 
he  boasted  that  he  had  made  the  ring  tvith  his  own  hand. 

2.  Direct  :    si  obsides  a  vobis  mihi   dabuntur,  vobiscum 

pacem  fSiciam,  if  hostages  shall  he  given  to  me  by  yoti,  I  will 
make  peace  with  you. 
Indirect  :  rgspondit,  si  obsides  ab  iis  sibi  dentur,  sese 
cum  iis  pacem  esse  factiirum,  he  rejdied  that  if  hostages 
shotdd  be  given  to  him  by  them,  he  loould  make  peace  with  them. 
?>.  cvLY  de  sua  virtute  aut  de  ipsius  diligentia  desperarent, 
why  (asked  he)  should  they  despair  of  their  own  courage  or  his 
diligence  ? 

Obs.  The  personal  pronoun  may,  of  course,  be  retained  in  In- 
direct Discourse  when  the  sense  requires  it ;  in  short,  all  changes  of 
pronouns  must  conform  to  the  sense. 

Example. 
Direct  :  quidvis  perpgtiar,  /  will  endure  anything. 
Indirect  :  adflrmavi  quidvis  me  perpessurum,  /  asserted 
that  I  would  endure  anything. 


350  FIRST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


CONDITIONAL    SENTENCES    IN     INDIRECT    DISCOURSE. 

355.  Conditional  Sentences,  in  passing  from  Direct  to 
Indirect  Discourse,  undergo  the  following  changes :  — 

1.  In  Simple  Coxditioxs  (326.  1)  the  apodosis  is  changed  to 
the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  (the  tenses  of  the  infinitive  being 
present,  past,  or  future,  according  as  the  tense  of  the  verb  in  the 
apodosis  is  present,  past,  or  future). 

2.  The  protasis  is  changed  to  the  subjunctive,  the  tense  being 
determined  by  the  leading  verb  of  saying,  etc. ;  but  an  aorist  {i.e. 
perfect)  infinitive  takes  the  sequence  of  past  tenses. 

EXAMPI.ES. 

o.  R.  SI  p^cuniam  hSbet,  dat. 

o.  o.  Presext  :  dicit  se,  si  pScuniam  hSbeat,  d^re. 

o.  o.  Past  :  dixit  se,  si  pgcuniam  hSberet,  d^re. 

o.  li.  SI  pgcuniam  hSbuit,  dSdit. 

o.  o.  dicit  se,  si  pgcuniam  hSberet,  dgdisse. 

3.  In  Future  Coxditioxs  (326.  2)  the  present  and  perfect 
subjunctive  (or  future  indicative)  of  the  apodosis  are  changed  to 
the  future  infinitive  (or  the  periphrase  fSre  ut,  etc.). 

4.  The  tenses  (present  and  perfect)  in  the  protasis  remain 
unchanged  if  the  leading  verb  of  saying  is  in  a  primary  tense; 
otherwise,  they  (present  and  perfect)  are  changed  respectively  to 
the  imperfect  and  pluperfect. 

EXAMPLES. 

o.  r.  si  p^cuniam  h^beat,  det. 

o.  o.  Present  :  dicit  se,  si  pgcuniara  hSbeat,  dSturum  esse. 

o.  o.  Past  :  dixit  se,  si  pgcuniam  h^beret,  d^turum  esse. 

5.  In  Unreal  Coxditioxs  (326.  3)  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect 
subjunctive  of  the  apodosis,  v^lien  active,  are  changed  respectively  t(j 
the  future  or  future  perfect  infinitive ;  tohen  passive,  these  tenses 
are  expressed  respectively  by  the  periphrases  ftiturum  esse  ut  or 
fiiturum  fuisse  ut,  with  the  imperfect  subjunctive.  This  peri- 
phrase must  be  used  in  the  active  when  the  verb  in  the  apodosis 
has  no  future  participle,  and  hence  no  future  infinitives. 

6.  The  tenses  in  the  protasis  remain  unchanged,  no  matter  what 
may  be  the  tense  of  the  leading  verb. 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.  351 

EXAMPLES. 

o.  R.  SI  pgcuniam  hSberet,  dSret. 

().  o.  dicit  or  dixit  se,  si  pScuniam  hSberet,  dSturum  esse. 

o.  K.  SI  pgcuniam  h^buisset,  dSdisset. 

0.  o.  dicit  or  dixit  se,  si  pgcuniam  hSbuisset,  dSturum  fuisse. 

Supplementary  Examples  :  — 

1.  a.  si  quid  Caesar  me  vult,  ilium  ad  me  vgnire  6portet,  if 

Ccesar  wishef!  anytliing  of  me,  he  ought  to  come  to  me. 
h.  respondit,  si  quid  Caesar  se  vSlit,  ilium  ad  se  vSnire 
6portere,  he  replied  that,  if  CUesar  wished  anything  of  him, 
he  ought  to  come  to  him. 

2.  a.  si  stipendium  rSmittatur,   libenter   recusem   (326.  2) 

pSpiili  Roman!  amicitiam,  if  the  tribute  is  {should  he) 
remitted,  I  would  gladly  renounce  the  friendship  of  the 
Roman  people ;  oy^ 

a.  SI   stipendium  remittatur,  libenter  rScusabo  (326.  2, 

Obs.  1)  pSpiili  Roman!  amicitiam,  if  the  tribute  is 
(shall  be)  remitted,  I  will  gladly  renounce  the  friendship  of 
the  Roman  people. 

b.  respondit,  s!  stipendium  remittatur,  libenter  sese  xh- 

cusatiirum  popiil!  Romani  amicitiam,  he  replied  that, 
if  the  tribute  should  be  remitted,  he  ivould  gladly  renoujice 
the  friendship  of  the  Roman  people. 

3.  a.  si  quid  mihi  a  Caesare  6pus  esset,  ad  eum  venissem, 

f  I  wanted  anything  from  Ccesar,  I  should  hare  come  to  him. 
h.  respondit,  si  quid  ipsi  (354.  Obs.)  a  CaesSre  Qpus  esset, 
sese   ad  eum  venturum  fuisse,  he   replied  that,   if  he 
wanted  anything  of  Ccesar,  he  would  have  come  to  him. 

INTERROGATIVE    SENTENCES    IN     INDIRECT    DISCOURSE. 
EXAMPLES. 

1.  a.  quid  de  praeda  faciendum  censetis,  what  do  you  think 

ought  to  be  done  in  regard  to  the  booty? 
b.  littSrSs  ad  sgnatum  misit,  quid  de  praeda  faciendum 
censerent,  he  wrote  to  the  senate  (asking)  rchat  they  Hiought 
ought  to  be  done  in  regard  to  the  booty. 

2.  rt.  quid  tibi  vis,  ?chat  do  you  7iiean  (wish  for  yourself)  ? 

b.  ad  postiilata  CaesSris  respondit,  quid  sibi  vellet,  to  the 
demands  of  Ccesar  he  replied,  vjhat  did  he  mean  ? 


352  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


3.  a.  num  rgcentium  injuriarum  mgmSriam  depongre  pos- 

sum, am  I  able  to  lay  aside  the  memory  of  recent  wroyigs  ? 
h.  respondit,  num  recentium  injuriarum  m6m6riam  de 
ponere  posse,  lie  replied,  could  he  lay  aside  the  memory 
of  recent  icrongs  f 

4.  a.  quid  vgremini,  aut  cur   de  vestra  virtute  desperatis, 

irltat  do  yonf-ar,  or  irhy  do  you  (hsjniir  of  your  ralor? 
h.  quid  vgrerentur  aut  cur  de  sua  virtute  desperarent, 
v'hat  did  they  far,  or  why  did  they  despair  of  their  valor? 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  those  marked  a  are  Direct 
Questions,  and  have  their  verbs  in  the  indicative  (see  343).  In 
the  corresponding  examples  of  Indirect  Discourse,  marked  h,  these 
verbs  have  been  changed  to  the  subjunctive  or  to  the  infinitive. 
Note  that  rhetorical  questions  (Exs.  3  and  4)  in  the  indicative  in 
Direct  Discourse  are  changed  to  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive 
in  Indirect  Discourse,  if  the  subject  is  first  or  third  person  (Ex.  3)  ; 
into  the  subjunctive,  if  the  subject  is  second  person  (Ex.  4).  Hence 
the  rule :  — 

356.  Interrogative  Sentences  general!}'  take  the  subjunc- 
tive, but  sometimes  (especially  when  rhetorical)  the  infinitive 
with  subject  accusative. 

0ns.  Subjunctive  Rhetorical  Questions  in  Direct  Discourse  (see 
344)  remain,  as  a  rule,  in  the  subjunctive  in  Indirect  Discourse. 
(Questions  of  Deliberation  (278)  always  retain  the  subjunctive. 

IMPERATIVE    SENTENCES    IN     INDIRECT    DISCOURSE. 
KXAMPI.KS. 

1.  a.  rgminiscSre  vgtgris  incommSdi  pSpiili  Romani,  remem- 

ber the  ancient  disaster  of  the  lloman  people. 
b.  r6minisc6rgtur  v6t6ris  incommSdi  p6piili  Romani,  let 

him  remember  (said  lie)  the  ancient  disaster  of  the  Roman 
people. 

2.  a.  cum  ISgione  vSnl,  come  icith  a  legion. 

b.  scribit  L^bieno  cum  legione  vgniat,  he  ivrites  to  Labienus 
to  come  (lit.,  that  he  should  come)  ivith  a  legion. 

Obs.  In  the  foregoing  examples,  note  that  those  marked  a  have 
their  verbs  in  the  imperative ;  in  the  corresponding  examples  of 
Indirect  Discourse,  marked  b,  these  imperatives  have  been  changed 
to  the  subjunctive.     Hence  the  rule  :  — 

357.  All  Imperatives  in  Direct  Discourse  are  changed  in 
Indirect  Discourse  to  the  Subjunctive  ;  the  negative  is  ne. 


INDIRECT    DISCOURSE.  353 


Convert;  ilio  following  sentences  into  Indirect   Discourse,  and 
translate :  — 

DIUECT   DISCOUliSK.  IXDIHP:CT    DISCOURSE. 

1.  Caesar  certior  factus  est 

Tres  jam  copiarum  partes  Ilel-  I    

vetii  id  fliinien  trudCixerunt.  I    


Translation. 

Already  the  Helvetians  have  led 
three  parts  of  their  forces  over  that 
river. 


2.  LiscLis  dicit 

Sunt  nonnulli  quorum  aiictoritas  I   

apud  plebem  pliirimum  valet.        1    

Translation. 

There  are  some  ichose  influence 
prevails  a  (jreat  deal  among  the 
common  peop>le. 


•3.  Locutus  est  Divitiacus 
Ob  earn  rem  ex  civitate  profugi 
et    Roniam    veni,    quod    neque 
jfirejurando      neque     obsidibus 
tenebar. 


Translation. 

For  this  reason  I  fled  from  the  state 
and  came  to  Rome,  because  I  icas 
being  held  (i.e.  refused  to  be  held) 
?} either  by  an  oath  nor  by  hostages. 


Obs.  The  pupil  should  note  that  clauses  like  the  following, 
introduced  by  relative  pronouns  or  by  relative  adverbs,  are  not 
strictly  in  Indirect  Discourse  ;  still,  Indirect  Discourse,  in  its  widest 
application,  may  include  indirect  questions  or  any  subordinate 
clause  that  contains  a  statement  made  on  the  authority  of  any  other 
person  than  the  WTiter  (see  364). 

EXAMPI.ES. 

1.  dicam  quod  sentio  (relative  clause),  /  will  tell  that  which  I 

think. 

2.  dIcam  quid  intellggam  (indirect  question),  I  will  tell  what 

I  kno?v. 


354  FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English,  and  give  the  Rule  for  all  Modes 
and  Tenses  :  — 

1.  Pner  dicit,  "Cupio  discere."  2.  Puer  dicit  se  ciipere 
discere.  3.  Pax  est  composita.  4.  Nnntius  allatus  est 
pacem  esse  compositam.  5.  "Omnia  perierunt,"  inquit 
Caesar;  "consnlite,  nnlites,  vestrae  sfdntT."  G.  Caesar  dixit 
omnia  periTsse  ;  milites  suae  stlluti  consulerent.  7.  Caesar 
dixit  se,  postquain  liostes  fusi  essent,  castra  mumturum  esse. 

8.  Ariovistus  dixit,  se  AeduTs  bellum  non   esse   illaturum. 

9.  Ariovistus  dixit,  se  AeduTs  bellum  non  esse  illaturum,  si 
stTpendium  quotannis  penderent.  10.  Animadvertit  Caesar 
unos  ex  omnilms  Sequanos  nihil  earum  rerum  facere,  quos 
ceterT  facerent,  sed  tristes  capite  demisso  terrain  intueri. 
11.  Dux  dixit  se  intellegere  quid  egisset  hostis. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  Cffisar  has  assaulted  the  city.  2.  The  messenger  said, 
"Cnesar  has  assaulted  the  city."  3.  The  messenger  said 
that  Ctesar  had  assaulted  the  city.  4.  You  are  mistaken. 
5.  He  thinks  that  you  are  mistaken.  G.  I  shall  not  wage 
war  upon  the  Tl^^duans.  7.  lie  answered  that  he  should  not 
wage  war  upon  the  TEduans.  8.  Ca?sar  said  that  the  Helve- 
tians had  departed  from  their  territories  in  order  that  they 
might  obtain  possession  of  all  Gaul.  9.  Cffisar  said  that  he 
had  sent  the  cavalry  to  sustain  (Z#r.,  in  order  that  it  might 
sustain)  the  attack  of  the  enemy.  10.  It  is  related  tiiat, 
when  Cresar  had  conquered  Pompey,  he  crossed  into  Asia. 
11.  Ariovistus  said  that  he  would  not  wage  war  upon  the 
^duans,  if  they  paid  the  tribute  yearly.  12.  The  mountain 
is  lield.  13.  lie  says  that  the  mountain  is  held.  14.  The 
messenger  says  that  the  mountain  which  he  saw  was  held  by 
the  enemy.  15.  Caesar  said  that  he  would  send  the  cavalry 
which  he  had  with  liim  to  defend  the  mountain. 


RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 


NOTKS    AND     gUKSTIONS. 

What  is  meant  by  Indirect  Discourse  1  What  is  the  law  for  tenses 
in  Indirect  Discourse  ?  How  is  the  tense  of  a  verb  in  a  subordinate 
clause  determined  1  Give  tlie  rule  for  modes  in  Indirect  Discourse. 
After  what  verbs  may  the  Indirect  Discourse  be  used  ?  What  change 
is  made  in  pronouns  in  passing  to  Indirect  Discourse  1  To  what  is  the 
future  in  Direct  Discourse  changed  in  Indirect  Discourse  1  To  what 
the  future  perfect?  Translate  the  following:  he  liopes  to  come;  he 
promises  to  write.  How  does  the  English  construction  of  such  sentences 
differ  from  the  Latin  ?  What  word  in  English  introduces  Indirect 
Discourse  1  Is  it  always  necessary  to  use  tliat  in  translating  Indirect 
Discourse  into  English  ?  Give  the  rule  for  imperative  sentences  when 
changed  to  Indirect  Discourse. 


LESSON   XCIX. 

EELATIVE    SENTENCES. 

358.  Relative  Clauses  are  introduced  b}'  relative  pronouns 
and  relative  adverbs ;  the  latter  are  called  conjunctive 
adverbs. 

Obs.  a  Relative  Clause  has  the  force  of  an  adjective  or  adverb, 
limiting  the  antecedent ;  as,  puer  qui  legit,  the  hoy  ivho  reads  —  the 
reading  hoy.  The  relative  agrees  with  tlie  antecedent  in  gender, 
nund)er,  and  person,  but  the  case  depends  on  the  construction  of 
the  relative  sentence.    (See  242.) 

359.  Rule  LXIY.  —  A  relative  clause,  having-  a 
definite  antecedent,  and  adding-  merely  a  descriptive 
fact,  takes  the  indicative. 

EXAMPLE. 

Caesar  Squites  quos  Labienus  adduxgrat  praemisit,  Ccesar 
sent  ahead  the  cavalry  ivhich  Lahienus  had  brought  up. 

360.  Rule  LXV.  —  Relative  pronouns  and  relative 
adverhs  take  the  subjunctive  when  they  introduce 
clauses  of  puj^j^ose,  result,  condition^  cause,  or  con- 
cession. 


356  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


PURPOSE. 

Oijs.  The  subjunctive  ^vitll  qui  expresses  a  ]\irpose  chiefly  after 
verbs  of  sending,  giving,  and  choosing,  with  reference  to  the  oh/ect 
of  the  sentence;  a  Purpose  with  reference  to  the  subject  beingex- 
pressed  by  ut,  etc.  If  the  construction  be  passive,  then,  of  course, 
qui  will  refer  to  the  subject. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  legates  miserunt  qui  pacem  pgterent,  theij  sent  envoys  to 

(fr/io  should,  or  that  thei/  might)  sue  for  peace. 

2.  legatT  missi  sunt  qui  pacem  pgtgrent,  envoys  were  sent  to 

{lulto  should)  se<  I-  peace. 


RESULT. 

1.  Relative  Clauses  are  often  used  to  characterize  an  in- 
definite or  general  antecedent,  especially  after  negatives,  where 

the  idea  of  result  is  not  obvious. 

-*^ 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  sunt  qui  dicant,  there  are  some  who  say. 

2.  nemo  est  qui  non  ciipit,  there  is  no  one  who  does  not  desire. 

(1)  A  Relative  Clause  of  Characteristic  is  used  even  when  the 
antecedent  is  definite;  l)ut  it  is  especially  common  — 

a.  After  unus  and  solus. 

h.  After  dignus,  indiguus,  idoneus,  and  aptus. 

c.  After  comparatives  with  quam, 

Obs.  The  Relative  of  Characteristic  is  equivalent  to  the  Restric- 
tive Relative  with  the  subjunctive.  The  Relative  of  Characteristic 
has  a  tendency  to  take  the  subjunctive  after  indefinite  and  general 
expressions  (for  examples,  see  324)  ;  ))ut  even  then  the  indicative 
may  be  used  when  the  statement  is  a  definite  fact,  and  not  a 
general  characteristic  (i.e.  with  a  definite  antecedent)  :  as,  sunt  qui 
dicunt  impSria  .  .  .  nequisse  pSti,  there  are  some  icho  assert,  etc. 
(i.e.  /  knorv  some  who  assert,  etc.).  Particularly  to  be  noted  is  the 
Restrictive  Relative  in  such  phrases  as  quod  sciam,  so  far  as  I 
Inow ;   quod  mSminerim,  as  far  as  I  rememher. 

EXAMPLE. 

non  is  sum  qui  his  utar,  I  am  not  such  a  one  as  to  use  these  tilings. 


RELATIVE    SENTENCES.  357 

CONDITION. 

361.  Rule  LXVI.  —  A  Condition  is  .sometimes  in- 
troduced by  the  Indefinite  Kelative  {qui,  quae,  quod 
■^  si  qulSf  si  qui,  etc.),  and  the  modes  are  used  as  in 
ordinary  conditional  clauses. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  haec  qui  videat,  nonne  cogatur  confiteri  deos  esse,  if 

any  one  should  see  these  things,  would  he  not  he  compelled  to 
admit  that  there  are  gods  ? 

2.  errat  longe,  qui  credat,  he  greatly  errs  who  siqyposes  (i.e.  if 

any  one  supposes,  he  greaUy  errs). 

CAUSE. 

Obs.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by  qui  alone,  or  strengthened 
by  ut,  utpSte,  quippe,  generally  take  their  verbs  in  the  subjunc- 
tive, although  the  indicative  is  occasionally  used. 

EXAMPEP]S. 

1.  h&beo  sgnectuti  gratiam,  quae  mih!  sermonis  Sviditatem 

auxit,  /  cherish  gratitude  to  old  age,  which  has  increased,  my 
love  of  conversation . 

2.  misgret  tui  me  qui  (—  cum  tu)  hunc  tantum  hSminem. 

facias  inimicum  tibi,  I  pity  you  since  you  (in  that  you)  make 
so  great  a  man  as  this  inimical  to  you. 

3.  hSbeo  senectuti  gratiam,  quae  mihi  sermonis  Sviditatem 

auxit,  /  cherish  gratitude  to  old  age,  ivhich  {because  it)  has 
increased  my  love  of  conversation . 

Obs.  In  Cicero  the  mode  with  quippe  qui  is  the  subjunctive; 
in  Sallust,  the  indicative. 

CONCESSION. 
absolvite   Verrem,    qui    (=  cum   is)    se   fateatur   pecunias 
cepisse,  acquit  Verres,  although  he  confesses  {should  confess) 
that  he  has  taken  bribes. 

362.  Rule  LXVII.  —  Relative  Clauses  in  Indirect 
Discourse,  like  other  dependent  clauses,  take  tlie 
subjunctive. 

EXAMPLE. 

nuntiatum  est  gquites  qui  praemissi  essent  rSvertisse,  it 

was  announced  that  the  horsemen  who  had  been  sent  in  advance 
had  returned. 


358  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


a.  A  Relative  Clause,  even  in  Indirect  Discourse,  may 
take  the  indicative,  if  it  contains  a  statement  on  the  authority 
of  the  narrator  (=tlie  present  speaker  or  writer),  or  if  it 
is  a  mere  circumlocution. 

rXAMPI.ES. 

1.  Caesar  per  exploratores  certior  f actus  est,  ex  ea  parte 

vici  quam  Gallis  concesserat,  omnes  noctu  disces.sisse, 

Ccesar  teas  informed  through  his  scouts  that  all  of  them  had 
wilhdraicn  during  the  night  from  that  quarter  of  the  village 
which  he  had  assigned  to  the  Gauls. 

2.  quis  ngget  haec  omnia  quae  videmus  deorum  p6testate 

administrari,  icho  icould  deny  that  this  whole  visible  world  is 
managed  Inj  the  power  of  the  gods? 

Obs.  The  statement  on  the  authority  of  the  present  speaker  or 
writer  is  equivalent  to  saying  that  the  statement  is  a  fact ;  hence, 
the  indicative  is  used.  Tlie  rehitive  clause  quam  .  .  .  concessg- 
rat,  altliougli  standing  in  Indirect  Discourse,  is  in  the  indicative, 
because  it  is  an  explanation  given  by  the  writer  himself  (Ca\sar). 
Tlie  relative  chiuse  quae  videmus,  may  be  considered  as  explana- 
tory (i.e.  it  is  a  circundoculion),  and  although  introduced  into  the 
Indirect  Discourse,  the  verb  (videmus)  is  in  tlie  indicative,  because 
the  manner  of  making  the  assertion  is  not  important  enough  to  rise 
into  consideration ;  hence,  the  veil)  remains  in  the  mode  in  which 
it  would  naturally  be,  viz.  the  indicative.  The  statement  is  virtu- 
ally made  on  the  authority  of  the  jn-esent  speaker,  because  he  does 
not  think  it  worth  while  to  shift  the  responsibility ;  i.e.  it  often 
depends  merely  upon  the  feeling  of  the  writer  whether  he  will  use 
the  indicative  or  subjunctive. 


INTERMEDIATE    CLAUSES. 

Ons.  In  Latin  we  often  find  a  clause  subordinate  to  another 
clause  tvhich  is  itself  subordinate.  When  the  first  subordinate  clause 
is  a  subjunctive  (or  an  infinitive)  clause,  then  the  subjunctive  is 
used  in  the  second  subordinate  (or  intermediate)  clause,  because 
anything  depending  on  a  potential  is  itself  necessarily  potential. 
The  verb  in  the  second  subordinate  clause  is  said  to  be  in  the  sid^- 
junctive  bg  attraction.  The  verb  in  the  second  subordinate  clause 
may  be  in  the  indicative,  but,  if  the  clause  (intermediate)  is  in 
Indirect  Discourse,  its  verb  is  naturally  in  the  subjunctive  (as  in 
the  foregoing  lesson),  unless  the  clause  is  merely  explanatory,  i.e.  a 
circumlocution  (362.  (5bs.)  containing  a  statement  which  is  regarded 


IIELATIVE   SENTENCES.  359 


as  true  independently  of  the  quotation.  The  vcilj  is  thou  in  the 
indicative :  thus,  dicit  se  videre  ea  quae  video,  ke  saijs  that  he 
sees  tohat  I  see  (in  fact)  ;  whereas  quae  videam  would  mean  (Jie 
says  that  he  sees)  what  as  he  alleges  I  see  ;  quae  video  is  the  inter- 
mediate clause;  so  nemo  tam  p6teiis  est  ut  omnia  quae  vSlit 
efficSre  possit,  no  one  is  so  j)otcerful  as  to  he  able  to  accomj)lish  all 
(hat  he  wishes;  v61it  is  so  closely  connected  with  ut  possit,  etc., 
as  to  form  an  essential  part  of  the  result,  and  is,  therefore,  attracted 
into  the  subjunctive.  Hence,  relative  clauses  of  characteristic  in  In- 
direct Discourse  (or  restrictive  clauses),  dependent  on  the  sub- 
junctive, would  have  their  verb  in  the  subjunctive,  while  clauses 
containing  a  circumlocution  or  explanations  of  the  narrator,  i.e.  a 
merely  explanatory  or  parenthetical  clause,  or  one  that  introduces 
a  fact  (on  the  authority  of  the  narrator),  may  be  in  the  indicative. 
Hence :  — 

ATTRACTION    OF    MODE. 

363.  Rule  LXVIII. — A  relative  or  other  subordi- 
nate clause  may  take  the  subjunctive  when  it  depends 
on,  and  forms  an  essential  part  of,  an  infinitive  or 
subjunctive  clause. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  respondit  se  id  quod  in  Nerviis  fecisset  factiirum,  he 

replied  that  he  vjould  do  vjhat  he  had  done  in  the  case  of  the 
Nervii. 

2.  vSreor  ne,  dum  minuere  velim,  laborem  augeam,  /  fear 

lest,  while  I  am  wishinr/  to  lessen  the  toil,  I  niay  increase  it. 

3.  tanta  rerum  commutatio  facta  est,  ut  nostri  etiam  qui 

vulngribus  confecti  prociibuissent,  proelium  rSdinte- 
grarent,  so  great  a  change  of  affairs  vjas  brought  about  that 
our  men,  even  those  ivho  had  fallen  icorn  out  u'ith  u'ounds, 
renev'ed  the  battle. 


PARTIAL    INDIRECT    DISCOURSE. 

Obs.  The  term  Indirect  Discourse  is  strictly  applied  to  clauses 
(or  citations)  dependent  on  some  word  of  saging,  thinking,  and  the 
like  (as  dico,  respondeo,  nuntio,  aio,  arbitror,  while  inquam 
introduces  in  prose  Direct  Discourse).  In  a  more  general  sense, 
the  term  Indirect  Discourse  may  be  used  to  designate  all  clauses 
which  indirectly  express  the  words  or  thoughts  of  any  person  other 
than  the  speaker  or  narrator ;  and  even  the  past  thoughts  or  words 


360  FIRST   STErS    IN   LATIN. 

of  the  speaker  or  narrator  himself  may  take  this  construction.  On 
this  principle,  indirect  questions  and  dependent  constructions  fol- 
lowing verbs  of  wishing,  desirlnf/,  etc.,  as  well  as  final  clauses,  may 
be  explained  as  Indirect  Discourse,  the  indirect  relation  often  being- 
confined  to  a  dependent  clause,  and  not  extending  to  the  whole 
sentence ;  as,  n6va  nupta  flet  quod  Ire  necesse  sit,  the  bride  /.s- 
ireeping  because  she  must  go  (srn/s  she).  This  sentence  in  Indii'oct 
Discourse  is :  nova  nupta  dicit  se  flere  quod  ire  nScesse  sit. 
Hence  — 

INFORMAL    INDIItKCT    DISCOURSE. 

364.  Rule  LXIX. —  A  relative  or  other  subordinate 
clause  may  take  the  subjunctive  when  it  expresses, 
though  not  in  formal  indirect  discourse,  the  thouj^ht 
of  some  other  person  than  the  speaker  or  writer. 

KXAMPLKS. 

1.  omnea  libroa  quos  frater  suus  rgllquisset  mihi  donavit, 

he  gave  to  me  all  the  books  which  (as  he  said)  his  brother  had  left. 

2.  Socrates  accusatus   est  quod  corrumpgret  jiiventutem, 

Socrates  was  arraigned  because  {as  was  alleged)  he  corrujited 
the  youth. 
I].  Aedui  quest!  sunt  quod  Harudes  fines  eorum  p6pala- 
rentur,    t/ie    ACdui   complained    because    {as    they   said)    the 
Harudes  were  laying  icaste  their  territory. 

Obs.  1.  The  constructions  following  verbs  of  wishing,  desiring, 
commanding,  permitting,  caring,  striring,  hindering,  fearing,  and  the 
like,  may  be  explained  as  Infornuil  Indirect  Discourse  (usually 
called  pltitio  obliqua). 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  nihil  indignius  est  quam  eum  qui  culpa  cSreat  supplicio 

non  cSrere,  nothing  is  more  unbecoming  than  that  he  who  is 
free  from  fault  should  not  be  free  from  punislrnient. 

2.  milites  misit,  ut  eos  qui  fug^rant  persgqugrentur,  he  sent 

soldiers  to  {who  should)  pursue  those  ivho  had  fled  (i.e.  the 
fugitives). 

Obs.  2.  Note,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  that  the  relative  clause 
qui  cSjeat  (see  361),  depending  on  an  infinitive,  has  its  verb  in 
the  subjunctive  by  the  ordinary  rule ;  in  Ex.  2,  the  clause  qui 
fuggrant  has  its  verb  in  the  indicative,  because  it  is  regarded  as 
parenthetical,  i.e.  it  is  a  circumlocution  (see  362.  a). 


:p:lative  sentences.  361 


Suppleinentiiry  Examples  :  — 

1.  non  dubito  quin  n6va  nupta  fleat  quod  ire  ngcesse  sit, 

1  do  not  doubt  th(d  the  bride  is  ■weeping  beccmse  she  must  go. 

2.  primum  p6suit  earn  (causam)  de  qua  m6do  dixi,  quae 

orta  esset  ex  praesensione  lerum  futurarum,  he  Just 
mentioned  that  of  ichieh,  I  hove  just  ,sj)oken  (diroct  statement), 
ichieh  (itecording  to  liini)  h(id  its  origin  in  a  presentnund  of 
t/ie  future. 
'■].  nescTre  quid  antequam  natus  sis  acciderit,  id  est  semper 
esse  puerum,  not  to  h-no/c  wluit  happened  before  you  ivere 
born,  (that)  is  to  be  abrays  a  boy. 

4.  Ariovistus  dixit  se  obsides  quos  ab  Aeduis  hSberet  non 

redditiirum. 

5.  Caesar  negavit  se  Helvetiis  quod  postiilavit  dSre  posse, 

0.  nuntiatuni  est  equites  qui  praeniissi  essent  rgvertisse. 
7.  dixit  oppidum,  quod  vides,  Ariovisti  fuisse. 

EXERCISES. 

Translate  into  English,  and  give  the  Rule  for  all  Modes 
and  Tenses  :  — 

1.  Caesar  dat  negotium  Senonibus,  iiti  ea  quae  apnd 
Belgas  gerantur^  cognoscant,  seque  de  his  rebus  certiorem 
faciant.  2.  Caesar  graviter  eos  aecusat  quod  ab  iis  non 
sublevetur^  praesertim  cum  eoruni  precibus  adductus  bellurn 
susceperit.^  3.  Helvetii,  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  permoti, 
constituerunt  ea  quae  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent^  com- 
parare.  4.  Deus  est,  qui  mundum  regit,  a.  Hostes  legatos 
miserunt,  qui^  paeem  peterent.^  6.  Nemo  tarn  potens  est  ut 
omnia  quae  velit^efficere  possit.^  7.  DTgnus  est  qui  laudetur. 
8.  Damna  majora  sunt  quam  quae  (=  ut  ea)  aestimar!  pos- 
sint.^  9.  O  fortunate  adulescens,  qui  (=  cum  tu)  tuae  vir- 
tutis  Homerum  praeconem  inveneris.^  10.  Absolvite^  virum, 
qui^  (=cmn  is)  fateatur^  pecuniiis  cepisse.^  11.  Haec  qui 
videat,^  nonne  cogatur^  faterl  deos  esse.  12.  Caesar  ab 
Aeduis  frumentum  liagitabut,^  quod  essent  publice  polHciti.^ 


362  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  boys  who  study  will  learn.  2.  The  farmer  sent 
men  to  plough  the  field.  3.  There  were  some  who  thought  the 
man  should'  be  condemned  to  death.  4.  The  boys  said  that 
they  would  give  you  whatever  they  had  (then).  5.  Would  not 
the  man  who^  should  see  these  things  be  forced  to  confess 
that  there  are  gods.  6.  No  one  can  be  king  of  the  Persians 
(Persarum)  who  has  not  first^  learnt'*^  the  discipline  of  the 
Magi  (Magorum).  7.  Who  could  (possit)  love  him  whom 
he  fears?  8.  He  promised  to  give^"  what  I  had  asked. 
9.  The  lieutenant,  on-his-return"  to  Caesar,  reported  what^^ 
he  had  seen  in  the  enemy's  camp. 

NOTES    AND     QUESTIONS. 

1.  Exi)lain  mode  and  tense. 

2.  Kelative  of  Purpose. 

3.  Acquit. 

4.  Though  he,  etc. 

5.  Qui  videat  =  si  quis  videat,  {f  (inij  one  were  to  see. 

C.  The  subjunctive  refers  to  the  i)ronnses  as  made  by  tlie  ^Eduans. 

7.  Use  condemnanduin  esse. 

8.  First  -'-  ante. 

0.  Qui  non  percepSrit  =  nisi  percepSrit,  unless  he  has  learned,  etc. 

10.  Se  daturum. 

11.  Rgversus. 

12.  =  that  which. 

Wliat  is  a  relative  clause  ?  Mention  the  various  classes  of  relative 
clauses.  What  will  be  the  mode  of  a  verb  (in  Indirect  Discourse) 
in  a  relative  clause  that  depends  on  an  infinitive  clause  or  another 
relative  clause  1  May  the  verb  in  the  second  relative  clause  ever  be 
in  the  indicative  1  Why  has  this  verb  a  tendency  to  be  in  the  sub- 
junctive ?  Define  an  intermediate  clause.  Point  out  the  intermediate 
clause  in  the  following :  He  says  that  he  sees  what  I  see.  Mention  the 
various  classes  of  relative  clauses.  Explain  the  meaning  of  circumlocu- 
tion. When  is  a  relative  clause  equivalent  to  a  circumlocution  ?  What 
is  meant  by  informal  indirect  discourse  ? 


SUPPLEMENTARY   EXERCISES. 


Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  waves  on  the  shores  [of  the  sea]  arc  high.  2. 
Volsinii,  a  town  of  the  Tnscans,  was  consumed^  by  light- 
ning. 3.  Neither  you  nor  1  have  done  this.  4.  You  and  he 
praise  the  streams  of  the  country.  5.  The  man  said  one 
thing  and  the  boy  another.-  G.  Homer  is  called  the  king  of 
poets.  7.  The  Sequaui  shuddered  at  the  cruelty  of  Ariovis- 
tus.  8.  Hear  much,"^  speak  little.  9.  After  his  death  the 
people  repented  of  their  judgment.  10.  Ci^sar  kept 
demanding  corn  of  the  iEdui.  11.  The  elephant  is  said  to 
live  two  hundred  years.  12.  Augustus  died  at  Nola.  13. 
He  wandered  about  the  banks  of  the  river  Po  and  the  shores 
of  the  Adriatic  Sea.  14.  A  good  man  forgets  all  injuries. 
15.  At  what  price  does  he  give  lessons?^  IG.  It  is  not  law- 
ful for  any  man  ^  to  lead  an  army  against  his  country.  17. 
Having  learned  these  things,  Ctesar  returns  to  the  fleet.  18. 
AYliat  o'clock  is  it?  19.  Is  that  your  fault  or  mine?  20.  He 
asked  whether  that  was  your  fault  or  mine.  21.  If  they 
(shall)  give  hostages,  Cjesar  will  make  peace  with  them. 
22.  Can  an^^body  do  this?  23.  Can  somebody  do  this?  24. 
Plato  lived  eighty-one  years.  25.  Wherefore  it  pleased  him 
to  send^  legates  to  Ariovistus,  to  demand'  from  him  that  he 
should  appoint  some  place  central  with  respect  to  both  of 
them  for  a  conference,  (saying)  that  he  wished  to  treat  with 
him  concerning  the  republic,  and  the  highest  interests  of 
both.  2G.  On  the  10th  of  April  we  set  out  for  the  province. 
27.  Is  this  said  to  have  been  done  by  night  or  by  day?  28. 
The  Germans  have  not  entered  a  house  for  fourteen  years. 
29,  It  is  of  great  consequence^  to  me^  that  I  should  see  you. 


oGi  FIKST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

30.  On  the  last  day  of  December  lie  set  sail,^"  and  arrived  at 
Athens  on  the  10th  of  January.  31.  In  the  first  of  the 
spring  the  consul  came  to  Ephesus,  and,  having  received  the 
troops  from'^  Scipio,  he  made'-  a  speech'"  in-presence-of^^  his 
soldiers  (in  which),  after  extolling  their  braver}',  he  exhorted 
them  to  undertake''  a  new  war  with'"  the  Greeks,  who  had 
(as  he  said)  helped  Antiochus  with  auxiliaries. 


1. 

Use  concrematum  est. 

9. 

See  315.  3.  (2),  a. 

2. 

Use  aiiud  .  .  .  aiiud. 

10. 

Use  solvit. 

o. 

Use  the  phiral. 

11. 

Use  a. 

4. 

Lit.  te<ich. 

12. 

Use  habuit. 

5. 

Use  licet  iiemini. 

13. 

Use  contionem. 

G. 

See  321. 

14. 

Use  Spud. 

7. 

See  321.  Obs. 

15. 

Use  ad  with  the  ger. 

of  accipgre. 

8. 

See  315.  3.  (2). 

10. 

Use  cum. 

MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES. 

I.    SUM  AND   ITS    COMPOUNDS. 

[Learn  the  prineipal  parts  and  meaning  of  absuni,^  adsum,  desum, 
insum,  intersum,  obsum,-  praesum,  prosum,  possum,  subsum,^ 
stipersum.] 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  God  is  present  in  all  places.  2.  They  profit  neither 
themselves  nor  others.  3.  They  were  not  able  to  j)rofit  me. 
4.  He  has  been  absent  from  home  six  months.  5.  This  can- 
not profit  you,  but  injures  you  and  \our  friends.  G.  A 
leader  was  wanting  to  tlie  army.  7.  The  cavalr}^  profited 
our  army.  8.  He  was  present  in  the  battle.  1).  Tlicy  were 
able    to   be    present.     10.  They  governed    the    city  for   ten 

years. 

1.  For  euphonic  changes,  see  7.  and  ff. 

2.  Principal  parts  :  obsum,  obesse,  offuT. 

3.  Principal  parts :  subsum,  subesse,  no  perf. 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCLSES.  365 


II.   EO   AND   ITS   COMrOUNDS. 
[Learn  the  principal  parts  and  meaning  of  abeo,  adeo,  ante-eo, 
circumeo,    coeo,    exeo,    ineo,    intereo,    introeo,    obeo,    pereo, 
prae-eo,  praetereo,  prodeo,  rSdeo,  siibeo,  transeo,  veneo.] 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  The  soldiers  crossed  the  river.  2.  He  was  surrounded 
by  the  fleet  of  the  enemy.  3.  The  merchants  came  to  sell 
their  goods.  4.  Hannibal  returned  to  his  native  country. 
5.  They  went  forth  from  their  territories.  G.  Tliey  formed 
the  plan  of  entering  the  city.  7.  Ciesar  approached  the  city. 
8.  In  the  beginning  of  spring  we  will  return  to  you.  9.  He 
died  at  Rome.  10.  The  dog  barks  at  the  passers-by.^ 
11.  Bring  me  aid  or  1  shall  perish.  12.  The  soldiers  attacked 
the  enemy  lohile  crossing  the  river. 

1.  Lit.  those  passing  hij. 


III.    FERO   AND   ITS   COMPOUNDS. 
[Learn  the  meaning  and  the  principal  i)arts  of  affgro,  rSfero,  ante- 
fero,  aufero,^   confgro,  diffSro,  infgro,  offero,  effero,  tollo,  de- 
fgro,  profgro,  transfgro.] 

Translate  into  Latin  :  — 

1.  He  wages  war  against  Rome.  2.  Hannibal  transferred 
the  war  into  Italy.  3.  We  preferred  peace  to  war.  4. 
Verres  removed  gold  and  silver  from  Sicily.  5.  The  soldiers 
retreated  and  betook  themselves  to  the  mountain.  G.  The 
Romans  intrusted  the  chief  command  to  CiKsar.  7.  Friends 
often  differ  from  each  other. 

1.  h  before  /"becomes  u. 


ly.    CASES. 
1.  Thou  and  my  friend  have  written  the  letter.     2.  Caesar, 
the  leader  of  the   army,  has  waged  war   in  Italy  and  Gaul. 

3.  I  who  am   encouraging  you   cannot   (encourage)  myself. 

4.  He  is  ashamed  of  his  cruelty.      5.   I  am  weary  of  life. 


366  FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 

6.  The  wise  man  will  teach  his  son  justice.  7.  The 
people  made  Caesar  consul.  8.  Every  tenth  man  was 
chosen.  9.  Every  sixth  man  was  chosen.  10.  All  the  best 
men  (lit.,  each  best  man)  were  chosen.  11.  They  fear 
this  enemy.  12.  Hannibal  crossed  the  Alps  with  his 
army.  13.  The  river  go(>s  through  the  midst  of  the  cit}-. 
14.  This,  lastly  (ad  extremmn) ,  I  particularly  (magn6p6re) 
ask  you.  15.  We  ought  not  to  conceal  our  opinions  from 
our  friends.  16.  He  leads  his  army  over  the  river.  17. 
Cflesar  leads  the  cavalry  over  the  bridge.  18.  The  people 
appoint  him  general.  19.  O  wolf,  excellent  guardian,  as  the 
saying  is  (utajunt),  for  the  sheep  (gen,).  20.  The  Romans 
were  eager  for  glory.  21.  One  man  {dat.)  must  not  light 
with  (cum)  two.  22.  What  pleases  you  also  pleases  me. 
23.  This  tlnng  is  unlike  that.  24,  The  life  which  we  enjo}'  is 
sliort.  25.  We  pity  those  who  repent  of  their  faults.  26. 
We  love  those  who  have  repented  of  their  faults.  27.  When 
these  things  had  been  done,,  and  the  whole  of  Gaul  had  been 
subdued,,  tlie  nations  which  dwelt  beyond  the  Rhine  sent 
ambassadors  to  (ad)  Ctesar.  28.  Cicero  went  to  Athens.  29. 
Tlie  aml)assadors  came  from  Carthage.  30.  The  men  fled  to 
Rome.  31.  The  soldiers  departed  from  Italy.  32.  Setting 
forth  (prdfectus)  from  Carthage,  he  made  for  (pgtSre)  Italy. 
33.  He  was  a  brave  man  at  home  and  in  war.  34.  He  will 
return  home  in  the  evening.  35.  When  my  son  returns  from 
the  country,  I  will  send  him  to  (ad)  you.  36.  We  perceive 
that  snow  is  white.  37.  It  is  said  that  snow  is  white.  38.  I 
believe  that  the  souls  of  men  are  immortal.  39.  Who  was 
the  man?  40.  I  will  tell  you  who  the  man  was.  41.  The 
wall  is  two  hundred  feet  long.     42.  I  will  send  you  a  letter. 


V. 
1.  No  brave  man  shudders  at  the   enemy.     2.  Who  was 
present    (intSresse)  at  3'our   conversation?     3.   Against  the 
Tarentines,  wlio  were  in  the  lowest  part  of  (ultimus)  Italy, 


MISCELLANEOUS    EXKIICISES.  367 

war  was  declared.  4.  Plato  died  in  (his)  eighty-second  year, 
while  writing.  5.  Romulus  called  the  city  after  (e)  his  name, 
Rome.  G.  Have  you  been  at  Athens?  7.  He  asked  the  boy 
whether  he  wished  to  return  to  his  father.  <S.  Philosophy 
heals  the  mind.  9.  The  soldiers  lie  on  the  ground.  10.  The 
soldiers  fight  with  their  companions.  11.  The  soldiers  fight 
with  the  sword.  12.  Cffisar  was  stripped  of  his  property. 
13.  The  art  of  carefully  educating  boys  is  difficult.  14.  The 
art  of  governing  the  State  is  very  difficult.  15.  The  enemy 
fortified  their  camp  after  they  had  crossed  the  river.  IG. 
Wolves  are  like  dogs.  17.  Only  a  few  are  deserving  of 
praise.  18.  Thou  art  free  from  faults.  19.  A  bad  man  is 
never  free  from  fear.  20.  The  deeds  of  the  general  are 
worthy  of  a  triumph.  21.  Relying  on  thee,  we  have  under- 
taken this  business.  22.  Cicero  was  very  much  devoted 
(amans)^  to  Pompey.  23.  The  letter  is  full  of  good  promise 
(spes).  24.  You  have  freed  the  city  from  danger  and  the 
citizens  from  fear.  25.  As  (ut)  a  shore  without  a  harbor 
cannot  be  safe  for  ships,  so  (sic)  a  heart  (animus)  without 
fidelity  cannot  be  stable  for  friends.  2G.  M}'  older  brother 
is  in  his  thirty-third  year  ;  the  younger,  in  his  twenty-fifth  ;  my 
oldest  sister  is  in  her  eighteenth  ;  my  youngest,  in  her  twelfth. 
1.  With  gen. 


VI.   MOODS. 

1.  Is  that  your  fault  or  ours?  2.  He  asked  whether  that 
was  your  fault  or  ours.  3.  What  are  you  doing?  4.  I 
know  what  you  are  doing.  5.  I  shall  hear  what  you  are 
doing.  G.  I  knew  what  you  were  doing.  7.  I  had  learned 
what  3^ou  were  doing.  8.  I  had  learned  what  you  were 
going  to  do.  9.  I  learned  what  you  were  doing.  10.  I 
learned  what  you  were  going  to  do.  11.  Let  us  remember. 
12.  My  father  takes  care  that  I  am  well  educated,  actively 
exercised,  thoroughly  accomplished,  and  carefully  instructed. 


368  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

13.  My  father  took  care  that  I  was  well  educated,  actively- 
exercised,  thorouglily  accomplished,  and  carefully  instructed. 

14.  If  the  boy  studies  diligently,  he  will  learn  rapidly.  15. 
If  the  bo}-  had  studied  diligently,  he  would  have  learned 
more  rapidly.  IG.  If  the  boy  should  study  diligently,  he 
would  learn  rapidly.  17.  When  the  war  was  ended, ^  ambas- 
sadors from  all  the  States  {(/en.)  came  to  Caesar.  18.  When 
the  boy  was  taught,  he  was  silent.  ID.  When  the  enemy  had 
assaulted  the  town,  all  the  citizens  were  filled  with  great  fear. 
20.  The  enemy  were  assaulting  the  town,  when  the}-  saw  our 
cavalry.  21.  AYhile  I  was  writing,  you  were  reading  and  my 
l)rother  was  playing.  22.  While  the  leader  was  drawing  up 
Ills  forces,  the  enemy  surrounded  the  city.  23.  When  the 
leader  had  drawn  up  his  forces,  he  ordered  them  to  assault 
the  city.  24.  Our  soldiers  are  led  out  in  (in)  the  line  of 
])attle  before  the  enemy  fortify  their  camp.  25.  I  do  not 
doubt  ])ut  that  the  soldiers  fought  bravel}-.  20.  The  boy  was 
punished  because  he  did  not  obey  tlie  teacher.  27.  The  mes- 
senger said  that  "The  connnander  was  drawing  the  soldiers 
up  in  line  of  battle  while  the  enemy  were  fortifying  their 
camp."  28.  The  messenger  said  that  the  commander  had  led 
his  soldiers  out  of  the  city  l)efore  that  the  enemy  had  fortified 
their  camp.  20.  The  soldiers  who  were  sent  b}^  Cjesar  forti- 
fied their  camp,  and  then  crossed  the  river  to  attack  the 
enemy.  30.  lie  issued  a  proclamation  (edico)  that  no  one^ 
of  the  soldiers  should  fight  v/ith  the  enemy.  31.  The  sol- 
diers fought  so  bravely  that  no  one"  of  the  .enemy  escaped. 
32.  AVouhl  not  the  (man)  wlio^  sees  these  things  be  compelled 
to  confess  that  there  are  gods?  33.  O  fortunate  youth,  who'' 
hrist  found  a  Homer  to  be  the  herald  of  thy  prowess.  34. 
Caesar  sent  the  soldiers  to''  fortify  the  camp.  35.  There 
were  some  who^  pitied  him.  30.  The  joy  was  greater  than 
what  men  could  receive  (cSpio).  37.  He  was  a  suitable  man 
to  send.  38.  He  deserves  to  be  praised.  39.  He  came  into 
the  garden  for  the  sake  of  taking  a  walk.     40.  God  has  made 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXEUCISES.  369 

the  animals  for  the  sake  of  man,  as,  I'or  histance  (ut),  the 
horse  for  riding  (vghi),  the  ox  for  ploughing.  41.  Man  is 
naturally  eager  to  learn.  42.  The  soldiers  were  eager  to 
fight.  43.  Wrapping-paper  (charta  emporetica)  is  worthless 
(inutilis)  for  writing.  44.  I  fear  he  has  not  received  the 
letter.  45.  I  fear  that,  if  I  give  this  letter  to  him,  he  will 
open  it  (solvgre).  46.  (It  is)  by  obedience  (obsgquium) 
(that)  you  have  brought  it  about  (efficgre)  that  no  one  is 
dearer  to  the  king  than  you.  47.  After  the  war  was  finished 
the  consul  returned  to  Rome.  48.  Although  the  ground 
(16cus)  was  unfavorable  (iniquus),  nevertheless  Csesar 
determined  to  attack  the  enemy.  49.  Although  I  have  asked 
you  to  come  to  me,  nevertheless  I  know  that  you  cannot 
help  me.  50.  As  the  consul  was  hastening^  to  Rome,  the 
enemy  overtook  (consequi)  his  array.  51.  The  soldiers 
crossed  the  river  without  any  hesitation.^  52.  Divide  your 
troops  without  iveakeninrj  them.^  53.  He  divided  my  troops 
without  dividing  his  own}^^  54.  The  consul  cannot  cross 
the  river  tvithout  dividing  his  army}^  55.  No  arm}"  can 
be  divided  ivithont  being  weakened.'^^  56.  We  cannot  let  him 
go  without  giving  him  money.  57.  He  departed  without 
accomplishing  his  mission  (res).  58.  Can  you  condemn  the 
army  without  also  condemning:  the  oeneral?  59.  He  received 
the  letter, ^'"^  and,^^  without  opening  (rgsolvere)  it,  laid  it 
down.  60.  You  have  written  (do)  many  letters  to  Rome 
without  writing  an}'  ^^  to  me. 

1.  Translate  this  clause  in  two  different  ways,  259. 

2.  Use  ne  quis.  3.  Use  ut  ngmo. 

4.  Qui  videat  —  si  quis  videat.       5.  324.      G.  321.      7.  324. 

8.  (1)  Nihil  dflbitantes,  260;  (2)  neque  quidquam  dtibitave 
runt;  (3)  nulla  interpSsita  dilbitatione ;  (4)  sine  lilla  diibita 
tione.  0.  Ne  debilites. 

10.  (1)  Cum  suas  non  dividgret ;  (2)  suTs  non  divisis. 

11.  (1)  Nisi  exercitum  divisgrit ;    (2)  nisi  exercitu  diviso. 

12.  (1)  Quin  debilitetur ;   (2)  ut  non  debilitetur. 

13.  259.  f.        14.  260.  f.        15.  Cum  nullas. 


GENERAL  RULES  OF  SYNTAX. 


AGREEMENT   OF   VERBS,    NOUNS,    PRONOUNS, 
AND   ADJECTIVES. 

Subject-Nominative   (p.   53). 

1.  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  put  in  the  nomina- 
tive case. 

Agreement  of  Verbs  (p.  54). 

2.  A  finite  verb  agrees  with  its  subject-nominative 
in  number  and  person. 

ArposiTiON  (p.  GO). 

3.  A  noun  used  to  describe  another  noun  or  jjro- 
noun,  and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in 
the  same  case. 

Predicate  Noun  (p.   100). 

4.  A  noun  in  the  predicate,  denoting  the  same  person 
or  tiling  as  the  subject,  agrees  with  it  in  case. 

Agreement  of  Relatives   (p.  203). 

5.  A  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in 
gender,  lunnber,  and  person,  but  its  case  depends  on 
the  construction  of  the  clause  in  which  it  stands. 

Agreement  of  Adjectives   (p.  GO). 

C.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender, 
number,  and  case. 

Predicate  Adjective   (p.   100). 

7.  A  predicate  adjective  agrees  with  its  subject  in 
gender,  number,  and  person. 


GENERAL   RULES    OF    SYNTAX.  371 


GENITIVE. 

Genitive  with  Nouns   (r.  Gl). 

8.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  another  noun, 
and  denoting  a  different  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the 
genitive. 

Genitive  with  Adjectives   (p.   115). 

9.  Many  adjectives  are  followed  by  the  genitive  to 
complete  their  meaning. 

Partitive  Genitive   (p.  198). 

10.  Words  denoting  a  part  are  followed  by  the 
genitive  denoting  the  whole. 

Predicate  Genitive   (p.   103). 

11.  A  noun  in  the  predicate,  denoting  a  different 
person  or  thing  from  the  subject,  is  put  in  the  genitive. 

1.  Certain  adjectives  of  quantity  —  as  magni,  parvi,  pluris, 
minoris  —  are  used  to  denote  indefinite  price. 

Genitive  with  Verbs  (p.  294). 

12.  Verbs  of  reminding^  remembering^  and  forgetting^ 
—  reeordor,  iiieiniiii,  reminiscor,  and  obliviscor,  —  are 

followed  by  the  genitive  (sometimes  the  accusative). 

1.  The  genitive  is  used  (p.  295) 

(1)  With  misgreor,  misgresco. 

(2)  With  tlie  inipersonals  refert  and  interest. 

(3)  The  inipersonals  misgret,  paenitet,  piget,  piiget,  and 

taedet,  take    the  genitive  of    the    object  with  the 
accusative  of  the  person. 

(4)  Verbs  of  accusing,  convictinfi,  condemning,  and  acquit- 

ting,   take    the   accusative   of    the   person    and   the 
genitive  of  tlie  crime  (p.  294). 

(5)  Sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  take  the  genitive  to  express 

the  price  or  value  indefinitely  (p.  295). 


372  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

DATIVE. 

Indirect  Object  (p.  62). 

13.  The  indirect  object  of  an  action  is  put  in  the 
dative 

1.  AVitli  intransitive  and  passive  verbs. 

2.  With  transitive  verbs,  in  connection  with  the  direct  object. 

Dative  V7ith  Intransitive  Verbs  (p.  164). 

14.  The  dative  of  the  indirect  object  is  used  with 
most  intransitive  verbs  signifying  to  favoi\  please^  trust, 
assist,  and  their  contraries  ;  also,  to  believe,  persuade, 
comma7id,  obey,  serve,  resist,  threaten,  spare,  pardon,  and 
be  angry. 

Dative  of  Purpose  or  End   (p.  170). 

15.  The  dative  is  used  with  sum  and  a  few  other 
verbs  to  denote  the  purpose  or  end,  usually  with 
another  dative  of  the  person  or  thing  affected  or 
interested. 

Dative  of  Possessor  (p.  242). 

16.  Tlie  dative  of  the  possessor  is  used  with  the  verb 
sum. 

Dative  of  Agent  (p.  258). 

1 7.  The  dative  of  the  agent  is  used  with  the  gerun- 
dive to  denote  the  person  interested  in  doing  the  action. 

Dative  with  Compounds  (p.  173). 

18.  The  dative  of  the  indirect  object  is  used  with 
many  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter, 
ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  and  super,  and  sometimes 
circuin. 

Dative   with  Adjectives  (p.  114). 

19.  The  dative  is  used  after  adjectives  to  denote  the 
object  to  which  the  quality  is  directed. 


GENEKAL  KULES  OF  SYNTAX.  373 

ACCUSATIVE  AND  VOCATIVE. 

Direct  Object  (r.  55). 

20.  The  direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in 
the  accusative. 

Subject  of  the  Infinitive  (p.  217). 

21.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  mode  is  put  in  the 
accusative. 

Two  Accusatives. — Person  and  Thing  (p.  156). 

22.  Verbs  of  asking^  demanding^  teaclmig^  and  con- 
cealing take  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person  and  the 
other  of  the  thing. 

Two  Accusatives.  —  Same  Person  or  Thing  (p.  159). 

23.  Verbs  of  naming^  callmg^  choosing^  makirig,  reckori- 
ing,  regarding^  esteeming^  sJiowmg,  and  the  like,  take  two 
accusatives  of  the  same  person  or  thing. 

Accusative  of  Time  and  Space   (p.   182). 

24.  Duration  of  time  and  extent  of  space  are  ex- 
pressed by  the  accusative. 

Name  of  the  Place  to  which   (p.   188). 

25.  The  name  of  the  place  whither^  or  to  which^ 
regularly  requires  the  preposition  in  or  ad. 

1.  But  with  names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  and  with 
dSmum,  dSmos,  and  rus,  the  preposition  is  omitted. 

Accusatives  in  Exclamations. 

26.  The  accusative,  either  with  or  without  an  inter- 
jection, may  be  used  in  exclamations. 

Cognate  Accusative. 

27.  Intransitive  verbs  often  take  an  accusative  of 
cognate,  or  kindred  meaning  (the  accusative,  if  a  noun, 
being  usually  accompanied  by  an  adjective  or  pronoun). 

1.  To  this  head  belongs  the  adverbial  use  of  the  accusative  of 
neuter  pronouns  and  adjectives  with  intransitive  verbs.  If  such 
verbs  are  used  transitively,  an  accusative  of  the  person  may  stand 
with  this  adverbial  accusative. 


374  FIKST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

Accusative  after  Compounds. 

28.  ]\lany  verbs  conipouncled  with  ad,  ante,  circum, 
coil,  in,  inter,  ob,  per,  praeter,  sub,  subter,  super,  and 
trans,  become  transitive,  and  take  the  accusative. 

Vocative   (p.  75). 

29.  The  name  of  the  person  or  thing  addressed  i.s 
put  in  the  vocative. 

ABLATIVE   PROPER. 
Place  from  which  (p.  210). 

30.  Tlie  2)hice  whence^  ov  from  irhich^  is  denoted  by  the 
ablative  with  a  preposition  —  ii,  ab,  cle,  or  ex  (p.  234). 

1.  Names  of  towns  and  small  islands  omit  the  preposition 
(p.  234)  ;  also  d6m6,  riire,  and  sometimes  liiimo. 

Separation,  Cause,  Source,  Origin  (p.  210). 

31.  Separation,  cause,  source,  and  origin,  are  denoted 
by  the  ablative  with  or  without  a  prej)osition. 

1.  Fido  (w.  dat.  also),  confido,  diffido,  and  fretus  and  con- 
tentus  are  followed  by  the  ablative  (p.  210). 

2.  Compounds  with  a,  ab,  de,  e,  ex,  denoting  separation  from  a 
person  or  place,  take  the  ablative  when  used  figuratively ;  but, 
in  a  local  and  literal  sense,  they  require  a  preposition  with  the 
ablative. 

Ablative  of  Agent  (p.   131). 

32.  The  voluntary  agent  after  a  passive  verb  is  put 
in  the  ablative  with  a  or  ab. 

INSTRUMENTAL   ABLATIVE. 
Means  and  Instrument  (p.  287) . 

33.  The  means  and  instrument  are  denoted  by  the 
ablative  witliout  a  preposition. 

1.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  p6tior,  vescor,  and  their  compounds, 
are  followed  by  the  ablative  (p.  253). 


GENERAL  RULES  OF  SYNTAX.  375 

Ahlative  of  Measure:   (p.  287). 

34.  The  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used  to 
denote  the  standard  by  which  anything  is  measured. 

Measure  of  Difference  (p.  281). 

35.  The  ablative  is  used  with  comparatives,  and 
words  implying  comparison,  to  denote  the  measure  of 
difference. 

Ablative  of  Price   (p.  283). 

3(>.  The  price  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  when  it 
is  a  definite  sum. 

1.  Dignus  and  indignus  are  followed  by  the  ablative. 

Ablative  of  Specification  (p.  278). 

37.  A  noun,  adjective,  or  verb  may  be  followed  l)y 
the  ablative  to  denote  in  what  respect  its  signification  is 
taken. 

Ablative  with  Comparatives  (p.  112). 

38.  The  comparative  degree  is  followed  by  the  abla- 
tive when  quaiii,  tJian^  is  omitted. 

Ablative  of  Material  (p.  288). 

39.  The  material  of  which  anything  is  made  is  regu- 
larly expressed  by  the  ablative  w^itli  ex  or  cle ;  but 
consttire,  to  consist^  sometimes  omits  the  preposition. 

1.  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  are  followed  by  the  ablative 
of  the  thing  needed  (p.  288). 

2.  Most  ver])S  and  adjectives  signifying  plenty  and  want  are 
followed  by  the  ablative  (308.  Obs.  1). 

Ablative  of  Manner  (p.  289). 

40.  The  ablative  of  manner  generally  takes  the 
preposition  cum,  unless  it  has  a  modifying  adjective  or 
genitive  (when  cum  may  be  omitted). 


376  FIRST    STEl>S    IN    LATIN. 


Ablative  of  AccoMrANiMp:NT   (p.   289). 

41.  The  ablative  of  accoinpaniiiient  takes  the  prep- 
osition cum,  except  in  a  few  military  and  other 
phrases. 

Ablative  of  QuALrrv   (p.  2G9). 

42.  A  noun  denoting  quality,  quantity,  or  descrip- 
tion, and  having  an  adjective  joined  with  it,  may  be 
put  in  the  genitive  or  in  the  ablative. 

LOCATIVE. 
Place  in  which   (p.  234). 

43.  Tlie  name  of  the  place  ivliere,  oi*  in  ivldch^  regu- 
larly requires  in  with  the  ablative. 

Names  of  Towns  (p.  234). 

44.  Names  of  towns  and  small  ishmds,  and  also 
doiiius,  iTis,  and  a  few  otlier  words  omit  the  preposition, 
and  the  name  of  the  place  ivJiere,  or  in  tuhtch,  takes  the 
locative. 

Time   (p.   1G7). 

45.  The  time  ivlien^  or  within  which,  is  put  in  the 
ablative  ;  time  hotv  lowj,  in  the  accusative. 

Ablative  Absolute  (p.  222). 

46.  A  noun  or  pronoun,  with  a  participle  or  an 
adjective,  or  two  nouns,  may  be  put  in  the  ablative,  to 
express  the  time  or  circumstance  of  an  action. 

INDICATIVE    AND    INFINITIVE    MODES. 

Indicative  Mode. 

47.  The  indicative  mode  asserts  action  or  being  as 
a  fact,  or  inquires  after  a  fact. 

Subject  Accusative  (p.  217). 

48.  The  infinitive  with  subject  accusative  is  used 
after  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  knowing,  perceiving, 
hearing,  and  the  like. 


GENERAL   KULES    OP   SYNTAX.  377 

Infinitive  as  Suiukct,  Object,  or  Complement  (p.  217). 

49.  The  infiintive  may  be  used  as  the  subject,  object, 
appositive,  or  complement  of  a  verb. 

GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE. 

Gerundive  Construction  (p.  227). 

50.  Instead  of  the  gerund  with  its  object  in  the 
accusative,  the  gerundive  is  generally  used,  the  noun 
taking  the  case  of  the  gerund,  and  the  gerundive  agree- 
ing with  the  noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

1.  The  gerund  governs  the  same  case  as  its  verb,  but  is  itself 
governed  like  a  noun  (225  ff.). 

SUPINE. 

Former  Supine  (p.  232). 

51.  The  supine  in  -um  is  used  after  verbs  of  motion, 
to  express  the  purpose  of  the  motion. 

Latter  Supine  (p.  232). 

52.  The  supine  in  -u  is  used  to  limit  the  meaning  of 
adjectives  signifying  ivonderful^  agreeable^  easy  or  diffi- 
culty tvorthy  or  unworthy,  Jionorahle  or  hase^  and  the 
nouns  fas,  nefas,  and  opus. 

SUBJUNCTIVE   IN   INDEPENDENT   SENTENCES 

(p.  246). 

53.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  independent  sentences 
to  express  a  ivish^  command^  exhortation^  prohibition^  or 
concession;  also,  in  questions  of  doubt  or  deliberation^ 
and  in  mild  or  modest  assertions. 

MODES  AND  TENSES    IN   DEPENDENT  CLAUSES. 

Sequence  of  Tenses  (pp.  302,  309,  347). 

54.  A  primary  tense  in  the  leading  clause  is  followed 
by  a  primary  tense  in  the  dependent  clause ;  and  a  sec- 
ondary tense  is  followed  by  a  secondary.  (319,  322.  Obs., 
350.  l^md  2.) 


378  FIRST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

Subjunctive  of  Purpose  (p.  306). 

55.  Final  clauses  take  their  verbs  in  the  present  or 
imperfect  subjunctive,  according  as  the  leading  verb 
is  in  a  primary  or  a  secondary  tense. 

Subjunctive  of  Result  (p.  309). 

5G.  Consecutive  clauses  take  their  verbs  in  the  sub- 
junctive mode,  the  tense  being  determined  by  the 
regular  rules  for  sequence  of  tenses.    (See  322.  Obs.) 

Conditional  Sentences  (p.  317). 

57.  Conditional    sentences    with    si,    nisi,    ni,    sin, 

take  — 

Simple  Present  and  Past  ConilHions. 

1.  Any  present  or  past  tense  of  the  indicative  in 
both  clauses  wlien  notliing  is  implied  as  to  the  fulfil- 
ment of  the  condition. 

Future  Conditions. 

2.  Tlie  future  indicative  in  ])oth  clauses,  to  represent 
the  supposed  future  case  in  a  dlstmct  and  vivid  manner ; 
the  present  (or  perfect  subjunctive)  in  both  clauses,  to 
represent  the  supposed  future  case  in  a  less  distinct  and 
vivid  manner. 

Unreal  Present  and  Past  Conditions. 

3.  The  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  both 
clauses,  to  re[)resent  the  supposed  case  as  unreal^  or 
contrary  to  fact.  The  imperfect  denotes  preseyit  time^ 
and  the  pluperfect  past. 

Comparative  Clauses  (p.  320). 

58.  Comparative  clauses,  introduced  by  ut,  litl,  sicut, 
queniadnioduni,  etc.,  and  followed  by  the  demonstrative 
particles  Tta,  sic  (so),  etc.,  regularly  take  the  indicative 
or  the  subjunctive  as  in  independent  sentences. 

1.  Comparative  clauses,  introduced  by  ac  si,  ut  si, 
quam  si,  quasi,  tanquam,  tanqviani  si,  velut,  velut  si, 

are,  in  fact,  conditional  clauses,  of  which  the  conclusion 


GENERAL   KULES    OE    8YNTAX.  379 

is  omitted  or  implied,  and  therefore  take  tlie  subjunc- 
tive like  conditional  sentences ;  but  the  tense  is  deter- 
mined by  the  regular  rules  for  sequence  of  tenses. 

Concessive  Clauses  (p.  322). 

59.  Concessive  clauses  are  introduced  by  concessive 
conjunctions,  —  altJiough^  granting  that.,  —  and  take  the 
indicative  or  the  subjunctive  (according  to  the  principles 
stated  on  p.  321  f.). 

Causal  Clauses  (p.  323). 

60.  Causal  clauses,  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  quo- 
niani,  quaiiclo,  take  the  indicative  when  the  reason 
assigned  is  stated  as  a  fact,  and  indorsed  by  the  speaker 
or  writer. 

1.  Causal  clauses  introduced  by  cum  or  the  relative  qui  regu- 
larly take  the  subjunctive. 

2.  Causal  clauses  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  qu6niam,  take  the 
subjunctive  (in  Indirect  Discouse,  348),  to  state  the  reason  as  the 
assertion  or  opinion  of  some  one  else  than  the  speaker  or  writer. 

TEMPORAL    CLAUSES. 

Antecedent  Action  (p.  326). 

61.  Temporal  clauses,  introduced  by  postquaiii,  post- 
eii  quani,  fibi,  fit,  fit  priiiiuiii,  fibi  priimim,  siuiul  ac, 

etc.,  take  the  indicative  (commonly  the  aorist  indicative 
or  historical  present). 

Contemporaneous  Action  (p.  321). 

62.  Duin,  donee,  quoad,  while.,  as  long  as.,  take  the 
indicative  (any  tense). 

1.  Duni,  donee,  quoad,  nntil^  take  the  indicative  in 
the  statement  of  a  fact,  tlie  subjunctive  when  purpose 
is  expressed  (z.e.  if  the  accomplishment  of  the  purpose 
is  the  limit  of  the  action). 


380  FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

Subsequj:nt  Action  (p.  327). 

63.  Aiitequaiii  and  priusquain,  before^  are  used  with 
any  tense  of  the  indicative,  except  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect,  to  express  the  mere  priority  of  one  event  to 
another. 

1.  Aiitequain  and  priusquam  are  used  with  the 
subjunctive  to  express  (1)  the  intentional  priority  of 
one  action  to  another  (i.e.  when  the  action  is  purposed 
or  desired  by  the  subject  of  the  leading  verb),  (2)  or 
when  its  non-occurrence  is  expressed  or  implied. 

CONSTRUCTIONS    OF    CUM. 
Cum  Temporal  (p.  329). 

64.  Cum  temporal  (=  tvheii)^  introducing  a  clause 
that  defines  the  inere  time  of  an  action,  may  be  used 
with  all  the  tenses  of  the  indicative. 

Cum  Historical  (p.  330). 

65.  Cum,  meaning  when.,  is  used  in  historical  narra- 
tion with  the  imperfect  subjunctive  for  contemporaneous 
action,  with  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  for  antecedent 
action. 

Causal  and  Concessive  Cum  (p.  330) . 

66.  Cum  causal  (=  slnce^  and  cum  concessive 
(=  althougli)  may  be  used  with  any  tense  of  the  sub- 
junctive. 

INTERROGATIVE   CLAUSES. 

Direct  Questions  (p.  338). 

67.  Direct  simple  questions  are  generally  introduced 
by  interrogative  words,  and,  as  a  rule,  take  their  verbs 
in  the  indicative. 

1.  Direct  simple  questions  may  take  the  subjunctive 
when  they  express  doubt  or  deliberation.,  or  imply  a 
negative  opinion  on  the  part  of  the  speaker  or  writer 
(278.  1,  3). 


GENERAL  KULES  OF  SYNTAX.  381 

Indirect  Questions  (p.  331)). 
08.  Indirect  questions  take  their  verbs  in  the   sub- 
junctiye,   the  tense  being   determined    by  the   reguhir 
rule  for  sequence  of  tenses  (see  319). 

DEPENDENT   CLAUSES. 

Indirect  Discourse  (p.  343). 

69.  In  passing  from  direct  to  indirect  discourse, 
principal  clauses,  if  declarative,  are  changed  to  the 
infinitive  with  a  subject  accusative,  and  subordinate 
clauses  to  the  subjunctive. 

Relative  Clauses  (p.  355). 

70.  A  relative  clause,  having  a  definite  antecedent, 
and  adding  merely  a  descriptive  fact,  takes  the  indicative. 

71.  Relative  pronouns  and  relative  adverbs  take  the 
subjunctive  when  they  introduce  clauses  of  purpose, 
result,  condition,  cause,  or  concession. 

Attraction  of  Mode  (p.  359). 

72.  A  relative  or  other  subordinate  clause  may  take 
the  subjunctive  when  it  depends  on,  and  forms  an 
essential  part  of,  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause. 

Informal  Indirect  Discourse  (p.  3G0). 

73.  A  relative  or  other  subordinate  clause  may  take 
the  subjunctive  when  it  expresses,  though  not  in  formal 
indirect  discourse,  the  thought  of  some  other  person 
than  the  speaker  or  writer. 

ADVERBS. 

Uses  op  Adverbs  (p.  119). 

74.  Adverbs  modify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other 
adverbs. 

CONJUNCTIONS  (p.  17G). 

75.  Conjunctions  connect  words,  phrases,  clauses,  and 
sentences. 


READING  LESSONS. 

1.    FABLES. 

Note.  — The  figures  in  the  following  section.';  refer  to  the  rules  on  p.  370  ff. 

1.    The  Kid  and  the  Wolf. 

Capella,^  stans"  in  tecto  doinfis,'*  lupum-'N'idit-  praetereun- 
tem,  et  ludifieavit.  Sed  lupus,  "  Nou  tu,"  inquit,  "•  sed  locus 
tuus,  me  lildificat." 

Saepe  15cus  et  tempus  h(5mines  timidos  audilces  reddit. 

2.    The  Hoy  i'.athing. 
Puer,  balneum  petens  in  fluvio,  aqua  paene  exstinetus  est. 
Et  videns  viatorem  quondam,  clamavit,  '' Subveni  mihi !  "^'^ 
Sed  hie  exi)iobravit  puero  ^'^  temeritatem.     Puellulus  autem 
dixit,  "  Primum  subvenT,  deinde  repreliendere ''•*  licet." 

3.    The  Fiox  and  the  Lion. 
Vulpes  vTdit  leonem  retn)us  "'  Captum,  et  stans  prope,  ludi- 
fieavit eum  insolenter.     Leo  auteni,  ''  Non  tu,"  inquit,  "  me 
ludificas,^  sed  malum  quod  in  me  incidit." 

4.  The  Ass  in  the  Lion's  Skin. 
Asinus,  pellem^  leonis  indutus,  circum  currebat,  cetera 
aniinfdia-'^  terrens.  Et  cum  vulpem  videret,  earn  quoque 
terrere '■'  confitus  est.  Sed  baec,  asini  vagTtu"*"  audlto, 
"  Scito,"  inquit,  "me  quoque  territam  futuram  fuisse  nisi 
te  vagientem  andlssem."^' 

5.    The  Hound  and  the  Lion. 
Canis    venations^'   leonem    vldit,   et   Tnsecutus    est.     Cum 
autem  leo  se  veitriret,  ac  ruglret,  canis  metuens  retrorsum 


HEADING   LESSONS. 


fugit.  Turn  vulpes,  conspicata,  "  O  mulum  caput !  "  inquit ; 
"Teiie-^  leonem  sectari?  cujus'  ne  vocem  quidem  tolorare 
potuTsti." 

G.    The  Wolf  and  the  Lamb. 
Lupus  insecutus  est  fignum.     At  hie  in  templum  confugit. 
Liipo  auteni  agiium  invocante,  et  minitaute  i)oiitificem  eum 
sacrifiefiturum,  respoudit  agnus,  "  Mallem  quideni  deo  sacer 
esse  quain  a  te  triicTdaii." 

7.  The  Faiimer  and  the  Snake. 
Agricola  seiiex,  liiemis  tempore,  serpentem  invenit  gelu 
rigentem,  et  miseresceus  sub  veste  condidit.  Mox  serpens, 
incalescens,  et  indolem  suam  recilperans,  benefaetorem  mo- 
mordit  interfecitque  ;  qui  nioriens  dixit,  "  Justa  patior,  qui^ 
animali^'^  improbo  vTtam  servfiverim." '^ 

8.    The  Widow's  Hen. 
Vidua  quaedam  gallTnaiii  lial)uit,  quae  singula  ova  cottidie 
peperit.     At  rata,  sT  plus  horde!  ^'^  gallTnae  ^^  dedisset,'^"  banc 
blna  cottidie  ova  parituram,  ita  fecit.     Sed  gallTna,  pinguis 
facta,  ne  singula  quidem  postea  parcre  valebat. 


II.     LIFE   OF   CiESAR. 

C^.SAR  IS  pkoscrihed,  but  pardoned  by  Sulla. 
1.  G.  Julius  Caesar,  nobilissima  genitus  faimlia,"^  annum 
agens  sextum  et  dccimum,  patrem  amisit.  Paulo  post  Cor- 
neliam  dilxit  iixorem,  cujus  cum  pater  SuUae  ^'■^  esset  inimTcus, 
voluit  Sulla  Caesarem  compellere  "^^  ut  eam  dimitteret ;  neque 
id  potuit  efficere.  Ob  eam  causam  Caesar  bonis  "^  spoliatus, 
cum  etiam  ad  mortem  quaereretur,  mutata  vcste,  noctu  elapsns 
est  ex  urbe,  et,  quamquam  tunc  quartanae  morbo  laborabat, 
prope  per  singulas  noctes  latrbras  commutare  cogebfitur ;  et 
comprehensus  a  SuUae   liberto,  vix   data  pecunia^'  evasit. 


384  FIRST   STEPS   IN    LATIN. 

Postremo  per  propinquos  et  affiues  suos  veniam  impetravit, 
diu  repugnante  Sulla,  qui  cum  deprecantibus  ornatissimis 
viiis  denegasset,  atque  illi  pertinaciter  contenderent  victus 
tandem  dixit,  eum,  quem  salvuin  tantopere  cuperent,  ali- 
quando  optimatium  partibus,^''  quas  simul  defendissent,  exi- 
tio^^  futurum,  multosque  in  eo  puero  inesse'*'^  Marios. 

Caesar's  Capture  by  the  Pirates. 

2.  Caesar,  mortuo  Sulla  et  compos! ta  seditionc  cTvilT,  Rho- 
dum  secede  re '*•'  statuit,  ut  per  otium  Apollonio,  tunc  claris- 
simo  dicendl  miigistro,  operam  daret ;  sed  in  itinere  a  piratTs 
captus  est,  mansitque  apud  eos  quadragintii  dies.-^  Per  omne 
autem  illud  spatium  ita  se  gessit,  ut  pTratis  ^^  terror!  ^''  pariter 
ac  veneration!  ^^  esset.  Interim  comites  servosque  dimlserat 
ad  expediendas  pecunias,  quibus  redimeretur.  Vlginti  talenta 
piratae  postuliiverant ;  ille  vero  quinquaginta  daturum'^**  se 
spopondit.  Quibus  nuineratis,  expositus  est  in  lltore.  Caesar 
Hberatus  confestim  M!letum,-"'  quae  urbs  proxime  aberat,  pro- 
peravit ;  ibique  contracta  classe,  stantes  adhuc  in  eodem  loco 
praedones  noctu  adortus,  Tillquot  naves,  mersis  alils,'"'  cepit, 
IMratasque  ad  deditionem  redactos  eo  affecit  supplicio,  quod' 
illis  saepe  per  jocum  minatus  erat,  cum  al)  iis  detineretur  ; 
crucibus*^"  illos  suff!g!  jussit. 

CyESAR's    Ql/ESTORSIIIP    IN    SpAIN. 

3.  Caesar  quaestor"^  factus  in  Hispaniam  profectus  est; 
cumque  Alpes  translret,  et  ad  conspectum  pauperis  cujusdara 
vie!  comites  ejus  per  j(5cum  inter  se  disputarent,  an  illlc  etiam 
esset  ambition!'"  locus;  serio  d!xit  Caesar,  mfdle  se  ibi 
primuin  esse  quam  Romae^^  secundum.  Ita  animus  domi- 
nationis"  avidus  a  prima  aetate  regnum  concfipiscebat, 
semperque  in  ore  habebat  hos  Eurlpidis,  Grace!  poetae,  ver- 
sus :  Nam  si  vidlandum  est  jas,  regnavdl  gratia  violandnm 
est;  dlils  rebvs  pletdtem  colds. ^■''  Cum  vero  Oades,^'' quod  est 
Hispaniae  oppidum,  venisset,  visa  Alexandrl'^  magn!  imagine 


READING   LESSONS.  385 

ingemuit,  et  lacrinuls  fudit.  Causam  qnaerentibus  amicTs, 
"  Nonne,"  inquit,  "idonea  dolendi  causa  est,  quod  nihildum 
mem(5rabile  gesserim,  earn  aetatem  adeptus,  qua'*'  Alexander 
jam  terrfirum  orbem  subegerat?" 

Leader  of  the  Democratic  Party. 

4.  Caesar  in  captandii  ■'^*'  plebis  gratia  et  ambiendls^''  hono- 
ribus  patrimonium  effudit ;  aere  Tdieno  oppressus  ipse  dice- 
bat,  sibi^"  opus  esse  miUies  sestertium,^'^  ut  liaberet  nihil. 
His  artibus  consulatum  adeptus  est,  collegaque  ei  datus 
Marcus  Bibulus,  cui^^  Caesaris  consilia  baud  placebant. 
Inito  magistratu'^  Caesar  legem  agrariam  tulit,  hoc  est,  de 
dividendo  egenis  civibus  ^^'  agro  publico  ;  cul  legi  '^  cum  sena- 
tus  repugnaret,  Caesar  rem  ad  p6i)iilum  detulit.  Bibulus 
collega  in  forum  venit,  ut  legi^^  ferendae'"  obsisteret ;  sed 
tanta  commota  est  seditio,  ut  in  caput  consulis  cophinus 
stercore '^''^  plenus  effunderetur,  fascesque  frangerentur.  Tan- 
dem Bibulus,  a  satellitibus  Caesaris  foro^^  expulsus,  domi'''' 
se  continere  per  reliquum  anni  tempus  coactus  est,  cfiriaque 
abstinere.  Interea  iinus  Caesar  omnia  ad  arbitrium  in  re- 
publica  administravit ;  unde  quTdam  homines  faceti,  quae  eo 
anno  gesta  sunt,  non,  ut  mos  erat,  consulibus^  Caesare  et 
Bibiilo  acta  esse  dice])ant,  sed  Julio  et  Caesare,  unum  consu- 
lem  nomine  et  cognomine  pro  duobus  appellantes. 

Proconsul  in  Gaul. 

5.  Caesar  functus  consulatu^'^  Galliam  provinciam  accepit. 
Gessit  autem  novem  annis,"*^  quibus  in  imperio  fuit,  haec  fere. 
Galliam  in  provinciae  Romanae  formam  redegit ;  Germanos, 
qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt,  primus  Romanorum  ^^  ponte  f abri- 
cato  aggressus  maximis  affecit  cladibus.^'^  Britannos  antea 
ignotos  vicit,  iisque  ^^  pecunias  et  obsides  imperavit ;  quo  in 
bello  multa  Caesaris  facta  egregia  narrantur.  Inclinante  in 
fugam  exercitu,  rapuit  e  manu  militis  fugientis  scutum,  et  in 
primam  aciem  volitans    pugnam    restituit.     In   alio   proelio 


886  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

aquiliferiim  terga  vertentem  f  Jiucibus  ^  compreheudit,  in 
contrariam  partem  retraxit,  dexteramqoe  ad  hostem  proten- 
dens  :  "  Quorsum  tu,"  inquit,  "  abis?  Illic  sunt,  quibus  cum 
dimicamus."     Quo  facto  militibus  animos  addidit.^^ 

C^.SAR    JiEGINS    THE    CiVIL    WaR. 

6.  Caesar  cum  adhfic  in  Gallia  detineretur,  ne  imperfecto 
be!l6  discederet,  postulavit  ut  sib!  liceret,  quamvTs  absent!, 
iterum  consulatum  petere  ;^^  quod  ei  a  senatu  est  negiitum. 
Eii  re  commotus  in  Italiam  rediit,  armis  iiijilriam  acceptam 
vindicaturus ;  plurimisque  urbibus'^  occupiltis  Brundisium 
contendit,  quo  Pompeius  consulesque  confugerant.  Tunc 
summae  audaciae  f acinus  Caesar  edidit :  a  Brundisio  Dyrra- 
cliium  inter  oi)p6sitris  classes  gravissimfi  liierae  ^^  trfmsiit ; 
cessantibusque  copils,  qufis  subsequi  jusserat,  ciim  ad  eas 
arcessendas  •"**'  frustra  misisset,  morae^''  impatiens  castris 
noctu  egreditur,  clam  solus  naviculam  conscendit  obvolfito 
capTte,  ne  fignosceretur.  Miire,  adverso  vento  vehementer 
flante,  intumescebat ;  in  altum'  tamen  protiniis  dlrigl  navi- 
gium  jubet ;  cunupie  gubernator  paene  obrutus  Ihictibus  ^'^ 
adversae  tempestati  cederet :  ' '  Quid  times  ?  "  ait ;  "  Caesa- 
rem  vehis." 

C^:SAR    DEFEATS    POMPEY    AND    SUBDUES    THE    P]aST. 

7.  Deinde  Caesar  in  Thessaliam  profectus  est,  ul)!  Pompe- 
ium  Pharsiilico  proelio  fudit,  fugientem  persecutus  est, 
eumque-^  in  itinere  cognovit  occlsum  fuisse.  Turn  bellum 
Ptolemaeo,^*^  Pompeii  interfectori,'^  intulit  a  quo  sibi  quoque 
insidifis  pararl  videbat ;  quo  victo,  Caesar  in  Pontum  transiit, 
Pharnacemque,  Mithridatis  fllium  rebellantem  aggressus  in- 
tra quintum  al)  adventu  diem,  quattuor  vero,  quibus  in 
conspectum  venerat,  horls,  uno  proelio  profligavit.  Quam 
victoriae  celeritatem  inter  triumphandum  notavit,  Tnscripto 
inter  pompae  ornamenta  trium  verborum  titulo,  Vent,  vidi, 
vim.     Sua  deinceps  Caesarem  ubique  comitata  est  fortuna. 


READING   LESSONS.  387 


Scipionem  et  Jubam,  Nuiiiidiae  regem,  reliquifis  rompeianfi- 
rum  partiiim  in  Africa  retoventes,  devicit.  Fompeil  liberos 
in  Ilispania  snpeiTivit.  Clementer  Cisus  est  victoria,'''^  et 
omnibns/^  qui  contra  se  arma  tulcraut,  pepercit.  Regressus 
in  urbeni,  qninquies  triumpliavit. 

C^SAR    IS    DECLARED    PeRFETUAL    DICTATOR,    BUT    IS    SOON 
AFTER    ASSASSINATED. 

8.  BellTs  cTvTlibus  confectis,  Caesar,  dictator^  in  perpetuum 
creatus,  agere  insolentius  coepit.  Senatnm  ad  se  venientem 
sedens  excepit,  et  quemdam,  ut  assnrgeret  monentem,  irato 
vnltfi  "^^  respexit.  Cum  Antonius,  Caesaris  in  omnibus  expe- 
ditionibus  comes,  et  tunc  in  cclnsulfitu  collega,  el^^  in  sella 
aurea  sedenti  pro  rostrls  diadema,  TnsTgne  regiuni,  imponeret, 
non  vTsus  est  eo  facto  offend!.''"  Quare  cdnjuratum  est  in 
eum  a  sexagiuta  amplius  virTs,"-  Cassio  et  Bruto  ducibus  con- 
spirationis.  Cum  igitur  Caesar  Idibus ''^  Martils  in  senatum 
venisset,  assidentem  specie  officii  circumsteterunt,  illicoque 
unns  e  conjuratTs,  quasi  aliquid  rogaturus,  propius  accessit, 
renuentique  togain  ab  utrdque  umero  apprehendit.  Deinde 
clamantem,  " Ista  quidem  vis  est,"  Cassius  vulnerat  paullo 
Infra  jugulum.  Caesar  Cascae  brachium  arreptum  grapbio 
trajecit,  conatusque  prosilire  aliud  vulnus  accepit.  Cum 
Marcum  Brutum,  quem  loco  filii  liabebat,  in  se  irruentem 
vidisset,  dixit :  "  Tu  quoque,  fill  mi!"  Dein  iibT  animad- 
vertit  undique  se  strictis  pugidnil)us  petT,  t(5ga  caput  obvoi- 
vit,  atque  ita  tribus  et  vTgintl  plagTs  *^  confossus  est. 

Character  of  Cjesar. 

9.  Erat  Caesar  excelsa  statura"*^  nigris  vegetTsque  oculls,'*- 
ctipite  *-  calvo  quam  calvitii  deformitatem  aegi-e  ferebat,  quod 
saepe  obtrectantium  jocis  esset  obnoxia.  Itaque  ex  omnibus 
honoribus  sibi  a  senatii  populoque  decretis  non  aliud  recepit 
autusiirpavitlibentius,  quam  jus  laureae  perpetuo  gestandae. 
Eum  vnu^  parcissimum  fuisse  ne  inimicl  quidem  negarunt ; 


388  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

iinde  Ciito  dicere  solebiit,  imum  ex  omnibus  Caesiirem  ad 
everteodam  rempublicam  sobrium  accessisse.  Armorum  ^  et 
eqiiitandi  peritissimus  erat ;  laboris  ultra  fidem  patiens ;  in 
agmine  nonnnnquam  equo,  saepius  pedibus  anteibat,  cilpite 
deteeto,  sTve  sol,  sTve  imber  esset.  Longissimas  vias  in- 
credilnlT  celeritate  confecit,  ita  ut  persaepe  nuntios  de  se 
praevenerit,  neqiie  eum  morabantur  flumina,  quae  vel  nando^ 
vel  iunlxus  infliltls  utribus  *^  traiciebat. 


III.    THE  hp:lvetian  war. 

\_Fro7n   Woodford's  Epitome  of  Ccesar's  Gallic  ]V(n\^ 

Caisau's  Description  of  Gaul. 

1.  Gallia  est  oninis  divTsa  in  partes  tres.  Unam  incolunt 
Belgae,  aliam  AquTtfinl,  tertiain  Celtae,^  qur"^  lingua"''  nostra 
Gain  appellantur.  Ill  omnes  lingua,"'  institutis,  legibus  inter 
se  differunt.  G alios  ab  AquitanTs  Garumna  flumen  dividit,  a 
BelgTs  Matrona  ct  Sequana.  Fortissimi"  sunt  Belgae,  prop- 
terea  quod  proxiniT  sunt  GermanTs,'-'  qui  trans  Rlienum  inco- 
lunt, quibuscum  continenter  bellum  gerunt.  Ilelvetii  quoque 
reliquos  G alios  virtute"'  praecedunt,  quod  fere  cottldianTs 
proeliis  cum  GermfinTs  contendunt.  Una  pars  initium  capit  a 
flumiue  Rliodiino  ;  continetur  Garumna  flumine,  oceano,  flni- 
bus  Belgarum.  Attingit  etiam  flumen^  Rhenum.  Yergit  ad 
septentriones.  Belgae  ab  extremis  Galliae  finibus  oriuntur, 
pertinent  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis  Rlieni,  spectant  in 
septentriones  et  orientem  solem.  Aquitania  a  Garumna  flu- 
mine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes  et  eam  partem  ocean!,  quae  est 
ad  Hispiiniam,  pertinet,  spectat  inter  occasum  soils  et  sep- 
tentriones. 

OllOETOKIX    AND    HIS    PlAN    OF    EMIGRATION. 

2.  Apud  Helvetios  nobilissimus  ^  et  ditissimus  fuit  Orge- 
torix.  Is  conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit,  et  civitati"  per- 
suasit,  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent.    Facilius 


HEADING   LESSONS.  389 


els  persuasit,  quod  iindiqnc  loci  iiatuiTi  ""'^  Helvetil  continentur  : 
iiiui  ex  parte  11  limine  Rlieno  latissiino  atque  altissimo,  qui 
agrum  Helvetium  a  Germams  dividit ;  altera  ex  parte,  monte 
Jura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Ilelvetios  ;  tertia, 
lacu  Lemanno  et  flumine  Rliodano,  qui  Provinciam  nostram 
ab  Helvetiis  dividit. 

The  Helvetians  pkepaue  to  leave  their  Country. 

3.  His  rebus  adducti,  constituerunt  ea  quae'  ad  proflcis- 
cendum  pertinerent  comparare,*''  jumentorum  et  carrorum 
quara  maximum  numerum  coemere,  sementes  quam  maximas 
facere,  cum  proximis  civitatibus  amicitiam  confirmare.  In 
tertium  annum  profectiouem  lege  confirmant. 

Embassy  of  Orgetorix  to  the   Neighboring    States. 

4.  Ad  eas  res  c5nf Iciendas  "''^  Orgetorix  deligitur.  Is  lega- 
tionem  ad  civitates  suscepit.  In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Cas- 
tico,  Sequano,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occuparet,  quod^ 
pater  ante  liabuerat.  Itemque  Dumnorigi  Aeduo,  qui  max- 
ime  plebl  acceptus  erat,  ut  Idem  conaretur  persuadet.  Inter 
se  jusjurandum  dant,  et  totlus  Galliae  sese  potlii  posse  spe- 
rant.  Ea  res  est  Helvetiis  ^'^  enuntiata.  Orgetorigem  ex  vin- 
culls  causam  dicere  coegerunt.  Damnatum  poenam  sequi 
oportebat,  ut  Ignl'^'^  cremaretur.  Die  constituta^^  Orgetorix 
ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiam,  et  omnes  clientes  obaera- 
tosque  conduxit.  Per  eos  se  eripuit.  Cum  civitas,  ob  eam 
rem  incitata,  armis  jus  suum  exsequi  conaretur,  Orgetorix 
mortuus  est. 

The    Route    selected. 

5.  Post  ejus  mortem  niliilominus  Helvetil  id  quod  constl- 
tuerant  facere  ^'-^  conantur.  Ubi  se  ptiratos  esse  '^^  arbitrati 
sunt,  oppida  sua  omnia,  vicos,  privata  aedificia  incendunt. 
Trium  mensium  mollta  clbaria  quemque  domo  efferre  jubent. 
Erant  omnino  itinera  duo,  quibus'  itineribus*'  domo  exire 
possent:    unum   per  Sequanos,   angustum  et  difficile,  inter 


390  FIKST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

montem  Juram  et  fliimen  Rhodfuium;  alteram  per  provinciam 
nostram  multo  facilius  atque  expeditiiis,  propterea  quod 
Rhodanus  nonniiUTs  locis^Wado^  traiisitur.  Extremum  op- 
piduiii  Allobrogum  est  Genava.  Ex  eo  oppido  pons  ad  Hel- 
vetios  pertinet.  Omnibus  rebus  ^*^  ad  profectionem  compara- 
tis,  diem  dlcunt,  qua  die  ad  rlpam  Rliodani  omnes  conveniant. 
Caesari  cum  id  uuntiatum  esset,  maturat  ab  urbe  proficiscl, 
et  ill  Galliam  ulteriOrem  coiiteiidit.     Pontcm  jubet  rescind!. *'' 

CiKSAK    RECEIVES    AN    EMBASSY    FROM    THE    HeLVETII. 

fi.  Ubi  de  ejus  adventu  Ilelvetii  certiores"  facti  sunt,  lega- 
tos  ad  eum  mittunt,  (jur^  dlcerent  '  silu^^  esse  in  animo  sine 
ullo  mfdeficio  iter  per  provinciam  facere.'*  Caesar  a  lacfi  Le- 
manno  ad  nuMitem  Juram  murum  fossamque  perducit.  Negat 
se  posse  ^"^  iter  fdlT  per  provinciam  dare.'''*  Relinquebatur  una 
per  Sequanos  via,  (j[ua,  SCMpirinTs  invitis,  propter  angustias  ire 
non  poterant.  Ills  ^*  cum  pcrsuadere  non  possent,  legatos  ad 
Dumnorigem  mittunt,  ut,  eo  deprecatore,''^  impetrarent.  Dum- 
norix  apud  SequTmos  plurinuim  poterat,  et  Ilelvetiis  ^^  erat 
amicus,  quod  Orgetorigis  filiara  in  mfitrimonium  duxerat.  Ita- 
que  rem  suscipit,  et  a  Sequanis  impetrat,  ut  per  fines  suos 
Helvetios  ire  patiantur. 

The  ^Edui    and  Other  Tribes   complain  to  C^.sar  of 

THE  Encroachments  of  the  Helvetii. 
7.  Caesar  in  Itrdiam  magnls  itineribus  contendit,  duasque 
ibi  legiones  conscribit,  et  tres  ex  hibernis  educit,  et  in  filteri- 
orem  Galliam,  per  Alpes,  Tre  contendit.  In  fines  Vocontiorum 
die  septimo  pervenit ;  inde  in  Allobrogum  fines,  ab  Allobro- 
gibus  in  Segusianos  exercitum  diicit,  HI  sunt  extra  provin- 
ciam trans  Rhodanum  priml.  Helvetii  jam  per  angustias  et 
fines  Sequanorum  suas  copitis  transduxerant,  et  Aeduorum 
agros  populabantur.  Aedul,  cum  se^  defendere  non  possent, 
legatos  ad  Caesarem  mittunt  rogatum''^  auxilium.  Eodem 
tempdre  Aedui  AmbarrI,  consanguine!^  Aeduorum,  Caesarem 


HEADING    LESSONS.  391 

certiorem  faciunt,  sese,  clepopulatls  agrls,  non  facile  ab 
oppidis  vim  hostium  proliibcre.  Item  Allobroges,  qui  trans 
Rliodanum  vicos  possessioiiesqiie  habebant,  fOga*^  se  ad 
Caesarem  recipiimt.  Caesar  non  exspectandum  sibi^"  statuit, 
dum  in  Santonos  Helvetii  pervenirent. 

C^SAK  SURPKISES  AND  ROUTES   OnE    CaNTON  OF  THE   HeLVETII 

AT  THE   River  Arar. 

8.  Fliimen  est  Arar,  quod  per  fines  Aeduorum  et  Sequano- 
rum  in  Rhodauum  Tnfluit,  incredibili  lenitate/*^  ita  ut  oculis, 
in  utram  partem  fluat,  judicari  non  possit.  Id  Helvetii,  rati- 
bus  et  lintribus  junctis,  transibant.  Ubi  Caesar  certior  fac- 
tus  est  tres  copiarum  partes  Helvetios  -^  transduxTsse,  quartam 
fere  partem  citra  flumen  esse,  de  tertia  vigilia  e  castris  pro- 
fectus  ad  earn  partem  pervenit,  quae  nondum  transierat.  Eos 
impeditos  aggressus,  magnam  eorum  partem  concidit.  ReliquT 
sese  in  proximas  silvas  abdiderunt.  Is  pagus  appellabatur 
Tiguiinus :  ^  nam  omnis  civitas  Helvetia  in  quattuor  pagos 
divTsa  est.  Hie  pagus  Lueium  Cassium  consiilem  interfece- 
rat,  et  ejus  exercitum  sub  jugum  rniserat.  Ita,  quae  pars 
calamitatem  popiilo  ^^  Romano  intulerat,  ea  princeps  poenas 
persolvit. 

C^SAR  crosses  the  River  Arar  and  receives  a 
Second  Embassy  from  the  Helvetii. 

9.  Hoc  proelio  facto,  reliquas  copias  Helvetiorum  ut  conse- 
quT  posset,  pontem  in  Arare  faciendum  curat,  atque  ita  exer- 
citum transducit.  Helvetii,  repentino  ejus  adventu  commoti, 
legatos  ad  euin  mittunt,  cujus  legationis  Divico  princeps  fuit, 
quibello'^"'  Cassiauo  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat.  Is  ita  cum 
Caesare  egit :  '  SI  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum  Helvetils  face- 
ret,  in  eam  partem  ituros,  ubi  Caesar  eos^^  esse  voluisset ;  sin 
bello  persequi  perseveraret,  reminisceretur  et  veteris  incom- 
modl  ^^  popull  RomanI,  et  pristinae  virtutis  Helvetiorum  ;  se 
ita  a  patribus  majoribusque   suls  didiclsse,  ut  magis  virtute 


392  FIKST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

quam  dolo  contenderent.  Quare,  ne  committeret,  lit  is  locus, 
ubi  constitissent,  ex  calamitate  populi  Eomani  nomen  cape- 
ret.' 

The   Helvp:tii,  encouka(;ed  by  the  Success  of  their 
Cavalry,  prepare  to  attack  Caesar's  Army. 

10.  His  Caesar  ita  respondit : ''  '  Sib!^^  mimis  dubitationis 
darl,  (piod  eas  res,  qufis  cominemorasseot,  memorial'  teneret. 
SI  veteris  coutumeliae  '-  oblTvisci  vellet,  mini  receiitium  iiijuri- 
arimi  inemoriam  depoiiere  posse?  Taiiien,  si  ol^sides  ab  iis 
sibi  deotur,  iiti  ea^"  quae  poUiceantur  facturos  intelligat,  et  si 
Aeduis  de  injfiriis  quas  ipsis  socilsque  eorum  intulerint,  item, 
si  Allobr6gil)us  satisfaciaut,  sese  cum  ils  pacem  facturum.' 
Divico  respoiidit :  '  Ita  Ilelvetios  a  majoribus  suls  institfitos 
esse,  uti  obsides  acci[)ere,  iiou  dare  consueveriiit ;  ejus  rei 
popiilum  Romanum  esse  testem.'  Hoc  responso  dato,  discessit. 
Postero  die  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent.  Idem  facit  Caesar. 
Equitiltum  omnem  praemittit,  qui'  videaut,  quas  in  partes 
hostes  iter  faciant.  Qui  alieiio  loco  cum  equitatu  Helvetiorum 
proelium  committunt,  et  pauci  de  nostris  cadunt.  Ilelvetii 
audacius  subsistere,  nonnunquam  nostros  lacessere  coepe- 
runt.  Caesar  suos  a  proelio  continebat,  ac  satis  liabebat  in 
praesentia  hostem  ntpinls ''^  prolilbere.  Ita  dies-*  circiter 
quindecim  iter  lecerunt,  liti,  inter  novissimum  hostium  agmen 
et  nostrum  primura,  non  amplius  quinis  aut  senis  milibus^ 
passuum  interesset. 

The  xKdli  neglect  to  furnish  the  Corn  they  had 
promised  and  C>*:sar  calls  the  Gallic  Chiefs  to 
a  Council. 

11.  Interim  cottidie  Caesar  Aeduos^"  frumentum,  quod^ 
essent  publice  poUiciti,  flagitare.  Nam,  propter  frigora,  non 
modo  frumenta  in  agris  matfira  non  erant,  sed  ne  pabtili  qui- 
deni  satis  magna  copia  suppetebat.  Eo  autem  frumento,^ 
quod  flumine  Arare  navibus  subvexerat,  minus  iiti*'^  poterat, 


KEADING    LESSONS.  393 


quod  iter  iib  Arfire  llelvctii  averterant,  a  quibus  discederc 
nulcbat.  Dicni  ex  die  dficere  AeduT :  conferri,  comportarT, 
adessc  dicere.  Ubi  se  diutius  duel  intellexit,  et  diem  Tnstarc, 
quo  die  f ruinentum -'  inllltibus  metirl  oporteret,  convocatTs 
eorum  principibus,  quorum  magnam  copiam  in  castrls  habe- 
bat,  in  his  Divitiaco,  et  Lisco,  qui  summo  magistrfitul  ^^  praee- 
rat,  graviter  eos  accusat,  quod  ab  ils  non  sublevcltur  ;  prae- 
sertim  cum  magna  ex  parte  eorum  precibus  adductus,  bellum 
susceperit.  Turn  demum  Liscus  proponit :  '  esse  nonnuUos, 
quorum  auctoritas  apud  plebem  plurimum  valeat ;  lios  ^^  sedi- 
tiosa  atque  improba  oratione  inultitudinem  deterrere,^^  ne 
frumentum  coriferant.  Ab  iisdem  nostra  consilia  hostibus 
enuntiaii ;  lios  a  se  coerceii  non  posse.  QuTn  etiam,  quod 
rem  Caesarl  enuntiarit,  intellegere  sese  quanto  id  cum  peri- 
culo  fecerit,  et,  ob  earn  causam,  quamdiu  potuerit,  tacuisse. 

Liscus  informs   C^sak  that  it  is  owing  to  the  Treach- 
ery   OF    DUMNORIX    THAT    SUPPLIES  ARE    NOT    FURNISHED. 

12.  Caesar  hac  oratione  Dumuorigem,-^  Dlvitiaci  fratrem, 
designaii*^  sentiebat ;  sed  quod,  pluribus  praesentibus,  eas 
res  jactarl  nolebat,  celeriter  concilium  dimittit,  Liscum  re- 
tinet ;  dlcit  llberius  atque  audacius.  Eadem  secreto  ab  aliis 
quaerit ;  reperit  esse  vera  :  '  ipsum  esse  Dumnorigem  summa 
audacia,"*"  magna  apud  plebem  propter  liberalitatem  gratia, 
cupidum  novarum  rerum;^  complures  annos  -^  omnia  Aeduorum 
vectigalia  parvo  pretio  redempta  habere  ;  propterea  quod,  illo 
licente,  contra  liceri  audeat  nemo.  His  rebus  suam  rem  fami- 
liarem  auxisse,  magnum  numerum  equitatiis  semper  circum  se 
habere.  Favere  Helvetiis  "  propter  atf  initatem,  odisse  Caesa- 
rem  et  Romanos,  quod  eorum  adventu  potentia  ejus  demmQta, 
et  DTvitiacus  frater  in  antiquum  locum  gratiae  atque  honoris 
sit  restitutus.  Si  quid  accidat  RomanTs,  summam  in  spem 
regni  per  Helvetios  obtinendT  venire  ;  imperio  populi  RomfinT, 
non  modo  de  regno,  sed  etiam  de  ea  quam  habeat  gratia, 
desperare. 


394  FIEST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

DiVITIACUS     BESEECHES    CAESAR    NOT    TO    TAKE    SeVERE    MEAS- 
URES    AGAINST     HIS     BROTHER. 

13.  Cum  ad  has  suspiciones  certissimae  resaccederent,  satis 
esse  causae  arbitrabatur,  quare  in  earn  aul  ipse  aiiimadver- 
teret,  aiit  civitatem  animadvertere  juberet.  His  omnibus 
iinurn  repugnabat,  quod  DivitiacI  friltris  suinmum  in  populum 
Romanum  studium,  summam  in  se  voluntatem,  egregiam 
fidem,  justitiam,  temperantiam  cognoverat :  nam  ne  ejus 
supplicio  Divitiaci  animum  offenderet  verebatur.  Itaque, 
priusquam  quicquam  conaretur,*^"^  Divitiaciim '*^  ad  se  vocari 
jubet ;  simul  commcjnefacit  quae,  ipso***^  praesente,  in  concilio 
Gallorum  sint  dicta  ;  et  ostendit  quae  separatim  quisque  de 
eo  apud  se  dixerit.  Divitiacus  multis  cum  lacnmis  obsecrare 
coepit,  ne  quid  gravius  in  fratrem  statueret :  '  scire  ^^  se  -^  ilia 
esse  vera,  sese  tamen  et  amore  fiTiterno  et  existimatione  vulgi 
commovtM-T.  Quod  si  quid  ei^"'  ii  Caesare  gravius  accidisset,  cum 
i[)se  eum  locum  amicitiae  apud  cum  teneret,  neminem  existi- 
maturum  non  sua  voluntate  factum,  qua  ex  re  futurum,  uti 
totius  Galliae  ^  animl  a  se  avertercntur.'  Caesar  ejus  dextram 
prendit ;  Dumnorigein  ad  s(3  vocat ;  fratrem  adhibet ;  quae 
in  eo  reprehendat  ostendit ;  nionet  ut  in  reliquum  teinpus 
omnes  suspiciones  vltet. 


C^CSAR    PREPARES    TO    ATTACK    THE    HeLVETII. 

14.  Eodem  die  ab  exploratoribus  certior"  f actus  hostes  sub 
monte  consedTsse  milia-*  passuum  al^  ipslus  castrls  octo,  qualis 
esset'"'^  natfira  montis  et  qualis  in  circuitu  adscensus,  qui  cog- 
noscerent^^  misit.  Renuntiatum  est  facilem  esse.  De  tertia 
vigilia  Titum  Labienum,  legatum,  cum  duobus  legionibus 
summum  juguin  montis  adscendere  jubet.  Ipse  de  quarta 
vigilia  eodem  itinere,  quo  hostes  ierant,  ad  eos  contendit ; 
equitatumque  omnem  ante  se  mittit. 


READING    LESSONS.  395 


Cesar's  Plan  is  defeated  by  the  Mistake  of  Considius. 

15.  Piiiiifi  luce,  cum  sunimus  mons  t'l  Tito  Labicno  tcne- 
retur,  ipse  tib  iiostium  castiis  nou  loiigius  nillle  et  qulngentls 
passibus  abesset,  iieque  aut  ipsius  adveiitus,  aut  Labieni, 
coguitus  esset,  Considius,  eqiio  admisso,  ad  eum  accurrit ; 
dicit  inoiitein,  quein  a  Labieno  occiq)ai'I  volucrit,  ab  liosti- 
bus  ^^  teiieii  ;  id  se  ex  Gallicis  armis  atque  insignibus  cogno- 
vlsse.  Caesar  siiils  copias  in  proximuin  collem  subdCicit, 
aciem  Instniit.  Labienus,  lit  erat  ei  praeceptum  (ut  iindique 
uno  tempore  in  hostes  impetus  fieret),  monte  occupato, 
nostros  exspectabat,  proelioqiie  abstinebat.  Multo  denique 
die,  per  exploratores  Caesar  cognovit  montem  a  suls  teneri, 
et  Considium,  perterritum,  quod^  non  vTdisset  pro  viso  re- 
nuntiasse.  Eo  die,  qu5  consuerat  intervallo,  hostes  seqiiitur  ; 
et  milia  passuum  tria  ab  eorum  castrls  castra  ponit. 

To  SECURE  Supplies  Cii:sAR   turns    aside   from   the    Pur- 
suit   OF    THE     HeLVETII. 

16.  Postridie  ejus  die!  quod  omnino  biduum  siipererat, 
cum  exercitui  frumentum  metlri  oporteret,  et  quod  a  Bi- 
bracte,  oppido  Aeduorum  longe  maximo  et  copiosissimo,  non 
amplius  milibus  passuum  duodevTginti  aberat,  rei  friiinen- 
tariae  ^^  prospiciendum  existimavit,  ac  Bibracte  ^°  ire  contendit. 
Helvetii,  sen  quod  pcrterritos  Romanos  discedere  existimarent, 
sive  quod  re  frumentaria  ''^  intercludi  i)osse  confiderent,  itinere 
converso,  nostros  a  novissimo  aginine  insequi  ac  lacessere 
coeperunt. 

Cil<:SAR    PREPARES    FOR    A    GeNERAL    ENGAGEMENT. 

17.  Postquam  id  animum  advertit,  copias  suas  Caesar 
in  proximum  collem  subducit,  CHpiitatumque,  qui  sustineret 
hostium  impetum,  misit.  Ipse  interim  in  colle  medio  tri- 
plicem  aciem  instruxit.      Sarcinas  in  fmum  locum  confeni,  et 


396  FIRST  STEPS  IN  LATIN. 

eum  ab  ils,  qui  in  siiperiore  acie  coiistiterant,  mfiniri  jussit. 
Helvetii,  cum  omnibus  suls  earns  secuti,  impedimenta  in 
unum  locum  contiilerunt.  IpsI  confertissima  acie,"*^  rejecto 
nostro  equitatu,  phalange  facta,  sub  primam  nostram  aciem 
successerunt.  Caesar,  primum  suo"^'  deinde  omnium  remotis'*^ 
equis,  ut  spem  fugae  tolleret,  cohortatus  suos,  proelium  com- 
misit.  Milites,  e  loco  siiperiore  pilTs  missis,  facile  hostium 
phalangem  perfregerunt.  Ea  disjecta,  gladils  destrictis  in 
eos  impetum  fecerunt. 

C^SAR  TOTALLY  DEFEATS    THE   HeLVETII   IN  A  FlEKCE    BaTTLE. 

18.  Gallls '''  magno  erat  impedimeuto,^"'  quod,  pluribus  eo- 
rum  scutTs  **"' uno  ictfi  *"' plloruin  trilnsfTxis  et  couligatis,  cum 
feiTum  se  Inflexisset,  neque  evellere,  neque,  sinistra  impedita, 
satis  commode  pugnare  poterant.  Tandem  vulneribus  defessi, 
et  pedem  referre  et,  quod  mons  siiberat  circiter  miUe  pas- 
suum,  eo  se  recipere  coeperunt.  Capto  monte,  et  succedenti- 
l)us  nostrls.  Roil  et  Tulingl,  qui  agmen  hostium  claudebant, 
ex  itinere  nostros  aggressT,  circumvenere  ;  et  id  conspicatT 
Helvetii,  qui  in  montem  se  rece})erant,  rursus  instare  et  proe- 
lium redintegrare  coeperunt.  Roman!  conversa  signa  bipartlto 
intulerunt ;  prima  et  secunda  acies,  ut  victTs  ^*  ac  submotis  re- 
sisteret ;  tertia,  ut  venientes  exciperet.  Ita  ancipiti  proelio 
diu  atque  acriter  pugnatum  est. 

The  Helvetii  retreat  to  the  Territory  of  the 

LiNGONES. 

19.  Difitius  cum  nostrorum  impetus  sustinere  non  possent, 
alter!  se,  ut  coeperant,  in  montem  receperunt ;  alter!  ad  im- 
ped!menta  et  carros  suos  se  contiilerunt.  Nam  hoc  toto 
proelio,  cum  ab  hora  septimfi  ad  vesperum  pugnatum  sit, 
fiversum  hostom  videre  nemo  potuit.  Ad  inultam  noctem 
etiam  ad  imped!menta   piignatum   est,   propterea  quod    pro 


READING   LESSONS.  397 

vallo  caiTos  objecerant.  ImpedimentTs  castrisque  nostri 
potiti  sunt.  Ibi  Orgetorigis  filia  atque  uniis  e  filiis  captus 
est.  Ex  eo  proelio  circiter  milia  hominum  centum  et  triginta 
superfuerunt,  eaque  tota  nocte  icirunt :  in  fines  Lingonum 
die^^  quarto  pervenerunt,  cum,  et  propter  vulnera  militum 
et  sepulturam  occTsorum,  nostri  eos  sequT  ndn  potuissent. 
Caesar  ad  Lingones  litteras  nunti()sque  misit,  ne  eos  fru- 
mento  neve  alia  re  juvarent.  Ipse,  triduo  intermisso,  cum 
omnibus  copiis  eos  sequi  coepit. 

Tit?:    Helvetii   make   Terms    with    Cjesar   and    return 
TO   THEIR   Country. 

20.  Helvetii,  omnium  rerum  inopia  adducti,  legatos  de  dedi- 
tione  ad  eum  miserunt.  Qui  cum  se  ad  pedes  projecissent, 
suppliciterque  l(5cuti  pacem  petissent,  atque  eos  in  eo  loco, 
qu(")  tiim  essent,  adventum  suum  exspectare  jussisset,  parue- 
runt.  Eo  postquam  pervenit,  obsides,  arma,  servos,  qui  ad 
eos  perfugissent,  poposcit.  Helvetios  in  fines  suos  reverti 
jussit ;  et  quod,  omnibus  frugibus  amissis,  domi"'"' nihil  erat, 
Allobrogibus  imperavit,  ut  ils  frumenti  copiam  facerent ;  ip- 
sos  oppida  vicosque,  quos  incenderant,  restituere  jussit,  quod 
noluit  eum  locum  ^M'acare,"*^  ne,  propter  bonitatem  agrorum 
Germaul  in  Helvetiorum  fines  triinslrent. 

The  Number  of   the    Helvetii    before  and  after   their 
Migration. 

21.  In  castrls  Helvetiorum  tabulae  repertae  sunt,  litterls 
Graecis  confectae,  quibus  in  tabulls  nominatim  ratio  con- 
fecta  erat,  qui  niimerus  domo^^  exlsset^  eorum,  qui  arma 
ferre  possent,  et  item  separatim  puerl,  senes,  miilieresque. 
Summa  omnium  fuerat  ad  milia  trecenta  sexaginta  et  octo. 
Eorum,  qui  domum  redierunt,  repertus  est  numerus  milium 
centum  et  decern. 


NOTES. 


I.    FABLES. 

1.  stans,  present  participle,  sec  sto;  domus,  genitive,  fourth  declen- 
sion, see  174;  how  does  it  ditTer  in  meiining  from  domi  ?  —  praetereun- 
tem  (see  praetereo)  agrees  with  lupum,  object  of  vidit.  Account  for 
the  position  of  inquit.  Is  non  tii,  etc.,  direct  or  indirect  discourse  ? 
How  is  locus  declined  in  the  plural  ?  Axs.  loci,  m.,  means  places  in 
books;  Idea,  y.,j)laces;  gen.  locorum,  dat.  locis,  ace.  locos,  m,  ;  loca,  n., 
etc. 

2.  Subveni  (imperative), //f/y^  —  puerb,  etc.,  reproached  to  the  boij  his 
rashiiess,  or,  as  we  say,  he  reproadicd  the  boi/  for  his  rashness.  —  repre- 
hendere  (infinitive),  to  reproce. —  licet,  //  is  ]>ermitted,  i.e.  i/ou  mat/ 
rejirove. 

3.  captura  is  a  partic,  from  capio,  agreeing  with  leonem.  —  malum 
(nonuiiative),  understand  me  Iddificat. 

4.  pellem  indutus, //a /;//(//  jnit  on  the  sl-in ;  induor,  although  passive 
in  form,  is  used  in  a  middle  or  reflexive  sense,  as,  /  clothe,  i.e.  I  put 
cJothinij  on  mij  self,  and  maybe  followed  by  the  accusative.  —  videret: 
why  sul)j.?  —  conatus  est,  a  deponent  verb;  see  282. —  haec,  i.e. 
vulpes.  —  audissem  for  audivissem;  see  89.  2. 

5.  tene  ....  sectari,  i/ou  hunt  <t  lion?  te  is  the  subject  of  sectari; 
ne  asks  the  question.  —  ne  ....  quidem,  not  even:  u-hose  voice  even  you 
could  not  endure ;  ne  quidem,  not  even,  always  have  the  emphatic  word 
between  them. 

G.  hie,  he.—\\v^b,  abl.  —  pontificem  sacrificaturum,  sc.  esse,  that 
the  priest  irould,  etc.  For  the  construction  in  indirect  discourse,  see 
348  ff .  —  mallem,  I  loould  rather. 

7.  tempore;  why  ablative? — Justa,  justly,  lit.  just  thinr/s ;  see 
83.  4. 

8.  peperit,  see  pario.  —  rata  hanc  paritiiram  (esse),  thinking  that 
she  would  lay  ;  see  348.  —  pliis  hordei,  more  barley  ;  see  237. 


NOTES.  399 


II.    LIFE  OF  CiFSAll. 

'        [For  a  sketch  of  Cmsar's  life,  see  p.  402.] 

1.  annum  ....  decimum,  being  in  his  sixteenth  year.  —  paul5  post .... 
uxorem,  a  little  while  after  he  married  Cornelia ;  ducere  uxorem,  to  marry, 
is  said  of  the  husband  only.  —  cujus  ....  inimicus,  shire  her  father  was 
nnfrlendlij  to  Sidla :  how  does  inimicus,  as  a  noun,  differ  from  hostis  ?  — ■ 
ut  eam  dimitteret,  to  divorce  her,  lit.  that  lie  should  divorce  her. — bonis, 
property.  —  cum  ....  quaereretur,  ichen  he  icas  even  sought  for  In  order  to 
he  put  to  death  :  what  kind  of  a  clause  is  this  1  why  imperfect  subj.  1  on 
what  verb  does  it  depend? — miitata  vests:  what  does  this  participle 
denote?  how  is  the  ablative  absolute  rendered  (259)?  —  quartanae, 
supply  febris,  lit.  sick  with  the  disease  of  quartan  ague;  laborabat.  —  per 
propinquos,  etc.,  hy  means  of  his  relations.  —  qui  ....  denegasset,  lohen  he 
ivould  have  refused  It  to  the  distinguished  men  who  begged  for  it;  denegas- 
set, see  338.  —  aliquando  ....  fiiturum,  will  ruin  (lit.  be  for  a  ruin)  the 
party  of  the  aristocracy,  etc.:  give  the  synonyms  of  cupio;  of  puer. 

2.  Sulla  died  b.c.  78.  —  mortuo,  282.  —  secedere,  to  retire.  —  per 
otium,  at  (his)  leisure.  —  dicendi,  of  oratory.  —  operam  daret,  might 
give  (his)  attention. —  SvN.  maneo,  remain,  whether  for  a  long  or  short 
time ;  commoror,  remain  for  some  time  in  a  place,  sojourn ;  habito, 
dwell  permanently.  —  se  gessit,  he  conducted  himself.  —  ut  .  .  .  .  esset  : 
does  this  clause  denote  purpose  or  result  ?  why  is  esset  in  the  impf. 
subj.  ?  —  Give  the  syns.  of  interim.  —  ad  ....  peciinias,  to  get  money: 
the  gerundive  sometimes  denotes  purpose.  —  servus,  mancipium,  famii- 
lus,  all  mean  a  slave;  servus,  as  one  politically  inferior;  mancipium, 
a  salable  commodity;  famulus,  a  family  possession. — Syn.  comes, 
companion,  a  feUoio-traveller  ;  socius,  a  companion,  member  of  the  same 
society ;  sodalis,  a  companion  in  amusement  or  pleasure.  —  quibus 
redimeretur:  does  this  relative  clause  denote  purpose  or  result? 
—  Miletus,  a  flourishing  city  of  Ionia.  —  proxime  aberat,  icas  at 
the  nearest  distance  off.  —  Syn.  poena,  general  word  for  punishment; 
supplicium  (supplico,  hneel),  a  severe  punishment  (the  criminal  kneeling 
for  the  blow) ;  criiciatus  (crux,  cross),  torture,  as  of  one  on  the  cross; 
tormentum  (torqueo,  twist),  a  racking  torture,  to  extort  confession. 

8.  quaestor  ....  factus :  fio,  in  the  sense  of  to  be  made,  appointed, 
is  used  as  the  passive  of  facio. — inter  ^e,  together.  —  conciipiscebat, 
desired  earnestly,  coveted.  —  in  ore  habebat,  lit.  had  In  his  mouth,  i.e. 
kept  repeating.  —  colas,  see  278.  1.  (1).  —  quod:  a  relative  generally 
agrees  in  gender  witli  a  noun  in  its  own  clause.  — memorabile  :  a  par- 
titive genitive  could  not  be  used  after  nihil ;  only  neuter  adjectives  of 


400  FIRST    STEPS    I>f   LATIN. 

second  declension  are  so  used.  —  orbis  terrarum  must  be  used  in  pref- 
erence to  terra,  when  there  is  a  decided  reference  to  otlier  lands. 

4.  in  ...  .  honoribus,  in  soliciting  the  favor  nf  tlic  plebeians,  and  in  can- 
vassing for  the  magistracies  (honors).  — dicebat  ....  sestertium,  lit.  lie 
used  to  say  that  there  icas  need  to  himself  of  1,000  tintes  100,000  sestertii, 
— 100,000,000  sesterces,  or  nearly  $4,000,000;  sestertium,  gen,  plur. 
used  for  sestertiorum.  —  ut  haberet  nihil :  after  he  had  freed  himself 
from  debt,  there  would  l)e  notliing  left  of  his  own.  —  consiilatum :  every 
Roman  citizen  who  aspired  to  the  consulship  had  to  pass  through  a 
regular  gradation  of  public  offices,  and  the  age  in  which  he  was  eligi- 
ble to  each  was  fixed  by  the  Lex  Annalis,  b.c.  180,  as  follows  :  for  the 
Quaestorship,  which  was  the  first  of  the  magistracies,  one  must  be 
twenty-seven  years  of  age;  for  the  -^'Edileship,  thirty-seven;  for  the 
Praitorship,  forty ;  and  for  the  Consulship,  forty-three.  (See  Leighton's 
Koman  History,  p.  185,  note  4.)  — inito  ....  tiilit  (see  ineo),  ivhen  he 
had  entered  upon  the  office  Qisar  proposed,  etc.  —  egenis  civibus,  among 
needy  citizens. — ut  ....  obsisteret,  that  he  might  opjiose  the  law's  being 
enacted.  —  forb,  from  the  forum.  The  Forum  was  situated  between  the 
Capitoline  and  Palatine  hills ;  it  was  the  chief  place  of  public  business 
(see  L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  385).  There  were  other  fora,  but  this  was  dis- 
tinguished as  Forum  Romunum,  or  as  Forum,  being  the  most  important. 
—  domi  se  continere,  to  remain  at  lunne.  —  ciiria,  from  the  senate-house  : 
senatus,  tlie  senate,  either  the  senators  or  the  ])lace  where  they  met ; 
curia,  the  building  ivhere  the  senators  assembled.  —  quidam,  some.  — non  ut 
mos  erat,  7iot  as  was  the  custom ;  mos,  an  established  custom,  especially 
of  a  nation;  c5nsuetudo,  habit,  which  results  in  a  settled  usage  (mos) ; 
caerimonia,  a  religions  ceremony.  —  consiilibus  Caesare  et  Bibiild,  in 
the  considship  of  C<esar  and  Bihulus.  The  year  was  generally  desig- 
nated at  Rome  in  this  way ;  the  name  of  the  consuls  for  the  year 
being  put  in  the  ablative  absolute  with  consiilibus.  This  was  the  year 
n.c.  59.  In  this  case  the  two  names  (nomen,  i.e.,  Julius;  cognomen, 
Caesar)  of  Caesar  are  used. 

5.  A  consul,  after  his  term  of  office  expired,  was  usually  sent  as 
proconsul  to  govern  a  province ;  by  Sulla's  laws,  a  consul  must 
remain  in  Italy  during  his  term  of  ofiice,  and  then  might  be  sent  to 
govern  a  province  (L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  182).  Cassar  departed  to  his 
province  in  b.c.  58  (L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  308).  —  gessit  ....  fere,  during 
the  nine  years  in  ichirh  he  icas  in  power  he  accomplished  in  substance  the  fol- 
lowing. —  primus  Romanorum,  frst  of  the  Romans.  —  ponte  fabricato, 
by  constructing  a  bridge.  —  maximis  ....  cladibus,  he  made  a  great 
slaughter.  —  lis,  from  them.  —  quo  in  bello,  in  this  war.  —  inclinante  in 


KOTES.  401 


i\\.g2iva.,  (jiving  way.  —  Syn.  scutum,  an/j  shield ;  clipeuB,  a  7-ound  shield ; 
parma,  similar  to  clipeus,  l)ut  smaller,  <i  buckler  ;  ancile,  an  oval  shield. 

—  in  primam  aciem,  to  the  front  (L.  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  ;]70).  — terga  ver- 
teniera,  turninc/  his  bark  (to  the  enemy),  Jleeing.  —  illic  sunt,  there  are 
those.  —  animos,  courage. 

C.  adhuc,  still.  —  ut  •  .  .  .  absent!,  that  it  should  be  permitted  to  him, 
although  absent ;  what  is  the  subject  of  liceret  ?  It  was  a  law  that  every 
candidate  for  the  consulship  should  appear  before  the  magistrate  in  the 
city,  and  have  his  name  entered  on  the  official  list  of  candidates  before 
election  (L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  322).  —  vindicatiirus,  to  avenge.  —  Brun- 
disium,  a  town  in  Calabria,  was  the  port  from  which  those  going  from 
Rome  to  Greece,  or  the  East,  embarked ;  Dyrrachium,  a  city  on  the 
coast  of  Illyricum.  —  cessantibus  copiis,  his  forces  delaying ;  what  does 
this  participle  denote?  —  flante,  blowing.  —  in  altum,  out  into  the  deep  sea. 

—  dirigi,  to  be  steered. — cederet,  icould  yield.  Caesar  had  sailed  from 
Brundisium  with  only  20,000  men  (L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  380).  Owing  to 
the  vigilance  of  the  enemy  the  rest  of  Cassar's  army  was  unable  to  fol- 
low him.  His  position  was  thus  critical ;  cut  off  from  the  rest  of  his 
army,  and  threatened  by  a  force  three  times  superior  to  his  own.  In 
his  impatience  he  attempted  to  sail  in  a  fisherman's  boat  across  the 
Adriatic  to  Brundisium,  for  his  reinforcements,  but  the  storm  compelled 
him  to  turn  back.  In  a  short  time  tlie  remainder  of  the  army  succeeded 
in  crossing;  at  the  battle  of  Pharsalus  (in  Thessaly),  Pompey's  army 
was  totally  defeated  (b.c.  48).     (L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  326  ff.) 

7.  fugientem,  [\\m\)  fleeing .  —  eumque  ....  fuisse,  and  on  the  way  he 
learned  that  lie  had  been  killed.  —  Syn.  cognosce,  learn  (something  be- 
forehand) ;  agnosco,  recognize  (something  before  known).  —  Ptolemaed, 
against  Ptolemy.  The  war  against  Ptolemy  is  called  the  Alexandrine  war 
(L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  332).  —  quattuor  ....  profligavit,  but  he  conquered 
him  in  one  battle  within  four  hours  after  he  had  come  ;  the  relative  quibus  is 
in  the  ablative,  agreeing  with  its  antecedent,  horis.  —  inter  triumphan- 
dum,  during  his  triumph.  After  a  successful  campaign,  the  victorious 
general  was  awarded,  by  the  decree  of  the  senate,  the  honor  of  a  triumph. 
He  entered  tlie  city  in  a  chariot  drawn  by  four  horses,  preceded  by  the 
captives  and  spoils  of  war,  and  followed  by  his  soldiers.  After  pass- 
ing along  the  Via  Sacra,  he  ascended  to  the  temple  of  Jupiter  Capi- 
tolinus  to  offer  sacrifices  (L.'s  Rom.  Hist.,  p.  181,  x.  2).  —  Pompeianarum 
partium,  of  the  Pompeian  party.  The  battle  was  fought  at  Thapsus, 
in  Africa,  in  b.c.  46.  —  in  Hispania:  the  two  sons  of  Pompey,  Cnaeus 
and  Sextus,  had  collected  a  large  army  in  Spain.  After  a  hard-fought 
battle  Cajsar  completely  defeated  them  at  Munda  (b.c.  45). 


402  FIKST    STEPS    IX   LATIN. 


8.  coepit  lias  passive  perf.  and  infinitives,  305.  1.  —  quendam,  for 
quemdam.  —  assurgeret,  wliy  imperfect  subj.  ?  —  ei  ....  sedenti,  on 
him  sitting  in  the  golden  chair.  —  regium,  roijal.  —  a  sexaginta  .  .  .  . 
viris,  hii  more  than  sixty  men.  —  conjuratum  est,  a  conspiracg  was  formed. 
—  Idibus  Martiis,  on  the  Ides  of  March,  i.e.  the  IStli.  —  assidentem 
....  circumsteterunt,  they  stood  around  him  sitting,  under  pretence  of 
]>aging  lionor.  —  quasi  ....  rogaturus,  as  if  to  ash  something.  —  claman- 
tem,  sc.  eum,  i.e.  Caesarem.  —  arreptum,  which  lie  had  seized. — quem 
....  habebat,  irhom  he  Itad  regarded  as  his  son. 

9.  erat  ....  statiira,  desar  loas  of  etc.,  see  292.  —  aegre  ferebat, 
grieved  (on  account) ;  quod  ....  obnoxia,  it  iras  often  the  subject  for  the 
jokes  of  his  slanderers.  —  sibi, /o  him.  —  laureae  gestandae,  of  ivearing 
a  crown  of  laurel.  —  eum  ....  fuisse,  that  he  was.  —  inimici :  give  the 
synonymes.  —  ne  and  quidem  enclose  the  emphatic  word  as  in  the 
text.  —  ad  .  .  .  .  rempublicam,  to  orertum  the  republic.  —  anteibat,  see 
anteeo. — detectum,  uncovered:  see  detego.  —  sive  ....  esset,  whether 
it  teas  sunshint^  or  rain.  —  Syx.  pluvia,  rain  (general  word) ;  imber,  rain 
(heavy,  pouring  sliower) ;  nimbus,  ?(/<«  (from  dark  clouds). — longis- 
simas  vias.  Csesar  was  noted  for  the  rapidity  of  his  movements ;  he 
is  said  to  have  travelled  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  Koman  miles  i)er 
day,  equal  to  about  ninety-two  English  miles. —  innixus  ....  utribus, 
resting  ujion  inflated  bags. 


III.    THE   HELVETIAN    WAR. 

Sketch  of  C.ksak's  Life. 

Gaius  Julius  C^icsar  was  born,  by  the  common  account,  in  tlie 
year  n.c.  100  (or,  by  a  probable  reckoning,  two  years  earlier),  and  was 
assassinated  in  the  year  b.c.  44,  at  the  age  of  fifty-six.  The  earlier 
date  of  his  birth  is  consistent  with  the  fact  that  he  was  Quaestor  in 
B.C.  G8,  vEdile  in  n.c.  65,  Praetor  in  02,  and  Consul  in  59,  since  one  was 
not  eligible  to  these  offices,  according  to  the  Lex  Annalis,  until  he  had 
entered  upon  the  age  of  thirty-seven,  forty,  and  forty-three  respectively. 
But  Ca>sar  was  most  likely  exempted  by  a  special  act,  as  Pompey  and 
many  other  prominent  political  leaders  had  been  (from  the  Lex  Annalis). 
Caesar  sprang  from  an  old  patrician  family,  but  the  circumstances  of  his 
early  life  brought  him  into  close  connection  with  the  Marian,  or  demo- 
cratic, party ;  for  his  aunt  Julia  had  married  Marius,  and  he  himself, 
when  but  a  bo}^  of  seventeen,  had  taken  the  daughter  of  Cinna,  one  of 
the  Marian  leaders,  for  his  wife.     At  the  bidding  of  Sulla,  when  die- 


NOTES.  403 


tator,  Cffisar  luid  refused  to  divorce  his  wife,  as  Pompey  liad  done. 
His  name  was  tlien  placed  upon  the  list  of  tlie  proscribed,  which 
means  that  he  could  be  killed  by  any  partisan  of  Sulla  who  happened 
to  see  him,  and  his  property  would  be  confiscated,  a  large  reward 
being  first  paid  to  the  assassin.  Casar  fled  at  once  from  the  capital, 
and  concealed  himself  among  the  Albans  hills,  until,  by  the  interces- 
sion of  the  vestal  virgins,  and  many  prominent  men  among  the 
nobility,  Sulla  was  induced  to  grant  a  pardon.  "  You  wish  it,"  said 
Sulla,  "  and  I  grant  it;  but  in  this  boy  there  are  more  than  one  Marius." 
Ca3sar,  however,  would  not  accept  pardon,  and  so  long  as  Sulla  lived, 
he  avoided  the  capital.  While  in  Asia  Minor,  he  distinguished  him- 
self at  the  siege  of  Mytilene  (or  Mitylene),  winning  the  civic  crown  for 
saving  the  life  of  a  citizen.  When  the  news  of  Sulla's  death  reached 
him,  he  returned  to  Rome;  but,  seeing  that  there  was  no  prospect  at 
liresent  of  the  popular  party  regaining  power,  he  decided  to  withdraw 
again  from  the  capital,  and  to  devote  himself  at  Rhodes  to  the  study 
of  oratory,  in  which  he  had  already  gained  some  renown.  On  his 
way  thither  he  was  captured  by  pirates,  with  whom  the  Mediterranean 
Sea  at  that  time  swarmed,  because  the  government  at  home  had  been 
for  many  years  so  inefficient  and  lax.  The  pirates  demanded  twenty 
talents  —  nearly  twenty-five  thousand  dollars  —  for  his  ransom.  "It  is 
too  little,"  said  Caesar ;  "  you  shall  have  fifty ;  but  once  free,  I  will 
crucify  you."  And  he  kept  his  word ;  for  no  sooner  had  he  gained  his 
liberty  than  he  manned  some  vessels,  overpowered  the  pirates,  and 
conducted  them  to  a  neighboring  city  as  prisoners. 

On  his  return  to  Rome,  Caisar  used  every  means  to  increase  his 
popularity.  His  affable  mannei's,  and  still  more  his  unbounded  liber- 
ality, won  the  hearts  of  the  people.  At  the  age  of  thirty-five  (assuming 
the  earlier  date)  he  was  Quaestor  in  Further  Spain  (n.c.  68).  Two  years 
later  (n.c.  65)  he  was  Curule  A^'Ailo,  an  office  which  gave  him  a  good 
opportunity  to  win  the  favor  of  the  people,  because  he  was  to  have 
charge  of  the  public  games  and  exhibitions.  As  ^dile,  Caesar  not 
only  embellished  the  forum  and  public  buildings,  and  exhibited  three 
liundred  and  twenty  pairs  of  gladiators  equipped  in  silver,  but  in  all 
the  diversions  of  the  tlieatre,  in  the  processions  and  public  tables,  he 
far  outshone  the  most  ambitious  of  his  predecessors.  His  prodi- 
gality was  frightful,  his  debts  enormous,  amounting  at  this  time  to 
more  than  one  hundred  million  sesterces  —  nearly  five  million  dol- 
lars. When  the  chief  pontiff  died  (b.c.  63),  the  most  illustrious  men 
of  the  state  sought  the  office.  Caesar,  however,  did  not  give  way  to 
them,  although  Catulus,  one  of  his  opponents,  who  had  been  Consul, 


404  FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

and  was  now  a  prominent  member  of  the  senate,  fearing  to  be  defeated 
by  one  so  mucli  inferior  in  rank,  station,  and  age,  offered  Caesar  large 
sums  of  money  to  pay  his  debts,  if  he  would  withdraw  from  the  con- 
test. On  the  morning  of  the  election,  Caesar  is  reported  to  have  said 
to  his  mother,  wlio  would  gladly  liave  had  him  withdraw  from  the 
struggle,  "  I  shall  tliis  day  be  either  chief  pontiff  or  an  exile." 

The  next  j'ear  Caesar  was  Praetor,  and  as  Propraetor  he  went,  at 
the  end  of  liis  year  of  office,  to  govern  Spain.  Before  liis  departure, 
his  old  friend  Crassus,  the  richest  man  at  Rome,  had  to  pay  a  part  of 
his  debts,  and  to  stand  security  for  the  rest  to  the  amount  of  nearly  a 
million  of  dollars.  Caesar  is  reported  to  have  said  in  his  reckless  way 
that  he  needed  a  hundred  million  sesterces  to  be  worth  just  nothing  at 
all.  In  Spain  he  displayed  that  civil  and  military  ability  which  after- 
wards made  him  famous.  It  must  have  been  a  strange  sight  to  see 
this  dissolute  spendthrift,  this  profligate  demagogue,  with  his  counte- 
nance pale  and  white,  withered  before  its  time  by  the  excesses  of  tlie 
capital,  tills  delicate  and  epilejitlc  man,  walking  at  the  head  of  his 
legions,  and  fighting  as  the  foremost  soldier  wltli  the  wild  tribes  of 
Lusitanla. 

On  Ills  return  to  Rome,  Caesar  found  Pompey,  who  had  just  com- 
pleted the  Mithridatic  war  in  the  East,  and  was  arranging  for  his 
triumphal  entry  into  the  city,  at  variance  with  the  senate.  Caesar  at 
once  saw  his  opportunity;  he  formed  a  political  coalition  with  Pompey 
and  Crassus,  one  part  of  the  bargain  being  that  Ca'sar  should  have 
the  consulship  for  the  next  year  (u.c.  50),  and  after  that  the  govern- 
ment of  Gaul  for  five  years.  In  accordance  with  this  programme, 
Caesar  was  entrusted,  at  tlie  expiration  of  his  consulship,  with  the 
command  of  Clsali)ine  Gaul,  Illyrlcum,  and  the  province  of  Narbo, 
or  simply  jn'ovinda,  with  three  h-gions,  for  a  term  of  five  years. 
Csesar  liad  now  attained  his  object.  As  Proconsul  of  Cisalpine  Gaul, 
he  could  watch  the  progress  of  affairs  in  the  capital,  while  the  threat- 
ening movements  of  tlie  tribes  in  Gaul  opened  to  him  the  prospect  of 
subjugating  the  country  and  training  an  army  for  the  impending  civil 
war,  for  Caesar  no  doubt  then  clearly  saw  that  a  struggle  between  him- 
self and  Pompey  for  the  chief  power  at  Rome  was  inevitable. 

For  a  long  time  the  Romans  had  felt  the  importance  of  possessing 
Gaul,  but  as  yet  no  systematic  effort  had  been  made  to  extend  their 
dominion  in  that  quarter  farther  than  occupying  the  seaboard  between 
the  Alps  and  Pyrenees  (n.o.  121).  The  climate  of  Gaul  was  health- 
ful, the  soil  rich  and  fertile,  and  the  intercourse  with  Rome  easy  by 
land  and  sea.     Roman  merchants  and  farmers  had  already  emigrated 


NOTES.  405 


in  great  numbers  to  Gaul,  and  disseminated  Koman  culture  and 
civilization  to  such  an  extent  that  many  of  the  tribes  could  transact 
business  with  Hoinan  r.mbassadors  in  the  Latin  language.  The  centre 
of  this  civilization  and  refinement  was  the  old  Greek  city  Massilia ; 
also  the  resort  of  those  vvlio  liad  been  banished  from  the  capital.  The 
merchants  stationed  tliere  carried  on  an  extensive  trade  with  tlie  inte- 
rior of  (jaul,  and  even  with  Britain.  They  transported  their  wares  uji 
the  Khone  and  Saone,  and  thence  ])y  land  to  the  Seine  and  Loire,  or 
across  to  the  Garonne,  and  so  to  tlie  Atlantic.  This  intercourse  pro- 
duced a  close  connection  between  the  tribes  from  the  Khone  and  the 
Garonne  to  the  lihine  and  tlie  Thames.  Caesar  saw  how  essential  the 
possession  of  this  country  was  to  the  Koman  state,  and  that  to  its  con- 
queror Avas  offered  the  prospect  of  surpassing  the  fame  of  Camillus 
and  Marius. 

Of  tlie  population  of  Gaul,  the  vl^^dui  had  entered  into  an  alliance 
with  Koine,  while  the  Belgfc  in  the  north,  and  the  Sequani  in  the 
south,  sought  an  alliance  with  the  Germans.  The  Tl^^dui,  relying  on 
the  assistance  of  Konie,  imposL'd  heavy  tolls  on  the  navigation  of  the 
Saone.  The  Sequani  complained  bitterly  of  this,  and  thinking  that 
the  Koman  government  was  too  much  occupied  with  its  own  conten- 
tions at  home  to  furnish  its  clients  assistance,  determined  to  rid  them- 
selves of  tlie  influence  of  Kome,  and  punish  the  ^Edui.  For  this 
purpose  they  invited  the  German  prince,  Ariovistus,  with  about  15,000 
men,  to  their  assistance.  The  itMui  were  defeated,  and  forced  to  pay 
tribute  to  the  Sequani,  to  give  hostages,  and  to  swear  never  to  wage 
war  for  their  recovery,  or  to  solicit  the  aid  of  Kome.  Divitiacus,  the 
chief  magistrate  of  his  clan,  alone  refused  to  sign  the  treaty,  and  fled 
to  Kome  to  ask  assistance.  Ariovistus  now  invited  other  tribes  across 
the  Khine,  and  demanded  land  to  settle  them  on;  the  whole  frontier  of 
Gaul,  from  the  sources  of  the  Khine  to  the  ocean,  was  threatened  by 
the  invasion  of  the  German  tribes.  These  tril)es  so  pressed  upon  tlie 
Helvetians,  who  were  hemmed  in  on  the  south  and  the  west  by  the  Alps, 
Lake  Geneva,  and  the  Jura  Mountains,  that  tliey  determined  to  aban- 
don their  country  to  the  Germans,  and  seek  larger  and  more  fertile 
fields  in  the  west.  Cassar,  on  the  expiration  of  his  consulship,  had 
remained  in  the  vicinity  of  the  capital  until  he  accomplished  his  politi- 
cal schemes.  But  when  the  news  reached  him  that  the  Ilelvetii  had 
abandoned  their  homes,  and  were  advancing  upon  Geneva  with  the 
purpose  of  crossing  the  Khone  and  forcing  their  way  through  the 
Province,  he  hastily  made  his  preparations,  reached  the  Rhone  in 
eight  days,  and  by  skilful   negotiations  delayed  the  advance  until  a 


406  FIRST   STErS   IN   LATIN. 


line  of  entrenchments  had  been  constructed  from  Lake  Geneva  to  the 
Jura  Mountains.  Defeated  in  the  attempt  to  cross  the  river  in  this 
direction,  the  Helvetii  were  compelled  to  take  their  way  along  its 
right  bank,  and  thus  make  their  journey  westward  by  a  more  north- 
erly route.  Caesar  hastily  collected  his  forces,  followed  up  the  left 
bank  of  the  Saone,  cut  to  pieces  in  a  fierce  battle  a  part  of  the  Helve- 
tian army,  and  pursued  tlie  remainder  to  Bibracte,  where  he  defeated 
tliem  in  a  terrible  battle,  and  compelled  the  survivors  to  return  to  their 
native  country  and  rebuild  their  homes. 

1.  Gallia:  Gaul  extended  from  the  Pyrenees  and  the  Gulf  of  Lyons 
on  the  south  to  the  British  Channel  and  German  Ocean  on  the  nortli. 
It  was  bounded  on  the  west  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  on  the  east  by 
the  Rhine  and  Italy.  It  was  called  Transalpina  (i.e.  bei/ond  the  Alps), 
to  distinguish  it  from  Cisalpina  (i.e.  on  this  side  of  the  Alps),  in  north- 
ern Italy.  It  included  France,  Belgium,  part  of  Switzerland  and  Hol- 
land, and  the  part  of  Germany  west  of  the  Rhine.  In  the  division 
wliich  Ciesar  here  makes  he  does  not  inchxde  the  southeast  part,  called 
Gallia  Narbonensis,  or  commonly  Provincia,  whence  the  modern  name 
Provence.  The  Roman  dominion  in  the  Provincia  was  secured  by  the 
establishment  of  Narbo  Marcius,  a  Roman  colony  on  the  Atax,  in 
B.C.  121. 

The  most  remote  Roman  towns  towards  the  west  and  north  were  Lug- 
dunum,  Convenarum  (or  Convenae),  Tolosa,  Vienna,  and  Geneva.  The 
country  was  well  provided  with  roads  and  bridges.  The  conmierce  on 
the  Rlione,  Garonne,  Loire,  and  Seine  was  considerable  and  lucrative, 
and  extended  even  into  Britain.  The  people  were  tall,  of  fair  complexion 
and  of  sanguine  temperament,  fond  of  fighting,  but  easily  discouraged. 
They  were  skilled  in  working  copper  and  gold.  Copper  implements  of 
excellent  workmanship,  and  even  now  malleable,  have  been  found  in  the 
tombs  in  many  places  in  Gaul.  The  Romans  are  said  to  have  learned 
from  them  the  art  of  tinning  and  silvering.  The  Gauls,  or  as  they 
called  themselves  the  Celts,  had  attained  so  much  skill  in  mining, 
that  the  miners,  especially  in  the  iron-mines  on  the  Loire,  acted  an  im- 
portant part  in  sieges.  There  was  no  political  union  among  the  different 
clans,  no  leading  canton  for  all  Gaul,  no  tie,  however  loose,  uniting  the 
whole  nation  under  one  leadership.  Sometimes  one  canton  would  ex- 
tend its  power  over  a  weaker  one,  as  the  Suessiones  in  the  north,  the 
maritime  cantons  in  the  west,  the  two  leagues  in  the  south,  one  headed 
by  the  vEdui,  the  other  by  the  Sequani ;  but  the  Celts  as  a  nation  lacked 
political  unity,  and  the  cantons,  for  the  most  part,  existed  independently 


NOTES.  407 


side  by  side.  In  matters  of  religion  they  had  long  been  centralized. 
The  association  of  Druids  embraced  the  British  islands,  all  Gaul,  and 
perhaps  other  Celtic  communities.  The  Druids  had  a  special  head 
elected  by  the  priests  themselves,  special  privileges,  as  exemption  from 
taxation  and  military  service,  and  an  annual  council. 

The  Province  in  Caesar's  time  extended  from  the  Pyrenees  to  the  Alps 
on  the  coast,  and  was  bounded  on  the  east  by  the  Alps,  on  the  west  by 
the  Mons  Cevenna  (Ce venues),  southward  from  the  latitude  of  Lugdu- 
num.  (Lyons),  and  on  the  north  (where  it  narrowed  off)  by  the  Khone, 
from  the  western  extremity  of  Lake  Geneva  to  the  junction  of  the 
Rhone  and  Saone.  — omnis:  Cajsar  means  all  of  Gaul,  except  that  part 
which  had  been  subdued  by  the  Romans,  in  opposition  to  Gallia  in  the 
limited  sense  of  one  of  the  three  divisions.  —  est  divisa,  lit.  has  been 
divided ;  usually  translated  is  divided,  as  this  form  in  English  expresses 
a  completed  action,  the  participle  being  used  as  an  adjective.  —  tres  is 
placed  at  the  end  of  the  sentence  as  being  the  significant  word,  indi- 
cating the  number  of  divisions.  —  iinam :  supply  partem  as  object  of 
incolunt.  —  aliam,  another  (part.):  if  Caesar  had  been  enumerating 
them  in  order,  he  would  have  used  alteram  or  secundam.  —  tertiam .... 
appellantui',  the  third,  those  who  are  called  in  our  language  Gauls.  — 
institutis,  in  customs ;  when  three  or  more  nouns  stand  together,  the 
conjunctions  may  be  omitted  altogether,  or  used  between  the  first  and 
second,  and  second  and  third,  etc.  —  inter  se,  among  themselves  or  from 
one  another.  —  dividunt  is  to  be  supplied  after  Matrona  et  Sequana.  — 
propterea  quod,  because  (lit.  because  of  this);  distinguished  between 
propterea,  fur  this  reason,  and  praeterea,  besides.  —  Germanis,  to  the 
Germans.  —  incolunt,  du:ell.  Give  the  synonymes  of  bellum.  —  quoque, 
also;  the  ablative  of  quisque  is  quoque.  —  virtiite,  in  valor;  virtiis,  from 
same  root  as  vir,  means  manliood. — iina  pars,  one  part,  of  the  main 
divisions  of  Gaul,  i.e.  Gallia  Celtica.  — fliimine,  etc.:  notice  that  the 
connectives  are  omitted.  —  finibus:  finis,  limit;  plur.,  fines,  limits, 
often  applied  to  what  is  included  in  those  limits,  territory.  —  ad,  towards. 
— ^Belgae;  hence  the  modern  Belgium.  —  inferi5rem  partem,  i.e. 
towards  the  mouth  of  the  river.  —  ad,  near  to.  —  spectat  inter  occasum 
solis,  it  looks  between  the  setting  of  the  sun,  i.e.  it  looks  northwest,  i.e.  from 
the  Province. 

2.  apud,  among ;  apud  with  the  name  of  a  person  often  means  at 
the  house  of;  with  the  name  of  an  author,  in  the  icritings  of  —  nobilis- 
simus,  see  141.  —  ditissimus  from  dis  (149.  4).  —  Is  is  expressed 
because  it  is  emphatic.  Note  the  position  of  the  word  Orgetorix 
at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  to  give  prominence  to  the  name.  —  Syn. 


408  riKST  STErs  in  latin. 

nobilis,  clarus,  illustris,  denote  distinction  :  clarus  is  one  celebrated 
iov  his  deeds ;  illustris,  for  his  rank  or  character;  nobilis,  for  his  noble 
birth;  celeber  and  inclutus  (inclitus)  denote  celebrity,  are  generally- 
used  of  things,  not  of  persons.  —  civitati,  the  state,  i.e.  the  people,  all  the 
inhabitants  of  a  state  under  one  government ;  it  is  here  the  indirect 
object  of  persuasit,  while  the  clause  introduced  by  ut  is  the  direct 
object  (321.  1).  —  exirent  is  plural  on  account  of  the  plural  implied  in 
civitas;  why  in  the  imperf.  subj.?  —  continentur,  are  hemmed  in. — 
una  ex  parte,  on  one  side.  —  Helvetium,  see  Helvetius.  —  altissimo ; 
altus,  high,  when  reckoned  from  below;  deep,  wlien  from  above  down- 
ward. —  tertia,  sc.  ex  parte.  —  lacii  Lemanno :  now  Lake  Geneva.  — 
The  pupil  sliould  be  required  to  describe  the  rivers  and  give  the  situa- 
tion of  the  places  mentioned  in  the  text. 

3.  adducti,  induced.  —  pertinerent  is  in  the  subjunctive,  because  it  is 
implied  that  these  things  belonged  to  their  departure  in  the  opinion  of 
the  Helvetians;  ichich  (as  the  Helvetians  thought),  pertained  to  their 
departure  (364). — jiimentorum  (from  same  root  as  jungo,  jiigum)  is 
both  pack  and  draught  animals.  —  sementes  ....  facere,  to  make  as 
large  sowings  as  j)ossihle  ;  for  the  force  of  quam  with  the  verb  possum 
in  connection  with  tlie  superlative,  see  151.  Obs.  o.  — proximus  lias  no 
positive ;  its  place  is  supplied  by  propinquus.  —  in  ...  .  confirinant, 
they  Jix  by  lair  upon  their  departure  for  the  third  year. 

4.  Ad  conf  iciendas,  to  accomplish  :  con  is  here  intensive ;  it  usually 
means,  in  composition,  together.  In  how  many  ways  may  a  purpose 
be  expressed  in  Latin  (321.  3,  Obs.  1)1  —  deligitur :  deligo,  to  choose  in 
general  (not  to  be  undecided  in  one's  choice) ;  eligo,  choose,  in  the  sense 
of  selecting  from  several.  —  Sequano,  tJie  Se<]uani an.  — Mi  regnum  .... 
occuparet:  this  clause  is  the  direct  object  of  persuadet,  prevails  upon  ; 
persuadet  is  in  the  historical  present,  and  may  therefore  be  followed 
by  the  imperfect  subjunctive  (320.  0).  Give  the  synonymes  of  regnum. 
—  plebi,  to  the  plebeians  (see  L.'s  Rom.  Hist.).  — ut  idem  conaretur,  that 
he  should  strive  for  the  same  thing. —  ibims,  «//.  —  Svn.  omnis,  all 
(without  exception),  in  opposition  to  nemo;  iiniversi  (unus-verto,  lit. 
turned  into  one,  i.e.  the  parts  brought  into  unity),  all  collectively,  in  oppo- 
sition to  singiili ;  cuncti,  all  united  together  in  opposition  to  dispersi ; 
totus,  the  ivhole,  in  opposition  to  separate  parts;  wliercas  integer  (in- 
tango,  lit.  untouched),  uninjured,  still  udiole.  —  ea,  res,  this  design,  lit.  this 
conspiracy.  —  ut,  when.  —  ex  ,  ...  dicere,  to  plead  his  cause  in  chains  ;  lit. 
out  of  chains,  i.e.  (being)  in  chains.  —  damnatum,  sc.  eum,  translate,  it  was 
necessary  that  the  punishment  should  follow  him  condemned,  namely,  that  he 
should  be  burned;  the  clause  ut  igni  cremaretur  explains  poenam  (342. 


NOTES.  409 


3) ;  for  this  use  of  the  subjunctive,  see  323.  5.  —  Syn.  ignis,  fire ; 
flamma,  flame;  incendium,  a  conflagration ;  ignis  is  the  cause,  flamma, 
the  e//ec^  —  familiam,  /(owse/io/t/.  —  clientes,  for  the  relations  between 
client  and  patron  at  Eome,  see  L.'s  Rom.  Hist. ;  here  the  word  is  ap- 
plied to  the  retainers  of  the  Helvetian  chief.  —  obaeratos,  debtors.  — 
per  eos  se  eripuit,  hij  means  of  them  he  rescued  himself;  for  the  force  of 
per,  see  248.  Obs.  1.  —  incitata,  incensed.  —  jiis  suum  exsequi,  to  enforce 
{lit.  follow  out)  their  authoriti/. 

5.  nihilominus,  lit.  the  less  by  nothing,  i.e.  nevertheless.  —  Syx.  conor, 
trij,  attempt;  molior  (moles),  undertake  a  difficult  icork ;  nitor  (lit.  lean 
upon),  strive.  — Sry.  aedificium  is  a  general  word  for  buildings  of  all 
kind ;  domus,  the  house  as  the  residence  and  home  of  the  family ;  aedes 
(pi.)  also  means  a  dwelling-house,  composed  of  several  apartments.— 
incendo,  accendo,  inflammo,  all  mean  to  set  onflre;  incendo,//om  within  ; 
accendo,  from  a  single  point,  as  to  light  a  lamp ;  inflammo,  to  put  into  a 
blaze,  either  from  within  or  without;  succendo,  set  on  flrefrom  beneath; 
cremo,  destroi/  by  burning.  — ivivixa  mensium  (genitive),  for  three  months. 

—  quemque,  each  one ;  jiibent,  for  the  construction  after  jubeo,  see 
342.  1.  (2).  —  quibus  itineribus :  the  noun  to  which  the  relative  refers 
is  sometimes  repeated,  as  in  this  case ;  this  repetition  of  the  antece- 
dent is  necessary  when  there  are  two  nouns  preceding,  and  it  might 
be  difficult  to  determine  to  which  the  relative  referred;  the  relative 
clause  is  consecutive,  and  takes  the  subjunctive,  see  322.  —  The  pupil 
should  be  required  to  trace  this  route  on  the  map.  —  alterum,  the  other 
(of  the  two).  —  locis,  for  the  omission  of  the  preposition,  see  270.  2.  c, 

—  vadd  transitur,  is  crossed  by  a  ford.  —  All5br6gum.  The  Allobroges 
dwelt  on  the  south  side  of  Lake  Geneva  next  to  the  Helvetii,  where 
the  Rhone  flowed  from  the  lake.  —  ad  Helvetios  pertinet,  extends 
(across)  to  the  Helvetii.  The  Helvetii  occupied  a  greater  part  of  what 
is  now  Switzerland.  —  diem  dicunt,  they  appoint  a  day ;  for  the  repeti- 
tion of  the  antecedent,  see  note  above.  —  conveniant,  are  to  assemble  : 
the  indicative  means  that  they  are  assembling;  what  does  this  relative 
clause  denote,  purpose  or  result  ?  —  Describe  the  Rhone.  —  matiirat, 
hastened,  the  historical  present ;  what  is  the  object  of  maturat  ?  — 
ab  urbe  (270.  2,  Obs.  2),  from  the  city,  i.e.  Rome.  Caesar  had  obtained 
I)reviously  to  the  expiration  of  his  consulship  (b.c.  59)  the  provinces 
Cisalpine  Gaul  and  lUyricum  with  three  legions  for  five  years ;  after- 
wards Transalpine  Gaul  was  added  with  another  legion.  He  set  out 
from  the  city  as  proconsul  in  the  spring  of  b.c.  58.  —  Galliam  ulterio- 
rem.  Farther  Gaul,  i.e.  Gaul  beyond  the  Alps,  or  Transalpine  Gaul. 

6.  certi5res  facti  sunt,  were  informed,  —  Syn,    Jegatus,  an  ambassa- 


410 


FIRST    STErS    IN   LATIN. 


do7-,  a  lieutenant;  orator,  one  who  pleads  a  cause,  an  envoy,  an  orator ; 
rhetor,  one  who  gives  lessons  in  rhetoric,  a  rhetorician.  — qni  dicerent,  ^o 
sai/,  lit.  ivho  should  sa^,  a  relative  clause  denoting  purpose.  — sibi  esse 
in  anim5,  that  it  was  their  intention,  lit.  that  it  was  to  them  in  mind :  what 
is  the  subject  of  the  verb  esse?  What  is  the  object  of  dicerent  ? — 
sine  ull5  maleficio,  ivithout  (doing)  a»y  harm.  The  Helvetii  had  two 
ways  by  which  they  could  go  from  home,  one  through  the  narrow  pass 
between  Mount  Jura  and  the  banks  of  the  Rhone ;  the  other  by  tlie 
fords  of  the  Rlione,  which  led  directly  into  the  Province.  In  order  to 
prevent  the  Helvetii  from  taking  the  latter  route,  Cassar  drew  a  line  of 
fortifications  on  tlie  southern  side  of  the  river,  from  Lake  Geneva  to 
the  Jura  mountains,  a  distance  of  about 
eighteen  miles.  To  accomplish  this  work, 
Caisar  had  the  10th  legion  =  5000,  and 
about  5000  or  6000  new  levies  =  10,000  or 
11,000  infantry.  —  negat  se  posse,  he  sai/s 
he  cannot ;  nego  is  generally  used  in  pref- 
erence to  dice  non.  —  iina  is  emphatic,  one 

07)1  y.  —  ut impetrarent,  that,  he  being  the 

intercessor,  theij  might  obtain  (their  request). 

—  plurimum  poterat,  ?«rs  able  to  accomplish 
a  great  deal  (Rule  27).  — Simicus,  friendli/. 

—  in  matrimonium  diixerat,  had  married  ; 
when  speaking  of  a  man  taking  a  wife, 
ducere  (ux5rem)  was  used,  i.e.  he  leads 
her  to  his  house;  of  a  woman  taking  a 
husband,  niibere  was  used,  lit.  nubere  se 

viro,  to  veil  herself  for  a  husband,  — an  allusion  to  the  veil  worn  during 
the  marriage  ceremony.  —  itaque,  therefore ;  itaque  means  and  so.  — 
What  is   the  object  of   impetrat  ? 

7.  in  Italiam,  iiito  Italy,  i.e.  into  Cisalpine  Gaul.  —  duas  legiones 
conscribit:  the  lltli  and  12th,  and  the  three  (the  7th,  8th,  and  9th) 
legions  in  winter-quarters  at  Aquileia,  in  Illyria;  one  legion  (the  10th) 
was  already  on  tlie  Rhone  =  six  in  all  =  about  25,000  men.  Tlie  AUo- 
broges  and  Vocontii  were  both  in  the  province. —jam,  at  this  time,  i.e. 
while  Caesar  was  absent  collecting  troops.  —  Angustias,  the  narroiv  pass 
between  the  Jura  and  the  Rhone.  —  Svx.  popiilor,  to  railage  (by  pillage 
and  fire);  vasto,  to  lay  ivaste ;  depopiilor,  utterly  to  ravage.  —  Aedwl 
Ambarri,  the  yEdui  near  the  Arar  (or  Saone).  —  rogatum,  to  ask,  see 
266.  —  depopiilatis,  tlie  use  of  the  participle  of  the  deponent  verb  in 
a  passive  sense,  see  279.  a ;  the  way  led  through  the  Pas-de-UEcluse. 


THE  FORTIFICATIONS 


FKOMLLAKK  GENEVA 
TO  THE  JUKA  MT. 


NOTES.  411 


—  sese  ....  non  facile  ....  prohibere,  that  they  with  difficultij  could  ward 
off,  etc.  —  se  .  .  .  .  recipiunt,  betake  themselves.  —  non  exspectandum 
(esse)  sib!  statuit,  he  thought  he  ought  not  to  wait. 

8.  flumen  est  Arar,  there  is  a  river  (called)  Arar;  now  the  Saone. 
It  unites  with  the  Khone  at  the  city  of  Lugdunuin  {Li/ons),  about  seventy 
miles  from  Lake  Geneva.  —  quod  agrees  with  fliimen  (Ilule  5).  —  incre- 
dibili  ....  possit,  ivith  incredible  smoothness  of  current,  so  that  it  cannot  be 
determined  bi/  the  eijes  in  ivhat  direction  it  flows;  lenitate,  smoothness,  con- 
trasted not  only  with  tlie  Rhone,  but  with  the  rapidity  of  tlie  rivers  in 
Italy.  —  possit,  322.  —  ratibus  et  lintribus  junctis,  the  ablative  abso- 
lute to  supply  the  place  of  the  perfect  active  participle  ;  lintribus,  small 
boats;  these  were  boats  made  of  logs  hollowed  out.  —  transibant,  were 
now  crossin;/ ;  note  the  force  of  the  imperf. — Helvetios  transduxisse, 
that  the  Helvetians  had,  etc.  In  Xapoleon's  Caesar,  this  place  of  crossing 
the  Saone  is  said  to  have  been  at  Chalons  sur  Saone;  according  to 
Goler,  near  Lyons,  between  Trevoux  and  Villefranche.  —  citra  fliimen, 
on  this  side  of  the  river,  i.e.  on  the  east  side.  — de  tertia  vigilia,  just  at 
the  beginning  of  the  third  icatch.  The  Komans  divided  the  night  into  four 
watches  (the  first  beginning  at  sunset),  each  of  tliree  hours;  the  third 
watch  began  at  midnight  and  extended  (it  now  being  the  month  of 
June)  to  2  o'clock  a.m.  —  aggressus  has  the  sense  of  a  perfect  active 
participle,  the  verb  being  deponent.  —  How  does  concidit  differ  from 
concidit?  —  is  pagus,  this  canton,  in  the  neigliborhood  of  Ziirich. — 
appellabatur,  from  appello,  name,  also  to  speak  to ;  voce,  call,  summon  ; 
nomino,  name,  in  the  sense  of  appointing  or  electing;  cito,  quote.  —  L. 
Cassium,  this  defeat  was  in  n.c.  107.  —  consiilem,  see  L.'s  Rom.  Hist., 
p.  50.  —  sub  jugum.  It  was  considered  the  lowest  degree  of  military 
disgrace  for  the  Roman  soldiers  to  be  obliged  to  pass  under  tlie  yoke. 
The  yoke  was  formed  by  placing  two  spears  upright  in  the  ground,  and 
fastening  a  third  across  the  top  of  the  other  two ;  under  this  the  con- 
quered army  must  pass  in  token  of  subjugation.  —  ea  .  .  .  .  persolvit, 
icas  the  first  to  suffer  punishment ;  princeps  is  equivalent  to  prima. 

9.  consequi,  to  overtake.  —  in  Arare,  over  and  upon,  i.e.  a  floating 
bridge.  —  faciendum,  286.  —  Why  is  ejus  used,  not  suo  ?  — legates,  in 
diplomatic  language,  an  ambassador  or  envoy ;  in  military  affairs,  lieu- 
tenant, i.e.  the  commander  of  one  or  several  legions ;  the  tribunes  still 
ranked  as  formerly,  among  the  higher  officers  of  the  legion,  but  their 
duties  were  in  Cassar's  time  limited  more  to  the  management  of  the  inter- 
nal affairs  of  the  legion.  Neither  did  a  tribune  take  the  place  of  a  legatus 
in  case  the  latter  was  disabled,  but  a  quaestor,  who  also  outranked  the 
tribunes.  —  cujus  . , , ,  fuit,  the  ohief  of  which  embassy  was  Divico.  —  bello 


412  riKST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 

Cassiand,  in  the  icar  with  Cassius,  i.e.  in  B.C.  107,  wlien  the  consul  Cas- 
sius  was  the  commander.  —  egit,  argue,  discourse.  —  Syx.  dux,  a  leader, 
a  general ;  dnctor,  a  guide ;  imperator,  a  commander  or  emperor.  —  pa- 
cem  and  bello  are  placed  prominently  to  mark  them  as  significant 
words.  This  section  is  an  indirect  discourse  (348),  depending  on  di- 
cens  {saijing)  implied  in  egit.  Compare  the  form  of  direct  discourse 
under  348.  For  the  use  of  the  future  indicative  or  present  subjunctive, 
see  326.  2,  and  355  ff.  —  reminisceretur  ....  incommodi,  he  should 
remember  both  the  old  overthroir  (lit.  inconvenience)  ;  this  refers  to  tlie 
defeat  of  Cassius.  —  ne  comniitteret,  he  should  not  bring  it  to  pass ;  com- 
mittere  ut  often  forms  a  periplirase  like  efficere  (see  342.  3) ;  ne  com- 
mlseris  (350),  in  direct  discourse. 

10.  his,  sc.  legatis.  —  sib!  ....  dari,  that  the  less  doubt  is  given  to 
him ;  minus,  subj.  ace.  of  dari,  following  respondit.  —  teneret  memoria, 
held  in  memorg ;  remembered.  —  veteris  contiimeliae,  former  insult.  — 
factiiros,  sc.  Helvetids.  —  Aeduis  is  governed  by  satisfaciant.  —  ipsis 
(see  354.  4):  the  dative  follows  the  compound,  intulerint,  203.— 
satisfaciant, />«y  drnnagcs.  The  direct  discourse  (355)  would  be:  mih! 
minus  dubitationis  datur,  quod  eas  res,  quas  commemoravistis, 
memoria  teneo.  SI  veteris  contiiraeliae  oblivisci  volo,  num  possum 
recentium  injiiriarum  memoriam  deponere  ?  Tamen  si  obsides  a  vdbis 
mih!  dabuntur  (dentur),  uti  ea,  quae  pollicemini,  vos  esse  factiiros 
intelligam,  et  si  Aeduis  de  injiiriis  quas  ipsis  sociisque  eorum  intii- 
listis,  item  si  Allobrogibus  satisfacietis,  vdbis  cum  pacem  faciam.  — 
h5c  responso  dato  =  cum  hoc  responsum  dedisset.  —  idem,  neut. ;  the 
masculine  is  idem.  —  qui  videant :  what  does  this  relative  clause  denote, 
cause,  purpose,  etc.  (360)?  —  videant  is  plur.,  because  equitatum  im- 
I)lies  equites  as  the  subject. —  qui,  these,  i.e.  equites.  —  alieno  16c5,  in 
an  unfavorable  place,  lit.  a  place,  better  for  the  other  partg  ;  for  the;  omission 
of  the  preposition,  270.  2.  c.  — audacius,  still  more  boldlg.  —  ac .  . .  .  prae- 
sentia,  and  deemed  it  sufficient  for  the  present.  —  iisi,  in  such  a  icag. — 
novissimum  agmen,  the  part  of  the  army  nearest  to  those  pursuing,  i.e. 
the  ?•('(»•.  —  nostrum  primum,  our  front,  or  van;  su[)ply  agmen. -non 
.  .  .  .  interesset,  not  more  than  five  or  six  miles  {each  dag)  inter  veiled  ;  tlie 
distributives  quinis  and  senis  imply  that  this  was  the  constant  differ- 
ence between  the  armies. 

11.  interim,  give  the  syns.  —  cottidie,  everg  dag,  is  used  of  things  that 
are  daily  repeated ;  in  singiilos  dies,  dailg,  of  those  things  which  from  day 
to  day  are  making  advance.  —  quod  ....  flagitare,  kept  demanding  .... 
which  they  had  promised  in  the  name  of  the  state;  flagitare,  the  historical 
infinitive,  equivalent  to  flagitabat ;  poUiciti  essent  refers  to  the  prom- 


NOTES.  413 


ise  as  made  by  tlie  tT^aIuI,  see  364.  —  frigora,  tlie  cold  cUm<ite,  tlie  plural 
is  emphatic  ;  the  plural  oi"  words  relating  to  tlie  weatiier  was  often  used, 
as,  soles,  sanbedins ;  nives,  /r;//.s  o/' .s7u>*r.  —  non  mode  followed  by  sed 
(etiam),  not  onlj/  ....  but  also,  places  the  emphasis  on  the  last;  when 
both  sentences  are  negative,  non  mode,  [non]  ....  sed  ne  quidem  (  — 
sed  etiam  non),  the  second  non  in  the  first  clause  is  omitted  if  both 
sentences  have  the  same  verb,  and  the  verb  is  in  the  second  clause ;  if 
both  clauses  have  their  own  verb,  as  in  the  text,  both  negatives  are 
used ;  ne  .  .  .  .  quidem,  ne  and  quidem  enclose  the  emphatic  word.  -- 
pabuli,  green  fodder.  —  suppetebat,  teas  at.  hand.  —  autem,  besides.  —  quod 
....  subvexerat,  jcldcli  he  had  brought  up  the  river  Arar  in  vessels.  — 
diem  ....  Aedui,  the  yEdui  kept  putting  him  (Caesar)  off  from  day  to  day, 

—  diicere,  historical  infinitive. —conferri  .  .  .  .  dicere,  they  kept  saying 
that  it  was  collecting,  was  coming  in,  icas  close  by ;  the  subject  of  con- 
ferri, comportari,  and  adesse  is  friimentum;  they  all  depend  on  dicere. 

—  se  diiitius  dCLci,  tliat  he  was  being  put  off  too  long.  —  friimentum.  The 
llonuin  soldier  received  no  meal  or  bread  as  his  monthly  allowance,  but 
merely  tlie  grain,  which  he  had  to  pound  and  make  into  bread  for  him- 
self;  4  modii  of  wheat  (about  50  pounds)  were  given  monthly  to  each 
foot-soldier  (nearly  a  bushel,  if  we  reckon  a  bushel  at  60  pounds);  12 
modii  of  wheat  and  42  modii  of  barley  to  each  horseman.  Sometimes 
the  lloman  soldier  carried  a  supply  of  food  for  17  days  (Ammian.: 
Hist.  Libr.  17),  and  occasionally  sufficient  for  a  longer  time  ;  a  supply  for 
only  5  days  is  mentioned  as  an  exception  (Plut.  Sert.  13).  Regularly 
the  price  of  the  corn  was  deducted  from  the  soldier's  pay,  which  for 
legionaries  —  225  denarii  =  about  $37  to  -$40.  A  modius  of  corn  cost 
less  than  a  denarius  (see  L.'s  Rom.  Ilist.,  p.  374).  — qui  ....  praeerat, 
who  held  the  chief  magistracy ;  qui  refers  to  Liscus.  —  Why  is  ab  ex- 
pressed before  iisi  why  is  sublevetur  in  the  subjunctive?  why  present 
subjunctive'?  —  Svx.  demum,  a<  length  (not  till  now);  denique, yina//y 
(in  short) ;  tandem,  at  last  (after  many  efforts) ;  postremo,  lastly  (last 
in  order). —  prdponit,  set  forth,  introduces  the  indirect  discourse  (348) 
which  follows,  —  plurimum  valeat,  is  very  powerful ;  valeat,  what  would 
this  be  in  the  direct  discourse  ?  —  seditiosa  ....  oratione,  by  seditious 
and  wicked  speeches.  —  ne  friimentum  conferant,  from  contributing  the 
corn  ;  conferant  is  plural  on  account  of  the  collective  noun  multitiido 
preceding.  —  nostra  in  the  direct  discourse  would  be  changed  to  vestra. 

—  a  se,  by  himself;  a  me  in  the  direct  discourse.  —  quin  etiam  .... 
enuntiaverit,  moreover  our  plans  are  disclosed;  quin  etiam,  naij  even. — 
intellegere  ....  fecerit,  he  was  well  aware  ivith  how  great  peril  he  did 
that.  —  SvN.  intellego,  understand  by  means  of  reflection ;   sentio,  per- 


414  FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 

ceive  by  the  senses  or  by  the  mind.  —  quamdiu  potuerit,  as  long  as  he 
had  been  able.  —  Syn.  taceo,  idler  no  word,  be  silent,  pass  over  in  silence  ; 
sileo,  make  no  noise,  be  still. 

12.  Dumnorigem  ....  designari,  that  Dumnorix  was  meant.  Dumno- 
rix  led  the  national  party  among  his  people,  as  opposed  to  Rome,  wliile 
his  brother  Divitiacus  favored  an  alliance  with  the  Romans.  —  pluribus 
praesentibus  (abl.  abs.),  lit.  more  being  j'resent,  or  in  the  presence  of  so 
manij.  —  eas  res  jactari,  that  these  matters  should  be  agitated:  jactari, 
a  frequentative  from  jaeio.  —  Give  the  syns.  of  concilium.  —  reperit 
esse  vera,  lie  finds  (that  these  statements)  tilings  are  true.  —  ipsum  .... 
audacia,  that  it  icas  Dumnorix  himself,  a  man  of  the  greatest  boldness. — 
cupidum  novarum  rerum,  desirous  of  a  revolution.  —  compliires  .... 
habere,  that  he  has  farmed  for  manij  years  all  the  revenues  of  the  JEdui  at 
a  loiv  price.  —  SvN'.  vectigal,  titJies  (decuma),  on  agricidtural  produce  ; 
tribiitum,  an  extraordinary  property  tax,  levied  in  the  tribes,  and  paid 
back  wlien  the  exigency  was  passed  ;  scriptura,  rent  of  the  pasture 
lands;  portorium,  harbor  duties  originally,  afterwards  applied  to  tolls 
paid  on  transit  of  mercliandise.  The  revenues  among  the  Romans 
were  not  collected  directly,  but  were  farmed  out  (or  leased)  by  the 
censors  to  contractors  called  publicani,  who  paid  a  fixed  sum  into  the 
treasury,  and  collected  the  taxes  for  tlieir  own  use ;  they  so  abused  their 
privileges,  that  the  name  iniblican  became  a  term  of  reproach.  —  illo 
licente,  he  bidding,  i.e.  ichen  lie  bid.  —  audeat,  see  348.  —  rem  familiarem, 
private  }>roperty.  Dumnorix  is  the  subject  of  favere  and  odisse. — 
Syn.  potentia,  power  as  an  attribute  of  a  person  :  potestas,  power  as  of 
a  magistrate,  ;joM'er  to  do  anything;  ditto  (see  dicio),  power,  jurisdiction. 

—  siquid  ....  Romania,  if  anything  then  should  happen  to  the  Romans, 
i.e.  in  case  of  any  disaster.  —  obtinendi,  see  264.  1.  —  imperio,  under  the 
government,  ablative  of  time  and  cause.  —  de  regno,  of  royal  poioer. 

13.  certissimae  res,  the  most  undoubted  facts.  —  animadverteret, 
should  punish  him.  —nnvira.  repugnabat,  one  consideration  opposed. — 
summum  ....  stiidium,  the  very  great  attachment  towards  the  Roman  people  ; 
the  clause  quod,  etc.,  is  in  apposition  with  unam,  and  might  be  intro- 
duced by  namely.  —  voluntatem,  good  will,  as  a  friend ;  stiidiura,  attach- 
ment, zeal,  ?ls  a  partisan.  —  ejus  refers  to  Dumnorix.  —  verebatur,  give 
the  synonymes.  —  itaque  ....  conaretur,  therefore  before  he  attempted  any- 
thing :  for  the  subjunctive,  see  337.  —  commonefacit,  reminds,  lit.  warns. 

—  ipso  (354.  4)  praesente,  ivhen  he  himself  ivas  present,  i.e.  Diviaticus.— 
de  eo,  concerning  him,  i.e.  Dumnorix, — apud  se,  before  himself,  i.e. 
Caesar.  —  ne  quid  ....  statueret,  that  he  shoidd  not  determine  anything 
too  severe  against  his  brother.  —  scire  ....  vera,  (saying)  that  he  knew  those 


NOTES.  415 


things  ivere  true.  —  Syn.  populus,  the  people,  originally  only  tlio  patri- 
cians, came  to  include  the  plebeians ;  plebs,  common  people,  opposed  to 
the  patricians ;  vulgus,  the  {(jnorant  multitude.  —  quod  ....  accidisset, 
because  if  anything  too  severe  should  be  done  to  him  bg  Coisar ;  accidisset 
represents,  in  indirect  discourse,  the  fut.  perf.  indie,  (acciderit)  by 
sequence  of  tenses  (see  326.  2).— eum  locum,  that  place  —  so  high  a 
place.  —  apud  eum,  i.e.  Caesar.  —  futiirum,  it  would  liappen,  see  349.  — 
animi,  the  affections.  —  fratrem  adhibet,  he  has  his  brother  present. 

14.  exploratoribus :  Svx.  explorator,  a  scout;  speculator,  a  spy; 
emissarius,  a  secret  agent.  — Tolliai.  passuum  =  4854  ft.,  a  little  less  than 
an  English  mile  =  5280  ft.  —  qualis  ....  adscensus,  what  kind  of  an 
ascent  it  teas  by  a  circuitous  roitte,  i.e.  at  various  parts  of  its  circuit.  —  qui 
cognoscerent,  misit,  he  sent  (persons)  to  ascertain;  qui  cognoscerent 
denotes  the  purpose  (see  324) ;  the  antecedent  of  qui  is  the  object  of 
misit:  what  is  the  object  of  cognoscerent  ?  —  facilem,  sc.  adscensum.  — 
de  quarta  vigilia  =  al)out  2  o'clock  a.m.  —  eodem  itinera,  along  the 
same  route.  —  quo,  by  irhich  (271). 

15.  prima  liice,  at  daybreak-.  —  summus  mons,  the  summit  of  the  moun- 
tain.—i^se,  and  ichen  he  himself,  sc.  cum.  —  passibus  (see  215.  1);  a 
Roman  pace  was  the  distance  from  where  the  heel  is  raised  to  where  it 
is  set  down  again  =  5  Rom.  ft.  =  nearly  4.G  Eng.  ft. ;  a  Rom,  mile  = 
4840  ft.,  an  Eng.  mile  =  5280  ft.  —  neque  ....  Labieni,  and  (when) 
neither  his  own  approach  nor  that  of  Labienus.  —  equo  admissd,  ivith  his 
horse  at  full  s/)ee(/.  —  voluerit,  in  indirect  discourse  (348).  — se  is  the 
subject  of  cogndvisse.  —  ex  ...  .  insignibus,  by  the  Gallic  ar?ns  and 
ornaments ;  insignibus,  lit.  devices  on  the  shields  and  //e/me/s.  —  subdiicit, 
draws  off.  —  ut  ei  praeceptum,  as  he  had  been  instructed.  What  is  the 
subject  of  praeceptum  erat  ?  —  exspectabat,  continued  to  look  out: 
imperfect,  see  317.  3.  —  multo  denique  die,  at  last,  ichen  much  of  the  day 
had  passed.  — -pro  viso,  as  seen  ;  lit.  for  .seen,  —  "What  is  the  object  of 
renuntiasse  ?  —  quo  consuerat  intervall5,  with  the  usual  distance; 
intervallo  is  the  antecedent  of  quo. 

IG,  diei  is  gen.  after  the  adverb  postridie.  —  metiri,  to  measure  out.  — 
rei  ....  existimavit,  he  thought  he  must  look  out  for  supplies,  sc.  sibi  esse. 
—  Bibracte  =  Mont  Bcuvray.  —  seu  ....  existimarent,  because  they  be- 
lieved that  the  Bomans,  being  terrified,  ivere  departing ;  the  subjunctives 
existimarent  and  confiderent:  sometimes  the  subjunctive  is  used  after 
quod,  quia,  with  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  although  the  idea  ex- 
pressed is  that  of  the  writer,  and  the  reason  assigned  is  his  own.  Roby 
explains  this  subjunctive  in  1746,  and  rems. ;  Vanic^ek,  527,  anm.  2. 
Cajsar's  army  was  composed  of  four  veteran  legions,  and  two  legions 


416 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


newly  levied;  viz.:  the  10th,  wliicli  he  liad  found  in  the  Province,  the 
old  legions  (7th,  8th,  and  Otli)  which  he  had  brought  from  Aquileia, 
and  the  two  new  ones  (11th  and  12th)  raised  in  Cisalpine  Gaul  =  very 
nearly  3(3,000  legionaries.  To  these  must  be  added  4000  cavalry,  raised 
in  the  Province  and  among  the  JEdui,  and  nearly  20,000  auxiliaries, 
making  a  total  of  59,000  or  00,000.  Tliis  estimate  does  not  include  the 
men  assigned  to  other  duties,  as  working  the  machines,  taking  care  of 
the  baggage,  the  army  servants,  etc.  In  the  engagement  Ca?sar  did 
not  employ  the  two  legions  newly  raised.  Tlie  Helvetians  had  about 
79,000.  For  the  time  denoted  by  the  infinitive,  see  349;  discedere 
here  is  tlie  imperfect  infinitive. 

17.  poatquam  id  animum  advertit,  after  tliat  Ccesar  perceives  this ;  id 
is  governed  by  ad  in  composition.  —  in  colle  medio,  on  the  middle  of  the 
hill,  i.e.  midwajj  up  the  /////. —  triplicem  aciem:  the  triple  line  of  battle 
was  formed  with  the  foiir  veteran  legions,  viz. :  the  7th,  8th,  9th,  and 
10th.  The  arrangement  was  such  that  one  legion  (probably  the  10th) 
formed  the  riglit  wing,  two  legions  the  centre,  and  one  legion  the  left 
wing;  the  legions  were  in  tlie  same  line.  This  is  of  importance, 
because  the  triple  line  of  Caesar  is  commonly  misunderstood;  if  the 
legion  is  considered  as  tlie  tactical  unit,  tliere  is  but  one  line ;  but  the 
cohorts  of  each  legion  were  arranged  in  three  lines.  The  celebrated 
triplex  acie3  is,  then,  the  order  of  battle,  according  to  which  the  ten 
cohorts,  of  which  each  legion  was  made  up,  were  stationed  in  three 
lines,  one  behind  the  other;  ordinarily  four  being  in  the  front  line,  three 
in  the  second,  and  three  in  the  third,  a  suitable  space  being  left  between 
the  cohorts.  The  arrangement  of  the  cohorts  of  the  legion  when  in 
line  of  battle  will  be  understood  from  the  following  diagram:  — 


J 


In  Cffisar's  line  of  battle,  then,  the  four  legions  formed  a  front  line  of 
sixteen  cohorts,  a  second  line  of  twelve,  and  a  third  line  of  twelve.— 
sarcinas,  eacli  soldier's  Ixujgafje ;  in  this  sense  used  only  in  the  plural : 
each  soldier  carried  besides  his  personal  baggage  and  trenching  tools 


NOTES.  417 


provisions  for  a  nuniher  of  days.  The  various  articles  of  baj^ga^c 
were  bound  into  bundles  (sarcinae),  and  then  l:)ound  to  the  upper  end 
of  a  pole  (furca)  5  or  0  feet  long.  On  tlie  niarcli  this  pole  was  carried 
on  the  shoulder,  and  rested,  during  a  halt,  on  tlie  ground.  The  poles 
were  an  invention  made  by  Marius,  and  were  hence  called  by  the  sol- 
diers "  Marius'  mules  "  (mull  Mariani).  The  weight  carried  by  a  soldier, 
aside  from  his  food  and  extra  clothing,  was  35  to  50  pounds ;  the  entire 
weight  (including  provisions  and  clothing)  was,  as  stated  above,  not 
far  from  00  to  75  pounds,  sarcinae  means  originally  both  baggage 
and  packs,  or  burdens ;  it  was  used  sometimes  to  signify  the  packs 
carried  by  the  soldiers  {Bel.  Gal.  II.  17),  sometimes  for  the  heavy  bag- 
gage {Bel.  Civ.  I.  81) ;  here  it  is  used  for  both.  The  impedimenta  were 
the  heavy  baggage,  tents,  engines  of  war,  etc.,  which  were  carried  in 
wagons  or  on  horses.  —  eum,  sc.  15cum.  —  in  siiperiore  acie,  in  the  upper 
line  [the  rear),  i.e.  those  on  the  top  of  the  hill,  the  two  legions  of  newly 
levied  soldiers.  —  confertissima  acie,  in  very  close  arraij.  —  phalange 
facta :  the  phalanx  consisted  of  a  large  body  of  men  in  solid  mass, 
witli  their  shields  raised  above  their  heads,  locked  and  overlapped  so  as 
to  form  a  close  fence.  ■ —  sub  ....  successerunt,  they  advanced  close  up 
to  our  front  line.  —  primum  ....  equis,  first  his  own  horse.  —  pilis  :  the 
pilum  Avas  a  shaft  of  wood,  a  little  more  than  six  feet  long,  with  a 
sharp  iron  head  projecting  about  nine  inches ;  fragments  of  pila  have 
been  found  at  Alise.  —  perfregerunt,  broke  through,  see  perfringo.  — 
ea  disjecta,  when  this  (phalanx)  ivas  broken  apart. 

18.  Gallis  ....  impedimento,  it  icas  a  great  hindrance  to  the  Gauls.  — 
pluribus  eorum  scutis,  several  of  their  shields,  see  synonymes  of  scii- 
tuHL — cum  ....  inflexisset,  ivhen  the  iron  (head)  became  bent.  Their 
shields  were  locked  over  their  heads,  and  overlapped  one  another ;  a 
javelin  would  pierce  through  more  than  one,  and  bind  them  together. 
Movements  of  their  left  hands,  in  which  the  shield  was  held,  were  thus 
impeded.  —  pedem  referre,  tofcdl  back.  —  e5,  thither.  —  capt5  monte,  the 
mountain  being  reached.  — succedentibus  nostris,  our  men  coming  close  up 
below. — agmen  ....  claudebant,  closed  the  enemy's  line  of  march.  — ex 
itinere,  on  the  march.  —  circumvenere,  perfect  tense,  third  person, 
plural. — Romani  ....  intulerunt,  the  Bomans  turned,  and  advanced  in 
two  divisions :  the  Romans  indicated  the  movements  of  their  armies  by 
terms  derived  from  the  signum,  the  standard :  thus  signa  convertere, 
to  turn  ;  signa  conferre,  to  engage ;  signa  inferre,  to  advance ;  it  was  the 
third  line  that  wheeled  about  and  advanced,  while  the  first  and  second 
opposed  the  Helvetians  who  had  been  driven  back.  —  ut  .  .  .  .  resiste- 
ret,  that  it  might  resist  those  (who  had  been)  conquered  and  driven  back: 


418  FIKST    STEPS    IX   LATIN. 


for  the  subjunctive,  see  321.  —  ancipiti  proelio,  in  a  double  conflict  (lit. 
two-headed). 

19,  alter!  ....  alteri,  the  one  }>cirtij  ....  llie  other  parli/,  referring  to  the 
Helvetians,  and  to  the  Boii  and  Tulingi  respectively.  —  ab  hora  sep- 
tima,  from  one  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  ;  tlie  day  began  at  sunrise,  and 
ended  at  sunset;  the  end  of  the  sixth  hour  was  noon.  —  pugnatum  sit, 
the  battle  rarjed,  see  313.  1.  — aversum  hostem,  an  enemy  turned  about. — 
ad  multam  noctem,  till  late  at  niflil.  —  pro  vallo,  for  a  rampart ;  the 
vallum  Avas  composed  of  the  dirt  heaped  up  (agger)  from  the  ditch 
(fossa)  against  tlie  stakes  (valli).  — eaque  tota  nocte,  during  that  xohole 
ni(jht,  196. —  n5stri,  sc.  milites. —  potuissent,  see  338.  —  litteras,  a 
letter.  —  ne  ....  re  jiivarent  (ordering),  that  iheij,  etc. 

20,  qui  cum,  irhen  thfij. —  suppliciter  lociiti,  sjieal-ine/  suppliantlij. — 
qu5  turn,  essent,  irhere  thei/  then  irere ;  the  subjunctive  is  used  to  indi- 
cate that  Cajsar  did  not  know  where  they  were.  —  paruerunt,  the;/ 
obeyed.  —  qui  perfiigissent,  icltlcli  had  fled  to  these,  i.e.  vhatever,  etc.,  see 
361.  —  ut  ....  facerent,  lit,  tliat  they  .should  suj>})ly  them  iritlt  corn,  i.e.  to 
•'iitj>]>ly,  etc.  —  ipsos,  them,  emphatic,  used  to  distinguish  the  Helvetii 
from  the  Allobrogibus  (354.  4). 

21,  tabiilae,  list.s. — litteris  Graecis  confectae,  made  out  in  Greek 
letters,  wliich  had  been  learned  in  Greek  Massilia.  —  ratio  confecta  erat, 
an  account  had  been  kept.  —  qui  numerus  ....  edrum,  what  number  of 
them. — possent,  see  364, —  summa,  the  sum. 

The  following  brilliant  description  of  the  battle  near  Bibracte  is  from 
Mommsen's  Ilistor}^  of  Borne  (vol.  iv.  p.  253,  Eng.  ed.):  "The  two 
armies  posted  tliemselvcs  on  two  parallel  chains  of  hills ;  the  Celts 
began  the  engagement,  broke  the  Boman  cavalry  Avhich  advanced  into 
the  plain,  and  ran  onward  against  the  Boman  legions  posted  on  the 
slope  of  the  hill,  but  were  there  obliged  to  give  way  before  Caesar's 
veterans.  When  the  Bomans,  tliereupou  following  up  their  advantage, 
descended  in  their  turn  to  the  i)lain,  the  Celts  again  advanced  against 
them,  and  a  reserved  Celtic  corps  took  them  at  the  same  time  in  the 
flank.  The  reserve  of  the  Boman  attacking  column  was  pushed  forward 
against  the  latter;  it  forced  it  away  from  the  main  l)ody  upon  the  bag- 
gage and  the  barricade  of  wagons,  wliere  it  was  destroyed.  The  bulk 
of  the  Helvetic  host  was  at  length  brought  to  give  way,  and  compelled 
to  beat  a  retreat  in  an  easterly  direction,  —  the  opposite  of  that  towards 
which  their  expedition  led  them.  This  day  had  frustrated  the  scheme  of 
the  Helvetii  to  establish  for  themselves  new  settlements  on  the  Atlantic 
Ocean,  and  handed  them  over  to  the  pleasure  of  the  victor;  but  it  had 
lieen  a  hot  day  also  for  the  conquerors." 


INDEX. 


The  references  are  to  pages  ;  figures  or  letters  in  parentheses  \o  paragraphs.     Tlie 
index  is  very  full,  and  will  aid  pupils  greatly  if  they  are  tauglit  to  coiisuit  it. J 


A,  sound  of,  28;  a  or  ab  (prep.),  04, 
171;  after  peto  or  postiilo,  with 
abl.  of  agent  after  passives,  130, 
211;  with  gerund,  229. 

Ablative,  48, 1)7 ;  rule  of  position,  98 ; 
Qixdmg-dhus,  50;  in  -c,  92;  -i,  92; 
in  -/  of  adjec.,  109,  111;  in  -e  of  ad- 
jectives, 109,  111;  in  -iihus,  141; 
after  prepositions,  172.  Syntax, 
97,  130;  of  crime,  294;  duration  of 
time,  182;  uses  of,  209;  abl.  proper, 
209;  instrumental  abl.,  209;  loca- 
tive abl.,  209;  gen.  rule  for  abl. 
proper,  210;  compounds  with  prep., 
210;  abl.  of  cause,  210;  or  with 
prep.,  210;  instrumental  abl.:  (1) 
means  or  instrument,  131,  287;  (2) 
measure,  287;  (3)  difference,  281, 
288;  (4)  distance,  182,  288;  (5) 
price,  283,  288;  (G)  abl.  of  time 
with  adverbs,  288;  (7)  material, 
288;  (8)  manner,  289,  accompani- 
ment, 289;  (10)  quality  and  charac- 
teristic, 289;  of  agent,  130,  211;  of 
time,  1G7;  abl.  absolute,  222;  mean- 
ing of,  222;  of  quality,  2(59;  speci- 
fication, 278;  of  difference,  281. 

Ablative  absolute,  222. 

-ilhits,  in  dative  plural  of  1st  declen- 
sion, 56. 

abutor,  287. 

ac,  see  atque. 

Accent,  rules  of,  33. 

accldit,  synopsis  of,  291. 

Accompaniment,  abl.  of,  with  cum, 
152. 

Accusative,  55;  in  -im,  88,  92; 
pi.,  in  -is,   88;  after  prepositions, 


04;  as  objects,  55;  with  verbs 
of  remembering,  etc.,  294;  with 
impers.,  294;  with  juro,  etc.,  1G4. 
Syntax,  55;  as  direct  object,  55; 
with  verbs  of  feeling,  294;  after 
compounds,  173;  with  impers.,  294; 
cognate,  373;  two  accusatives, 
158;  passive  use,  with  verbs  of 
asking,  150;  adverbial,  373;  dura- 
tion of  time  and  extent  of  space, 
107,  182;  with  per,  183;  as  subject 
of  infinitive,  217;  in  indirect  dis- 
course, ;>43;  in  substantive  clauses, 
334  f . ;  of  gerundive,  220  f . 

Accusing  and  acquitting,  verbs  of, 
294. 

ac  si,  321. 

Active  voice,  8,  39-119;  how  to  con- 
vert to  passive,  130. 

ad.  Go,  173;  meaning  near,  237;  in 
comps.,  173. 

Adjectives,  5;  defined,  GO;  posi- 
tion, 07 ;  like  nouns,  (57 ;  inflection 
of,  GO;  of  1st  and  2d  decls.,  00,  08; 
model  for  parsing,  (57 ;  of  3d  decl., 
105,  107;  of  two  or  three  termina- 
tions, lOS;  of  one  termination,  108; 
the  inflection  of  comparatives.  111 ; 
cases  of,  used  as  adverbs,  123; 
model  for  parsing,  312;  gen.  with, 
114;  dat.  with,  114;  adj.  clauses, 
297;  adjectives  in  -quvs,  114. 
Comparison,  110,  111;  construc- 
tion with  comparatives,  112;  com- 
parison by  adverbs,  110;  rule  of 
agreement,  00;  rule  of  gender,  00, 
105;  position,  07;  demonstratives 
as  adj.,  199;  neut.  adjs.  as  nouns, 


420 


FIRST  stp:ps  in  latin. 


()7;  superlatives,  110  ff. ;  with  gen., 
115;  with  dat.,  Ill;  model  for 
parsing,  (i7. 

adjuro  with  ace,  IM. 

Adverbs,  defined,  12,  119;  classified, 
13,  122,  124;  illustrated,  12;  how 
formed,  122,  124;  compared,  12, 
124;  position  of,  119;  numeral,  119, 
ISO;  derived  from  adjectives,  123; 
classification  of,  of  place,  of  time, 
etc.,  13,  124;  model  for  parsing, 
125. 

Adverbial  accusative,  37;*). 

Adverbial  clauses,  297. 

Adverbial  phrases,  12,  115,  119. 

Adversative  conjunctions,  175. 

adversus  (prep.),  173. 

Agent,  abl.  of,  with  a  or  ab,  l.'M), 
211;  dat.  of,  25S;  agreement,  53;  of 
subject,  53;  of  predicate,  54. 

aio,  infl.  of,  28G. 

-al,  -ar,  as  neut.  endings,  .S7  ff. 

ailquis,  infl,  of,  207. 

alius,  infl.  of,  177. 

Alphabet,  23;  vowels  and  diph- 
thongs, 23;  consonants,  23,  24,  25; 
classification  of,  24;  see  table,  25. 

alter,  infl,  of,  177. 

Alternative  questions,  3.38,  32 ; 
answer  to,  33<S. 

ambo,  infl,  of,  see  duo. 

Although,  322, 

ambio,  2.S0, 

amnis,  gender  of,  95. 

an,  anne,  annon,  3.3S  f.;  an  used 
after  nescio,  haud,  scio,  du- 
blto  an,  'MO. 

Analysis  of  sentences,  18,  189;  direc- 
tions for  analyzing,  191 ;  of  verbs, 
42,  44,  72,  120;  of  pass,  voice,  127. 

Answer,  form  of,  MO. 

ante  with  quam,  325,  328. 

Antecedent,  its  use  with  relatives, 
203;  omitted,  203. 

Antepenult,  .'50. 

antequam,  327;  often  written  sepa- 
rate, 328, 

Aorist,  37,  2^)9;  rendered  like  plu- 
perfect, 32(5. 


Apodosis,  MA. 
Apposition,  (!0. 
arbor,  gender  of,  95. 
Arrangement  of  words,  VK), 
Article,  (5. 

As,  used  as  a  rel.  pron.,  20:5. 
Asking,  verbs  of,  15(5. 
Assimilation  of  consonants,  24.  ■ 
atque,  175. 

Attraction  of  mode,  .'359, 
Attributive  adjective,  100, 
audeo,  255, 
aut,  175. 

Auxiliary  verb,  7,  1(X), 
-((.>',  adjective  ending,  108;  adjective 
in,  with  gen,,  115. 

B,  sound  of,  28. 
-ham,  tense-ending,  44  ff. 
Bargaining,  verbs  of,  28:5. 
belli,  locative,  2;55. 
-ho,  verb-ending,  44  ff. 
bdnus,  declined,  0(5. 
bos,  decl,,  96, 

C  =  G,  sound  of,  28;  guttural,  25;  for 
qu. 

cS,nis,  gender  of,  95;  gen,  pi,  of,  89. 

Cardinal  numbers,  180. 

ca,ro,  gender  of,  i)5. 

Cases,  4,  47,  48;  general  view  of,  49; 
genitive,  48;  dative,  48;  accusa- 
tive, 48;  vocative,  48;  ablative, 
48;  independent,  4. 

Case,  defined,  4;  oblique  cases,  48, 

Case-endings,  table  of,  51,  58,  78,  88, 
89. 

Case-suffix,  40. 

causa,  used  with  gen,,  210, 

Causal  clauses,  323,  324;  cum  and 
qui,  causal,  324. 

Causal  conjunctions,  17G,  32.3. 

celo,  with  two  accus.,  15G, 

Characteristic,  clause  of,  40,  130, 1.33, 
135,  138,  144,  151,  152;  charac- 
teristic vowel,  40 ff.;  sometimes 
dropped,  135,  139, 

Cities,  construction  of,  2.^54  ff. 

civis,  abl,  sing,  of,  92. 


INDKX. 


421 


Clausks,  deliuod,  liJO,  248;  syntax 
of  dependeut,  'J'.XJ  ff. ;  subordiMate, 
17G;  couditioual,  314  If. ;  linal, 
306  ff.;  consecutive,  30!)  ff.;  com- 
parative, 320;  concessive,  321; 
causal,  323;  temporal,  325  ff.; 
substantive,  333  ff. ;  interrogative, 
337 ff.;  as  subject,  object,  or  appo- 
sitive,  325;  relative,  355 ff.;  inter- 
mediate, 358;  in  ind.  disc,  347; 
Avith  causal  conjunctions,  17(>. 

Cognate  accusative,  373. 

Command,  expression  of,  178,  248; 
in  indirect  discourse,  352;  mild 
command,  248. 

Common  gender,  94. 

Comparative  clauses,  320  if. ;  se- 
quence of  tenses,  321;  in  indirect 
disc,  321. 

Comparative  conjunctions,  170,  320. 

Comparative  suftix,  111. 

Comparatives,  inflection  of,  106,  111 ; 
ways  of,  110;  stem  of,  111;  mean- 
ing of,  110,  113,  118  ;  connective 
vowel,  130;  construction  of,  112. 

Comparison  of  adjectives,  5,  62,  110, 
114;  ways  of,  5,  110;  irregular, 
116;  defective,  116;  of  adverbs, 
114 ;  construction  of,  112  ;  with 
quam,  112;  model  for  parsing,  112. 

Complement  with  copula,  18,  100. 

Complementary  infinitive,  217,  218. 

Completed  action,  tenses  of,  121. 

Complex  sentences,  189. 

Compound  sentences,  189. 

Compound  words,  inflection  of,  %, 
142;  verbs  with  dative,  17;!. 

Concessive  conjunctions,  176,  321; 
their  use,  321,  323. 

Concessive  clauses,  322;  in  indirect 
disc,  347. 

Condemning,  verbs  of,  2i)4. 

conicio,  written  also  conjicio,  169. 

Conditional  conjunctions,  176. 

Conditional  clauses,  314;  classified, 
314  fl". ;  in  ind.  disc,  350. 

Conditional  particles,  314. 

Conditions,  nature  of,  314,  315; 
simple   present    and    past,   314  f.. 


317;  in  ind.  disc,  ^350;  future, 
314 f.,  317;  in  ind.  disc,  350;  un- 
real present  and  past,  314  ff.,  317 ;  in 
ind.  disc,  350;  verbs  of  duty,  etc., 
358;  in  ind.  disc,  350;  disguised, 
319;  omitted,  /(/.;  in  indirect  dis- 
course, 350 ff.;  exception  in  se- 
quence of  tenses,  302,  316. 

confide,  210. 

Conjugation,  in  English,  7;  in  Latin, 
39,  40,  etc.;  characteristic  vowel, 
40;  the  four  conjunctions,  41,  71; 
1st  conj.,  41,  etc.,  12(5;  2d  conj,, 
129,  132,  135,  137;  3d  conj.,  144,  14(5, 
151;  4th  conj.,  I(i5  ff . ;  how  trans- 
lated, 263  ;  formation  of,  42,  71  ; 
paradigms  of  four  conjs.,  259  ff. 

Conjunctions,  defined,  13;  illustrated, 
13;  classification  of,  13, 175;  model 
for  parsing,  176. 

Connecting  vowel  (so  called),  130. 

Connectives,  relative  used  as,  202. 

Consecutive  clause,  309;  exception  in 
sequence  of  tenses,  309;  character- 
istic and  result,  311;  used  after 
what,  310,  311. 

Consecutive  conjunctions,  176. 

Consonants,  classification  of,  2(i; 
changes  of,  2(5  ;  double,  23 ;  u  a 
consonant,  24. 

Consonant  stems,  78,  161;  3d  decl., 
77;  of  adjec,  107. 

constare,  with  abl.,  288. 

constat,  synoj)sis  of,  291. 

contentus,  with  abl.,  210. 

Continued  action,  see  Tenses. 

Contraction  of  verbs,  72. 

Coordinate  clauses,  298. 

Coordinate  conjunctions,  175. 

Copula,  18,  99. 

Copulative  conjunctions,  175. 

cor,  gender  of,  95. 

Countries,  names  of,  gender. 

Crime,  gen.  of,  294. 

crinis,  gender  of,  95. 

cum,  prep.,  172;  used  with  abl.  of 
pronouns,  172;  appended  to  abl.  of 
pers.  pron.,  194 ;  in  temporal  clauses, 
329;  cum  inversum,  329;  causal, 


422 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


324,  330;  concessive,  322,  330;  not 
used  with  certain  abls.,  289;  itera- 
tive use,  320;  historical,  330;  trans- 
hition  of,  331. 

Dative  endings,  51,  58,  78;  in  -dhus, 
5(3 ;  in  -1, 11 ;  dat.  of  4th  decl.,  in  -uhus, 
41.  Syntax,  1(54;  indirect  object, 
()2,  l(i4;  used  for  the  locative,  235; 
with  intransitive  verbs,  1()4;  with 
transitive  verbs,  (52;  uses  of,  with 
verbs  meaning  favor,  etc.,  1()4; 
with  compounds  of  ad,  ante,  etc., 
173 ;  with  compounds  of  sS.tis, 
b§ne,  etc.,  164;  of  possession,  242; 
agency  with  gerundive,  25S;  of  in- 
terest, l(i9;  of  purpose  or  end,  170; 
of  advantage  and  disadvantage, 
170;  of  apparent  agent,  170;  dat. 
reference,  170;  dat.  instead  of  gen., 
170;  with  adjectives,  114;  of  litness, 
114;  with  impers.  verbs,  2i)4. 

dea,  inflection  of,  5(3. 

Declarative  sentence,  74. 

Declension,  4(5;  of  nouns,  49;  how 
distinguished,  49;  general  rules 
for,  50;  termination,  49;  1st  decl., 
51,  52;  2d  decl.,  57-(53;  stem,  57; 
case-endings,  58;  nom.  and  voc. 
endings  wanting  in  nouns  in  -cr, 
59;  neut.  nouns,  (32;  3d  decl.,  77-93; 
4th  decl.,  140;  5th  decl.,  142. 

Defective  nouns,  83,  90,  142. 

Defective  verbs,  7,  285. 

delecto,  with  ace,  1(54. 

Deliberative  subjunctive,  248,  348. 

Definite,  see  Perfect. 

Definite  price,  283. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  use  of,  199; 
used  as  personal  pron.,  198;  as 
adjec.  pron.,  15)9;  positiou  of,  199; 
voc.  wanting,  199;  in  ind.  disc, 
349. 

dens,  gender  of,  95. 

Dental  stems,  80. 

Deponent  verbs,  250;  conjugation  of , 
251,  253;  participles  of,  252;  abl. 
with,  253;  synopsis  of,  253  f. 

deus,  inflection  of,  59;  stem  of,  59. 


die,  imper.  of,  179. 

dies,  intlection  of,  142:  gender  of,  142. 

difflcllis,  comparison  of,  11(5. 

diffido,  with  abl.,  210. 

dig-nus,  with  abl.,  288;  with  relative 
clause,  312. 

Diphthongs,  23;  sound  of,  28;  quan- 
tity of,  31. 

Direct  discourse,  342. 

Direct  object,  55. 

Direct  question,  338. 

Disjunctive  conjunctions,  175. 

dissimllis,  infi.  of.,  10(5;  with  gen.  or 
dat.,  114,  115;  compar.  of,  11(3. 

Distance,  ace.  or  abl.,  182 f. 

Distributive  numerals,  180;  how  used 
with  pi.  nouns  with  a  sing,  mean- 
ing, 182. 

do,  infin.  of,  5(3;  irregular,  74. 

-<h),  -70,  feminine  endings,  95. 

domi,  locative,  2;34  f. 

donaos,  domum,  118. 

domus,  inriection  of,  140;  gender 
of,  141. 

donee,  ;)2(5. 

Dubitativc  subjunctive,  248. 

dxiblto  an,  '.m. 

diiblto,  with  quin,  .33(5. 

due,  imperative  of,  179. 

dum,  32(5;  in  the  sense  of  while,  etc., 
327;  denoting  pur^wse,  326,  327. 

dummodo,  318. 

duo,  inflection  of,  181. 

Duration,  ace.  of,  182. 

-das,  participle  in,  256  f . 

E,  prep.,  see  Ex. 

edo,   iufl.  of,   280;   irregularity  of, 

280;  pass,  of,  280. 
Effecting,  verbs  of,  311. 
eg-eo,  with  gen. 
Emphasis,  as  affected  by  or  affecting 

arrangement,  90. 
Enclitic,  176.  [42  f . 

Endings,  of  case,  51,  58,88;  of  verbs, 
English    method    of    pronunciation, 

34-36. 
English  verb,  forms  of,  14-17. 
enim,  176. 


INDEX. 


423 


eo,  irteg.  verb,  inflection  of,  279; 
stem  of,  27'.);  intrans.  compounds 
of,  279;  trans,  compounds,  279; 
pass,  of,  280;  perfect  of,  280. 

-er,  nom,  ending,  59. 

ergo,  175. 

-cs,  as  nom.  ending,  88. 

esse  and  its  compounds,  272;  inflec- 
tion of,  102 ;  Intlectiou  of  com- 
pounds, 272. 

et  .  .  .  et,  both  .  .  .  and,  175. 

etiam,  in  answers,  334. 

gtiamsi,  322. 

etsi,  322. 

Euphonic  changes,  25 ;  vowel  weak- 
ening, 20;  of  3d  conj.,  149,  154. 

evenit,  synopsis  of,  291. 

Exclamatory  sentences,  74. 

Expletive,  192. 

F,  sound  of,  28. 

Fac,  imper.  of,  179. 

facllis,  comi^arison  of,  lltJ. 

facio,  282;  compounds  of,  282. 

fari,  def.  verb,  287. 

fas,  with  supine,  232. 

Fearing,  verbs  of  (ne  or  ut),  307. 

Feminine,  rule  of  gender,  95. 

fer,  imper.  of,  17i). 

fero,  iufl.  of,  270;  compounds  of, 
277;  irregularity  of,  277. 

fido,  semi-deponent,  255;  with  abl., 
210. 

filius,  infl.  of,  58;  voc.  of,  48. 

Fifth  declension,  142. 

Filling,  verbs  of,  with  ablative,  288. 

Final  clauses,  298,  300;  how  trans- 
lated, 300,  307;  in  indirect  dis- 
course, 347  f . 

Final  conjunctions,  170,  30(5. 

Final  vowels,  quantity  of,  80. 

finis,  gender  of,  95;  abl.  sing.,  92. 

Finite  verb,  9. 

flo,  infl.  of,  282;  used  as  pass,  of 
f§,cio,  282;  compounds  of,  282. 

First  conjugation,  formation,  41  ff.; 
inflection  of,  41  ff. 

First  declension,  51. 

flag-Ito,  constr.  of,  150. 


fons,  gender  of,  95. 

fore  ut,  345. 

Forgetting,  verbs  of,  2i}4. 

f6rem,  241. 

Fourth  conjugation,    formation    of, 

157  ff.;  Inflection,  157  ff. 
fretus,  with  abl.,  210. 
fruor,  fung-or,  with  abl.,  287. 
FUTURK  TENSE,  10,  44,  109,  120,  130, 

144;  vowel  changes,  145,  158. 
Future  perfect,  9, 10;  syntax,  304; 

for  simple  future,  315;  represented 

in  subj.,  304;  in  ind.  disc,  304. 
futurum   sit  ut,   used  instead   of 

periphrastic  form,  304. 

G  =  c  (in  early  use) ,  sound  of,  28. 

gaudeo,  255. 

Gender,  13;  natural  and  grammati- 
cal, 47;  common,  94;  of  1st  decl., 
51;  of  2d  decl.,  57,  02;  of  3d  decl., 
94,  95;  of  4th  decl.,  140;  5th 
decl.,  142;  gen.  of  indeclinable 
words,  clauses,  etc.,  47,  334. 

General  truth,  328. 

General  relatives,  331,  357. 

Genitive.  48,  GO;  pi.  in  -itm,  92;  of 
1st  decl.,  51;  of  2d  decl.,  57,  59;  of 
nouns  in  -ius,  and  -ium,  58;  gen- 
der, 58 ;  of  3d  decl.  in  -ium,  92 ;  in 
-his,  177;  of  adjec,  00,  109.  Syn- 
tax, 01;  subjective,  102;  objective, 
102;  possessive,  00,  102;  in  predi- 
cate, 103;  partitive,  198;  predicate 
gen.,  103, 104;  with  adjectives,  115; 
with  verbs,  294  f . ;  of  memory,  295 ; 
of  charge  and  penalty,  294;  of 
feeling,  295;  impers.,  295;  interest, 
2['o;  of  plenty  and  want,  115;  of 
value,  295;  of  gerundive,  228;  of 
quality,  209. 

Gerund,  38,  225;  not  one  of  the 
principal  parts  of  a  verb,  38;  nom. 
how  supplied,  225;  how  formed, 
220;  endings  of,  220;  ace,  how 
used,  220;  its  government,  227; 
equivalent  gerundive  forms,  227; 
of  3d  and  4th  conjugations,  255. 
Syntax,  228. 


424 


FIKST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


Gerundive,  227;  uses  of  gen.,  227, 
228;  dat.  228;  ace,  228;  abl.,  229: 
after  what  verbs  used,  228;  of  ',)d 
and  4th  conjugations,  255;  when 
not  admissible,  228. 

gratia,  with  gen.,  210. 

(rreek  nouns,  52. 

Guttural  stems,  of  nouns,  17;  of 
verbs,  148,  Kil. 

H,  spirant,  23;   guttural,  24;  sound 

of,  28. 
hie,  infl.  of,  l')7;  use  of,  1!)7,  11)8  f. 
Hindering,    verbs    of,    with    ne    or 

quomlnvis,     r)08;     negative    witli 

quin,  310;  sequence  of  tenses,  310; 

after  neg.  indef.  expressions,  310. 
Historical  intin.,  412. 
Historical  present,  303,  ;34(). 
Historical  tenses,  302. 
Hoping,  verbs   of,    345;  with   iiilin., 

:'Ao. 
Hortatory  Subj.,  248. 
humi,  locative,  2;>5, 

I,  sound  of,  27 ;  i  and  j  interchange- 
able, 24;  i  suppx-essed  in  conlcio, 
etc..  Kill;  how  i)ronounced  between 
two  vowels,  28(5;  of  i)erfect,  71. 

-/,  abl.  in,  87,  ff.,  92. 

-/,  stems  of  nouns,  91;  of  adjectives, 
105,  106. 

-Ibam  =  -iehani  (4th  conj.),  221. 

idem,  infl.,  200;  derivation  of,  201; 
use,  201. 

Moneus,  compared,  114;  Idoneus 
qui,  312. 

-ix's  in  5th  decl.,  142  f. 

igltur,  meaning  of,  175. 

ignis,  gender  of,  95;  abl.  sing.,  92. 

-il  in  gen.  of  2d  decl.,  58;  contracted 
into  -I,  58. 

Illative  conju>xtions,  175. 

ille,  inflection  of,  197;  use,  19f). 

-hn,  ace.  ending  in  3d  decl.,  88,  92. 

Imperative  mode,  9,  75,  177,  178; 
personal  endings,  74, 178;  negative 
with,  178;  tenses  of,  178;  first  per- 
son of,  179,  241 ;  passive,  186. 


Imperative  sentences,  74;  imply- 
ing  condition,  319;  in  ind.  disc, 
352. 

Imperfect  tb:nse,  formation,  44, 
130,  145,  152,  158;  uses,  96,  37,  299, 
121. 

Impersonal  verbs,  291;  synopsis, 
7,  291;  classification,  292;  passive 
of  intrans.,  293.  Syntax,  294  f.; 
consec.  clauses  after  impers.,311; 
ace.  with  infin.  or  quod  with  in- 
die, 335;  subst.  clauses  after  im- 
pers.,  335. 

in,  constr.  of,  172;  with  expressions 
of  time,  167. 

Incomplete  action,  tenses  of,  121. 

Increment  of  nouns,  77. 

Indeclinable  nouns,  47;  rule  of  gen- 
der, 47. 

Indefinite  pronouns,  207;  indefinite 
second  person,  32S. 

Indicative  mode,  meaning  and  use 
of,  8. 

indig-nus,  28S;  relative  clause  witli, 
312. 

Indirect  dis(."ourse,  .342;  applied 
to  what,  359;  used  after  wliat 
verbs,  3)48;  informal,  .'360;  infin.  in, 
.344;  tenses  in,  ;>46;  reflex,  pronouns 
in,  ,348;  conditional  sentences  in, 
.■)50;  imperative  sentences,  352;  in- 
terrogative sentences,  id. 

Indirect  object,  62. 

Indirect  questions,  336,  337  f. 

Indo-European,  21. 

Infinitive  clause,  3;34. 

Infinitive  verb,  .347. 

Infinitive  mode,  9,  213;  meaning, 
!);  use,  213;  formation,  40,  126,  129, 
144,  157,  214;  present  infin.,  40, 
12(i,  129,  144,  157;  infins.  of  active 
voice,  213;  of  pass,  voice,  214; 
personal  endings,  214.  Syntax, 
213;  classification  of  uses  of,  213; 
when  in  ind.  disc,  .346;  subj.  must 
as  a  rule  be  expressed,  346;  as 
subject,  217;  object,  217;  comple- 
ment, 217;  with  subj.  ace,  216;  as 
meaning    purpose,    308 ;     perfect, 


INDEX. 


425 


345;  future  with  f6re  ut,  345;  rep- 
resents in  iud.  disc,  M5;  alter  me- 
mlni,  345;  subject  of,  must  in  ind. 
disc,  be  expressed,  34(). 

Inflection,  delin.  of,  4(1;  termina- 
tion of,  4G  If. 

informal  ind.  disc,  3<)0;  after  what 
verbs,  3(J0. 

inquam,  2H();  position  of,  2(S(). 

Inseparable  prepositions,  174  (7). 

Intensive  pronouns,  200;  in  ind. 
disc,  349. 

inter  se,  195. 

interest,- constr.  of,  295. 

Interjections,  defined,  14,  74. 

Intermediate  clauses,  syntax  of, 
358;  merely  explanatory,  358  f. 

Interrogative  conjunctions,  17(5;  in 
ind.  disc,  351. 

Interrogative  pronouns,  205; 
particles,  205,  337;  implying  con- 
dition, 319. 

Interrogative  word,  74;  omitted,  337, 
338,  339. 

Intransitive  verbs,  6,  Hi);  dat.  with, 
1()4. 

-io,  noun-ending,  95. 

-io,  verb-ending  of  3d  conj.,  1G8. 

ipse,  200;  inti.  of ,  2(X) ;  use  of,  200, 
329;  compared  with  se,  200,  349. 

iri,  in  f ut.  infin.  passive,  232. 

is,  inflection  of,  200;  use  of,  200  f. 

-is,  ace.  pi.  ending,  88;  gen.  ending, 
79;  pi.  cases  of  2d  decl.,  158,  82. 

islands,  names  of,  loc  use,  234. 

iste,  197;  use  of ,  197  f. 

It,  as  sign  of  impersonals,  292. 

Itaque,  accent,  see  Vocab. 

Iter,  inrt.  of,  96;  gender  of.  95. 

-IKS,  gen.  sing,  ending,  177;  quantity, 
177. 

J,  semi-vowel,  23;  sound  of,  28;  =  1, 
24;  interchangeable  with  j,  24. 

jubeo,  with  ace,  164;  construction 
of,  334. 

Jupplter  or  Jupiter,  infl.  of,  96. 

jus,  gender  of,  99. 

jusjurandum,  infl.  of,  96. 


juvSnis,  how  compared,   117;   gen. 

pi.  of,  89. 
juvo,  with  ace,  164. 

K,  sound  of,  28. 

Knowing,  constr.  w.  verbs  of,  331. 

Knowledge,  adjs.  of,  w.  gen.,  115. 

L,  sound  of,  28. 

Labial  stems  (3d  decl.},  77;  gender 
of,  94. 

laedo,  with  ace,  164. 

Latin  language,  21 ;  origin  and  rela- 
tionship, 21. 

Laws  of  eui>hony,  149. 

Letters,  classification  of,  24  f. 

llbet,  impers.,  292. 

licet,  synopsis  of,  291. 

LiN(iUAL  STEMS,  77;  gender  of,  83. 

I^iQuiDS,  see  Lingual. 

Literature,  periods  of  Latin,  22. 

Locative  case,  48;  locative  abla- 
tive, 209,  234;  locative  forms,  9(5, 
14_1,  188. 

loco,  without  prep.,  235. 

locus,  declen.of,  70;  meaning  in  pL, 
70. 

M,  sound  of,  28;  verb-ending,  lost,  43. 
mag-ni,  genitive  of  value,  283. 
Making,  verbs  of,  159. 
malo,  inflection  of,  273. 
Material,  abl.  of,  288. 
materfamllias,  infl.  of,  1X5. 
maxlme,  as  sign  of  superl.,  110. 
May,  potential,  how  expressed,  240. 
Cleans,  abl.  of,  287. 
Measure,  abl.  of,  287. 
medius  (middle  part  of),  415. 
memlni,   infl.    of,   285;    with  pres. 

infln.,  345. 
mSridies,   infl.  of,  142;  gender  of, 

142. 
-met,  enclitic,  193. 
meus  (voc  mi) ,  195. 
mille,  as  adj.  or  as  noun,  181;  how 

infl.,  181. 
milltiae,  locative,  235. 
minoris,  gen.  of  value,  283. 


426 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


misereor,  with  gen.,  21)5. 
miseret,   292;  with   ace.  and  gen., 

2i)5. 
Modern    languages     derived     from 

Latin,  22. 
Modes,  S,  239. 

Mode-signs,  24:5,  208  ;  modes  in  de- 
pendent clauses,  297,  30{j  I'f.;  intin., 

213  ff.,  344. 
Modification,  of  words,  3;  of  subject 

or  predicate,  190. 
modo,  dum  modo,  with  subj.  in 

conditions,  31<S. 
mons,  gender  of,  95. 
Mood,  see  Mode. 

Motion,  expressed  with  pi-ep.,  172. 
INIountains,  names  of,  gender,  47. 
Mutes,  23  ff . ;  mute  stems  (3d  decl.) , 

78  ff. 

N,  sound  of,  28;  stems  in  n,  80. 

Nasals,  23. 

navis,  abl.  sing,  of,  92. 

ne,  with  hortat.  sul)j.,  248;  prohibi- 
tions, 248;  final  clauses,  .">0(;f.;  con- 
secutive clauses,  'MH;  with  verbs  of 
fearing,  307. 

-nc,  enclitic,  in  questions,  75,  70,  244.  | 

Necessity,  verbs  of,  257. 

necne,  339. 

n§fas,  with  supine,  232. 

Negative  particle,  7();  as  exi)ressing 
no  in  answer  to  questions,  ."40. 

nego,  better  than  dico  . . .  non,  410. 

nemo,  use  of,  105. 

ne  non,  ;5;35. 

neque,  175. 

nequis,  207. 

ne  .  .  .  quidem,  412. 

nescio  an,  ,340. 

nescio  quis,  340. 

Neutkk  nouns,  (52  ff.,  94  f. 

-»/ lengthens  preceding  vowel,  32. 

ni,  nisi,  314  ff. 

nolo,  273  f. 

Nominative,  4,  53;  sign  of,  77;  form- 
ation from  stem,  1st  decl.,  46,  51; 
2d  decl.,  57,  59-03;  3d  decl.,  77,  78, 
81,  82,  83,  85,  87;  summary  of  rules 


for  forming  the  nom.  of  3d  decl., 
87;  4th  decl.,  140;  5th  decl.,  142 f. 
Syntax:  as  subject,  53;  pred. after 
esse,  100. 

non,  in  answer,  340. 

non  dublto  quin,  323. 

nonne,  75,  17<5. 

non  quia,  non  quod,  non  quin, 
324. 

noster,  194;  in  ind.  disc,  349. 

nostri,  as  obj.  gen.,  193. 

nostrum,  as  partitive  gen.,  193. 

Nouns,  defined,  1,  2;  classified,  3; 
Latin  nouns,  4(5;  infl.,40;  modifica- 
tion of,  47;  paradigms,  51  ff.  ;  rule 
of  agreement,  (50  ff . ;  model  for  pars- 
ing, 54;  abstract  and  collective, 
397;  of  1st  decl.,  49  ff.;  2d  decl., 
57 ff.;  3d  decl.,  77ft".;  classification 
of,  77,  93  ;  4th  decl.,  140  ;  5th  decl., 
142. 

-ns  as  adjective  ending,  107  f.;  gen.  pi. 
of,  92;  lengthens  preceding  vowel, 
32. 

nullus,  inrtec.  of,  177;  used  for  gen. 
and  abl.  of  nemo,  1(55. 

num,  force  of,  74,  20(5;  in  indirect 
questions,  339. 

Number,  2,  3, 10,  47;  of  nouns,  id.;  of 
adjectives,  (50;  of  verbs,  10,  41  ff. 

Numerals,  180;  classification  of,  180. 

O,  sound  of,  27;  quantity  of  o  final,  80. 

O  in  amo  =  a  and  o  and  m. 

O  si,  with  subj.  of  wish,  248. 

Object  defined,  4,  55;  direct,  55;  in- 
direct, 02;  model  for  parsing  the 
•>  objective,  50. 

Object  clauses,  307. 

Oblique  cases,  48;  oblique  disc,  342, 
3.(50. 

odi,  285. 

offendo,  with  ace,  1(34. 

oportet,  292. 

Optative  subjunctive,  248. 

opus,  tcork,  infl.  of,  81. 

opus  and  usus,  need,  with  abl.,  288. 

Ordtio  obliqua,  see  Indirect  Dis- 
course. 


INDEX. 


427 


Order  of  words,  90. 
Ordinal  numbers,  180. 
ordo,  gender  of,  i)5. 
-OS  for  -us,  in  nom,  sing,  of  2d  decl.,  57. 
Origin  of  Latin  language,  21 ;  how 
related,  21;  where  spoken,  21. 

P,  sound  of,  28. 

paenitet,  constr,  of,  205. 

Palatal  consonants,  25. 

panis,  gen.  pi.  of,  80;  gender  of,  95. 

Participial  clauses,  219 ;  implying 
condition,  319. 

Participal  stem,  38,  137. 

Participles,  defined, 11;  illustrated, 
11,  38,  219;  classified,  11,  219;  infi. 
of,  38,  108,  109,  128;  abl.  in  -/,  109; 
nom.  and  gen.  pi.,  109;  how  trans- 
lated, 219,  223;  in  abl.  abs.,  222; 
voices  of,  220;  of  trans,  verb,  220; 
of  intrans.  verbs,  220;  formation 
of,  220;  infl.  of,  221;  directions  for 
parsing,  223.  Syntax,  219;  time  of, 
221;  of  deponent  verbs,  250;  perf. 
pass.,  with  passive  meaning,  253; 
perf.,  128;  perf.  act,,  how  supplied, 
224;  perf.  partic,  denoting  paren- 
tage, etc.,  210;  agreement  of,  220; 
gerundive,  220,  22(3  ff.;  neut.  of  the 
perf.  in  enumerating  the  principal 
parts  of  a  verb,  155. 

Particles,  defined,  74;  interroga- 
tive and  negative,  74.  Syntax  of, 
248,  30(5  ff.;^  conditional,  315;  tem- 
poral, 325. 

Parts  of  speech  defined,  1-14. 

Passive  voice,  8,  119;  analysis  of, 
120;  origin,  121;  pass,  sign,  121. 

Passive  sign,  120,  121  ff. 

pelgaus,  neut.,  see  Vocab. 

Penalty,  gen.  of,  294, 

penes,  172. 

Penult,  30;  quantity  of,  33, 

per,  64,  172;  with  expressions  of 
time,  167,  183;  for  agent,  210;  in 
composition,  174  (7). 

Perfect  stem,  10,  71;  analysis,  72; 
synopsis  of  rules  for  forming,  161; 
in  composition,  118. 


Pp:rfect  tense,  71  ;  perfect  def- 
inite, 37,  303 ;  personal  endings, 
71,  133,  147,  161;  used  as  i)resent, 
286;  origin  of,  134;  v  suppressed  in 
perfect,  72;  stem,  how  formed,  71, 
133,  147,  165;  of  subj.  in  sequence 
of  tenses,  301  f .  " 

Periphrastic  con.jugations,  256; 
act.,  257;  pass,,  257;  pass.,  how 
used,  294;  meaning  and  formation 
of,  257 ;  periijhrastic  forms  in  sub- 
ordinate clauses,  303. 

Person,  defined,  10;  the  first  i^erson 
is  the  first  in  order,  195. 

Personal  endings,  42,  71,  120,  121, 
123,  166;  meaning  of,  42,  etc.,  121; 
how  formed,  1(56. 

Personal  pronouns,  5,  193  f.;  re- 
tained in  ind.  disc,  349. 

Persons  of  verbs,  3,  10. 

Petitio  obllqiia,  360. 

peto,  with  a  or  ab,  1.56. 

Phonetic  changes,  25,  26,  154. 

Phrases,  13,  173;  defined,  191;  adj. 
and  adverb,  65;  prepositional,  172, 

piget,  constr,  of,  295, 

Place,  to  which,  187,234;  relations  of, 
require  prep.,  237 ;  locative  uses, 235. 

Plenty,  verbs  of,  288. 

Pleonasm,  4  (c). 

Pluperfect,  10,  72;  analysis  of,  72. 

Plural,  of  nouns,  3,  47,  51  fT.;  of 
verbs,  10,  36,  39  ff. 

pluris,  gen.  of  value,  283. 

pias,  inflection  of,  106,  111. 

posco,  constr,  of,  l.~)(), 

poenitet,  see  paenitet, 

pons,  gender  of,  95. 

posse,  270  f . 

Possessive  pronouns,  194;  in  ind. 
disc,  349. 

Position,  rules  of,  90, 

possum,  infl.  of,  271;  how  formed, 
271. 

postea,  326, 

postquam,  326. 

postulo,  constr.  with  a  or  ab,  156. 

Potential  mode,  9;  how  expressed, 
240, 


42^ 


FIRST    STKVS    IN   LATIN. 


Potential  subjunctive,  'J48,  32<S. 

potior,  Avith  ablative,  287 ;  with  geni- 
tive, 287. 

prae,  172. 

Predicate,  18, 190;  defined,  18,  IKO: 
alter  esse,  18,  100;  agreement,  18, 

mi     * 

Prepositions,  (54,  171,  172;  use  of, 
172,  173;  inseparable,  174. 

Present  stem,  how  formed,  40  ff. 

Present  tense,  9,  10;  used  for 
aorist,  303. 

Preterit! ve  tenses,  395. 

I'rice,  abl.,  283. 

pridie,  loc,  see  415  (10). 

Primary  tenses,  oOO. 

Principal  parts  of  verbs,  38,  120; 
neut.  of  the  perl,  partic,  155. 

prior  used  instead  of  primus,  182. 

priusquam,  ;;27:  often  written  sep- 
arate, 328. 

pro,  preposition,  172. 

Proliibitions,  178,  248. 

Promising,  etc.,  verbs  of,  r>15. 

Pronouns,  5;  defined  and  classified, 
5,  172;  infl.  of,  19;)-207;  personal 
and  reflexive,  193,  194;  rule  for 
position  of,  liHi;  i^ossessive,  194; 
demonstrative,  197;  determinative, 
200;  relative,  202;  interrog.,  205; 
indefinite,  207;  pronouns  strength- 
ened by  -nu't,  -fc,  etc.,  193;  redu- 
plicative forms,  194;  exs.  illustrat- 
ing use  of,  195;  rule  for  position, 
m-).    Syntax  of,  203. 

I'RONUNCIATION,  modes  of,  27;  Ro- 
man, 27,  28;  phonetic,  27;  English, 
34. 

prosum,  infl.  of,  272. 

Protasis,  304. 

Proviso,  318. 

pudet,  295. 

pug-natur,  imp3rs.,  synopsis  of ,  291. 

Purpose,  300;  ways  of  expressing, 
308. 

Qu,  sound  of,  28. 

quaero  (quaeso),  irreg.  verb,  286; 
constr.  of,  150. 


quam,  with  superl.,  118,  275;  with 
compar.,  112, 275 ;  comparative  par- 
ticles, 320. 

quamllbet,  207;  infl.  of,  see  Vocab. 

quamsi,  320,  321. 

quamvis,  207;  infl.  of,  see  Vocab. 

quanti,  gen.  of  value,  283. 

Quantity,  general  rules  of,  31,  32, 
80;  of  final  vowels,  32,80;  of  other 
syllables,  see  Preface. 

quksi,  320,  321. 

-<j>ie,  enclitic,  70;  as  conj.,  175. 

queo,  irreg.  verb,  282,  28(5. 

(:iUESTiONS,  74,  200;  single  or  double, 
20(5;  fact  questions,  337;  direct, 
338;  indirect,  339;  rhetorical,  337; 
dependent  and  independent,  339; 
alternative,  see  double,  338;  in  in- 
direct disc,  351  f. 

qui,  relative,  infl.  of,  202;  agreement 
of,  203;  position  of,  203;  model  for 
parsing,  203;  general  relative,  202; 
indefinite,  207,  209 ;  expressing 
purpose,  30(5,  35(5;  concessive,  322; 
with  nescio,  .340;  strengthened  by 
ut,  ut  pote,  etc.,  .357. 

quicumque  (quicunque),  212. 

quia,  17(i,  .323. 

quidam,  205;  indef.,  207. 

quidem,  412. 

quin,  in  consecutive  clauses,  310; 
witli  verbs  of  hindering,  310;  non 
quin,  310. 

quis,  infl.  of,  205;  distinction  from 
qui  in  use,  205,  207;  compounds  of, 
205;  indef.  207;  with  nescio,  340.' 

quisnam,  205. 

quispiam,  207. 

quisquam,  207. 

quisquis,  202. 

quivis,  217. 

quo,  in  final  clauses,  310. 

quoad,  .320. 

quod,  conj.,  176;  clauses  with,  323, 
324,335;  as  ace.  of  specification,  373. 

quod  si,  see  Vocab. 

quomlnus,  308 ff.;  with  verbs  of 
hindering,  308. 

quoniam,  323  f. 


INDEX. 


429 


(Quotation,  ;542. 
quum,  see  cum. 

R,  sound  of,  2S;  substitute  for  s,  82. 

Reading  Latin  at  sight,  directions 
for,  ill. 

Reciprocal  {each  other),  how  ex- 
pressed, 194  f. 

recorder,  2<)4. 

Reduplication,  148;  of  pronouns, 
194;  in  perf.,  148,  1(51;  lost,  148; 
in  compounds,  148;  reduplicated 
forms  of  pronouns,  194. 

refert,  with  gen.,  295. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  194  f .,  348.  Syn- 
tax of,  194,  348;  in  indirect  dis- 
course, 349;  two  reflexives,  ;349. 

Reflexive  verbs,  121 ;  reflex,  stem, 121. 

Regular  verbs,  7,  54  ft'. 

Relative  clauses,  5,  202,  203;  how 
introduced,  355;  force  of,  355,  297  f., 
355.  Syntax,  203;  concessive,  322, 
355;  inind.disc,  357  f.;  conditional, 
355;  characteristic  and  result,  35G; 
as  causal,  355;  temporal,  355. 

Relative  pronouns,  inflection  of, 
202;  how  trans,  at  beginning  of  a 
sentence,  203.  Syntax,  203;  rule 
of  agreement,  202,  355;  position, 
203;  how  translated  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  sentence,  203 ;  model  for 
parsing,  203;  omitted  in  Eng.  but 
not  in  Latin,  203;  as  as  a  rel.,  203. 

respubllca,  infl.  of,  142. 

Remembering,  constr.  with  verbs  of, 
2()4. 

remlniscor,  294. 

res,  infl.  of,  142. 

Restrictive  relative,  356. 

Result,  clause  of,  312,  35G. 

Rhetorical  questions,  337;  in  ind. 
disc,  352. 

rog-o,  constr.  of,  156. 

Roman  pronunciation,  27,  28. 

Roman  Avriters,  22. 

Romance  languages,  origin  of,  22. 

Rules  of  syntax,  306  ff.;  general  rules 
of,  371. 

rus.  constr.  of.  234. 


S,  sound  of,  28;  as  sign  of  nomina- 
tive, 77-93;  s  of  the  nom.  and  voc. 
is  sometimes  dropped,  82;  s  be- 
comes r,  82 ;  s  unites  with  c  or  g",  85. 

Second  conjugation,  formation  of, 
129  ff. 

Second  declension,  nouns  of,  57  ff. 

sed,  175. 

Semi-deponents,  255. 

Semi-vowels,  24. 

senex,  infl.  of,  96;  compar.  of,  117. 

Sentence,  parts,  17;  analysis  of, 
18, 191 ;  classification  of,  74, 189  ff., 
296,  298;  simple,  189;  complex, 
189, 190; compound,  189, 190;  model 
for  analyzing,  191. 

Separation,  abl.  of,  209. 

Sequence  of  tenses,  302;  rules  for 
applying,  304;  in  indirect  discourse, 
302,  346,  347  f.;  after  participles, 
347;  after  infinitives,  etc.,  347. 

si,  conj.,  176;  conditional,  314 ff., 
concessive,  322. 

slmul  ac,  326. 

Signs  of  quantity,  23;  of  accents,  33. 

slmllis,  infl.  of,  106;  with  gen.  or 
dat.,  114,  115;  compar.  of,  116. 

siquis,  207. 

soleo,  255. 

solus,  infl.  of,  177;  with  rel.  clause, 
312. 

sonants,  25. 

Space,  ace.  of,  182. 

Specification,  abl.  of,  278;  ace.  of, 
373.     See  Cognate  Accusative. 

Stem,  defined,  40;  noun-stem,  46; 
how  formed,  46;  1st  decl.  or  a- 
stems,  49-52;  2d  decl.,  57;  3d  decl., 
77;  4th  decl.,  140;  5th  decl.,  142; 
verb-stems,  40;  terminations  of,  40; 
stem-characteristic,  40;  1st  conj., 
40;  2d  conj.,  130,  137;  3d  conj., 
144;  4th  conj.,  157;  labial,  dental, 
lingual,  guttural,  ?<-stems,  of  verbs, 
148,  161 ;  present  verb-stems,  40, 
126;  perfect,  71,  126,  133,  146,  147; 
participial,  126,  137, 163, 165;  stems 
classified  and  defined,  259  f . ;  stem- 
words,  82. 


430 


FIKST    STpyPS    IX    LATIN. 


sub,  17'2. 

Subject,  defined,  17,  53,  55;  omitted, 
42;  plur.  subj.,  150;  in  indir.  disc, 
346;  with  verbs  of  promising,  etc., 
345. 

Subjunctive  mode,  9;  paradigm  of, 
243,  245  f . ;  has  no  f  nt.,  how  sup- 
plied, 250,  239;  uses  of,  239;  analy- 
sis of,  243;  personal  endings,  243; 
tenses  of,  240,  303;  tenses  wanting, 
303;  how  translated,  240,  241,  244; 
classification  of  uses,  250;  conces- 
sive, 248;  hortatorj^,  248;  optative, 
248;  dubitative,  248;  potential,  248; 
negative  with,  244,  248;  four  con- 
jugations of,  245;  pass,  of,  24():  in 
independent  sentences,  248;  in  de- 
pendent clauses,  248;  in  rel.  clauses, 
248,  355  ff. ;  in  intermediate  clauses, 
248,  358;  in  indirect  discourse, 
248,  243  ff.;  in  indirect  questions, 
339;  how  translated  in  indirect 
questions,  'MO. 

Subordinate  clauses,  190,  248, 
291  ff.;  how  classified,  297  f.;  in  in- 
direct disc,  342. 

Subordinate  conjunctions,  170. 

Substantive  clauses,  defined  and 
classified,  33:!;  infinitive,  3.'I4;  of 
purpose,  334;  of  result,  ;5.')5;  with 
quod,  3)35;  ind.  question,  'SM;  gen- 
der of,  334. 

subter,  172. 

Suffix,  defined,  40;  of  novxus,  4(5;  of 
verbs,  42  ff. 

sum,  inflection  of,  101,  102. 

summus,  compar.  of,  117;  meaning 
of,  118,  415. 

sunt  qui,  35(5. 

super,  172. 

Superlative,  defined,  5;  of  adjec, 
different  ways  of  forming,  5;  infl. 
of.  111;  how  trans.,  113^  118;  of 
adverbs,  124. 

Supine,  noun  of  4th  decl.,  38,  231 ; 
meaning  and  use  of,  231;  not  com- 
mon, 232;  not  one  of  the  principal 
parts  of  verbs,  232;  government  of, 
232;  dependence  of,  232;  uses  of. 


231;  its  government,  232;   sup.  in 

-V7n  not  common.    Stem,  231;  how 

formed,  231. 
Surds,  25. 
Syllabication,  29. 
Syllables,   rules  for  division  of,  29, 

34. 
Synopsis  of  tenses,  73;  of  impersonal 

verbSj  91. 
Syntax,  17,  53  ff .     See  each  case  and 

mode  in  index. 

T,  sound  of,  28. 

taedet,  constr.  of,  295, 

tanquatn,  321. 

tanquam  si,  321  f. 

tanti,  gen.  of  price,  283. 

Teaching,  verbs  of,  150. 

Temporal  conj.,170;  classification  of, 
325;  clauses:  (1)  antecedent  action, 
320;  (2)  contemporaneous  action, 
320;  (3)  subsequent  action,  327. 

Tenses,  9;  liow  classified,  9,  37; 
meaning,  9,  41,  etc.;  analysis  of, 
44;  classification  of,  299;  denoting 
incomplete,  complete,  or  indefinite 
action,  299;  primary  and  second- 
ary, 300;  endings,  260 ff.;  forma- 
tion of,  260  ff.  Syntax,  9f.,  299, 
30(>ff.;  classification,  299;  present, 
299;  imperf.,  9f.,  299;  future,  9  f., 
299;  perfect,  9  f.,  299;  pluperfect, 
9f.,  299;  future  perfect,  9  f .,  2i)9; 
sequence  of,  .300 ft".;  of  infin.,  S44. 

Tense-signs,  45  ff.,  74, 121, 145, 243, 268. 

Terminations,  46;  of  infl.,  46,  51  ff.; 
of  nouns,  51  ff.;  of  verbs,  40,  42 ff. 

terra  marique,  235,  236. 

That,  uses  of,  33(5;  306  ff. 

Third  con JUGATiON,verbs  of,  144  ff. ; 
formation  of,  144 ff,;  infl.,  144-155; 
verbs  in  -io,  168. 

Third  Declension,  nouns  of,  77  ff. ; 
rules  of  gender,  47,  51,  57,  94,  95. 

Though,  see  Although. 

Threatening,  infin.  with,  345. 

Time  and  place,  construction  of,  167, 
182,  188,  234  ff. 

Time,  when,  167;  how  long,  182. 


INDEX. 


431 


totus,  177. 

Towns,  names  of,  gender  of,  47; 
construction  with  or  without  prep- 
osition, 234  ff. 

trans,  prep.,  172;  comps.  of,  with 
ace,  ."74. 

Transitive  vei'hs,  7,  110. 

Translation  of  subjunctive,  241. 

tres,  infl.  of,  181. 

turris,  abl.  sing,  of,  92. 

-tiis,  noun-ending,  95. 

U,  sound  of,  27;  a  consonant,  24; 
interchanged  with  v,  24. 

"iibi,  in  temporal  clauses,  320;  ubl 
primum,  320. 

-vhas,  case-ending  in  4th  decl.,  141. 

^udo,  noun-ending,  95. 

ullus,  infl.  of,  177. 

unus,  infl.  of,  181;  in  pi.,  181;  with 
pi.  nouns  of  a  sing,  meaning,  181. 

iiniis  qui,  with  subj.,  350. 

unusquisque,  207. 

-nrvs,  future  participle,  220;  in  in- 
direct discourse,  .'>4(). 

usus,  need,  with  abl.,  288. 

ut,  as  concess.,  322;  comparative, 
320;  as  final,  30t>;  of  result,  ,309; 
ut  ne,  30G;  with  subst.  clauses, 
333,  ,3.')4;  omission  after,  3.37. 

ut,  v'lien,  .325,  320;  ut  primum,  320. 

ater,  infl.  of,  177. 

uterque,  infl.  of,  177. 

uti,  iitlnam,  with  subj.  of  wish, 
248;  uti,  comparative  particle,  320. 

Utor,  etc.,  with  abl.,  287;  as  transi- 
tive, 228. 

utrum,  3.39;  utrum  .  .  .  an,  338. 

ut  si,  .320,  321. 

V,  sound  of,  28;  originally  not  dis- 
tinguished from  u,  28;  interchange- 
able with  u,  24;  syncopated  in 
perf.,  72,  101. 

Value,  gen.  of,  283. 

vel,  175. 

velut,  .320,  321. 

velut  si,  .320,  321. 

Verb-stem,  40. 


Verb,  as  complete  sentence,  43. 

Verbs,  defined,  0;  modification,  (5, 
.3(5,  .38 ;  formation,  39  ff . ;  regular, 
7;  deponent,  253  f.;  semi-deponent, 
255;  irregular,  7,  273;  defective, 
285;  impersonal,  291;  rule  of  agree- 
ment, 54.     Syntax  of,  54  ff. 

Verbs  of  perceiving,  declaring,  etc., 
217,  3.34,  348. 

Verbal  endings,  42,  44  ff.,  130. 

Verbals  in  -ax,  115;  in  -hilis,  115. 

vero,  in  answers,  340. 

vescor,  with  abl.,  253. 

vesperi,  00,  see  Vocab. 

veto,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  3,34, 

vetus,  infl.  of,  109;  compar.,  110. 

-cl,  in  perf.,  71,  134.  The  i  is  part  of 
the  stem,  71. 

vis,  infl.  of,  90. 

Vocative,  48,  58  ff.,  182;  case,  15; 
like  nom.,  .59,  02,  77;  except  in  2d 
decl.,  .57,  77;  in  -l  of  nouns  in  -his, 
58.     Syntax,  75. 

Voice,  8,  119,  137;  act.  and  pass., 
8,  119;  formula  for  converting  act. 
to  pass.,  13(). 

volo,  infl.  of,  273. 

Vowels,  24;  quality  of,  24;  open, 
close,  medial,  24;  vowel  stems,  78, 
101;  characteristic  vowel  of  the 
stem  droj)ped,  1.39;  vowel  of  the 
stem  lengthened,  Kil;  characteris- 
tic vowel  changed,  130,  1,33,  1.35, 
138,  144,  145,  147,  151,  154,  158, 100, 
103,  179;  characteristic  vowel  of 
stem  shortened,  72. 

W,  not  in  Latin  alphabet,  23;  =  v,  24. 
AVant,  verbs  of,  288. 
Way  by  which,  abl.,  237. 
Wish,  expression  of,  248. 
Winds,  gend.  of  names  of,  47. 
Wishing,  constr.  with  verbs,  ,3,34. 

X,  sound  of,  28;  lengthens  preceding 
syllable,  32. 

Y,  sound  of,  27. 

Year,  how  expressed,  182,  222. 


VOCABIILAEY. 


L  — LATIN   AND    ENGLISH. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


a active. 

abl ahUitire. 

ace accusative. 

adj adjective. 

adv adverb. 

conj conjunction. 

comp comparative. 

dat dative. 

def defective. 

dep deponent. 

dim diminuti^ie. 

F feminine. 

gen genitive. 

iraperat imperative. 

irapers impersonal. 


indoel indeclinable. 

inch inchoative. 

intr intransitive. 

inteij interjection. 

in- irregular. 

M masculine. 

N neuter. 

nuin numeral. 

part participle. 

perf perfect. 

pi 2^itiral. 

p.p perfect  part. 

prep preposition. 

pron pronoun. 

tr transitive. 


The  quantity  of  vowels  that  are  long  or  short  by  position,  of  diphthongs,  and  of 
short  final  syllables,  is  not  given. 

The  references  in  the  Vocabulary  are  to  the  sections  of  this  book. 


a,  ^b,  prep,  with  abl.  (a  only  be- 
fore consonants ;  ab  before 
vowels  and  consonants),  fru77i, 
hy ;  ab  sinistra  parte,  on  the 
left  side. 

ab-do,  -dere,  -didi,  -ditum,  to 
put  away,  hide,  conceal. 

ab-duco,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -duc- 
tum,  to  lead  from,  ivithdraiv. 

ab-eo,  -ire,  -ivi,  or  ii,  -itum  (298. 
Obs.  3),  to  go  away,  depart. 

ab-icio  (pronounced  ab-jicio), 
-icgre,  -jeci,  -jectum  (ab ; 
jScio),  to  throw  away,  abandon. 

abs-ens,  -entis,  part,  (ab-sum), 
absent. 

ab-solvo,  -solvere,  -solvi,  -s61u- 
tum,  to  unbind,  acquit. 


abs-que,  prep,  with  abl.,  luithout, 
but  for,  except. 

abs-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -ten- 
turn  (tgneo),  to  hold  (one's 
self)  off,  abstain,  refrain, 
spare. 

ab-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  irr.,  to  be 
absent,  to  be  wanting. 

ac,  see  at-que. 

Acca  Larentia,  -ae,  f.,  the  wife 
of  the  shepherd  Faustulus,  who 
reared  Romulus  and  Remus. 

ac-cedo,  -cedgre,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum  (ad ;  cedo),  to  go  toivards, 
approach. 

ac-cido,  -cidgre,  -cidi,  no  p.p. 
(ad ;  cSdo),  to  fall  upon,  hap- 
pen, (w.  dat.  pers.)  befall. 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


ac-cido,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -cisum 
(ad;  caedo),  to  cut  into. 

ac-cipio,  -cipSre,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
(ad ;  cSpio),  to  take,  accept. 

ac-ciTiro,  -currere,  -ciicurri  and 
-curri,  no  p.p.,  to  run  to. 

ac-cuso,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ad ; 
causa),  to  accuse,  Jdame. 

acer,  -cris,  -ere,  adj.,  sharp,  keen, 
eager,  active. 

^cies,  -ei,  f.,  ayi  edge :  a  line  of 
hattle,  Jierceness. 

acriter,  adv.  (acer),  sharply, 
keenly,  fiercely. 

Scus,  -us,  V.  (acuo),  (a  thing 
sliarpened),  a  needle,  pin. 

Sd,  prep,  ^vitl)  ace,  to,  toicards, 
near  to,  at,  besides. 

ad-Smo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  hegin 
to  lore. 

ad-do,  -d§re,  -didi,  -ditum,  to 
add.  Join,  annex  to. 

ad-duco,  -Sre,  -xi,  -ctum,  t(f  lead 
to,  bring  to  (of  persons). 

adf,  see  aff. 

Sd-hibeo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum  (ad; 
hSbeo),  to  have  iri ;  to  sum- 
mon. 

ad-huc,  adv.  (ad;  hie),  to  this 
place,  thus  far,  besides,  as  yet. 

Sd-ipiscor,  -ipisci,  -eptus  sum, 
dep.  (ad;  Spiscor,  282),  to  ob- 
tain, win. 

ad-jiivo,  -jiivare,  -juvi,  -jutum, 
to  help,  assist. 

ad-ministro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
7nanage,  administer. 

admira-tio,  -onis,  f.  (admiror), 
an  admiring,  admiration,  won- 
der, surj)risc. 

ad-miror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep. 
(282),  to  admire,  wonder  at. 

ad-mitto,  -mittgre,  -misl,  -mis- 
sum,  to  let  go,  allow ;  admisso 
equo,  at  full  gallop. 

ad-m6neo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  to 
ivarn,  urge,  admonisli. 

ad61e-sco,      -61esc6re,      -61evi, 


-ultum,  inch.  (adSleo),  to  grow 

up,  groic,  increase. 
ad-6perio,     -Ire,    -ui,    -tum,     to 

cover. 
S.d-6rior,  -6rirl,  -ortus  sum,  dep., 

to    rise    up  against;    to   attack, 

assault,  begin. 
Sd-6ro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  tcor- 

ship,  respect,  entreat,  beg. 
adp,  see  ads. 
ads,  see  ass. 
adspicio,  see  aspicio. 
Sdiilescens,  -entis,  part.   (Sdii- 

lesco),  young :    as  noun,  c,  a 

young   man,    a    young    icoman 

(from  15  to  30,  and  sometimes 

to  40  and  later). 
ad-sum,  adesse,  affui  (or  adfui), 

to  be  near,  be  present,  assist. 
adven-tus,  -iis,  m.  (advgnio),  a 

coming  to,  arriral. 
adversarius, -a,-um, adj.  (adver- 

sus),  turned  toumrrls,  fronting  : 

as  noun,  m.,  «n  opponent,  enemy. 
adversus,  prep.  w.  ace,  opposite 

to,  against,  towards. 
adversus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (adver- 

to),   turned   towards,   opposite; 

as  noun,  opponent. 
ad-verto,  -6re,  -ti  sum,  to  turn 

to   or   toirards,  to   direct;    Sni- 

mum     advertere,    to    observe, 

attend  to;  Sminum  advertere 

in  aiiquem,  to  punish  one. 
aedes,   -is,    f.,  a  temple;    pL,  a 

house. 
aedific-ium,  -ii,  n.  (aedifico),  a 

building. 
aed-i-fico,     -are,     -avi,     -atum 

(aedes  ;  facio),  to  build. 
Aedui,  -orum,  m.,  a  tribe  in  Gaul 

between    the    Liger    (modern 

Loire)  and  the  Arar  (Saone). 
Aeduus,  -a,  -um,  an  JEduan. 
aeger,   -gra,    -grum,    adj.,    sick, 

disabled. 
aegre,  adv.  (aeger),  feeble  ;  icith 

difficulty,  scarcely. 


VOCABULARY.  —  I. 


aegrotus,    a,  -iim,  adj.  (aeger), 

sick-,  ill. 
aer,    -6ris,    m.    (ace.    aera    and 

aerem),  the  air,  cloud,  mist. 
aes,    aeris,    x.,    copper,    money, 

icac/es ;  aes  Slienum,  another's 

money,  i.e.  a  debt. 
aes-tas,  -atis,  f.,  snmmer. 
aes-timo,  -are,  -avi,  -atuni  (aes), 

to  estimate,  value  (304). 
aetas,   -atis,    f.    (aevum),    age 

(of  old  or  young). 
af-f6ro,  -ferre,   -attiili,  -allatum 

(ad;  fero),  to  briny. 
af-ficio,  -gre,  -feci,  -fectum  (ad ; 

facio),  to  treat,  affect,  visit  (with 

punishment,  etc.). 
af -finis,    -e,     adj.    (ad ;     finis), 

hordering    upon,     adjacent    to, 

kindred. 
affin-itas,  -atis,  f.  (affinis),  rela- 
tionship   hy   marriage,    relation- 
ship, nearness. 
a-f6re,  l"ut.  inf.  of  absum,  to  he 
_  away,  absent. 
Africa,  -ae,  f.,  Africa,  especially 

the  country  near  Carthage. 
Sger,  -gri,  m.,  a  field,  territory. 
agger,  -Sris,  m.,  a  heap,  mound, 

emhankment. 
ag-gr6dior,  -gr^di,  -gressus  sum. 

dep.   (ad ;    gradior),  to  go   to, 

approach,  attack. 
ag-men,     -inis,    n.     (Sgo),     that 

which  is  led,  i.e.  army  (on  the 

march). 
a-gnosco,    -noscere,    -novi,   -ni- 

tum  (ad ;    gnosco  =  nosco), 

to  recognize,  o/rn,  acknowledge. 
agnus,  -1,  M.,  a  lamh. 
Sgo,  -ere,   egi,  actum,  to  drive ; 

to  do ;  agere  cum,  to  treat  tvith ; 

aggre  de,  talk  over. 
agr-arius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (S.ger),  of 

fields  ov public  lands. 
agr-i-c61a,  -ae,  m.  (Sger ;  c61o),  a 

cultivator  of  the  land,  a  farmer. 
5io,  def.  (305.  2),  to  speak,  say. 


alacr-itas,  -atis,  v.  (SlScer),  live- 
liness, eagerness,  alacrity. 

Alba,  -ae,  r.,  Alba  (Longa),  an 
ancient  town  of  Latium,  20 
miles  S.E.  of  Kome,  built  by 
Ascauius,  son  of  iFhieas. 

Alb-anus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (Alba), 
of  or  belonging  to  Alba:  Alban. 

albus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  white,  fair. 

Alexander, -dri,  m.  (Defender  of 
tnen),  son  of  Philip  and  Olym- 
pia,  surnamed  "  the  Great," 
the  founder  of  the  Macedonian 
Empire  (b.c.  850-323). 

Sli-enus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (Slius), 
belonging  to  another  jierson  or 
thing :  foreign,  hostile;  aes  alie- 
num,  debt. 

Sliquamdiu,  adv.  (Sliquis;  diu), 
aivhile,  for  some  time. 

Sliqu-ando,  adv.  (Sliquis),  (of 
time  past,  future,  or  present), 
at  some  time,  at  last. 

aii-quantus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (alius; 
quantus),  some,  considerable. 

Sli-quis  (aliqui),  -qua,  -quid  or 
-quod  (alius;  quis),  pron. 
indef.  (247),  some  one,  some, 
any ;   ^liquid,  something. 

Sli-quot,  indef.  num.  adj.,  indecl. 
(alius;  quot),  some,  a  few. 

alius,  -a,  -ud,  adj.,  another,  other 
(209) ;  alius  .  .  .  alius,  one  .  .  . 
another. 

A116br6ges,  -um,  m.,  a  Gallic 
people,  bounded  on  the  noi'th 
and  west  by  the  Rhodanus 
(Rhone),  south  by  the  Jsara 
(Isere),  and  extending  east- 
ward to  the  Alps. 

aio,  -gre,  -ui,  altum,  to  nourish, 
support,  feed. 

Alpes,  -ium,  f.,  the  Alps;  the 
high  mountain  range  between 
Ttalia,  Gallia,  and  Plelvetia. 

alter,  -tera,  -tgrum,  adj.  (209), 
one  of  two,  other,  second;  alter 
.  .  .  alter,  one  .  .  .  the  other. 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


altitude,  -dinis,  f.,  heir/ht,  depth. 

altus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (Slo),  high, 
deep. 

alveus,  -i,  m.  (alvus),  a  channel, 
trough,  skiff. 

Ambarri,  -orum,  m.  pL,  a  people 
of  Gaul. 

amb-io,  -ire,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  -Ttum 
(eo),  to  go  about,  canvass. 

ambi-tio,  -onis,  f.  (ambio),  a 
canvassing,  ambition. 

ambo,  -ae,  -o,  niiiii.  adj.,  both. 

ambiilo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
loalk. 

S.mic-itia,  -ae,  f.  (BxalcM&),  friend- 
ship. 

Sm-icus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (^mo), 
loving,  friendhj,  kind. 

Sim-icus,  -1,  M.,  a  friend. 

a-mitto,  -niittgre,  -mlsi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  let  go,  lose,  destroy. 

amnis.  -is,  m.,  a  river  (large,  deep 
strea-ii). 

Smo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  love. 

Smor,  -oris,  m.  (amo),  love. 

am-plector,  -plecti, -plexus  sum, 
dep.,  to  ivind  around,  einbrac^^. 

amplius,  comp.  adv.  (ample), 
more,  longer,  further. 

amplus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  gi^eat,  ample, 

^  spacious,  f/rantl,  large. 

Amulius,  -ii,  m.,  a  king  of  Alba, 
brother  ot"  Xumitor,  and  great- 
uncle  of  Romulus. 

Sn,  disjunctive  inter,  particle 
(34r5),  irh ether,  or. 

an-ceps,  -cipitis,  adj. (an;  cSput), 
two-headed,  doubtful,  critical. 

angust-iae,  -arum,  v.  (angustus), 
narrowness,  a  narrow  pass,  defle. 

angus-tus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (ango), 
narrow,  scantg. 

Sn-ima,  -ae,  f.,  air,  breath,  life. 

anim-adverto,  -tSre,  -ti,  -sum 
(Animus;  adverto),  ^>  turn  the 
mind  to,  to  attend  to  :  Snimad- 
vertSre  in  aliquem,  to  jninish 
one. 


^im-al,    -alis,    n.    (anima),    an 

animal  (including  man),  living 

creature. 
an-imus,  -i,  :m.,  the  soul,  mind,  dis- 
position, temper,  thought. 
an-non,  conj.,  or  not  (345). 
annii-lus,  -i,  m.,  ring. 
annus,  -T,  m.,  a  year. 
anser,  -eris,  m.,  goose. 
antea,  adv.,  before. 
ante-eo,  -Ire,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  no  p.p., 

N.,  to  go  before,  precede,  excel. 
ante-p6no,   -Sre,   -p6sul,   -p6si- 

tum,  to  place  before,  prefer. 
ante  .  .  .  quam,  conj.,  before  that. 
ant-iquus,  -a,  -um,  adj.   (ante), 

former,  ancient,  old. 
Antonius,  -il,  m.,  Marcus  Antoni- 

us,  the  distinguished  triumvir, 

con([uered    by    Octavianus,    at 

Actium,  B.C. ')!. 
anxius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (ango),  tor- 
mented, anxious,  trord)led. 
SpSrio,  -Ire,  -ul,  -tum,   to  open, 

unclose,  show,  reve(d. 
Sper-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (Spgrio), 
^  open. 
Apollonia,   -ae,    r.,    a   town   of 

Macedonia. 
Apollonius,  -il,    m.,   Apollonius, 

a    celebrated     rhetorician     of 

Ivhodes. 
ap-pareo,  -ere,  -ui,   -itum  (ad; 

pareo),  to  <tppear,  be  visible. 
ap-pello,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ad; 

pello),  to  address,  call,  name. 
ap-pgto,  -pgtgre,  -petlvl  or  petil, 

-petitum,  to  seek  for. 
ap-prehendo,    -Sre,     -dl.    -sum 

(ad ;  prghendo),  to  seize,  take 

hold  of 
ap-pr6pinquo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 

(ad ;      propinquo),      to      ap- 
^  proach. 
Aprllis,  -is,  m.  (ap6rio),  April ; 

the  month  in  which  the  earth 

OPENS    itself    to   fertility;    as 

adj.,  of  April, 


VOCAJiULAUY.  —  1. 


^pud,  prep,  witli  ace,  with,  near 

to,  in  the  presence  of;  S.pucl  me, 

at  my  house. 
aqua,  -ae,  f,,  tenter. 
aquila,    -ae,    f.,    the    earjle :    the 

standard  of  the  Koniau  legion. 
aquil-i-fer,  -gri,  m.  (Squila ;  fSro), 
^  an  eagle-hearer,  standard-bearer. 
Aquitan-us,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  Aqui- 
^  tanian. 
Arar,  -Sris,  m.,  a  tributary  of  the 

Khodaiius   in    Gaul   (now  the 

Saone). 
ara-trum,  -i,  n.,  a  p/ou(/h. 
arbitrium,  -ii,  n.  (arbiter),  a  de- 
cision, judfpnent :  power,  icill. 
arbitror,   -ari,   -atus   sum,   dep. 

(arbiter),  to  hear,  judge,  think. 
arc-eo,  -ere,  -ui,  no  p.p.,  to  inclose, 

keep  off,  prevent. 
ar-cesso,  -gre,  -sivi,  -situm  (ad; 

cedo)  (to  cause  to  come),  to 

summon,  call,  invite. 
arcus,  -us,  m.,  a  how,  rainhoiv. 
arguo,  -6re,  -ui,  -utum,  to  make 

clear,  accuse. 
ar-idus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (areo),  dnj ; 

N.,  as  noun,  dr//  land. 
Ariovistus,  -i,  m.,  a  king  of  the 

Germans. 
arma,  -orum,  n.,  arms,  defensive 

weapons. 
armo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (arma), 

to  furnish  icith  weapons,  to  arm, 

equip. 
aro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  plough. 
ar-ripio,    -6re,    -ripui,    -reptum 

(ad ;  rSpio),  to  snatch,  seize. 
arr6ga-ns,  -ntis,  part.  (arrSgo), 

assuming,  haughtg,  proud. 
arr6gan-ter,  adv.  (arr6gans),  «.s- 

sumingly,  haughtily,  proudly. 
arrogantia    (arr6go),     -ae,     f., 

a rroga nee,  h aughtiness . 
ars,  artis,  f.,  skill,  ahility,  clever- 
ness, invention. 
Arverni,  -orum,  m.,  a  people  of 

Gaul,  in  the  present  Auvergne. 


ar-vum,  -i,  x.  (§.ro),  cultivated 
land,  a  field. 

arx,  arcis,  f.  (for  arc-s  from 
arceo),  a  castle,  citadel,  tower. 

a-scendo,  -scendSre,  -scendi, 
-scensum  (ad;  scando),  to 
ascend,  mount  up,  climh. 

Asia,  -ae,  f.,  Asia,  generally  Asia 
Minor. 

Ssinus,  -1,  M.,  an  ass. 

asper,  -era,  -grum,  adj.,  rough, 
harsh,  violent. 

a-spicio,  -gre,  -exi,  -ectum  (ad ; 
spgcio),  to  look  at,  to  hehold,  see. 

as-sideo,  -ere,  -edi,  -essum  (ad; 
sedeo),  to  sit  near;  to  hesiege. 

as-surgo,  -gere,  -rexi,  -rectum 
(ad  ;  surgo),  to  rise  up,  stand 
up. 

at,  conj.,  hut,  yet. 

Athenae,  -arum,  f.,  Athens,  the 
chief  city  of  Attica. 

at-que  or  ac,  conj.  [in  the  best 
writers  ac  is  used  only  before 
a  word  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant], and  also,  and  besides, 
and;  simul  atque,  as  soon  as; 
minus  ac,  less  than. 

atrox,  -ocis,  adj.,  savage,  fierce, 
cruel,  atrocious. 

Atticus,  a  Roman  name. 

at-tingo,  -ere,  -tigi,  -tactum  (ad  ; 
tango),  to  touch  upon;  border 
upon. 

auctor-itas,  -atis,  f.  (auctor), 
authority,  poiver,  injluence. 

audac-ia,  -ae,  f.  (audax),  cour- 
age, blaring. 

audac-iter,  and  audac-ter,  adv. 
(audax),  boldly,  courageously, 
daringly. 

aud-ax,  -acis,  adj.  (audeo),  dar- 
ing, bold,  courageous,  violent. 

aud-eo,  -ere,  ausus  sum,  semi- 
dep.  (243),  to  dare,  venture. 

audi-ens,  -entis,  part,  (audio), 
obedient  to;  as  noun,  m.  or  f., 
a  hearer. 


FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


aud-io,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum,  to 

hear,  listen. 

au-f6ro,  -f erre,  abstiili,  ablatum, 
irr.  (ab  ;  fgro),  to  carry  away, 
remove  (295.  Obs.  2). 

au-fiigio,  -6re,  -fugi,  -fttgitum 
(ab  ;  fiigio),  to  flee  away. 

augeo,  -ere,  -auxi,  -auctum,  to 
increase,  enlarge. 

augiir-ium,  -ii,  n.,  predictions 
founded  (in  part)  on  the  ob- 
servation of  birds;  divination, 
prophecy,  soothsaying. 

aur-eus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (aurum), 
golden. 

auspic-ium,  -ii,  x.  (auspex),  an 
omen  (taken  from  the  Avatching 
of  birds),  an  auspice  ;  auspicia 
habere,  to  hold  or  take  the  aus- 
pices. 

aut,  conj.  (205.  2),  or :  aut  .  .  . 
aut,  either  .  .  .  or. 

autera,  conj.  (205.  3),  Jmt,  hoiv- 
i'ver,  besides. 

auxilium,  -ii,  x.  (augeo),  help, 
aid,  assistance;  auxilia, -orum, 
auxiliary  troops. 

a-verto,  -gre,  -ti,  -sum,  turn  away 
from,  avert,  laithdraw. 

avid-itas,  -atis,  f.,  eagerness. 

Sv-idus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (Sveo), 
eager,  covetous. 

avis,  -is,  F.,  a  bird. 

avus,  -i,  M.,  a  grandfather. 


balneum,  -i,  x.  (pi.  mostly  balne- 
ae,  -arum,  f.),  a.  bath. 

Balticus,  -a,  -um,  Baltic. 

barbSrus,  -a,  -um,  a,d].,  foreign, 
strange,  barbarian ;  barbSri, 
-orum,  M.,  foreigners,  barbari- 
ans ;  a  name  applied  first  by  the 
Greeks  and  afterwards  by  the 
Romans  to  people  of  other  na- 
tions. 


be-atus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (beo),  hap- 
py, prosperous,  fortunate. 

Belgae,  -arum,  m,,  the  Belgians,  a 
warlike  people  dwelling  in  the 
north  of  Gaul. 

b-ellum,  -1,  N.  (old  form  du- 
ellum)  (duo)  (a  contest  be- 
tween two  parties),  ivar. 

b§ne,  adv.,  well,  flnely,  prosper- 
ously;  bgne  pugnare,  to  fight 
successfully. 

b6ng-f actor,  -oris,  m  .  (bSne  ;  f §.- 
cio),  a  benefactor. 

bene-ficium,  -ii,  x.  (bSne ;  f^- 
cio),  tvell-doing,  favor,  benefit. 

bibo,bib6re,bibi,nop.p.,^oc/H;«^-. 

Bibracte,  -is,  n.,  Bibracte,  the 
chief  town  of  the  iEdui. 

Bibrax,  -actis,  x.,  Bibrax,  a  town 
of  Gaul,  in  the  territory  of  the 
Remi. 

Bibiilus,  -i,  m.,  Marcus  Calpur- 
nius,  consul  B.C.  59,  colleague 
of  Caesar. 

bi-duum,  -til,  x.  (bis;  digs),  a 
space  of  tiro  days. 

bl-ni,  -ae,  -a,  numeral  distributive 
adj.  (bis),  two  each,  two  by  two. 

bi-partito,  adv.  (bis ;  pars),  in 
two  parts,  two  divisions. 

bis,  num.  adv.,  twice. 

Boil,  -orum,,  m.,  the  Boii,  a  people 
of  Gaul. 

b6n-itas,  -atis,  f.  (b6nus),  good- 
ness, virtue,  ivorth. 

b6nus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  good  (149. 
4) ;  as  noun,  b6num,  -i,  x., 
good ;  x.  pi .  as  noun,  b6ni  (cf .  3. 
4),  (jood  men;  b6na,  -orum, 
goods,  property. 

bos,  bSvis,  com.  gen.  (3-21),  an 
ox,  a  cow. 

brachium,  -ii,  x.  (brace-),  an  arm. 

brgvis,  -e,  adj.,  s)iort,  small,  brief 

Britannia,  -ae,  f.,  Britain. 

Britanni,  -orum,  m.,  the  inhabi- 
tants of  Britain,  Britons. 

Britannicus,  -a,  -um,  British. 


VOCABULARY. 


Brundisium,  -ii,  n.,  Brandislum, 
an  ancient  town  of  Calabria, 
in  S.  E.  Italy,  nearest  seaport 
to  Greece. 

Brutus,  -1,  M.,  Lucius  Junius,  a 
founder  of  the  Koman  Jvepub- 
lic,  B.C.  609. 

Brutus,  -1,  M.,  Marcus,  a  friend  of 
Cicero,  a  conspirator  against 
Caesar;  Decimus,  a  fellow-con- 
spirator  with  the  preceding. 

C. 

C,  an  abbreviation  denoting  Gai- 
us  (Caius)  ;  as  a  nnrneral,  c 
=  centum,  /nindrcd. 

cado,  cSdere,  cecidi,  casum,  to 
fall,  ha])pen,  perish.  • 

caed-es,  -is,  f.  (caedo),  slaugh- 
ter, bloodshed,  ha  roc. 

caedo,  -6re,  cecidi,  caesum  (ca- 
do), (to  cause  to  fall),  to  cut 
dotvn,  kill,  strike. 

caelum,  -i,  x,,  sky,  heaven. 

Caesar,  -Sris,  m.,  Gains  Julius, 
murdered  by  Brutus  and  Cas- 
sins,  B.C.  44. 

cSlSm-itas,  -atis,  f.,  disaster,  ca- 
lamitij. 

calcar, -aris,  N.,  .sy^wr. 

calv-itium,  -ii,  x.  (calvus),  bald- 
ness. 

calvus,  -a,  -umi,  adj.,  bald. 

campus,  -1,  M.,  a  plain,  field,  level 
surface;  Campus  Martius,  a 
grassy  plain  in  Rome,  along 
the  Tiber,  dedicated  to  Mars, 
where  elections  w^ere  held,  ex- 
ercise and  recreation  taken. 

canis,  -is,  com.  gen.,  a  dog ;  gen. 
pi.  cSnum  (109.  n.  1). 

cSno,  cSnere,  cecinT,  no  p.p.,  to 
sing,  foretell,  predict. 

canto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (c^no), 
intens.,  sing. 

cSpel-la,  -ae,  f.  dim.  (caper),  a 
she-goat. 


cSipio,  cSpgre,  cepi,  captum,  to 

take,  sfdze  (147). 

cap-tivus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (cSpio), 
taken  prisoner,  captive  ;  as  noun, 
captivus,  -1,  M.,  a  prisoner. 

cSput,  -itis,  N.,  the  head. 

career,  -eris,  m.,  a  dungeon,  pris- 
on. 

cSjreo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  to  be  ivith- 
out,  free  front. 

carmen,  -inis,  n.,  a  poem,  song ; 
an  oracle. 

carrus,  -i,  m.,  a  two-wheeled  cart  ; 
cart,  loagon. 

Carthago  (Kar),  -inis,  f.,  Car- 
thage, a  city  of  N.  Africa. 

carus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  dear,  pre- 
cious. 

casa,  -ae,  f.,  a  hut,  cottage,  cabin. 

Casca,  -ae,  m.,  one  of  the  con- 
spirators against  Caesar. 

Cassi-anus,  belonging  to  Cassius. 

Cassius,  -ii,  m.,  Cassius,  a  proper 
name ;  the  chief  conspirator 
against  Caesar. 

castel-lum,  -i,  x.  dim.  (castrum), 
a  castle,  fort. 

Casticus,  -1,  M.,  Casticus,  a  Se- 
quanian. 

castra,  -orum,  x.  pi.,  a  camp. 

castrum,  -i,  n.,  a  castle,  fortress. 

ca-sus,  -us,  M.  (cSdo),  a  falling 
down;  fall,  chance,  calamity. 

catena,  -ae,  ¥.,  a  chain,  a  fetter. 

Catilina,  -ae,  m.,  Lucius  Sergius 
Catilina ;  a  Roman  who  at- 
tempted an  insurrection  against 
his  country. 

Cato,  -onis,  m.,  Marcus  Porcius 
Cato  (B.C.  93-45),  the  younger, 
who  committed  suicide  after 
the  battle  of  Thapsus. 

cStiilus,  -1,  M.  dim.,  a  young  dog  ; 
whelp,  puppy. 

causa  (caussa),  -ae,  f.,  a  cause, 
reason:  causa, /o?*  the  sake  of. 

cedo,  cedgre,  cessi,  cessum,  to 
go,  yield,  retreat. 


8 


FIllST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


cglSber,  -bris,  -bre,  adj.,  fre- 
quented, celebrated. 

cSler,  -gris,  -gre,  adj.,  su'ift,feet. 

cgl6r-itas,  -atis,  f.  (cgler),  sivi/t- 
ness,  quickness,  speed. 

cSlgr-iter,  adv.  (cgier),  sicifthj, 
quickly,  speedily. 

celo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (185),  to 
hide,  conceal. 

Celtae,  -arum,  M.,the  Celts  :  the 
inhabitants  of  Central  (iaul. 

ceuseo,  -ere,  -ui,  -um,  to  reckon, 
estimate ;  (of  proceedings  in 
Senate),  vote,  to  (jice  one's  opin- 
ion. 

centum,  adj.,  indecl.,  n  hundred. 

ceutiiria,  -ae,  v.  (centum),  a 
division  of  one  hundred  ;  a  cen- 
tury, company. 

centiirio,  -onis,  m.  (centum),  the 
commander  of  a  century  ;  a  cen- 
turion. 

certa-men,  -inis,  n.  (certo),  a 
contest,  hat  tic. 

certiorem  (acc.)fSc§re,  to  inform. 

certo,  adv.  (certus),  certainly. 

certo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  fyht, 
contend. 

certus,-a,  -um,  adj.  (cerno),c/e/<??-- 
mined,  fxed,  certain;  resolved. 

cesso,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  intens. 
(cedo),  to  delay,  cease,  linger. 

(cetSrus),  -a,  -um,  adj.  (nomina- 
tive singular  m.  not  found), 
the  other,  the  rest. 

ceu,  conj.,  as,  as  if. 

cibSria,  -orum,  x.  (clhua),  food, 
provisions,  fodder. 

Cicgro,  -onis,  m.,  Marcus  Tul- 
lius  Cicero,  the  greatest  of  Ro- 
man orators  and  writers  (u.c. 
106-43). 

Cimbri,  -5rum,  m.,  a  people  of 
Northern  Germany. 

cingo,  cinggre,  cinxi,  cinctum, 
to  gird,  surround,  besiege. 

circa,  adv.  and  prep,  with  the 
ace,  around,  about. 


circiter,  adv.  and  prep,  with  the 

ace,  round  about,  near. 
circui-tus,  -us,  m.   (circumeo), 

a  going  around  in  a  circle;  a 

circuit,  compass. 
circum,  adv.  and  prep,  with  ace, 

around,  about,  near. 
circum-do,  -dSre,  -dedi,  -d^tum, 

to  put    around,  surround   ivith, 

encompass ;    circumdare    mu- 

rum  urbi  or  urbem  muro,  to 

jmt  a  icall  round  the  city,  or  to 

surround  the  city  with  a  ivall. 
circum-fundo,    -fundgre,  -fudi, 

-fusum,    jxmr    around,   (pass.) 

rush  in  on  cdl  sirlcs. 
circum-sto,  -stare,  -stfiti,  no  p.p., 

to  stand  around;   to    surround, 

hes«t,  besiege. 
circum-venio,  -ire,  -vein,  -ven- 

tum,  to  come  around,  encompass, 

invest. 
cis,  prep,  with  ace,  on  this  side. 
citerior,  -us,    adj.    (150.    1),    on 

this  side,  hither  ;  G-allia  citeri- 
or, hither  Gaul,  i.e.,  this  side  of 

the  Alps. 
cito,  adv.,  quickly,  speedily,  soon 

(comp.    citius,     sup.     citissi- 

me). 
citra,  pre}),  with  abl.  and  adv., 

071  this  side ;  before,  toithin. 
civ-ilis,  -e,  adj.  (civis),  belonging 

to  citizens,  civil,  courteous. 
civis,  -is,  com.  gen.,  a  citizen. 
civ-itas,  -atis,  f.  (civis)  citizen- 
ship ;  a  city,  state ;  freedom  of 

the  city. 
clades,  -is,  f.,  disaster,  slaughter. 
clam,  adv.,  secretly  ;   prep,  with 

abl.,  without  the  knowledge  of 
clamo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  cry 

out,  call,  p7'oclaim. 
clarus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  clear,  bright, 

illustrious. 
classis,  -is,  f.,  a  fleet. 
claudo,  -Sre,  -si,  -sum,    to   shut, 

close,  surround,  fnish. 


VOCABULARY.  —  I. 


clemen-ter,  adv.  (clemens),  mild- 

1>I,  gently,  calmlf/. 
cliens,  -entis,  com.  gen.  (clueo), 

a  client,  retainer  (one  attached 

to  a  patron,  and  protected  by 

him). 
coelum,  see  caelum, 
co-emo,  -gmgre,  -emi,  -emptum 

(con;    gmo),    to  purchase    to- 

f/ethej;  to  bwj  up. 
coepi,  coeplsse,  def.  (305. 1),  to 

he  (fin,  undertake. 
co-erceo, -ere,  -ui,  -itum  (con; 

arceo),   to  enclose  v^holly ;    re- 
strain. 
co-gito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (con ; 

Sgito),  to  think,  meditate. 
c6-gn6men,  -inis,  x.  (con  ;  gno- 

men  =  nomen),  a  surname  ;  as 

Marcus  (praenomen)   Tullius 

(nomen)  Cicero  (cognomen), 
co-gnosco,    -gnoscere,    -gnovi, 

-gnitum,  (con ;  gncsco  =  nos- 

co),   to  find   out :    in   perfect 

tenses,  know. 
co-go,   cogSre,  coegi,  coactum 

(con ;    Sgo),  to   drive  together, 

collect,  force,  compel. 
c6hors,  -hortis,  f.,    a    cohort    (a 

company  of  000  soldiers). 
c6-hortor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep. 

(con ;   hortor),  to   exhort,  ad- 
monish. 
col-lega,  see  con-lega. 
col-ligo,  see  con-ligo. 
collis,  -is,  M.,  high  ground,  a  hill. 
col-16co,  see  con-loco. 
coll6qu-ium,  see  con-16quium. 
col-16quor,  see  con-16quor. 
c61o,  c616re,  c61ui,  cultum,  to 

till,  cultivate,  cherish  ;  to  dwell. 
c6me3,  -itis,  com.  gen.  (con ;  eo), 

a  companion,  associate. 
c6mitor,  -ari,  -atus   sum,   dep. 

(c6mes),  to  accompany,  follow, 

attend. 
commea-tus,  -us,  m.  (commeo), 

provisions,  supplies. 


com-mgm6ro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
(con ;  m6m6ro),  to  call  to 
mind,  mention. 

com-mitto,  -mittgre,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum  (con ;  mitto),  to  connect, 
join,  commit. 

commSde,  adv.  (commSdus), 
duly,  properly,  icell. 

com-m6dus,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (con ; 
mSdus), /iV,  serviceable. 

comniSn^-facio,  -fScSre,  -feci, 
-factum,  to  remind. 

com-m6veo,  -mdvere,  -movi, 
-motum  (con;  moveo),  to 
move  violently,  shake;  bellum 
commovere,  to  stir  up  loar. 

com-munis,  -e,  adj.  (con;  mu- 
nus),  cojnmon,  general. 

com-muto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
(con ;  muto),  to  exchange,  alter. 

com-paro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
(con;  pare),  to  put  together, 
prepare,  collect,  compare. 

com-pello,  -pellSre,  -piili,  -pul- 
sum,  to  drive  together,  force. 

com-pleo,  -plere,  -plevi,  -pletum 
(con;  pleo),  to  fill  full. 

complora-tio, -onis,  f.  (complo- 
ro),  a  loud  iveeping,  lamentation. 

com-plures,  -a  or  -ia,  adj.,  sev- 
eral together,  very  many. 

com-pono,  -ponSre,  -p8sui,  -p6- 
situm  (con ;  pono),  to  put 
together  or  in  order,  to  settle. 

com-porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
(con ;  porto),  to  bring  together, 
collect. 

com-prghendo,  -Sre,  -di,  -sum 
(con ;  prehendo),  to  catch  hold 
of  seize;  to  perceive. 

con-cedo,  -cedSre,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  grant,  yield. 

con-cido,  -cidSre,  -cidi,  -cisum 
(con ;  caedo),  to  cut  to  pieces, 
destroy,  kill. 

concilio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (con- 
cilium), to  call  together,  make 
friendly,  reconcile. 


10 


FIKST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


con-ciliuni,  -IT,  x.  (con ;  c^lo,  to 

call),  a  meeting,  assejnblf/,  council. 
con-clanio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

cr]i  out,  to  shout. 
con-ctipi-sco,  -ciipiscere,  -cxipi- 

vl  or  -cupii,  -cupitum,  inch. 

(con ;    ciipio),    to   be   cer>j  de- 
sirous of,  strive  after. 
con-curro,    -currgre,   -curri    or 

-ciicurri,   -cursum,  to   run    to- 

iietlier,  assenthle,  ff/ht. 
concur-sus,  -us,  m.  (concurro), 

a  concourse,  assemb///,  attack. 
con-demno,   -are,     avi,    -atum 

(con;  damno),  to  con/lriun. 
con-dic-io, -onis,  f.,  terms,  condi- 
tion. 
conditio,  see  condicio. 
con-do,  -d6re,  -didi,  -ditum,  to 

place  Uxjether  :  to  found,  hide. 
con-duco,  -duc6re,  -duxi,  -duc- 

tuni,  to  had  together,  collect ;  to 

hire. 
confero,  conferre,  contiili,  col- 

latum,  to  bring  together,  collect. 
confertus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (con- 

fercio,  to  cram  together),  close, 

crowded,  crammed. 
confestim,   adv.   (confgro),  im- 

niediatel II,  s/xedilg. 
c6n-ficio,  -ficSre,  -f eci, -f ectum 

(con;    fScio),     to    accomplish, 

finish. 
c6n-fido,    -fidgre,    -fisus    sum 
(248.    2,    Obs.   .")),  to  trust  confi- 
dent Iji,  confide. 
c6n-firmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

uaike  firm ,  establish,  strengthen. 
c6n-fiteor,  -fiteri,  -fessus  sum, 

(lej).  (con;  fSteor),  to  confess. 
c6n-f6dio,   -f6d§re,  -fodi,  -fos- 

sum,  to  dig :  to  pierce  through, 

stab. 
con-ftigio,  -fiiggre,  -fugi,  no  p.p., 

to  flee  for  refuge 
c6n-gr6dior,     -gredi,    -gressus 

sum,  dep.  (con;  gradior),  to 

meet,  encounter,  contend,  flght. 


con-gruo,  -gru6re,-gruT,  no  p.p., 

to  agree  with,  meet. 

con-icio  (pronounced  con-ji- 
cio),  -ic6re,  -jeci,  -j  ectum 
(con;  jacio),  to  throu^  together, 
throw,  hurl:  in  fiigam  coni- 
cere,  to  put  to  flight. 

con-jungo.  -ggre,  -xi,  -ctum,  to 
join  together,  connect,  unite. 

conjura-tio,  -onis,  f.,  a  swear- 
ing together,  conspiracy. 

conjura-tus,  -i,  m.  (conjuro),  a 
conspirator. 

con-juro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
swear  together,  conspire. 

conjux  (conjunx),  -ligis,  com. 
gen.  (conjungo),  a  wife,  hus- 
band, a  betrothed. 

con-lega,  -ae,  m.  (con;  lego), 
associate,  colleague. 

con-ligo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (con  ; 
ligo),  to  bind  together  ;  restrain. 

con-16co  (coll-),  -are,  -avi, 
-atum,  to  jdace  together;  to 
settle  in  a  jtlace ;  to  give  a  wo- 
man in  marriage. 

con-16quium,  -ii,  x.,  «  talking  to- 
gether, conrersation,  conference . 

con-16quor,  -i,  -ciitus,  dep.,  con- 
rerse,  hare  <i  conference  together. 

Conor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  to 
attempt,  endearor,  try. 

c6n-sanguin-eus,  -a,  -um,  adj. 
(con;  sanguis),  related  by 
blood ,  related. 

con-scendo,  -d6re,  -di,  -sum 
(con;  scando),  to  climb;  (na- 
ves), eud)arl: 

con-scribo,  -b6re,  -psi,  -ptum,  to 
enlist,  enroll,  inscribe,  write. 

consen-sus,  -lis,  m.  (consentiS), 
an  agreement. 

con-sgquor,  -qui,  -cutus  sum, 
dep.,  to  follow  after,  overtake. 

con-sgro,  -s6rgre,  -sSruT,  -ser- 
tum,  to  join,  unite,  bring  to- 
gether:  pugnam  or  proelium 
consgrSre.  to  join  battle ;  ma- 


VOCAIUJLAKY. 


11 


num  consgrgre,  to  engiuja  in  a 

hand-to-haru/  con// let. 
considgro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

cxdDiine,  consn/er.  oh^'^rrc  care- 

fulli/. 
Considius  -ii,  :\i.,  one  of  CrTsar's 

officers. 
con-sido,  -sidSre,  -sedi,  -sessum, 

t(f  sif  doinn  tof/clhcr,  (nraiiip. 
consilium,    -ii,    >:.,   de/ihenidon, 

advice,    talent;     consilio,     on 

purpose,  intentiomdh/. 
con-sisto,   -sistgre,   -stiti,    -sti- 

tum,  to  stand  still,  make  a  stand. 
conspec-tus,   -us,    m.    (conspi- 

cio),  a.  sifjht. 
con-spicio,     -spicgre,     -spexT, 

-spectum     (con;    specio),  to 

look  at,  behold,  observe. 
c6nspicor,-ari,-atus,  dep.,  to  see. 
conspira-tio,  -onis,  f.  (conspi-  I 

ro),  an  agreement,  conspiracf/. 
c6nstan-tia,  -ae,  f.  (constans), 

Jirniness,  constancy/ . 
c6n-stituo,    -uere,    -ui,    -utum 

(con;  statuo),  to  place,  make, 

determine. 
con-sto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -stStum,  to 

stand  together  ;  consist  of  (308). 
consue-sco,  -escSre,  -evi,  -etum, 

inch,  (consueo),  to  be   accus- 
tomed, be  leant. 
consue-tudo,  -inis,  f.  (consue- 

tus),  custom,  habit,  usage,  inter- 
course. 
consul,  -iilis,  m.,  a  consul ;  one 

of   the  two  chief    magistrates 

of  Rome,  chosen  yearly. 
consiil-atus,  -us,    m.   (consvil), 

the  office  of  consul,  consulship. 
constilo,  -gre,  -ui,  -turn,  to  delib- 
erate,   consider,    advise,  consult 

for :  aiicui  consiilgre,  to  con- 
sult for  one's  interest ;  Sliquem 
consiilgre,  to  consult,  take  ad- 
vice of,  one. 
consul-turn,  -i,  n.  (consiilo),  a 
decree,  decision,  resolve. 


con-tendo,  -dgre,   -di,   -turn,   to 

strive  for,  contend,  fgld  ;  liasten. 
conten-tio,  -onis,  f.  (contendo), 

a  straining ;  dispute. 
con-testor,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  dep., 

to  call  to  v'ifness,  invoke. 
continen-ter,  adv.  (continens), 
moderedelg ;    continuously,  with- 
out interruption. 
con-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -ten- 
tum  (con ;  tgneo),  to  hold  to- 
gether, to  hold  in,  keep  hack,  re- 
strain, confine. 
con-tingo,   -tingere,   -tigi,   -tac- 
tum  (con;    tango),  to   touch, 
border  upon;  impers.,  contin- 
git  mill!,  it  is  my  lot  (313). 
contin-uus,  -a,  -um,   adj.   (con- 
tineo),  unbroken,  continuous. 
contra,  adv.  and  prep,  with  ace, 

over  against,  opposite  to. 
con-traiio,  -here,  -xi,  -ctum,   to 
draw  together,  assemble,  contract. 
contra-rius,  -a,  -um,  adj.   (con- 
tra), opposite,  contrary,  opjjosed, 
hostile. 
controvers-ia,  -ae,   f.    (contro- 

versus),  controversy,  dispute. 
contiime-lia.-ae,  f.  (contiimeo), 
abuse,    insult ;    in    pi.,    abusive 
epithets. 
con-venio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  to  come  together,  assemble; 
con  venire  aliquem,  to  accost 
one  :    convgnit,  impers.,   it   is 
agreed  upon  (313). 
coiiven-tus,  -us,  m.  (oonvgnio), 
a  coming  together ;  an  assembly. 
con-verto,  -tere,  -ti,  -sum,  to  turn 
round,   change,  turn;    conver- 
tere  in  fugam,  to  put  to  flight. 
con-v6co,   -are,   -avi,  -atum,  t(j 
call  together,  assemble,  summon. 
co-6rior,  -6riri,  -ortus  (con  ;  6ri- 
or),  dep.,  3  and  4  conj.,  arise, 
break  out  (war). 
cophinus,  -i,  m.,  a  basket. 
copia,  -ae,  f.  (con ;  ops),  ahun^ 


12 


FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


dance ;    pL,     supplies,    troops, 

loeaWi. 
copi-osus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (copia), 

well  supplied,  abounding,  plenti- 
ful, copious. 
c6quo,-<§re,  coxi,  coctum,  to  cool: 
coram,  adv.  and  prep,  with  abl., 

openly;  in  the  presence  of,  before. 
Cdrinthus,  -i,  f.,  Corinth,  a  city 

of  Greece. 
Cornelia,  -ae,  f.,  the   first  wife 

of  CtX'sar. 
cornu,  -us,  n.,  a  horn ;   the  wing 

of  an  army. 
corpus,  -6ris,  n.,  a  body,  corpse. 
cottldi-anus  or  cotidi-anus  -a, 

-um,   Sid'}.,  daily. 
cottidie  or  cotidie  (qu6t-),  adv., 

daily. 
creber,  -bra,  -brum,  adj.,  thick; 

close,  frequent. 
credo,  -dSre,  -didi,  -ditum  (with 

dat.  pers.),  to  trust ;  (with  ace. 

and  inf.),  believe. 
crSmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  hum. 
creo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  bring 

forth,  beget,  create,  elect. 
cre-sco,cresc6re,  crevi,  cretum 

(creo),  to   grow,  grow   up,   in- 
crease. 
crinis,  -is,  yi.,  the  hair. 
criicia-tus,  -us,  m.  (criicio),  tor- 
ture, tonwnt. 
crux,  -licis,  f.,  a  cross,  torture. 
ciibo,  -are,  -ui,  -itum,  to  lie  down, 

recline. 
culpa,  -ae,  f.,  crime,  fault,  failure. 
culpo,  -are,  -§.vi,  -atum  (culpa), 

to  censure,  blame. 
cum,  prep,  with  abl.,  luith,  together 

with,  among. 
cum  (quum),  conj.,  ichen,  since, 

although,  though  ;  cum  .  .  .  tum, 

both  .  .  .  and. 
cunctor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  to 

linger,  hesitate,  delay. 
ciipi-de,  adv.  (ciipidus),  eagerly, 

zealously,  ardently. 


ctipid-itas,  -atis,   r.  (ciipidus), 

a  longing,  desire,  avarice. 

cup-idus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (ciipio), 
eager,  desirous,  covetous,  fond. 

ciipio,  -6re,  -ivi  (or  -ii),  -itum, 
to  long  for  a  thing,  covet;  to 
favor  (with  dat.). 

cur,  adv.,  ivhy?  for  what  reason  ? 

curia,  -ae,  f.,  a  curia,  one  of  the 
thirt}^  parts  into  which  Romu- 
lus divided  the  Roman  people  ; 
the  senate-house. 

cura,  -ae,  f.  (quaero),  trouble, 
care,  attention,  pains. 

Curiatius,  -ii,  m.,  an  Alban  fam- 
ily name. 

euro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ctira), 
to  care  for ;  manage,  govern ; 
cure. 

curro,  currgre,  ciicurri,  cursum, 
to  run,  hasten. 

currus,  -us,  m.,  a  chariot. 

cur-sus,  -lis,  M.  (curro),  a  run- 
ning, race,  journey,  voyage. 

custos,  -odis,  M.,  guard,  loatch- 
man. 


damno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (dam- 
num —  fine,  damage),  to  con- 
demn, pass  sentence  on  ;  damna- 
re  capitis,  to  condemn  to  death. 

damnum,  -i,  n.,  loss. 

de,  prep,  with  abl.  (the  subject 
of  thought),  of;  (of  place), 
down  from,  from;  (of  time), 
during,  at,  concerning. 

dea,  -ae,  f.  (dat.  and  abl.  pi.  de- 
abus),  a  goddess. 

de-beo,  -bere,  -bui,  -bitum  (de ; 
hSbeo),  to  owe,  be  bound,  be 
due ;  with  an  infinitive  after 
it,  translate  it  by  ought,  must, 
etc. ;  impers.,  debet,  it  behooves, 
ought  (313), 

decem,  num.  adj.  indecl.,  ten. 

Decem-ber,  -bris,  m.  (decem), 
the  tenth  month  of  the  Roman 


VOCAliULAKY. 


13 


year,   reckoned   from   IVIarcli ; 

Dccemher. 
dgcember,  -bris,  adj.,  of  Decem- 
ber. 
de-certo,   -are,   -avi,   -atum,    to 

Jifjlit  eaniesUi/,  to  contend  for. 
dScet,  dScere,  dgcuit,  no   p.p., 

iiii}){'rs.,  it  is  becoming  (313). 
dec-imus,-a,-um,  ord.  num.  adj., 

the  tenth. 
decre-tum,  -i,  n.    (decerno),   a 

decree,  decision. 
dSc-us,  -6ris  n.   (of.  dgcet),  that 

which  is  becoming,  ornament. 
dedScus,  -6ris,  n.,  dishonor,  dis- 
grace. 
dgd-itio,  -onis,  f.  (de-datio),  a 

giring  one^s  self  up,  a  surrender. 
de-duco,  -ducere,   -duxi,  -duc- 

tum,  to  lead  away,  luithdraiu ; 

mislead,  seduce. 
de-fendo,-dgre,-di,  -sum,  to  ward 

off,  arert :  to  defend. 
de-fero,  -ferre,  -tiili,  -latum,  irr., 

to  bear  or  bring  from,  so  report; 

land  (of  ships)  ;  accuse, 
de-f  gtiscor,  -f  gtisci,  -f  essus  sum, 

dep.,  to  become  tired  out ;  to  groiv 

faint. 
dein,  see  deinde. 
dein-ceps,  adv.  (dein;    capio), 

one  after  the  other,  successively  ; 

thereafter. 
deinde,  adv.,  then,  afterward,  sec- 
ondly. 
de-icio    (pronounced    de-jicio), 

-icere,  -jeci,  -jectum  (de ;  jS.- 

cio),  to    throw!    down,   dislodge, 

deprive. 
delec-to,  -are,  -avi,   -atum,   in- 

tens.  (delicio),  to  delight, please, 

amuse. 
deleo,  -lere,  -levi,  -letum,  to  wipe 

Old,  to  abolish,  destroy. 
de-ligo,    -liggre,   -legi,    -lectum 

(de  ;  ISgo),  to  choose  oid,  select. 
de-ligo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  bind 

together,  bind  up. 


de-minuo,  -minuere,  -minui, 
-minutum,  to  lessen,  diminish.. 

de-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  let  or  bring  down,  cast 
doicn,  dismiss. 

demum,  adv.  (iiethermost),  at 
last,  at  length,  only;  tum  de- 
mum,  then  at  length. 

den-arius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (deni), 
consisting  of  or  containing  ten. 

den-arius,  -ii,  m.,  a  Roman  silver 
coin  (containing  originally  ten 
asses),  equal  to  about  sixteen 
cents. 

de-nggo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  de- 
ny, reject,  refuse. 

deni,  -ae,  -a,  num.  distributive 
adj.  (dScni),  ten  each,  ten  at  a 
time,  by  tens,  ten. 

denique,  adv.,  at  last,  finally. 

dens,  dentis,  m.,  a  tooth. 

de-pello,  -pellgre,  -piili,  -pul- 
sum,  to  drive  from,  repel. 

de-p6no,  -ponere,  -p6sui,  -p6si- 
tum,  to  lay  aside  :  give  up. 

depr6ca-tor,  -oris.  m.  (deprg- 
cor),  an  interceder,  intercessor. 

de-prlcor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep., 
to  beseech,  pray  against,  depre- 
cate, beg. 

de-scendo,  -dere,  -di,  -sum  (de ; 
scando),  to  come  down,  de- 
scend. 

de-sero,  -ere,  -ui,  -tum,  to  desert, 
abandon. 

de-signo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
mark  out,  appoint,  choose. 

de-silio,  -silire,  -silui,  -sultum 
(de  ;  sSlio),  to  leap  down. 

de-sisto,  -sistgre,  -stiti,  -stitum, 
to  leave  off,  give  over,  desist. 

de-spero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  be 
hopeless,  despair  of. 

de-spondeo,  -dere,  -di,  -sum,  to 
promise,  to  betroth. 

de-stringo,  -stringSre,  -strinxi, 
-strictum,  to  unsheath,  draw 
(the  sword). 


14 


FIRST  STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


de-suni,  -esse,  -fui,  to  he  away :  to 
fail,  he  icantinrj  (293.  4). 

desiiper,  adv.  (de,  from:  super, 
ahove),from  above. 

de-tggo,  -tegere,  -texi,  -tectum,  to 
uncover,  expose;  discover, reveal. 

de-terreo,  -terrere,  -terrui,  -terri- 
tum,  to  frighten  off',  deter. 

de-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum 
(de;  tgneo),  to  hold  of,  detain, 
hinder. 

de  traho,  -trahgre,  -traxi,  -trac- 
tum,  to  draw  off,  withdraw. 

detri-nientum,  -i,  x.  (detero), 
Zo.s.s",  damage,  defeat. 

deus,  -1,  M.  (176. 1),  a  god,  divin- 
it//,  deity. 

de-vinco,  -vincere,  -vici,  -vic- 
tuni,  to  corapier,  ran(juisli. 

de-vSro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  gidp 
down,  devour,  consume. 

dexter,  -tra,  -trum,  aiul  -tSra, 
-terum,  adj.,  to  the  rigid,  on  tin- 
right  side,  right. 

dextgra,  -ae,  v.,  the  right  hand. 

di^dema,  -Stis,  x.,  a  royal  hfiul- 
dress,  diadem. 

die,  iiii])erat.  of  dico,  say. 

dico,  dicgre,  dixi,  dictum,  to 
speak,  say,  name,  appoint,  plead : 
dicitur,  it  is  said. 

dicta-tor,  -oris,  m.  (dicto),  dic- 
tator;  a  .sii[>reine  magistrate, 
elected  by  tlie  Komans  only  in 
seasons  of  emergency,  when 
his  power  was  absolute,  and 
lasted  for  six  months. 

dict-ito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  intens. 
(dicto),  to  say  or  ^>/e«r/  often, 
<  I  eel  are. 

die-to,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  intens. 
(dico),  to  say  often,  dictate,  pre- 
scribe. 

dic-tum,  -i,  x.  (dico),  a  saying, 
a  ivord,  command. 

dies,  -ei,  m.  (175.  2),  a  day  of  24 
hours  ;  daylight;  in  dies,  daily, 
with  an  idea  of   constant  in- 


crease ;  ad  diem,  at  the  ap- 
pointed time. 

dif-fgro,  differre,  distiili,  dila- 
tum,  to  delay;  ineaning  to  dif- 
fer;  no  perf.  nor  p.p.;  inter 
se  differre.  to  differ  from  each 
other  (295,  Obs.  2). 

difficil-e,  adv.,  'with  difficulty. 

dif-ficilis,  -e,  adj.  (dis ;  fScilis), 
hard,  difficult. 

difficul-tas,  -atis,  f.  (difficilis), 
difficulty,  trouble. 

dif-f ido,  -fidSre,  -fisus  sum,  semi- 
dep.  (dis;  fido,  248.  2,  Obs.  8), 
to  mistrust,  despair. 

dignus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  worthy  of 
(307,  Obs.  4) . 

diligens,  -entis,  part,  (diligo), 
careful,  attentive,  diligent. 

diligen-tia,  -ae,  f.,  diligence,  care- 
fulness. 

di-ligo,  -liggre,  -lexi,  -lectum 
(dis;  ISgo),  to  value  highly,  es- 
teem, lore. 

di-mico,  -are,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum, 
to  fight,  contend. 

dimidius,  -a,  -um,  half:  as  a 
noun,  dimidium,  the  half 

di-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  send  forth,  dismiss,  ad- 
journ. 

di-rigo,  -riggre,  -rexi,  -rectum 
(dis  ;  rego),  to  direct,  guide. 

dis,  ditis,  adj.,  see  dives. 

dis-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  go  apart,  depart. 

disc-ipulus,  -i,  m.  (disco),  a 
learner,  scholar,  pupil. 

disco,  discgre,  didici,  no  p.p., 
to  learn.. 

dis-icio  (pronounced  dis-jicio), 
-icere,  -jeci,  -jectum  (dis;  ji- 
cio),  to  tear  asunder,  scatter; 
break  down. 

di-spergo,  -sperggre,  -spersi, 
-spersum  (di  ;  spargo),  to  .'icat- 
ter  about,  disperse. 

dis-pliceo,  -plicere,  -plicui,  -pli- 


VOCABULARY. 


15 


citum  (dis;  pl^ceo)  (with 
dat.),  to  displease. 

dis-piito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
discuss;  arf/ue. 

dissens-io,  -onis,  f.  (dissentio), 
difference  of  opinion,  disagree- 
ment,  quarrel. 

dissidium,  -i,  x.,  discord. 

dis-similis,  -e,  adj.,  unlike,  dis- 
similar. 

ditior,  ditissimus,  conip.  and 
superlative  of  dives. 

diu,  adv.  (dies),  hy  day,  a 
long  time,  long  ago;  comp., 
diutius ;  superlative,  diutis- 
sime. 

div-es,  -itis,  adj.,  rich  (the  nom. 
and  ace.  of  the  neut.  pi.  do  not 
occur ;  comp.,  divitior  or  di- 
tior;  superlative,  divitissimus 
or  ditissimus). 

Divico,  -onis,  m.,  Divico,  a  Hel- 
vetian leader. 

di-vido,  -vidgre,  -visi,  -visum,  to 
separate,  divide,  distinguish. 

DivitiScus,  -i,  m.,  Divitiacus,  an 
Auluan  chief. 

do,  dSre,  dgdi,  dStum  (75.  x.  8), 
to  give ;  finem  dSre,  to  put  an 
end.  to. 

ddceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -tum,  to  teach. 

doc-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (d6ceo), 
learned,  versed,  expjerienced . 

'd61eo,  -6re,  -ui,  -itum,  to  feel  pain, 
lament,  he  sorry  for. 

d61-or,  -oris,  m.  (doleo),  pain, 
anguish,  anger. 

dolus,  -i,  M.,  guile,  fraud,  deceit. 

d6m-i-cil-ium,  -ii,  n.  (d6mus),  a 
habitation,  dicelling,  abode. 

d6mina-ti6,  -onis,  f.  (dominor), 
7'ule  ;  despotism. 

dSminus,  -i,  m.  (d6mo),  a  mas- 
ter, lord,  chief:  owner. 

d6mo,  -are,  -ui,  -itum,  to  subdue, 
vanquish,  overcome,  conquer. 

d6mus,-i  or  -us,  f.  (174),  a  house, 
home;  dSmi,  at  home. 


donee,  conj.,  as  long  as,  while; 
until  (334). 

dono, -are, -avi, -atum  (donum), 
to  give  (with  ace.  of  thing  and 
dat.  of  person,  or  ace.  of  per- 
son and  abl.  of  thing). 

donum,  -i,  x.  (do),  a  gift,  present. 

dormio,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum,  to 
sleep,  rest. 

Dubis,  -is,  M.,  a  river  of  Gaul. 

diibita-tio,  -onis,  f.  (diibito),  a 
doubting,  doubt,  hesitation. 

diibito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  intens. 
(duo,  thi'ough  old  form,  dubo), 
to  doubt,  hesitate. 

dubius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (duo),  doubt- 
ful (145)  ;  as  noun,  diibium, 
-i,  X.,  doubt. 

du-centi,  -ae,  -a,  num.  adj.  (duo ; 
centum),  two  hwidred. 

duco,  ducere,  duxi,  ductum,  to 
lead;  put  off,  consider,  think; 
miirum  diicere,  to  build  a  wall ; 
uxorem  in  matrimonium  du- 
cere, to  marry  (a  woman). 

dulcis,  -e,  adj.,  siceet,  agreeable. 

dum,  conj.,  ivhile,  so  long  as,  un- 
til, provided  that  (334)'. 

dum-m6do,  conj.,  pi-ovided  that, 
if  only  (327). 

DumnSrix,  -igis,  m.,  Dumnorix, 
an  yEduan  chief. 

duo,  -ae,  -o,  num.  adj.,  tico  (213). 

du6-decim,  num.  adj.,  indecL, 
twelve. 

du6-de-viginti,  num.  adj.,  in- 
decl.,  two  from  twenty,  eighteen. 

Dyrrachium,  -ii,  x.,  a  sea-coast 
town  of  Illyria,  formerly  called 
Epidamnus  (now  Durazzo). 

E. 

e,  ex,  prep,  with  abl.,  out  of  from, 
of;  ex  itinSre,  on  the  march; 
ex  equo,  on  horseback. 

e-dico,  -dicere,  -dixi,  -dictum, 

to  declare,  publish  ;  order. 


16 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


edo,  edere  or  esse,  edi,  esum 
or  essum  (299),  to  eat. 

e-do,  -dgre,  -didi,  -ditum,  to  give 
foi'th,  publish,  exhibit,  display. 

e-duco,  -ducSre,  -duxT,  -ductum, 
to  lead  forth,  march  out  troops. 

ediico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  bring 
up,  rear,  educate. 

ef-fero,  efferre,  extiili,  elatum, 
irreg.  (ex;  fgro),  to  carry  forth, 
to  bri7ig  forth,  publish  (295). 

ef-ficio,  -ficSre,  -feci,  -fectum 
(ex;  fS.cio),  to  inal-e  out,  bring 
to  pass  :  to  effect  (323.  3). 

ef-fundo,  -fundgre,-fudi,  -fusum 
(ex ;  fundo),  to  pour  out  or 
forth;  to  overflow;  squander; 
effundSre  se,  to  spread  out. 

gge-nus.  -a,  -um,  adj.  (ggeo),  in 
want,  destitute,  needy. 

ggo,  mei,  pron.,  /;  i»l.  nos  (229). 

e-grSdior,  -grSdi,  -gressus  sum, 
dep.  (ex;  grS.dior),  to  go  out, 
go  forth,  leave. 

e-gr§g-ius,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (e ;  grex), 
(out  of  the  liei'd),  excellent,  re- 
markable. 

e-icio  (pronounced  e-jicio),  -icg- 
re,  -jeci,  -jectum  (e ;  jScio),  to 
cast,  thrust  or  drive  out,  expel, 
banish  ;  eicSre  se,  to  rush  out. 

e-labor,  -labi,  -lapsus  sum,  dep., 
to  slip  a  way,  escape. 

e  latus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (effSro), 
extdted,  lofty,  high. 

elggans,  -ntis,  adj.,  elegant. 

el6quent-ia,  -ae,  f.  (elSquens), 
a  being  eloquent,  eloquence. 

e-mineo  (ex ;  miineo),  -ere,  -ui, 
no  sup.,  to  stand  out,  excel. 

Smo,  SmSre,  emi,  emptum,  to 
buy  (304). 

gnim,  conj.  (strengthened  form 
of  narai,  /r>r;  placed  after  the 
first  word  or  words),  for,  in- 
deed, in  fact  (205.  5). 

e-nuntio  (cio),  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 
to  divulge;  to  report. 


eo,  Ire,  ivi  or  ii,  itum,  irreg.,  to 
go  (298). 

eo,  adv.  (is),  thither  ;  to  that  place, 
so  far ;  therefore.  With  com- 
paratives, by  so  much,  so  much, 
the ;  quo  .  .  .  eo,  the  . .  .  the. 

eodem,  adv.  (idem),  to  the  same 
place,  the  same  tvay. 

Epicureus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Epicu- 
rean. 

gpistula,  -ae,  f.,  a  letter,  epistle. 

gques,  equitis,  m.  (gquus),  a 
horseman,  rider;  pL,  gquites, 
cavalry;  also  the  knights,  the  equi- 
tes,  as  an  order  in  the  state. 

6ques-ter, -tris, -tre,  adj.  (Sques), 
belonging  to  Itorsemen,  equestrian. 

S-quidem,  adv.,  verily,  truly. 

gquita-tus,  -us,  m.  (fequito),  a 
riding,  cavalry. 

gquit-o,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (gques), 
to  be  a  Itorseman ;  to  ride. 

Squus,  -1,  M.,  a  horse,  steed. 

ergo,  adv.  (205.  4),  therefore,  ac- 
cordingly. 

e-ripio,  -ripere,  -ripui,  -reptum 
(e  ;  rSpio),  to  snatch  away,  res- 
cue ;  eripgre  se,  to  snatch  one's 
self  away,  to  escape. 

e-riid-io,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum 
(e ;  riidis),  to  free  from  rude- 
ness, educate,  instruct. 

et,  conj.  (205),  cmd,  also,  too,  as ; 
et  .  .  .  et,  both  .  .  .  a7id,  not  only 
.  .  .  but  also. 

gtiam,  conj.,  and  also,  besides, 
likeivise,  (205.  5) ;  certainly, 
yes ;  with  comparatives,  still ; 
mSgis  6tiam,  still  more. 

et-si,  conj.,  even  if,  although 
(331)  ;  yet,  but. 

Euripides,  -is,  m.,  a  celebrated 
Athenian  tragic  poet. 

e-vado,  -dSre,  -si,  -sum,  to  go 
forth,  to  escape  from. 

e-vello,  -vellere,  -velli  or  -vulsi, 
-vuisum,  /()  tear  out,  remove. 

e-venio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum, 


V0CAI3ULARY. 


17 


to  come  out :  come  to  pass,  turn 
out. 

e-verto,  -tSre,  -ti,  -sum,  to  turn, 
drive  or  thrust  out;  to  over- 
tJiroio,  destroy. 

ex  or  e  (e  only  before  conso- 
nants), prep,  with  abl.,  out  of, 
from,  of. 

ex-cedo,  -cedgre,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  go  out,  withdraw;  to 
exceed. 

excell-ens,  -entis,  part,  (ex- 
cello),  liigh,  lofty,  excellent. 

excel-sus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (ex- 
cello),  elevated,  lofty,  high. 

ex-cipio,  -cipgre,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
(ex;  capio),  to  take  out;  to 
receive ;  to  succeed. 

ex-cludo,  -cltidere,  -clusi,  -clu- 
sum  (ex  ;  claudo),  to  shut  out, 
exclude. 

ex-c61o,  -c61Sre,  -cSlui,  -cultum, 
to  cultivate;  to  improve. 

exemplum,  -I,  n.  (eximo),  a 
sample. 

ex-eo,-ire,-ivi  or-ii,  -itum,  irreg., 
to  qo  out  (from  life),  withdraiv 
(298). 

ex-erceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum  (ex ; 
arceo),  to  exercise,  practise  ; 
nSgotium  exercere,  to  follow 
a  business. 

exercita-ti6,-6nis,  f.  (exercito), 
exercise,  practice. 

exerc-itus,  -us,  m.  (exerceo), 
trained  body  of  men;  an  army. 

ex-igo,  -igSre,  -egi,  -actum  (ex ; 
S.go),  to  lead  out,  to  drive  forth, 
expel ;  exact ;  finish  ;  pass  ; 
^liquid  ab  S.liqu6  exigire,  to 
demand  any  thing  from  ayiy  one. 

existima-tio,  -onis,  r.  (existi- 
mo),  a  judging,  judgment,  opin- 
ion, character. 

ex-istimo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ex ; 
aestimo),  to  judge,  think,  es- 
teem. 

exi-tium,  -ii,  n.  (exeo),  destruction. 


ex-pgdio,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum 

(ex;  pes),  (Jo  free  the  feet  from), 

to  extricate,  disengage  ;  set  free. 
expgdit,  inipers.,  it  is  profitable, 

useful  (313). 
expgdi-tio,  -onis,  r.  (expgdio), 

an  expedition,  excursion. 
expgdi-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (expS- 

dio),  unimpeded,  passable,  with- 
out baggage. 
ex-pello,  -pellgre,  -piili,  -pulsum, 

to  drive  out,  eject,  expel. 
experg-iscor,  -pergisci,  -perrec- 

tus   sum,  dep.   (expergo),  to 

be  aioakened ;  to  awake. 
ex-perior,  -periri,  -pertus  sum, 

dep.  (ex ;  pgrior,  obsolete),  to 

try;  attempt. 
ex-pio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  atone 

for,  expiate. 
explora-tor,  -oris,  m.  (explore), 

a  searcher  out,  scout,  spy. 
ex-p6no,  -pongre,  -pSsui,  -p6si- 

tum,  to  lay  or  put  out,  set  forth; 

explain ;  to  set  on  shore,  disem- 
bark. 
exp6s-iti6,  -onis,  f.  (expono), 

a    setting  forth,   exposition;    a 

narration. 
ex-primo,     -primere,      -pressi, 

-pressum  (ex;  premo),  to  press 

out;  describe,  express,  utter. 
ex-pr6bro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ex ; 

probrum),  to  reproach. 
ex-pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,   to 

take  by  assault ;  to  storm,  capture. 
ex-quiro,  -rgre,  -sivi,  -situm  (ex ; 

quaero),  to  search  diligently. 
ex-sequor,  -sgqui,  -secutus  sum, 

dep.,  to  follow  out,  execute. 
ex-specto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,   to 

await,  expect ;  fear. 
ex-spiro,   -are,   -avi,    -atum,    to 

breathe  out;  expire. 
ex-stinguo,  -stingugre,  -stinxi, 

-stinctum,  to  put  out,  extinguish  ; 

to  kill,  destroy;  aqua  extinc- 

tus,  drowned. 


18 


FIllST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


exsul-to,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  iii- 
tens.  (ex ;  salio),  to  leap  vp  ;  re- 
joice exceedingly. 

ex-ter  (tgrus),  -era,  -grum,  adj. 
(ex),  outside,  foreign,  strange  ; 
comp.,  exterior,  outer,  exte- 
rior ;  superlative,  extremus  or 
(extimus),  outermost,  last. 

ex-timesco,  -timescSre,  -timui, 
no  p.p.,  V.  A.  and  n.,  fear 
greathj,  dread. 

ex-tollo,  -tollgre,  no  perf.,  no 
p.  p.,  to  lift  up,  raise  up,  exalt. 

extra,  adv.,  and  prep.  Avitli  ace, 
on  the  outside,  heyond. 


F. 


fS.-ber,  -bri,  m.  (fScio),  a  carpen- 
ter, smith,  artisan. 

fabrico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (fS- 
ber),  to  frame,  make,  construct, 
^  build. 

fabricor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep,, 
to  frame,  build,  fashion. 

fa-btlla,  -ae,  f.  (for),  a  story, 
fable. 

fScetus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  courteous. 

fScil-e,  adv.  (fScilis),  easily. 

fS.c-ilis,  -e,  adj.  (fScio),  easy, 
courteous,  affable  (149.  2). 

fSc-iuus,  -6ris,  n.  (fScio),  a  deed, 
crime. 

fScio,  fScSre,  feci,  factum,  to 
make,  do;  passive,  fio,  figri, 
factus  sum,  to  be  made,  to  be- 
come (302)  ;  castra  fScgre,  to 
pitch  camp  ;  inipers.,  fit,  it  hap- 
pens, is  usual;  fiat,  so  be  it. 

fac-tio,  -onis,  r.  (fScio),  a  mak- 
ing ;  a  parly,  faction. 

f ac-tum,  -1,  X.  (fScio).  a  deed,  act, 
exploit. 

fallo,  fallere,  fefelli,  falsum,  to 
deceive. 

fal-3-js,  -a,  -um,  part,  (fallo), 
fa'xe. 


famil-ia,    -ae,    r.     (fa.mfllus,    a 

servant) ,  family-servants,  retain- 
ers;  family,  household;  pSter 
fSmilias  or  fSmiliae,  master  of 
a  family. 

fSmili-aris,  -is,  m.  (fSmilia),  of 
the  household  ;  siibst.,  a  friend. 

fas,  indecl.,  n.  (for),  (that  which 
is  right  in  the  sight  of  heaven), 
divine  law ;  right  (267). 

fascis,  -is,  m.,  a  bundle,  parcel; 
fasces,  pL,  a  bundle  of  rods 
and  an  axe  carried  by  the  lie- 
tors  before  a  chief  magistrate, 
with  which  criminals  were 
scourged  and  beheaded ;  the 
fasces. 

fateor,  fSteri,  fassus  sum,  to 
confess. 

fa-tum,  -1,  N.  (for),  destiny,  fate, 
calaniity. 

fauces,  -ium,  f.  (found  in  the 
sing,  only  in  the  abl. ;  fauce), 
the  throat,  gullet ;  a  defile,  pass. 

Faustttlus,  -i,  M.,  Faustulus,  the 
sliepherd  who  brought  up 
Romulus  and  Rejnus. 

fSveo,  f  Jvere,favi,  fautum,  (ofa- 
yor,  protect. 

Februarius,  -ii,  m.,  February. 

felic-iter,  adv.  (felix),  auspi- 
ciously, fa  vorably. 

felix,  -icis,  adj.  {ieo,  to  produce'), 
fruitful ;  happy,  fortunate. 

fSra,  -ae,  f.  (ferus),  a  ivild  ani- 
mal, wild  beast. 

fSre,  adv.,  nearly,  generally. 

fgro,  ferre,  tiiii,  latum,  irreg. 
(295),  to  bear,  bring,  endure; 
bring  forth ;  tell,  relate ;  raise, 
exalt ;  fSrunt,  they  say  :  fertur, 
it  is  said;  auxilium  ferre,  to 
bring  aid ;  injurias  ferre,  to 
inflict  injuries;  ferre  legem, 
to  propose  a  knv. 

fer-6x,  -ocis,  adj.  (fSro),  bold, 
ferce. 

ferrum,  -i,  n.,  iron;  sivord,  arms. 


VOCABULA  RY. 


19 


fessus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  ivearied, 
tired,  fafigiicd,  v'cak;  feehle. 

festino,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
hasten,  liiirry,  accelerate. 

fid-es,  -ei,  f.  (fido),  trust,  faith, 
confidence,  belief,  credit ;  pro7n- 
ise,  engagement,  icord. 

fido,  fidgre,  fisus  sum,  semi- 
dep.  (283  and  248.  2,  Obs.  3), 
to  trust,  confide. 

filia,  -ae,  f.  (dat.  and  abl.  pL, 
sometimes  filiabus ;  75.  n.),  a 
daughter. 

filius,  -ii,  M.  (vocative  sing.,  fill ; 
75.  5),  a  son. 

fin-io,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -ituni  (fi- 
nis), to  limit,  hound,  finish. 

finis,  -is,  M.  and  f.,  a  boundary, 
limit,  end ;  fines,  pL,  the  borders 
(of  a  territory),  territory. 

fin-itimi,  -orum,  m.  (finis),  neigh- 
bors :  masc.  pi.  of  finitimus. 

fio,  pass,  of  fScio  (302). 

flagito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  de- 
mand, fiercely ;  to  importune 
(185.  2). 

flecto,  flectgre,  flexi,  flexum,  to 
bend,  direct. 

fleo,  -ere,  -evi,  -etum,  to  weep,  cry. 

fle-tus,  -us,  M.  (fleo),  a  weeping. 

flo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  bloio : 
hloio  away. 

flore-ns,  -ntis,  part,  (floreo), 
flourishing,  prosperous. 

flor-eo,  -ere,  -ui,  no  p.  p.  (flos), 
to  bloom,  to  be  prosperous. 

flos,  floris,  M.,  a  blossom,  fioiver. 

fluctus,  -us,  M.  (fluo),  wave,  a 
billow,  surge. 

flu-men,  -inis,  n.  (fluo ;  that 
which  flows  along),  a  river. 

fluo,  -6re,  -xi,  -xum,  to  floio ;  dis- 
appear. 

fliiv-ius,  -ii,  m.  (fluo),  a  river, 
running  ivater,  stream. 

f6dio,  f6d6re,  fodi,  fossum,  to 
dig. 

foed-us,    -6ris,    n.     (fidus),     a 


league,  treaty,  comjmct,  agree- 
ment. 

for,  fari,  fatus  sum,  dep.  (305. 
2,  c),  to  speak,  say. 

f6re,  fut.  inf.  of  sum. 

fSris,  -is,  F.,  a  door,  gate  (gen.  pi., 
f6rum). 

for-ma,  -ae,  f.,  shape,  form,  beauty. 

for-sit-an,  adv.,  perhajys  (fors; 
sit;  an). 

fort-as-se,  adv.  (forte  ;  an  ;  sit), 
perhaps,  by  chance. 

forte,  adv.  (fors),  by  chance,  per- 
haps. 

for-tis,  -e,  adj.  (fgro),  strong, 
porverful,  courageous,  brave. 

fort-iter,  adv.  (fortis),  strongly, 
powerfully,  boldly,  valiantly. 

f  6rum,  -i,  n.,  a  market  place,  pub- 
lic square,  forum  ;  a  long  open 
space  in  Eome,  between  the 
Capitoline  and  Palatine  hills, 
surrounded  by  porticoes  and 
the  shops  of  bankers. 

fos-sa,  -ae,  f.,  a  ditch,  trench. 

frango,  franggre,  fregi,  fractum, 
to  break;  (of  ships)  to  v;reck. 

frater,  fratris,  m.,  a  brother. 

fretus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  relying  upon. 

frigus,  -6ris,  x.  (frig-  in  frigeo), 
cold,  coldness. 

frons,  frondis,  f.,  a  leaf:  leaves, 
foliage. 

fructu-osus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (fruc- 
tus),  fruilful,  advantageous. 

fruc-tus,  -us,  M.,  fruit,  profit,  ad- 
vantage, income. 

fruges,  -um,  f.  pi.  (frux),  fruits 
of  the  earth,  crops. 

friiment-arius,  -a,-um,  adj.  (fru- 
mentum),  of  corn:  res  fru- 
mentaria,  corn,  provisions. 

fru-mentum,  -i,  n.  (fruor),  co7m, 
grain. 

fruor,  frui,  fructus  and  fruitus 
sum,  dep.,  to  enjoy  (280). 

frustra,  adv.,  without  effect,  in 
vain. 


20 


FIRST   STEPS   IN    LATIN. 


fiig-a,  -ae,  f,  (fiigio),  ajlifjht,  ex- 
ile, hankliment. 

fiigio,  fugere,  fugi,  fugituni,  to 
flee  or  Jlji ;  to  run  away  ;  escape. 

fulg-ur,  -iiris,  x.  (fulgeo),  I'ujht- 
ning,  brightness. 

funda,  -ae,  f.,  sling. 

fund-itor,  -toris,  m.  (funda,  a 
sling),  one  iclio  slings,  a  slinger. 

fundo,  fundiSre,  fudi,  fusum,  to 
pour;  scatter,  rout:  lacrimas 
fundere,  to  shed  tears ;  hostes 
fundSre,  to  rout  the  enemy ; 
fundi,  to  he  poured  out,  to  Jlow. 

fungor,  fungi,  functus  sum,  dep., 
to  perform  (280). 


Gades,  -ium,  f.,  a  colony  in 
southern  IJi.spania  (Cadiz). 

Gains  (Cains),  -ii,  m.,  a  Roman 
name. 

Galba,  -ae,  m.,  Galba,  a  lloman 
emperor ;  a  chief  of  the  Sues- 
si  ones. 

gSlea,  -ae,  r.,  a  helmet. 

Gain,  -orum,  m.,  Gauls,  the  peo- 
ple of  Gaul. 

Gallia,  -ae,  f.,  (i((ul. 

Gall-icus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (Gallia), 
Gallic. 

gall-ina,  -ae,  f.  (gallus,  a  cock), 
a  hen. 

Gallus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  Gallic ;  as 
subst.,  a  Gaul. 

Garumna,  -ae,  yi.,  a  river  of  Gaul 
(now  Garonne). 

gaudeo,  gaudere,  gavisus  sum, 
semi-dep.  (283),  to  rejoice. 

gaud-ium,  -ii,  x.  (gaudeo),  joy, 
gladness,  delight. 

gelu,  -us,  X.,  cold,  frost,  chill. 

ggmina-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (gSmi- 
no),  doubled,  double. 

g6-minus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (geno, 
to  bring  forth),  twin,  double. 

Genava, -ae,  f.,  Geneva  (on  Lake 
Geneva,  at  its  outlet  into  the 


lihone),  a  city  of  the  AUo- 
broges. 

gener,  -eri,  m.,  a  son-in-law. 

gen-itus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (giguo), 
begotten,  born. 

genu,  -us,  X.,  the  knee. 

ggnus,  -Sris,  x.,  birth,  race,  kind. 

German!,  -orum,  m.  pi.,  the  Ger- 
mans. 

Germania,  -ae,  f.,  Germany. 

Germanus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  Ger- 
man. 

gSro,  gergre,  gessi,  gestum,  to 
carry,  iccar,  bear,  do,  transact, 
carry  on;  se  gSrgre,  to  con- 
duct one's  self ;  bellum  gerSre, 
to  carry  on  war;  res  gestae, 
deeds,  exploits. 

ges-to,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  intens. 
(ggro),  to  bear,  carry,  have. 

gigno,  gignere,  genui,  gSnitum, 
to  beget,  produce  (283.  3). 

glSdius,  -ii,  M.,  a  sword. 

gloria,  -ae,  f.,  glory,  fame;  ambi- 
tion, bragging. 

gl6ri-or,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep. 
(gloria),  to  glory,  boast. 

Gn.  (Cn.),  Gnams,  a  Roman  name. 

Graecus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  Greek. 

Graecus,  -i,  :m.,  a  Greek. 

grSphium,  -ii,  x.,  a  writing-style. 

grat-ia,  -ae,  f.  (gratus),  favor, 
regard;  gratiae,  pi.,  thanks; 
SgSre  gratias,  to  give  thanks; 
fS.cere  gratiam,  to  grant  par- 
don, forgive ;  gratia,  with  the 
gen.,  /or  the  sake  of  on  account 
of;  ea  gratia,  for  this  or  that 
reason,  on  this  or  that  account. 

grat-iilor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  de]). 
(gratus),  to  tvish  joy,  congratu- 
late ;  to  give  thanks. 

gratus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  pleasing; 
grateful. 

gravis,  -e,  adj.,  heavy,  weighty ; 
important,  grave,  violent. 

grav-iter,  adv.  (grSvis),  heavily, 
severely,  weightily ;  elaborately. 


VOCABULARY. 


21 


grex,    gregis,    m.,    a  JiocL;  herd, 

drove;  troop,  coiitpany. 
giiberna-tor,  -oris,  m.  (giiberno), 

a  steersman,  pilot ;  ruler,  fjorer- 

nor. 
giiberno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  steer 

or  pilot  a  ship  ;  govern. 

H. 

habeo,  habere,  liabui,  habitum, 

to  have;  to  esteem;  bSne  se 
habere,  to  be  ivell ;  sic  ha- 
bere, to  he  even  so ;  liaberi 
pro,  with  abl.,  to  he  regarded  as. 

hS.b-ito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  inteiis., 
(hS.beo),  to  have  possession  of, 
to  inhahit;  to  dwell. 

Haeduus,  see  Aeduus. 

haereo,  haerere,  haesl,  haesum, 
to  hold  fast,  stick. 

Hannibal, -alis,  m.,  Ilannihal,  the 
son  of  Hamilcar,  leader  of  the 
Carthaginians  in  the  Second 
Punic  War. 

HSriides,  -um,  m.  pL,  Harudes,  a 
German  tribe  in  Gaul. 

hand,  adv.,  not  at  all,  not  (nega- 
tiving single  words). 

Helvetia,  -ae,  f.,  Helvetia,  modern 
Switzerland. 

Helvetii,  -orum,  m.  pL,  Helveti- 
ans, a  people  of  Gallia. 

Helvetius,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  Helvetian, 
of  the  Helvetii :  ^ger  Helveti- 
us, the  territory  of  the  Helvetii. 

heri,  or  here,  adv.,  yesterday, 
lately. 

heu,  inter j.  (an  exclamation  of 
pain  or  grief),  oh!  ah!  alas! 

Hibernia,  -ae,  f.,  Ireland. 

hib-ernus,  -a,  -um  (hiems),  adj., 
lointry ;  hiberna,  -orum,  x.  pi. 
(sc.  oastra),  winter-fpuirters. 

hie,  haec,  hoc,  pron.  demonstr. 

(234.  2),  this,  this  of  mine ;  he, 
she,  it;  the  latter  opposed  to 
ille ;  hoc,  on  this  account. 


hie,  adv.,  here,  Itereupon. 

higmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (hiems), 
to  pass  the  vnnter. 

hiems  (-mps),  -6mis,  f.,  the 
IV  inter. 

hinc,  adv.  (hie),  from  this  place; 
from  this  tirne,  hereafter;  hence ; 
hinc  .  .  .  hinc,  on  the  one  hand 
.  .  .  on  the  other. 

Hispania,  -ae,  f.,  Spain. 

Homerus,  -i,  m..  Homer;  the 
gi-eat  epic  poet  of  Greece. 

h6mo,  -inis,  com.  gen.,  a  human 
being;  a  man  or  woman,  a 
mortal. 

h6nor  (-os),  -oris,  m.,  honor,  re- 
pute;  hSnores,  pL,  offices  of 
hojior,  public  offices. 

honorific-e,  adv.  (honorificus), 
comp.  hSnorificentius,  sup. 
honorificentissime,  luith  hon- 
or, in  an  honorable  manner. 

h6n6r-i-ficus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  (h6n- 
or;  fScio),  bringing  honor, 
honorable;  comp.  h6n6rifi- 
centior,  sup.  h6norificentis- 
simus. 

hora,  -ae,  f.,  an  hour.  (The  Ro- 
mans divided  their  day  into 
twelve  intervals  from  sunrise 
to  sunset ;  hence  their  hour 
varied  in  length  at  different 
seasons  of  the  year). 

HSratius,  -ii,  m.,  (a),  the  name 
of  the  three  brothers,  in  the 
time  of  Tullus  Ilostilius,  M'ho 
fought  against  the  Alban  Cu- 
riatii;  (h)  Iloratius  Codes, 
who,  in  the  war  witli  Porsenna, 
defended  a  bridge  single-hand- 
ed; (c)  Horace,  a  Roman  poet. 

hordeum,  -i,  x.,  barley. 

horreo,  horrere,  horrui,  no  p.p., 
to  bristle;  to  tremble,  shudder; 
to  dread. 

horr-or,  -oris,  m.  (horreo),  a 
bristling;  a  shaking;  dread, 
horror;  religious  awe. 


22 


FIEST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


hortor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  to 
incite,  cheer,  exhort,  urge, 

hortus,  -1,  M.,  a  garden. 

hospit-ium,  -ii,  n.  (liospes),  a 
place  of  hospitality,  inn. 

hostis,  -is,  com.  gen.  (108),  a 
stranger,  an  enemy. 

hum-anus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (homo), 
pertaining  to  man,  human ;  court- 
eous, civilized. 

hiimSrus,  see  iimgrus. 


Ibl,  adv.,  in  that  place,  there. 

ibidem,  adv.,  in  the  same  place. 

ICO,  icgre,  ici,  ictum,  to  strike, 
hit,  smite,  stab:  foedus  icSre, 
to  make  or  conclude  a  treaty. 

ic-tus,  -us,  M.  (ico),  a  hloio, 
thrust. 

Idem,  eSdem,  idem,  proii.,  the 
same,  very  (238.  2)  ;  idem  qui, 
the  same  as. 

idoneus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  meet,  prop- 
er, suitable  (145). 

idus,  -tlum,  F.  pi.,  the  Ides ;  the 
fifteenth  day  of  the  months 
March,  IVIay,  July,  and  Octo- 
ber, the  thirteentli  day  of  the 
remaining  months. 

igitur,  conj .  (205.  3),  then,  there- 
upon; therefore,  consequently. 

ignis,  -is,  M.,fre  (108). 

i-gn6sco,-gn6sc6re,-gn6vi,-gn6- 
tum  (in ;  gnosco  =  nosco,  with 
dat.),  to  pardon,  forgive,  excuse, 
overlook. 

i-gnotus, -a, -um,  adj.  (in;  gno- 
tus  =  notus),  unknoivn. 

illatus,  or  inlatus,  see  in-fSro. 

ille,  -a,  -ud,  pron.  demonstr. 
(234.  3),  that,  that  yonder;  hie 
.  .  .  ille,  this  .  .  .  that,  the  one  .  .  . 
the  other. 

illic,  adv.  (ille;  oe),  in  that  place, 
there. 


il-lic6,  adv.  (in;  I6c6),  on  the 
spot,  instantly,  there. 

imago,  -inis,  f.,  an  image  or  like- 
ness, statue,  picture. 

imber,  -bris,  m.,  a  shoiver  of  rain. 

im-maturus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (in; 
maturus),  unripe,  immature. 

immo  (imo),  adv.,  on  the  con- 
trary;  no  indeed,  yes  indeed. 

im-mortalis,  -e,  adj.  (in;  mor- 
talis),  undying,  immortal. 

im-par,  -S.ris,  adj.  (in;  par),  un- 
even, unequal,  not  a  match  for. 

im-pStiens, -eutis,  adj.  (in;  pS- 
tiens),  not  able  to  bear,  impatient. 

imp^di-mentum,  -i,  n.  (impg- 
dio),  a  hindrance,  impediment; 
impedimenta,  -orum,  n.  pi., 
baggage. 

im-pgdio,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum 
(in;  pes),  to  entangle,  hinder, 
impede. 

impldi-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (impS- 
dio),  hindered,  impeded. 

im-pello,  -pellgre,  -piili,  -pul- 
sum  (in ;  pello),  to  push  against; 
urge  on,  impel. 

imp6ra-tor,  -oris,  m.  (impSro), 
general,  commander  (in  chief). 

im-perfectus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (in; 
perfectus),  unfnislied,  imper- 
fect. 

imp6r-ium,  -ii,  n.  (impSro),  a 
command ;  authority ;  empire, 
government. 

im-pSro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (in; 
p^ro),  to  command  ;  govern,  rule 
over;  impgrare  obsides  S.li- 
cui,  to  demand  hostages  from 
any  one. 

im-petro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (in; 
pStro),  to  accomplish  ;  to  make 
a  request  and  have  it  granted. 

impetus,  -tus,  M.,  an  attack,  as- 
sault, onset;  impetuosity. 

im-ploro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (in ; 
ploro),  to  invoke  with  tears,  call 
to  one's  assistance ;  to  implore. 


VOCABULAllY. 


I. 


23 


im-poiio,  -ponere,  -p6sui,  -p6si- 
tum  (in ;  pono),  to  place  upon  ; 
place  on  ;  impose  upon ;  finem 
imponSre,  to  make  an  end; 
mount  (men  on  horses). 

im-porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  hring 
in,  import. 

im-primis,  adv.  (in ;  primis),  in 
the  Jiist  place,  chiejly,  especially. 

im-pr6bus,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (in ; 
pr6bus),  idcked,  had. 

im-piigno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (in ; 
pugno),  to  fight  against,  attack. 

in,  prep,  with  ace.  and  abl.  (200. 
3),  1.  with  ace.,  in,  into,  against; 
in  dies,  from  day  to  day;  2. 
with  abl.,  in,  before,  in  the 
presence  of. 

in-calesco,  -calescere,  -calul,  no 
p.  p.,  inch,  (in;  cSleo),  to  grow 
warm  or  hot. 

in-cendo,  -dSre,  -di,  -sum,  to  set 
on  fire  ;  inflame,  irritate. 

in-certus, -a,  -um,  adj.,  uncertain, 
unreliable,  hesitating. 

in-cido,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -casum 
(in ;  cado),  to  fall  in  luith,  at- 
tack ;  to  happen;  in  mentionem 
incidSre,  to  mention  accident- 
ally;  impers.,  (314.3),incidit, 
it  happens,  with  dat. 

in-cipio,  -cip^re,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
(in ;  cS.pio),  to  begin,  undertake. 

in-cito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  set  in 
rapid  motion  ;  to  incite,  spur  on. 

in-clamo,  -are,  -S.vT,  -atum,  to 
call  upon  for  assistance  ;  to  in- 
voke ;  revile. 

in-clino,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  bend 
doicn,  incline,  yield,  give  zvay ; 
in  fugam  inclinare,  to  be  on 
the  point  of  fleeing  ;  inclinari, 
to  be  on  the  point  of  falling. 

incSla,  -ae,  com.  gen.  (inc61o), 
an  inhabitant,  resident. 

in-c61o,  -c61ere,  -cSlui,  no  p.p., 
to  dwell  or  abide  in  a  place,  to 
inhabit. 


in-c61iimis,  -e,  adj.,  uninjured, 
safe  and  sound. 

in-comm6dum,  -i,  n.,  trouble, 
misfortune,  defeat. 

in-credibilis,  -e,  adj.  (in;  cre- 
do), incredible,  extraordinary. 

in-crSpo,  -are,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum 
or  -itum,  to  make  a  noise,  rus- 
tle ;  rebuke ;  to  clash. 

in-cuso,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (in  ; 
causa),  to  accuse,  blame. 

in-dico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (in ; 
dico,  to  make  knotvn,  and  so 
point),  to  point  out. 

in-dignus,  -a,  -um,  Sid].,  unworthy 
(307.  Obs.  4). 

ind-61es,  -is,  f.  (61esco,  to  grow), 
inborn  or  native  quality,  nature. 

in-dulgeo,  -dulgere,  -dulsi,  -dul- 
tum  (in;  dulcis),  to  be  courte- 
ous, kind;  to  indulge,  humor, 
give  way  to ;  concede,  allow, 
grant. 

in-duo,  -dugre,  -dui,  -dutum,  to 
put  on,  assume,  clothe ;  in  pass., 
indui  vestem,  to  put  on  a  gar- 
ment. 

in-eo,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum,  irreg., 
to  go  into,  enter ;  inire  consili- 
um, to  form  apian;  inire  foe- 
dus,  to  make  a  treaty;  inire 
gratiam,  to  get  into  the  good 
graces  of  (298.  Obs.  3). 

in-ermis,  -e,  adj.,  (in;  arma), 
unarjned,  defenceless. 

in-ers,  -ertis,  adj.  (in;  ars),  un- 
skilled;  idle. 

in-fans,  -antis,  adj.  (in;  for), 
speechless;  very  young.  As 
noun,  com.  gen.,  an  infant, 
babe. 

in-felix,  -icis,  adj.,  unhappy. 

inferior,  -ius,  adj.  (comp.  of 
infgrus,  150.  2),  lower,  later, 
inferior. 

in-fgro,  inferre,  intuli,  illatum 
(inlatum),  irreg.  (295.  Obs. 
2),    to    carry    in    or    into;    in- 


24 


FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


ferre  signa,  to  advance  the 
standards,  attack :  inferre  pe- 
dem  or  grSdiim,  to  advance, 
attach;  se  inferre,  to  betake 
one's  self,  go. 

in-fgrus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (coiiip.  in- 
ferior, sup.  infimus  or  imus), 
loii),  nether.  As  noun,  inferi, 
-orum,  M.  pi.  (the  inhabitants 
of  the  lower  regions),  tlie  dead . 

infesto,  -are,  -avi,  -atuni  (infes- 
tus),  to  attack,  molest,  infest. 

in-festus,  -a,  -um,  adj. (old  part, 
of  infSro),  hostile;  unsafe. 

infimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (superla- 
tive of  infgrus),  the  lowest,  last, 
lowest  part  of. 

in-flecto,  -flectgre,  -flexi,  -flex- 
um,  to  bend  doivn;  irarp  :  a  feet. 

in-flo,  -flare,  -flavi,  -flatum,  to 
bloiv  info :  inflate. 

In-fluo,  -flugre,  -fluxi,  -fluxum, 
to  flow  itito,flotv  upon,  flo>v. 

infra,  adv.  and  prep,  with  ace,  be- 
hnv,  beneath,  under,  underneath. 

in-gSns,  -entis,  adj .  (in ;  gens, 
bei/ond  its  kintl,  so),  (jrcat,  vast. 

inicio  (pronounced  in-jicio), 
-icgre,  -jeci,  -jectum  (in ;  jS- 
cio),  to  throw  or  cast  into,  cast 
upon  or  against;  infuse  into, 
inspire;  inic6re  m§tum  alicui, 
to  inspire  one  ivithfear. 

in-imicus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (in ;  3.mi 
cus),  unfriendly,  hostile.  As 
noun,  M.,  a  private  enermj  or 
foe. 

in-Iquus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (in;  ae- 
quus),  unequal,  unjust ;  unkind. 

ini-tium,  -ii,  x.  (ineo),  a  begin- 
ning, commencement ;  origin. 

injuri-a,-ae,  f.  (injurius),  injury, 
violence ;  insult,  injustice. 

in-nascor,  -nasci,  -natus  sum, 
dep.,  to  be  born  in ;  spring  up  in. 

in-nitor,  -niti,  -nisus  or  -nixus 
sum,  dep.,  to  lean  or  rest  upon, 
support  one's  self  by. 


7-1 


in-n6cens,  -entis,  adj.,  haymiless ; 
blameless,  innocent;  disinter- 
ested. 

in6p-ia,  -ae,  f.  (inops),  jwverty, 
need,  want. 

inquam,  def.  (305.  2  li),  I  say. 

in-scribo,  -scribSre,  -scripsi, 
-scriptum,  to  ivrite  upon,  in- 
scribe;  indicate. 

in-sgquor,  -sgqui,  -sgcutus  sum, 
dep.,  to  follow  after,  pursue. 

in-sideo,  -sidere,  -sedT,  -sesfeum 
(in  ;  sgdeo),  to  sit  in  ;  sit  upon, 
settle  upon  ;  to  get  i)OSsession  of 
occupy. 

insid-iae,  -arum,  f.  pi.  (insid- 
eo),  an  andjush ;  artifce,  plot; 
per  insidias,  by  stratagem, 
craftdy. 

insidi-or,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep. 
(msidiae),  to  lie  in  wait  for, 
watch  for,  expect. 

insign-e,  -is,  x.  (insignis),  a  dis- 
tinctive mark ;  badge  (of  office), 
a  signal;  ensign;  in  pi.,  insig- 
nia, -ium,  badges  of  honor,  dec- 
orations, ornaments. 

Tn-signis,  -e,  adj.  (in;  sTgnum), 
remarkable,  distinguished,  extra- 
ordinary. 

in-silio,  -silire,  -silui,  no  p.p. 
(in;  salio),  to  leap  or  .spring 
into  ;  to  leap  or  spring  upon. 

m-sinuo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (in ; 
sinus),  to  2^^net)'ate  or  enter 
anywliere  by  winding  in;  insin- 
uate;  with  se,  tvork  one's  tray 
into. 

ins61en-ter,  adv.  (ins61ens),  un- 
usually;  haughtily,  insolently. 

in-stitub,  -stitugre,  -stitui,  -sti- 
tutum  (in ;  stStuo),  to  arrange, 
educate. 

institu-tum,  -i,  x.  (instituo), 
custom,  arrangement;  in  pL, 
institutions. 

in-sto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -statum,  to 
stand  upo7i;  approach;  harass. 


VOCABULARY.  —  T. 


25 


in-struo,  -struSre,  -struxi,  -struc- 
tum,  to  erect ;  teach ;  set  in  or- 
der, arrancje  (of  troops)  ;  clothe, 
array,  ornaynent. 

in-suesco,  -suescSre,  -siievi, 
-suetum,  to  become  accustomed ; 
to  accustom  or  habituate  one  to 
a  thing. 

in-siila,  -ae,  r.  (in;  salum,  the 
sea),  an  island. 

in-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  irreg.,  to  be  in 
or  tipov,  to  belonrj  to. 

in-tactus,  -a,  -uni,  adj.  (in;  tan- 
go), untouched,  unharmed ;  2')ure, 
chaste. 

in-tgger,  -gra,  -grum  adj.  (in; 
tango),  untouched ;  sound, 
ichole,  unhurt ; fresh  (of  troops)  ; 
blameless,  pure;  ex  integro, 
afresh. 

intel-lSgo,  -Iggere,  -lexi,  -lectum 
(inter;  lego),  to  distinguish  be- 
tween, to  perceive  ;  understand. 

inter,  prep,  "with  aec,  between, 
among,  during,  in  the  midst  of; 
inter  se  diff erre,  to  differ  from 
each  other;  dare  inter  se,  to 
interchange. 

inter-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  go  between  ;  to  be,  stand, 
or  lie  between,  intervene;  jnotest 
(as  tribune). 

inter-cludo,  -cludere,  -clusi, 
-clusum  (inter ;  claudo),  to 
shut  off,  cut  of]  hinder;  sur- 
round. 

inter-dico,  -dicere,  -dixi,  -dic- 
tum, to  forbid,  interdict,  prohib- 
it; aliquid  interdlcere  alicui, 
or  aliquem  aliqua  re,  to  ex- 
clude one  from,  to  forbid  one 
the  use  of  angthing ;  interdi- 
cSre  Slicui  aqua  et  igni,  to 
forbid  one  the  use  of  fire  and 
tvater,  i.e.,  to  deprive  one  of 
civil  rights,  to  banish. 

inter-ea,  (ace.  pi.  N.),  adv.,  mean- 
while. 


inter-est,  inipers.  (313),  it  con- 
cerns, is  of  interest,  is  important ; 
interest  me  a,  315.  3  (2),  it  is 
my  concern  ;  interest  omnium, 
it  is  the  interest  of  all. 

interfec-tor,  -oris,  m.  (interfi- 
cio),  a  slayer,  murderer. 

inter-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fec- 
tum  (inter ;  facio),  to  destroy, 
kill. 

intgr-im,  adv.  (inter ;  im  =  eum), 
in  the  meantime,  meanwliile. 

interior,  -ius,  adj.,  comp.  (150. 1), 
inner-,  interior. 

intgri-tus,  -us,  m.  (intereo),  de- 
struction, ruin. 

inter-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  discontinue,  intervene. 

inter-pello,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
interrupt,  hinder ;  urge. 

inter-rumpo,  -rumpSre,  -rupT, 
-ruptum,  tohreal: asunder,  break 
down. 

inter-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  irreg.,  to  be 
between,  intervene,  be  jjresent  at ; 
interest,  impers.,  see  inter- 
est. 

inter-vallum, -T,  x.,  space  between, 
interval,  distance. 

intra,  adv.  and  prep,  with  ace., 
within,  under  (with  numerals). 

in-tueor,  -tueri,  -tuitus  (-tutus) 
sum,  dep.,  to  look  at,  contem- 
plate. 

in-tiimesco,  -tiimescere,  -tumui, 
no  sup.,  to  begin  to  swell,  to  stvell 
OY  rise  up,  increase;  to  be  elated; 
sicell  icith  rage. 

in-usitatus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  unusu- 
al, extraordinary. 

in-vgnio,  -vgnire,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  ^0  come  upon ,  find ;  invent. 

in-vicem,  adv.  (in ;  vicis),  by 
turns,  alternatel]!,  one  another. 

in-victus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  uncon- 
quered;  invincible. 

in-video,  -videre,  -vidT,  -visum, 
to  look  spitefully  at;  envy. 


26 


FIRST    STEPS   IN  LATIN. 


in-vitus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (in ;  v61o), 

nnrvilUng,  reluctant. 
in-v6co,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  call 

on  ov  upon;  invoke;  implore. 
ipse,  -a,  -um,  pron.  (238.  3),  self, 

very ;  himself,  herself  itself. 
Ira,  -ap,  f.,  anger,  wrath,  ire. 
ira-cundus,  -a,  -um,  adj.   (Tra), 

prone  to  anger,  irritable. 
ir-ascor,  irasci,  Iratus  sum,  dep. 

(Ira),  to  he  angry,  he  in  a  rage. 
Ira-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  act.  (iras- 

cor),  angry,  angered. 
ir-rldeo,  -ridere, -risi, -risum  (in; 

rideo),    to    laugh    in    ridicule ; 

ridicule. 
ir-rumpo,  -rumpSre,  -rupl,  -rup- 

tum  (in ;  rumpo),  to  break  in, 

burst  in. 
ir-ruo,  -ruSre,  -rul,  no  p.  p.  (in ; 

ruo),  to  rush  in  or  into;  attack 

furiously,  assa  iilt. 
is,  ea,  id,  pron.  (238. 1),  this,  that; 

he,  she,  it;  is  qui,  the  man  icho, 

such  a  one  that;  in  eo  esse,  to 

be  on  the  point  of. 
iste,  -ta,  -tud,  pron.,  this  of  yours, 

that  near  you;  this,    that;    that 

fellow  (in  contempt)  (234.  2). 
ita,  adv.,  thus,  so ;  to  such  an  ex- 
tent; ita  . .  .  ut  (with  subj.),  in 

such  a  manner  .  .  .  that. 
Italia, -ae,  f.,  Italy. 
itS-que,  conj.   (205.  4),  and  so; 

therefore,  accordingly. 
item,  adv.,  in  like  manner  ;  so  also. 
iter,  itingris,    n.   (eo),  journey, 

march,  route  (121)  ;  ex  itinSre, 

on  the  march;  magnis  itineri- 

bus,  by  forced  marches. 
itgrum,  adv.,  again,  a  second  time, 
itiirus,  -a,  -um,  part,  from  eo. 


jaceo,  -ere,  -ui,  no  p.p.,  to  lie,  lie._ 

prostrate,  lie  dead. 
jScio,    jScSre,   jecl,   jactum,    to 

throw,  cast. 


jacta-tio,    -onis,    f.     (jScio),    a 

throicing  ;  boasting. 

jact-ito,  -are,  no  perf.,  no  p.p., 
frequentative  (jacto),  to  pour 
forth  frequently  ;  to  make  a  great 
display. 

jac-to,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  frequen- 
tative (jScio),  to  throw ;  talk 
about. 

jam,  adv.,  noic,  ahead y,  presently, 
at  length;  with  a  negative,  as 
jam  non,  no  longer. 

jam-diu,  adv.,  long  ago,  already, 
for  a  long  time. 

janua,  -ae,  f.  (janus),  a  door, 
gate. 

janu-arius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (jSnus), 
of  ov  belonging  to  January.  As 
noun,  M.,  January. 

Janus,  -i,  m.,  an  ancient  Latin 
divinity,  represented  with  two 
faces,  one  in  front,  the  other 
behind. 

j6cus,  -I,  M.  (in  pi.,  also  j6ca, 
-orum),  a  jest,  joke. 

J6vis,  gen.  of  Jupiter. 

Jiiba,  -ae,  m.,  a  king  of  Numidia. 

jiibeo,  jiibere,  jussi,  jussum,  to 
order,  command. 

judex,  -icis,  com.  gen.  (jus; 
dice),  a  judge,  umpire. 

judic-ium,  -il,  n.  (judico),  a 
judgment,  trial,  court. 

ju-dico,  -are,  -avI,  -atum  (jus ; 
dico),  to  judge,  determine. 

jiig-iilum,  -i,  n.,  -us,  -i,  m.  (jungo) 
(that  which  joins),  that  which 
joins  the  shoulders  and  neck; 
the  throat. 

jflg-um,  -1,  N.  (jungo),  a  yoke  ; 
team  ;  a  summit  (of  a  mountain) . 

Julius,  -il,  M.,  Julius,  the  name 
of  a  lloman  gens;  especially 
Gains  Julius  Ccesar,  and  his 
adopted  son.  Gains  Jidius  Cce- 
sar Octavianus  Augustus. 

Julius,  -il,  M.,  the  month  of  July ; 
so  called  after  Julius  Cassar. 


VOCABULARY.  —  T. 


27 


Julius,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  of  Julij. 
ju-mentum,  -i,  n.  (jungo),  a  beast 

of  burden. 
jungo,  junggre,  junxi,  junctum, 

to  )]oi7i,    harness ;    s6cietatem 

junggre,  to  form  a  partnership. 
junior,  -us,  adj.,  comparative  (jii- 

vgnis,  150.  3),  younger. 
Ju-piter,  see  Juppiter. 
Ju-ppiter,  J6vis,  m.  (121),  Jupi- 
ter, son  of  Saturn,  brother  and 

husband  of  Juno,  king  of  gods. 
Jura,  -ae,  m.,  a  chain  of  moun- 
tains extending  from  the  Rhine 

to  the  Rhone. 
jure,  abl,  of  jus,  used  adverbially, 

by  right,  justly. 
juro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  swear, 

take  an  oath. 
jus,  juris,  X.,  justice,  law  ;  court 

of  justice  (ace.  pi.  wanting). 
jusjurandum,    jurisjurandi,    n. 

(121),  an  oath. 
just-e,     adv.     (Justus),    rightly, 

justly. 
jiivgnis,  -is,  adj.,  com.  gen.  (109. 

N.  and  150.  3),  young,  youthful ; 

as  subst.,  jiivinis,  -is,  com.  gen. 

(gen.  pi.  jiivgnuni),    a    young 

man    or    woman    (between    17 

and  45  or  46) . 
jiiven-tus,   -utis,    f.    (jiivenis), 

youth,  the  season  of  youth. 
jiivo,  jttvare,  juvi,  jutum,  to  help, 

aid. 
juxta,  prep,  with  ace,  near  to, 

near ;   as  adv.,  near  by,  in  like 

manner,  alike. 


KSlendae  (Cal-),  -arum,  f..  Ca- 
lends, the  frst  day  of  the 
month. 

Karthago  (Car-),  -inis,  f.,  Car- 
thage ;  a  celebrated  city  of 
Africa. 


L. 


L,  an  abbrev.  for  Lucius. 

LSbienus,  -i,  m.,  Labienus ;  an 
officer  of  Caesar  in  Gaul,  who  af- 
terwards went  over  to  Pompey. 

ISboro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ISbor), 
to  toil,  labor. 

lac,  lactis,  x.,  7nilk. 

IScer,  -era,  -grum,  adj.,  torn,  man- 
gled, maimed. 

IScesso,  -ess6re,  -essivi,  or-essii, 
or  -essi,  -essitum,  to  provoke, 
excite,  assail,  attack. 

lacrima,  -ae,  f.,  a  tear;  lacrimas 
dare,  to  weep. 

IScus,  -us,  M.,  a  lake. 

laedo,  laedgre,  laesi,  laesum,  to 
strike,  injure ;  annoy,  violate. 

laetor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.  (lae- 
tus),  to  feel  joy,  be  glad. 

lambo,  -gre,  -i,  no  p.p.,  to  lick,  lap. 

lanio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  rend, 
tear  in  pieces. 

lapis,  -idis,  m.,  a  stone ,  a  stone 
(placed  at  the  end  of  every  1000 
paces),  a  mile-stone. 

laqueus,  -ei,  m.,  a  noose,  halter, 
snare. 

lat-e,  adv.  (latus),  ividely ;  far 
and  ivide. 

lat-ebra,  -ae,  f.,  (ISteo),  a  hiding- 
place,  lurking-place. 

later,  -Sris,  m.,  a  brick  or  tile. 

latro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  bark, 
yelp :  bark  at. 

latro,  -onis,  m.,  a  robber,  highway- 
man. 

latus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  broad,  wide. 

latus,  -gris,  x.,  the  side, flank,  body, 
lungs ;  lS.tgris  or  lS.tgrum  d6- 
lor,  pain  in  the  side,  pleurisy. 

la-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (fSro),  borne, 
carried. 

laudo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  (laus), 
to  praise. 

laurea,  -ae,  f.,  a  laurel-tree ;  lau- 
rel-crown. 


28 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIK. 


laus,  laudis,  f.,  praise,  (jTorij ; 
\^^x6.e^,  fame . 

lega-tio,  -onis,  r.,  an  amhassy, 
legation. 

lega-tus,  -i,  m.  (lego),  an  amhas- 
sador,  lieufenanf,  inessengei-. 

Igg-io, -onis,  F.  (lego),  a  legion; 
consisting  of  between  4200 
and  0000  men. 

Iggi6n-arius,-a,-um,  adj.  (Iggio), 
of  or  belonging  to  a  legion :  le- 
gionary. 

16go,  legere,  legi,  lectum,  to 
gather,  select;  read. 

Lgmannus,  -i,  m,,  Lake  Geneva. 

len-itas, -atis,  f.  (lenis),  softness, 
smootliness. 

leo,  -onis,  isi.,  a  lion. 

lex,  legis,  f.  (lego),  law,  pre- 
cept. 

libent-er,  adv.  (libens),  villinghj, 
cheerful hj,  gladhj. 

libeo,  -ere,  -m,  -itura,  to  please ; 
libet,  impcrs.  (314.  2),  it  j^lcas- 
es,  it  is  agreeahle. 

liber,  -gra,  -grum,  adj.,  free,  un- 
restricted ;  in  pi.,  libgri,  -orum, 
M.  (the  free  members  of  the 
liouseliold),  ch ildren . 

liber,  -bri,  the  inner  harh  of  a 
tree ;  a  hook  (since  the  bark  of 
a  tree  was  used  as  material  for 
■\vritino'  upon). 

ITberal-itas,  -atis,  f.  (libgralis), 
gen erosity,  lihcrality. 

Iib6r-e,  adv.  (liber),  freely, 
franlcbi. 

libgri,  -orum,  ^r.  pi.  (see  liber). 

libero,  -are,  -avi,  -atura  (liber), 
to  free,  liberate,  ac<pnt  (248). 

liber-tas,  -atis,  f.  (ITber),  free- 
dom, liberty :  candor. 

liber-tus,  -i,  m.  (libgro),  a  freed- 
man. 

libet,  libere,  libuit  or  libitum 
est,  impers.  (314,  2),  it  pleases. 

lice  or,  -eri,  -itus  sum,  dep.,  to 
bid  (at  an  auction). 


licet,  licere,  licuit  or  licitum 
est,  impers.  (314.  2),  it  is  allow- 
able, permitted;  o)te  may,  can; 
licet  vSnias,  you  may  come. 

licet,  conj.  (206.  4),  although, 
though,  eren  if 

lie-tor, -oris,  M.  (ligo),  a  liclor ; 
an  attendant  granted  to  a 
magistrate  as  a  sign  of  official 
dignity. 

lignum,  -T,N.,  icood;  -phfire-tcood. 

linea-mentum,  -i,  n.  (linea,  a 
line),  a  line;  pi.,  draurings,  fea- 
tures, lineaments. 

Ling6nes,  -um,  m.  (ace.  pi.  Ling6- 
nSs),  a  people  in  Celtic  Gaul. 

lingua,  -ae,  f.,  the  tongue;  lan- 
guage. 

linter,  -tris,  f.,  a  boat,  skiff, 
v'herry. 

Liscus,  -1,  M.,  Liscus,  an  iEduan 
chief. 

littgra  (litgra),  -ae,  f.,  a  letter 
(of  the  alphabet) ;  litterae, 
pi.,  an  epistle,  literature. 

litus  (littus),  -6ris,  n.,  the  sea- 
shore, sliore,  coast,  beach. 

16cus,  -1,  M.  pi.,  16ci  or  16ca, 
M.  and  N.  (87.  n.  2),  a  place. 

long-e,  adv.  (longus),  far  off: 
much,  by  far  (comj).  longius  ; 
superlative,  longissime). 

longus, -a, -um,  adj.,  long;  tall; 
distant,  tedious. 

16quor,16qui,16c\itus  sum,  dep., 
to  speak. 

liiceo,  liicere,  luxi,  no  p.p.,  to 
shine,  be  evident. 

Lucius,  -ii,  M.,  a  Eoman  name. 

lu-crum,  -i,  n.  (luo),  gain. 

liid-icrum,  -i,  x.,  sport ;  shoic, 
public  games. 

lud  i-fico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (lii- 
dus ;  facio),  to  make  sjiort  of; 
mock. 

lud-i-ficor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep. 
(ludus ;  fScio),  to  make  sport 
of;  to  mock. 


VOCABULARY. 


29 


ludo,  -dgre,  -si,  -sum  (ludus),  to 

play. 
ludus,  -1,  M.,  a  play,  yame,  pas- 

time ;     school ;     in    pL,    public 

yames,  shows. 
lugeo,  lugere,  luxi,  no  p.  p.,  to 

lament;  mourn  for. 
lu-na,  -ae,  f.  (luceo),  (the  shin- 
ing one),  the  moon. 
Itipus,  -1,  M.,  a  wolf. 
lu-sus,  -us,  M.  (ludo),  aplayiny; 

sport,  amusement,  yame. 
lux,  lucis,  F.  (luceo),  Uyht,  day- 

liyht;  prima  lux,  day-break. 

M. 

M,  as  an  abbrev.  for  Marcus. 

M',  as  an  abbrev.  for  Mdnius. 

maereo  (moer-),  -ere,  no  perf., 
no  p.p.,  to  yrieve,  lament. 

mSgis,  comp.  adv.,  more,  rather. 

mS.g-ister,  -tri,  m.,  a  master,  chief 
leader. 

mSgistr-atus,  -us,  m.  (magister), 
a  mayistracy,  office,  mayistrate. 

magnifio-e,  adv.  (magnificus), 
nobly,  maynijicently,  splendidly, 
richly  (comp.  magnificentius ; 
superlative,  magnificentissi- 
me). 

magn-i-ficus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (comp. 
magnificentior ;  snperlative, 
magnificentissimus),  (mag- 
nus ;  facio),  noble,  yrand. 

magn-itudo,  -iiiis,  f.  (magnus), 
yreatness,  size,  bulk. 

magnus,  -a, -um,  adj.  (comp.  ma- 
jor; superlative,  maximus), 
yreat,  larye  (149.  4)  ;  natu 
major,  yreater  in  birth,  older. 

Maius,  -ii,  i\i.,  the  month  of  May. 

majores,  -rum,  m.  pi.  (major), 
ancestoi's. 

mSl-e,  adv.  (comp.  pejus ;  super- 
lative, pessime),  (m^lus), 
badly. 


mSle-dico,  -dicSre,  -dixi,  -dic- 
tum, to  speak  ill  of,  revile 
(193.  2). 

mal6-fic-ium,  -ii,  n.,  evil  deed, 
crime. 

ma-lo,  malle,  malui,  no  p.  p., 
irreg.  (294),  (magis;  v61o), 
to  tvish  ralh.er,  pyrefer. 

mSlum,  -1,  N.  (malus),  evil,  misfor- 
tune, calamity,  damaye. 

mSlus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (comp.  pe- 
jor;  superlative,  pessimus), 
evil,  wicked  (149.  4). 

manda-tum,  -i,  n.  (mando),  a 
charye,  order,  commission. 

man-do,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ma- 
nus ;  do),  to  commit  into  one's 
hands,  to  command. 

mS.neo,  manere,  mansi,  man- 
sum,  to  stay,  remain,  stop  ;  wait 
for,  await. 

manifestus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  clear, 
plain,  evident,  manifest. 

manus,  -us,  f.,  a  hand ;  band  (of 
troops), /orce  (174). 

Marcellus,  -i,  m.,  Marcellus,  a 
Roman  name. 

Marcus,  -i,  m.,  a  Roman  name. 

mare,  -is,  n.,  the  sea ;  mSre  inter- 
num, the  Mediterranean. 

mSr-itimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  of  or  be- 
lonyiny  to  the  sea;  maritime  ;  c6- 
piae  maritimae,  naval  forces. 
As  noun,  mSritima,  -orum,  x. 
pi.,  places  on  the  sea-coast. 

Marius,  -ii,  ivi..  Gains  Marius 
(157-86  B.C.)  ;  the  conqueror 
of  Jugurtha,  and  chief  of  the 
popular  party  at  Rome.  He 
was  consul  seven  times. 

Mars,  -tis,  m.,  the  fabled  father 
of  Romulus ;  the  god  of  wai', 
of  husbandry,  of  shepherds  and 
seers. 

Martins,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (Mars),  of 
Alars;  ofovbelonyinyto  March. 

Martins,  -ii,  m.,  the  month  of 
March. 


30 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


mater,  -tris,  f.,  a  mother ;  mater- 
f  Emilias,  or  materf  amiliae,  tlie 
mistress  of  a  house  (121). 

matr-imonium,  -ii,  x.  (mater), 
tredlock,  marriage ;  in  matri- 
monium  duc6re,  to  marry  (used 
only  of  a  man  marrying  a  wo- 
man). 

matr-ona,  -ae,  f.  (mater),  a  mar- 
ried iroinan,  wife,  jnafron. 

MatrSna,  -ae,  m.,  a  river  in  Gaul 
(now  the  Marne). 

matur-e,  adv.  (maturus),  early, 
speedily,  quickly  (conip.  matu- 
rius ;  superlative,  maturrime 
and  maturissime). 

matur-o,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ma- 
turus), to  make  ripe,  ripen; 
hasten. 

maturus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  ripe,  ma- 
ture;  excellent;  seasonable. 

maxim-e  (maxiim-),  adv.  (ma- 
ximus),  in  the  hir/hest  degree; 
very ;  mostly,  chiefly. 

maximus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  superla- 
tive of  magnus,  greatest. 

Maximus,  -i,  i\r.,  a  Roman  name. 

me-cum,  irifh  me  (230.  3). 

mSdi6criter,  adv.,  moderately. 

medium,  -ii,  n.,  the  middle,  midst ; 
the  presence  or  sight :  e  mSdio 
tollSre,  to  put  out  of  the  way. 

mSdius,  -a, -um,  adj.,  middle,  mid; 
half  ivay ;  intervening,  interme- 
diate. 

membrum,  -I,  x.,  a  limb;  divis- 
ion. 

mgmini,  -isse,  x,,  def .  (305.  Obs. 
3),  to  remember,  recollect. 

mgmor,  -6ris,  adj.,  mindful. 

mgm6ra-bilis,  -e,  ad  j .  (m6m6ro), 
memorable ;  worthy  of  mention. 

mend-ax,  -b.c\s,  false,  deceitful. 

mens,  mentis,  f.,  the  mind,  under- 
standing, intellect,  reason. 

mensa,  -ae,  f.,  a  table;  (that 
which  is  put  on  table), /oo J. 

mensis,  -is,  m.,  a  month. 


mentior,-iri,  -itus  sum,  dep.,  to  lie. 

merca-tor,  -oris,  m.  (mercor),  a 
trader,  merchant. 

mer-ces,  -edis,  f.  (merx),  hire, 
icages,  salary;  bribe. 

mergo,  merggre,  mersi,  mer- 
sum,  immerse;  sink,  overwhelm ; 
destroy. 

mSri-dies, -ei,  M.  (medius;  dies) 
(175. 2),  midday,  noon;  the  south. 

m6r-itus,  -a,-um,  part.  (mSreor), 
deserving. 

metior,  metiri,  mensus  sum, 
dep.,  to  measure,  deal  out  (ra- 
tions). 

metor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  to 
measure,  mark  off. 

Mettius,  -ii,  m.,  a  Roman  name. 

mgtuo,  mStugre,  mgtui,  no  p.  p., 
(mgtus),  to  fear;  be  afraid. 

me-us,  -a,  -um,  pron.  possessive 
(me)  (vocative  sing,  masc,  mi, 
rarely  meus),  my,  mine,  belong- 
ing to  me. 

migro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  de- 
part, migrate,  go  away. 

miles,  -itis,  com.  gen.,  a  soldier, 
a  foot-soldier. 

Miletus,  -1,  M.,  a  city  of  Caria  in 
Asia  Minor. 

milia,  -ium,  x.  pi.,  see  mille. 

milit-aris,  -e,  adj.  (miles),  of  or 
belonging  to  a  soldier  or  tlie 
soldiers;  military ;  res  milita- 
ris,  military  science. 

mllit-ia,  -ae,  f.  (milito),  military 
service  ;  i carfare. 

mille  (mile),  numeral  adj.  in- 
decl.,  a  thousand  (213.  2).  As 
noun,  used  only  in  the  nom. 
and  ace.  sing,  (mille),  and  in 
pi.  N.,  milia  (millia),  -ium, 
a  thousand;  followed  by  the 
partitive  gen.,  as  milia  pas- 
suum,  a  thousand  paces,  one 
mile. 

mill-ies  (-iens),  adv.  (mille),  a 
thousand  times. 


YOCAIUJLARY. 


31 


Milo,  -onis,  iMilo,  a  friend  of 
Cicero. 

minor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  to 
Jut  forth;  tlireaten,  menace. 

minor,  -us,  adj.  conip.  (parvus), 
less.  As  noun,  minores,  -um, 
com.  gQW.  pi.,  descendants. 

minuo,  -u6re,  -ui,  -utum,  to  les- 
sen, dimmish,  lower,  reduce:  to 
liroio  less. 

minus,  adv.,  less;  si  minus,  if 
)iot  (pSrum,  minus,  minime). 

miror,  -rari,  -ratus  sum,  dep.,  to 
admire ;  to  wonder  at  (279.  2). 

mir-us,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (miror), 
wonderful,  extraordinary. 

miser,  -6ra, -erum,  adj.,  wretched, 
unfortunate ;  sick,  ill. 

misgr-eor,  -eri,  -itus  or  -ertus 
sum,  dep.  (miser),  to  pity,  feel 
pity  for,  commiserate. 

misere-sco,  -soere,  no  perf.,  no 
p.  p.,  inch,  (misgreo),  to  feel 
pity,  have  comjxission  for . 

misSret,  misgrere,  mis6ritum, 
inipers.  (314.  2),  it  distresses, 
stirs  pity;  miser  et  me,  I  pity. 

Mithridates,  -is,  m.,  Mithrida- 
tes  the  Great,  king  of  Pontus, 
who  waged  war  with  the  Ro- 
mans, and,  being  at  last  con- 
quered by  Pompeius,  stabbed 
himself. 

m6do,  adv.,  07ily,  merely ;  at  all ; 
just  nom;  m6do  .  .  .  modo, 
now  .  .  .  now,  at  one  moment 
.  .  .  at  another;  non  m6do  .  .  . 
sed  Stiam,  not  only  .  .  .  hut 
also;  m6do,  with  the  subjunc- 
tive mood,  if  only,  provided 
that. 

m6dus,  -i,  m.,  a  measure  or  stand- 
ard ;  bounds,  limits,  end;  ivay, 
manner,  method,  mode;  ad  m6- 
dum,  in  mSdum,  with  the 
gen.,  after  the  manner  of;  like; 
m6do  fluminis,  like  a  river; 
liunc    in    mSdum,    after  this 


fashion ;  nullo  m6d6,  hy  no 
means. 

moenia,  -ium,  x,  pi.,  defensive 
ivalls,  city  wtdls  ;  fortif  cations. 

moles,  -is,  ¥.,a  mass,  mole ;  dam; 
difficulty. 

mSiestus, -a,  -um,  adj.,  trouble- 
some, irksome,  annoying. 

m61o,  -6re,  -ui,  -itum,  to  grind. 

m6neo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  to  admon- 
ish, warn;  punish;  teach. 

mon-s,  montis,  m.,  a  mountain. 

monstro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (mon- 
strum),  to  show,  jjoint  out. 

mon-strum,  -i,  n.  (m6neo),  a 
divine  omen;  a  monster. 

m6ra,  -ae,  f.,  a  delay ;  obstacle. 

morbus,  -i,  m.,  a  sickness,  disease; 
affliction. 

mordeo,  mordere,  mSmordi 
(memordi),  morsum,  to  bite; 
hurt. 

mSrior,  m6ri  (m6riri) ,  mortuus 
sum,  dep.  (fut.  part.,  mSritu- 
rus),  to  die,  decay. 

m6ror,  -ari,  atus  sum,  dep.  (m6- 
ra),  to  tarry,  stay,  loiter  ;  hinder. 

mor-s,  mortis,  f.  (mSrior),  death. 

mos,  moris,  m.,  usage,  custom;  in 
pi.,  customs,  character;  ex  more, 
according  to  custom. 

mo-tus,  -us,  M.  (m6veo),  a  mov- 
ing. 

m6veo,  movere,  movi,  motum, 
to  move,  set  in  motion;  take  atvay, 
remove  ;  influence  ;  arma  m6- 
vere,  to  take  arms ;  bellum 
mSvere,  to  undertake  war. 

mox,  2i,diN., presently,  soon,  directly; 
afterwards,  then. 

miilier,  -ieris,  f.,  a  ivoman,  female. 

mult-itudo,  -dinis,  f.  (multus), 
a  great  number,  multitude ;  a 
croivd. 

mult-6,  adv.  (multu^),  much,  far; 
by  far,  by  much;  multo  post  or 
ante,  long  after  or  before. 

multus,   -a,    -um,    adj.    (comp. 


32 


FIRST    STEPS   IN    LATIN. 


plus ;   superlative,  plurimus), 

muc/i,  many  (149.  4). 
mundus,  -i,  m.,  the  univej^se ;  the 

world,  the  earth. 
mun-io,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,    -itum 

(moenia),  to  fortifij,  hu'dd. 
munl-tio,  -onis,  f.   (munio),  a 

fortijication,  7'ampart. 
murus,  -1,  M.,  a  wall. 
mus,  -uris,  com.  gen.,  a  mouse. 
musca,  -ae,  f.,  a  Jlif. 
mu-to,  -are,  -avi,  -atuni,  iiitens. 

(mSveo),  to  chanye ;  exchange 

(304). 


N. 


nac-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (nancis- 

cor),  Itavitxj  ohfained. 
nam,  con'].,  for  (205,  5). 
nam-que,  coiij.,  for,  for  indeed, 

for  tnd>/. 
nanc-iscor,  nancisci,  nactus  or 

nanctus  sum,  dep.,  to  (jet,  re- 
ceive;  Jind. 
nans,  -antis,  part,  of  no. 
narro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  tell, 

relitte,  narrate,  recount. 
nascor,  nasci,  natus  sum,  dep., 

to  he  horn  (248.  3). 
nS.-to,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (no),  to 

.swim. 
na-tura,  -ae,  f.  (nascor),  nature ; 

disj)osition,  character ;   natura, 

naturalb/. 
nauta  (navita),  -ae,  m.,  a  sailor, 

seaman. 
nav-iciila,  -ae,  r.,  dim.  (navis), 

a  small  vessel ;  hoat,  skiff'. 
navig-ium,  -ii,   n.   (navigo),   a 

sailintj  :  vessel,  ship,  hoat. 
navis,   -is,   f.    (ace,  navem   or 

navim  ;  abl.,  nave  or  navi),  a 

ship;    navis   longa,  a  ship   of 

tear.  * 

ne,  adv.  and  conj.,  1.  adv.,  not,  no; 

ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even  (the 

word    or    plirase    emphasized 


always  between  the  ne  and 
quidem)  ;  2.  conj.,  thcd  not,  lest; 
in  final  clauses,  that  not,  lest; 
with  verbs  of  fearinq-,  tfiat  or 
lest  (321.  2  &  278.  l\l)). 

-ne,  interrog.  and  enclitic  particle, 
ichetlier  (in  direct  questions  ne 
is  not  to  be  translated,  except 
by  laying  emphasis  upon  the 
word  to  which  it  is  joined). 

nee,  see  ngque. 

n6cessari-6,  adv.  (ngcessarius), 
necessardy,  unavoidahly. 

ng-ces-se,  neut.  adj.  (found  only 
in  iiom.  and  ace.  sing.)  (ne; 
cedo),  unavoidahle,  necessary. 

ngcess-itas,  -atis,  f.  (nScesse), 
necessity ;  force. 

nScess-itudo,  -inis,  f.  (ngcesse), 
closely  hound ;  intimacy ;  close 
relationshij). 

nec-ne,  conj,,  or  not. 

n6co,  -are,  -avi (-ui), -atum,  to  kill. 

ne-dum,  conj.,  hy  no  means,  mucli 
less  ;  not  to  say,  mucli  more. 

n6-fas,  X.  indecl.,  that  wliicii  is 
nnlauful  (267). 

neg-ligo,  -ligSre,  -lexi,  -lectum 
(nee;  ISgo),  to  neylect,  disre- 
yard. 

nggo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  say 
no;  deny,  refuse. 

ngg-otium  -ii,  n.  (nee  ;  otium), 
a  husiness,  occuj/afion ;  diffi- 
culty;  matter;  nullo  nggotio, 
icithout  trouhle. 

ne-mo  (in  place  of  gen.  neminis, 
nullius  is  used ;  in  place  of  abl. 
nemine,  nullo,  m,,  or  nulla, 
F.,  is  used),  M.  and  f.  (ne  ; 
li6mo),  no  one,  nohody  ;  nemo 
non,  every  hody,  all;  non  ne- 
mo, some. 

nSpos,  -Otis,  M,  and  f.,  a  grand- 
son, a  grand-dauyhter,  a  nepfiew. 

ng-que  or  nee,  conj.,  and  not; 
ngque  (nee)  . . .  nSque  (nee), 
neitfier  .  .  .  nor. 


VOCABULARY.  —  I. 


33 


nS-quis,  -qua,  -quod  or  (subst.) 

-quid,    indet'.   proii.,    lest   any, 

that  no  one  (246). 
Nervii,  -orum,  m.,  The  Nervii,  a 

people  of  Belgic  Gaul. 
ne-scio,  -scire,  -scivi  or  -scii, 

-scitum,    not    to    know,    to    he 

ignorant  of. 
neuter,  neutra,  neutrum  (gen. 

neutrius),  neither  (209). 
ne-ve  (neu),  and  not,  nor ;  neve 

.  .   .  neve,  neither  .  .  .  nor. 
nex,   nScis,    f.    (neco),    death, 

murder,  slaughter. 
ni,  conj.,  if  not,  unless  (326). 
niger,   -gra,  -grum,  adj..  Mack, 

dark,  dusky. 
nihil   (nil),   n.,  indecl.,  iiothing, 

not  at  all;  nihil  habeo  quod, 

/  have  no  reason  that ;  non  ni- 
hil,   something;   nihilominus, 

nevertheless. 
nihil-dum,  adv.,  nothing  as  yet. 
nihilo,  adv.  (with  comparatives), 

by  nothing,  no;  nihilo  major, 

no  greater. 
nihilominus,  adv.,  see  nihil, 
nil,  see  nihil. 

ni-si,  conj.,  if  not,  unless  (326). 
nitor,  niti,  nisus  or  nixus  sum, 

dep.,  to  rest  upon,  rely  upon ;  to 

strive,  endeavor. 
nix,  nivis,  f.,  snow  (121). 
no,   nare,  navi,  no  p.p.,  to  swim, 

float. 
n6-bilis,   -e,  adj.  (gnosco),  that 

can  he  known;  famous,  nohle. 
nobil-itas,   -atis,   f.    (nobilis), 

celebrity,   fame  ;     the    nobility, 

nobles. 
n6ceo,    -ere,    -ui,    -itum    (with 

dat.),  to  harm,  hurt,  injure. 
noctii,   abl.   (used  adverbially), 

by  night. 
nolo,  nolle,  nolui,  irreg.  (non ; 

v61o)    (294),    not   to   ivish,   he 

unwilling. 
no-men,    -inis,    n.    (nosco),    a 


name  ;  renoivn  ;  nomen  ha- 
bere, to  be  famous. 

nomina-tim,  adv.  (nomino),  by 
name,  expressly. 

nomino,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (no- 
men),  to  name  ;  nomiyiate. 

non,  adv.,  not,  no. 

Nonae,  -arum,  f.  (nonus),  the 
Nones;  the  fifth  day  in  every 
month  of  the  year,  except 
March,  May,  July,  and  Octo- 
ber, in  which  it  was  the  seventh. 
So  called  because  it  was  the 
ninth  day  before  the  Ides. 

non-dum,  adv.,  not  rjet. 

non-ne,  interrog.  particle  (91.  1. 
b),  notf 

n5n-nullus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  some, 
several.  As  noun,  nonniilli, 
-orum,  M.  ^\.,  persons,  several. 

non  -  nunquam  (-  numquam) , 
adv.,  sometimes,  occasionally . 

no-nus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (n6vem), 
the  ninth.  As  noun,  nona, 
-ae,  f.,  the  ninth  hour  of  the 
day,  i.e.,  the  third  hour  before 
sunset,  at  which  hour  business 
was  ended  at  Rome. 

nos,  nostrum  or  nostri,  pi.  of 
ego,  loe  (239.  1). 

nosco  (gnosco),  noscere,  novi, 
notum,  to  become  acquainted 
ivith  ;  learn ;  novi,  perf .  with 
pres.  meaning,  /  know ;  novS- 
ram,  /  knew  (305.  Obs.  2). 

nos-ter,  -tra,  -trum,  possess, 
pron.  (nos),  our,  our  oion,  ours 
(231)  ;  in  pi.,  nostri,  -orum, 
M.,  our  men,  our  troops. 

nSto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (n6ta), 
to  mark,  indicate  ;  designate. 

no-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (nosco), 
knoivn. 

n6vem,  num.   indecl.  adj.,  nine. 

N6vem-ber,  -bris,  m.  (novem), 
November;  the  ninth  month  of 
the  old  Roman  year  (which 
began  in  March). 


34 


FIRST  STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


Novembris,-e,  adj.,  of  November. 

ziovi,  see  nosco. 

n6vus,  -a,  -um,  adj .,  neic ;  recent, 
strange;  novae  res,  revolution  ; 
the  comparative  of  this  adj.  is 
wanting,  superlative  ndvissi- 
mus,  latest,  last;  nfivissimum 
agmen,  the  rear. 

nox,  noctis,  f.,  ni<jlit;  darliiess. 

nubes,  -is,  f.,  a  cloud. 

nubo,  nubere,  nupsi,  nuptum 
(nubes),  to  veil  one's  self, 
marry  (used  only  of  a  woman 
marrying  a  man,  and  governs 
the  dative),  see  matrimonium. 

nullus,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (ne ;  ullus) 
(209),  not  any,  none,  no. 

num,  interrog.  particle  (91.  1. 
c),  tchether  ? 

niimSro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (nii- 
m6rus),  to  count,  niunher ;  es- 
teem. 

niimSrus,  -i,  m.,  a  tmrnher ;  a 
multitude. 

Ntlmidia,  -ae,  r.,  a  country  of 
northern  Africa  (now  Algeria). 

Niimitor,  -oris,  m.,  a  king  of 
Alba,  brother  of  Amulius  and 
grandfather  of  Romulus  and 
llemus. 

numquam  (nunquam),  adv.  (ne; 
umquam),  at  no  time,  never; 
non  nunquam,  sometimes. 

nunquam,  see  numquam. 

nuntio  (nuncio),  -are,  -avi, 
atum  (nuntius),  to  announce, 
declare. 

nuntius  (-cius),  -ii,  m.,  «  messen- 
ger;  news,  tidings. 

nu-per,  adv.  (n6vus),  recently. 


O. 


O,  interj.,  0 !  oh! 

ob,  prep,  with  ace,  on  account  of, 

for ;  quam  ob  rem,  wherefore, 

accordingly . 


6b-aer-atus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (ob; 

aes) ,  involved  in  debt.    As  noun, 

obaeratus,  -i,  m.,  a  debtor. 
6b-edio,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -Itum 

(ob ;    audio)    (with  dat.),   to 

give  ear  to ;  ()bey. 
6b-eo,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itum,  to 

go  towards,  meet,  die. 
ob-icio   (pronounced  ob-jicio), 

-jicSre,    -jeci,    -jectum    (ob ; 

jScio),  to  cast  in  the  ivay ;   re- 
proach. 
obli-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (oblivis- 

cor),  having  forgotten;  forget- 

ful. 
obliviscor,    oblivisci,    oblitus 

sum,  dep.,  to  forget. 
ob-n6xius,  -a,    -um,   adj .    (ob  ; 

n6xa) ,  frail ;  liable  ;  obedient . 
ob-ruo,  -ruSre,  -rui,  -riitum,  to 

overwhelm;  crush. 
ob-s6cro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ob ; 

sicra),  to  beseech,  supplicate. 
obses,  -idis,  m.  and  f.,  a  hostage. 
ob-signo,   -are,   -avi,   -atum,  to 

seal,  seal  vj) :  attest. 
ob-sisto,  -sistere,  -stiti,  -stitum, 

to  oppose,  hinder,  obstruct. 
ob-sto,   -stare,    -stiti,    to    stand 

against,  oppose,  hinder. 
ob-stringo,   -stinggre,  -strinxi, 

-strictum,  to  bind. 
ob-tineo,   -tinere,  -tinui,  -ten- 

tum  (ob  ;  teneo),  to  hold,  jws- 

sess,  occupy;  last. 
ob-trecto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ob ; 

tracto),  to  disparage;   injure, 

thwart. 
ob-vius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (ob;  via), 

meeting,  in  the  way,  so  as  to  meet ; 

obvium    ire    Slicui,    to    meet 

one. 
ob-volvo,  -volvSre,  -volvi,  -v6- 

lutum,  to  wrap  around,  muffle 

up :  cover,  disguise. 
occa-sus,   -lis,    m.    (occido),   a 

fall,  setting ;  death,  overthrow. 
oc-cido,  -cidSre,  -cidi,  -cisum 


VOCABULARY.  — 


35 


(ob ;  caedo),  to  strike  doiun, 
kill. 

oc-cido,  -cidSre,  -cidi,  -casum 
(ob  ;  cS.do),  to  fall  down  ;  per- 
ish, die  ;  to  f/o  down,  set. 

oc-cttlo,  -ciiigre,  -ciilui,  -cul- 
tum  (ob  ;  ciilo),  to  cover,  hide, 
conceal. 

oc-culto,  -are,  -avi,  -atuni  (in- 
tens.  of  occtilo),  concecd. 

occul-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (occti- 
lo), hidden,  concealed,  secret ; 
in  occults,  in  secret. 

oc-ciipo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ob, 
cSpio),  to  take,  seize,  lay  hold 
of;  occupy,  enter. 

oc-curro,  -currgre,  -curri  (rare- 
ly ciicurri),  -cursum,  to  run 
towards,  run  to  meet;  meet,  op- 

_  pose. 

OceSnus,  -i,  m.,  the  ocean. 

OcSlum,  -1,  N.,  a  town  in  Cisal- 
pine Gaul  (Oulx  in  Piedmont). 

oc-ior,  -ius,  conip.  adj.  (superla- 
tive, ocissimus),  quicker,  soon- 
er, earlier  (150.  1). 

oct-avus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (octo), 
the  eighth. 

octin-genti,  -ae,  -a,  num.  adj. 
(octo ;  centum),  eight  hundred. 

octo,  num.  adj.  indecL,  eight. 

Octo-ber,  -bris,  m.  (octo),  Octo- 
ber (originally  the  eighth  month 
of  the  Roman  year,  reckoning 
from  March).  As  adj.,  Octo- 
bris,  -e,  of  October. 

octo-dgcim,  num.  adj.  indecl. 
(octo  ;  dgcim),  eighteen. 

octo-ginta,  num.  adj.  indecl., 
eighty. 

Sciiius,  -1,  M.,  a7i  eye. 

odi,  odisse,  defect  (305.  1)  ;  to 
hate,  dislike. 

6d-ium,  -ii,  n.  (odi,  305.  1),  ha- 
tred. 

of-fendo,  -fendgre,  -fendi,  -fen- 
sum  (ob ;  fendo,  obsolete),  to 
strike,  injure;  make  a  mistake. 


of-fic-ium,  -ii,  n.  (ops  ;  fScio),  a 

kindness  ;  duty  ;  business. 

olim,  adv.,  formerly:  hereafter; 
long  ago;  si  olim,  if  ever. 

omn-ino,  adv.  {omnis),  altogether, 
ivholly ;  at  all ;  generally. 

omnis,  -e,  adj.,  every,  all.  As 
subst.,  omnes,  -ium,  com.  gen., 
all  persons  ;  omnes  ad  unum, 
all  to  a  man. 

SnSrarius,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  of  burden 
(as  a  ship). 

6n6ro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (6nus), 
to  load,  overload. 

6nus,  -eris,  n.,  a  load,  burden, 
iceight. 

8pera,  -ae,  f.  (6pgror),  pains, 
work,  labor;  6pgra,  by  all 
means;  6p6ram  dSre  Slicui, 
to  attend  to;  mea  dpSra,  by  my 
aid. 

6pes,  see  ops. 

dportet,  -ere,  -uit,  impers.  (314. 
2),  it  is  necessary,  needful,  prop- 
er ;  I  (thou,  she,  &c.)  must  or 
ought. 

oppidum,  -T,  n.,  a  toivn  (other 
than  Rome,  which  was  called 
Urbs). 

op-p6no,  -ponSre,  -p6suT,  p6si- 
tum  (ob ;  pono),  to  place 
against,  set  opposite,  oppose, 
allege. 

op-portunus,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (ob  ; 
portus),/7,  seasonable. 

op-primo,  -primSre,  -pressi, 
-pressum  (ob;  prgmo),  to 
crush,  ovenvhelm,  subdue. 

op-pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (ob  ; 
pugno),  to  attack,  assault. 

ops,  6pis,  F.  (nominative  and 
dat.  sing,  wanting),  power, 
might,  strength;  in  pi.,  6pes, 
-um,  wealth,  resources,  power. 

optimates,  -um  or  -ium,  isi.  pL, 
the  principal  men;   the  nobility. 

optim-e,  adv.  (superl.  of  bgne), 
excellently. 


niJST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


optimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (superl. 
of  bonus),  best. 

6pus,  -eris,  n.,  icork,  labor,  task: 

opus,  N.  indecl.  (308.  Obs.  2), 
that  ivhich  is  necessarij,  need. 
As  adj.,  needful,  necessary. 

ora,  -ae,  f.,  a  border,  coast,  shore, 
refjion,  district. 

ora-tio,  -onis,  f.  (oro),  a  speak- 
hifj,  speech;  oration. 

ora-tor,  -oris,  m.  (oro),  a  speak- 
er, orator,  ambassador. 

orbis,  -is,  m.,  a  circle ;  orbis  ter- 
rarum,  the  whole  ivorld,  the 
globe  ;  (in  war)  a  hollow  square. 

orbus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  deprived, 
bereft. 

ordo,  -inis,  m.  (ordior),  an  ar- 
ranging, ra)ik,  line :  ordine, 
ex  ordine,  in  ordinem,  in 
order,  in  turn  ;  extra  ordinem. 
out  of  order,  irregularl//  ;  ordo 
gquester,  the  equestrian  order, 
the  knights. 

Orggt6rix,  -igis,  m.,  Orgetorix, 
a  Helvetian  nol)le. 

ori-ens,  -entis,  part.  (6rior), 
rising.  As  noun,  m.,  the  east; 
the  rising  sun. 

6rior,  6rl  (6riri),  ortus  sum, 
dep.  (248.  3),  to  arise,  originate 
from ;  to  begin. 

orna-mentum,  -i,  n.  (orno),  an 
ornament,  decoration,  equipment ; 
in  Y>^.,  jtictls. 

orna-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (orno), 
adorned,  ornan^ented. 

oro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (6s),  speak, 
cspec,  to  pray,  beseech. 

OS,  oris,  N.,  the  mouth,  the  face, 
countenance ;  speech. 

oo-tenclo,  -tendire,  -tendi,  -ten- 
Gura  or  tentum  (ob ;  tendo), 
lo  shoui,  display ;  declare;  prae- 
mia  ostendere,  to  offer  re- 
trards. 

otium,  -ii,  N.,  leisure,  freedom 
from  business  ;  quiet. 


OVIS,  -is,   F 


a  s/ieep. 


6vo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  exult, 
rejoice,  triump)h  in  an  ovation. 

ovum,  -i,  N.  (avis)  (belonging 
to  a  bird),  an  egg. 


P.,  an  abbreviation  of  Publius. 
pa-bulum,  -i,  n.   (pasco),  food 

(for  animals)  ;  fodder. 
Padus,  -1,  M.,  the  Po. 
paene,  adv.,  nearly,  almost. 
paenitet,  paenitere,  paenituit, 

no  p.  p.,  inipers.   (314.  2),  it 

repents,  with  ace.  of  person  and 

gen.  of  thing,  or  infinitive  in 

place  of  thing ;  paenitet  me 

facti,   /  repent   of  the   action; 

paenitet  me  feolsse,  /  repent 

having  done  it. 
pagus,  -1  and  -us,  m.,  a  canton, 

village. 
pSlam,  adv.,  openly,  publicly  ;  as 

prep,   with  abl.,  before,  in  the 

])resence  of. 
pall-idus,  -a,  -um  (palleo),  pale. 
paludamentum,  -i,  n.,  a  military 

cloak. 
pa-lus,  -1,  M.,  a  stake,  prop,  pale. 
pando,  pandSre,  pandi,  passum, 

to  spread  out,  extend,  throw  open; 

passis   crinibus,    ?vith   dishev- 
elled hair. 
pango,  panggre,  pegT,   (panxi, 

pgpigi)  pactum   (panctum), 

to  fasten,  fx  in  ;  settle. 
panis,  -is,  m.,  bread,  loaf. 
par,  paris,  adj.  (gen.  pi.,  pSri- 

um),  e<pial,  equal  to;  as  subst., 

par,  paris,  m.,  a  match  for  ;  also 

par,  paris,  n.,  a  pair. 
parco,  parcgre,  pgperci  (parsi), 

no  p.  p.,  to  spare. 
parous,    -a,    -um,    adj.,    sparing, 

frug<d,  thrifty. 
par-ens,  -entis,  m.  and  f.  (gen. 


VOCABULARY.  —  I. 


87 


pl.,  pareutum  and  p^rentium) 
(pario ),(/,  //(irent :  fatlwr,  mot  Iter. 

pareo,  -ere,  -ui,  no  p.  p.,  to  appear, 
obey  (with  dat.). 

pSrio,  par^re,  pgpgri,  partuni,  to 
procure;  bring  forth,  lay,  heyet. 

par-iter,  adv.  (par),  equally,  in 
like  manner,  as  icell. 

paro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  pro- 
cure, prepare,  provide. 

pars,  partis,  f.,  a  part,  portion; 
jyarty ;  ex  omni  parte,  i?}  all 
respects  ;  nulla  ex  parte,  in  no 
respect. 

partus,  -us,  m.  (pario),  a  bear- 
ing, birth;  offsp)ring. 

parvu-lus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  dim. 
(parvus),  very  small,  petty, 
slight;  young.  As  noun,  par- 
vulus,  -1,  M.,  a  little  hoy ;  par- 
viila,  -ae,  r.,  a  little  girl. 

parvus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (conip.  mi- 
nor, superl.  minimus),  small, 
little  (149.  4). 

pas-sus,  -us,  M.  (pando),  a  step, 
pace;  pace  (as  measure  of 
length,  consisting  of  Jive  llo- 
man  feet)  ;  mille  passuum, 
a  thousand  stej)S,  one  mile. 

pas-tor,  -oris,  m.  (pasco),  a  feed- 
er, shepherd. 

pater,  -tris,  m.,  a  father. 

pSter-familias,  patris-familias, 
M.,  a  father  of  a  family,  master 
of  a  household. 

pati-ens,  -entis,  part,  (patior), 
suffering,  patient ;  .  unyielding ; 
patiens  onSris,  able  to  bear  a 
burden. 

potior,  pati,  passus  sum,  dep., 
to  bear,  sujfer,  cdloiv. 

patr-ia, -ae,  v.  (-pater),  fatherland, 
natire  country,  native  place. 

patr-icius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (pSter), 
jjatrician,  noble. 

patr-imonium,  -ii,  n.  (pater),  an 
estate  inherited  from  a  father ; 
patrimony  ;  fortune. 


paucus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  fe>r,  some 
(generally  plural)  ;  pauca  or 
pauci,  -orum,  a  few  tvords  ;  a 
feiv  persons,  etc. 

paulo,  adv.  (paulus),  by  a  little, 
a  little,  somfirhaf. 

paulus  (paullus),  -a,  -um,  adj., 
little,  small. 

pauper,  -eris,  adj.,  poor,  needy 
(comp.  pauperior,  superl.  pau- 
perrimus) . 

pauper-tas,  -atis,  r.  (pauper), 
poverty. 

pax,  pacis,  f.  (that  which  binds), 
peace;  favor;  pace  tua,  ivith 
yo  ur  permission . 

pecu-nia,  -ae,  f.  (pecus,  -iidis), 
money,  riches,  icecdth. 

pScus,  -oris,  X.,  a  herd,  flock; 
ccdtle. 

ped-es,  -itis,  m.  (pes;  eo)  (one 
that  goes  on  foot),  a  foot-sol- 
dier;  infantry. 

jjejor,  -us,  adj.  (comp.  of  mS- 
lus),  v^orse. 

pellis,  -is,  F.,  a  shin,  hide  ;  a  gar- 
ment (made  of  skin) . 

pello,  pell^re,  pepttli,  pulsum, 
to  strike  ;  expel. 

pendeo,  pendere,  pependi,  pen- 
sum,  to  hang,  be  suspended. 

per,  prep,  with  ace,  through,  dur- 
ing, by  means  of. 

pSr-ago,  -agere,  -egi,  -actum,  to 
finish,  complete. 

per-agro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (per; 
ager),"  to  lead  through ;  finish; 
(with  concilium)  hold. 

per-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -cep- 
tum  (per;  capio),  to  take  in, 
learn ;  (of  harvests)  to  gather : 
seize. 

percuncta-tio  (contatio),-6nis, 
F.  (percunctor),  an  inquiring 
of;  an  inrjuiry. 

per-duco,  -ducSre,  -duxi,  -duc- 
tum,  to  lead  through,  conduct; 
draw  out,  extend. 


38 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


pSrSgrmor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep., 
to  travel  about  or  in  foreign  land,^. 

per-eo,  -ire,  -ii  (-ivi),  no  p.  p.,  irr. 
(to  go  through),  to  periJi,  die. 

per-fgro,  -ferre,  -tiill,  -latum, 
n-r.,  to  carry  through,  convey; 
accomplish;  suffer,  endure. 

per-ficio,  -ficSre,  -feci,  -fectum 
(per;  fScio),  to  make  (com- 
pletely) ;  finish;  effect. 

per-fringo,  -fringgre,  -f  regi,  -f  rac- 
tum  (per ;  frango),  to  break 
through  ;  to  shatter. 

pSriciii-osus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (pSri- 
ciilum),/^//  of  peril ;  dangerous. 

pSri-ciilum  (-clum),  -i,  n.  (pe- 
rior,  obsolete),  a  trial;  risk; 
danger. 

p6ri-tus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (pgrior, 
obsolete),  experienced,  skilful. 

per-magnus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  very 
great,  very  large. 

per-mitto,  -mittSre,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  let  through;  permit. 

per-m6veo,  -mSvere,  -movi, 
-motum,  to  move  Ueeply. 

pernic-ies,  -ei  (also  -ii),  v.  (per- 
nSco),  destruction,  ruin,  en-er- 
throw. 

per-paucus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  very 
little,  very  fe IV. 

per-p§tior,  -p6ti,  -pessus  sum, 
dep.  (per;  potior),  to  endure. 

perpgtu-6,  adv.  (perpetuus), 
constantly,  perpetually . 

perp6tu-um,  adv.  (perpetuus), 
fo re ve r,  perp)etually . 

perpetuus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  continu- 
ing ;  constant,  lasting. 

per-saepe,  adv.,  very  eften. 

per-sgquor,  -s§qui,  -secutus 
sum,  dep.,  to  follow  after,  pur- 
sue. 

persSvero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
(persSverus),  to  ])ersist,  pe7\se- 
vere  (in  anything). 

per-solvo,  -solvere,  -solvi,  -s6- 
lutum,  to  pay  (fully),  render. 


per-stringo,  -stringere,  -strinxi, 

-strictum,  to  bind  firmly,  fasten; 

seize;  wound  slightly ;  censure. 
per-suadeo,    -suadere,    -suasi, 

-suasum,  to  convince,  persuade. 
per-terreo,  -terrere,  -terrui,  -ter- 

ritum,    to   frighten    or    terrify 

thoroughly. 
pertiuac-ia,  -ae,  f.   (pertinax), 

p>erseverance,  obstinacy. 
pertinac-iter,  adv.  (pertinax), 

firmly,  stubbornly. 
per-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  no  p.  p. 

(per;  tgneo),  to  stretch,  extend; 

have  reference  to. 
per-turbo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

confuse  utterly ;  to  disturb. 
per-v6nio,  -vfenire,  -veni,  -ven- 

tum  (to  come  through  to),  to 

arrive  at,  reach. 
pes,  pgdis,  M.,  the  foot;  pgdibus, 

on  foot. 
pessimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (superl. 

of  mSlus),  u-orst. 
pestis,  -is,  v.,  a  plague,  pest. 
pSto,  pgtSre,  petivi,  pgtitum,  to 

aim   at,  go   to;    hence,    to   ask 

(185.  2) . 
phalanx,  -angis,  f.,  a  band  of  sol- 
diers, phalanx. 
Pharnkces,-is,  m.,  kingof  Pontus, 

defeated  by  Cicsar. 
Pharsal-icus,     -a,     -um,     adj. 

(Pharsalus) ,     of    Pharsalus, 

Pharsalian. 
pi-6tas,  -atis,  f.,  (pius),  piety; 

love,  gratitude. 
piget,  pigere,  piguit  and  pigi- 

tum  est,  impers.  (314.  2),  it 

vexes,  annoys,  troubles;  piget  me 

aiicujus  rei,  /  dislike,  a  thing. 
pilum,  -i,  N.,  a  javelin  (a  heavy 

javelin  of  the  Roman  infantry, 

which  they  hurled  at  the  enemy 

at  the  beginning  of  an  action, 

and  then  used  their  swords). 
pinguis,    -e,    adj.,    fat,   fertile; 
I      stupid. 


VOCABULARY. 


39 


pirata,  -ae,  im.,  a  aea-rohher,  pirate. 

piaceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  to  please ; 
placet,  impers.  (314.  2),  it 
pleases. 

plaga,  -ae,  f.,  a  bloio,  stroke. 

plan-ities, -iei  (-ae),  f.  (planus), 
level  (/round,  plain. 

plebs,  plebis,  f.  (pleo),  the  com,- 
mon  people. 

ple-nus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (pleo,  to 
Jill) ,  full,  filled  ;  complete. 

piu-rimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (superl. 
of  multus),  very  much ;  most; 
as  adv.,  plurimum,  mostly. 

plus,  pluris,  adj.  (comp.  of  mul- 
tus), more.  As  noun  in  pi., 
plures,  -ium,  m.,  seceral. 

plus,  adv.,  more,  too  much. 

poena,  -ae,  f.,  pmiishment,  pen- 
alty;  poenas  dSre,  to  pay  the 
penalt]!,  he  punished ;  poenas 
sumgre,  to  inflict  punishment. 

poen-itet,  see  paenitet. 

poeta,  -ae,  m.,  a  poet. 

pol-liceor,  -liceri,  -licitus  sum, 
dep.  (p6r-;  liceor),  to  offer, 
promise. 

pompa,  -ae,  f.,  a  procession ; 
suite,  retinue;  pajride,  pomp. 

Pompei-anus,  -a,  -um,  adj. 
{Pompeins),  of  Pompey,  Pom- 
peian. 

Pompeius,  -ii,  m.,  Gneius  Pom- 
p)eius  Magnus;  a  Roman  gen- 
eral and  rival  of  C?esar ;  de- 
feated at  Pharsaliis,  b.c.  48. 

pomum,  -1,  '}^.,  fruit. 

pone,  adv.  and  prep,  with  ace, 
after,  behind,  hack. 

pono,  ponere,  p6sui,  p6situm, 
to  put,  place,  set,  lay;  castra 
ponSre,  to  pitch  camp. 

pons,  pontis,  m.,  a  hridr/e. 

pontifex,  -ficis,  m.  (pons;  fa- 
cio),  a  high-priest,  pontiff'. 

Pontus,  -1,  M.,  the  Black  Sea 
(Pontus  Euxinus),  also  a 
region  about  the  Black  Sea. 


p6pulor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep. 
(p6pulus),  to  lay  waste,  pil- 
lage. 

p6piilus,  -1,  M.,  a  people,  nation. 

porta,  -ae,  f.,  a  gate,  door. 

porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  carry. 

posco,  poscere,  pSposci,  no 
p.  p.,  to  heg,  demand  (185.  2). 

posses-sio,  -onis,  f.  (possi- 
deo),  a  possessing,  possession, 
property. 

pos-sum,  posse,  p6tui,  irr. 
(p6tis;  sum),  to  have  the 
poiver,  can,  he  able  (293)  ; 
plurimum  posse,  to  have  very 
great  influence. 

post,  adv.,  and  prep,  with  ace, 
behind,  back,  after,  beneath. 

post-ea,  adv.,  afterwards,  here- 
after. 

postea-quam,  conj.,  after  that, 
rvhen  (333). 

posterior,  -ius,  adj.  (comp.  of 
postgrus),  after,  later;  infe- 
rior ;  latter. 

post-grus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (post), 
coining  after,  following,  next,  en- 
suing, future.  As  noun,  pos- 
ter!, -orum,  M.  pi.,  descendants, 
posterity. 

post-hac,  adv.,  after  this,  here- 
after, henceforth. 

post-quam,  conj.,  after  that, 
after,  as  soon  as,  rvhen  (333). 

postrem-6,  adv.  (postremus), 
at  last,  lastly,  filially. 

postr-i-die,  adv.  (posterus ; 
dies),  on  the  day  after,  on  the 
next  day. 

posttilo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
ask,  demand  (185.  2). 

pQtens,  -entis,  part,  (possum), 
able,  powerful,  strong. 

p6tent-atus,  -us,  m.  (p6tens), 
rule,  dominion,  command. 

p6tent-ia,  -ae,  f.  (p6tens), 
might,  power. 

p6t-ior,    -iri,    -itus    siim,    dep. 


40 


FIRST    STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


(p6tis),  io  become  master  of, 
take  possession  of  (306.  2). 

p6tis,  -e,  adj .  jwicerful :  able  ; 
possible. 

p6ti-us,  adv.,  comp.  of  p6tis, 
rather,  preferabhi,  more. 

pratum,  -i,  ^.,  pjasture,  meadow. 

prae,  adv.,  and  prep,  with  abl., 
before  ,  in  front  of,  in  compo- 
sition, before,  very. 

prae  -  caveo,  -cavere,  -cavi, 
-cautum,  to  guard  against  be- 
forehand;  be  on  one's  guard. 

prae-cedo,  -ced6re,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  go  before,  precede  ; 
surpass,  excel. 

praeceptor,  -oris,  m.,  instructor. 

prae-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -cep- 
tum  (prae  ;  cSpio),  to  take  in 
advance ,  direct,  order. 

prae-clarus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  vei^g 
clear;  excellent,  celebrated. 

praeco,  -onis,  m.,  a  crier,  herald. 

prae-dico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
make  known  (before  one),  pub- 
lish;  boast. 

prae-dico,  -dicgre,  -dixi,  -dic- 
tum, to  foretell,  predict :  team, 
command . 

prae-ditus,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (prae  ; 
do),  r/iftcd,  endowed  with  (308. 
Obs.  4). 

praedo,  -onis,  m.  (praedor),  one 
that  plunders,  a  plunderer. 

prae-mitto,  -mittSre,  -misi, 
-missum,  to  send  before,  des- 
patch in  advance. 

prae-pono,  -pongre,  -p6sui,  -p6- 
situm,  to  put  in  command. 

prae-scrlbo,  -scribSre,  -sorip- 
si,  -scriptum,  to  icrite  down 
beforehand,  command,  pre- 
scribe. 

praescrip-tum,  -i,  n.  (praescri- 
bo),  a  precept,  order,  rule. 

prae-sens,  -eiitis,  adj.  (prae; 
sura),  present. 

praesent-ia,  -ae,  f.  (praesens). 


presence;  readiness;  in  prae- 
sentia,  at  present,  now. 

prae-sertim,  adv.  (prae ;  sSro), 
especialbj. 

praesid-ium,  -ii,  n.  (praesideo), 
a  sitting  doivn  before,  guard; 
pyrotection. 

praestans,  -antis,  part,  (prae- 
sto),  pre-eminent,  excellent,  dis- 
tinguished, extraordinarij. 

prae-sto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -statum, 
to  stand  before  ;  surpass;  prae- 
stat  (314.  3),  it  is  better. 

prae-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  irr.,  to  be 
in  front,  be  in  command  of  gov- 
ern ;  summae  rerum  prae- 
esse,  to  have  the  supreme  com- 
mand. 

praeter,  adv.  and  prep.,  along  by, 
past,  beyond;  except,  beside. 

praetgr-eo,  -Ire,  -ii,  -itum,  to  go 
past ;  pass  by. 

praeteri-tus,  -a,  -um,  part, 
(praetgreo),  past,  gone  by,  de- 
parted. As  noun,  praetSrita, 
-orum,  N.  pL,  the  past. 

praetex-ta,  -ae,  f.  (praetexo), 
tlie  "  toga  pnetexta,"  a  mantle 
(with  purple  border,  worn  by 
niaL;isti-ates  and  children). 

praetor-ium,  -ii,  n.  (praetor), 
a  general's  tent. 

praetor-ius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (prae- 
tor), of  the  prietor . 

prae-v6nio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  to  come  before ;  anticipate, 
prevent;  surjyass. 

preci,  prgcem,  prgce,  in  pL, 
preces,  -um,  Y.,p>raiier,  request. 

prghendo,  -d6re,  -di,  -sum,  to 
seize,  grasp,  snatch. 

prgmo,  primgre,  press!,  pres- 
sum,  to  ])ress,  press  hard  on. 

prendo,  see  prehendo. 

pretium,  -ii,  n.,  money  ;  price. 

prex,  see  prSci. 

pri-die,  adv.  (prae ;  dies) ,  on 
the  day  before. 


VOCABULARY.  —  I. 


41 


prim-o,  adv.  (primus),  <it  Jirst, 
in  the  hcginning,  Jii'st,  Jirsfly. 

prim-um,  adv.,  Jirst,  in  the  first 
place,  fur  the  frst  time  ;  quam 
primum,  an  soon  as  possible. 

pri-mus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  superla- 
tive (prae,  prior,  primus), 
first,  foremoi^t  (see  perior). 

prin-ceps,  -cipis,  adj .  (primus ; 
cSpio),  first.  As  noun,  com. 
gen.,  chief  ruler,  emperor;  prin- 
cipes,  M.  pi.,  chiefs,  princes. 

princip-atus,  -us,  M.(princeps), 
the  chief  place,  supremacy,  do- 
minion ;  principatum  tSnere, 
to  he  at  the  head  of. 

prior,  prius,  adj.,  comp.  (prae, 
prior,  primus),  former,  previ- 
ous, jnior,  frst  (of  two)  (150. 

^)- 
pristinus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  former, 

early,  primltirc,  pristine. 
prius  .  .  .  quam,  conj.,  hefore  that, 

before,  sooner;  priusquam  non, 

not  until. 
prius,  comp.  adv.,  hefore,  sooner. 
privo,    -are,   -avi,   -atum   (pri- 

vus),  to  deprive  of  bereave. 
pro,  prep,  with   abl.,  hefore,  in 

front  of  for,  in  behalf  of;   ac- 
cording to,  as. 
pr6b-e,   adv.    (prSbus),  rightly, 

well,  properly,  fitly. 
pr6b-o,    -are,   -avi,   -atum,    ap- 

prove,  prove. 
pr6-bus,   -a,    -um,    adj.    (pro), 

good,  excellent,  upright. 
Pr6ca  or  Procas,  -ae,  m.,  Proca, 

a  king  of  Alba. 
pro-cedo,  -cedSre,  -cessi,  -ces- 

sum,  to  go  forward,  proceed. 
pro-cer-itas,  -atis,  f.,  height,  tall- 

ness. 
Procillus,  -1,  M.,  a  Roman  name. 
pro-clamo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

call  or  cry  out. 
prScul,  adv., /ar,  distant,  remote. 
pro-curro,  -currere  (-ciicurri). 


-curri,  -oursum,  to  run  forth, 

rush  forward ;  go  on,  advance. 
pro-d-eo,  -ire,  -ii  (-ivi),  -itum, 

irreg.   (pro;   eo),  to  go  forth; 

advance. 
pro-do,  -dSre,  -didi,  -ditum,  to 

place  forth ;  j>ablish,  betray;  mS- 

mSria  proditur,  it  is  handed 

down  by  memory. 
pro-duco,  -dvLcgre,  -duxi,  -duo- 

tum,  to  lead  forth  ;  protract. 
proelium,  -ii,  n.,  «  battle,  combat, 

contest. 
pr6fec-ti6,  -onis,  f.  (prSficis- 

cor),  a  going  away,  setting  out, 

departure. 
pr6-fect-6,  adv.  (pro  ;  factum), 

actually,  indeed,  truly. 
pr6fec-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (pr6- 

ficiscor),  having  set  out,  gone. 
pro-fero,   -ferre,  -tiili,    -latum, 

irreg.,  to    carry  or    bring   for- 
ward ;  to  reveal. 
pro-ficio,  -ficSre,  -feci,  -fectum, 

to    do    beforehand  ;     advance  ; 

effect. 
pr6-fic-iscor,    -ficisci,   -fectus 

sum,  dep.  inch,  (pro;  facio), 

to    malce    ivay   forward,    start; 

march,  travel. 
pro-fligo,   -are,   -avi,  -atum,  to 

strike  to  the  ground;  conquer. 
pr6-fugio,  -fiiggre,  -fugi,  no  p.  p., 

to  fee  forth,  escape. 
pro-gredior,    -gredi,     -gressus 

sum,  dep.   (pro ;  gr^dior),  to 

go  forth  ;  go  forivard,  proceed. 
pr6-hibeo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum  (pro  ; 

habeo),  to  hold  back,  hinder; 

prohibit. 
pro-icio  (pronounced  projicio), 

-icere,    -jeci,    -jectum    (pro; 

jacio),  to  tlirow  forward ;  throw 

down;  reject. 
pro-labor,  -labi,  -lapsus  sum, 

dep.,  to  slip  forward ,  fall  down. 
pro-lato,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  in- 

tens.,  to  lengthen;  extend. 


42 


FIRST   STEPS    IN    LATIK. 


pr6-ni6veo,  -movere,  -niovi, 
-motum,  to  move  forward.,  ad- 
vance., promote. 

prope,  adv.  and  prep,  with  ace. 
(prSpius,  pr6xime),  near, 
nigh;  nearby;  nearly;  about. 

pro-pensus,  -a,  -um,  inclined. 

prSp^ro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  (pr6- 
pgrus),  to  hasten. 

prdpinquo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
(prSpinquus),  to  hasten,  ac- 
celerate;  come  niijlt ;   approach. 

pr6p-inquus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (pro- 
pe), near,  neiglihoring ;  akin  ; 
similar.  As  noun,  m.,  a  relative, 
kinsman. 

pr6pior,  -ius  (gen.  -oris),  adj., 
coinp.  of  stem  contained  in 
pr6pe,  nearer ;  superlative, 
pr6ximus,  -a,  -um,  nearest, 
last  (150.1). 

pro-pono,  -ponSre,  -p6sui,  -p6- 
sltum.,  to  place  or  lay  before; 
set  forth  ;  determine  ;  mihi  pro- 
pSsitum  est  (313),  /  have  de- 
termined. 

prop-ter,  adv.  and  prep,  with 
ace.  (pr6pe),  near;  on  account 
of  because. 

proptgr-ea,  adv.,  on  this  account, 
therefore  :  proptSrea  quod, 
because. 

propul-so,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 
intens.  (propello),  to  ward 
off]  repulse ;  avert. 

pro-silio,  -silTre,  -silui,  no  p.  p. 
(pro ;  sSlio,  -Ire,  salui,  or  -ii, 
sultum),  to  leap  forth;  spring 
up,  spring  forth. 

prosper,  -gra,  -grum  (86.  2), 
fortunate. 

pro-spicio,  -spicSre,  -spexi, 
-spectum  (pro;  spScio),  to 
look  out;  to  provide  for  any- 
thing (witli  ace). 

pro-sum,  prod-esse,  pro-fui, 
(293.  3),  to  benefit,  profit. 

pro-tinus    (tguus),    adv.  (pro; 


tenus),  straightforward,  imme- 
diately. 

provincia,  -ae,  f.,  a  province; 
a  field  of  duty  of  the  consuls, 
usually  a  territory  out  of  Italy, 
acquired  by  the  Romans,  and 
brought  under  Roman  rule. 

pr6-v6co,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
call  forth,  challenge,  summon;  ex- 
asperate ;  pro-v6care  ad  p6- 
pttlum,  to  appeal  to  the  people. 

pr6xim-e,  adv.  (prSximus), 
nearest,  very  near,  next  (pr6p, 
pr6pius,  pr6xime). 

pr6xim-6,  adv.  (pr6ximus), 
(juite  recently,  very  lately. 

prdximus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  the 
nearest,  next ;  in  pidximo,  close 
by,  near  at  hand. 

prudens,  -entis  (contracted  from 
providens),  foreseeing;  dis- 
creet; prudent. 

Pt61Smaeus,  -i,  m.,  Ptolemy,  king 
of  Egypt. 

public-e,  adv.  (publicus),  pid)- 
licly ;  on  account  (ftJie  state. 

publicus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (p6pii- 
lus),  belonguifi  to  the  people  or 
state,  public,  c(nmnon. 

Publius  (Crassus),  -i,  m.,  a  Ro- 
man name. 

puel-la,  -ae,  f.  dim.  (puer),  a 
girl,  maiden. 

puell-ttlus, -1,  M.  dim.  (puellus). 
a  little  boy: 

puer,  -gri,  m.,  a  boy,  child,  (until 
17) ;  pL,  children. 

ptigio,  -onis,  M.,  a  dagger,  dirk, 
pjoniard. 

piigna,  -ae,  f.,  a  battle,  dis- 
pute. 

pugn-ax,  -acis,  adj.  (pugno), 
fond  of  fighting,  warlike,  com- 
bative ;  (piarrelsomc . 

pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (pug- 
na),  to  fi gilt,  engage. 

pulcher,  -chra,  -chrum,  adj., 
beautiful,  fair,  Itandsome. 


VOCABULAKY.  —  I. 


43 


punio,  -ire,   -Zvi  and  -ii,  -itum 

(poena),  to  pwdxh,;  aveiuje. 
piito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  think, 

consider,  reckon,  heliece. 
Pyrenaeus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  only 

with    montes,     the     Pyrenees 

Mountains. 

Q. 

Q.  or  Qu.,  an  abbreviation  for 
Quintus. 

quadrag-esimus,  -a,  -um,  adj. 
(quadraginta),  fortieth. 

quadr-a-ginta,  num.  adj.  indecl. 
(quatuor),  forty. 

quadr-in-genti,  -ae,  -a,  num. 
adj.  (quatuor;  centum), /our 
hundred. 

quaero  (old  form  quaeso),  quae- 
rSre,  quaesivi,  quaesitum,  to 
seek;  search;  strive  for  (185. 
2) ;  quaeritur,  the  question  is. 

quaes-tor,  -oris,  m.  (quaero),  a 
quaestor  (treasurer  or  quarter- 
master). 

qualis,  -e,  interrog.  and  rel. 
adj. :  1.  interrog.,  of  what  sort ; 
2.  rel.,  of  which  sort;  such  as; 
talis  .  .  .  qualis,  such  .  .  .  as. 

quam,  interrog.  and  rel.  adv., 
hoiv  ;  (in  comparisons)  as,  than ; 
(used  to  strengthen  superla- 
tives) quam  maximus,  as  great 
as  possible. 

quam-diu,  as  long  as. 

quam-ob-rem,  interrog.  and  rel. 
adv.,  for  which  or  lahat  reason, 
wherefore,  ivhy^ 

quam-quam,  conj.,  though,  al- 
though ;  however,  and  yet  (329). 

quam-vis,  adv.  and  conj.  (vis  fr. 
v61o),  however,  however  much, 
although  (322.  1). 

quantus,  -a,  -um,  interrog.  and 
rel.  adj. :  1.  interrog.,  haw  great  f 
2.  rel.,  as  great,  as,  such;  in  abl., 
quanto  (as  adv.),  hy  how  much, 


by  as  much  as;  quanto  magis, 
how  much  more. 

qua-propter,  a.dv.,  for  what,  why, 
wherefore  ? 

qua-re,  interrog.  and  rel.  adv. 
(quae  ;  res),  from  what  cause, 
ivherefore,  tvhy? 

quart-ana,  F.  (quartus),  the 
quartan  ague  (recurring  every 
fourth  day). 

quSsi,  adv.  (quam,  as;  si,  //), 
as  if.  Just  as,  as  it  tcere  (330). 

quater,  num.  adv.,  four  times. 

quattuor,  num.  adj.  indecl., 
four. 

quattuor  (quatuor),  -dScim, 
num.  adj.  (quattuor;  decem), 
fourteen. 

-que,  enclitic  conj.,  and,  also. 

quSror,  qugri,  questus  sum, 
dep.,  to  complain  of,  lament. 

qui,  quae,  quod,  interrog.,  rel., 
and  indef.  pron. :  1.  interrog., 
which,  what  ;  2.  rel.,  who,  ivhich, 
ivhat  (240  &  245);  3.  (after  si 
and  ne)  any;  idem  qui,  the 
same  as. 

quia,  conj.,  because  (332). 

qui-cumque,  quae-cumque, 
quod-cumque,  indef.  relative 
pron.  (240.  1),  whoever,  what- 
ever, whosoever,  lohatsoever. 

quid,  see  quis. 

qui-dam,  quae-dam,  quod- 
(subst.,  quid-)  dam,  indef. 
pron.,  a  certain  one,  somebody, 
something  (246)  ;  quidam  ho- 
mines, some  persons. 

quidem,  adv.,  indeed,  at  least; 
ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even  (the 
word  or  phrase  that  ne  .  .  . 
quidem  modifies  always  comes 
between  ne  and  quidem) . 

qui-libet,  quae-libet,  quod- 
(quid-)  libet,  indef.  pron.,  any 
one  you  please,  any  one  (246). 

quin,  conj.  (qui ;  ne),  who  .  .  . 
not,  that  not,  hut  that;  f ram  (after 


44 


FIllST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


verbs  of  liinderiiig)  ;  quin 
etiain,  moreocer,  nay  ecen. 

Quinctius,  -ii,  m.,  Qulntlitx,  a 
Koman  name. 

quin-dgcim,  num.  adj.  iiidecl. 
(quinque  ;  decern),  ffteen. 

quin-genti,  -ae,  -a,  num.  adj. 
(quinque  ;  centum),  /ire  hun- 
dred. 

quin-ginti,  see  quin-genti(cen-). 

qui-ni,  -ae,  -a,  num.  distributive 
adj.  (quinque),  //re  eacJi,  hyjire. 

quinqu-a-ginta,  num.  adj.  in- 
decl.  (quinque),  /('/>//. 

quinque,  num.  adj.  indecl., /?re. 

quinqu-ies,  adv.  (quinque), y/re 
times, 

quin-tus,  -a,  -um,  num.  adj. 
(quinque),  the  Jifth. 

Quintus,  -1,  M.,  see  C3.t\ilus. 

quippe,  adv.  and  conj.,  surely, 
certainly,  indeed  ;  far  indeed. 

quis,  quae,  quid  (quod),  inter- 
rog.  and  indef.  pron.  :  1.  inter- 
rog.,  icho,  v;hat,  ivhich ;  quid 
(used  adverbially),  ho7tj?  vhy;' 
icherefore  ?  (245  and  246)  ; 
2.  after  si  and  ne,  indef.,  si 
quis,  if  any  one  ;  ne  quis,  lest 
any  one,  that  no  one. 

quis-nam,  quae-nam,  quid-nam 
(quod-),  int<nTog.  pron.,  a-ho, 
pray?  vhidi,  pray'?  vhat, 
'pray  ? 

quis-piam,  quae-piam,  quod- 
piam,  and  (subst.)  quid-piam 
or  quip-piam,  indef.  pron., 
any  one,  any  (246). 

quis-quam,  quae-quam,  quic- 
quam  (quid-quam),  indef. 
pron.,  an]i,  any  tiling.  As  noun, 
any  one  (246). 

quis-que,  quae-que,  quod-que 
(subst.,  quic-que,  quid-que), 
indef.  pron.,  each  (246). 

quis-quis,  quae-quae,  quod- 
quod  or  quic-quid  or  quid- 
quid,   indef.  pron.,   ichatever. 


v'hatsoerer.     As  noun,  whoever, 

irhosoever;  every  one,  each  one. 
qui- VIS,       quae  VIS,       quodvis 

(subst.,  quidvis),  indef.  pron., 

anyone  or  what  you  please  (246). 
quo,  adv.  and  conj.,  interrog.  and 

rel.,  whither,  to  whatplace;  conj., 

ichey^efore,    why;    in   order  that 

(32i;  Obs.  2). 
quo-ad,   adv.,  hoio   long;    conj., 

as  long  as,  until. 
quod,  conj.,  that  (332);  because; 

qu:od  sT,  hut  if. 
quo-minus,    conj.    (quo,    neut. 

abl.  of  rel.  pron.,  qui;  minus, 

less),  that  thereby  the  less,   that 

not,  from  (with  part.)  (322). 
qu6-m6d6,  adv.,  in  what  manner. 
quon,  dam,  adv.,  formerly,  once  ; 

sometimes,  some  day,  erer. 
qu6n-iam,  adv.  (quom  —  quum 

=rcum;  jam),  seeing  that,  since 

(332). 
qu6que,  conj.,  also,  too  (placed 

after  the  word  it  affects). 
quorsum,  adv.  (quo ;  versus), 

whither ;  to  tvhat  purpose. 
quot,  indecl.  interrog.  and  rel. 

adj. ;  1.    interrog.,   how  many; 

2.  rel.,  as  many ;  quot  .  .  .  tot, 

as  many  .  .  .  so  many. 
quStannis  (quot;  annus),  every 

year. 
quotid-ianus,  -a,  -um  (see  cot- 

tldianus,  or  cotidianus),  every 

day,  daily. 
qu6t-i-die    (see   cottid-   or  c6- 

ted-),  adv.  (qu6t;  dies),  daily, 

every  day. 
qu6tus,  -a,  -um,  interrog.  adj., 

one  of  how  many,  what  in  num- 
ber;   qu6ta   li6ra,   what  time; 

wh(d  o'clock. 
quum  or  quom,  see  cum. 

R. 

radix,  -icis,  f.,  a  root ;  foot  (of 
a  hill). 


I     VOCABULAIIY.  —  I. 


45 


rSp-ax,  -acis,  adj.  (rSpio),  grmp- 
bui,  (jreedii,  rapacious. 

rap-idus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (rSpio), 
surift,  quick,  rapid;  violent,  hasty. 

rSp-ina,  -ae,  f.  (rSpio),  robbery ; 
plunder,  booty. 

rSpio,  -gre,  -ni,  -turn,  to  snatch 
away,  seize  ;  hurry  off. 

rS.-ti6,  -onis,  f.  (reor),  a  reck- 
oning,  account ;  estimate  ;  list. 

rStis,  -is,  F.,  a  float,  raft,  vessel 
(made  of  logs  fastened  to- 
gether) . 

ra-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (reor), 
having  supposed  ;  estahlished . 

re-bello,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
ivage  war  again ;  revolt;  reneiv 
hostilities. 

rgcens,  -entis,  adj.,/rc.s'A,  recent. 

rg-cipio,  -cipgre,  -cepi,  -cep- 
tum  (re ;  cSpio),  to  receive 
back;  receive;  recover;  rgci- 
pSre  se  d6inuin,  to  return 
home. 

rS-cordor,  -Sri,  -atus  sum,  dep. 
(re ;  cor),  to  ccdl  to  mind,  re- 
member, recollect  (315.  1). 

rg-creo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  make 
anew ;  to  renew ;  refresh,  recruit. 

rg-cttp-6ro  (-cipero),  -are,  -avi, 
-aturai  (re ;  capio),  to  regain, 
recover. 

rS-cuso,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (re  ; 
causa),  to  declme,  reject,  re- 
fuse. 

red-do,  -dSre,  -didi,  -ditum,  to 
give  back,  return ;  with  two 
aces.,  to  make,  cause  to  be. 

rSd-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum,  to  go  or 
come  back,  return. 

rgd-igo,  -igere,  -egi,  -actum 
(red;  ago),  to  drive  back; 
reduce ;  compel. 

r6d-im.o,  -imere,  -emi,  -emp- 
tum  (rSd  ;  gmo),  to  buy  back; 
buy  vp  (304)  ;  farm. 

rgd-intggro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 
to  renew  (again),  restore,  renew. 


rg-duco,  -ducSre,  -duxi,  -duc- 
tum,  to  lead  back,  bring  back. 

r6-f6ro,  -ferre,  -tiili,  -latum,  irr., 
to  carry  back ;  restore  ;  gratiam 
rgferre,  to  show  gratitude,  repay 
a  favor  ;  rgferre  pgdem,  to  re- 
treat;  rSferre  se,  to  return. 

re-fert,  -ferre,  -tulit,  impers. 
(315.  3  (L^))  (res ;  fgro),  it  con- 
cerns; is  of  importance. 

r6-f6veo,  -fSvere,  -fovi,  -fotum, 
to  ivarm  again  ;  restore,  revive. 

rg-fugio,  -fiigere,  -fugi,  no  p.  p., 
to  fee  back,  escape,  retreat. 

reg-ina,  -ae,  f.  (rex),  a  queen. 

r6g-io,  -onis,  f.  (r§go),  direction; 
boundary-line;  a  territory,  dis- 
trict, region. 

reg-ius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (rex),  kingly, 
royal,  regal. 

regno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (reg- 
num),  to  ride,  govern,  reign. 

reg-num,  -i,  n.  (rego),  guide ; 
dominion,  rule,  rojialty. 

rego,  rgggre,  rexi,  rectum,  to 
direct,  rule,  govern;  guide. 

rS-gr6dior,  -gredi,  -gressus  sum, 
dep.  (re;  gradior),  to  go  back, 
retreat. 

regiila,  -ae,  f.  (rggo),  rule. 

re-icio  (pronounced  re-jicio), 
-icere,  -jeci,  -jectum  (re;  ja- 
cio),  to  throiv  back ;  force  back; 
reject ;  postpone. 

rg-labor,  -labi,  -lapsus  sum, 
dep.,  to  sink  back  ;  fdl  back. 

re-linquo,  -linquSre,  -liqui,  -lic- 
tum,  to  leave  behind;  leave; 
appoint. 

reliqu-iae,  -arum,  f.  pi.  (rglin- 
quo),  the  remains,  relics. 

reliqu-us  -a,  -um,  adj.  (rSlin- 
quo),  remaining.  As  noun, 
reliquum,  -i,  n.,  the  rest,  re- 
mainder; reliquum  est  (313), 
it  remains,  follows. 

Remi,  -orum,  m.  pL,  the  Remi,  a 
tribe  iu  Gaul. 


46 


FiiiST  stp:ps  in  latin* 


rg-min-iscor,  -isci,  no  perf.,  dep. 
(re ;  root  man-),  to  recall 
to  mind,  recollect,  remember 
(315.  1). 

rSniitto,  -mittSre,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  send  hack,  remit;  dis- 
miss. 

rg-m6veo,  -mSvere,  -movi,  -mo- 
tum,  to  mace  hack,  remove. 

remus,  -i,  m.,  an  oar. 

R^mus,  -1,  M.,  Remus,  the  twin 
brother  of  Romiihis. 

rS-nuntio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
hring  hack  icord,  report,  an- 
nounce. 

rS-nuo,  -nugre,  -nui,  no  p.  p.,  to 
deny,  reject,  refuse. 

reor,  rgri,  rStus  sum,  dep.,  to 
believe,  think,  siijjpose. 

rSpent-e,  adv.  (rgpens),  sud- 
denly,  unexpectedly. 

rgpent-inus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (ri- 
pens), sudden,  unexpected. 

r6-p6rio,  rSpferlre,  rgppgri,  rg- 
pertum  (re ;  pSrio),  to  find 
out,  ascertain,  discover. 

r6-p6to,  -pgtgre,  -pgtivi,  -pSti- 
tumi,  to  recommence,  demand, 
exact. 

re-prghendo,  -prShendgre,  -prg- 
hendi,  -prShensum,  to  hold 
hack;  seize;  censure. 

rgpfldio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (r6- 
piidium,  a  separation),  to  cast 
off;  reject. 

rS-pugno,  -are,  -Svi,  -atum,  to 
jifjlit  against,  oppose,  resist. 

rg-quiro,  -quirgre,  -quisivi  or 
-quisii,  -quisitum  (rg ;  quae- 
re), to  seek  again;  rerpdre;  need. 

res,  rei,  f.,  a  thing,  circumstance, 
business ;  re,  in  reality,  in  fact ; 
res  f^m.iliaris,  private  prop- 
erty ;  res  militiris,  military 
business,  science  of  rear;  res 
gestae,  deeds,  exploits ;  res 
humanae,  human  affairs. 

re-scindo,     -scindSre,     -soldi, 


-scissum,  to  ctit  off;  break  doivn ; 

abolish. 
rg-servo,  -are,  -avi,   -atum,   to 

keep  hack ;  save,  reserve. 
rg-sisto,  -sistgre,  -stiti,  no  p.  p., 

to  stand  hack,  stay  behind  ;  resist 

(with  dat.). 
re-spicio,       -spicgre,      -spexi, 

-spectum  (re;  spgcio), /o  Zoo/i; 

hack ;  regard. 
re-spondeo,  -spondere,  -spon- 

di,  -sponsum,  to  answer,  reply, 

respond. 
respon-sum,  -i,  n.  (respondeo), 

an  answer,  reply,  response. 
res-publica,     rei-publicae,      f. 

(175,   2),    the    state,    common- 

wealth,  republic. 
re-spuo,  -spugre,  -spui,  no  p.  p., 

to  spit  back;  reject. 
re-stituo,  -ugre,  -ui,  -utum  (re; 

stStuo),  to  set  up  again,  restore. 
rete,  -is,  n.,  a  net,  snare, 
rg-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum 

(re;   tgneo),  to  keep  back;   re- 
strain; preserve. 
rg-trSho,  -trShgre,  -trSxi,  -trac- 

tum,    to    draw    back,    withhold, 

check ;  keep  or  drag  back. 
retro,  adv.  (rg),  backwards,  back ; 

formerly. 
retro-rsum,    adv.    (retro ;    ver- 

sum),  back,  backwards. 
re-US,  -1,  M.,  rea,  -ae,  f.  (res),  a 

party  to  an  action;   one  icho  is 

accused  or  arraigned  ;  a  defend- 
ant, prisoner. 
rg-vello,  -gre,  -velli,  -vulsus,  pull 

or  tear  aicay. 
rg-vertor,  -verti,  -versus  sum, 

dep.,  to  turn  back,  return. 
rex,  regis,  m.  (rggo),  a  ruler,  king. 
Rhea  Sylvia,  -ae,  f.,  daughter 

of    Numitor,    and    mother   of 

Romuhis  and  Eenms. 
rheda,    -ae,    f.,    a   four-ivheeled 

carriage;  a  carriage,  chariot. 
RhSnus,  -1,  M.,  the  Rhine. 


VOCABULARY.  —  1. 


47 


Rh6dS.rms,  -I,  m.,  the  Rhone,  a 

river  in  (ilaiil. 
RhSdus  (-OS),  -1,  F.,  Rhodes;  an 

island  near  the  coast  of  Asia 

]\Iinor. 
rideo,    ridere,    risi,    risum,    to 

lauf/h  ;  hnif/h  at. 
rigeo,  rigere,  no  perf .,  no  p.  p.,  to 

he  stif/' or  Jiiinib,  to  stiffen. 
ripa,    -ae,    f.,    the    hank    (of   a 

stream). 
rivus,  -1,  M.,  a  hrool;  stream. 
r6go,-are,-avi,-atuin,  to  ask,  ques- 
tion ;  pj-opose  (a  law)  (185.  2) . 
Roma,  -ae,  f.,  Rome. 
Rom-anus, -a, -um,  adj.  (Roma), 

Roman;  of  Rome.     As    noun, 

M.,  a  Roman. 
Rom-iilus,   -T,  m.   (Roma),  the 

founder  and  first  king  of  lionie 

(B.C.  758-717). 
r6sa,  -ae,  f.,  a  rose. 
ros-trum,  -i,  n.   (rodo),  a  hill, 

beak;  the  curved  end  of  a  ship's 

prow,  ship's  beak. 
Rufus,  -1,  M.,  Rufus,  a  Koman 

name. 
riido,  -Ire,  -ivl  -itum,  to  roar  (as 

a  lion)  ;  bray. 
rumor,  -oris,    m.,    common   talk, 

hearsay,  rumor. 
rupes,   -is,   f.   (rumpo),  a  cliff, 

steep  rock. 
rursus  (-sumi),  adv.  (contracted 

from  rgversus),  turned  back; 

back. ;  in  turn,  again. 
rus,  ruris,  n.  (in  pi.  found  only 

in  nom.  and  ace),  the  country ; 

lands,  Jields ;  farm,  estate  ;  ruri, 

in  the  country ;  rure,  from  the 

country  (270'.  1  and  2). 

S. 

sScer,  sacra,  sacrum,  adj.,  holy, 
sacred;  accursed.  As  noun, 
sScra,  -orum,  n.  pi.,  sacred 
rites,  sacrifice. 


sScer-dos,  -otis,  com.  gen.  (sS- 
^cer  ;  do),  a  priest ;  priestess. 

sacrific-ium,  -ii,  n.  (sacrifice), 
a  sacrifice. 

sacr-i-fico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
(s^cer;  fScio),  to  sacrifice; 
offer  in  sacrifice. 

saepe,  adv.,  often,  frequently; 
comp.  saepius ;  super,  sae- 
pissime. 

saepg-niimero,  adv.,  oftentimes, 
over  and  over  again. 

saevus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  raging, 
7nad  ;  fierce,  cruel,  severe. 

sSgitta,  -ae,  f.,  an  arrow. 

sSgitt-arius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (s&git- 
ta),  ofov  belonging  to  an  arrow. 
As  noun,  sSgittarius,  -ii,  m., 
an  archer,  bowman. 

saltus,  -tiis,  M.,  a  forest  pasture ; 
ivoodland  pasture. 

salus,  -utis,  F.  (salvus),  health, 
safety. 

saluto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (sSlus), 
to  greet,  salute. 

salve  see  salveo. 

salvus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  saved,  pre- 
served, sound,  ?rell,  unhurt. 

sancio,  sanclre,  sanxi,  sanc- 
tum, to  render  sacred ;  to  con- 
firm, ratify. 

san-e,  adv.  (sanus),  truly. 

sano,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (sanus), 
to  make  sound,  heal. 

Sant6ni,  -orum,  m.,  the  Santoni,  a 
people  of  Gaul. 

sapiens,  -entis,  part.  (sSpio), 
wise,  judicious. 

sSpien-ter,  adv.  (sapiens),  wisely, 
disci^eetly. 

sSpient-ia,  -ae,  f.  (sSpiens), 
wisdom,  prudence. 

sarcina,  -ae,  f.,  a  package,  bun- 
dle ;  pi.,  baggage,  packs. 

sStelles,  -itis,  com.  gen.,  an  at- 
tendant ;  accomplice ;  in  pL, 
life-guards,  an  escort. 

sStis,   adv.,  enough,  sufficiently; 


48 


FIRST   STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


s^tis  habere,  to  deem  it  suffi- 
cient. 

sStis-fScio,  -facSre,  -feci,  -fac- 
tum ;  in  pass.,  satis-fio,  -figri, 
-factus  sum,  to  satisfy  (193. 2). 

scglus,  -gris,  N.,  a  crime,  sin, 
enormity. 

sch61a, -ae,  F.,  a  school;  disserta- 
tion. 

scient-ia,  -ae,  f.  (sciens),  a  hiow- 
infi ;  knowledge,  science,  skill. 

sci-iicet,  adv.  (scio ;  licet),  evi- 
dently, certainly. 

scindo,  scindgre,  scidi,  scis- 
sum,  to  cut,  tear,  7'end,  split, 
cleave. 

scio,  scire,  scivi,  scitum,  to 
knoiv,  understand,  perceive. 

Scipio,  -onis,  m.,  Scipio,  the 
name  of  a  celebrated  family  in 
Rome,  the  most  famous  of 
which  were  tiie  two  conquer- 
ors of  the  Carthaginians,  Pid>- 
lius  Cornelius  Scipio  Africanus 
Major,  and  Puhlius  Cornelius 
Scipio  yl^lmilianus  Africanus 
Minor. 

scriba,  -ae,  m.  (scribo),  a  clerk, 
secretary,  scribe. 

scribo,  scribSre,  scripsi,  scrip- 
tum,  to  write,  compose;  scri- 
bgre  leges,  to  draw  up  laws. 

scrip-tor,  -oris,  m.  (scribo), 
ivriter. 

scutum,  -i,  N.,  a  shield ;  defence, 
protection. 

se,  see  sui  (230). 

se-cedo,  -ced6re,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  go  apart,  separate,  icitJi- 
draw ;  secede;  retire. 

se-cerno,  -cerngre,  -crevi,  -cre- 
tum,  to  put  apart  ;  to  separate  ; 
discern. 

seco,  -are,  -ui,  -tum,  to  cut. 

secret- 6,  adv.  (secretus),  apart, 
separately ;  in  secret. 

secre-tus,  -a,  -um,  part.  (s6cer- 
no),  sejmrate  ;  secret,  jyrivate.      | 


sec-tor,  -ari,  -atus,  dep.  intens. 
(sgquor),  to  follow  eagerly, 
hunt,  pursue. 

sgc-undus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (sg- 
quor), following ;  hence,  the 
second;  (as  not  opposing)yayor- 
ahle ;  sgcundo  flumine,  down 
stream, 

sed,  conj.,  hut,  yet  (205.  3). 

sedeo,  .sSdere,  sedi,  sessum,  to 
sit ;  be  encamped,  settle. 

sed-es,  -is,  f.  (sSdeo),  a  seat; 
abode ;  settlement. 

sed-i-tio,  -onis,  f.  (sed  ;  eo),  dis- 
sension, civil  discord,  sedition. 

sediti-osus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (sedi- 
tio),  seditious. 

Sggusiani  (-avi),  -orum,  m.,  the 
Segusiani,  a  people  west  of  the 
Rhone. 

sel-la,  -ae,  f.  (s6deo),  a  seat, 
chair,  stool. 

sgmel,  num.  adv.,  once,  a  single 
time,  once  for  all ;  non  sgmel, 
not  once  alone,  several  times; 
sgmel  atque  itgrum,  once  and 
again,  repeatedly. 

sementis,  -is,  f.  (semino,  to  sow), 
a  sowing. 

semper,  adv.,  ever,  alivays,  at  all 
times,  for  ever. 

sgn-atus,  -us,  m.  (sgnex),  a  coun- 
cil of  elders ;  the  senate  (gen. 
sing.,  sometimes  sgnati). 

sgnec-tus,  -tutis,  f.,  old  age. 

s6nex,  sgnis,  adj.  (nom.  and  ace. 
of  the  neuter  pi.  in  the  positive, 
and  of  the  neuter  sing,  in  the 
comp.,  are  wanting),  old,  aged 
(150.  3),  As  noun,  senex,  -is, 
com.  gen.,  an  aged  person,  an 
old  man,  an  old  looman  (from  40 
and  upwards)  ;  comp.  sgnex, 
senior,  maximus  natu. 

seni,  -ae,  -a,  num.  distributive 
adj.  (sex),  six  each,  six. 

sgnior,  -ius,  adj.  (comparative  of 
sgnex),  older,  elder. 


VOCABULAKY. 


I. 


49 


S6n6nes  (or  Senones),  -um,  m. 

pL,  a  people  of  Gaul. 

sentent-ia,  -ae,  f.  (sentio),  a 
thinking,  an  ojnnion. 

sentio,  -tire,  -si,  -sum,  to  dis- 
cern, perceive,  observe,  know. 

sepSira-tim,  adv.  (sepSro),  asun- 
der, apart,  separately. 

septem,  num.  adj.  indecl.,  seven. 

Septen-trio,  -onis,  m.,  also  pi., 
Septen-tri6nes,-uin  (septem; 
trio),  the  seven  plough  oxen, 
the  stars  of  the  Great  Bear ; 
hence,  the  North. 

sept-imus,  -a,  -um,  num.  ordinal 
adj.  (septem),  the  seventh. 

septua-ginta,  num.  adj.  (sep- 
tem), seventy. 

s6pul-tura,  -ae,  f.  (sgpglio),  a 
burying,  funeral  obsequies,  sep- 
ulture. 

SequSna,  -ae,  f.,  the  Sequdna,  i.e. 
the  Seine. 

SequSnus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  of  the 
Sequani  (a  tribe  of  Gaul) ; 
M.  pi.,  SequSni,  -orum,  the 
Sequani:  m.  sing.,  SequSnus, 
-1,  a  Sequanian. 

sgquor,  sgqui,  sScutus  sum, 
dep.,  to  follow,  pursue  (283). 

seri-6,  adv.  (serius,  earnest),  in 
earnest,  seriously. 

sermo,  -onis,  m.,  talk,  speech. 

ser-6,  adv.  (serus),  late,  too  late. 

serp-ens,  -entis,  m.  (serpo),  a 
snake,  serpent. 

serv-ilis,  -e,  adj.  (servus),  slav- 
ish, servile. 

serv-itus,  -utis,  f.  (servus),  slav- 
ery, servitude. 

servo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  save, 
preserve ;  keep. 

servus,  -i,  m.,  a  slave,  servant. 

sese,  reduplicated  form  of  se, 
ace.  of  sui. 

ses-tertius,  -a,  -um  (semis-ter- 
tius),  two  and  a  half;  (subst.) 
sestertius,  -ii,  m.,  a  sesterce  = 


two  and  a  half  asses  =  about 
four  cents  ;  sestertium,  -ii,  n. 
(gen.  pi.  used  as  a  subst.),  one 
thousand  sesterces  (about  <i40)  ; 
dgcies  sestertium,  1,000,000 
sesterces  (|40,000). 

seu,  see  sive. 

sex,  num.  adj.  indecl.,  six. 

sex-a-ginta,  num.  adj.  indecl. 
(sex),  sixty. 

sex-centi,  -ae,  -a,  num.  adj. 
(sex ;  centum),  six  hundred. 

sex-dgcim  (sed^cim),  num.  adj. 
indecl.,  sixteen. 

sex-tus,  -a,  -um,  num.  ordinal 
adj.  (sex),  the  sixth. 

SI,  conj.,  if,  whether;  quod  si, 
but  if;  si  quis,  if  any  one  ;  si 
quid,  if  anything  (206.  3) . 

SIC,  adv.,  in  this  manner,  so,  thus. 

siccus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  dry,  thirsty  ; 
in  sicco,  on  dry  land. 

sicut  (and  sic-ut),  adv.,  so  as, 
just  as,  as  ;  as  if 

signum,  -i,  n.,  a  mark,  sign;  (mil- 
itary) standard;  signal. 

silva,  -ae,  f.,  a  wood,  forest. 

similis,  -e,  adj.,  like,  resembling, 
similar  (149.  2). 

simul,  adv.  (similis),  at  the  same 
time;  simul  atque  or  ac,  as 
soon  as. 

simiilo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (simi- 
lis), to  pretend  (a  thing  is  what 
it  is  not ;  see  dissimiilo),  to 
feign,  counterfeit,  simulate. 

sin,  conj.  (si;  ne),  but  if,  if  on 
the  contrary  (326). 

sine,  prep,  with  abl.,  without. 

singiili,  -ae,  -a,  num.  distributive 
adj.,  one  to  each,  single. 

sinister,  -tra,  -trum,  adj.,  on  the 
left  hand  or  side ;  aivhvard ; 
unlucky. 

sinistra,  -ae,  f.  (sinister),  the 
left  hand. 

sino,  singre,  sivi,  situm,  to  let, 
suffer,  allow,  permit. 


50 


FlilST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


si-quis  or  si-qui,  siqua,  siquid 

(subst.)  or  siquod,  indef .  proii., 
if  any  one  ;  [f  anyildnij  (246). 

sisto,  sistgre,  stiti,  statum,  to 
set,  j)lace,  stand. 

sl-ve  (seu),  coiij.,  or  if,  vliether,  or. 

sobrius,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  not  drunk, 
sober ;  sensible,  moderate. 

s6cer,  -gri,  m.,  a  father-in-law. 

sol,  solis.  M.,  tlie  sun. 

soleo,  s61ere,  sSlitus  sum,  senii- 
dep.  (283),  to  be  ivonf. 

sol-itudo,  -iiiis,  f.  (solus),  lone- 
liness, solitude ;  a  desert. 

solus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (209),  alone, 
onlji,  single,  Unuhj. 

solvo,  solvere,  solvi,  s61utum, 
to  loose,  ludtind ;  cast  o//"(froin 
shore);  pay,  break  np. 

s6n-itus,  -tus,  m.  (s6no),  a  noise, 
sound,  din. 

sSror,  -oris,  ¥.,  a  sister. 

s6r6r-ius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (s6ror), 
of  or  belonf/inf/  to  a  sister. 

sors,  sortis,  f.,  a  lot,  luck,  fate. 

spStium,  -ii,  X.,  room,  space ;  in- 
terval, period. 

spgoi-es,  -ei,  f.  (gen.  and  dat. 
1)1.  not  found),  (sp6cio), «  slwic, 
aj)p(<irance,  form  ;  rieio. 

specto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  intens. 
(spgcio,  to  see),  to  look  at,  ob- 
serve. 

spSciilor,  -ari,  -atus  sum  (sp6- 
cio),  dep.,  to  spy  out,  ivatch,  ex- 
plore. 

spero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (spes), 
to  hope,  expect,  trust. 

spes,  spei,  F.  (spero),  hope. 

splr-itus,  -us,  M.  (spiro),  a 
breath  :  the  breath  of  life,  life  ; 
])1.,  spirit,  airs. 

splend-or,  -oris,  m.  (splendeo, 
to  shine),  brightness,  splendor ; 
honor,  dignity. 

sp61io,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (sp6- 
lium),  to  strip  ;  rob,  plunder. 

spdlium,  -iij  N.,  booty,  prey, 


spon-sus,   -I,    M.  (spondeo),  a 

betrothed,  bridegroom. 
sponte,  abl. ;  gen.,  spontis,  the 

only  cases  found,  (spoudeo), 

of  free  will,  of  one's  own  accord. 
sta-tim,  adv.  {sto),  forthwith,  im- 
mediately, at  once. 
statu o,    stktugre,    stStui,    stS- 

tiitum,  to  put,  jilace;  station. 
sta-tura,  -ae,  f.  (sto),  a  standing 

upright  ;  height,  size,  statue. 
stel-la,   -ae,    f.    (sterno),    (the 

strew er  of  light),  a  star. 
stercus,  -6ris,  n.,  dung ;  filth. 
stipendi-arius,  -a,-um,  adj.  (sti- 

pendium),  tributary,  liable   to 

contribution. 
stipendium,  -ii,  n.,  a  tax,  contri- 
bution ;  pay  ;  military  service. 
sto,    stare,     stSti,    stStum,    to 

stand;   to    cost    (with    abl.   of 

price,  303). 
strenu-e,  adv.  (strenuus),  brisk- 
ly, vigorously. 
strgp-itus,    -us,    isi.  (strgpo,    to 

make  a  noise),  a  noise. 
stringo,      stringgre,       strinxi, 

striatum,  to  bind  tight;  grasp. 
stiideo,  -ere,  -ui,  no  p.  p.,  to  be 

eager  about ;  study. 
stiid-ium,  -ii,  ^s-.  (stiideo),  zeal, 

devotion. 
suadeo,   suadere,    suasi,    sua- 

sum,  to  advise,  exhort,  urge. 
sub,   prep,    with    ace.    and    abl. 

(200. 3),  under,  beneath,  during; 

sub  monte,  at  the  foot  of  the 

mountain. 
sub-duco,  -ducgre,  -duxi,  -duc- 

tum,  to  draw  up  (especially  on 

shore),  withdraw. 
siib-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum,  irr.,  to  go 

under;  enter;  approach ; sustain. 
sub-igo,    -iggre,    -egi,    -actum 

(sub ;    Sgo),    to   bring   under ; 

subdue;  impel;  force. 
siibit-6,    adv.     (siibitus),    sud^ 

denly. 


VOCABULARY.  —  T. 


51 


siibi-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (siibeo), 

sudden,  unexpected. 

sub-icio  (pronounced  sub-jlcio), 
-icgre,  -jeci,  -jectum  (sub ;  jS- 
cio),  to  throw  under,  place  under, 
subject. 

sub-iSvo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
lighten  up,  raise  up,  assist. 

sub-61es,  -is,  f.  (sub;  61esco) 
(a  thing  growing  up  from  be- 
neath) ;  a  sprout;  posterity,  race. 

sub-sgquor,  -s6qui,  -sgctus  sum, 
dep.,  to  follow  close  after  ;  fol- 
low. 

sub-sid-iuin,-ii,N.  (sub;  sgdeo), 
a  hody  sitting  in  reserve,  aux- 
iliary forces ;  assistance,  aid ; 
subsidio  mittgre,  to  send  as 
support. 

sub-sisto,  -sistSre,  -stiti,  no  p.p., 
to  stop  behind,  stand  still,  stop). 

sub-sum,  -esse,  no  perf.,  to  be 
under;  to  be  present. 

sub-ter,  prep,  with  ace.  and  abl. 
(sub),  below,  beneath,  under- 
neath, under ;  close  by. 

sub-vSho,  -vghere,  -vexi,  -vec- 
tum,  to  convey  up  (up  stream). 

sub-vSnio,  -vSnire,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  to  come  imder,  come  to 
one^s  assistance ;  succor. 

suc-cedo,  -cedSre,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum  (sub,  under,  close  iqwn ; 
cedo),  to  follow  close  uj)on ; 
advance,  succeed. 

suc-censeo,  -censere,  -censui, 
-censum,  to  be  angry  at. 

suc-curro,  -currSre,  -curri,  -cur- 
sum  (sub ;  curro),  to  run 
under;  help,  aid,  succor. 

Suevi  (or  Suebi),  -orum.,  m.  pL, 
a  powerful  Germanic  people  in 
northern  Germany;  Svmbians. 

suf-figo,  -figSre,  -fixi,  -fixum 
(siib;  figo),  to  fasten  upon, 
affix. 

sui,  sibi,  se  or  sese,  reflexive 
personal  pron.  (for  all  genders 


and  numbers),  of  himself,  her- 
self, itself,  themselves  (230). 

Sulia,  -ae,  m.,  Lucius  Cornelius 
Sulla  Felix,  the  celebrated  Ro- 
man Dictator,  B.C.  lr58-78. 

sum,  esse,  fui,  fttturus,  irreg.,  to 
be  ;  mihi  est,  etc.,  /  have,  etc. 

summa,  -ae,  r.  (f.  of  summus, 
sc.  res),  the  main  thing;  the 
top  ;  the  amount,  sum,  whole. 

summus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (super- 
lative of  siipgrus),  chief  top  of 

sumo,  sumSre,  sumpsi,  sump- 
tum  (siib  ;  gmo),  to  take  away, 
assume;  supplicium  {inflict). 

siiper,  adv.,  and  prep,  with  ace. 
and  abl.  (200.  3),  above ;  more- 
over, besides  ;  upon. 

siiperbe,  Sidv.,  proudly,  haughtily  ; 
comp.,  siiperbius ;  super.,  sii- 
perbissime. 

sup6r-ior,  -ius,  adj .  (comparative 
of  siipgrus;  150.  2),  higher; 
superior. 

siipiro, -are, -avi,  -atum  (siiper), 
to  ovei-top ;  hence,  to  overcome, 
conquer. 

siiper-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  no  p.p., 
to  be  left  over,  exist  still ;  survive  ; 
be  in  abundance. 

siipgr-us,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (siiper), 
bei7ig  above,  upper,  on  high  (150. 

2). 
siiper-venio,-vgnire,-veni,-ven- 

tum.,  to  come  upon;    come  up; 

follow. 
sup-pgto,  -petgre,  -pgtivi,  -pgti- 

tum  (siib ;  peto),  to  be  at  hand, 

be  in  store,  be  sufficient. 
sup-plex,  -icis,  adj.  (sub,  under; 

plico,  kneel),  kneeling,  and  so 

entreating,  suppliant.    As  noun, 

com.  gen.,  a  suppliant. 
supplic-iter,    adv.     (supplex), 

h umbly,  suppliantly . 
supplic-ium,  -ii.   (supplico),  a 

kneeling;  hence  a  supplication ; 

punishment. 


52 


FIRST   STEPS   IX   LATIN. 


sup-porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum. 
(sttb ;  porto),  to  bring  up,  carry, 
convey. 

supra,  adv.,  and  prep,  with  ace, 
1.  adv.,  on  the  top,  above;  (of 
time),  before,  formerly ;  2.  prep., 
Jjeyond,  besides;  over,  above. 

s^premus,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (superla- 
tive of  siipgrus ;  150.  2),  the 
highest,  greatest,  last. 

sur-go,  surgSre,  siirrexi,  sur- 
rectum  (sub ;  r€go),  to  raise, 
lift. 

sus-cipio,  -cipSre,  -cepi,  -cep- 
tum  (sub ;  cSpio),  to  take  up, 
undertake  ;  inimicitias  susci- 
pSre,  to  incur  enmities. 

suspic-io,  -onis,  f.  (suspicor), 
mistrust,  distrust,  suspirio7i. 

sus-tmeo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -ten- 
turn  (sub  ;  tgneo),  to  hold  tip 
under,  support,  sustain. 

sustttli,  \h'y\.  ind.  of  tollo. 

suus,  -a,  -um,  poss.  proii.  (sui), 
his,   her,    their,    their  oicn,    oicn 


(353). 


T. 


T.,  an  abbreviation  for  Titus, 
tabern-aciilum,  -i,  n.  (tSberna), 

a  tent. 

t^biila,  -ae,  f.,  a  hoard,  plank; 
list  (of  proscribed  persons)  ;  a 
will ;  writing  tablet. 

tSceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  to  be  silent. 

taedet,  taedere,  taeduit,  or  tae- 
sum  est,  impers.  (314.  2),  it 
disgusts,  offends,  wearies  (one)  ; 
me,  etc.  —  /  (thou,  he,  etc.)  am 
disgusted. 

taientum,  -i,  n.,  a  talent ;  a  Greek 
weight,  equal  to  about  one-half 
a  hundred  weight ;  a  sum  of 
money,  equal  to  about  if  1080. 

talis,  -e,  adj.,  such,  of  that  kind 
(the  relative  adj.  correspond- 
ing to  talis  is  qualis). 


tam,  adv.,  so,  so  very  ;  tarn  .  .  . 
quam,  as  .   .   .  as. 

tamen,  conj.,  nevertheless,  yet,  still. 

tSm-etsi,  conj .  (tS.men ;  etsi), 
although,  though  (332,  d). 

tam-quam  (tan-),  adv.  (of  com- 
parison), as  much  as,  so  as,  like 
as,  just  as;  as  if,  fust  as  though. 

tan-dem,  adv.  (tam-dem),  at 
length,  at  last,  fnally ;  in  inter- 
rogative clauses,  p/'o//,  pray 
nolo,  note,  then. 

tango,  tanggre,  tgtigi,  tactum, 
to  touch,  affect. 

tanto,  see  tantus. 

tant6p6re,  see  tantus. 

tant-um,  adv.  (tantus),  .so  much, 
so  greatly,  to  such  a  degree ; 
only,  alone,  merely;  tantum 
non,  almost,  all  but;  tantum 
quod,  only,  just  then,  but  just. 

tan-tus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (tam),  so 
great;  tantSpSre  (tanto  6p6- 
re),  as  adv.,  so  much,  so  greatly  ; 
tanto  (abl.  of  degree  of  differ- 
ence), by  so  much,  so  much  the. 

taurus,  -1,  M.,  a  Indl. 

tec-tum,  -1,  N.  (tggo),  (a  thing 
that  covers),  a  roof ;  a  house, 
dicelling. 

te-oum,  see  tu. 

tggo,  tgggre,  texi,  tectum,  to 
cover,  conceal ;  protect,  guard. 

tggi-mentum,  -i,  n.  (tggo),  cover- 
ing, helmet. 

telum,  -1,  N.,  a  dart,  spear,  javelin 
(offensive  weapon). 

tgmgr-arius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (tg- 
mSro),  rash,  indiscreet. 

t6m6r-itas,  -atis,  f.  (tgmSro-), 
rashness,  temerity. 

tempgrant-ia,  -ae,  f.  (tempg- 
rans),  self-control,  moderation, 
discreetness,  temperance. 

tempgro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  con- 
trol, control  one's  self  (with 
quin),  manage;  restrain. 

tempes-tas,  -atis,  f.  (st.  of  tern- 


VOCABULARY. 


53 


pus,  6  weakened  to  e),  a  time, 
season,  period  ;  storm,  tempest. 

templum,  -I,  n.,  a  sanctuary, 
tejnple,  shrine. 

tempus,  -6ris,  n.  (temno,  cut), 
time ;  ad  tempus,  at  a  Jitting 
time ;  ex  tempSre,  off-hand, 
extempore;  id  tempSris,  at  that 
time  (236) ;  in  pL,  temp6ra,  the 
times,  circumstances. 

tgn-ax,  -acis,  adj.  (tgneo), 
liolding  fast,  tenacious. 

tSnebrae,  -arum,  f.  pi.,  darkness. 

tSneo,  -ere,  -ui,  -tum,  to  hold, 
possess. 

tgner,  -era,  -grum,  adj.,  soft,  del- 
icate, tender. 

ten-to  (or  tempto),  -are,  -avi, 
-atum,  intens.  (tendo),  to 
handle ;  attack ;  attempt,  try. 

tSnus,  prep,  with  abl.  (follows 
its  word),  as  far  as. 

tSr,  adv.  num.  (tres),  thj^ee  times, 
thrice. 

tergum,  -i,  n.,  the  hack;  terga 
dare,  to  fee. 

ter-ni,  -ae,  -a,  num.  distributive 
adj.,  three  each,  by  threes. 

tero,  tgrgre,  trivi,  tritum,  to 
rub,  grind,  icear  away. 

terra,  -ae,  r.,  the  earth,  land. 

terr-enus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (terra), 
of  earth,  earthen. 

terreo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum,  to  frighten, 
alarm. 

terr-or,  -oris,  m.  (terreo),  dread, 
alarm,  terror. 

ter-tius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (t§r),  the 
third. 

testa-mentum,  -i,  n.  (tester,  to 
bear  witness),  what  is  acknowl- 
edged before  witnesses,  so  a 
ivill,  testament. 

testis,  -is,  com.  gen.,  a  witness. 

Teutdnes,  -um  (or  TeutSni, 
-orum,  M.  pi.),  a  people  of 
Germany. 

Thessalia]  -ae,  f.,  Thessaly, 


Tibgris,  -is,    m.    (ace.   Tibgrim, 

abl.  TiberT),  the  Tiber. 
tigil-lum,  -1,  N.  dim.  (tignum),  a 

little  beam. 
Tigurinus  (pagus),  a  district  in 

Helvetia. 
timeo,  -ere,  -ui,  no  p.p.,  to  fear ; 

be  afraid. 
tim-idus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (timeo), 

fearful,  faint-hearted,  timid. 
tim-or,  -oris,  m.    (timeo),  fear, 

anxiety. 
titiilus,  -1,  M.,  an  inscription,  title, 

motto,  epitaph. 
Titus,  M.,  Titus,  a  proper  name. 
Titus  Labienus,  -i,  m.,  legate  of 

Csesar. 
tblgro,  -are,  -avi  -atum,  to  bear, 

endure;  nourish. 
toUo,    tollSre,    sustiili,    subla- 

tum,   to   lift  up  ;    carry  (perf . 

and  p.p.  borrowed  from  sus- 

tollo). 
tormentum,    -i,    n.    (torqueo, 

twist),  en^me  for  hurling  stones  ; 

instrument  for  torture,  torture. 
totus,  -a,  -um,  adj.   (gen.   sing., 

totius),  the  lohole;  all  (209). 
trabs,  trabis,  f.,  a  beam  ;  a  timber. 
tra-do,     -dgre,      -didi,     -ditum 

(trans ;  do),  to   give   over,  de- 
liver,   hand   down;    surrender; 

traditur,  it  is  said ;  traditum 

est,  the  tradition  is. 
tra-duco,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -duc- 

tum.    (trans ;    duco),    to    lead 

across,  transport  over,  transfer. 
trSho,  trahSre,  trSxi,  tractum, 

to  draw,  drag,  drag  along ;  bel- 

lum  trkhSre,  to  prolong  the  tear. 
tra-ioio   (pronounced  tra-jicio), 

-jicere,  -jeci,  -jeotum  (trans ; 

jS.cio),  to  throw  across;    trans- 

poi't ;  pierce,  stab. 
trames,  -itis,  m.  (trans),  a  path. 
trans,  prep,  with  ace,  acj'oss,  over, 

beyond,  on  the  other  side  of 
trans-duco,  see  traduco. 


54 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


trans-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum,  ineg.,  to 

cross  over  ;  cross. 
trans-figo,  -figure,  -fixi,  -fixum, 

to  thrust  or  pierce  through;    to 

transjix. 
trans-grgdior,    -gredi,   -gressus 

sum,  dep.  (trans;  gradior),  to 

step  across. 
tran-silio  or  trans-silio,  -silire, 

-silivi,  -silui,  no  p.p.  (trans ; 

sSlio),  to  leap  or  Jump  across  ; 

leap  or  spring  over. 
trans-mitto,     -mittere,     -misi, 

-missum,  to  send  across,  throw 

across  ;  cj'oss  over. 
trans-no   (or  trano),  -are,  -avi, 

-atum,  to  siriiii  across  or  over. 
trans-porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

carry   or   conveij   across    (with 

two  ace.)  ;  transport. 
trg-centi,  -ae,  -a,  num.  adj.  (tres; 

centum),  three  hundred. 
trg-dScim,     iiuin.     adj.     indecl. 

(tres;  dgcem),  thirteen. 
tres,  tria,  iiuiii.  adj.,  three  (213). 
Treviri,  -orum,  m.  pi.,  a  people 

of  Gaul. 
trib-unus, -1,  m.  (tres,  three  ;  tri- 

bus,  a  tribe),  a  tribune. 
tri-duum,  -ui,  x.    (tres ;    dies), 

the   space  of  three    days,    tlirec 

days. 
tri-ggmini,  -orum,  m.  pi.  (tres ; 

ggno  —-  gigno),  three  born  at  a 

birth,  three  brothers. 
tri-ginta,  num.  indecl.  adj.,  thirty. 
tri-ni,  -ae,  -a,  num.  distributive 

adj.  (tres),  three  each,  three. 
tr!-plex,  -plicis,  adj.  (tres ;  pli- 

co),  threefold;  —  icies,  in  three 

lines,  or  divisions. 
tristis,   -e,    adj.,   sad,    sorrowful, 

mournful. 
triumpho,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  (tri- 

umphus),  to  triumph;  rejoice  at. 
trti-cido,  -are,  -tvi,  -atum  (trux, 

savage  ;  caedo),  to  slaughter. 
tu,  pers.  pron.,  thou  (229.  2). 


txiba,  -ae,  f.,  a  trumpet. 

tiili,  see  f6ro. 

Tiilingi,  -orum,  m.  i>\.,  Tulingi,  a 
German  tribe  in  Gaul. 

Tullia,  -ae,  r.,  Tullia,  a  Roman 
name. 

Tullius,  -ii,  i^r.,  Tullius,  a  Roman 
name. 

Tullus  Hostilius,  -1,  M.,  third 
king  of  Rome,  B.C.  672-640. 

turn,  adv.,  then,  at  that  time;  cum 
(quum)  .  .  .  tum,  both  .  .  . 
and  ;  not  only  .  .  .  but  also. 

tiimultus,  -tus,  M.  (tflmeo),  a 
sivelling ;  uprising;  tumult,  in- 
surrection. 

tiim-iilus,  -i,  m.  (tiimeo,  stvell), 
a  mound,  hillock,  hill,  tomb. 

tunc,  adv.,  then,  at  that  time;  im- 
mediately. 

turba,  -ae,  f.,  a  crowd;  a  dis- 
turbance. 

turma,  -ae,  v.,  a  troop,  squadron 
(of  horse,  consisting  of  thirty 
men). 

turpis,  -e,  adj.,  ugly;  foul,  filthy. 

turris,  -is,  f.,  a  tower ;  castle. 

tuus,  -a,  -um,  pos.  adj.  pron.,  your, 
youi's. 


U. 


uber,-gris,  x,,  a  teat,  udder,  breast. 

uber,  -6ris,  adj.,  rich,  fruitful,  fer- 
tile. 

iibi,  adv.,  where,  when;  ub!  pri- 
mum,  as  soon  as. 

Ubii,  -orum,  m.  pi.,  the  Ubii  (a 
German  people  on  the  right 
bank  of  the  Rhine). 

iibi-que,  adv.,  wherever;  every- 
where. 

ulciscor,  ulcisci,  ultus  sum, 
dep.,  to  punish  (an  injury  or 
the  doer),  avenge  (an  injury). 

ulter-ior,  -ius,  adj.,  gen.  oris 
(comparative  of  ultra)  (150. 
1),  farther,  ulterior. 


rOCABULARY. 


55 


ultimus,  -a,  -urn,  adj.  (super!,  of 
ultra),  the  farthest,  most  distant ; 
last. 

ultra,  adv.,  and  prep,  with  ace, 
beyond;  on  the  other  side  of; 
ultra  f idem,  beyond  belief. 

ultro,  adv.,  beyond ;  besides,  more- 
over ;  voluntarily. 

ul-tus,  -a,  -um,  part,  (ulciscor), 
having  avenyed,  punished. 

umbra,  -ae,  f.,  a  shade,  shadoiv ; 
an  image. 

tlmSrus  (humerus),  -i,  m.,  the 
shoidder. 

una,  adv.  (unus),  together,  at  the 
same  time. 

unde,  adv.,  from  tchich  jAace, 
whence. 

und-i-que,  adv.  indef .  (unde ; 
que), /row  all  sides. 

un-i-versus,  -a,  -um,  adj .  (unus  ; 
versus),  all  together,  all  (in  a 
mass),  universal. 

un-quam  (um-quam),  adv.,  ever. 

unus,  -a,  -um,  num.  adj.  (gen. 
sing.,  unius ;  dat.,  uni),  one, 
alone,  sole,  single  (213). 

unus-quisque,  unaquaeque, 
unumquodque,  indef.  adj. 
pron.,  each,  every  (246). 

urbs,  urbis,  f.,  a  city,  esp.  Rome. 

usquam,  adv.,  anyivhere. 

usque,adv.,a//  the  vmy,aU  thetvhile, 
until;  usque  ab,  all  the  way 
from;  usque  ad,  even  to,  up  to. 

usu-rpo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (usus  ; 
rSpio),  to  use,  employ. 

usus,  -us,  M.  (utor),  use,  advan- 
tage; experience. 

u-sus,  -a,-um,part.  (utor),  having 
used. 

ut  or  iiti,  adv.  and  conj. ;  inter- 
rog.,  hoiv ;  rel.,  as,  so,  when, 
since;  that,  so  that,  in  order  that, 
that  not  (with  words  of  fearing) 
(321  ft'.). 

ut-cumque  (-cunque),  adv.,  in 
what  way  soever,  tvhenever. 


uter,  utris,  m.,  a  bag ;  skin. 
uter,utra,utrum,  adj.jjron.  (gen. 

sing.,   utrius ;    dat.,   utri),  in- 

terrog.,  ivhich  of  the  two;   rel., 

which  (209). 
iiter-que,    utrSque,    utrumque, 

adj.  pron.,  each  (of  two),  both  ; 

ex    utraque    parte,   on    eilher 

side. 
ttti,  see  ut. 
ut-ilis,   -e,    adj.    (utor),    useful; 

advantageous  ;  suitable. 
util-itas,  -atis,  f.    (utilis),   use, 

utility. 
■ati-nam,    adv.,  oh    that !    I  tvish 

that,  ivould  that!  (278  ft'.). 
utor,  uti,  usus  sum,  dep.,  to  use 

(280). 
utrim-que       (utrinque),       adv. 

(uter;  que),  on  both  sides,  from 

both  sides. 
•Strum,  adv.,  whether ;  see  ttter. 
uxor,  -oris,   f.,   a  wife;  ducgre 

uxorem,  to  marry. 


vaco,   -are,   -avi,   -atum,    to    be 

empty  or  vacant;  be  free  from; 
(of  lands)  lie  unoccupied. 

vad-um  -i,  n.  (v^do,  to  go),  a 
shoal,  ford  (that  through  which 
one  can  go). 

vagio,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  no  p.p.,  to 
cry;  bray. 

vagT-tus,  -us,  M.  (vagio),  a  cry- 
ing ;  braying. 

vagor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.  (va- 
gus, to  wander  about)  (279.  2). 

valeo,  -ere,  -ui,  no  p.p.,  to  be 
strong ;  to  be  ivell,  healthy;  to  be 
able  ;  vale,  farewell,  adieu. 

Vaigrius,  -IT,  M.,  Valerius  (esp., 
Gains  Val.  Procillus),  a  Roman 
name. 

vSle-tudo,  -inis,  f.  (valeo), 
health;  also  ill-health. 

vallum,  -1,  N.,  rampart  (earthen 


56 


FIRST    STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


wall  set  with  j)alisades),  wall, 

fortijicat'ion. 
vasto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (vastus), 

to  lay  icasle,  ravage. 
vastus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  waste;  huge, 

vast. 
vaticina-tio,  -onis,    f.    (vatici- 

nor),     a    foretelling,  prophecy, 

prediction. 
vectlgal,  -alls,  n.,  a  toll,  tax;  pi., 

revenues  (of  state). 
vSg-etus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (vggeo,  to 

arouse^,  vigorous,  active. 
vShgmens,    -entis,    adj.,    eager, 

violent,  vehement. 
vghgmen-ter,  adv.  (vShSmens), 

eagerly;    forcibly,     very,     very 

inuch. 
v6ho,  vghgre,  vexi,  vectum,  to 

hear,  carry,   convey;    in  pass., 

vShi,  to  he  carried,  go,  ride,  sail. 
vel,  conj.,  or;  vel  .  .  .^e\,  either 

...or;  even,  indeed,  surely ;  the 

very  (with  superlatives). 
vel-6x,  -ocis,  adj.  (v61o,  to  fly), 

swift,  fleet,  rapid. 
vgl-ut    (vgl-iitT),   adv.,  just   as; 

just  as  if,  as  if. 
venat-icus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (vena- 

tus,  hunting),  for  hunting. 
ven-do,    -dSre,    -didi,     -ditum 

(venum,  a  sale :    do),  to  sell 

(304). 
vSn6ra-tio,  -onis,  f.  (vgngror,  to 

reverence),  reverence,  veneration. 
vgnia,  -ae,  f.,  favor  ;  forgiveness. 
v6nio,  vgnire,  veni,  ventum,  to 

come,  approach,  draw  near. 
venor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.,  to 

hunt,  chase,  pursue. 
ver,  veris,  n.,  spring. 
verbum,  -i,  n.,  a  word;  verba 

fScSre,    to    speak,    discourse ; 

verb!  causa,  for  example. 
vSreor,  -eri,  -itus  sum,  dep.,  to 

fear;  he  afraid  of  {203)  ;  v<lri- 

tus,  p.p.,  pres.  in  senae,  fearing. 
Vergilius,  -ii,  m.,  Puhlius  Verg'il- 


ius  Maro,  the  celebrated  Roman 

poet ;  Kng.  Vergil  (not  Virgil). 
vergo,  verggre,  no  perf .,  no  p.p., 

to  bend,  lie  towards,  he  situated. 
ver-6,  adv.  (verus),  in  truth,  in 

fact,  verily  ;  truly,  yes  ;  hut. 
Verres,  -is,  m.,  Verres,  a  Roman 

name. 
ver-sus,  -us,  m.  (verto),  a  turn- 
ing;  verse;  line. 
verto,  vertgre,  verti,  versum,  to 

turn,  change,  revolve. 
verus,  -a,  -um,   adj.,  true,  real, 

actual.     As  noun,  verum,  -i,  n., 

the  truth,  reality. 
vescor,  vesci,  no  perl,  dep.,  to 

feed,  eat;  live  on  (280). 
Vgsontio,    -onis,    m.,    Vesontio, 

a    city    of    Gallia,    the    chief 

town  of  the  Sequani  (modern 

Besa7ifon). 
vesper,   -6ris    and   -Sri,   m.,    the 

evening. 
Vesta,  -ae,  p.,  daughter  of  Saturn, 

goddess  of  flocks  and  herds,  and 

of  the  household  in  general, 
ves-ter,   -tra,   -trum,    possessive 

pron.  (vos),  your. 
vestig-ium,  -ii,  n.   (vestigo,    to 

track),   a  footstep,  track,  trace j 

step. 
vestis,  -is,  f.,  a  garment,  vestment; 

clothing. 
v6to,  -are,  -ui,  -itum,  to  forbid. 
vgtus,  -Sris,  adj.,  old,  veteran.    As 

noun,  vgtgres,  -um,  m.  pi.,  the 

ancients;  ancestors. 
via,  -ae,  f.,  a  way,  road,  street; 

journey. 
via-tor,  -oris,  m.  (vio,  to  go),  a 

wayfarer,  traveller. 
vic-tor,  -oris,   m.   (vinco),   con- 
queror, victor. 
viotor-ia,  -ae,  f.  (victor),  victory. 
vicus,  -1,  M.,  a  village. 
vide-licet,  adv.,  it  is  manifest,  of 

course,  forsooth. 
video,  videre,  vidi,  visum,  to 


VOCABULARY. 


I. 


57 


see;  look  at;  in  pass.,  appear, 

seem. 
vidua,  -ae,  f.,  a  ividow. 
vigeo,   -ere,   no   perf.,    no    p.p., 

to  thrive,  Jiourish,  be  vigorous. 
vigil-ia,  -ae,  f.  (vigilo),  a  watch, 

night-guard. 
vigiiiti,  num.  adj.  indecl.,  twenty. 
vinco,  vincSre,  vici,  victum,  to 

conquer,  defeat,  vanquish. 
vinc-iilum,  -i,  n.  (vincio),  a  bond, 

chain,  fetter.,  prison. 
vindico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (vin- 

dex),  to   demand;  punish,    re- 
venge. 
vinum,  -1,  N.,  loine. 
vi-61o,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (vis),  to 

injure,  violate. 
vir,  viri,  m.,  a  man,  husband. 
vir-go,    -ginis,     f.     (vireo,     to 

bloom),  a  maid,  virgin. 
vir-tus, -utis,  F.  (vir),  manliness, 

virtue,  valor ;  worth. 
VIS,  vis,  F.  (121),  strength,  power  : 

vi  et  armis,  by  armed  force : 

vim  f acSre,  to  do  violence,  offer 

violence;   in  pi.,   vires,  -ium, 

forces,  troops. 
Vistiila,  -ae,  f.,  Vistula,  a  river 

of  Germany. 
vi-sus,  -a,  -um,  part,  of  video, 
vi-ta,  -ae,  f.  (vivo),  life. 
vito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,   to  shim, 

avoid. 
vivo,  vivSre,  vixi,  victum,  to 

live;  (lacte)  live  on* 


vix,  adv.,  with  difficulty,  hardly. 
v6co,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  call  by 

nafne,  summon,  invoke. 
VScontii,  -orurai,  m.  pi.,  the  Vo- 

contii,  (a  people  of  Gaul) . 
v61-ito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  intens. 

(v61o,  to  fly),  to  ffy  to  and  fro, 
flit,  fly,  hover. 
v61o,  velle,  v61ui,  no  p.p.,  irr. 

(294),  to  will,  luish,  desire. 
v61o,  -are,   -avi,  -atum,    to  fly, 

hasten. 
Volsci,  -orum,  m.  pi.,  Volscians, 

a  people  of  Latium. 
v61un-tas, -atis,  f.  (v61ens),  wil- 
lingness,   wish;    good   feeling; 

v61untate   sua,  of  one's   own 

accord. 
vSluptas,  -atis,  f.,  pleasure;  in 

pL,  sports,  pleasure. 
vos,  pi.  of  tu  (229.  2). 
vox,  vocis,  f.  (v6co),  a  voice, 

sound,  icord. 
vulgus,    -i,    N.    (rarely  m.),   the 

multitude,    the    common  people, 

mob. 
vulngro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  (vul- 

nus),  to  wound,  hurt. 
vulnus  (not  volgus),  -Sris,  n.,  a 

wound,  hurt. 
vulpes,  -is,  F.,  a  fox. 
vultur,  -iiris,  m.,  a  vulture. 
vul-tus    (not   voltus),    -us,   m. 

(v61o),  the  expression  (of  coun- 
tenance), countenance,  face. 


II. —  ENGLISH    AND    LATIN. 


[For  Numerals,  see  p.  184  ff. ;  for  Pronouns,  p.  200  ff.] 


a,  generally  untranslated ;  a  cer- 
tain, quldam,  quaedam,  quod- 
dam;  unus,  -a,  -um. 

ability,  ingenium,  -i,  N. 

able,  be,  possum,  posse,  pului. 

about,  d'e  (prep,  with  abl.)  ;  circt- 
ter  (prep,  with  ace),  in  point 
of  time,  circiter  (adv.  and 
prep.)  ;  with  numerals,  ad 
(prep,  with  ace.)  ;  or  circiter, 
fere,  (adv.). 

abroad, /or7.s  (adv.);  after  verbs 
of  motion,  fords  (adv.). 

absent,  be,  absum,  -esse,  -ful. 

abundance,  cDjji'a,  -ae,  f. 

accomplish,  cdnficio,  -flrtre, 
-feci,  -f'cfum;  p(if'icl(),-flctre, 
-feci,  -fectum. 

accuse,  accuso,  -are,  -del,  -dfuvi 
(315.  2). 

acquit,  ahsolro,  -solvere,  -solrl, 
-solRtnm  (315.  2). 

across,  trans  (prep,  with  ace). 

actively,  strPnut  (adv.). 

actuate,  permoveo,  -Jtwvere,  -ynorl, 
-niotum. 

admire,  admiror,  -Ctrl,  -dtus  sum 
(dep.). 

admonish,  admoneo,  -ere,  -in, 
-Itum. 

adorn,  onio,  -are,  -dvl,  -dtum. 

advance,  progredior,  -gredl,  -gres- 
sus  sum  ;  —  against  the  enemy, 
slgna  infero,  -ere,  -ttdi,  -latum. 

advise,  moneo,  -ere,  -ul,  -itum. 

JEdui,  Aedul,  -orum,  M. 

advantage,  be,  intersum,  -esse, 
-ful ;  (noun),  commddum,  -1,  x. 

after,/;o.s'^  (pi'ep.  with  acc.^,  posted. 


prep,  and  adv. ;  or  see  259 ; 

postquam  (333). 
against,  contra  (prep,  with  ace.)  ; 

in  (prep,  with  ace.)  ;  sign  of 

dat.     (203);    adverus    (prep. 

with  ace). 
aid,  auxllium,  -i,  n.    (ops),   apis, 

F.  (verb)  ;  adjuvo,-juvdre,  -juvi, 

-jutum. 
air,  aer,  -eris,  m.  (ace.  aiira  and 

aerem). 
alarm,  pdvor,  -oris,  m. 
all  (every),   omnis,  -e ;    (whole), 

totus,    -a,   -um;     (all    things), 

omnia  (neut.  pi.). 
alone,  solus,  -a,  -um  (adj.);  gen. 

solius. 
almost,  prdpe,  fere  (adv.). 
alongside,   p^raeter    (prep,    with 

ace). 
Alps,  Alpcs,  -ium,  f.  pi. 
already,  jam  (adv.) . 
also,  etiam  (adv.),  quoque  (adv.). 
although,  quamquam,   ut   (329)  ; 

al).    abs.    (259)  ;    licet,    cum 

(340). 
always,  semper  (adv.). 
ambassador,  legdtus,  -i,  m. 
among,  dpud  (prep,  with  ace)  ; 

inter    (prep,    with    ace.)  ;    in 

(prep,  with  abl.). 
ancestors,  mdjores,  -um,  m.  (pi.). 
and,  et,  atque,  -que  (205). 
angry,  be,   irascor,   irascl,  Irdtus 

sum  (dat.)  ;  irdtus,  -a,  -um,  p., 

act.,  angry;  (noun),  Ira,  -ae, 

F. ;    (adj.),  irdtus,  -a,-um. 
animal,  animal,  -ulis,  x. 
announce,  enuntio.-dre,  -dvl,  -dtuiTU 


VOCABULARY. 


Tf. 


59 


anpther,  alius,  -a,  -ud ;  gen.  -ins; 
(of  two),  alter,  -tera,  -teruiu ; 
one  — ,  inter  se. 

answer,  7'es])ondeo,  -ere,  -sjwruh, 
-sponsum  (with  dat.). 

Antiochus,  Antiochus,  -l,  m. 

Antonius,  Antonius,  -l,  m. 

any  (in  neg.  and  condit.  sen- 
tences), ullus,  -a,  -inn ;  (any- 
body you  wish),  qulvis,  qmllbef; 
(interr.),  nurnquis;  (after  .sZ 
or  ne),  qui,  quae  {qua),  quod  : 
-thing,  quicquam,  or  quid- 
quam. 

apiece,  distributive  numeral. 

appeal  provoco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum. 

appear,  appareo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 

apple,  pomum,  -i,  n. 

appoint,  dico,  dlcere,  dixi,  dictum; 
appoint  the  time  of  the  elec- 
tions, comitils  dies  dico,  dlcere, 
d'lxi,  dictum. 

approach,  appropinquo,  -are,  -dvi, 
-atum  (with  dat.  or  ad  with 
ace.)  ;  aggredior,  -gredl,  -gres- 
sus  sum ;  adeo,  -Ire,  -il,  -itum ; 
(noun),  adventus,  -us,  M. 

Ariovistus,  Ariovistus,  -I,  M. 

arise,  coorior,  -orirl,  -ortus,  dep. 

army,  exercitus,  -us,  m.;  acies,  -el, 
F. ;  dgmen,  -mis,  N. 

around,  circa  (prep,  with  ace). 

arrive,  advenio,  -venire,  -rP.nl, 
-ventum. 

arrow,  sagitta,  -ae,  r. 

art,  ars,  artis,  f. 

as,  see  199;  conj.,  ut;  as  .  .  .  as, 
tarn  .  .  .  quam;  such  .  .  .  as, 
talis  .  .  .  qudlis ;  as  .  .  .  if, 
velut  .  .  .  SI. 

ashamed,  be,  pudet,  -ere,  -uit,  or 
-Itum  (314.  5,  Obs.  1). 

Asia,  Asia,  -ae,  f. 

ask,  rogo,  -are,  -dvi,  -atum  (with 
two  ace,  185) ;  iov,peto,petere, 
petivi,  ])etUum  (185.  2);  infcr- 
rogo,  -are,  -dvi,  -atum. 

assault,  oppugno,  -are,  -dvi,  -atum. 


assemble,  convenio,  -venire,  -rrnl, 

-ventum. 
assist,    siddevo,  -are,  -drl,   -alum; 

adjuvo,  -are,  -juvl,  -juium. 
at,  ad  (prep,  with  ace.) ;  or  loca- 
tive (270) ;  or  (303) ;  (at  the 

house  of),  dpud  (with  ace). 
Athens,  Athenae,  -drum,  f.  (pi.). 
attack  (subst.),  impetus,  -us,  :\r. ; 

dddrior,  -orlrl,  -ortus  sum  (dep.) . 
attempt,  tento,  -are,  -dvi,  -atum; 

Conor,  -drl,  -dtus. 
attentive,  attentus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
August    (month   of),    Augustus, 

-a,    -um    (adj.    rnensis    being 

understood). 
Augustus,  Augustus,  -I,  m. 
auxiliaries,     auxilia,    -Drum,    n. 

(pi.). 
avenge,  vindico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum; 

ulciscor,  ulciscl,  ultus  sum. 
away  from,  a  or  ah  with  abl. 


bad,  mdlus,  -a,  -um  (adj.);  (naugh- 
ty), imprdbus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

baggage,  impedimenta,  -drum,  n. 
(pi.). 

bank  (of  a  river),  rlpa,  -ae,  f. 

bark  (verb),  Idtro;  (at),  alldtro, 
-are,  -dvi,  -atum;  (of  a  tree), 
cortex,  -wis  (outer),  m.  ;  (in- 
ner), liber,  -bri,  M. 

battle,  pugna,  -ae,  f.  ;  (engage- 
ment), praelium,  -i,  n. 

be,  sum,  esse,  ful. 

beam,  trabs,  -is,  F. 

bear,  fero,  ferre,  tull,  latum  ;  f or- 
■ward,  infero,  Inferre,  Intidl, 
illdtum. 

beautiful,  pulcher,  -chra,  -chrum. 

because,  quod,  quia  (conj.,  332). 

become,  (be  made),  fo,  fieri, 
/actus  sum;  (be  becoming), 
decet,  decere,  decuit;  (be  ap- 
pointed), creor,  -drl, -dtus  sum. 


60 


FIRST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


before    (prep,  ^^-ith  ace),    ante : 

(conj.),    antequam,  priusquam 

(336). 
begin,  ineo,  -Ire,  -il,  -itum,  inctpio, 

-cipere,  -cepn,  -ceptmn;  begin- 
ning of  (see  260). 
Belgian,  Belf/a,  -ae,  m. 
believe,  credo,  -dere,  -dull,  -dttum 

(with  dat.  of  person). 
belong,    pertmeo,    -tXnere,    -thun, 

no  p.p. 
betake   (one's  self),   se  confero, 

conferre,  contiill,  colldtum. 
beyond,  trans  (prep,  with  ace.)  ; 

extra  or  ultra  (prep,  with  ace). 
bird,  avis,  -is,  c. 
black,  nujer,  -gra,  -grum  (adj.). 
blame,  culpo,  -are,  -art,  -atuni. 
boat,  linter,  -tris,  m. 
bold,  auddx  -dais  (adj.). 
bond,  vinculum,  -I,  N. 
book,  Uher,  -hru  M. 
born,    be,    ndscor,    ndscl,    ndtus 

811771;     glgno,     (/l(j/t(7/-e,    gejiul, 

(It7utwn. 
both  (each  of  two),  vterque,  iit7xi- 

qne,  utrv7//que   (i>ron.) ;    both 

.  .  .  and,  ct . . .  et ;  (num.  adj.), 

(n7d)0. 
boundaries,  fines,  -ia/7),  m.  (pi.). 
boy,  jjuer,  -e/-'l,  M. 
brave,  Jmiis,  -e  (adj.). 
bravely,  jw-tlter  (adv.). 
bridge,  iKms,  -fis,  m. 
bright,  cldras,  -a, -?o«  (adj.). 
broad,  Idtus,  -a,  -uiu  (adj.). 
brother,  frdter,  -tris,  m. 
build,  aedlfico,  -d/-e,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
building,  aedlftcium,  -I,  x. 
burden,  d7ius,  -ms,  N. 
burn,  c7-e77w,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
business,  negotium,  -i,  N. 
but,  sed,  autem  (205.  3)  ;  (only), 

tantum,  mddo ;    (unless),    ntsi 

(conj.) ;       (except),      praeter 

(prep,  with  ace). 
by    (a  person    after    a    passive 

verb),  a  or  ah;  by  day,  intei-- 


diu  (adv.) ;  by  night,  noctu 
(adv.)  (256)  ;  dative  agent 
(288)  ;  means,  abl.  (306) ; 
per  (prep,  with  ace). 


C. 


Caesar,  Caesar,  -dris,  m. 

call,  vdco,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dttan  ;  —  out, 
evdco,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum ;  —  to- 
gether, convdco,  -dre,  -dvl, 
-dtum ;  (name),  appello,  -dre, 
-dvl,  -dtum. 

camp,  castra,  -Drum,  n.  (pi.). 

ca.n, possum,  posse, pdtui ;  (=  may), 
licet,  impers.  (314)  with  dat. 

candidly,  dperte  (adv.). 

care,  cura,  -ae,  f. 

carefully,  dittgenter  (adv.). 

csirry,  po7-to,  -are,  -dvl,  -dtum;  carry 
on,  gtro,  gere7-e,  gessl,  gestum; 
—  on  war  against,  helium  In- 
ferro,  -ferre,  intull,  illdtum 
( inldtuni) . 

Carthage,  Carthago,  -^nis,  r. 

cast  a"way,  ahtcio,  -icere,  -jecl, 
-jectum. 

cavalry,  equites,  -um,  M.  (pi.). 

cave,  antrum,  -i,  N. ;  specus,  -us,  f. 

central,  medius,  -a,  -um;  central 
place  (with  respect  to  both  of 
them),  locus  medius. 

century,  centuria,  -ae,  f. 

certain  one,  a,  quldai77,  quaedam, 
quoddam;  and  subst.  {quid- 
dam^  ;  (fixed),  certus,  -a,  -um. 

chief,  prlnceps,  -ctpis,  M.;  (adj.), 
summus,  -a,  -um. 

children,  puerl ;  (in  relation  to 
parents),  llherl,  -Drum,  m.  ;  (of 
age),  infdns,  -antis,  c. 

choose  (for  a  purpose),  deligo, 
-Ugere,  -lexl,  -ledum;  (out  of 
a  number),  eUgOy  -ligere,  -legl, 
-ledum. 

Cicero,  Cicero,  -onis. 

citizen,  clvis,  -is,  c. 


VOCABULAllY. 


II. 


61 


city,  urbs,  -is,  f. 

clerk,  scriba,  -ae,  m. 

cloak,  pdluddjnentum,  -i,  n. 

close,  claudo,  -ere,  -si,  -sum. 

cloud,  nuhes,  -is,  F. 

cohort,  collars,  -tis,  f. 

cold,   frigidus,    -a,   -urn    (adj.) ; 

(jaoxm),  frlgus,  -oris,  n. 
collect,  comporto,  -are,  -dvl,  -dtum; 

confero,  -ferre,  -lull,  -latum. 
column,  cdlumna,  -ae,  f. 
come,  venio,  -Ire,  verii,  ventum. 
commsin A,imperium,-i,J:^.;  (verb), 

impero,  -are,  -dvl,  -dtum  (with 

dat.,  or  ut  with  subj.). 
comraLander,  dux,  ducis,  c. ;  im- 

perdtor,  -oris,  m. 
common,  communis,  -e  (adj.). 
company,  with,  in,  cum  (prep. 

with  abL). 
compel,  cogo,  cogere,  coegi,  coac- 

tum  (ace.  with  inf.). 
complain,  queror,   queri,    questus 

sum. 
conceal,  celo,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum(lS5). 
concerning,  de  (prep,  with  abl.). 
concerns,  it,  interest,  -esse,  -fuit 

(315.  3  (2)). 
condemn,      damno,     -are,     -avi, 

-dtum  (315.  2). 
conference,  conldquium,  -l,  n. 
confess,  fdteor,  fdteri,  fassus. 
congratulate,  grdtulor,  -drl,  -dtus 

(dep.).    .  _ 

conquer,  vinco,  vincere,  vici,  vic- 

tnm. 
conqueror,  victor,  -oris,  m. 
consequence,    it   is    of,    mdgnl 

interest  (334.  1). 
consul,  consul,  -ulis,  m. 
consulship,  consuldtus,  -us,  m.,  or 

ab.  abs. ;  see  260. 
consult,    consulo,   -ere,   -ul,  -turn, 

(with  ace.  or  for  noun  dat.). 
contend,  contendo,  -dere,  -dl,  -turn. 
contention,  contentio,  -onis,  f. 
conversation,  sermo,  -onis,  m. 
convey,  porto,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum; 


—  across,  trdduco,  -ere,  -dull, 
-dltmn. 

Corinth,  Corinthus,  -I,  f. 

coin,  frumentum,  -I,  N. 

cottage,  cdsa,  -ae,  v. 

could,  past  tenses  of  possum  or 
subj. 

country,  teriri,  -ae,  f.  ;  (native 
country),  ]mt7ia,  -ae,  f.  ;  (op- 
posed to  town),  rus,  ruris,  N. ; 
(commonwealth),  res  puhlica, 
rel  publicae. 

cowardly,  Igndvus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Crassus,  Crassus,  -I,  m. 

crime,  scelus,  -eris,  n.  ;  crimen, 
-inis,  N. ;  f acinus,  -oris,  x. 

cross,  transeo,  -Ire,  -il,  -itum;  trans- 
mitto,  -mittere,  -misl,  -missum. 

crovrn,  cdrono,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum. 

cruel,  crudelis,  -e  (adj.). 

cruelty,  crudelitds,  -dtis,  f. 

cultivate,  cola,  cdlere,  cdlui, 
cultum. 

culture,  cultus,  -us,  m. 

cut,  seco,  -dre,  -ul,  -turn;  —  oif 
(from  supplies),  j:)ro/r<'6eo,  -ere, 
-ul,-itum  (with  ace.  and  abl.). 


danger,  periculum,  -l,  n. 

dare,  audeo,  -ere,  ausus  sum  (283). 

dark  (of  color),  niger,  -gra,  -grum. 

daughter,  filia,  -ae,  f. 

day  (opposed  to  night),  dies,  -el, 
M.  ;  (opposed  to  darkness), 
lux,  iTicis,  F. 

dear,  cdrus,  -a,  -um. 

death,  mors,  mortis,  f.  ;  (to  sen- 
tence to  death),  capitis  (315. 2). 

debt,  aes  dlienum. 

declare  (war),  indlco,  -dicere, 
-dlxi,  -dictum;  renuntio,  -dre, 
-dvl,  -dtum. 

deed,  factum,  -i,  n.  ;  (in  a  bad 
sense),  fdcmus,  -oris,  n. 

deeds  (exploits),  res  gestae,  re- 
rum  gestdrum,  f.  (pi.). 


62 


FIRST    STEPS   IN  LATIN. 


deep,  altuSf  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
defend,  dPfendo,  -dere,  -di,  -sum. 
deliberate,    dellbero,    -are,   -cwl, 

-at  u  III. 
deliberation,   often   perf.  part. 

neut.  of  consiilo, 
delight,  delecto,  -are,  -dv'i,  -dtum 

(trans.) ;  gaudeo,  -ere,  gdvisus 

sum  (intrans.). 
deliver,  trddo,  -dere,  -dull,  -dttum ; 

(what  is  due),    reddo,    -dere, 

-dtdl,    -dUum ;    (free),    libera, 

-dre,-dvt,  -dtum;  (of  a  speech), 

hdbeo,  -ere,  -ul,  -Itum. 
demand,  postulo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum 

(185.    2);    JldgXto,   -are,  -del, 

-dtum;  (noww), postulCitum,-!,  x. 
dense,  densus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
depart,  decedo  (discedo'),  -cedere, 

-ccssi,  -cessum;  (set  out),  pr(y- 

ficiscor,  -ficisci,  -feet us  sum. 
deserve,  mereor,  -erl,  -itus  sum; 

dignus  sum  (324. 1). 
deserving,  diguus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
desert,  dfsero,  -ere,  -ul,  -tum. 
deserter,  perfuga,  -ne,  m. 
desire,  ciipio,  -ere,  -Irl,  -itum. 
desirous,  appettns,  -ntis  ;  ciipuhis, 

-a,  -um  (adj.). 
destroy  (ruin),  perdo,  -dere,  -dXdi, 

-ditum ;     (annihilate),     deleo, 

-lere,  -leci,  -letum. 
detain,  detineo,  -tXnere,  -tiuui,  no 

p.p. ;    retineo,     -tinere,    -tXnul, 

no  p.p. 
determine,  cOnstttuo,  -uere,   -ul, 

-utum. 
devour,  devoro,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
dictator,  dictator,  -Oris,  m. 
die,  mdrior,  -marl  (or  -Irl),  -mor- 

tuus;  obeo,  -ire,  -il,  -itum. 
differ,  differo,  differre,  no  perf. 

nor  p.p.;  — from  each  other, 

inter  se  differo. 
differently,  dliter  (adv.). 
difficult,  difflcUis,  -e  (adj.). 
diligence,  diligentia,  -ae,  f. 
diligently,  diligenter  (adv.). 


discipline,  disciplina,  -ae,  r. 
disorder,  cunjusiu,  -unis,  r. 
displease,  displiceo,  -plicere,  -pli- 

cul,  -pllcitum. 
disposition,  ingenium,  -I,  n. 
dissension,  dissentid,  -unis,  f. 
distance,  spdtium,  -l,  n. 
distant,  longinquus,  -a,  -um  (adj.)  ; 

am    distant,  disto,  -stare  (no 

perf.,  no  p.p.). 
distinguished,    cldrus,    -a,    -um 

divide,  divide,  -vtdere,  -visi,  -vi- 
sum. 

Divitiacus,  Divitidcus,  -i,  m. 

do  (auxiliary  in  questions  or 
commands,  not  translated)  ; 
fdcio,  fdcere,  feci,  factum. 

does,  see  do. 

dog,  cunis,  -is,  m. 

door,  jdnua,  -ae,  f. 

doubt,  dubito,  -are,  -dri,  -dtum ; 
(noun),  dUbium,  -t,  n.  ;  there 
is  no  — ,  tiOn  est  dubium,  with 
quin  and  subj.  (333.  2). 

doubtful,  dubius,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

dra"w  up,  instruo,  -struere,  -struxi, 
-structum. 

drive,  pello,  pellere,  pepUll,  pul- 
sum  ;  —  back,  reicio,  reicere,  re- 
ject, rejectum. 

due,  debeo,  -bere,  -bui,  -blfum ;  par- 
tic,  dehitus,  -a,  -um. 

duty,  officium,  -i,  n.  ;  or  gen. 
(13b.  Obs.). 

dTvell,  hdbito,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum; 
incdlo,  -ere,  -ul,  no  p.p. 


E. 

each  (one),  quisque,  quaeque, 
quodque  (adj.),  and  quidque, 
or  quicque  (subst.)  ;  unusquis- 
que :  (of  two),  uterque,  idra- 
que,  utrumque. 

each  other  {i.e.  one  another), 
alius  ,  ,  .  alius,  alter  .  .  .  alter. 


VOCABULARY.  — 11. 


63 


eager,  dvulus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

eagle,  dqiula,  -ae,  f. 

earth,  teira,  -ae,  f.  ;  (world),  or- 
his  terrdrum. 

easily,  fdcile  (adv.). 

easy,  fdcHh,  -e  (adj.). 

educate,  educo,  -are,  -avl,  -dtiuii. 

either  ...  or,  vel  .  .  .  vcl ;  aiil 
.  .  .  aut. 

elect,  fdcio,  fdcere,  feci,  factum  ; 
creo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

elephant,  elephanlus,  -i,  n. 

eloquence,  eldquentia,  -ae,  f. 

embroider,  dcu  (306)  pinfjo, 
pingere,  pinxi,  pictum. 

encompass,  cingo,  clngere,  cinxl, 
cinctum. 

encourage,  hortor,-dri,  -dtus  sum. 

end,  conficlo,  ftcere,  feci,  fectum; 
noun,  finis,  -is,  M.  (or  some- 
times in  sing.  r.). 

endure,  perjero,  -ferre,  -tuli,  la- 
tum;  tdlero,  -dre,  -dvl,  dtum; 
pdtior,  -I,  passus. 

enemy,  hosfis,  -is,  c. ;  the  enemy 
(collectively),  Jiostes,  -ium ; 
(personal),  Inimicus,  -i,  M. 

enjoy,  fruor,   frui,  fructus  (306. 

^)- 
enroll,  conscriho,  -here,  -psi,  -ptum.. 

enter,  intra,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum;  siib- 

eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum. 
entrust,  committo,  -mittere,  -mlsl, 

-mis  sum. 
Ephesus,  Ephesus,  -i,  f. 
escape,   ejfugio,  fugere,  fugi,  no 

p.p. 
establish,    confirmo,    -are,    -avi, 

-dtum;  stdtuo,   stdtuere,  statui, 

stdtutum. 
evening,  vesper,  -erl,  m. 
every     (one),  quisque,    quaeque, 

quodque  (adj.),  quidque  or  quic- 

que  (subst.)  ;  (adj.),  omnis,  -e  ; 

every   tenth    (man),    dechuus 

quisque. 
excellent,  excellens,  -tis. 
exercise,  exerceo^  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 


exhort,  hortor  (or  cdhortor^,  -dri, 

-dtus  sum  (dep.). 
expect,  exspecto,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
experience,  usus,  -us,  m. 
extreme,  extremus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
eye,  dculus,  -i,  m. 


iaithivil,  fidelis,  -e  (adj.). 

f aithf ulness, /tc/e^',  -el,  f. 

ialse,  falsus,  -a,-um  (adj.). 

family,  fdmilia,  -ae,  f. 

far,  longe  prdcul  (adv.). 

far  and  wide,  Idte  (adv.). 

farmer,  agricdla,  -ae,  m. 

farther  (adj.),  ulterior,  -us  (adj., 
150.  7). 

father,  pater,  -tris,  m. 

fault,  culpa,  -ae,  f. 

fear,  timeo,  -ere,  -ul  (no  p.p.) 
(321,  2)  ;  metuo,  metuere,  me- 
tul,  no  p.p. ;  vereor,  -erl,  -itus 
sujii  (dep.) ;  (noun),  timer, 
-Oris,  M. 

February  (month  of),  Fehrud- 
riiis,  -a,  -um  (rneusis  being  un- 
derstood). 

felloTv-citizen,  clvis,  -is,  m. 

few,  jmucl,  -ae,  -a,  pi.  (adj.)  ;  a 
—  words,  pauca,  -drum,  n. 

fidelity,  fides,  -el,  f. 

field,  dger,  dgrl,  m. 

fierce,  atrox,  atrocis  (adj.). 

fiercely,  acriter  (adv.). 

fifth,  quintus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

fight,  dlmico,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum; 
pugno,-dre,  -dvl,  -dtum;  (subst.) , 
pugna,  -ae,  f. 

fill,  compleo,  -plere,  -plevl,  -pic- 
tum; repleo,  -plere,  -plevl, 
-pictum. 

find  (by  search  or  inquiry),  repe- 
rio,  reperlre,  reperi,  repertum ; 
invenio,  -venire,  -vent,  -ventum. 

finish,  flnio,  -Ire,  -Ivl,  -itum;  con- 
ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum. 


64 


riBST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


fire,  ignis,  -is,  m. 

Giist, jjrlmus, -a, -um  (adj.) ;  (adv.), 
primum  a,nd  prlmo. 

fish,  piscis,  -is,  M. 

flee,  fugio,  fugere,  fugi,  fvgitum. 

fleet,  dassis,  -is,  f. 

flight,  fuga,  -ae,  f. 

flo'w,  jfiiw,  -ere,  -xl,  -xum. 

fly,  volo,  -are,  -dvi,  -atum. 

folio-wing  (day),  posterns,  -a,  -um 
(adj.,  150.  2). 

folly,  stultitia,  -ae,  r. 

foot,  pes,  pedis,  m. 

foot-soldier,  pedes,  -ids,  m. 

for  (see  303)  ;  conj.,  nam,  enim 
(follows  the  first  word  or 
words),  etenim  (205.  5)  ;  prep., 
de  or  pro  with  abl. ;  (sign  of 
dat.). 

forage,  pabulor,  -arl,  -citus  sum 
(dep.). 

forbid,  veto,  -are,  -m,  -Uum. 

force,  cogo,  -ere,  -egi,  -actum. 

forces,  copiae,  -arum,  f.  (pi.). 

foresight,  prndentia,  -ae,  F. 

forest,  silva,  -ae,  f. 

forget,  ohllviscor,  ohlivisci,  ohlltus 
sum,  dep.  (315.  1). 

form  a  plan,  consXlium  ineo,  -ire, 
-il,  -ifnm. 

fortify,  munio,  -Ire,  -Irl,  -Itum. 

fortunate,  fortunCilus,  a-,  -um 
(adj.). 

fortune, /orAi/na,  -ae,  F. 

found,  condo,  -dere,  -didl,  -ditum. 

free,  hher,  -era,  -erum  (86.  2) ; 
be  free  from,  vdco,  -are,  -dvl, 
-atum;  set  free,  libera,  -are, 
-dvl,  -alum;  of  a  slave,  mdnu- 
initto,  -mittere,  -misl,  -missuyn. 

friend,  amicus,  -i,  m. 

friendship,  amlcitia,  -ae,  v. 

frog,  7-ana,  -ae,  f. 

from  (away  from),  a,  ah;  (out 
of),  e,  ex;  (denoting  cause), 
abl.,  see  248. 

fruit  (of  trees),  fructus,  -us,  m.  ; 
(of  ^elds),  fruges,  -um,  f.  (pL). 


fugitive,  fugiens,  part,  of  fugio. 

full,  plenus,  -a,  -inn  (adj.). 

further,  adj.,  ulterior,  -us  (adj., 
150.1);  (furthermore),  aw/em, 
conj.  (placed  after  one  or  more 
words) . 

fury,  fiiror,  -oris,  m. 


G. 

gain,  lucrum,  -I,  n. 

games,  ludl,  -drum,  m.  (pi.). 

garden,  hortus,  -i,  m. 

gate,  jd.nua,  -ae,  f.  ;  porta,  -ae,  F. 

Gaul  (the  country),  Gallia,  -ae,  f. 

Gaul  (an  inhabitant),  Gallus,  -i, 

M. 

general,  dux,  diicis,  m.  ;  imperator, 

-toris,  M. 
German,  Germdnus,  -a,-um  (adj.). 
get,    acqulro,    -ere,   -sivi,    -situm; 

assequor,    -sequl,     -cuius    sum 

(dep.). 
gift,  donum,  -i,  N. 
girl,  piiella,  -ae,  f. 
give,  do,  dare,  dedi,  datum;  give 

up,  trddo,  -dere,  -dull,  -ditum; 

—  what  is  due,  tribuo,  -uere, 

-ul,  -utum. 
glad,  laetus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
glory,  gloria,  -ae,  F. 
go,  eo,  ire,  il  (ivi),  itum  (298); 

go   on,   pass,  of  gero,  gerere, 

gessl,  gestum  ;   —  forth,  exec, 

-Ire,  -Ivl  or  -il,  -itum  ;  —  through 

(permeate),  permeo,  -dre,  -dvl, 

-atum. 
god,  deus,  -I,  M. 
going  to  (fut.  act.  part.), 
gold,  aurum,  -i,  n. 
good,  bonus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
goods,  merx,  mercis,  f. 
govern,  rego,  regere,  rexi,  rectum; 

gnberno,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum;  prae- 

sum,  -esse,  -ful  (202). 
grain,  frumentum, -I,  N. 
grandfather,  dvus,  -l,  m. 


VOCABULAKY.  —  II. 


great,  magnus,  -a,  -urn  (adj.). 
Greek,  Graecus,  -a,  -uin  (adj.)  ; 

(noun),  Graecus,  -I,  m. 
ground,  humus,  -i,  r. ;  solum,  -i.  n. 
gro"w  ■weak,  languesco,  langues- 

cere,  langul,  no  p.p. 
guardian,  custos,  -odis,  m. 
guide  (subst.),  dux,  ducis,  m. 


hall,  aula,  -ae,  f. 
Hannibal,  Hannibal,  -alls,  m. 
happens,  it,  accidit,  -cidere,  -cidit. 
happy,  felix,  -ids  (adj.)  ;  hedtus, 

-a,  -um  (adj.). 
hsLihoT,  partus,  -us,  m.  (174.  2). 
hard,  durus,  -a,  um  (adj.);  —  to 

do,  difficilis,  -e. 
hardship,  durum,  -i,  n. 
hasten,  mdturo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum ; 

festino,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum;  pro- 

pero,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
hatred,  odium,  -l,  n. 
have,  hdheo,  habere,  habui,   hdbi- 

tum;  sum,  esse,  fui,  with  dat. 

(274). 
he,  is ;  ille  ;  hie ;  or  implied  in  the 

third  person  of  the  verb ;   in 

indir.  disc,  referring   to   the 

principal  subject,  se  (353. 1). 
heal,  medeor,  -eri,  no  perf . 
hear,  audio,  -ire  -ivi,  -itum. 
heavy,  gravis,  -e. 
help,   juvo,    -dre,    juvi,    jutum; 

(noun),  auxilium,  -i,  x. 
Helvetians,  Helvetil,  -drum,  m. 
hem    in,    contmeo,  -tineri,   -tmui, 

-tentum  (with  ace). 
Ta.eTa.ce, proinde ;  hinc  (adv.). 
her,  ejus;  her  own  (refl.),  suus, 

-a,  -um ;  emph.,  ipsius. 
herald,  praeco;  -dnis,  m. 
here,  be,  adsum,  -esse,  -fui. 
high,  altus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
highest  interests,  summae  res. 
highly,  mdgm  (304). 
hill,  7nons,  montis,  M. ;  collis,  -isj  m. 


him,  see  he ;  see  271.  Obs.  G. 

himself,  ipse  (reflex,  se). 

hinder,  impedio,  -ire,  -ivi  -itum ; 
obsto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -stdtum. 

his,  ejus  (gen.  of  is)  ;  his  own, 
suus,  -a,  -um;  referring  to  sub- 
ject, suus,  -a,  -um  (emph.), 
ipsius  (gen.);  omitted  when 
implied  from  the  context. 

hither  (adj.),  citerior,  -us  (adj., 
150.  1). 

hold,  teneo,  tenere,  tenul,  tentum. 

home  (to),  domum;  (at),  at  — 
doml  (270.  1). 

Homer,  Homerus,  -i,  m. 

honor,  honor,  -oris,  M. 

hope,  spes,  -el,  r. ;  (verb)  spero, 
-dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

horse,  equus,  -i,  m. 

horseman,  eques,  -itis,  m. 

hostage,  obses,  -idis,  c. 

hour,  hora,  -ae,  f. 

house,  domus,  -us,  f. 

hundred  (one),  centum. 

hunger, /ames,  -is,  f. 


I. 

I,  ego  (326). 

if,  SI ;  —  not,  si  ndn ;  unless,  nisi 
(326). 

imitate,  imitor,  -dri,  -dtus  sum 
dep. 

immediately,  statim,  cdnfestim 
(adv.). 

immortal,  immortdlis,  -e. 

implore,  impldro,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

in,  in  (prep,  with  abl.)  ;  in  com- 
pany with,  cum  (prep,  with 
abl.);  in  the  power  of,  penes 
(prep,  with  ace.) ;  in  turn, 
invicem  (adv.  or  abl.  alone) ; 
in  order  that,  ut,  ne,  etc.  (see 
321,  322). 

increase,  augeo,  augere,  auxi, 
auctum. 

inform,  cerium  \cei'tidrem']  facio^ 
fdcere,  feci,  factum. 


66 


FIRST    STErS    IN    LATIN. 


inhabitant,  in  cola,  -ae,  m. 
injure,  noceo,  -ere,  -ul,  -iturn  (with 

dat.)  ;  ohsum,  -esse,  -fui  (203). 
injury,  injuria,  -ae,  r. 
inquire,   quaero,    quaerere,  quae- 

sivi,  quaesitwn  (185.  2). 
insist  on,  fldglto,  -are,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
instruct,  erudio,  -Ire,  -ivi  or  -il, 

-U II  7)1. 

interests,  it,  interest,  -esse,  -fui 
(315.  3  (2)). 

into,  m  (prep,  with  ace). 

island,  insula,  -ae,  f. 

it,  see  he. 

Italy,  Italia,  -ae,  f. 

it  is,  est  (see  127,  sign  of  passive 
voice). 

its  (referring  to  the  subject), 
suus,  -a,  -uin ;  omitted  if  im- 
plied from  the  context. 


January  (month  of,  mensis  being 
understood),  Jani/ar/M.s,-a,-Mm. 

javelin,  telum,  -i,  n. 

join,  jungo,  jungtre,  junxl,  junc- 
tum. 

journey,  iter,  itineris,  n. 

joy,  gaudium,  -l,  N. 

joyful,  laetiis,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

judge, /wZea:,  -dicis,  m. 

judgment,  judicium,  -I,  x.  ;  to 
pass  —  upon,  senfio,  -Ire,  sejisi, 
sensus  (with  de  and  abl.). 

June  (month  of)  Julius,  -il,  m. 

just,  Justus,  -a,  -um  (adv.). 

justice,  justitia, -ae,  f. 


keep  off,  prohiheo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 

kill,  interficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fec- 
tum ;  (by  cutting  down),  occl- 
do,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -cisum. 

kind,  bemgnus,  -a,  -um  (adj.) ; 
(noun),  genus,  -eris,  n. 


king,  rex,  rPgis,  m. 

kingdom,  regnum,  -i,  n. 

know  (of  things),  scio,  scire, 
scivl,  scitum ;  nosco,  noscere, 
novi,  nOtum ;  (become  ac- 
quainted with),  cognosco,  -gno- 
scere,  -gnovi,  -gnitum ;  (not  to 
know),  nescio,  -scire,  -scivi  or 
-scii,  -scitum  ;  ignoi'o,  -are,  -dvl, 
-dtum;  (understand),  intellego, 
-legere,  -lexi,  -lectum. 

knowledge,  scientia,  -ae,  f. 


Lacedaemonian,  Ldcedaemd- 
nius,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

lake,  Idcus,  -lis,  m.  (174.  2). 

lame,  claudus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

land  (a  country),  terra,  -ae,  f.  ; 
(native  land),  pdtfia,  -ae,  f.  ; 
(by  —  and  sea),  terrd  mdrique. 

language,  lingua,  -ae,  F. 

large,  mdgnus,  -a,  -um  (adj.); 
amplus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

last,  ultlnius,  -a,  -um  (150.  1) ; 
(nearest,  as  last  night),  proxi- 
mus,  -a,  -um  (150.  1) ;  (most 
remote),  extremus,  -a,  -um 
(150.  2)  ;  (at  last),  demum 
(adv.) 

Latin,  Ldtlnus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

la-w  (statute),  lex,  legis,  f. 

lawful,  Justus,  -a,  -um  (adj.)  ;  (it 
is  — ),  licet  (314.  2)  ;  fas  (in- 
decl.). 

lay  before,  prdpdno,  -ponere, 
-pdsul,  -pdsitum. 

lay  down  (place),  pono,  ponere, 
pdsul,  pdsitum;  —  arms,  ab 
armls  discedo,  -ere,  -cessl,  -ces- 
sum ;  lay ^N^,&te*vasto, -are, -dvl, 
dtum. 

lead,  duco,  ducere,  duxi,  ductum  ; 
(over),  trdnsduco,  -ducere, 
-duxl,  -ductum  ;  (out  or  from), 
educo,  -ducere,  -duxl,  -ductum, 


VOCABULARY. 


ir. 


67 


leader,  dux,  ducis,  c. 

leap,  salio,  -li-e,  -ui,  or  -it,  -turn; 
(over),  transtlio,  -silire,  -silui, 
no  p.p. 

learn,  disco,  discere,  didicl,  no 
p.p. ;  cognosco,  -gnuscere,  -gnovi, 
-gmtum. 

learned,  doctus,  -a,  -urn. 

leave,  relinquo,  -linquere,  -llqul, 
-lictum. 

legate,  legdtus,  -l,  m. 

legion,  legio,  -onis,  f. 

less  (adj.),  minor,  -us  (adj.) ;  adv., 
minus. 

lest,  ne,  etc.  (see  321  and  322). 

let,  permitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum;  sino,  sinere,  sivi,  situm; 
in  commands  and  prohibi- 
tions (278). 

letter  (of  alphabet),  littera,  -ae,  f.  ; 
(an  epistle),  litterae,  -drum,  F. ; 
pi.,  or  epistula,  -ae,  f. 

levy,  conscribo,  -scrlbere,  -scripsi, 
-scriptum. 

liberate,  libero,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

liberty,  libertds,  -dtis,  f. 

lie,  Jdceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum;  (speak 
falsely),  mentior,  -iri,  -itus  sum 
(dep.). 

lieutenant,  legatus,  -I,  m. 

life,  vita,  -ae,  f.  (with  reference 
to  its  several  stages,  as  boy- 
hood, youth,  etc.),  aetds,  -dtis, 
f.  ;  (manner  of  living),  victus, 
us,  M. 

light,  lux,  lucis,  F.  ;  (be  light), 
luceo,  lucere,  luxi,  no  p.p. ; 
light,  levis,  -e  (adj.). 

lightning  (flash  of),  fulgur,  -uris  ; 
(stroke  oi),  fulmen,  -mis,  n. 

like,  similis,  -e  (adj.). 

limb,  artus,  -us,  m. 

line  (of  battle),  acies,  -ei,  f. 

lion,  leo,  -onis,  M, 

literature,  litterae,  -arum,  r.  (pi.)- 

live,  vivo,  vivere,  vixl,  victum ; 
(dwell),  hdhito,  -are,  -dvl, 
-dtum. 


lofty,    excessus,   -a,    -nm    (ad j . )  ; 

(for  a  long  time),  diu  (adv.). 
long,  longus,  -a,  -um. 
look  at,  specto,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum,  or 

adspicio,  -ere,  -exi,  -ectum. 
lose,  dmiito,  -mittere,  -misi,  -missum. 
love,  dmo,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum;  (like, 

esteem),    diligo,   -ligere,   -lexl, 

-lectum ;  (subst.),  amor,  -oris, 

M. 

M. 

make,  fdcio,  fdcere,  feci,  factum ; 
(a  magistrate),  creo,  -dre,  -dvl, 
-alum;  (war  upon),  Infero,  in- 
ferre,  intuli,  illdtum;  (cloak), 
conficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -f ectum  ; 
(attack),  aggredior,  -gredi, 
-gressus  sum. 

maker, /a&er,  -hri,  m. 

man,  vir,  virl,  m.  (an  adult  male 
person,  opp.  to  mulier,  wo- 
man) ;  homo,  -inis,  c.  (a  hu- 
man being). 

maniple,  mdnipulus,  -i,  n. 

many,  multi,  -ae,  -a  (adj.). 

march,  iter,  itineris,  N.  (subst.)  ; 
(verb),  iter  fdcio,  fdcere,  feci, 
factum. 

marry  (of  the  man),  uxd'rem 
duco,  ducere,  duxi,  ductum; 
(of  the  woman),  viro  nuho, 
nubere,  nupsl,  nitptum. 

master  (of  boys),  mdgister, -trl ; 
(of  slaves),  ddminus,  -i,  m. 

may,  licet,  licere,  licuit  or  licitum 
est  (impers.,  314.  2)  ;  possum, 
posse,  pdtul  (293,  2)  ;  in  final 
clause,  ut;  of  wish  (278). 

May  (month  of),  Mdius,  -a,  -um 
(adj.),  (mensis  being  under- 
stood)., 

measure,  metior,  metlrl,  mensus 
sum  (dep.). 

meet  (death),  obeo,  -Ire,  -ii,  -itum. 

memory,  memdria,  -ae,  f. 

men  (with  poss.  pron.),  omitted, 
as  our  — ,  nostrl,  -drum,  m. 


68 


FIKST    STEPS    IN   LATIN. 


merchant,  mercdtor,  -Oris,  m. 

messenger,  nuntius,  -i,  M. 

midday,  m^rldies,  -el,  M. 

midnight,  media  nox. 

midst  of,  in,  medius,  -a,  -inn. 

might,  see  may. 

migrate,  mujro,  -are,  -di%  -at urn. 

mile,  mllle  passuum. 

Miletus,  Miletus,  -l,  f. 

military  affairs,  res  militdris. 

mind,  animus,  -i,  m. 

mine,  mens,  -a,  -um. 

mistaken,  be,  erro,  -are,  -dvi, 
-alum ;  fallor,  falll,  falsum 
(pass,  of  fallo). 

money,  pecunia,  -ae,  f. 

monster,  monstrum,  -I,  N. 

month,  mensis,  -is,  m. 

moon,  luna,  -ae,  f. 

more  (sign  of  comp.  degree), 
mdgis;  (of  quantity),  p/w.s 
(witli  expressions  of  number), 
amplius. 

morrow  (on  the),  postei'D  die. 

most  (sign  of  superl.  degree), 
jiidxime. 

mother,  mater,  mdtris,  F. 

mountain,  mans,  -tis,  M. 

mourn,  lugeo,  lilgere,  luxl,  luctum. 

move,  moveo,  movere,  movi,  mvtum. 

music,  musica,  -ae,  F. 

must,  oportet,  or  gerundive  (286). 

my,  meus,  -a,  -um. 

myself,  egomet  (230. 1) ;  ipse,  -a, 
-um;  agreeing  with  ego,  ex- 
pressed or  understood. 

N. 

name,  numen,  -inis,  n. 

narrow,  angustus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

naturally,  ndtur-d  (abl.). 

nature,  imtura,  -ae,  f. 

near,  prijpe,  ad  (prep,  with  ace). 

nedLxest,  pruximus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

need,  opus  (308.  Qbs.  2) ;   egeo 

(indigeo),    -ere,    -ul,    no    p.p. 

(308.  Obs.  1). 


neither  (of  two),  neuter,  -Ira, 
-trum ;  neither  .  . .  nor,  neque 
.  .  .  neque  (205.  1). 

never,  nunquam  (adv.). 

nevertheless,  nihilummus  (adv.) ; 
tdmen  (conj.). 

new  (opp.  to  antiquus),  novus,  -a, 
-um ;  fresh  (opp.  to  vetus), 
recens,  -entis ;  new^s,  nuntius, 
-a,  -um  ;  nuntium  mittere,  to  send 
word  ;  or  dliquid  novl. 

next,  proximus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

night,  nox,  noctis,  F. ;  by  night, 
nociu. 

no,  adj.,  nullus,  -a,  -um;  no  one, 
nemo,  -inis  (for  gen.  nulllus  is 
used) . 

noble,  decorus,  -a,  -um ;  nobilis, 
-e  (adj.). 

none,  nullus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

nor,  neque,  nee,  (conj.) ;  neither 
.  .  .  nor,  nee  .  .  .  nee  (neque) 
(205.  1). 

not,  nun  (adv.)  ;  Jiaud,  used  with 
adverbs  and  with  seio ;  nunne, 
interrog.  particle ;  that . . .  not 
(in  final,  hortatory,  impera- 
tive, and  optative  clauses),  ne. 

nothing,  nihil,  N.  (indecl.). 

nourish,  nutria,  -iri,  -ivi,  -Itum; 
ulo,  -ere,  -ul,  alitum  and  altum. 

now,  nunc  (adv.). 

nowhere,  nusquam  (adv.). 

number,  numerus,  -I,  m. 

Numitor,  Numitor,  -oris,  M. 


oak-tree,  quercus,  -us,  f. 

obey,  pdreo,  -ere,  -ul,  no  p.p. ; 
obedio,  -Ire,  -ivl  or  -il,  -Itum. 

object,  ohsto,  -stare,  -stitl,  -stdtum. 

obtain,  adipiseor,  -ipisel,  -eptus 
sum  (dep.)  ;  (possession),  po- 
tior,  -irl,  -Itus  sum,  dep.  (306. 

2). 
of,   gen.  or  abl.  case  ;  see  292 ; 
de  (prep,  with  abl.). 


Vocabulary.  —  ii. 


69 


often,  saepe  (adv.). 

old  (man),  senex,  senis,  m.  ;  (adj.), 

grandis  ndtM;  vetus,  -eris. 
older  (comp.),  major  natu. 
on,  in  (prep,  with  abl.)  ;   on  this 

side,  citrd  (prep,  with  ace.)  ; 

of  time  or  instrument,  abl. ; 

—  this  account,  eo  (adv.)  or 
ob  earn  causam;  —  the  ground 
that,  quod,  conj.  (332). 

once  (for  all),  semel ;  —  on  a 
time,  olhn';  (of  time),  abl. 

one,  unus,  -a,  -um ;  gen.  -lus  ;  one 
.  .  .  another,  alius  .  .  .  alius; 
one  .  .  .  the  other,  alter  .  .  . 
alter ;  no  — ,  nemo,  -inis  ;  any 
one,  quwis ;  one  of  two,  alter, 
-era,  -erum ;  the  —  who,  is  qui : 

—  by — ,  singuli,  -ae,  -a,  (with 
nouns  pi.  in  form  but  sing,  in 
meaning,  213,  1),  unl,  -ae,  -a. 

only  (adv.),  tantum;  (altogeth- 
er), omnino  (adv.)  ;  if  — ,  du7n 
(conj.)  with  subj. 

opinion,  sententia,  -ae,  f. 

oppress,  opprimo,  -primere,  -pres- 
si,  -pressum. 

or  (conj.),  aut,  vel  (205.  1). 

orator,  orator,  -oris,  m. 

order,  or  give  orders,  jubeo,  jit- 
here,  jussl,  jussum  (ace.  and 
inf.,  342.  (2))  ;  order  special 
religious  services,  supplicdtio- 
nes  decerno,  -cernere,  -crevi,  -cre- 
tum ;  in  order  that  or  to,  ut, 
see  321 ;  (with  eomp.),  quo 
(with  subj.,  321,  Obs.  2). 

other,  alius,  -a,  -ud,  gen.,  -ius  ;  (of 
two),  alter,  -tera,  -terum  ;  with 
each  — ,  inter  se  or  sese. 

ought,  debeo,  -here,  -but,  -bttum ; 
(or,  see  286) ;  oportet,  -ere,  -uit, 
impers.  (with  ace.  and  inf.  as 
subject,  or  with  subst.  subj. 
clause,  343.  3). 

our,  noster,  -tra,  -trum. 

ourselves,  ipsi,  with  1st  person 
pi.  of  the  verb ;  reflex.,  nos. 


out  of,  e,  ex  (prep,  with  al)].). 

outside  of,  extra  (prep,  with  ace). 

over,  super  (prep,  with  ace). 

o-wn  (his,  their,  etc.),  suus,  -a, 
-um ;  (our  — ),  noster,  -tra, 
-trum;  (my  — ),  meus,  -a,  -um  ; 
proprius,  -a,  -um. 

ox,  bos,  bovis,  c. 


part,  ^ar.s,  -tis,  F. ;  or  gen.  (237). 
pass,    exigo,  -igere,  -tgi,  -actum; 

—  over,  trdnseo,  -ire,  -it,  -itum  ; 

—  by,  praetereo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum. 

■paXiewtly,  pdtienter  (adv.). 

pay,  pendo,  pendere,  pependi,  pen- 
sum;  (subst.),  merces,  -cedis,  f. 

peace,  pOx,  pdcis,  F. 

people,  populus,  -i,  m. 

perceive,  sentio,  sentire,  sensi,  sen- 
sum;  animadverto,  -ere,  -ti,  -ver- 
sus (with  ace). 

perform,  fdcio,  fdcere,  fe.cl,  fac- 
tum; conficio,  -ficere,  -feci,-fec- 
tum  ;  —  duties,  fungor,  fungi, 
functus  sum,  dep.  (306.  1.) 

perish,  pereo,  -ire,  -ii,  no  p.p. 

person,  see  290. 

pine-tree,  joinws,  -us  or  -i,  f. 

pity,  miseret,  miserere,  miseruit 
(314.  2)  ;  niisereor,  -erl,  -eritus 
or  -ertus  (315.  3). 

place  (subst.),  locus,  -i,  m.  ; 
(verb),  pono,  ponere,  posui, 
pdsitum;  place  around,  c/r- 
cumdo,  -dare,  -dedi,  datum ; 
take  place,  pass,  of  gero,  ge- 
rere,  gessi,  gestum. 

plain,  pldnities,  -el,  f. 

plan,  consilium,  -i,  N. ;  (system), 
ratio,  -onis,  f. 

Plato,  Plato,  -onis,  M. 

play,  ludo,  -dere,  -s'l,  -sum.. 

please  (give  satisfaction),  p/aceo, 
-ere,  -ui,  -itum  (dat.). 

pleasing,  acceptus,  -a,  -um  (adj.) ; 
grains,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 


70 


FIRST    STEPS  IN   LATIN. 


pleasure,  voluptds,  -atis,  f.  ;  with 

pleasure,  libente?^  (adv.). 
plough,    d7'o,    -are,    -dvi,    -atum; 

(noun),  drdtrum,  -i,  n. 
Po,  Pddus,  -I,  M. 
poet,  pdeta,  -ae,  m. 
point  out,  monstro,  -dre,-dvT,  -dtuni. 
Pompey,  Pompelus,  -i,  m. 
poor,  pauper,  -eris  (adj.). 
possession,  obtain,  jjotior,  -v-i, 

-Itus  sum  (306.  2). 
postman,  tdbelldrlus,  -i,  m. 
power   (in  .  .  .  of),  j^enes  (prep. 

with  ace). 
powerful, patens,  -tis  (adj.). 
praise  (subst.),  laiis,  laudls,  f.  ; 

(act    of   praising),    lauddliO, 

-vnis,  F. ;   (verb),  lauda,  -are, 

-dvi,  -dtum. 
prefer  (wish  rather),  7ndlo,  mal/e, 

mdlul,  no  p.}>.  (294) ;  antepona, 

-j)anere,  -posul,  -pasitum  (with 

ace.  and  dat.)  ;  praefero,-ferre, 

-trill,  -latum  (with  dat.). 
prepare,  pdro,  -are,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
present,    be,  adsum,  -esse,  -ful; 

—  at   or   in,    intersum,   -esse, 

-fuu 
preserve,    conservo,     -are,    -uvl, 

-dtum. 
pretend,  stmulo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum; 

dlsslmulo,  -are,  -drl,  -dtum. 
prevent,  prohibeo,  -tre,  -ui,  -itum 

(323.  1). 
price,  pretium,  -l,  n.  ;  304. 
prisoner  of  war,  captwus,  -I,  m. 
produce,  fruges,  -um,    f.    (pi.)  ; 

fructus,  -us,  M. 
profit,  prosum,    prudesse,   prvfui 

(with  dat.,  203). 
proraise, prdmissum, -i, x.;  (verb), 

promitto,  -mitt  ere,  -mist,  -missum; 

polliceor,  -Itceri,  -licitus  sum. 
property,  h<yna,  -drum  (n.  pi.). 
prosper,  secundo,  -dre,  no  perf., 

no  p.p. 
protection,  praestdium,  -ii,  n. 
provided,  dum,  dummodo  (327). 


providence,  7;royM/ew^?a,  -ae,  f. 
province,  pt'Oviiicia,  -ae,  f. 
prowess,  virtus,  -utis,  f. 
public  thanksgiving,  supplicdtiO, 

-onis,  F. 
punish,  punio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -Itum. 
punishment    (penalty),  poena, 

-ae,  F. ;  supplicium,  -il,  n. 
pupil,  discvpulus,  -I,  M. 
put  (place),  jjono,  ponere,  posul, 

pdsUum;  ( —  to  flight),  in  fu- 

gam  cunicio,  -icere,  -J  eel,  -jectum. 

Q. 

quaestor,  (piaestor,  -oris,  m. 
queen,  reglna,  -ae,  f. 
quiet,  quietus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

R. 

rapacious,  rdpdx,  -dcis  (adj.). 

rapidly,  celerlter  (adv.). 

rather  (had),  mdlo,  malle,  mdlul, 

no  p.p.  (294)  ;  potius  (adv.)  ; 

compar.  (151,  Obs.  1). 
reach  (come   to),  venio,  venire, 

veril,  ventum  (with  in  and  ace); 

pervenio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum. 
read,  lego,  legere,  legl,  ledum. 
receive,    acclpio,    -cipjere,    -cepl, 

-ceptum. 
recognize,  dgnosco,  -nOscere, -novl, 

-mtum  (or  cog-). 
recover  (to  — ,  intr.),  se  recipio, 

-cipere,  -cepl,  -cejjtum;  recipero 

(jcupero),    -dre,    -dvl,    -dtum : 

—   from    disease,    convdlesco, 

-escere,  -lul,  no  p.p. 
refresh,     reficio,     -ficere,    feci, 

-fectum. 
reign,  regno,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum;  in 

the  — of,  ab.  abs.  (260). 
rejoice,  gaudeo,  gaudere,  gdvlsus 

sum  (semi-dep.,  283). 
relate,  narro,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
relying,   fretus,  -a,  -um  (248.  2, 

Obs.  3). 


VOCABULARY. 


II. 


71 


remain  (wait),  maneo,  manere, 
mansl,  mansum;  (stay  behind), 
remdneo,  -ere,  -mansl,  -mansum. 

remember  (call to  mind),  i-emtnis- 
coi;  -iscl,  on  perf.  (dep.) ;  memi- 
ni, -me  (with  gen.  or  ace,  313). 

remind,  admoneo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum 
(with  ace.  pers.  and  gen.  of 
thing,  also  de  with  abl.). 

remove,  aufero,  -ferre,  ahstult, 
abldtum;  ( —  to  a  distance), 
removeo,  -ere,  -vi,  -turn  (or  a-). 

render,  reddo,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum. 

rene"w,  redintegro,  -are,  -dvi,  -alum. 

renovrned,  cldrus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

xe-pent,  poeniiet,  poenitere,  poemtu- 
it,  no  p.p.  (impers.)  (315.3  (3)). 

reply,  responsum,  -i,  N. 

report  (noun),  fdma,  -ae,  r.  ; 
(verb),  enuntio  (or  re-),  -are, 
-dvi,-dtum;  (divulge);  refero, 
-ferre,  -lull,  latum  (report). 

republic,  res,  rei,  publica,  -ae,  f. 

repulse,  repello  repellere,  repull, 
repulsum. 

restrain,  tempera,  -are,  -dvi,  -utmn; 
coerceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 

retreat,  se  recipio,  -cipere,  -sept, 
-ceptum ;  pedem,  refero,  -ferre, 
-tull,  -latum. 

return,  reverter,  -x^erfl,  -versus  sum 
dep.  (intr.)  ;  redeo,  -Ire,  -it, 
-itum  (inst.)  ;  reddo,  -dere, 
-didl,  -ditum  (trans.). 

revolution,  novae  res,  f.  (pi-)- 

re"ward,  praemium,  -i,  n. 

Rhine,  Rhenus,  -i,  m, 

rich,  dives,  divitis  (149.  4). 

rise,  orior,  orirl  or  ori,  ortus  sum 
(dep.)  ;  surgo,  surgere,  surrexi, 
surrectum. 

river,  fluvius, -I,  M.;flumen,  -inis,  N. 

river-bank,  rqm,  -ae,  f. 

road  (traveled  road),  via,  -ae,  f.  ; 
(journey),  iter,  ilineris,  N. 

rob,  spolio  (or  ex-),  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum 
(with  ace.  and  abl.). 

rock,  saxum,  'i,  N. 


roll,  volvo',  volvere,  volvl,  volutum. 

Roman,  Romdnus,  -a,  -um. 

Rome,  Roma,-ae,  f. 

rugged,  asper,  -era,  -erum  (adj.). 

rule,  rego,  -ere,  rexi,  rectum  (ace.)  ; 
( — the  republic),  gero,  gerere, 
gessi,  gestum;  impero,  -dre,  -dvi, 
-dtum (with  dat.) ;  prOsum,  -esse, 
-fill,  no  p.p.  (dat.). 

run,  curro,  currtre,  cucurri,  cur- 
sum ;  (flee),  fugio^  fugere, 
fugl,  fugitum. 


sad,  tristis,  -e  (adj.). 

safe,  tiitus,  -a,  -um  ;  salvus,  -a,  -um 

(adj.). 
safety,  sdlus,  -ulis,  f. 
sailor,  nauta,  -ae,  m. 
sake,   for   the,   causa   or   gratia 

(abl.  followed  by  gen.). 
same,  idem,  eadem,  idem. 
satisfy,  satisfacio,   -facere,   -feci, 

-factum  (with  dat.). 
say,   dico,    dicere,    dixi,    dictum; 

(report),/e'ro,/erre,  tull,  Idtum; 

(says  he),  inquit  (placed  after 

one  or  more  words  of  a  direct 

quotation). 
scholar,  discipulus,  -i,  m. 
school,  ludus,  -I,  M. 
Scipio,  Scipid,  -onis,  M. 
sea,  mare,  -is,  n. 
sea-shore,  ora  7ndritima. 
seated,  be,   cOnsido,  -dere,  -sedl, 

-sessum. 
see,  vtdeo,  videre,  vldi,  visum. 
seek,  peto,  petere,  petlvl  petitum  ; 

quaero,  quaerere,  quaesivl,  quae- 

situm. 
seem,    videor,    vuleri,    visus   sum 

(pass,  of  video) . 
seize  (take  possession  of),  occupo, 

-are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
select,  deligo,  -ere,  delegi,  delectum. 
self,  ipse,  -a,  -um;    (reflex,  se  or 

pers.  pron.). 


T2 


FIRST   STEPS   IN   LATIN. 


sell,  vendo,  -dere,  -didi,  -ditum;  be 

sold,  veneo,  -Ire,  -h  -itum. 
senate,  senatus,  -us,  m. 
send,  mitto,  mittere,  misi,  missum; 

( —  forward),  praemitto,  -ere, 

-m'tsi,  -misum. 
sense,  sensus,  -us,  m. 
September  (month  of) ,  Septem- 

her,   -hris  -bre   (adj.)    (mensis 

being  understood). 
servant,  sei^viis,  -i,  m.  ;   man  ser- 
vant, famulus,  -I,    M. ;    maid 

servant,  ancilla,  -ae,  f. 
serviceable,  utUis,  -e  (adj.). 
sesterce,   sestertius,  -i,  m.  ;    one 

thousand  — ,  sestertium,  -i,  n. 
set    out,     proficiscor,     -ficisci, 

-fectus  sum,  dep. 
severe,  gravis,  -e  (adj.). 
severely,  grdviter  (adv.). 
shade,  umbra,  -ae,  f. 
shall,  sign  of  fut.  tense  or  subj. 
sharp,  (leer,  -cris,  -ere  (adj.). 
she,  see  he. 
sheep,  (jvis,  -is,  f. 
ship,  nCwis,  -is,  F. 
shore,  ora,  -ae,  f.  ;    (of  the  sea), 

litus,  -oris,  N. 
short  (adj.),  brevis,  -e;  parvus,  -a, 

-um;  (scanty),  exiguus,  -a,  -um. 
should  (implying  duty),  dportet, 

-ere,  -uit  (impers.);  otherwise 

by  subj.  (278,  326). 
shoulder,  umerus,  -i,  M. 
show,  monstro,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum: 

ostendo,   -ere,   -tendi,   -tentum ; 

(subst.),  species,  -ei,  f. 
shudder,  liorreo,  horrere,  no  perf., 

no  p.p. ;  —  at,  perJwr?'esco,  etc. 
Sicily,  Sicilia,  -ae,  f. 
side,  Idtus,  -eris,  n.  ;  (on  this  — ), 

citrd  (prep,  with  ace.)  ;  on  all 

sides,  undique  (adv.). 
signal,  slgnum,  -i,  n. 
silent,  be,  tdceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 
silver,  argentum,  -i,  N. 
since,  quoniam,  cum,  conj.  (332) ; 

abl.  abs. 


singing,  cantus,  -us,  m. 

sister,  soror,  -oris,  f. 

sit,  sedeo,  sedere,  sedl,  sessum.. 

six,  sex ;  (six  hundred),  sescenti, 
-ae,  -a. 

sixteen,  sedecim. 

skilled,  pm/f/.s,  -a,  -um  (148). 

sky,  caelum,  -i,  n. 

slaughter,  clddes,  -is,  f. 

slave  (male),  servus,  -l,  m.  ;  (fe- 
male), serva,  -ae,  f. 

sleep,  dormio,  -Ire,  -wl  or  -it,  -itum. 

&vQ.al\,  parvus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

sno"w,  nix,  nwis,  f. 

so,  ita,  sic  (adv.);  (so  great), 
tantus,  -a,  -um ;  (so  many), 
tot,  tarn;  multi. 

soldier,  miles,  -itis,  c. 

some  one, quidam,  dliquis;  some, 
dllquantum  (236)  ;  nonnulli ; 
(somehodj) ,  quispiam ;  (some- 
thing), dliquid ;  see  237. 

some  .  .  .  other,  dlius  .  .  .  alius. 

aon,  filius,  -i,  m. 

soon,  mox  (adv.);  cito  (adv.). 

soul,  animus,  -i,  m. 

sovereignty,  regrmm,  -i,  n. 

Spain,  Hispdnia,  -ae,  r. 

spare, />rtrco,  parcere,  peperci ;'no 

P-P- 
speak,  loquor,  loqui,  locutus  sum 

(dep.);    (of  an  orator),  dico, 

dicer e,  dixl,  dictum. 
spear,  sdgitta,  -ae,  f. 
speech,  oratio,  -onis,  F. 
spring,  ver,  veris,  N. 
stable,  stdbtlis,  -e  (adj.). 
stand,  sto,  stare,  steti,  statum. 
standard,  slgnum,  -i,  N. 
star,  Stella,  -ae,  f. 
state,  civitds,  -dtis,  F. ;  res  publico, 

gen.;  reipublicae,  f. 
stone,  lapis,  -idis,  M. ;  saxum,  -i,  N. 
stork,  ciconia,  -ae,  F. 
storm    (assault),    expugno,   -are, 

-dvi,  -dtum;  storm  (noun),  tem- 

pestds,  -dtis,  F. 
story,  fdbula,  -ae,  f. 


VOCABULARY. 


IT. 


73 


strange    (new),    novus,   -a,   -um 

(adj.)  ;  (wonderful),  miru's,  -a, 

-um  (adj.). 
stream,  riviis,  -i,  m. 
strip,  spolio,  -are,  -dvi,  -atum  (a))l.). 
strive  (to  do  a  thing),  nltor,  nift, 

msus  or  nixus,  dep. 
strong,    vdlidus,   -a,  -um   (adj.); 

firm  us,  -a,  -um,  (adj.). 
strongly,  ?Y7/r^i(T;  Jirmiter ;  fortX- 

ter  (adv.). 
study,  studeo,  -ere,  -id,  no  p.p. 
subdue,  suhlgo,  -tgere,  tgi,  -actum. 
Suessiones,  SuessiCmes,  -um,  m. 

(pi.). 
suitable  {^t), aphis, -a, -inn  (adj.); 

iduneus,  -a,  -um.,  adj.  with  ad 

and  ace,  or  with  dat.  (147. 1) ; 

also  with  rel.  clause  (324.  1) . 
summer,  aestus,  -dtis,  r. ;   mid — , 

media  aestCis. 
summon,  voco,  -are,  -fwl,  -dtum, : 

or,  evuco,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum.. 
sun,  srd,  srdis,  m. 
sure,  certiis,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
surrender  (noun),  dedttio,  -onis, 

F. ;  (verb),  dedo,  -dere, -didi,  -dl- 

tum;  trddo,  -ere,  -dedi,  -ditwn. 
surround,   cingo,   cingere,  cinxl, 

cinctum ;  circumsto,  -stdre,  -stetl, 

no  p.p. ;  circumeo,  -ire,  -h,  -itum. 
sustain,    sustineo,   -tin ere,    -tinul, 

-tentum. 
swift   (rivers),  7-dpidus,   -a,   -um 

(adj.)  ;  (persons,  etc.),  veldx, 

-ocis  (adj.). 
swiftness,  celeritds,  -dtis,  F. 
s^wim,  ndto,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
s-word,  ferrum,   -i,   n.  ;    glddius, 

-1,  M. 


take,  cdpio,  caper e,  cepi,  caption  : 
(possession  of),  occupo,  -dre, 
-dvl,  -dtum;  (place),  passive 
of  gero,  gerere^  gessl^  gestum; 
(care),  euro,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum. 


talent,  tdlentum,  -I,  x. ;  (ability), 
ingenium,  -i,  N. 

teach,  doceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -tum,  with 
two  ace.  (185). 

teacher,  doctor,  -oris,  m.  ;  mdgis- 
ter,  -trl,  m. 

tell,  narro,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtnm  ;  dlco, 
dlcere,  dixl,  dictum. 

temper,  animus,  -i,  m. 

ten,  decern. 

tenacious,  tendx,  -de is  (adj.). 

tenth,  dechnus,-a.,-um  (num.  adj.). 

Tarentine,  Tdrentlnus,  -a,  -um 
(adj.). 

territory  or  territories,  fines, 
-ium,  M.  (pi.). 

than,  quam,  or  abl.  case  (143). 

that,  il/e,  ilia,  illud  (234);  is,  ea,  id 
(238);  iste,  ista,  istud  (234  and 
235,  Obs.  1);  (rel.)  qui,  quae, 
quod  (240)  ;  (in  final  clauses), 
ut  (utl)  (321)  ;  (with  comp.), 
quo  (321,  Obs.  2)  ;  —  not,  ue 
(Obs.  before  321)  ;  (in  con- 
secutive clauses)  '^322);  (after 
negatives,  etc.),  quia  (323,  Obs. 
2;  321.3);  (after  verbs  of  fear- 
ing), ne  (321.  2)  ;  would  — 
(278.1  (1))  (321  and  322). 

theatre,  tliedtrum,  -1,  n. 

their  (referring  to  subject),  suus, 
-a,  -um.:  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum ;  (of 
them,  of  these),  gen.  pi.  of  is 
(238) ;  omitted  when  implied 
from  context  and  notemphatic. 

themselves,  ip)si,  -ae,  -a  (intens., 
238.  3)  ;  (reflex.,  sul,  silu,  se 
or  sese),  (230). 

then  (of  time),  tnm  (adv.)  ; 
(secondly),  deinde  (adv.) ;  tunc 
(adv.). 

there,  ibi,  illic  (adv.)  ;  (thither), 
eo  (adv.) ;  (there  is),  est : 
(is  there),  estne ;  (there  are 
some),  see  324. 

therefore,  itdque,  igXtur  (usually 
following  the  first  word  of 
the  sentence). 


74 


FIRST  STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


these,  see  this ;  (these  things), 
Imec  (234). 

they,  see  he ;  dat.  pi.  of  the, 
demon.  (288). 

thick,  densiis,  -a,  -um ;  (wall), 
ldtui<,  -a,  -um. 

thing,  res,  re'i,  f.  ;  neut.  sing.  adj. 
(83.  4). 

think,  piito,  -are,  -avl,  -atum; 
(form  an  idea),  cbcjlto,  -are, 
-avl, -at  um ;  ( j  udge)  ,judtco,-are, 
-avl,  -alum;  (as  a  view,  be  sen- 
sible of),  senfio,  -tire,  -s't,  -surn  ; 
(estimate,©!' an  official  opinion 
as  a  senator),  censeo,  -ere,  -ul, 
-nm;  (an  individual  opinion), 
opinor,  -url,  -fitus  sum,  dep. 

third,  tertius,  -a,  -um  (ord.  num. 
adj.). 

thirst  (noun),  slth,  -is,  y. ;  (verb), 
sltio,  -Ire,  -ivl  or  -il,  no  p.p. 

thirteen,  tredecim. 

this,  Idc,  hare,  hoc  (234)  ;  some- 
thing to  be  mentioned,  Hie, 
ilia,  illud. 

this  side  of,  cXtra  (prep.with  ace). 

thoroughly, j;/-o /ye  (adv.). 

those,  nil,  -ae,  -a  (234),  anteced. 
of  rel.,  pi.  of  is;  tliese  .  .  . 
those,  hi  .  .   .  nil. 

though,  quamrls  (331) ;  Uat 
(331);  even— (^/before 331). 

thousand,  mllle  (213.  2) . 

three,  tres,  tria  (num.  adj.). 

through,  per  (prep,  with  ace.)  ; 
(cause),  abl. 

thrOTV,  jdcio,  Juctre,  jecl,  jactum ; 
—  to,  adicio,  -ere,  -Jecl,  -jectum. 

Tiber,  Tiber  is,  -is,  m.  ;  (ace. -//;?). 

time,  tempus,  -oris,  N. ;  (season), 
tempestas,  -at is,  f.  ;  (times), 
num.  adv. 

timid,  timldus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Titus,  Titus,  -I,  M. 

to  (of  motion),  ad,  or  in,  prep, 
with  ace.  (200.  3)  ;  (of  rela- 
tion), dat.,  or  by  the  infin. 
before  a  verb ;  denoting  pur- 


pose (321,  and  Obs.  2  and  3). 
to-day,  hodie  (adv.). 
together  (in  company  with),  una 

(adv.)  ;  (at  once),  shnul  (adv.). 
to-morrow,  axis  (adv.). 
top  (of),  summus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
towards,  ad  (prep,  with  ace.)  ; 

(of  time),  sub  (prep,  with  ace, 

or  abl.)  ;  (into  or  against),  in 

(with  ace). 
tO"wer,  turris,  -is,  f. 
to^wn,  ojipldum,  -l,  n. 
train,  exerceo,  -ere,  -ul,  -Itum. 
transfer,    transfero,   -ferre,   -lull, 

-latum. 
treachery,  prddltio,  -Dnis,  f. 
treason,  prddltio,  -dnis,  f. 
treat,  dr/o,  agere,  egl,  actum. 
tremble,  contremisco^  -iscere,  -mul. 
tribune,  t7'lbrmus,  -I,  m. 
tribuneship,  trlbunutus,  -us,  m. 
tribute,  stipend iurn,  -il,  n. 
triumph,     triumpho,     -are,     -avl, 

-dtum;  (noun),  triump)hus, -I,  m. 
troops,  cdpiae,  -drum,  f.  (pi.). 
troublesome,   molestus,   -a,  -um 

(adj.). 
true,  verus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
trust,  credo,  -dtre,  -dull,  -dltum ; 

fldo,  fid  ere,  flsus  sum  (semi- 

"dep.,  i283^. 
truth  (true  things),  vera,  N.  (pL), 

Veritas,  -dtis,  v. 
tumult,  tumultus,  -us,  m. 
turn  (verb),  verto, vertere,  vertl,ver- 

sum ;  (adv.,  by  turn),  invicem. 
Tuscans,  Tuscl,  -drum,  M.  (pi.). 
two,  duo,  -ae^   -0  (num.   adj.)  ; 

(with  nouns  pi.  in  form,  but 

sing,   in   meaning),  blni,  -ae, 

-a  (213.  3). 


uncertain,  incertus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
under,  siib  (with  vei'bs  of  motion) 

with  ace. ;  (with  verbs  of  rest) 

with  abl.,  or  see  259. 


VOCABULARY. 


II. 


75 


understanding,  miellerlus,  -iis,  .m. 
undertake,  suscipio,  -crptrc,  -ccju, 

-ceptum. 
undertaking,   inceptum,    -l,    n.  ; 

(work),  opus,  -eris,  n. 
unequal,  iiiipar,  -dris  (adj.). 
unfriendly,     inimlcus,     -a,    -um 

unless,   ntsi   (conj. ;    with    subj. 

326). 
unlike,  dissXnulk,  -e  (adj.). 
until   (=  up  to),  acZ,  prep,  with 

ace;  dum,  donee,  quoad,  conj. 

(334)  ;      (before),    antequam, 

priusquam,  (336) . 
unTvilling,  be,  nolo,  nolle,  nolui 

(294). 
un-willing,  inoitus,  -a,-um  (adj.). 
unworthy,  indlqnm,  -a,  -imi  (307. 

Obs.  4). 
upon,  in,  snper  (200)  ;  or  see  verb 

or  other  word  of  a  phrase,  as 

loait  for ;  see  wait, 
us,  objective  of  we,  see  229.  1 ; 

278. 
use  (verb),  ulor,  TUi,  miis  sum  dep. 

(306. 1) ;  (noun),  usus,  -us,  m.  ; 

to  —  force,  vhii  fdcere. 


valor,  virtus,  -at is,  r. 

value,  aesttmo,  -are,  -avi,  -dtiun ; 

exlstlmo,     -are,     -Ctrl,      -alum; 

(noun),  pretium,  -1,  n. 
Verres,  Verres,  -is,  m. 
very  (superlative  degree)  ;  valde 

(adv.)  ;  mdf/ndpere  (adv.)  ;  — 

easily  (after  neg.),  satis  com- 

modi;    (self),   see   238,   239, 

Ex.  3. 
vessel,  ndvis,  -is,  f.  ;  vds,  vdsis,  ]sr. 
vexed  at,  he,piget,  pigere,  pu/uit 

and  pigXtian  est  (impers.,  3i4). 
victory,  victoria,  -ae,  f. 
villa,  villa,  -ae,  f. 
Volsinii,  Vol  sin  il,  -drum. 
vulture,  vultur,  -liris,  m. 


W. 

wage,  gero,  gerer-e,  gessl,  gestum; 

(upon  or  against),  Infero,  in- 
fer re,  iutull,  illdtum  (with  dat. 

and  ace). 
"wait,    —  for,  exspecto,  -dre,  -del, 

-dtum;  (remain),  mdneo,   ntd- 

nere,  mansl,  mansum. 
walk,  or  take   a  walk,  amhulo, 

-dre,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
"Wall  (general  term),  murus,  -i,  m.; 

(of  a  city),   moenia,  -ium,  x. 

(pi.)  ;    (of  a  house),  paries, 

-etis,  M. ;    (rampart   about   a 

camp),  vdllum,  -i,  n. 
wander,  erro,  -are,  -dvl,  -dtum: 

(about),  vdgor,  -dri,  -dtus  sum 

(dep.). 
■want,  cdreo,  -ere,  -in,  -itum  :  (to 

be  wanting),  desum,  -esse,  -fu. 
war,    helium,    -i,    n.  ;     (wage  — 

against),  infero,  mferre,  intuit, 

illdtum;  (in  — ),  helll  (271. 1). 
warn,  moneo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 
waste,  lay,  vasto,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum  ; 

pdpulor,  -dri,  dtus  sum,  dep. 
watch,  vigilia,  -ae,  v. ;   — men, 

vtgiliae,    -drum,    m.  ;     (verb), 

ingilo,  -dre,  -dvl,  -dtum. 
water,  aqua,  -ae,  f. 
wa-ve,fluctus,  -Rs,  m. 
way,  via,  -ae,  f. 
we,  nos,  see  I. 
weak,  grow,  languEsco,  -uescere, 

-ui  (no  p.p.). 
weapon,  teium,  -t,  n. 
wearied,   fessus,   -a,    -um;    (be 

weary,  pained),  (verb),  taedet, 

taedere,  taeduit   or  taesum  est 

impers.  (314). 
weeping,y?ew.s,_^enf/.s(pres.part.) 
well,  Mne  (adv.);  (adj.,  in  good 

health),  sdnus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
went,  see  go. 
what,  interrog.,  qui,  quae,    quod 

(adj.)  and  quid  (subst.)  ;  — 

rel.,  id  quod ;  see  240  and  245. 


7G 


FIRST   STEPS    IN    LATIN. 


■whatever,  qulcumque,  quaecum- 
que,  quodcumque  (indef.  rel. 
pron.)  ;  any  — ,  quivis,  quaems, 
quodvls  (adj.),  and  quidris 
(subst.)  indef.  pron. 

^vhat  o'clock,  quota  hum. 

when,  cum  (338  and  339),  vln 
(or  an  appositive)  ;  or  259; 
(when  ?),  qtiando  ?  (adv.),  post- 
quam,  posted,  etc.  (333). 

where,  tdn  (interrog.  &  rel.  adv.). 

wherefore,  quamdhrein,  qudre, 
tmde. 

■whether,  nwn,  ne  (91.  1,  a,  h,  c). 

which  (of  two),  y7/r/- ;  (rel.),  see 
•who. 

while,  dnm  (334). 

■white,  alhii.«,  -a,  -vm  (adj.). 

■who  (which),  I'elative,  qui,  quae, 
quod (321,324:);  who  (what), 
interrog".,  (/uis  ((/ul).  quae,  quod 
(quid)  (245). 

■whoever,  qu~icu)nque,  (adj.)  qiiae- 
cuuique,  quodrwiique  (indef. 
rel.  pron.)  ;  —  you  please,  qui- 
nbet,  quael7hef,  quodllbet,  and 
(subst.),  quidnhef,  indef .  pron. 

■w^hose,  rel.,  see  who. 

■why,  cnr  (adv.)  ;  quid  (neut.  ace. 
used  adv.);  (for  what  reason), 
qua  dp  causa. 

■wide,  /dtus,  -a,  -uni  (adj.). 

■will,  rd/o,  or  (siibj.  or  sign  of 
future  tense)  ;  (noun),  volun- 
tas, -Citis,  ¥. ;  testdmentum,  -i,  n. 

wind,  renins,  -I,  M. 

■winter,  liiems,  -is,  r. ;  (winter 
quarters),  Jnherna,  -drum,  N. 
(]>!.)  (to  winter  or  pass  — ), 
hinno,  -are,  -drl,  -dtum. 

■wise,  sapiens,  -ntis  (adj.). 

■wish,  vdio,  velle,  vdlul  (no  p.p., 
294);  ( — well  to),  ciipio,  -ere, 
-wl,  -Ifum  (with  dat.). 

with,  abl.  case  (309) ;  (in  com- 
pany — ),  cum  (prep.,  81.  Obs,, 
or  259)  ;  —  each  other,  inter 
se  or  sese. 


'within,  intra  (prep,  with  ace.)  ; 

sign  of  abl.  of  time  (196). 
without,  sme  (prep,  with  abl.)  ; 

or   261.    X.    5    (with    partic. 

noun  after  neg.  expressions) 

quln  (323.  2). 

■wolf,  lupus,  -I,  M. 

■woman,  mulier,  miilierisy  f. 

wood  (forest),  silra,  -ae,  f.  ; 
(fuel),  lignum, -I,  i'i.',  (building- 
wood),  materia,  -ae,  f. 

■worthy,  dlgnus,  -a,  -um  (adj., 
307.  Obs.  4)  ;  with  rel.  clause 
with  subj.  (324.1). 

would  (subj.,  would  that,  278, 
326),  utlnam. 

■wound,  rulnero,  -are,  -dvl,  -atMm; 
(noun),  rulints,  -eris,  n. 

■write,  scrlbo,  scrlhere,  scrij^sl, 
scriptum. 


year,  annus,  -I,  m.;  (be  in  the 
year,  to  136  —  old),  annum  — 
ago,  dgere,  egt,  actum  ;  the  — 
after,  anno  post  (307.  Obs.  G). 

yearly,  qudtannls  (adv.). 

yes,  repeat  the  verb  with  or  with- 
out etiam,  verum,  etc.  (347). 

yesterday,  herl. 

yet  (nevertheless),  tdmen ;  (not 
yet),  nondum  (adv.), 

you,  sing.,  tu ;  pi.,  vos;  to  —  (^i.e. 
where  you  are),  istu,  c.  (adv.). 

your,  sing.,  tuus,  -a,  -um;  (of 
more  than  one),  vester,  -tra, 
-trmn. 

yourself,  tui,  t1lA,  te,  pers.  pron. 
used,  reflex  (230  and  1). 

youth  (young  man),  ddulescens, 
-entis,  c. ;  Juvenis,  -is,  c. ; 
(younger),  minor  ndtu  (adj.); 
(abst.  n.),  adidescentia,  -ae,  f. 


Z. 


'  Zeno,  Zeno,  -onis,  M. 


BERWICK    &    SMITH,    PRINTERS,    BOSTON. 


Latin   Text-Books. 


Allen  &  Greenough's  Latin  Grammar. 

A  Latin  Grammar  for  schools  and  colleges,  founded  on  Comparative 
Grammar.  By  J.  H.  Allen,  Lecturer  at  Harvard  University,  and  J.  B, 
Greenough,  Professor  of  Latin  at  Harvard  University.  i2mo.  Half 
morocco.  348  pages.  With  new  and  greatly  enlarged  Index.  Mailing 
price,  $1.25;    Introduction,  $1.12;   Allowance  for  old  b6ok,  45  cts. 

The  standing  of  this  Grammar  is  now  so  well  established  that  no 
extended  comments  or  description  need  be  given. 

1.  It  has  been  used  and  recommended  by  teachers  of  Latin  every- 
where,—  particularly  in  the  large  and  in  the  distinctively  classical 
schools,  where  an  independent  judgment  might  be  expected. 

2.  Its  firmest  friends  are  those  who  have  used  it  longest. 

3.  The  clearness,  simplicity,  conciseness,  convenience  of  size  and 
arrangement,  and  economy  of  matter,  essential  in  a  class-room  man- 
ual, have  been  secured  without  sacrifice  of  rigid  scholarship,  as  is 
shown  by  the  emphatic  endorsements  of  eminent  authorities. 

4.  To  place  before  the  public  in  authentic  form  the  exact  status 
of  the  question,  the  publishers  print  a  series  of  testimonials  from 
prominent  professors  and  teachers,  representing  132  colleges  and 
452  schools.  The  latter  include  about  72,000  students.  These 
letters,  which  have  a  judicial  value  as  the  independent  judgments  of 
competent  and  disinterested  men,  pronounce  the  grammar 

"  Especially  suited  to  beginners."     "  Brief  and  concise." 

"  Broad,  comprehensive,  and  complete."     "  Simple  and  clear." 

"  Thorough,  accurate,  and  scholarly." 

"  Systematic,  scientific,  and  philosophical." 

"Practical,  and  satisfactory  to  teachers  and  to  students." 

"The  best  extant."     {Send  for  the  circular.'] 

At  the  present  time,  inasmuch  as  the  grammar  has  no  longer 
against  it  the  natural  conservatism  of  the  schools,  and  the  no  less 
natural  prejudice  of  an  entire  corps  of  teachers  trained  in  the  methods 
of  other  books,  its  continued  and  increased  success  is  not  surprising. 


LA  TIN. 


91 


Allen  &  Greenough's  New  Ccesar. 

Seven  books.  Illustrated.  Edited  by  Prof.  W.  F.  Allen,  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Wisconsin,  J.  H.  Allen,  of  Cambridge,  and  H.  P.  Judson, 
Prof,  of  History,  University  of  Minnesota,  with  a  special  vocabulary 
by  Prof.  J.  B.  Greenough,  of  Harvard  College.  556  pages,  red  edges, 
bound  in  half  morocco.  Mailing  price,  $1.35  ;  for  Introduction,  $1.25; 
Allowance  for  an  old  book  in  exchange,  50  cents. 


The  publication  of  the  new  Caesar  was  the  third  step  toward  the 
perfecting  of  a  series  which,  even  in  its  first  draft,  was  received  by 
eminent  authorities  as  marking  a  new  era  in  the  study  of  Latin; 
and,.like  the  first  two  steps, — the  new  grammar  (revised  in  1877), 
and  Greenough's  Virgil  (issued  in  1881),  —  it  has  been  most  cor- 
dially approved  by  scholars  and  teachers,  as  the  opinions  quoted 
below  will  indicate. 

The  prime  object  of  this  edition  is  to  help  the  student  with  each 
sentence,  to  put  before  his  mind  the  same  picture  which  that  sen- 
tence suggested  to  the  intelligent  Roman  reader.  ' 

The  Commentaries  are  simply  a  7nilitary  history^  —  a  story  of 
battle  and  siege.  Hence  it  is  clear  that  to  read  the  book  under- 
standingly  the  student  should  have  a  definite  notion  of  a  Roman 
army  and  its  methods.  So  that  while  the  annotation  has  been 
most  faithfully  done  in  all  respects,  special  care  has  been  taken 
with  the  military  notes  contributed  by  Professor  Judson. 

It  is  attempted  to  give,  in  the  light  of  the  latest  scholarship,  a 
picture  of  the  Roman  soldier  of  Caesar,  —  his  dress,  his  arms,  his 
food.  We  study  the  tactics  of  the  legions,  and  see  their  evolutions 
on  the  march  and  in  battle,  their  work  and  life  in  camp.     These 


92  LA  TIN. 


points  are  illustrated  by  forty-five  cuts  and  diagrams,  twelve 
elaborate  plans  of  the  most  important  battles  and  sieges,  and  a 
double-page  colored  map  of  Gaul,  revised  according  to  the  most 
recent  investigations,  —  features  not  in  any  other  English  edition. 

The  Vocabulary  attempts  to  give,  first,  the  etymological  mean- 
ing of  each  word  so  far  as  is  possible  ;  second,  the  general  meanings 
of  the  words,  representing  the  conceptions  as  they  appeared  to  the 
Romans  ;  third,  such  renderings  as  may  be  necessary  to  present  the 
thought  in  a  suitable  English  form.  In  the  last  case  care  is  taken 
to  indicate  by  the  use  of  phrases  and  by  notes  the  difference  between 
the  Roman  and  the  English  conceptions. 

In  giving  the  etymologies,  the  actual  mode  of  formation  in  each 
case,  so  far  as  it  is  known,  is  shown,  and  all  the  elements  which 
have  entered  into  the  formation  are  noted. 

This  edition  follows,  with  slight  change  of  orthography,  the  text 
of  Nipperdey,  the  more  important  various  readings  being  given  in 
the  notes.  References  are  given  to  the  Grammars  of  Allen  & 
Greenough,  Gildersleeve,  and  Harkness. 

Though  the  Caesar  was  not  placed  in  the  hands  of  teachers  for 
examination  until  the  middle  of  August,  1885,  when  in  many  cases 
books  had  been  selected  and  ordered,  it  was  almost  immediately 
adopted  by  about  500  institutions.  The  indications  are  that  the 
fall  of  1886  will  find  it  in  nearly  or  quite  1000  schools. 

Letters  received  by  the  publishers  specify  among  others  these 

POINTS  OF   EXCEI.I.ENCE. 

FIRST.  The  judicious  notes,  —  their  full  grammatical  refer- 
ences, crisp  idiomatic  renderings,  scholarly  interpretations  of  diffi- 
cult passages,  clear  treatment  of  indirect  discourse,  the  helpful  maps, 
diagrams,  and  pictures  ;  in  particular,  the  military  notes,  throwing 
light  on  the  text,  and  giving  life  and  reality  to  the  narrative. 

SECOND.  The  vocabulary,  —  convenient,  comprehensive,  and 
scholarly,  combining  the  benefits  of  the  full  lexicon  with  the  advan- 
tages of  the  special  vocabulary. 

THIRD.  The  mechanical  features  of  the  volume,  its  clear  type, 
convenient  size  and  shape,  superior  paper,  and  attractive  binding. 

FOURTH.  In  general,  this  edition  supplies  all  that  a  book 
can  supply,  leaving  the  teacher  time  and  strength  for  his 
proper  work  of  instruction,  —  the  work  that  a  book  cannot  do. 


Greenough's  Virgil. 


Intro. 
Price. 

Allow. 
Old  Book. 

$i.6o 

$0.40 

1. 12 

1.60 

1. 12 

I.CXD 

•75 

Containing  Life  of  the  Poet,  Introductions,  a  Synopsis  preceding  each 
Book,  and  an  Index  of  Plants.  Also  full  illustrations  from  ancient  ob- 
jects of  art.  Fully  annotated,  for  School  and  College  Use,  by  J.  R. 
Greenough  of  Plarvard  University. 

The  text  follows  Ribbeck  in  the  main,  variations  being  noted  in  the 
margin ;  and  the  references  are  to  Allen  &  Greenough's,  Gildersleeve's, 
and  Harkness's  Latin  Grammars.     Supplied  in  the  following  editions : 

Mail. 

Price. 
Bucolics  and  Six  Books  of  ^neid,  with  Vocab.  .  .  .  $1-75 
Bucolics  and  Six  Books  of  ^neid,  without  Vocab.  .  •  1.25 
Bucolics,  Georgics,  and  the  iEneid  complete,  with  Notes  1.75 
Georgics,  and  last  Six  Books  of  JE,ne.id,  with  Notes     .     .     1.25 

Vocabulary  to  Virgil's  Complete  Works i.io 

Complete  Text  of  Virgil 85 

The  notes  are  designed  to  give  not  only  what  may  serve  the 
learner  in  the  bare  understanding  of  the  text,  but,  along  with  it, 
some  hint  of  that  wealth  of  traditional  interpretation  which  is  more 
important,  perhaps,  in  the  study  of  Virgil  than  in  that  of  any  other 
ancient  poet. 

The  many  wood-cuts,  taken  from  ancient  objects  of  art,  will  serve 
to  illustrate  the  poet's  conception  better  than  annotations  alone 
could  do. 

In  preparing  the  Vocabulary  to  accompany  his  Virgil,  or  for  use 
with  other  editions,  the  author  has  had  two  things  in  view :  first,  to 
supply  as  much  information  as  was  possible  in  regard  to  the  history 
and  uses  of  the  Latin  words,  so  that  the  book  sliould  not  be  a  mere 
key  to  translate  by,  but  should  also  furnish  means  for  the  study  of 
the  language  itself;  and,  secondly,  at  the  same  time  to  give  or  sug- 
gest a  suitable  English  expression  for  every  passage. 

The  actual  quantity  of  vowels,  where  known,  has  been  indicated, 
irrespective  of  syllabic  quantity,  in  order  to  aid  the  proper  pronun- 
ciation of  Latin  words. 


Tracy  Peck,  Professor  of  Latin, 
Yale  College  :  The  Vocabulary,  both  in 
plan  and  execution,  is  superior  to  any 
school-book  vocabulary  known  to  me, 
{March  1,  1883.) 

Henry  Preble,  Tulor  in  Latin,  Har- 


vard College :  I  am  much  pleased  with 
it.  The  notes  seem  to  be  full  of  valua- 
ble suggestion,  and  the  Vocabulary  is 
a  real  improvement  upon  anything  of 
the  kind  which  I  have  seen  before. 
{Feb.  II,  1883.) 


A  Hand-Book  of  Latin  Synonymes. 

Based    on    ^'  Meissner's    Kurzgefasste    LateiniscJie    Synonyviik.^''      By 

»  Edgar  S.  Shumway,  A.M.,   Adjunct  Professor  (in  charge]  of  Latin, 

Rutgers  College  ;    Principal  of  the  Chautauqua  Academia;   Editor  of 

Latine.    Sq.  i6mo.    Leatherette,  flexible.    60  pp.    Introd.  price,  30  cts. 

The  aim  in  this  compendium  is  to  mark  clearly  and  concisely  the 
distinctions  between  synonymes  used  by  the  classical  authors.  These 
are  arranged  in  some  two  hundred  lists.  Each  list  is  based  on  the 
English  word  which  most  fully  expresses  the  general  meaning  of 
words  in  the  list.  Each  synonyme  is  printed  in  heavy  type,  to  catch 
the  eye.  These  lists  are  arranged  and  numbered  alphabetically,  so 
that  the  student  who  wishes  the  Latin  synonymes  for  an  English 
word  can  find  them  readily.  A  carefully-prepared  Latin  index 
renders  it  just  as  easy  to  find  synonymes  for  the  Latin  word.  In 
marking  distinctions,  especial  use  is  made  of  derivations.  Directions 
are  often  given  to  prevent  incorrect  use  of  terms  by  the  student  of 
Latin  composition.  A  list  of  simpler  synonymes  is  indicated  (by 
stars)  for  the  use  of  elementary  students.  The  hand-book  will  be 
found  invaluable  in  not  only  preparatory  but  also  college  work. 


M.  Warren,  Prof,  of  Latin,  Johns 
Hopkins  Univ. :  A  book  of  this  sort, 
conveniently  arranged,  was  much 
needed,  and  it  will,  I  think,  serve  a 
very  good  purpose. 

Henry  S.  Frieze,  Prof,  of  Latin, 
Univ.  of  Mich.  :  It  is  a  very  attrac- 
tive little  book,  containing  multum 
in  parvo,  and  will  be  of  great  assis- 
tance, especially  to  students  who  are 
entering  the  upper  classes  in  school 
and  the  first  classes  in  college.  I  shall 
recommend  its  use  to  students  here. 

Merrill  E.  Gates,  Pres.  Rutgers 
Collin:  The  terse  suggestiveness  of  the 
book  in  arrangement,  definitions,  and 
warnings,  is  its  distinctive  merit.  Pre- 
cisely what  the  admirable  little  preface 
promises  is  done.  I  believe  it  will  do 
much  to  promote  the  careful,  loving, 
intelligent  study  of  Latin, 


T.  B.  Lindsay,  Prof  of  Latin,  Bos- 
ton Univ. :  It  is  a  good  book,  and  I 
shall  recommend  it  to  my  students. 

Edwin  Post,  Prof,  of  Latin,  De 
Pauw  Univ.,  Ind. :  I  must  again  ex- 
press my  approbation  of  it.  It  has  the 
great  merit  of  being  clear  —  a  point  in 
which  the  larger  and  more  pretentious 
books  too  often  lamentably  fail.  I 
have  used  it  with  fifty  or  sixty  students 
during  the  term,  and  with  eminent  sat- 
isfaction. 

Geo.  P.  Hopson,  Prof,  of  Latin, 
St.  Stephen's  College:  It  is  admirably 
done,  and  will,  I  am  sure,  prove  of 
great  service  to  students. 

C.  J.  Hinkel,  Prof  of  Latin,  Vas- 
sar  College  :  I  shall  cordially  recom- 
mend it  to  our  students. 

Samuel  Hart,  Prof  of  Latin, 
Trinity  College :  It  seems  to  be  just 


Ginn  &  Heath's  Classical  Atlas. 

By  A.  Keith  Johnston,  LL.D.,  F.R.G.S.,  aided  by  W,  E.  Gladstone, 
Prime  Minister  of  England.  Contains  also  a  Geography  of  the 
Aucient  World,  prepared  by  W.  F.  Allen  of  the  Univ.  of  Wisconsin. 
Bound  in  full  cloth,  with  guards,  similar  to  Long's  Classical  Atlas 
(7^  X  12  inches).     Mailing  price,  ;?2.30;  Introduction,  ^2.00. 

IVe  would  call  special  attentio7i  to  the  binding  of  the  cloth  edition. 
It  is  mounted  on  guards,  the  binding  thus  costing  about  twice  as 
much  as  that  of  the  English  edition,  and  yet  we  do  not  increase  the 
price  to  the  purchaser.  As  a  book  of  this  kind  is  in  constant  use,  the 
stronger  binding  very  much  enhances  its  value.  . 

Comprising  in  Twenty-three  Plates,  Colored  Maps  and  Plans  of  all 
the  important  countries  and  localities  referred  to  by  Classical  Authors. 
Embodies  the  results  of  the  most  recent  investigations.  Has  a  full 
Index  of  Places,  in  which  the  proper  quantities  of  the  syllables  are 
marked  by  T.  Harvey  and  E.  Worsley,  M.M.A.,  Oxon,  Classical 
Masters  in  Edinburgh  Academy.  Also  containing  Allen's  Geog- 
raphy of  the  Ancient  World,  which  is  designed  to  bring  the 
leading  epochs  and  events  of  ancient  history  into  connection  with 
the  geography  of  the  ancient  world.  Brief  suggestions  to  teachers 
are  added,  to  assist  in  the  work  of  the  class-room. 

'*  It  has  the  special  attraction  of  Mr.  Gladstone's  cooperation, 
who  not  only  placed  at  the  editor's  disposal  the  illustrations  to  his 
work  on  Homer,  but  enhanced  the  favor  by  revising  the  proof-sheets 
of  the  plates  and  text,  as  adapted  for  this  Atlas." — Spectator. 

CONTENTS. 

Map. 

1 .  Plan  of  Rome,  and  Illustrations  of  Classical  Sites. 

2.  The  World  as  known  to  the  Ancients. 

3.  Map  of  the  outer  Geography  of  the  Odyssey. 

4.  Orbis  Terrarum    (et  Orb.   Homeri,   Herodoti,   Democriti,  Strabonis, 

Ptolemaei) . 

5.  Hispania. 

6.  Gallia.  e 

7.  Insulse  Britanicse  (et  Brit.  Strabonis,  Brit.  Ptolemsei,  etc.). 

8.  Germania,  Vindelicia,  Rhsetia,  et  Noricum. 

9.  Pannonia,  Dacia,  Illyricum,  Moesia,  Macedonia,  et  Thracia. 
10.  Italia  Superior  et  Corsica. 

U.  Italia  Inferior,  Sicilia,  et  Sardinia  (et  Campania,  Syracusse,  Roma). 


12.  Imperium  Romanum  (et  Imp.  Rom.  Orient,  et  Occid.). 

13.  Griiecia  (et  Athense,  Marathon,  Therniopylne). 

14.  Peloponnesus,  Attica,  Boeotia,  Phocis,  /Etolia,  et  Acarnania. 

15.  Grsecia  a  Bello  Peloponnesiaco,  usque  ad  Piiilippum  II.  (et  Mantine? 

Leuctra,  Plataea). 

16.  Asia  Minor  (et  Campus  Trojae,  Bosporos,  Troas,-  Ionia,  etc.). 

17.  Syria  et  Palestina  (et  Hierosolyma,  etc.). 

18.  Armenia,  Mesopotamia,  Babylonia,  Assyria  (et  Iter  Xenophontis). 

19.  Regnum  Alexandri  Magni  (et  Granicus,  Issus,  Arbela). 

20.  Persia  et  India  (et  India  Ptolemaei). 

21.  ^gyptus,  Arabia,  et  /Ethiopia  (et  ^gyptus  Inferior). 

22.  Africa  (et  Carthago,  Alexandria,  Numidia  et  Africa  Propria). 

23.  Europe,  showing  the  general  direction  of  the  Barbarian  Inroads  during 

the  Decline  and  Fall  of  the  Roman  Empire. 
Index. 
Allen's  Geography  of  the  Ancient  World. 

Used  at  Eton,  Harrow,  Rugby,  and  other  Prominent  English  Pre- 
paratory Schools  and  Academies.  Also  used  and  recommended  by  such 
Colleges  and  Preparatory  Schools  as  :  — 


Harvard, 

Yale, 

Lafayette, 

Rutg-ers, 

Oberlin, 

Marietta, 

Worcester  Univ. 

Ohio  Wesleyan, 

Hiram, 
Phillips  Exeter  Academy, 
Williston  Seminary, 


Trinity,  Conn., 
Trinity,  N.C., 
N.  W.  University, 
Wesleyan,  111., 
Lake  Forest, 
Wisconsin, 
Beloit, 

Lawrence;  Wis., 
Olivet, 


Hillsdale, 
Dickinson, 
Wesleyan,  Conn., 
Princeton, 
Bates, 
Grinnell, 
Colby, 

Kentucky  Univ., 
Vanderbilt. 
Phillips  Andover  Academy, 
Boston  Latin  Schools,  etc. 


W.  W.  Goodwin,  Prof,  of  Greek, 
Harvard  Univ. :  It  is  a  most  beautiful 
and  highly  useful  work,  and  I  am  glad 
to  see  what  used  to  be  an  expensive 
luxury  brought  within  the  means  of  all 
students  of  the  classics.  {Dec.  2, 1880.) 

Elisha  Jones,  Assf.  Prof,  of  Latin, 
Univ.  of  Mich. :  From  my  cursory  ac- 
quaintance I  have  recommended  it  to 
our  teachers.  The  map  of  the  Home- 
ric Geography  is  a  feature  not  contained 
in  either  of  my  other  atlases,  and  will 
ftid  Homeric  students  greatly. 


Tracy  Peck,  Prof  of  Latin,  Yale 
Coll. :  I  have  heretofore  known  the 
Atlas  sufficiently  well  to  feel  justified  in 
recommending  it  to  inquiring  students. 
{May  9, 1881.) 

S.  R.  Winans,  Tutor  in  Greek, 
Princeton  Coll.,  N.J. :  It  is  superb : 
nothing  to  criticise,  and  everything  to 
commend.  Every  student  of  the  clas- 
sics needs  something  of  the  sort,  and 
this  is  by  all  odds  the  best  of  its  kind- 
{Oct,  4,  £880.) 


Latin  Text-Books. 


.        ^  INTROD.  PRICE. 

Allen  &  Greenough  :  Latin  Grammar ...    $1.12 

Latin  Composition ...      1.12 

Caesar  (four  books,  with  vocabulary) 1.12 

Sallust's  Catiline 60 

Cicero,  13  orations  (or  8  orations  with  vocabulary)    .       1.12 

Cicero  de  Senectute 50 

Ovid  (with  vocabulary) 1.40 

Virgil  (Bucolics  and  6  Books  of  the  ^neid)  ...  1.12 
Preparatory  Course  of  Latin  Prose     ....      1.40 

Allen  .    .    .    Latin  Primer go 

New  Latin  Method go 

Introduction  to  Latin  Composition go 

Latin  Reader 1.40 

Latin  Lexicon go 

Remnants  of  Early  Latin 75 

Germania  and  Agricola  of  Tacitus    ....      i.oo 

Blackburn    .    Essentials  of  Latin  Grammar 70 

Latin  Exercises 60 

Latin  Grammar  and  Exercises  (in  one  volume)  i.oo 
Crowell  .  .  Selections  from  the  Latin  Poets  ...'..  1.40 
Crowell  &  Richardson  :  Brief  History  of  Roman  Lit.  (Bender)  i.oo 
Greenough  .    Virgil:  — 

Bucolics  and  6  Books  of  ^neid  (with  Vocab.)  .  1.60 
Bucolics  and  6  Books  of  ^neid  (without  Vocab.)  1.12 
Last  6  Books  of  .^neid,  and  Georgics  (with  notes)  1.12 
Bucolics,  -ffineid,  &  Georgics  (complete,  with  notes)    1.60 

Text  of  Virgil  (complete) 75 

Vocabulary  to  the  whole  of  Virgil  ....  i.oo 
GINN& Heath:  Classical  Atlas  and  Geography  (cloth)  .    .    .      2.00 

Halsey     .    .    Etymology  of  Latin  and  Greek 1.12 

Classical  Wall  Maps  (three  or  more),  each  .  .  3.50 
Keep     .    .    .    Essential  Uses  of  the  Moods  in  Greek  and  Latin    .25 

King     ...    Latin  Pronunciation 25 

Leighton  .    .    Latin  Lessons 1.12 

Madvig     .     ;    Latin  Grammar  (by  Thacher) 2.25 

Parkhurst  .    Latin  Verb 35 

Parker  &  Preble:  Handbook  of  Latin  Writing 50 

Shumway  .    .    Latin  Synonymes 30 

Stickney  .    .    Cicero  de  Natura  Deorum 1.40 

Tetlow     .    .    Inductive  Latin  Lessons 1.12 

ToMLiNSON    .    Manual  for  the  Study  of  Latin  Grammar  .    .        .20 

White  (J.  W.)   Schmidt's  Rhythmic  and  Metric 2.50 

White  (J.  T.)    Junior  Students'  Latin-English  Lexicon  (mor.)    1.75 

English-Latin  Lexicon  (sheep) 1.50 

Latin-English  and  English-Latin  Lexicon  (sheep)  3.00 

Whiton    .     .     Auxilia  Vergiliana ;  or,  First  Steps  in  Latin  Prosody    .15 

Six  Weeks'  Preparation  for  Reading  Csesar    .      .35 

Copies  sent  to  Teachers  for  Examination,  with  a  view  to  Introduction, 
on  receipt  of  Introduction  Price. 


Send  for  description  of  our  new  Illustrated  Caesar  (seven  books). 


GINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers, 

Boston,  New  York,  and  Chicago. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OP  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


JAN  18  194t 


MAR  28  1944 


.IAN  20  194t 


^Kf: 


I  -,  -i^^u 


& 


^%* 


■nil    5    1944 


0  0ct'4ycs 


SEP  88  1941 


'^''^W^^ 


JUL  27   V^l-  . 


^8    19S4LU 


^io^ 


W 


J942 


^ 


M 


NOV   18  i942. 


JtiL   28  10... 


ciPfijLiuasi 


•^^^  26  1944 


LD21-100m-7,'39( 


YB  0054 


\ 


/■ 


984579 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


